PROJECT EARTH, A REPORT. (20-29) --- 1200+ entries --- xxx "pages"

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1956 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
The Ten Commandments; Anastasia; The Eddie Dutchin Story; Picnic; The Kettles in the Ozarks; The Forbidden Planet; Away All Boats; D-Day; The Great Locomotive Chase; The Man in the Gray Flannel Suit; Miracle in the Rain; The Sixth of June

Songs:
Heartbreak Hotel; I Want, I Need, I Love You; Hound Dog; Don't Be Cruel; Love Me Tender; My Prayer; Only You; The Great Pretender; Singing the Blues; Whatever Will Be, Will Be; Canadian Sunset; Allegheny Moon; I Almost Lost My Mind; Memories are Made of This; Heartbreak Hotel; I Walk The Line; I Was The One; My Lips are Sealed; There You Go; I Want You, I Need You; Blue Suede Shoes.

General News:
North and South Vietnam were granted their independence from France in July.
The Ed Sullivan Show and The $64,000 Question are the top rated TV shows.
Other TV favourites:
The Perry Como Show; I Love Lucy; The Red Skelton Show; Disneyland; December Bride; Talent Scouts; You Bet Your Life.
American prosperity is mirrored in the growth of the automobile industry.
The newest wonder in U.S. industry becomes the transistor.

"Prosperity psychology" grips the USA as ads plug the "two-car family".

Norma Jeane Baker (Marilyn Monroe) completes her sixth movie with a firm image.
Elvis Aaron Presley, a truck driver turned singer, becomes a media hit at 21.
Nikita Krushchev praises and condemns Stalin for his leadership and paranoia.

January, 1956
Devices are being implanted by the GRAYS into humans, exclusively adults at this time.
Kidnapping, dismemberment and surgical experimentation on humans had revealed what was desired and was now increasing government annoyance and threatening to alert and frighten average humans. The implants would be one of two versions; each would be placed in proximity to, but not touching the pituitary gland in the centre of the skull and resting within the lower perimeter of the brain.
It should be remembered her that the GRAYS are NOT of animal origin, and, while significantly advanced in their knowledge of the universe, interstellar travel, positive settlement and lifestyle for themselves, and, forms of technology which humans cannot conceive of in their fantasies - they derive from an insect heritage. Consequently, their knowledge of and respect for human and animal physiology and identity, at this point, are only slightly elevated to that of human appreciation for insects. In large part, humans -
1. Are frightened, disgusted, and annoyed by insects; 2. Insects have lived on the Earth 400+ X longer than humans; 3. Insects are more varied, adaptable, and hardy than humans; 4. The reflex action of many modern humans is to kill insects; 5. 75% of the species on the Earth are insects (30 million kinds); 6. Humans will be familiar with only a few 1000 species by 1996; 7. Humans routinely kill, preserve, dissect and mount insects; 8. Most human technology has been developed over 100 years; 9. Insects had 400 million years of development BEFORE humans.

The GRAYS quickly recognize the benefits of using hypnotic "animal magnetism" as an effective means of controlling humans with fear reduction, post-hypnotic, and, persuasion-deception-manipulation techniques. This process requires more patience, time, and effort than the former "retrieve and dissect" missions; the rewards are now more relevant for them.
At this point, the GRAYS have been surveilling the Earth long enough to have made the following decisions:

A. They can adapt to the Earth's environment, with mutation; B. Humans are too self-obsessed to present serious opposition; C. The powerful Pleiadian options have been rejected by humans; D. Humans appear to provide the best gene pool for mutation; E. Primary importance is to synthesize a viable cross-species; F. Self-destructiveness by humans needs close examination; G. The successful adaptation cannot be self-limiting by war; H. Implants would enable monitoring, tracking, enslavement.

Insect species seldom kill or devour members of their own species.
Individual members of insect species will sacrifice themselves automatically if such actions lead to the safety and preservation of the society, nest, city. Insects have exoskeletons (cosmic and heat radiation protection) and the capability of intermittent breathing (protection in noxious environments). Insects do not possess what humans understand as emotions, intellectualization, morals, compassion or empathy.
Even more direct in lifestyle response than reptiles, insects follow genetically transfered behavioural patterns, utilize highly effective and specialized patterned "intelligence", and, have the capacity to modify these "patterns" if presented with problems, difficulty, or failure. A good verbalization of their "intellect" is: "Do what you have done in the past and knows works; if that fails, try something else - until you find a successful approach; record the new and successful behaviour, design, or appearance in your genetic library."

Once a GRAY-human hybrid colony could be established which was proven NOT to possess those genes which appeared to promote ... undependability (individuality), lack of species loyalty (intra-species murder), erratic behaviours (negative emotions), and waste (of food, resources, energy) - then, humans could be "modified" and enslaved, or, eliminated - either by manipulating them into doing it themselves, or, by a slight "adjustment" in the ecology.
The implant target of the pituitary gland was chosen for several facts: a) Inaccessible to humans for detection or removal; b) Proximity to "thought"-awareness nerve transmissions; c) Protected from destruction or loss unless subject dies; d) Major hormonal control centre for humans; e) Humans know little about their brain structure or hormones.

Control the human pituitary gland and you can exert control over what the individual feels, sees, hears, thinks - and, whether they remember or forget, become ill or stay healthy, are flexible or obsessive in selection of activities, socialize or robotize, are conscious or asleep, live or die. The pituitary is the broadcast tower between the basic structures of the human brain and the subsystems and individual cells of the human body. It is here that the messages of the brain can be toned up or down by external interference as well as by malfunction.
Toning the pituitary function down immediately gets the attention of most humans.
They can become chronically weak and tired, impotent, slow in sexual development, susceptible to illness, growth for height can slow or stop, low blood pressure may drain one's sense of ambition and aggressiveness. The opposite malfunction too often simply appeals to the vanity and pride of individual and group humans. The choice of which tactic to follow would have been quickly determined. So subtle, so simple, so effective.

The sensors used would provide real-time immediate transmission to any GRAY receiving station located within 1000 miles. The sensors were designed quickly. The GRAYS are concerned with what works. There is no concern for the sophistication of the tool or its mode of activation beyond that point of "Does it work?" Organic material was utilized for its benefit of non-detection, cleanness of signal, reduced option of biological rejection. For humans at this time, the concept of microminiature sensors, implants, and organic material broadcasting -- were beyond imagination. Mistakes would be made in early subjects: their fear would not be adequately controlled; their residual memory of the abduction examination and implantation procedure would be too complete; their memory of their abductors would almost blow the whole operation. There was a saving grace: human authoritarian civilization itself.
Those with recall-memories were so totally unprepared to cope with such new revelations that they experienced severe mental confusion (nervous breakdown) which was only perpetuated by the rejection of their caregivers. Those who failed to escape insanity became statistics: alcoholics, road accident fatalities, suicides, institutionalized schizophrenics, paranoid delusionals, or, catatonic. Those who had escaped insanity and spoke the truth were lobotomized, given shock treatment, or permanently dazed into oblivion with drugs. Insectoid extraterrestrials "learn" quickly. Unattached to previous methodologies by persuasion, intellectualization, emotional commitment, ego expression, or, moral correctness - the GRAYS simply, directly, and immediately modified the procedure until it worked. In all, perhaps 4500 human subjects were lost - mostly adults. But the sensors kept performing - in new subjects.

There were factors involved with the implantation procedure.
The GRAYS possessed the technology to dissociate and recombine molecular densities of forms such that their own bodies and those of their subjects could be "floated" through physical walls, permitting abduction without the danger of detection by the use of hallways, stairways, doors and windows. Also, it was simply more direct to take a straight path to the onboard examination room than the normal roundabout human method. But the implantation of the "sensor" could not be effected in the same manner: there was then a potential for strands of the organic device to become "entangled" in the tissues of the person. That would make removal of the device much more difficult and time consuming; it would also reduce the transmission clarity of the sensor as well as its ability to receive signals. The devices had to be placed physically.
The nose and nasal cavity provided access almost all the way to to the target.
A small amount of tissue would have to be penetrated for the final placement only; bone was not in the way. That final part of the placement would be painful - but so what, these were only humans. Surgery was out of the question: it would leave noticeable evidence and removal or exchange would be complicated. A professional spy does not close off the means for escape. This was an experiment. Humans performed much more grotesque procedures on all forms of life in their laboratories: thousands each year were imprisoned, injected, cut open, hooked up to electrodes, sampled, ... eventually, after days or months of torture - murdered. Absolutely barbaric. The GRAYS didn't imprison, were no longer dissecting or cutting open, and only subjected their a few of the participants to pain for a matter of seconds. But the potential blood loss afterwards in the form of a bad nosebleed was considered "unfortunate."

The severe nocturnal nosebleed, frequently but not always present in the first implanting procedure for a human subject, would be the singular most easily identifiable symptom which could draw suspicion to the event. If it occurred, the person would wake up with pillow and bedclothes or bedlinen soiled. With some individuals, the nosebleed would happen later - the disrupted tissues re-ruptured by hard exertion or a forceful sneeze or blowing of the nose. The incident would almost always be dismissed as unfortunate but not unexplainable in rationalizations. Longer-term effects would develop for many over the years that lay ahead. Disruption of the nasal membrane and passage would encourage the chronic development of sinus infections, cold-like symptoms and respiratory allergies. This would sometimes result, especially later when children became subjects, in the person developing a habit of "mouth-breathing" such that they seldom breathed through their nose whether they were awake or asleep.
Physiologically, the individual's life system simply learned that the immune-enhancing protective filtering nasal passages were usually blocked or restricted and the mouth and throat were not. Such chronic symptoms could often take years to become manifest. Humans are prone to adapt to such slow changes through a process of awareness denial. By the time the symptoms have become clearly evident, the individual has usually rationalized why they have them, or, the institutionalized medical profession has. Heredity has proven to be a good excuse, uh, diagnosis. And, advantageously for the GRAYS, the human destruction of their own atmospheric reality provided real justification for such chronic symptoms to develop.

Beyond these minor difficulties, the sensors would prove effective.
GRAYS could transmit "motivating" signals to the subject. The sensors were signalled to vibrate the tissues in the vicinity of the pituitary, effectively stimulating its production of certain hormones dependent upon vibratory frequency, intensity, persistency, and, time of day. Symptoms of intermittent, or continual, stimulation of the pituitary could result in any or a combination of these and other behaviours: increased or obsessive or fluctuating sex drive irrespective of sexual partner access; a feeling of strength and energy when the bodily system(s) were actually compromised (leading to allergy and sensitivity formation as a result of obsessive or addictive behaviours); premature development of primary and secondary sexual characteristics (menstruation, breast development, testes maturity). There could be a tendency to tan or sunburn more easily than previously. Higher blood pressure, higher level of anxiety and degree of hyperactivity, and a tendency towards hypoglycemic development by increased sugary foods all became possible, unless offsetting skills and habits happened to be chosen and developed by the human subject. Most of these "symptoms" would be regarded in North American and European cultures as "positive" and would receive little if any attention.

1956 - On January 2,
General Motors President, Harlow Herbert Curtice is made "Man of the Year" by Time magazine to honour the sale of 5,000,000 automobiles in the USA in 1955. More than half of the number had been manufactured by General Motors. Curtice had believed that the auto would make big sales in 1955 because of USA demographics: growing population; growing bank accounts; growing suburbs; decentralizing industry; a consumer attitude supported by, and encouraged by marketing campaigns, that the boom would continue. Population statistics projected an additional 1,000,000 new families each year at the 1955 rate for the USA. The two-car family had become a status symbol before the end of the year.

1956 - During the year
"The Exploration of Mars" by Willy Ley and Werhner von Braun was published by Viking, New York.

1956 - In January
the President's Board of Consultants on Foreign Intelligence Activities (PBCFIA) was set up by President Eisenhower to head off closer scrutiny of intelligence gathering activities. It was composed of retired senior military and intelligence officials, ambassadors, secretaries to the military, president of the Council on Foreign Relations and others. It made administrative recommendations which were seldom carried out including criticism of Allen Dulles handling of the C.I.A.
John F. Kennedy would change the name and composition of the Board after the Bay of Pigs affair.

Members would include:
General Omar Bradley General John E. Hull General James Doolittle David Bruce, Ambassador William B. Franke, secretary of the Navy Henry Wriston, President of the Council on Foreign Relations Admiral Sidney Souers, First Director of Central Intelligence; Executive Secretary of the National Security Council Edward Teller, proponent and inventor of the hydrogen bomb Edwin H. Land, engineer and president of Polaroid Camera Dr. William O. Baker, electronics communications expert; Vice-President in charge of research at Bell Laboratories Nelson A. Rockefeller, psychological warfare and Latin American politics John Connolly, governor of Texas and a "can-do" man Clare Boothe Luce, Ambassador Robert W. Galvin, chairman of Motorola Leo Cherne, authority on refugees; Research Institute of America James R. Killian, Jr., president of M.I.T. renown for resourcefulness and others

1956 - During January
A Group of Chilean Scientists observe 2 cigar-shaped UFOs for 2 days off Robertson Island, Antarctica, where they are participating in the 2nd International Geophysical Year 1956-58 expedition.

1956 - During January
a Third Letter from Carl M. Allen (Carlos Allende) was received by Morris Ketchum Jessup.
It continued:
"Notes in addition to and pertaining to Missive.
(Contact Rear Admiral Rawson Bennett for verification of info Herein.
Navy Chief of Research. He may offer you a job, ultimately.)
Coldly and analytically speaking, without the Howling that is in the Letter to you accompanying this, I will say the following in all Fairness to you & to Science. (1) The Navy did Not know that the men could become invisible WHILE NOT UPON THE SHIP & UNDER THE FIELDS INFLUENCE. (2) The Navy Did Not know that there would be Men Die from odd effects of HYPER 'Field' within or upon 'Field.' (3) Further, They even yet do Not know Why this happened & are not even sure that the 'F' within 'F' is the reason, for sure at all. In Short The Atomic bomb didn't kill the experimenters thus the experiments went on - but eventually one or two were accidentally killed. But the cause was known as to Why they died. Myself, I 'feel' that something pertaining to that Small-boat compass 'triggered' off 'The Flames.' I have no proof, but Neither Does the Navy. (4) WORSE & Not Mentioned When one or two of their Men, Visible-within-the-field-to-all-others, Just Walked into Nothingness, AND Nothing Could be felt, of them, either when the 'field' Was turned on OR off, THEY WERE JUST GONE! The, More Fears Were Amassed. (5) Worse, Yet, When an apparently Visible & New-Man Just walks seemingly 'throo' the Wall of his House, the surrounding area Searched by all Men & thoroughly scrutinized by & with & under an Installed Portable Field developer AND NOTHING EVER found of him. So Many Many Fears were by then in effect that the Sum total of them all could Not ever again be faced by ANY of those Men or by the Men Working at & upon the Experiments.

I wish to Mention that Somehow, also, The Experimental Ship Disappeared from its Philadelphia Dock and only a Very few Minutes Later appeared at its other Dock in the Norfolk, Newport News, Portsmouth area. This was distinctly AND clearly Identified as being that place BUT the ship then, again, Disappeared And Went Back to its Philadelphia Dock in only a Very few Minutes or Less. This was noted in the newspapers But I forget what paper I read it in or When It happened. Probably Late in the experiments, May have been in 1946 after Experiments were discontinued, I can Not Say for Sure.
To the Navy this Whole thing was So Impractical due to its Morale Blasting effects Which were so much so that efficient operation of the Ship was Drastically hindered and then after this occurrence It was shown that even the Mere operation of a ship could Not be counted upon at all. In short, Ignorance of this thing bred Such Terrors of it that, on the Level of attempted operations, with what knowledge was then available It was deemed as impossible, Impracticable and Too Horrible.

I believe that Had YOU then been Working upon & With the team that was Working upon this project With yourself knowing what You NOW know, that 'The Flames' Would Not have been so unexpected, or Such a Terrifying Mystery, Also, More than Likely, I must say in All fairness, None of these other occurrences could have happened without some knowledge of their possibility of occurring. In fact, They May have been prevented by a far More Cautiously careful Selection of Personnel for Ships officers & Crew. Such was not the case. The Navy used whatever Human Material was at hand, Without Much, if any, thought as to character & Personality of that Material. If care, Great Care is taken in selection of Ship, and officers and crew AND If Careful Indoctrination is taken along with Careful watch over articles of apparel Such as rings & Watches & Identification bracelets & belt buckles, Plus AND ESPECIALLY the effect of Hob-Nailed shoes or Cleated-shoes U.S. Navy issue shoes, I feel that some progress towards dissipating the fearfilled ignorance surrounding this project Will be Most surely & certainly accomplished. The Records of the U.S. Maritime Service HOUSE Norfolk, Va (for Graduated Seamen of their Schools) Will reveal Who was assigned to S.S. Andrew Furuseth for Month of either Late Sept. or Oct. of 1943. I remember positively of one other observer who stood beside Me When tests were going on. He was from New England, Brown Blond Curly Hair, blue eyes, Don't remember Name. I leave it up to you to Decide if further Work shall be put into this or Not, and Write this in Hopes that there Will be.
Very Sincerely,
Carl M. Allen"

Several aspects should be noted from this letter by Allen/Allende. He:
1. continues to use the idiosyncratic punctuation style;
2. expresses the ignorance and desperation of such experimentation;
3. notes the lack of attention to longer-term consequences which had and would continue to typify human rationally constructed projects;
4. correctly notes the potential for antenna-like effects being derived from specifically shaped objects;
5. describes accurately how terrorizing fears within an authority structured bureaucracy are magnified through ignorance to promote a concealment of the truth;
6. intuitively defines why many forms of interstellar travel are inappropriate for most humans: degree of spiritual development required.

1956 - During February
Nikita Krushchev addresses the U.S.S.R. Twentieth Party Congress.
He described and lamented the abuses of Joseph Stalin, and of Beria and his associates being careful to link the abuses to the individuals and not the system nor the police as an institution. In the congress he stressed the unique relationships between the party and the police and pointed out that the party and state control had been established. This was the beginning of the theme that played up the KGB as the most faithful servant of the party, its "shield and sword". This fused relationship was actually nothing new. It had been established by Lenin and Dzerzhinskiy and it had made it easy for Stalin to savage the party and utilize the police as a personal instrument. Despite the repentances at the Congress, neither Khrushchev nor Serov (the KGB chief) could say they were innocent in the injustices which had preceded. KGB directors historically have come from the Central Committee secretariat, a similarity to the appointment of the CIA director. Krushchev essentially had a CIA with a National Security Agency directly responsible to him with the "national security" rationale to cover their covert activities.

1956 - During February
A huge burst of Sunspot Activity occurs.

1956 - During February
"Operation Big City" was carried out in New York City by the U.S. Army.
A Ford Mercury automobile was modified so that bacteria could be expelled into the air through the exhaust system as the car was driven through the streets of Manhattan. Other Defense Department researchers entered subways and dispersed bacteria there also. Both incidents were to test for the rapidity with which biological weapons could be disbursed in urban areas. Over a period of more than 15 years, 30 such trials would be conducted in major American cities by American researchers. They had begun as early as 1951.

1956 - On February 19
Radar at Orly Airport, near Paris, France, tracked UFO travelling at speeds of 2,250 miles per hour.

1956 - On February 27
The natural gas bill was vetoed by American President Dwight Eisenhower who stated:
"I am unable to approve (the bill).
This I regret because I am in accord with its basic objectives. ... since the passage of this bill, a body of evidence has accumulated indicating that private persons, apparently representing only a very small segment of a great and vital industry, have been seeking to further their own interests by highly questionable activities. These include efforts that I deem to be so arrogant and so much in defiance of acceptable standards of propriety as to risk creating doubt among the American people concerning the integrity of government processes."

Eisenhower, the authoritarian paternal leader, spoke in generalities to "protect" his voters from the reality of which he spoke; it also protected him from public support, or, criticism of his decision or his value system. Lyndon Johnson, Texas Senator and Senate majority leader, and Sam Rayburn, House majority leader had pushed the bill through the legislature. Because Eisenhower was not open and specific with the media about his objections, unhappy Democrats accused him of using his veto and idealistic words to signal that he had decided to run for re-election.

1956 -
The USAF begin participation in the ZIP (High Energy Boron) "BLACK" high security research project.
Its share of participation receives $135,800,000 to provide delivery and testing of a beam weapon inspired by alien technology. The program is "cancelled" in 1959 so as to sever government bureaucratic involvement. A cancelled program cannot be audited or questioned and the "unsatisfactory" results can be "discarded".

1956 - On March 12
It becomes public that the U.S.S.R. is taking action to take control of the seas from the U.S. Navy.
The U.S.S.R. is building 50 to 60 submarines a year, and now has an in-service fleet of more than 400 submarines: almost 4 times as many as the U.S.A. The U.S. Navy has announced plans to build the first atom-powered, guided missile submarine, beginning the construction this year.

1956 - In mid March
First Party Secretary Nikita Krushchev of the USSR, at a secret session of the 20th Congress of the Communist Party in Moscow spoke for 3 hours about the oppression by Joseph Stalin. In the early days, Stalin had been a devoted and truly great servant of the party, and in the decade after Lenin's death (1924) his leadership Krushchev considered indispensable. But in the last 19 years of his life Stalin had done enormous harm to the Party, the Soviet Union and the Soviet people. A drastic change had then come over Stalin - a "phobia" about treachery - and he had never been the same afterward. Krushchev went on to deliver a devastating indictment of what the congress in open session had heard described as Stalin's "20 years of dictatorship and lies." Stalin had contrived and falsified evidence against Party members whom he (in most cases wrongly) conceived to be his enemies. He murdered hundreds of old Bolsheviks, including 70 out of 133 members of the Central Committee in 1937. He had tortured people in order to wring confessions out of them. Even children had been tortured, said Krushchev.
Stalin had placed complete faith in his pact with Hitler in 1939 and scorned warnings from Soviet diplomats in Berlin and from Britain's Churchill, that Hitler was about to attack Russia in June 1941. Stalin had erected memorials to himself all over Russia, including a Stalin statue at the entrance of the Volga-Don Canal, on which 35 tons of precious copper had been used. In his last days, Stalin had become paranoic. Krushchev said: "We never knew, when we entered Stalin's presence, whether we would come out alive." When asked why he didn't kill Stalin, Krushchev answered: "What could we do? There was a reign of terror." The end had seemed to justify the means.

On a continent where the terror of human domination over and cruelty towards other humans had been a historical reality for over 1100 years, the survivors had learned to be followers, take orders, and forget about justice or dignity. In a land in which everyone had blood on their hands for taking part in or looking the other way to allow the centuries of carnage, there had emerged a ruthless leader. Like many of his countrymen, he began by carrying out the immoralities asked of him by his superiors in expectation that some day the ideal of a just society would emerge.
He intellectualized that the ruthlessness and deaths of the short-term would enable the emergence of an orderly peaceful obedient union of diverse peoples in the long-term. But once he had participated in atrocities and injustices as a means to an end, he had erected a wall of distrust, vengeance and hatred against him. His only protection was the "sacrifice" of the "intellectuals" and just and honest followers who knew what he had done and might someday bring him to trial. That left the moral mercenaries, who for security or gain would trade their loyalty to whomever held their favour. They too must die. No one to trust. No safety. Enemies everywhere. Stalin had, with the assistance of the humans in contact with him, created a hell-on-Earth, for himself and many others.

1956 - During March
Jonathan P. Lovette, a USAF Sgt., E-6 classification, was abducted at the White Sands Missile Test Range in New Mexico. The event was witnessed by Major William Cunningham of the USAF Missile Command from nearby Holloman AFB.
Both were out in a field downrange from the launch site looking for debris from a missile test failure. Sgt. Lovette went over a ridge of a small sand dune and was out of sight to Cunningham for a time. Major Cunningham then heard Sgt. Lovette scream in what was described later as terror or agony. The Major, thinking that Lovette had been bitten by a snake or something ran over the ridge to see Sgt. Lovette being dragged into what appeared to him to be a silvery disc-like object which hovered in the air about 15 to 20 feet off the ground. There appeared to be a long snake-like form wrapped around the sergeant's legs dragging him into the craft. Admittedly, the Major froze as the Sgt. was taken into the craft and as it ascended very quickly into the sky. Major Cunningham quickly returned to his jeep and used the radio to report the incident to Missile Control whereupon Missile Control confirmed a radar sighting. Search parties went into the desert looking for Sgt. Lovette. Major Cunningham's report was taken and he was admitted to the White Sands Base Dispensary for observation.
The search for Sgt. Lovette continued for 3 days at the end of which his nude body was found approximately 10 miles downrange. It appeared to have been mutilated: the tongue had been removed; an incision had been made just below the tip of the chin and extended all the way back to the oesophagus and the larynx; the eyes and genitals had been removed; the anus had been removed. Comments in the report indicated that a "plug" of flesh had been removed from the genitalia and anal areas with an apparent surgical skill. There was no sign of blood within the system and the initial autopsy report indicated that there was no sign of vascular collapse, as would be found if death had resulted from bleeding.

This was unusual because in any human body where death has resulted from a loss of blood or where a complete loss of blood is found, there is vascular collapse. Also, a number of predatory birds were found near the body and indicated that they had died after trying to partake of the Sgt's body. The body had obviously been exposed to the weather elements for several days. It is noteworthy that the daily temperatures in this area at this time of year are extremely hot and the rocky soil and lack of vegetative overgrowth intensify the effect of the heat. A number of grotesque black and white photographs were included in the report. William S. English first publicly presented a summary of the original report in 1987.
Major Cunningham was initially charged with the murder of Sgt. Lovette; the charges were later dropped. There had been at least 10 of these types of abduction and mutilation events and most had occurred near missile test ranges. On numerous occasions, again at least 10, a UFO had been tracked alongside of a fired missile; in one instance, the UFO actually took a missile on board while it was in flight. While these instances certainly increased the paranoia of the missile development and associated armed forces security staff, it did not halt the missile development programs. Incidents like the abduction-mutilation of Sgt. Lovette led to the creation of Project Grudge and its general application to all spacebeings and all abductions - another frequent human reaction - generalize and retaliate.

1956 - On April 7
Mrs. Elizabeth Klarer sees a flying saucer land near her home in Natal, South Africa.
She communicates with the occupant and takes a ride in the spacecraft.

1956 - In May
The U.S.A. ignores the Geneva accords of 1954 regarding southeast Asia by sending 350 additional military men to Saigon, South Vietnam, under the pretext of helping the Vietnamese recover and redistribute equipment abandoned by the French. These men were officially designated the Temporary Equipment Recovery Mission or TERM, yet they stayed on as a permanent part of the Military Assistance Advisory Group (MAAG) to help in intelligence and administrative work.
The U.S.A. administration dispatched the TERM group "when it learned informally that the Indian Government would instruct its representative on the I.C.C. to interpose no objection." The I.C.C. is composed of representatives from Poland, India and Canada: India is usually considered the neutral representative.

1956 - By May
Elvis Aaron Presley, a 21-year-old truck driver turned singer becomes known nationally in the USA for his rock n' roll music and stage style.

1956 - Dated May 25
Another Letter from Carlos Allende (Carl Allen) is received by Morris Ketchum Jessup.
In part he wrote:
"... You ask me for (evidence) ... I could NEVER possibly satisfy such an attitude. The reason being that I could not, Nor ever would the Navy Research Dept. (The under the present boss of the Navy, Burke) ever let it be known that any such thing was ever allowed to be done. For you see It was because of Burke's Curiosity & Willingness & prompting that this experiment was enabled to be carried out. It proved a White-elephant but His attitude towards advanced and ultra-advanced types of research is just 'THE' THING that put him where he is today. (Or at least to be sure, It carries a great weight.) Were the stench of such an Experiments results EVER to come out, He would be crucified. ...
However, I have noticed, that throo the ages, those who have had this happen to them, once the vulgar passions that caused the reaction have cooled-off AND further research OPENLY carried on, that these crucified ones achieve something akin to Saint hood. ... I can be of some positive help to you in myself but to do so would require a Hypnotist, Sodium Pentothal, a tape recorder & an excellent typist-secretary in order to produce material of Real value to you.

As you know one who is both hypnotised cannot Lie and one who is both hypnotized AND given 'Truth serum' ... COULD NOT POSSIBLY LIE, AT ALL. To boot, My Memory would be THUS enabled to remember things in such great detail, things that my present consciousness cannot recall at all, or barely and uncertainly that it would be of far greater benefit to use hypnosis. I could thus be enabled to not only Recall COMPLETE Names, but also addresses & telephone numbers AND perhaps the very important Z numbers of those sailors whom I sailed with them or even came into contact with. I could too, being something of a Dialectician, be able to thusly talk exactly as these witnesses talked and imitate or illustrate their Mannerisms & Habits of thought, thus your psychologists can figure IN ADVANCE the Surefire method of dealing Most Successfully with these. I could NOT do this with someone with whom I had not observed at length & these men, I lived with for about 6 months, so you are bound to get good to excellent results. The mind does NOT ever forget, Not really, As you know. Upon this I suggest this way of doing this with Myself but further, the Latter usage of Myself but further, ....
It is my belief that were, Not the Navy, but the Airforce, confronted with such evidence, (IE Chief of Research) there would be either an uproar or a quiet and determined effort to achieve SAFELY 'that which' the Navy failed at. They did NOT fail to, I hope you realize, achieve Metallic & organic invisibility nor did they fail to, unbesoughtedly, achieve transportation of thousands of tons of Metal & Humans at an eye's blink speed. Even though this latter effect of prolonged experimentation was (to them) The thing that caused them to consider the experiment as a failure, I BELIEVE THAT FURTHER EXPERIMENTS WOULD NATURALLY HAVE PRODUCED CONTROLLED TRANSPORT OF GREAT TONNAGES AT ULTRA-FAST SPEEDS TO A DESIRED POINT THE INSTANT IT IS DESIRED throo usage of an area covered by: (1) those cargoes and (2) that 'Field' that could cause those goods, Ships or Ship parts (MEN WERE TRANSPORTED AS WELL) to go to another Point. Accidentally & to the embarrassed perplexity of the Navy THIS HAS ALREADY HAPPENED TO A WHOLE SHIP, CREW & ALL. I read of this AND of THE OFF-BASE AWOL ACTIVITIES OF THE crew-Men who were at the time invisible in a Philadelphia NEWSPAPER. UNDER NARCO-HYPNOSIS I CAN BE ENABLED TO DIVULGE THE NAME, DATE & SECTION & PAGE NUMBER of that Paper & the other one. ... Once on this track, I believe That you can uncover CONSIDERABLY MORE evidence to sustain this, ---- (what would you call it -- SCANDAL or DISCOVERY?) You would Need a Dale Carnegie to Maneuver these folks into doing just as you wish. .... The Idea Is, to the Layman type of person, utterly ridiculous. However, can you remember, all by yourself, the Date of a Newspaper in which you saw an interesting item more than 5 years ago? Or recall names of Men, their phone #s that you saw in 1943-44.

I do hope you will consider this plan.
You will Progress as Not possible in any other way. ... THE ULTIMATE END WILL BE A TRUTH TOO HUGE, TOO FANTASTIC, TO NOT BE TOLD. A WELL FOUNDED TRUTH, BACKED UP BY UNOBFUSCATIVE PROOF POSITIVE. ... I, as first subject, Don't care to be Hypnotized at all. But too, feel that certain pull of curiosity about this thing that, to me, is irresistible. I want to crack this thing wide open. My reasons are simply to enable more work to be done upon this 'Field Theory.'
... IF HANDLED PROPERLY, I.E. PRESENTED TO PEOPLE & SCIENCE IN THE PROPER PSYCHOLOGICALLY EFFECTIVE MANNER, I feel sure that Man will go where He now dreams of being - to the stars via the form of transport that the Navy accidentally stumbled upon (to their embarrassment) when their EXP. SHIP took off .... Perhaps already, the Navy has used this accident of transport to build your UFO's It is a logical advance from any standpoint. What do you think ???
VERY RESPECTFULLY
Carl Allen"

Jessup had no background in engineering (the real utilization of known and suspected truths); astrophysics was still largely a theoretical endeavour (intellectualization of possibilities of explanation of reality) with no practical application (aerospace). Jessup was searching for (status quo) "acceptable" "scientific" explanations of UFOs. The increasing bulk of observer reports and interviews pointed to extraterrestrial sources for UFOs, not human ones. With the military background of Jessup and the coercive nationalism of the USA, which discriminated against anyone who seemed possible to support Communism - anyone who supported humanistic ideals of sharing, compassion, equality, ... - the last possibility which Jessup would have wanted to entertain was that of a conspiracy by his own government against its own citizens.
If, as Allen states, he was working for the Navy in 1943-44 on an "Above Top Secret" classified research project, then his openness about the project now, before the 30-year+ legal restriction expired - made him guilty of treason. Could Jessup place his faith and support behind a man who could be convicted of treason and who asserted that the American government was itself guilty of treason - in order to "prove" that UFOs were of human origin? These suggestions were all too fantastic for Jessup who had a drawer full of abduction and close encounter reports which were certainly not mediated by human authorities. Several points can be noted here, nonetheless: Allen/Allende
1. accurately displays electromagnetic overexposure/trauma induced symptoms of hypersensitivity: intense emotions, hyperactivity; 2. continues to express himself with the punctuation of intense expression: overuse of capitalization and underlining of text; 3. correctly notes the historical pattern of the persecution of reactionary thinkers by status quo authorities; 4. mirrors the popular assumption of the times that the results of hypnosis are accurate and infallible; 5. correctly notes that the mind remembers all but does not recognize that the mind can be "modified" to forget; 6. recognizes that the creation of the USAF, AFTER WWII, makes it the logical centre of research and use of such technology; 7. betrays his almost complete ignorance (along with most other persons of the time, scientists especially) of UFO "contact" reports.

The symptoms he expresses highly suggest a real exposure to high strength electromagnetic fields during a negative stress experience or set of same. These symptoms and the chronic hypersensitivity involved would not be recognized until the late 1980s. Status quo medical authorities would never acknowledge them.
The capitalization and underlining of many words and phrases serves to aptly illustrate 2 factors.
First, to the author, the words so treated hold a special significance as to their correctness and importance. In status quo text, very words are afforded special treatment beyond that necessary for regular orderliness and punctuation: most words are treated as of equally significant or insignificant value; the logic of the text is supposed to convey intellectually to the reader what the significance of the words, as concepts, are.
To the intense communicator, the significance is HIGH and NOW; it cannot wait until you the reader figures it out; nor can the importance FELT by the intense person be presumed to be communicated in any other manner. Secondly, the written portrayal of the intense feelings of the author serves as a valve to dissipate the energy behind those feelings; otherwise, the FELT importance of the information - directly proportional to the degree of trauma experienced originally and through non-expression since - makes somewhat coherent expression impossible.

Hypnosis, from the time when the state was first defined and described, has received little understanding from the public. Non-medical, non-therapeutic and inaccurate portrayals of its benefits and uses through circus entertainments and dramatic imagination have conveyed to the majority of persons familiar with the word a totally fantasy and deception-based image. The more specific realities of this state and its use would not become evident, or available, to the public until the late 1960s, and, particularly, until the late 1980s. Even then, most persons would shun the reality for the fantasy.
Hypnosis is a state of mind in which the perception of a human subject is focused, by oneself or by a hypnotist, onto a particular event or period of time. Looking at a map or a forest, one may perceive a great many aspects of the surrounding reality; however, the significance of a particular dot on the map or of a specific tree in the forest is lost. Now, if one is directed to focus one's attention on a particular area of the map and look for a specific feature, or, to focus one's attention on a specific tree in the forest - a great many individual realities may be further noticed by the individual than were possible with a wider field of view. In hypnosis, the surrounding features of one's experience and perceptiveness are excluded, progressively, until the reality of the individually targeted object becomes clearly perceived - apart from the whole.

Accuracy of the revealed perception is dependent on a number of factors.
In addition to the true reality involved, perceptions may be skewed by the attitude of the hypnotist and the questions presented in an effort to target the subject's recall or visualization. An aggressive interviewer who in any way conveys signs of acceptance or disbelief or expectation to the subject over a long period of time, either a long session or a long series of sessions, will often obtain the response desired by the interviewer. This occurs because the subject wishes to maintain a meditative harmony of calmness and openness with the hypnotist and the expression of the hypnotist has broken that bond by introducing negative attitudes.
Allen/Allende proposes to strengthen the accuracy of the hypnotic sessions by the concurrent use of truth serum drugs. Whether in a state of hypnosis or under the influence of truth serum drugs, whatever the subject believes has occurred - that is what will be remembered as fact. No allowance is made for acts of deception, manipulation, traumatic suggestion, and other factors which are commonly used in political linguistics, disinformation programs, crowd-induced perceptions, the movie industry, holograms, and status quo educational programs. How many times have you accepted a piece of information as being true because the mass media, your teacher, all of your friends and/or associates, your parent, your religious adviser, your commander, or your employer confidently asserted that it was true (right)? In an atmosphere of acceptance, patience, assertiveness, and openness, consciously unaware or psychologically hidden memories can be retrieved. It is the environment that is rare, not the capability.

The human mind has a normal manner of forgetting.
Anything which is not perceived with some form of significance by a subject is often relegated to the human unconscious and "forgotten." If humans continuously consciously recalled everything that their brain had perceived through a multiple of senses, - within seconds, the brain would become catatonic through overstimulation. Thus humans lose conscious awareness of everything which is not in the "present". Those pieces of awareness which have imposed a special significance, or on which a special significance has been superimposed, afford humans with reference points by which to find and retrieve them. Often, humans remember specific information by targeting their recall to reference points such as the date, time, or place which is connected to the event. Aspects of a concept may be targeted for recall by a focusing upon the symbol or word which represents the primary concept. Forgetting can also be controlled by a psychological defense mechanism.
When humans experience traumatic (highly negative systemic or emotional events), their mind often hides the memory from subsequent spontaneous or focused recall. First, it has become a traumatic memory because of the lack of control which the subject has had over the event. This lack of control would normally inspire the human brain to consciously obsess on determining how to cope more constructively should such circumstances become present again. If the event has also induced intense feelings of fear, recalling the event will replay the negative emotions - which will alert human defense mechanisms: anger, withdrawal, violence, paranoia, acting out, intellectualization, anxiety, ....
Many of these expressions are not socially acceptable in large powerful human cultures, and, many are contributors to the incidence of chronic illness; either can become fatal. Psychological forgetfulness is a survival strategy for humans who live in non-positively stressed environments and experience traumatic fear-tinged events for which they lack positive coping skills. A difficulty arising from such a culturally mediated psychological pattern is that as a person ages within a negatively stressed environment culture, his or her memory of their past will seem to disappear. Eventually, one's memory of one's past may be minimal. These factors were not widely recognized in North American culture until the 1990s, yet Allen/Allende appears to make allowance for them in his letter. Such memories do not disappear; most of the time they can be recovered by hypnotic or other therapies.

What cannot be recalled by humans is memory which has been destroyed.
Increasingly popular throughout the 1950s, though not popularly acknowledged, was the use of lobotomies. Such operations called for the physical removal of part of an individual's brain. Any memories contained therein were also removed. Also increasing in popularity at the time was the use of electric shock treatment for the human brain. In modern computer language, such a therapy does not only "erase" (conceal) the information - it "formats" (replaces it with blanks) the brain such that the individual can never recall what physically is now represented as having never been. In both of these instances, neither a truth serum drug nor the effective use of hypnosis, nor the combination, will retrieve the memory.
Finally, Allen/Allende presents himself naively and directly as a person greatly troubled by the horrors and wonders of his experience and honestly willing to sacrifice himself for the return of his full memory and the positive advancement of his profession: engineering. He has projected the fantasy-like characteristics of electromagnetic dematerialization - transfer - rematerialization onto the then current fantasy-like characteristics of UFOs. This "error" serves only to confirm the presence of identifiable electromagnetic hypersensitivity symptoms, including incomplete or transient memories, and his state of confusion and intellectual tendencies which encourage him to complete the picture of his reality and restore him, hopefully, to a position of assured, orderly, contented sanity.

1956 - On June 4
It became public knowledge that a conflict existed between the branches of the U.S.A. military as to which should occupy the position of principal responsibility, leadership, power for the defence of the nation. The new thinking is that the USAF should hold the primary position with the Navy providing an auxiliary role and the Army participating less and less. Without the Berlin Wall and the escalation of the Vietnam war, the Army would have been practically disbanded.

1956 - During the year
Marcel Vogel, a research chemist, sells his luminescence business and goes to work for IBM.
Back into research full-time, he studies magnetics, optic-electrical devices, and liquid crystal systems, developing and patenting inventions of crucial significance to the storage capabilities of computers. When first approached by a student who asked him about an article on Do Plants have Emotions?, he rejected the idea. Several days later he decide to take the question seriously.
With more prompting from his students, Vogel built reaction detectors to use with plants and had his students run experiments to test the ability of the plants to anticipate actions of destruction against them. Vogel, but not his students, detected stronger reactions from the plants which were in threat of being burnt or uprooted than from those which actually were. Using his knowledge of hypnosis and researching magic and spiritualism the response seemed to indicate that some form of energy might be present throughout the universe, the disturbance of which explained health or disease. Wondering if this energy could be stored like other forms of energy, Vogel asked a spiritually gifted friend, Vivian Wiley, to test substances for that purpose.

Ms. Wiley picked several leaves from her garden and each day projected her will on the one to live and paid no attention to the other. A month later she showed Vogel the leaves. The one without attention had died and was brown; the other was radiantly vital and green. Vogel performed a similar experiment with the same results. Vogel transferred his interest to the experimentation of this "psychic" energy on liquid crystals at his IBM lab.
Vogel took hundreds of slides of the behaviour of the crystals and magnified them hundreds of times to try and detect any changes. He found that by "relaxing his mind", he could sense activity not visually revealed in the microscope field. "I was led by some form of higher sensory awareness to adjust the lighting conditions to allow these phenomena to be optically recordable to the human eye or to a camera." Vogel concluded that crystals are brought into a solid, or physical, state of existence by pre-forms, or ghost images of pure energy which anticipate the solids. Since plants could pick up intentions from a human, that intent produced some form of energy field.

1956 - During June
President Eisenhower authorizes personally U2 spy flights from Turkey over the Soviet Union to Norway for 10 days. Among other findings, the Tyuratam rocket and space flight launch site was found in Turkistan. Not even its existence had been suspected by American military. Russian radar, superior to that of the U.S.A. tracked every flight between 1954 and 1958; many complaints were made through diplomatic channels to the U.S.A. In most cases, these were ignored. A total of 20 American flights were made with others being made by the British. Most of the flights were made in 1956-1958; the last was made in 1960.

1956 - On June 18
U.S.A. President Dwight D. Eisenhower, said at his weekly news conference that the U.S. constantly asserted its neutrality in the first 150 years of its history. He continued, that if a neutral nation is attacked, world public opinion will be more favourably disposed toward it than if it had "announced its military association with another great power". These statements were quickly "clarified" by Secretary of State John Foster Dulles, who sought to state the direction of American Foreign policy as one of strength-by-alliance:
"The principle of neutrality pretends that a nation can best gain safety for itself by being indifferent to the fate of others. This has increasingly become an obsolete conception, and, except under very exceptional circumstances, it is an immoral and shortsighted conception. The free world today is stronger and peace is more secure because so many free nations courageously recognize the now-demonstrated fact that their own peace and safety would be endangered by assault on freedom elsewhere."

1956 - During the year
The President's Foreign Intelligence Advisory Board (FIAB) is established by Present Eisenhower on the recommendation of the Hoover Commission. Composed of prominent businessmen, scientists and other outside government decisionmakers, it effectively provides capitalist-centred direction apart from the American legislature. With the President's executive authority and control of unvouchered secretly appropriated taxation monies, this action further decreases the democratic nature of the American government.

1956 -
A meeting of the Zionist World Congress results in an appeal to Communist European nations to allow Jewish emigration from their countries. Egypt (UAR) blockades the Suez Canal and the port of Elath as a blockade against Israel. Soviet military aid continues to increase to the Arab countries as do Fedayeen Egyptian terrorist attacks.

1956 - In late June
The Soviet KGB Department 7 begins covert operations to set up siphon skim sources for the purpose of making funds available to the Bilderburg Committee for extension of the goals of the Tri-Galaxy Government. The American CIA begin such operations in 1957.
The intent is to find political idiosyncrasies which will allow large sums of money to be transferred out of a sovereign country to a neutral banking center. There, such monies can be "safely" embezzled from numbered bank accounts, or used to provide non-repayable loans - loans for which there is no intent to repay. Agents seek personality weaknesses in the leaders of developing countries and through destabilization of the politics of the country encourage such leaders to transfer huge sums of money out of the country for safety or greed. Sometimes the Soviets and the Americans will work together to bring about destabilization; sometimes they will work independently. Other scenarios develop later to meet the needs of the market.

1956 - Early in July
Gamal Abdel Nasser, head of a 4-year-old military junta, celebrated the independence of Egypt.
The junta had overthrown a corrupt monarch, broken a feudal aristocracy's long-held power over Egypt's politics, disowned the fanaticism of the "Moslem Brotherhood" and driven British troops from Egypt after 74 years of occupation. Nasser had purchased arms from the Soviet Union earlier in the year and been promised the proposed billion dollar dam by the USA.

1956 - During July
Premier Diem of South Vietnam refuses to hold elections for reunification as defined in the Geneva agreement of 1954. He asserts that the South Vietnamese Government had not signed the Geneva accords and therefore was not bound by them. American State Department cables and National Security Council memos indicate that the Eisenhower Administration wished to postpone the elections as long as possible and communicated its feelings to Diem.

1956 - During the summer
The Office of Naval Research (ONR), in Washington, D.C., which had received an annotated copy of Morris K. Jessup's book, "The Case For the UFO", called Jessup to their office. The notes hinted that the authors, supposedly 3 gypsies, knew all about the secrets of UFO beings called "S-Ms" and "L-Ms": the former were hostile to the human race. The notes had impressed some of the junior officers who wanted Jessup's opinion about the hostile aliens. During the previous 12 months, Jessup had received 2 letters from a writer who identified himself as Carl Allen in one and Carlos Allende in the second. As in the papers sent to the ONR, the writer had declared that he knew all kinds of mysterious secrets including a "Philadelphia Experiment" which purportedly happened in 1943. Jessup noted the similarity.
"The Varo Company" of Garland, Texas, ran a small printing of Allende's letters and the "Case" notes, including an unsigned introduction written by ONR Special Projects Officers Commander George W. Hoover and Captain Sidney Sherby. The introduction stated that:
"Because of the importance which we attach to the possibility of discovering clues to the nature of gravity, no possible item, however disreputable from the point of classical science, should be overlooked."

The "introduction" was coached by the CIA department in charge of distribution of disinformation about UFO sightings and was intended to provide a sense of credibility to a sensationalistic unsubstantiated and uninvestigated report which was expected to later be disclaimed, or, at the least, confuse the real findings about extraterrestrial being presence, activity and intentions.
In 1969, Allen/Allende admitted to Jim and Carol Lorenzen, a Tucson, Arizona couple who had founded and were directors of the "Aerial Phenomena Research Organization" (APRO) that the letters he had written were "false .. the craziest pack of lies I ever wrote." He later changed his mind, the Lorenzens's had given him little attention or thanks, and said that his confession - had been a crazy pack of lies.
In 1980, the parents of Carlos Miguel Allende, born in Springdale, Pennsylvania, on May 31, 1925, confided to writer Robert Goerman, that their son had spent much of his life wandering the United States, dwelled permanently in a world of fantasy, bragged that he had a fantastic mind.

1956 - On July 16
The USA National Academy of Sciences (UNAS) concludes that atomic radiation is dangerous, and as the atomic age develops, the danger will increase. The media and the political establishment label all references and stated concerns, worldwide, as scare mongering, neuroses, and ridiculing any suggestion that radioactive rainfall could produce health, crop, or weather changes.

1956 - On July 16
A USA school aid bill to provide 300,000 desperately needed classrooms over the next 4 years at a cost of $1.6 billion, was defeated in the House of Representatives. The defeat was triggered by the amendment of Manhattan Democrat Adam Clayton Powell Jr. which would have denied federal funds to school districts until they complied with the Supreme Court's desegregation earlier decision. Each political party promptly accused the other of wrecking the bill. The truth was that both sides, by acting on politics and prejudice, had killed school aid.
Conversely, a $33 billion highway construction bill would be passed: the biggest public works project in U.S. history.

1956 - During the year
"The Rockefeller Brothers Fund", established in 1940 (see Nelson Rockefeller, 1940) sponsored 6 reports on "specific areas of national life". The studies were designed to obtain feedback from societal leaders or persons of influence who were not then in government. Laurence Rockefeller wrote that those engaged in the project sought "to define the major problems and opportunities (that would) challenge the United States over the next ten to fifteen years, clarify the national purposes and objectives that must inspire and direct the meeting of such great challenges, and develop a framework of concepts and principles on which national policies and decisions can be soundly based." The project sprang from the brothers' and particularly Nelson's general sense of crisis about the state of the nation and its future prospects. Nelson headed the project until May 26, 1958, when he became an active candidate for Governor of New York State. Laurence presided after that.

Nelson and Laurence were close associates of past and present Presidents of the country, military leaders, major corporate officers, community leaders, State Department heads, senior Intelligence agency staff, and foreign affairs participants. They knew members of MJ-12, knew of the recovery of the UFOs, knew of the prediction of armageddon which the REDS had revealed to them, knew of the technological advance and intent of the GRAYS. They knew of the agreements which their President and senior military leaders had made with the GRAYS and were honestly concerned about how to enable the survival of the American culture, which had given them so much.
One option was to aggregate as much capital as possible as quickly as possible, through government funding and private profits to cover the cost of survival options. This could be done through further exploitation of underdeveloped resource source nations in the Americas outside the borders of the United States. In addition, they new that the government financing of BLACK projects (secret military technology research and development activities) that millions of dollars of taxpayer's monies and debt could be freely used to augment the capital pool (see Financing Sources).

Also, especially Nelson, was aware that political "leadership" and public funds, with the support of the media could be used to educate-manipulate the American public to do what was necessary for the survival of the largest number of people. They also assumed that the perpetrator of armageddon would be the Soviet Union and that major civil defense measures followed by a first strike attack on the Soviet Union would be the only hope for uncontested peace.
Finally, the government and the Rockefellers had by now reached the reality that the GRAYS had no wish to provide them with the knowledge of duplicating their technology, that the Americans would work covertly with the GRAYS on the basis of the GRAYS not causing civil unrest by their presence and "experiments", and that America would fundamentally have to take responsibility for the saving of humanity.

The most influential report produced was "International Security: The Military Aspect" prepared under the direction of Henry A. Kissinger. Many who contributed to the reports became part of a future "inner circle" of American politics. Besides Kissinger, there was Chester Bowles, Roswell L. Gilpatrick, James R. Killian, Jr., Henry R. Luce, Jacob S. Potofsky, David Reisman, Dean Rusk, David Sarnoff and Edward Teller. During the writing of the reports, a nation-wide nuclear bomb shelter program was being debated in the U.S.A. House of Representatives.

1956 - By August
The Goodyear Rigid Inflatable Airship, GA-447, a 1-seater aircraft, had been designed, built, tested and was on the market. It could be assembled in 20 minutes by one person from the trunk of a car and proved to be quite safe and dependable. A 2-seater model was developed also and could be air dropped to a location in an 80 inch by 44 inch container. Beginning at a then reasonable single-engine, single-wing airplane cost of $18,000, mass production could have reduced the per unit cost to $8,000. Success depended upon the acquisition of a military order.
Primarily considered by government services as a means for saving stranded or downed airplane pilots or passengers, as well as for covert military actions, an order for 10 units was placed by both the USAF and the US Army. Other models were proposed including a VTOL (Vertical Takeoff And Landing) model (for self-rescue from forested areas), a rocket-powered model, and various large lifting wings. Spare wings and ailerons on conventional aircraft were proposed as the inflatable wing material could be packaged into the structure much like a parachute into its container for deployment when required. With no working parts to wear, stick, or fail, and, with immediate deployment, possibilities loomed. Large scale orders did not.

The GA series was adverse to military consideration for several major reasons.
First, whether in battlefield or covert action, the rubberized fabric was not bulletproof.
In peacetime or uncontested airspace, it could prove to be a valable tool; not in armed forces conditions.
Secondly, the cost of all military contracts is expected to be high on a per unit basis. In addition to rewarding the manufacturer with a guaranteed lucrative profit for designing and building an "engine of war," additional monies must be present to cover -

1. additional design modifications; 2. salaries for government lobbyists; 3. bribes to legislative representatives; 4. increased levels of bureaucracy and regulation; 5. industrial espionage to maintain competitive superiority; 6. encourage favourable news stories in the mass media; 7. provide skim funds for covert program use.

There would never be the justification for this style of pricing for a craft which could only be used for rescue and civilian use in peaceful surroundings. This was not the role of the military. Its role was to create casualties, contest air space, evacuate under fire. A craft that could be modified to work under such conditions would be found, and, it would cost much more than $8,000 per unit. This is a typical example of why technological development is usually tied to military concerns, and, military budgets.

1956 - On August 1
Senator John F. Kennedy stated:
"Vietnam represents the cornerstone of the Free World in Southeast Asia, the keystone in the arch, the finger in the dike," and should the "red tide of Communism" pour into it, much of Asia would be threatened. Vietnam's economy was essential to the economy of Southeast Asia and its "political liberty" an "inspiration to those seeking to obtain or maintain their liberty in all parts of Asia - indeed of the world." In conclusion, Kennedy stressed, "It is our offspring, we cannot abandon it, we cannot ignore its needs."

While some of the sentiments were simply rhetoric to inspire the masses and raise personal political support, Kennedy had placed his confidence in the State Department paranoic "domino" theory. In his impractical, ignorant, naive idealism - he now joined the Washington establishment mind-set of the proud, powerful, rich American prepared to save the rest of the world from itself while remaining in denial about the inequality and poverty that surrounded him. Moving up in the American political culture did not mean taking a heretical position. Business and professional interests had to be pleased enough to contribute to your election campaign.
Business was making billions of dollars of sales on the existence of the war.
One-seventh of American employment was associated with the war. Military and professional careers were on the verge of possibilities if the war continued. Most people told half-lies, or wanted to believe them. After the depressed economic times of the 1930s and the anarchy of war participation in the early 1940s and 1950s, more and more Americans were now beginning to enjoy stable jobs and high incomes.

The war was an export: military production was exported so that others could fight the war which Americans wanted. Human rationalization would make everything sound right. Whatever the concern, rhetoric would be able to provide an acceptable idol of justification: freedom, equality, democracy, anti-Communism, prosperity, brotherhood. Kennedy, like many other Americans, sold his integrity for social acceptance - his was power; the motives of others would range from wealth to economic stability. Spiritual decisions were NOT the order of the day. Few Americans cared to ask the Vietnamese what THEY wanted.

1956 - Early in August
Egypt's political leader, Gamal Abdel Nasser, while presiding over the dedication of a new refinery, expressed anger at the USA withdrawal of support for the building of the billion dollar Aswan dam. The USA had cited economic instability of Egypt as its reasons, although receipt of modern military supplies and economic support from the USSR were the political reasons.
In reaction, Nasser declared:
"We shall build the High Dam as we desire.
The annual income of the Suez Canal is $100 million. Why not take it ourselves?
In the name of the nation, the President of the Republic resolves that the "World Maritime Company of the Suez Canal" will be nationalized. At this moment some of our Egyptian brethren are taking over the Canal Company. We shall rely on our own strength, our own muscle, our own funds. And it will be run by Egyptians! Egyptians! Egyptians!"

The canal would be funded by the Soviet Union.
Britain and France would be angered by the move as France had built the Suez Canal and British Middle East oil supplies now seemed in jeopardy. Meeting in London, England, 18 nations representing 95% of Suez shipping would support the USA's John Foster Dulles' plan in which an association of nations using the canal would hire its own pilots, regulate traffic and collect the tolls on the Canal. Egypt would be asked to cooperate and would be paid for its facilities. Nasser would react by stating that the plan was a declaration of war.

1956 - During August
The SR-71 supersonic spy plane project was begun in the U.S.A..
Initially referred to as the A-12 project, and then the XF-12 project, it finally was given the name of SR-71. The first deployment would be in 1966, after 10 years of development. The U2 had been produced in 17 months. The SR-71 could fly at altitudes of 85,000 feet and at speeds of Mach 3. Despite its technological sophistication, by the time it was produced, it could be shot down by Soviet ground to air missiles, if so desired.

1956 - On August 15
Dr. Jonas, of Czechoslovakia, found a missing link to the success of a "Natural Birth Control Method for Humans" which involved the use of astrology and menstrual cycle calculations. Earlier in the year, Hungary passed a law legalizing abortion and this apparently facilitated the inclusion of enough couples in a research project to enable scientific tests to be carried out. Dr. Jonas began his work based upon the Ancient Papri of Babylon, Assyria. It stated that:
"Each woman had her period of fertility at a set phase of the Moon."

The problem in successfully using this prescription was the fact that which phase of the Moon was not specified in the remnants found. Dr. Jonas calculated the astrological natal chart of each female subject from her time of birth. If the time was not exactly known, then a half day was subtracted from each end of the "safe" period. On the natal chart, the aspect angle between the woman's Sun and Moon placements was marked. Whenever this angle occurred in the 29-1/2 day lunar cycle, it marked the final day of a 4-day fertility period. This meant that a woman's fertile time could occur during her menstrual cycle. When the menses and each fertility period occurred separately, a woman would only have 8 very safe days (besides the menses) in a 29-day lunar month. This was only 85% or less, accurate.
Knaus Ozino had theorized earlier that the woman's fertile time began 15 days after the start of her period (menses); this provided a "rhythm method" suggesting "safe" times during the menstrual cycle. By marking a period extending between 6 days on either side of the 16th day, one is left with a 13-day period in which conception is most likely to occur. Dr. Kurt Rechintz, of Budapest, Hungary, extended this theory with the addition of the Jonas theory. The result was that a human female had TWO fertile periods every month; they might run consecutive or they might overlap. In reality, 15% of pregnancies were related to the so-called "safe" menses duration. The period of fertility coincided with a phase of the Moon, but this was dependent upon the birth time of the mother.

This increased the accuracy of the calculation to 97.7%: comparable to the proper use of condoms and the birth control pill but without any of the costs, inconveniences or side effects of those or less effective methods.
If the astrological (cosmic) time of fertility coincided with the woman's menses, which are then very fertile, or, with the rhythm fertility time - 18 out of 29 days would be relatively safe; 12 of those days would be just about 100% safe. Mathematically, for a 2% additional risk, a woman could stretch her 8-day period of safety to 14 days.

It was also found that the gender of the conceived child could be determined according to which "type" of astrological sign the Moon was traversing at the time of conception. Once the Sun/Moon angle had been established in the monthly cycle, if the Moon was in an ODD sign at the point of conception, a male child would be born. If the Moon was in an EVEN sign, a female child would be conceived. The gender of the child would be difficult to determine if the Moon position was bent close to the cusp between signs when the Sun/Moon angle occurred, or, if the astrological birth range coincided with any part of the rhythm method. For a better determination of pre-conception gender, it would be advisable to wait for a more favourable time than this.
Dr. Jonas also had found that women born during certain phases of the Moon, especially the Full Moon, tend to have spinal difficulties in having children. This seems to be even more apparent if the female conceives at the time of the same Sun/Moon angle, such as a Full Moon, as existed at the time of their own birth.

These researches demonstrated that the errors in modern astrological analysis are largely, if not entirely, due to the oversimplified and amateurish manner in which its concepts are usually tested by so-called scientists. Typical to human history, Dr. Jonas method challenged the status quo of medicine and his peers, rather than sincerely and professionally examining his data, raised such a wall of criticism that he was forced to be examined by psychiatrists. They proved him sane, and only then would the government permit him to continue his research.
While the successful result of Jonas' 14 years of research was published before 1968, it would lay largely unknown in North America until 1982 - when it received a brief overview in a specialty newsletter. While tiny sophisticated calculators would be designed and marketed for the purpose of mediating rates of cigarette smoking, and small location finders would be able to tell a soldier where he was on the Earth with an accuracy of several feet - planned parenthood, elimination of unwanted pregnancies, and the problems associated with further human population expansion were obviously much less important. Neither widespread public awareness nor recognition of this research would ever be made. Today's priorities determine the nature of tomorrow's problems.

1956 - On August 23
Over Fort MacLeod, Alta, at 36,000 feet, an intensely brilliant, oval-shaped object emitting a plasma-like glow is photographed.

1956 - On the night of August 23,
At RAF Bentwaters, near Ipswitch, England, a base leased to the USAF, a Ground Controlled Approach (GCA) radar operator picked up an object heading in from the sea at a speed of 2000 to 4000 mph. It passed directly over Bentwaters and continued on until it disappeared from the scope 30 miles to the west. Several visual sightings were recorded including one by the pilot of a USAF C-47 aircraft flying at 4000 feet who saw a fuzzy light flash between himself and the airport below. The UFO was heading towards Lakenheath, another RAF airfield leased to the USAF, and immediate warning was given.
Ground observers at Lakenheath saw a light approach, stop, and then move swiftly out of sight to the east. Some time after that 2 white lights were seen; they joined up and disappeared in formation. The radar operators confirmed the visual sightings. The RAF Chief Controller at Bentwaters scrambled a Venom night fighter from RAF Waterbeach, and his interception controller, with a team of 3 highly trained personnel took over. The fighter closed in on the object but after a few seconds, and in the space of one or two sweeps on the scope, the object appeared behind the fighter. The pilot called out "Lost contact, need more help," and was told that the target was now behind him. Meanwhile the Chief Controller scrambled a second fighter. The first fighter maneuvered to try and get behind the object again. Until the Condon Report was published in 1969, this sighting remained classified. The Report had to concede "the apparent rational, intelligent behaviour of the UFO suggests a mechanical device of unknown origin as the most probable explanation."

1956 - on August 23,
RCAF Squadron Leader Robert J. Childerhose and Flight Lieutenant Ralph Innes, while setting a cross-Canada speed record with their F-86 Sabre jet, over Fort MacLeod, Alberta, at an altitude of 36,000 feet, sighted a bright luminous sphere below them, travelling parallel to them. Before it disappeared, they photographed it. A plasma-like glow was emitted from the craft's underside.

1956 - In the fall
Howard Menger, sign painter and machine shop owner, appeared on the "Tonight" show with Steve Allen as host. Journalist Jules B. St. Germain described the events as follows:
"The audience's original reaction, which ranged from snickering to outright laughter when it learned that Menger claimed to have ridden on a 'flying saucer', changed to a mood of perplexed wonderment and keen interest shortly after he started speaking. Amusement soon became interested silence. I rode through space in a Venusian scout ship. It is a difficult feeling to describe, a feeling of no motion, of suspension in space. I was shown through some means of tele-projection, a view of life in a city on Venus. It was not too different from ours. More orderly, quiet, much more beautiful."

Menger told the audience that earlier that year the spacebeings had taught him to communicate through telepathy, and had flown him to Venus where he saw "beautiful domed buildings." He also had travelled to the Moon (of the Earth?) where he could breathe the air with little difficulty. "most of the people who have contacted me have been from the planet Venus, although I have seen others from Mars and Saturn. Some live on our Earth among us.
After Menger's radio and television appearances, many thousands of people came to his home in Highgate, New Jersey - as many as 300 on a single afternoon. Menger had 5 photographs, one of a black mummy shape standing before a glaring round object - a Venusian in front of his scout ship. Menger cut a commercial audio record called "The Sound From Saturn", actual music that came from another planet. Menger wrote a book entitled "From Outer Space to You" and was frequently on the early morning New York radio show of "Long John Nebel". During the late 1950s and early 1960s, Menger said that spaceships arrived regularly to land at the back of his High Bridge house.

Menger and his family eventually went into intentional obscurity in order to attain a degree of privacy and to avoid threats which were made to him by telephone in the middle of the night as well as from "agents" of an unknown origin which kept visiting him and telling him to keep silent.
Menger spoke of this period later as
"fantastic times that I will never forget as long as I live ... The beauty and serenity of these (space)beings was absolutely something to behold. It was almost as if you were speaking with one of God's angels."

1956 -
Canadian Forces Radar Station, Gander, Newfoundland is a major maritime military base on the east coast of Canada. In the Fall of 1956, both the passengers and the crew aboard a U.S. Navy Super Constellation transport plane on a trans-Atlantic flight pattern, sighted a huge flying disc at approximately 50 miles NE of Gander. Over 30 pilots, navigators and flight engineers were passengers on their way home from special duty in Europe. The object was described as a huge flying disk with a glow around the rim, the craft being the size of a football field.
At first, a cluster of lights was seen below the plane; these appeared to dim and spread out, except one which seemed to be heading on a collision course with the transport. It tilted sharply and shot to one side, swung around, drew abreast and seemed to pace them at 100 yards. Its diameter was 3 to 4 times the wingspan of the transport (350 to 400 feet) and it was at least 30 feet thick at the centre. Seen at a distance, the glow along the rim was blurred and uneven. Gradually, the object pulled ahead, tilted upward and quickly accelerated away. Gander Airport had tracked something close to the transport but when they had attempted to contact the transport they couldn't get an answer.
After landing at Gander, all the crew were thoroughly interrogated by U.S. Air Force Intelligence officers. It was estimated that the craft had accelerated at speeds in excess of 2300 mph. The intelligence officers refused to answer any questions in return. The witnesses were again questioned at their destination: Patuxent Naval Air Station in Maryland, by Naval Intelligence and Air Technical Intelligence. Later a government scientist showed the navy pilot, Commander George Brent, UFO photos including one portraying a disk like the one he had seen. Even though the sightings had occurred in Canadian air space, Canadian authorities were evidently bypassed in the investigation.

1956 - By October
Separation Program Numbers (SPNs) were being assigned to all USA military discharge papers.
The numbers were in the "For Official Use Only" part of the form. Many of these 530 "spin code" numbers were character ratings of the person discharged. Some covered desirable habit while others noted undesirable habits or attitudes, that some supervisor or commander had reported. None of these had to be supported by any documentation, corroborated by other personnel, or affirmed with the individual. These veterans were being labelled for life and represented draftees which had ranged in mood from unenthusiastic to resentful. One incident or statement in a long and active career might surface as dramatic to an immature, intolerant or belligerent superior officer.
Close to a million honourably discharged veterans had been given discharge papers with spin codes that were derogatory, or partly so, by 1973. Spin number 368 meant that the veteran had been labelled as having an "anti-social personality." Number 265 alleged that the individual had a "character disorder." Number 263 indicated that he had been reported for bed-wetting (perhaps during combat). Number 41A charged the veteran with "lack of interest". Number 469 labelled him as "unsuitable". In 1973, more than 35,000 honourably discharged veterans unknowingly carried this "unsuitable" designation on their papers as they went for job or promotion or loan interviews.
The translation of the SPN numbers was eventually made available, by a greedy person enacting military-commercial espionage, to many major corporate employers including Firestone, Boeing, Chrysler, and Standard Oil. At such companies, the veteran new recruit would show his discharge papers, they would be read discretely along with his other application information, and if a perceived negative spin number was present, the applicant would be denied employment. He had failed a test, the job had been filled, the position had been withdrawn, etc. This abuse of this confidential and questionable data was not discovered by the public until 1973; the use of SPN numbers was not withdrawn until 1974. How much misery and hardship had been imposed on a supporter of the state, who may have risked life and health, by an authoritarian bureaucracy?

The ultimate hypocracy of this "free society for the people" is that had the espionage resulted in the data going to another country, whether used or not, the "spy" could have faced a penalty of execution. Because the information WAS used WITHIN the country AGAINST the rights of loyal citizens and to their DISADVANTAGE - no charges were ever laid. In the former instance, the offending country which had received the information would have been publicly chastised before the international community of their state peers. In the SPN instance, none of the companies involved were fined, asked to issue apologies to, and reconsider employment of, applicants disadvantaged by the abuse; none lost government contracts. To whom was the interest of the state demonstrated; did it have an interest; what was its interest?

1956 - During October
Israel Attacks Egypt, disarms Egyptian troops, opens the port of Elath.
In 1957, the occupied territories of Gaza and Sinai will be occupied by UN troops.

1956 - By the fall
Dr. Eugene David Glynn published "Television and the American Character - A Psychiatrist Looks at Television".
In it he stated:
"Certain types of adult illnesses - particularly the depressions, the oral character neuroses, the schizophrenias - and the use they make of television can be most valuable here. Those traits that sick adults now satisfy by television can be presumed to be those traits which children, exposed to television from childhood (infancy, really!), and all through the character forming years, may be expected to develop. ...
They all demonstrate quite clearly the special set of needs television satisfies, needs centred around the wish for someone to care, to nurse, to give comfort and solace ... These infantile longings can be satisfied only symbolically, and how readily the television set fills in. Warmth, sound, constancy, availability, a steady giving without ever a demand in return, the encouragement to complete passive surrender and envelopment - all this and active fantasy besides. Watching these adults, one is deeply impressed by their acting out with the television set of their unconscious longings to be infants in mother's lap."

Glynn, and many others, noted that the form of the medium was more important than the content.
The positive features of television, such as information, education, and the broadening of horizons, would be strong counters to the development of traits that he found detrimental to the national character, but these would require parental guidance and careful monitoring of the child viewer. Such guidance was seldom provided. Can an addict be expected to caution others near to them about the dangers of what they are addicted to?
Media dependency had become a fact to an increasing number of Americans.
A dependent has surrendered part of their time and freedom which otherwise would be available for the more spiritually oriented interpersonal presence and support of those around them. Advertising, fantasy and voyeurism had "bought" the soul of these Americans. It told them what was important, how to think, what to buy, where to go, how to respond to negative stresses - and, it did so in such a hypnotic manner that the viewer was unaware that they had been brainwashed.
It had happened and would continue to happen under the authority of the political and social leaders of the country. The social leaders, persons who made great amounts of money from manipulative advertising in the marketplace, would effectively lobby politicians to keep the government from interfering in their monopoly. Those supporting politicians would sell their vote for the financial consideration of subsidiary employment by the ad and marketing agencies as "advisors", who in the performance of this second job would be required to attend "conventions" and meetings at resorts, entertainment spas, and social high spots - with all and any expense being paid for. In return, they would gladly frustrate this human system of rational government by justifying everything with their capacity to confuse with words any decision attempted.

1956 - Before the end of October
The Polish United Workers' Party had reinstated previous leader Wladyslaw Gomulka, previously imprisoned by Stalin, and placed in command of the armed forces General Waclaw Komar, who had been arrested earlier for Titosim. Krushchev had warned the new leaders, seeking to separate Poland from USSR influence:
"I will show you what the road to Socialism looks like ! ... If you don't obey, we'll crush you!
We are going to use force to kill any uprising in this country. Russian soldiers were slain on this ground. We will never permit this country to be sold to the Americans and the Zionists."

An assertive Polish leadership would calm the Russians with statements of confidence representing the disgruntled workers of the country who for 11 years had lived in increasing destitution working in an economy designed to serve the USSR military and the USSR people. The family of Zofia, Gomulka's wife, had been "purged" by Stalin many years before. Under the demands of public protest, Gomulka released Stefan Cardinal Wyszynski, who had been under house arrest since 1953.
In early November, students in Hungary expressed support for the Poles in a protest march.
Demonstrations grew. Arrests were made. Students and workers stormed a radio station and broadcast that security police were arresting the demonstrators. The building was stormed. People were killed. Hungarian tanks arrived. The news reached Moscow. 80 Soviet tanks and 280,000 USSR troops converged on Budapest. An armed resistance ensued for 5 days at the end of which over 20,000 people were dead and perhaps 50,000 wounded. Many Hungarians expected the Americans to come to their aid. The UN debated the legitimacy of the invasion by the USSR but got nowhere. USSR troops became "production police", ensuring the return to work of the Hungarians.

1956 - On October 29
Adlai Stevenson, nominated Democratic party candidate for the upcoming USA presidential election in August, linked his demand for an end to A-bomb tests with his proposals to end the (military) draft:
"We don't want our boys to be drafted. ... We don't want to live in the shadow of the mushroom cloud."

In a speech before a crowd of 10,000 he noted that the draft, with its rapid turnover of manpower was a wasteful, needlessly expensive and unsuited to an "age of complex new weapons and new military needs."

1956 - By November
The U.S.A. WS-117L Program was in operation to build America's first spy satellite.
WS was the abbreviation for "Weapons Systems". From the beginning, the space effort had little to do with the romantic and idealistic media hype that would be used to deceive and pacify the American public: its primary aim by those in the government was for military superiority.

1956 - By November
Captain Edward J. Ruppelt had published his book "The Report on Unidentified Flying Objects".
As head of "Project Blue Book" for its first 2 years, Ruppelt had created the term "UFO" for "Unidentified Flying Object" to replace "flying saucer". After resigning his commission, he had gone to work for Northrop Aircraft Company as a research engineer. During his work with the Project, Ruppelt had talked to pilots, engineers, generals, and scientists, and his book contained many sightings, experiences, and other things he could not explain. In the forward he wrote:
"The report has been difficult to write because it involves something that doesn't officially exist.
It is well known that ever since the first flying saucer was reported in June 1947 the Air Force has officially said that there is no proof that such a thing as an interplanetary spaceship exists. But what is not well known is that this conclusion is far from being unanimous among the military and their scientific advisers because of the word, proof; so the UFO investigations continue.
The hassle over the word 'proof' boils down to one question: What constitutes proof?
Does a UFO have to land at the River Entrance to the Pentagon, near the Joint Chiefs of Staff Offices? Or is it proof when a ground radar station detects a UFO, sends a jet to intercept it, the pilot sees it, and locks on with his radar, only to have the UFO streak away at phenomenal speed? Is it proof when a jet pilot fires at a UFO and sticks to his story even under threat of court-martial?"

1956 - Early in November
The Six Day War between Israel and Egypt, following an ultimatum to Egypt by France and Britain
regarding operation of the Suez Canal, began. 30,000 Israeli troops and considerable armour mobilized quickly; before the war was ended, 1/4 of Israeli population, 1,800,000 persons, would be under arms. The Egyptian army was routed and its air force withdrew. A British and French force of 30,000 commandos acted in complicity with the Israelis. France had been angry with Nasser for his support of the rebels in Algeria, who were fighting for independence, and for the Canal nationalization. The French persuaded the British to join with them after Nasser received support from Jordon, leaving the British feeling that they were losing "colonial" control over the Arabs. Then, Israel had been approached. France immediately shipped Israel an extra 30 Mystere jet fighters. The war begun, the Soviet Union pledged "rocket weapons" and "other modern and terrible means" in support of Egypt and sent 24 Russian manned MIG-17s, accompanied by Soviet transports bringing technicians, radar and ground equipment - to Syria. The USA, in replying to the threats of the USSR against Britain and France, declared that it would retaliate with nuclear weapons against the USSR if the latter made good its threat. After some hostilities and much negotiation, the UN brought in a peacekeeping force, the Israelis withdrew, Egypt took over the Canal.
The Suez Crisis had a significant impact upon current and future British foreign policy.
British senior politicians were continuing to respond in their decision-making as if Britain was still a major world power in terms of persuasive power. Fear of weakening Commonwealth links, an aggressive attitude towards France, and hopes for the development of a European Free Trade region which included Britain, and which many Britons were adverse to, all served to encourage a defensive response. Britain acted without consultation with its Commonwealth partners and in turn the Commonwealth failed to unit in support of the British stance.
Rather than maintaining a united front in the Suez with the French, the British military withdrew at the behest of the USA. To France, Britain appeared to have deserted the French much like they had done in 1940 at Dunkirk. Additionally, Britain's sterling (capital) reserves plummeted and the embargo placed on petroleum shipments to Britain demonstrated the dependency of Britain in the global capitalist arena. Britain was no longer the imperial capitalist leader which it had been and which it was in denial of having lost. It had become capital dependent upon the USA in the subtle ways connected to military strategic power. The appearance and political strutting of power would no longer be enough to influence other nations. The Suez exposed Britain's economic, political and strategic weaknesses for what they were.

1956 - On November 12
U.S.A. President Dwight D. Eisenhower wins re-election despite concerns for his health.
Somewhat unexpected was the 10 million plurality vote (58% of the USA vote) which Eisenhower received against Adlai Stevenson. Richard M. Nixon would be the new Vice-President.

1956 - Nov 26
A report on the American Civil Rights Movement noted the following:
"To the 50,000 Negroes of Montgomery, Alabama, the week dawned "darker than a thousand midnights."
For more than 11 months, in a mass movement combining Christian fervour with Gandhi-like passive resistance, they had mounted and sustained in the "Cradle of the Confederacy" an almost total boycott of the city's segregated buses. Led by a handful of well-educated and young Negro leaders - notably by the Rev. Dr. Martin Luther King Jr., pastor of a local Baptist church - they had efficiently put together and operated a car pool of some 200 vehicles to ferry themselves to and from work. Now the leaders and lawyers sat glumly in the Montgomery courthouse waiting for the state circuit court to outlaw the Negro car pool on the charge - made by the city commission - that it was actually a business enterprise operating without a franchise.
Then, in the middle of the proceedings, the news was out: the Supreme Court had unanimously upheld a district court's ruling that the "separate but equal" doctrine was now as legally dead for segregated public transportation as it had already been declared dead for public schools and public recreational facilities.

The next night 10,000 Negroes jammed two of Montgomery's largest churches and adjacent streets to savour their triumph. Appearing before each group in turn was the spiritual architect of that triumph, the Rev. Dr. King. He was too wise to be triumphant; he read to each congregation a statement that should loom large in the Negroes's long, patient fight for equality: 'All along, we have sought to carry out the protest on high moral standards ... rooted in the deep soils of the Christian faith. We have carefully avoided bitterness. Our feet have often been tired and our automobiles worn, but we have kept going with the faith that in our struggle we had cosmic companionship, and that, at bottom, the universe is on the side of justice.'
When the court order comes through, Dr. King urged his followers, act sensibly but without pride. On the one hand, 'we have been going to the back of the bus for so long that there is danger that we instinctively will go straight back there again and perpetuate segregation. Just sit down where a seat is convenient.' On the other hand, 'I would be terribly disappointed if any of you go back to the buses bragging, "We the Negroes, won a victory over the white people." If you do, our struggle will be lost all over the South. Go back with humility and meekness.'"
On December 31, the Negro boycott against the Montgomery, Alabama city bus lines came to an end - 381 days after it began.

1956 - On November 26
Harold Macmillan, British Chancellor of the Exchequer, speaking in Parliament during the European Trade Policy Debate, stated:
"I believe that we all agree that it is quite impracticable for the United Kingdom to join ... a Customs union ... such an arrangement would be wholly disadvantageous ... our interests and responsibilities are much wider ... this objection would be quite fatal to any proposal that the United Kingdom whould seek to take part in a European common market."

1956 - Late in the year
A.A. and J.R. (names withheld by request) were flying F-86 interceptors near Modesto, out of Castle AFB, California, on alert duty to civilian UFO reports in a nearby town. The base instructed them to return because there was a UFO that near the control tower. With afterburners on they closed rapidly on the luminous elliptical UFO that moved above and below the cloud cover at 10 to 12 thousand feet as if to elude them. The two pilots played cat-and-mouse with the UFO until they ran low of fuel and returned to base. Local citizens that witnessed these events were told by the USAF that the pilots had been chasing ducks or geese (at 600 mph? - some duck).

1956 - On November 26
USSR leader Nikita Krushchev, at the final reception for Polands' visiting leader Wladyslaw Gomulka, declared the political position of the Soviet Union:
"We are Bolsheviks!. We stick firmly to the Lenin precept - don't be stubborn if you see you are wrong, but don't give in if you are right. (Addressed to the capitalist states) It doesn't depend on you whether or not we exist. If you don't like us, don't accept our invitations, and don't invite us to come to see you. Whether you like it or not, history is on our side. We will bury you!"

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1957 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
Bridge on the River Kwai; Twelve Angry Men; The Blackwell Story; The River's Edge; Tammy and the Bachelor; Night Passage; The Tin Star; Old Yeller; A Farewell to Arms; The Helen Morgan Story; Throne of Blood; April Love; Jet Pilot; The Abductors; Iron Sheriff; Reach for the Sky

Television: Perry Mason
Songs: Bye, Bye Love; Problems; Love Letters in the Sand; April Love; Don't Forbid Me; Loving You; Teddy Bear; All Shook Up; That's When Heartaches Begin; Little Darlin'; Searchin; Young Love; Silhouettes; Gone; So Rare; White Sport Coat; Great Balls of Fire; Teddy Bear; Geisha Girl; 4 Walls; Jailhouse Rock; Whole Lotta Shakin' Going On; All Shock Up.
General News: An all-time record for solar activity occurs.

1957 - By this year
The efforts of "The Phage Group" had gained some understanding of virus which had been termed "bacteriophage".
Formed in the 1940s, a group of microbiologists, chemists, and physicists from all over the world had met each summer at a laboratory in Cold Spring Harbour, New York, USA to share their studies and insights about this lifeform. Bacteriophages were viruses which consumed bacteria.
Using an electron microscope, scientist's could see the shape of the virus but could not determine what it was made of or how it was constructed. Using a technique called X-ray crystallography, in which high-powered X-rays are used to produce hundreds of images of a crystallized virus, images were obtained and input into a computer. The computer was then programmed to produce a picture of the complete atomic structure of the virus from these images. By this method, scientists were able to determine how the molecules on the outer skin of the virus enable the virus to enter and infect only specific cells.

Every cell is surrounded by a membrane made of protein and fat molecules.
Some of these protein molecules have specific shapes into which specifically shaped virus dovetail.
Viruses which do not "mate" exactly with the target cell do not gain entry.
All of the resources that must enter a cell for it to grow, reproduce, and carry out its function in a body must fulfill this requirement of matching the shape of the protein and fat molecule shapes covering the skin of the cell.
While every virus has a unique pattern of action, the end result is the same: it becomes a parasite.
Whether it forces its genetic material into the cell or finds the door opened for it to pass it in, the genetic material of the invading virus colonizes the cell: it takes over the cell's functions and uses its processing abilities to grow new virus genetic material. When the cell becomes overloaded with the new viral offspring, they burst the cell wall, destroying the cell - as in exploding a factory, and disperse to attack more healthy cells. Some viruses may remain inactive in the human body until some catalyst triggers it into activity.

1957 - By this year
The GRAYS reconsider humans as a Gene Pool in their search for a bioengineered antidote to their "disease". Having arrived collectively in 1939 and sought for a gene transfer or substitution from Earth-based insects, they have now deduced that another gene source must be investigated. They are still unfamiliar with the concept of viruses because the planet they came come from and their Moon base was devoid of viruses until the incident on their planet which introduced the dual-virus infection which they have. Having determined that the disease appears to be genetic and that it appears to be a threat to the survival of their lifeform, they have come to Earth to modify their genetic code and terminate the illness and its spread.
With Earth-based insects not providing a "match" and with their now longer association with humans, they have decided that the human size, capability for emotional expression, and upright stature might have some advantages. As insectoids, they are aware of the power of hypnotic induction. They have become aware that human defenses are usually at their lowest during sleep; that humans are often easily persuaded by the use of flattery; that humans have a low coping threshold for confusion, anxiety, and the abstract. To this end, most of their abductions will take place during the night. They will overlay the perceptions of the individual involved with holographic projections, a doctor's bedside sympathizing, and memory overlays. In most instances, the human defense mechanism of traumatic shock-induced amnesia will be adequate to the exclusion of the memory of such an abduction from the victims. Experimentation begins, often with implanted individuals.

Children aged between 10 and 17 years of age become the most frequently targetted near mature subjects. In addition to their near adult size and organ and system maturity, teenagers are chosen because they appear to be the least trusted and least believed of the human age groups by their more powerful adult contacts. At this stage, small amounts of blood and tissue are extracted for the purpose of gene analysis and substitution. Unknowingly, in numerous instances, the dual-virus of the GRAYS is transferred to the human subject.
Symptoms of GRAY dual-virus infection in humans are as deceptive and chronic to humans as they have been to the GRAYS. Reacting somewhat differently to the neurotoxins released by the viral infection, the human is likely to experience greater-than-normal feelings of sexual obsession and depression. Resulting behaviours - in the extreme - range from a rising frequency of suicide attempts, suicides, sexual assault (including rape, insest and child molestation), and a higher-than-previous need (obsession) for sexual activity. The combination of sexual obsession and human-induced religious beliefs of sexual abstinence and sexual exclusivity encourages the development of individual intense environments of personal anxiety. These promote both suicide attempt and chronic depression.
Separately, manic depressive states intensify feelings of frustration and anger into feelings of hatred and revenge and the subject may begin to experience day-dreams of mass violence and acting out. These feelings become a different foundation for suicide attempts: the individual believing that only by killing themselves can they save society from the harm they appear obsessed with fantasizing about. None of these symptoms are an exclusive result of the viruses. Rather, they are the intensification of feelings and anxieties already promoted by human social dynamics. The major difference between the influence of the viruses on the insectoids versus the humans is based on the structural neurological reality that insectoids are incapable of emotional expression - as defined by humans, and, humans are.

1957 - On January 5
Selwyn Lloyd, Foreign Secretary for the British Eden administration, and soon to be reconfirmed as the new Macmillan government, stated:
"An industrialized country with 50 million inhabitants is no longer large enough or powerful enough to produce and man the weapons required for modern war. ... Britain by herself cannot go the whole distance. If we try to do so we shall bankrupt ourselves. The choice is therefore clear ... If we are to be a first class power with thermonuclear capacity, it can only be done in association with other countries."

Selweyn Lloyd argued in favour of pooling Britain's resources with those of the six WEU members and creating a powerful continental sub-group within NATO.

1957 -
International Geophysical Year (IGY), begins the first serious study of the oceans and the Antarctic in a multi-country cooperative research project stretching into 1958. At this point, the Antarctic was not divided politically amongst nations. The Van Allen belt and the ozone layer holes at he poles were first discovered during this time.

1957 -
The Distant Early Warning (DEW) Line, a 2000 mile radar, high security, military defense perimeter connected with the North American Air Defense Command, NORAD, began operation in August, at the height of the cold war between the Soviet Union and the U.S.A.. It comprises 31 stations from Greenland to Alaska, with 21 being situated in Canada.
The sites will be abandoned by the USA in the early 1960s when satellite and longer distance radars take over the surveillance task. Built in a poorly understood and unappreciated climate and ecology, little respect is afforded the environment. The attitude of the humans involved would largely be one of grudge against the assignment projected not on the military officers and politicians who have initiated the program out of fear, but on the environment. When turned over to the Canadian Government defense department between 1989 and 1993, an estimated cost of CAN $200 million would be suggested as required to cleanup the sites. Abandoned vehicles, spills of PCB transformer fluid, leaded fuel spills and other chemical spills comprise the 21 site inventory.

1957 - In January
Major Donald Keyhoe, a graduate of Annapolis, retired Marine Corps pilot, and former aide to Charles Lindbergh, became head of a privately organized group called the National Investigations Committee on Aerial Phenomena (NICAP). Formed only several months earlier, NICAP would produce a membership of over 12,000, including many politicians, scientists, and high-ranking military officers. Keyhoe established NICAP headquarters in Washington, D.C., and appointed prominent people to its board of governors, one of whom was Vice Admiral Roscoe Hillenkoetter, a Naval Academy classmate of Keyhoe's and the first director of the CIA in 1947.
Hillenkoetter was also a dominant member of Majority-12, and, along with several of the governors appointed, NICAP became a listening post for the CIA and MJ-12 as well as a disinformation debunking organization intended to both discount and confuse information collected on UFOs and contact with spacebeings. Keyhoe was unaware of these background developments and was sincere in his purpose. Between 1957 and 1966, Keyhoe and other NICAp members appeared on television and radio programs as speakers 900 times.
Because of close and reliable contacts within the military, Keyhoe had been privy to some of the early and secret information concerning the USAF UFO projects. He knew that many sightings had been made by impeccable witnesses who had reported fantastic things, and that lacking feasible alternatives many intelligence analysts had leaned towards "interplanetary" as an explanation. In 1950, he had concluded that the USAF knew the origin of these craft, and that official statements, "contradictory as they appear", were simply "part of an intricate program to prepare America - and the world - for the secret of the disks." Seven years later, the secret was still a secret.

Keyhoe was the perfect candidate to support the establishment while appearing to champion the rights of freedom and democracy. Seeking to verify everything on a human (and therefore rudimentary and realist) scientific basis, Keyhoe refused membership to anyone who professed to have contacted spacebeings. Keyhoe tried to maintain a standard of integrity within the approach of NICAP which would garner respect from the establishment which was intent on keeping information secret from him, together with protecting their, and his, concept of reality and possibility.

1957 - In January
A nuclear bomb shelter program bill was introduced into the U.S.A. House of Representatives.
It called for a Civil Defense Department to be created to oversee the construction of shelters to protect 170 million people. The National Academy of the Sciences estimated that the programs' cost would be $24 billion, or 10% of the total defense budget for the next 6 year period. The Rockefeller Brothers Fund had spent 4 days in conference discussing the bill. A description of the plan was organized by Henry Kissinger and published in "Life" magazine, March 18 edition.
According to "Life" magazine, the urban shelter would cost $300 per person (1957 dollars) protected and was designed to withstand direct nuclear attack. A network of concrete tubes, 20 feet in diameter - built in 500 foot long sections with enough space in each section for 1,000 people - would be sunk deep enough underground so that the occupants would be shielded from atomic blasts. Each section would have its own commissary, medical facilities, air-conditioning machinery, emergency supply of electric power and water storage tanks. Sub-basements of office buildings adjacent to the tubes and subway tunnels would be used as auxiliary shelters. The tubes would extend to the outer edge of a city in order to provide underground evacuation routes. A separate description was provided for suburban shelters, intended to protect family groups from less devastating effects.

1957 - On January 27
Nikita Krushchev addressed the U.S.S.R.'s 21st Congress:
"Indeed, when the USSR becomes the leading industrial power of the world, when the Chinese People's Republic becomes a mighty industrial power and all the socialist countries together will produce more than half of the world industrial output, the world situation will change radically. The successes of the countries of the socialist camp will doubtlessly serve to strengthen the forces of peace throughout the world. By that time the countries working for lasting peace will no doubt be joined by new countries that have thrown off colonial oppression. The idea that war is inadmissible will take still firmer root in the minds of men. This new balance of forces will be so patently evident that even the most die-hard imperialists will clearly see the futility of starting a war against the socialist camp. Backed by the might of the socialist camp the peaceful nations will then be able to compel militant imperialist groups to abandon their plans of a new world war."

1957 - In April
British Defence Strategy changed with the introduction of the Macmillan administration's
(in office from January 13, 1957) White Paper on the "Future Policy of Defence".
The paper stressed the fact that technological advances had accelerated the obsolescence of existing weaponry. The nature of the Soviet threat no longer required large scale conventional forces. Priority would now be given to the development of nuclear weaponry, including ballistic missiles and other high tech devices. Such were highly expensive for an industrial though diminished capital nation. By extending its NATO commitment and accepting nuclear missiles from the USA, British high command officers and statesmen believed their position of advantage with the USA would be stronger. For the Americans, deployment of nuclear missiles in Britain, directed at the USSR, encouraged their feelings of security against the possible threat of an invasion of Western Europe by the USSR or of a direct attack on the USA with retaliation possible from Britain. Britain could draw closer to the USA or to Western Europe: by itself, Britain would never again be more than a second rate power.

1957 -
Frank Edwards claims that in April 1957, five major aeronautical companies were engaged in anti-gravity research projects. Alleges that the U.S. Air Force has a multi-million dollar plant equipped for investigation of anti-gravity and counter-gravitational forces.

1957 - In April
Chester Bowles, a long influential U.S.A. government officer, recognized the consequences of the American policy of containment directed at the Soviet Union:
"The harder the Soviet Union is pressed, the more vigorously her people will rally behind their leaders. If the Kremlin is forced to the wall it will almost certainly strike out with all its formidable nuclear capacity."

Bowles could point to a great deal of evidence in support of his observation, including such items as the speed of Russia's industrial recovery and improvement after the war, its own program of economic aid to other countries, its ruthless countercontainment in Hungary and Czechoslovakia, and the Sputniks. But neither Bowles nor the handful of other men who grasped the same point made much impression on the majority of America's policy-making elite. By and large, those men stressed the urgency of maintaining unquestioned supremacy over Russia.
Startling as it may seem, in view of the constant emphasis on Soviet military power, the central fact confronting any past or present Russian leader is the imbalance of the economic and political development of the nation. Czarist and Soviet history is a record of a continuous, all-pervading struggle to reach a minimum level of material well-being, let alone relative prosperity or actual wealth. The U.S.S.R. is big, but much of its territory is inhospitable to organized society, and other large sections are at best but marginally productive agriculturally and industrially.

1957 - During the year
Henry Kissinger wrote the conclusions of a study group set up by the Council on Foreign Relations.
It was titled: "Nuclear Weapons and Foreign Policy". Kissinger answers the American trauma of the Korean War with the phrase, "Never Again". His proposition is to be prepared for limited war situations in which American-supported armies, capable of rapid deployment, would engage the Chinese and the Soviets along an arc stretching from Turkey to Korea and defeat them decisively with combined physical and psychological weapons. Tactical nuclear weapons, employed in such an environment, were viewed with an expectation of eventual and profitable use.

1957 -
The United Kingdom explodes its first thermonuclear weapon, followed by a series, at Christmas Island, 1,000 miles south of Hawaii in the Pacific Ocean.

1957 - In the late spring
The USA Congress held hearings on the effects of radioactive fallout, for 10 days.
By the tenth day, strontium 90, an entirely new chemical element, the product of the H-bomb, had entered common speech. Near the same time, the British Atomic Energy Authority noted, by its calculations, that the nuclear and thermonuclear tests already conducted there would create 50,000 cancer cases; for every megaton exploded in the future, there would be an additional 1,000 cases.
In response, the AEC Chairman, Lewis Strauss, made light of such fears by asserting that atmospheric testing was essential; otherwise, the USA would not be able to learn how to make "clean" (less radioactive) bombs. Dr. Willard Libby, the only scientist on the AEC, admitted that strontium 90 was a danger to life - but on the same order that cosmic radiation is a danger to people who live on mountaintops. The Federal Civil Defense Administration continued the lies with its printing and distribution of a million copies of a booklet called "What You Should Know About Radioactive Fallout". The pamphlet described fallout as something created during an enemy attack.

Slight mention was made of the fact that fallout resulted from nuclear testing in the upper atmosphere, and then, "By the time [the radioactive particles] reach the surface of the Earth - perhaps days or even months later - most of their radioactivity has been given off harmlessly into the air." Accompanying diagrams suggested that Americans several hundred miles from a major attack would be safe; true estimates were closer to 1,000 miles from either coast. Many civil defense plans were encouraged by the office of the President but little money was contributed. The expectation was not that war would happen but that the common people needed to be kept distracted and preoccupied so that funds could be skimmed from projects so as to feed the Underground Base construction programs and maintain high defense spending.
The British writer Nevil Shute published "On the Beach", which described the last days of human existence following a thermonuclear war fought in 1963. It was later made into a movie. The story pictured a fallout cloud killing all life in its path. It was an enormous public success. The movie appeared shortly before Christmas, 1959.

1957 - In May
The Shah of Iran, with General Fazlollah Zahedi as Prime Minister, who had been placed in power in 1953 with the considerable assistance of the American CIA, agreed to a plan to transfer considerable amounts of gold bullion and capital to Geneva, Switzerland for safekeeping by the Bilderburgers.
The Shah had negotiated his OIL royalties from the Americans, British, French and Dutch earlier and arranged for a portion of the state's share to be sent to a private numbered bank account in Switzerland. These monies continue to be sent to Geneva until 1967. Approximately 1 ton of gold was sent each year: more than 10 tons of gold had arrived by the end of 1967.

1957 - During May
High-level nuclear waste explodes at Kyshtym, U.S.S.R., a plutonium production site near the city of Chelyabinsk in the Ural Mountains, when solutions in a concrete tank submerged in water got so hot that they blew off a 3 foot thick concrete lid. 70-80 metric tons of radioactive waste are released into the atmosphere. Some 217 towns and villages in the area, with a combined population of 270,000 were so radioactively contaminated that they had to be evacuated. The accident was suspected by international observers but was not publicly revealed until Zhores Medvedev, a dissident Soviet scientist publicly revealed it in 1976. Authorities still did not confirm the accident until 1989. Four times as much radioactivity was released as at Chernobyl in the 1980s.

1957 - On July 18
75 players and parents attending a Little League baseball game in Paris, Illinois watch 2 shiny, disc-shaped objects pursue a jet plane across the sky.

1957 - On July 20
A glowing domed object is observed to hover over a field for almost a hour.
Three-toed footprints and a 30 foot circle of wilted grass is found.

1957 - On July 30
Jack Stevens, a 15-year-old Canadian, watched a UFO hover over a cornfield near Galt, Ontario, Canada for 45 minutes. Further investigation revealed a 35-foot diameter circle burned into the field and 18-inch long depressions.

1957 - In August
The U.S.S.R. tested the first intercontinental ballistic missile (ICBM).
Over the months to follow, NSA and CIA intelligence estimates would produce havoc in the senior political and military establishments. In the period between 1957 to 1961, during the second Eisenhower Administration, it was assumed that the U.S.S.R. was producing missiles at a rate held pessimistically low by American intelligence estimates (meaning they should be higher). The commonly accepted belief was that by 1961-62, the U.S.S.R. would have between 1,000 and 1,500 ICBMs; the U.S.A. would only have 130 or so.
In September 1961, it would be revealed that U.S.A. intelligence had then revised their figures on existing U.S.S.R. ICBM numbers to reflect only 3-1/2% of the estimates made in the late 1950s! So, instead of having 1,000 to 1,500 ICBMs, the U.S.S.R. had between 35 and 52. The level of technology suggested that only 1 of 3 would hit its target. That would mean that any attack by the U.S.S.R. would have been met with a devastating counter-strike. By 1962, the U.S.A. had 50 ICBMs; 80 Polaris missiles on roving submarines; 90 IRMSs (intermediate range) missiles in Great Britain, Italy, and Turkey; 1,700 long-range bombers ... clearly the balance of terror was heavy, on the side of the U.S.A.

Quantitative analysis with subjective assumptions were the greatest instigator of mass emotional trauma culminating in paranoia, distrust and fear. In many instances, empty or other-use buildings, identified by aerial reconnaissance were assumed to hold maximum capacity missile production facilities. The primary focus of research and intelligence would have been to know WHAT was in the warehouse space that had been constructed. This error in approach was set into the CIA fabric from the beginning by William Donovan. Errors had occurred before. The capacity for "intelligence" to be purposely or incompetently used to incite politicians and the media, leading to an economic "recovery" on a war budget in peacetime was effective in manipulating the voter completely.
The end result was a national distrust and hatred for the U.S.S.R. and Communism, justification of massive increases in defense budgets, greater likelihood of nuclear accident and nuclear war, greater social distress in the U.S.A. and the U.S.S.R. through diversion of resources to armaments. Lies, deception, distrust was rising on a political scale. Induced personal hardships and stresses were encouraging individuals to act out in despair - the future would see less responsible sexual relationships, emphasis on immediate gratification of pleasure, relief from anxiety and pain, and economic want - by drugs, "popular" music, and credit cards. Capacity for spiritual awareness and constructive coping skills would fall to such depths that a few people would be motivated to search them out. The biggest question would be was this incident an error or a premeditated plot?

1957 -
During this Solar Maximum, there is an all-time record for observed sunspot activity.
SUNSPOT INFLUENCE CHARACTERISTICS - intense solar storms, extensive Aurora Borealis - major influenza outbreaks - produced by intense solar magnetic activity - heats the Earth's atmosphere: creates more frictional drag on low-orbit satellites - 70% more events are observed in the Northern Hemisphere than the South - cause the magnetic field surrounding the Earth to wobble and vary in strength ** - satellite navigation systems are affected by ** - electric power transmission lines are affected by ** - long-distance undersea cables can be affected

1957 - On August 31
"Smoky", a 44 kiloton atomic bomb was exploded, in Utah, as the second of 21 detonations comprising "Operation Plumbob", which would see as many as 8 detonations per month through 1957. It was an atmospheric shot, and more residents received radiation "sunburns" which years later would result in death from cancer.

1957 - On August 31
USA Senator Barry Goldwater, in a letter to a constituent about the issue of UFOs writes:
"I frankly feel there is a great deal to this."

1957 - During the year
U.S.A. General Douglas MacArthur commenting on American disinformation programs and manipulation of the public stated:
"Our government has kept us in a perpetual state of fear - kept us in a continuous stampede of patriotic fervour - with the cry of a grave national emergency .... Yet, in retrospect, these disasters seem never to have happened, seem never to have been quite real."

1957 -
The Asian Influenza Epidemic kills 80,000 people in the USA alone.
More would have died if antibiotics had not been used to limit the influence of secondary diseases.

1957 - By September
The concept of Thyroid blocking was known but never adequately utilized to prepare or protect North American or Soviet populations from the radioactive fallout resulting from their own nuclear weapons tests or the fallout to be expected following a nuclear bombardment. Only a military, scientific and political elite were informed as the civilian population continued to be treated as children: ignorant, irresponsible, immature.
After a nuclear detonation, isotope 131 of iodine is released as part of the fallout dust.
This is typically absorbed by bacteria in the soil. In the process of filtering the iodine out of the soil, they greatly concentrate it within their own life forms. These bacteria may then be absorbed by legumes and other biological forms higher in the human food chain until it reaches the human. Each step in the food chain further concentrates the iodine 131.
A frequent pattern is that when it reaches dairy cattle through grass, the iodine is concentrated and passed on as food to humans and young cattle. Human children tend to accumulate greater amounts of the iodine-131 in their systems than adults and in Utah, after atomic weapons testing nearby, a significant number of children were born retarded or developed weight, digestive and emotional imbalance difficulties. This could have been prevented; however, the military and the government would have had to admit that the tests which they were conducting were, in reality, more dangerous to their own citizens than to anyone else in the world - dangerous enough to result in a delayed epidemic of chronic illnesses including mental illness and cancer.

The human tyroid will only absorb so much iodine.
After that, it excretes any additional iodine which has been ingested out through the kidneys.
If the thyroid is therefore primed with "clean" iodine, the "dirty" iodine will be passed through the system. Potassium iodide is one such substance. Available from the local drug store, it is not harmful unless excessive amounts are taken. In Denmark, Sweden and the USSR, where apparently they believe their adults are less likely to panic at the thought of preparation, pills are provided to the populace. The USA Department of Health would eventually prepare a brochure for the use of potassium iodide - to be distributed only during times of disaster(!) such as a nuclear power plant meltdown, or leak, or, an attack by a foreign nation. Military personnel at missile bases would be supplied with them in case of a local "accident".
To prepare and measure a reasonable dose, pour the chemical into a 2 ounces of water until it no longer dissolves. Using an eyedropper, or a soaked piece of paper, add 4 drops of the solution onto a small piece of bread for an adult, or, 2 drops for a child. Several times that quantity is not unhealthy. Large quantities can be. To help conceal the bitter taste, the bread could be covered with butter or other substance before swallowing. If a situation of hazard arises, it is recommended that you continue the process, once a day, for 100 days.
DO NOT use tincture of iodine as a substitute: it is a poison to humans when taken internally. Also do not expect that you could ingest enough iodine by eating iodized salt. You would get salt poisoning long before you had taken enough iodine to effect a thyroid blocking process.

1957, in early September
Ubatuba, Brazil, several fishermen, contacted a Rio de Janeiro columnist writing that a flying disc had approached them at high speed. The object dived at them, made a tight turn, began a rapid climb and then exploded. They and the beach were showered with thousands of fragments. The men picked up dozens of the smaller pieces, and sent some to the columnist. Spectroscopic analysis later showed that the metal was 99.9% magnesium: a purity incapable for the technology of the time to produce.
Contact with local chemists, the APRO, the USAF, and AECL was made to assist in the analysis and its confirmation. When the columnist tried to find the witnesses, he could not. Suggestions of contact by Brazilian Intelligence requesting their silence on behalf of the USAF were later made. Without contact with them the beach area could not adequately be determined. While government sources suggested that the metal composition and purity (99.9% magnesium) was nothing unusual, the fact that it was from a cast process and that its purity was humanly impossible to duplicate with 1957 technology tends to confirm the stories of the fishermen.
Later, after 1969, Dr. Robert W. Johnson and Dr. Walter W. Walker reported to the APRO that the fragments were directionally solidified castings. Walker stated
"This might be interpreted as meaning that the samples are from a more advanced culture."

1957 - On September 13
The U.S.A. an underground tested atomic device was detonated in an artificial cave which had been hollowed out of solid rock 800 feet down, at the end of a zigzag corridor 2000 feet long. The explosion was registered by seismographs all over the world. At first there was no examination of the underground site: scientists had calculated that access to the cave would be impossible for a hundred years because of the heat absorbed by the rock! But then soundings were made by means of special instruments which showed that this safety margin had been greatly overestimated. Work was begun on clearing the corridor leading to the cave and in 1961 three specialists entered the cave (see 1961).

1957 - On September 19
Major L.D. Chase skippered an RB-47 photo reconnaissance aircraft which took off from Forbes Air Force Base, Topeka, Kansas, on a training flight. It was equipped for electronic counter-measures (ECM), including location of enemy based ground radar units, and identification of the systems employed, such as carrier frequency, pulse rate and width, scan speed and bearing. This mission involved gunnery exercises and navigation over the Gulf of Mexico, and an ECM exercise over southern central United States.
On the return trip from the Gulf of Mexico, the RB-47 crossed the Mississippi coastline near Gulfport and headed for Jackson, Mississippi, at an altitude of 30,000 feet, and a speed of 500 knots. Captain McClure picked up an unexpected signal on a monitor employing back-to-back antennae spinning in a housing beneath the rear fuselage of the plane, the signals of which were processed in a radar receiver and pulse analyzer. The signal he was receiving was at 2800 Mhz and its position changed from the forward left to the right rear and on around to the front of the plane. The RB-47 changed course at Jackson and headed westward towards Fort Worth and Dallas.

The pilots saw a white light in front of them; the crew were warned to prepare for evasive action.
The light traversed quickly from left to right across in front of the plane. McClure tuned the monitor used earlier to 2800 Mhz, immediately picked up the object and noticed that it was now maintaining a constant position relative to the aircraft. After being followed for more than 100 miles, McClure called Carswell AFB whose Ground Control Intercept radar operator confirmed the presence of an object at 10 miles distance from the plane. The object moved forward in front of the plane such that the pilots could then see it as a glowing red object bigger than a house.
Between Fort Worth and Dallas, the UFO changed course and the RB-47 obtained permission to follow it. Immediately, the plane began closing on the object which now showed a stationary reading. The light blinked out and the trace disappeared from the screens. Major Chase put the plane into a left turn and the light and its trace reappeared at a lower altitude of about 15,000 feet. McClure dived his aircraft towards the object and on reaching 20,000 feet, the light and the traces blanked out again. The UFO reappeared again, this time following at a distance of 10 miles, into southern Oklahoma and then disappeared again. The UFO had stayed with the plane for a distance of more than 800 miles during a period exceeding one hour. Officers from the USAF, Project Blue Book, Dr. Allen Hynek and others could not assign the incident to known causes.

1957 - In the autumn
A uranium fire started in the nuclear reactor at Windscale, England.
No public warning was issued as the huge stack spewed out I-131 and other radioactive products.
The police immediately contacted 150 farms in the area, confiscated their milk production for several days, and dumped it into the Irish Sea.

1957 - During September
"Project Prometheus" would be initiated by the U.S.S.R. "Group 17" .. set up in 1946 to determine the nature of UFOs and search for world peace through political domination based on nuclear weapons superiority. In the interim, the aims of the Group had radically changed. Stalin was dead, nuclear armageddon was possible, U.S.S.R. scientists and military professionals of high rank did not trust politicians to respond to political conflicts or environmental hazards "intelligently", and UFOs had been accepted as representations of higher intelligence spacebeing's presence or monitoring of the Earth. Contact had been made to presumed authorities expecting to represent large groups of humanity: persons who possessed access to vast amounts of physical power (nuclear weapons and nuclear power generation).
Participants in "Group 17" now headed "Project Prometheus", a hidden government, elitist by virtue of their level of authority in the nuclear industries, "forward-thinking" in the space, national security and environment industries. The goals now centred around how to save "Some" of humanity from eventual self-destruction. Political structures were seen as inflexible, bureaucratic and unsuited to the global problems threatening the planet. The world of the laboratory, nuclear submarine, political intelligence agency, and space futurist held great promise for solutions through an age-old strategy of humanity: leave the mess behind and start anew elsewhere, with the hope that old mistakes would not be perpetuated in the new environment. The idealism was to take the best that humanity had to offer and start anew.

In mythology, Prometheus was a powerful god that lived on the Earth before humanity.
Prometheus "took some of this earth and kneading it up with water, made man in the image of the gods. He gave them an upright stature, so that while all other animals turn their faces downward, humans turn theirs upward to the heavens and gaze at the stars. He took pity on humanity when his god-brother Epimetheus, gave away his greatest gifts to the animals, and, Prometheus gave fire from the god's own domain and shared it with humanity.

1957 - On September 19
From Jackson to Fort Worth to Dallas, Texas - a glowing red object the size of a house circled and tracked a USAF RB-47 photo-reconnaissance 6-engine jet equipped for electronic counter-measures (ECM) for a distance of more than 800 miles over more than an hour. It was recorded on radar from the plane and ground stations and when flown towards it disappeared to reappear at another altitude or in another direction. A major concern to the military investigators was the question of who was controlling it.

1957 - On September 27
Capelinhos Volcano in the Azores is born a few hundred yards from the island of Fayal in the Azores.
Thousands of glowing lava bombs were expelled half a mile into the air by the accompanying gases and a plume of water vapour billowed 20,000 feet above it. A month later Ilha Nova (new island) had grown to a height of nearly 300 feet above the ocean. A kidney-shaped cone would develop, only to disappear during the night of October 29-30. On November 4, the volcano would again appear above the water, only to founder the following day. On November ? a second island would appear and it would grow to a half-mile long peninsula.

1957 - On October 04
Sputnik 1 was launched as the first announced Earth-originated spacecraft.
It was placed in orbit by an SS-6 Sapwood ICBM, under the direction of the "Sergei Korolev group". It weighed 184 pounds and was intended to sense internal temperatures, pressures, and "other data". It was a 58 cm diameter polished aluminum spherical shell carrying 4 whip antennae. Battery-powered transmissions continued on 20 & 40 MHz for 21 days.
Suppression of the Hungarian uprising only a year earlier encouraged a conclusion that such efforts were not only in the interest of science and fear ran high. Worldwide, countries accused the USA of becoming primarily a "refrigerator technology" based on consumer luxuries; technological confidence was placed by many in the direction of the Soviet Union. During the McCarthy era several years previous, the image of scientists had fallen. The USA media, which had shown little concern over education, now highlighted it in criticism.

Sputnik provided the incentive for the formal USA political establishment to now support a change in defense policy. Previously, the Eisenhower-Dulles policy of "massive retaliation" had been based upon the defence of Europe on the deterrent value of a NATO nuclear response in the event of a large-scale conventional Soviet attack in Europe. Designed in the early period of western nuclear monopoly, when the USA could extend its nuclear umbrella over Europe from military bases leased to it by NATO countries, there was no risk to its own territory of direct attack or nuclear accident. This policy was made before Stalin's death and continued afterwards in ignorance of the ability of the USSR to drop an atomic bomb on the USA from space as early as 1953. But now the evidence of a possibility of such a capability was out in the open. With the launch and acknowledgement of Sputnik, the USA was no longer invulnerable to nuclear attack by virtue of geography. Major changes would have to be made.
Bombers and interceptors were no longer going to be adviseable deterrents nor effective delivery systems. Missiles and "satellite bombs" were now the modern implements of war. Continuing to offer protection to Europe at the expense of a good possibility of one's own direct attack with nuclear weapons would eventually be seen by American politicians as untenable.

1957 - By October
EURATOM had been established by the "Treaties of Rome" to coordinate the use of Atomic Energy production in Europe. Also, the European Economic Community (E.E.C.) was set up to enable trade between the participants on the basis of a customs union to be completed by 1970. In 1952-3, a plan for political union had failed. The more fundamental economic "Mantan Union" of 1951 concerning raw material industrial resources had proven successful and led to a conference of foreign ministers in Messina to discuss expanding the community. The formation of the E.E.C. became the result.
The EEC was founded to establish an economic association based upon free trade, joint social, commercial and financial policies, the internal abolition of restrictive trade practices and the free circulation of labour and capital within the community and to facilitate transfers of capital between this community and other federations of states.
"A Council of Ministers" would be given authority over guidelines and budget.
It would later appoint the E.E.C. Commission, headquartered in Brussels and consisting of 9 members and a president who would hold office for 4-year terms.

1957 - On October 05
Antonio Villas-Boas, while working in his farm field at night, near San Francisco de Sales, Brazil, was abducted aboard a luminous egg-shaped object by 5 small beings; which made slow bark and yelp sounds; who stripped him and took blood samples from him; which wore suits with helmets and 3 hoses. Several days earlier, Antonio and his brother had noticed a strange lighting phenomenon in the middle of the horse corral. It seemed to sweep upward into the sky hovering over the roof of the house first, but no object could be seen.
Several days later, Antonio was working in a field when he saw another bright light, about 300 feet in the air, shaped like a wheel, which he proceeded to chase from one end of the field to the other until he tired. As he moved towards it, the big, round light would move swiftly to the opposite end of the field, as if playing with him. As he was leaving the area, he noticed that it was throwing off rays like the setting sun. Then it disappeared. The next night it returned and Antonio first saw it as an extremely bright large red star overhead.
It grew larger as it approached and changed into an egg-shaped luminous craft which hovered 50 yards over him. After 2 minutes, the UFO dived toward the ground, landing 15 yards in front of him. The whole field became as bright as if in daylight. The rounded object had a distinct rim that was apparently clustered with purple lights. A huge round headlamp on the side facing him appeared to produce the "daylight" effect. Three telescoping legs slid out under it and as it made to land the frightened Antonio turned his tractor to drive away. Several feet later the tractor stalled and its lights went out. The craft now looked like an elongated egg; a bright red light seemed to come from the top of it. There were purple lights near the red one, and there was a small red light on a flattened cupola on top of the craft, that spun rapidly. As Antonio got down from the tractor to run away, he had only taken a few steps when something touched his arm.

He turned to find himself facing a being that was only shoulder height to Boas.
He pushed it away and as it fell, 3 others grabbed him and lifted him from the ground.
He called for help as they carried him and his voice seemed to fascinate them as they stopped and peered attentively into his face before continuing. A door had opened in the craft and a narrow metal ladder extended to the ground. The beings forced him into the craft and he found himself in a square room. It had metallic walls and was brightly lighted by small, high lamps. He was set down on his feet and became aware of 5 beings, two of whom held him tightly. One signalled that he should be taken through to the next room and he was. It was oval and had a pole which ran from floor to ceiling in the middle and an odd shaped table surrounded by backless chairs.
After several minutes, during which they talked amongst themselves in sounds he described later as slow barks and yelps, neither very clear or very hoarse, some long and some shorter, at times containing several sounds at once, and at other times ending in a quaver, they approached him and removed his clothing carefully so as not to tear it. Whenever he yelled, they stopped to peer at him, and although they seemed to be using force, at no time did they hurt him. When he was naked, one of the beings approached him with what looked like a wet sponge and began to wash him with a liquid that was as clear as water but felt thick, although it did not leave his skin oily; he shivered as it dried.

He studied the aliens as they walked around him and noticed that they wore tight-fitting jumpsuits made of soft, grey, unevenly striped cloth. The cloth reached up their necks and over their heads like the hoods on skin diver's wet-suits. The "helmets" seemed to be twice as tall as the head, reinforced with bands of metal at the back and front; he could see their light-coloured eyes through apertures. Three tubes emerged from the top of each helmet, the central one running down the back and entering the clothing in line with the spine; the other two curved away to enter the clothes, one below each armpit. The sleeves ended in thick gloves, which seemed difficult to bend at the fingers. The trouser part fitted closely over the seat, thighs, and lower legs, and the footwear seemed an integral part, the soles being as much as 2 inches thick. On the chest of each being, there was a breastplate-like shield about the size of a slice of pineapple, which seemed to reflect light and was joined to a belt at the waist by a strip of laminated metal. They all appeared to be about 5 feet tall.
Three of them moved him to another small square room through a swinging door that fit so snugly into the wall that he could not see it when it was closed. At the entrance, above the door was an inscription in red, perhaps similar to Aztec, but unlike any other earth culture writings. Two others entered carrying a large vessel with rubber hoses attached. A hose, capped at the end like a child's suction arrow, was attached to his chin while the other tube was pumped up and down; he felt a scratching, and saw the clear, glass vessel fill with his blood. The procedure was repeated and then the beings gathered up their equipment when they finished and left the room.

Inspecting the room, he found a large couch in the middle of it.
He felt tired so he sat on it. Then he noticed a strange smell in the air.
From the walls, about head high, he noticed a gray smoke pouring into the room through perforations in metallic tubes. Its thick, oily smell made him sick; he ran to a corner and in several minutes he vomited.
After what he thought was 30 minutes, he heard a sound at the door, and turning saw a naked woman unhurriedly coming towards him who was more beautiful than any woman he had ever seen before. She was under 5 feet in height, blond or light-coloured hair, almost white. Parted in the middle, it reached halfway down her neck, with ends curling inwards. She was light-skinned, had large, blue slanted eyes, a wide face with high cheekbones (which were soft and fleshy to the touch) and a very pointed chin. Her nose was straight, neither pointed nor turned up. She was slim, with high, well separated, very pointed breasts. Her lips were thin, the mouth being almost like a slit. The ears were normal, but small. Her waist was slender, her hips wide, her stomach was flat and her thighs were large. Her feet were small and her hands looked normal in shape and small.

After the door closed she caressed and stimulated him sexually; they had sexual intercourse, petted more, and then engaged a second time. He tried to kiss her, but she refused, preferring to nibble his chin once. After the second time, she seemed to tire and refused further advances. Although she never spoke, at times she made grunting noises which almost quelled his passion with the impression that he might be with an animal. As she stood up, the door opened and one of the alien men stepped in, calling to her. Before she left, she smiled at Antonio, pointed to her stomach and then to the sky. This gesture alarmed Antonio for 4 years with the suggestion that it might mean that they would return and take him away. Dr. Fontes, suggested later, that it more probably meant that she was going to bear their child on her planet. He noticed she had flaming red pubic hair and armpit hair.
He was then instructed to get dressed. Then, he was shown around the craft.
Another room seemed to have the crew members sitting and talking amongst themselves.
On a table near them was a square box with a glass lid and a clocklike face. There were markings corresponding to 3, 6, 9, and four marks at the 12 position. He tried to steal it as a keepsake and proof of his adventure but was caught. One of the beings took him to the open entrance door but instead of going down the ladder, they stepped onto a platform that went around the ship and the alien pointed out various features of the craft including machines with purplish lights. He glanced at the cupola that emitted a greenish light and that was making a sound like a vacuum cleaner as it slowly spun. When the tour was over, he was taken to the entrance and motioned down to the ground. When he reached the bottom of the ladder, he looked back and the being pointed to himself, then to the ground, and finally to the sky. He signalled Antonio to step back as he disappeared inside.

The ladder telescoped into itself, the door vanished, the lights began to brighten and those on the cupola began to spin faster and faster until the ship lifted quietly into the sky. It stopped to hover about a hundred feet above the ground. The buzzing from it increased as it spun faster, until it was revolving at a blurring speed. The colours flashed through the spectrum before settling on a bright, blinding red. As it changed colour, it changed direction, causing a loud roar, shot off and disappeared seconds later. He had been on the craft for 4 hours.
He returned home hungry and weakened, slept to 4.30 a.m., awoke feeling normal, fell asleep again, and woke up shouting about the incident. Next day he was troubled by nausea and a violent headache. When that left him, his eyes began to burn. Unusual wounds with infections, appeared on parts of his body. When they dried up, they left round, purplish scars. Dr. Fontes later described the symptoms as similar to radiation poisoning.

Because of the unusual nature of the experience, Villas-Boas did not tell anyone other than his mother about it until February, 1958. Because it was believed too bizarre at the time, it was never seriously investigated until February, 1958. The first investigators, Joao Martins, a Brazilian Journalist, and his medical friend, Dr. Olavo T. Fontes, of Rio de Janeiro, proceeded to keep the incident secret for several more years to prevent a rash of "copycat" cases being reported, invalidating the original. In 1961, Dr. Walter Buhler began to make his own investigation, and the report appeared publicly for the first time in January 1965.

1957 - By October
the Ballistic Missile Early Warning System (BMEWS) was brought into development by the USAF with the assistance of Canada, the UK, and other countries. It extended the then existing range of tracking radars from a few hundred km to about 5000 km. The most probable path of a USSR ICBM attack would be rationalized as over the Arctic, so 3 BMEWS radar stations were built at Thule in northern Greenland, at Clear in Alaska and at Fylingdales, in northern England. Each had antennas the size of a football field (Fylingdales had 3) to detect a missile as it rises above the horizon. Trackers and computers would then calculate its trajectory and indicate its impact point.
The sighting of a single missile was rationalized to mean a satellite launch or test firing and was regarded as having a low "threat value"; multiple launches indicated a high threat value. BMEWS' 400-450 MHz trackers, even when they are satisfied that a launch is not hostile but a routine operation, still automatically feed the details to the Missile Warning Center in Cheyenne Mountain, USA.
It was believed that by the early 1970s these stations would become obsolete due to further technological developments. Instead, at Fylingdales, for example, the antennas were shifted in direction to point south so as to detect, compute and predict the re-entry and impact of space debris. Both the USA and the USSR fitted their military satellites at that point with self-destruct mechanisms to prevent their most sophisticated technology from being retrieved by their enemy. A lesser consideration was that larger debris would then not fall on ships, houses or persons.

1957 -
Robert Moudy, on October 15, was in his fields near Foster, Indiana, when he saw a large flat oval object shoot overhead. As the screaming ball passed, the engine of his combine died. When the UFO disappeared, the engine sputtered back to life. Widely reported, the USAF ignored it.

1957, on October 16th
Ella Louise Fortune was travelling near Holloman AFB, near White Sands, New Mexico, when she saw a large white, cigar-shaped object. She took a colour picture of it and analysis showed that it was a lenticular cloud.

1957 - On October 19
USA President Dwight Eisenhower gave a commitment to British Prime Minister Macmillan that he would repeal the McMahon Act of 1946. The Act prohibited USA personnel from sharing any information about the design or construction of nuclear weapons with any other nation, including Britain. On this occasion, assisted by the USSR launch of Sputnik I, Macmillan was able to convey that the American pride in its nuclear superiority was perhaps not adequate without the strategic addition of Britain to its regions of nuclear missile silos and launch pads.

1957 - During the last quarter of the year
There were 30 armed terrorist incidents in Saigon, South Vietnam.
At least 75 local officials were assassinated or kidnapped. On October 22, 13 Americans were wounded in three bombings in Saigon. There was only sparse evidence that North Vietnam was directing, or was capable of directing, that violence. Unknown at the time, American covert forces under the direction of the NSA were responsible for 29 of the incidents with the intent of provoking war between the South and the North. One incident was a copycat murder.

Bilderberger directors had determined at this point that classified military expenditures were the easiest to skim funds from. Research carried out in the psychology, sociology and political science departments of United States universities for the benefit of the C.I.A., indirectly or directly, indicated that mobilization of a population for the purposes of increasing totalitarian control would increase the ease with which war could be entered into. Threats to public safety would increase citizen fear and vengeance calling for increased restrictions on public freedoms and rights. The mass media would be an important ingredient in its sensationalization of the incidents and its graphic representations. It could be easily manipulated by playing on the immaturity of most reporters and the idealism of editors plus the competitiveness of the industry. The same plan of destabilization would later be expanded for use in the United States itself.

1957, on November 2
Pedro Saucedo, and others, saw a large red glowing UFO sweep across the highway in front of his truck while he was driving toward Levelland, Texas. As it landed, the lights of the truck went out and the engine stopped. Saucedo dived out the door and rolled out of the way. His passenger, Joe Salaz, sat terror-stricken, his eyes fixed on the UFO. The blue-green glow faded into a red so bright that he could no longer look at it. During the 3 minutes the object sat on the highway, both men thought they heard noises coming from within. Suddenly, the 200 foot long torpedo-shaped object shot silently into the sky. Saucedo was so scared that he drove to the small village of Whiteface, Texas and phoned in the report to the Levelland police. The deputy sheriff, officer A.J. Fowler, mistook the hysterical call as due to drunkenness.

1957 -
Jim Wheeler, near Levelland, Texas, saw a red, glowing UFO on the road ahead.
As he drove closer, his car engine died and the lights went out. The egg-shaped object, almost 200 feet long, then rose and left quietly and swiftly. He called the Levelland, Texas police an hour after Saucedo.

1957 - On November 2nd
Just before midnight, Jose Alvarez phoned the Levelland police department.
He was 10 miles north of the town and had almost run into a glowing ball of fire in the middle of the road. His car lights and engine had failed only to return when the UFO rose away from the car.

1957 - On November 2-4
A huge, glowing, cigar-shaped object was reported near Levelland, Texas, Elmwood Park, Illinois, White Sands Proving Grounds, New Mexico and the Fiji Islands. A silvery metal had apparently fallen from the sky at the time of the sightings and appeared on the ground in conjunction with its presence.

During 1957 to 1959
"The Transosonde Project" was conducted.
100 balloons were floated across the Pacific at 300 millibars (9000 metres) and were tracked by radio direction finders. This type of balloon was largely made possible by the development and utilization of polyethylene clear plastic which diminished the cooling influence of the loss of sunlight after sunset. Most crossed the Pacific and all provided useful weather data. The project was abandoned with the advent of commercial jet transportation, since the scientific benefits could not offset the hazard of a 300 kg gondola colliding with a plane.
Near this time, 3 technical advances were developed by humanity.
New, strong, high modulus plastic films, microminiature electronics and Earth satellites were developed. When these would be sufficiently put together and combined, new possibilities would arise.

1957 - Later that evening, at 12:30 A.M. on November 3
Ronald Martin, nearing Levelland in his car, noticed his ammeter jump to discharge, then back, as the engine quit and the lights went out. He got out to check the engine, found nothing wrong, and turned around to see a red, cigar-shaped object on the road. Unsure what to do, he got back into his car; several minutes later, the object rose silently and when it was of sight his car would start again.
Martin contacted the Levelland sheriff's office.

1957, later that night, on November 2nd
James Long, had been driving on a country road northwest of Levelland, when he came upon a landed, bright red UFO. His truck engine stopped and its lights went out. He got out and started toward the object, but it took off before he got more than a few feet from his truck. After it was gone, the truck started easily again. He called the Levelland sheriff's office. Sheriff Weir Clem and his deputy sped to the area and at about 1.30 am themselves saw an enormous egg. Clem described it as "looking like a brilliant red sunset across the highway. It lit up the whole road in front of us for about 2 seconds." A second patrol vehicle (with officers Lee Hargrove and Floyd Gavin) witnessed the same from a position behind Clem. Ahead of them was fire marshall Ray James, who saw the object as well and had electrical malfunctions with his car. After his retirement in 1975, Sheriff Clem gave a more specific description of what he saw as "The object was shaped like a huge football and had bright white lights. No living human could believe how fast it travelled. The thing was as bright as day. It lit up the whole area."

1957 - on the evening of Nov 2/3
After receiving 4 calls in quick succession, the Levelland sheriff, Weir Clem decided to investigate.
Within an hour of leaving the office he, a deputy, and a second group consisting of 2 highway patrol officers and a Constable all saw the glowing object at a distance. The sheriff called Reese AFB in nearby Lubbock, Texas, and they , in turn, relayed the sightings to Project Bluebook. Officer Fowler estimated that he had received at least two dozen calls that night from people seeing something. In 1977, Sheriff Clem said that after the publicity over the next few days, the number of witnesses rose to about a hundred. Sheriff Clem remembered the weather that evening as "a few thin, whispy clouds in the sky, but not enough to obscure the moon." The official weather records show "clouds were thin, at 8000 feet, with a temperature of 50 degrees F and a light wind of 8 knots". A fair bit of rain and lightning did arrive in a storm on November 4th, 24 hours after the sightings. The investigators from Project Bluebook arrived on November 5th and interviewed two people, not including any of the above.
Shortly later, the USAF had rationalized the sightings to a streak of lightning during a heavy electrical storm and the loss of power to the car and truck engines as the driver's fear resulting in them unconsciously turning the engine off. This explanation was unsatisfactory and movement in the form of a call for a scientific investigation began. Within days, Donald Menzel, a Blue Book Project supporter primarily interested in mirage effects, proposed "ball lightning" as the explanation. Most people outside of Levelland trusted their government, so the official word was never questioned by the media. Thirty years later, most atmospheric scientists do not support anything more than that ball lightning is very rare, does not form repeatedly, is never as wide as a road, or stable for minutes on end, and has no effects on car engines and lights. When the Condon Committee investigated reports 10 years later, the Levelland sightings were not investigated.

1957 - On the morning of November 3
Newell Wright, a college student, called in his report at the insistence of his parents.
He had been east of Levelland, Texas, at 12.05 am, driving, when his ammeter jumped to 'discharge', then fell back to normal as his car engine stopped. Thinking something was wrong with the engine, he got out and looked under the hood to find nothing apparently wrong. Closing the hood, he then noticed a greenish oval on the road in front of him. He hurriedly tried to reverse his car, but it still would not respond. Several minutes later the UFO rose and headed north (towards where Frank Williams had his encounter), and Wright drove home. At the time of his report, in the morning, he was unaware of any other reports made during the night.

1957 - Early on the morning of November 3
Two men on patrol at White Sands, New Mexico reported they saw a bright egg-shaped ball of fire, 'two hundred feet long and seventy-five feet wide' falling in the sky, the light went out, then just before the object either hit the ground or hovered just above it, the light came back on. It took off at a 45 degree angle. That evening another patrol, unaware of the first report, witnessed and reported a second occurrence. The Air Force put the sightings down to the imagination of the young and impressionable minds of the officers involved. The site was beside some bunkers which were the remnants of the July 16, 1945, Trinity first experimental atomic bomb blast. It had formed a depression a half-mile wide and broke windows 120 miles away. It is 37 miles southeast of Socorro and the public are now allowed access through a part of the year. The White Sands' public affairs office is at (505) 835-0424.

1957 - On November 3
Sputnik II, a USSR satellite weighing 1120 pounds was announced launched for the purposes of cosmic ray detection, solar ultraviolet and x-ray radiation sensing, temperature and pressure monitoring and the demonstration that life could live in an artificial environment in space. It becomes the first public demonstration of life being sent into space from the Earth by humans. Laika, a dog, remains alive for about 10 days, until its oxygen supply finishes. Re-entry occurs April 14, 1958 after 162 days.

1957 - Between November 4-11
US Air Defense Command Headquarters at Colorado Springs received 130 reports of sightings of UFOs.

1957 - On November 4th
James Stokes was driving towards El Paso when near Orogrande, New Mexico, the engine of his car began to sputter and the radio faded out. As the engine quit, Stokes guided the car to the side of the road. Ahead he could see a group of people talking and pointing to the sky. Looking up, he saw a large, oval-shaped object shooting towards the road. It buzzed the highway, turned to the northwest, and then reversed for another pass at the cars before disappearing. As the object had passed over the cars, Stokes could feel its heat. He thought it had been 3000 feet above them and estimated the speed of it at 760 mph. Hours after the sighting, Stokes noticed an itching on his face, hands, and wrists. The areas that had been exposed during the passby reddened as if they had been sunburned. Stokes was an employee of the Air Force Missile Development Center at the Holloman Base, and had been in the Navy for 24 years and was believed to be a very competent observer.

1957 - On November 5th
R.O. Schmidt walked into the Kearney, Nebraska, police station to describe his experience.
While he had been inspecting a field of grain, he had come upon what he first thought was a wrecked balloon. When he was 30 feet away, he was stopped by a beam of light which paralysed him. Two men from the object searched him for weapons, then invited him on board. Inside he saw 2 women and 3 men working on instrumentation and was told that the people meant him no harm. They couldn't tell him where they were from but did say that they might announce their presence in the near future.
When Schmidt left, there was a flash of light and the object was gone.
Police searched the area and only found a greenish oil-like substance that they took to the Kearney College for analysis. A rash of occupant reports followed in the next few days which were very similar and did not show any other connection or communication between the observers. By November 20th, authorities had psychiatrists examine Schmidt; they concluded that he was unstable and very ill and committed him to a mental institution. After he was released, he made many more UFO "contacts" and joined the lecture circuit.

1957 - On November 6th
Everett Clark saw a landed object in a field near his home in Dante, Tennessee.
Four men and a woman were near it and Clark spoke to them briefly before they got back into the UFO and it disappeared quickly and quietly into the sky. Neighbours and friends said Clark was intelligent and honest and they didn't think he had made up the story.

1957, on November 6th
Several hours after Clark had seen the UFO, Richard Kehoe, who was driving to work, near Santa Monica, California, when the engine of his car died. Kehoe noticed that there were two other cars stalled, and when he got out, he could see a brightly lighted object on the beach. Kehoe and the men from the other vehicles, Ronald Burke and Joe Thomas, were talking when two humanoids got out of the egg-shaped object and walked over to them. The beings were yellowish-green in colour and although they tried to speak with the men, the observers could not understand them and were terrified. Unsuccessful, the beings returned to the object and took off. One of the men reported the incident to the police, but no-one was interested. There had been over 100 reports on November 6^th.

1957, on November 6th
Edwin Leadford, reported that he had taken a picture of a cigar-shaped craft over Anaheim, California.
Because Leadford had called the police on 6 separate occasions to report others had damaged the gas station where he worked or had stolen his car keys, the USAF tried to suggest that he was a poor witness ?

1957, on the evening of November 6th
Four campers at Lake Baskatong, near Ottawa, Canada, saw a bright sphere hovering over a hill.
The light was so bright that it lit the clouds above it. Their shortwave radio failed shortly after the object appeared and would only work on one frequency, giving off a strange Morse-like code. When the UFO disappeared 15 minutes later, the radio began to work normally again.

1957, on November 6th
Rene Gilham, address unknown, saw a UFO hovering over his farm.
After it left, he began to itch and his skin began to redden. Before the rash disappeared, he had to be hospitalized for 11 days.
Over 5,700 sightings were reported in the U.S.A. on one day, November 6^th.

1957, on November 7th
Melvin Stevens, was driving near Meridian, Mississippi, when he saw an object on the highway.
As he approached, 3 men, about 4-1/2 feet tall got out of the object and came towards him. They wanted to talk but he couldn't understand what they were saying. After what seemed a long time, they gave up, re-entered the object, and took off. Stevens made his report in Memphis minutes later.

1957 - Also on November 7th
Mr and Mrs. Linsey Trent while driving near Orogrande, New Mexico, noticed that their speedometer jumped from 60 to 110 and back. To the south they saw a bright, metallic oval object flying high. It had well-defined edges and was in sight for several seconds. When it disappeared, the speedometer returned to working normally.

1957 - During November
Harold Macmillan, British Prime Minister, met with USA President Eisenhower in an effort to bring the two nations closer in political and military co-dependency. During the period, British diplomacy with France had been minimal and such would annoy the French. Britain was also arranging to reduce its troop commitment to European defense bringing its contingent down from 80,000 to 50,000. This further annoyed the French for it suggested that Britain was abdicating its part in the defence of Europe against the USSR. In reality, Britain was too poor to afford the troops and was looking to cut costs. The final agreed upon reduction was in the range of 13,000 troops.

1957 - On November 10
A Madison, Ohio, woman said that she had been gardening when she saw a very bright triangle-shaped object over her house. She watched it for 30 minutes but finally had to look away because it irritated her eyes. A few days later, a rash developed over her body which was like a burn.

1957 - By November
The RADINT (Radar Intelligence) Program had been set up by the USA government to detect and observe Soviet ICBM tests.

1957 - During the week of November 11
Cherokee Indians reported sighting a UFO resembling a fireball that settled on Great Smoky Mountains National Park near Cherokee, North Carolina.

1957 - On November 11
A Civilian Engineer with the US Army in Japan sighted a UFO on Lake Imba-numa on the Bozo Peninsula about 50 miles from Tokyo.

1957, dated November 12
An FBI status report, stated
"Ever since the Russians released 'Sputnik' there has been a great increase in the number of flying saucers and other UFO's reportedly seen by people all over the US."

1957 - On November 14
The power in Tamaroa, Illinois, failed for about 10 minutes over a four-mile area while a hovering UFO flashed brightly.

1957 - After November 20
The number of sightings began to drop off.
As the public became more aware of the antagonism and ridicule which was likely to be directed towards them by government officers who were to protect them, few wanted to be accused of creating a hoax, mistaking a mundane occurrence for a UFO, or having their credibility and sanity questioned. During the period November 2 through 15, there were 100's of sightings worldwide.

1957 - During the year
"Precon Process and Equipment Corporation", of New Orleans, USA, announced that it was in the business of placing subliminal images in movies, on billboards, and in taverns. The firm was set up by a psychologist and a neurologist with engineering training. They said they had been experimenting for several years and had applied for patents. Later, they stated that they had doubled the consumption of a beverage advertised subliminally on the premises where it was for sale.
Soon afterward, television stations across the USA began using the technique, followed by movie producers, newspapers, and magazines. While the process was eventually banned in Great Britain, few regulations restricted its use in North America. Over a short period of time, considerable interest was expressed against the process in North America, such that the public actually believed that the technique had been stopped. In reality, admen and media producers simply stopped bragging about the technique, stated that they were not using it, cast doubt on print claims on the basis that the untrained eye could not detects its use, and, that a person consciously trying to find background images could "imagine" such which were not present.

Over the next several decades the process would become much more sophisticated than simply inserting frames showing specific motivational phrases, words, or images in movies - to weaving specific focus words mutely into image backgrounds such that only a relaxed eye could lift the fabrication out of a textured background. Once sought "smooth" pictures of clothing, carpeting, the sky, a person's skin, grass, etc. - became textured - to show reality and provide a base in which to insert subliminals. Words with high emotional overtones such as Whore, raped, sex, fuck, bitch, penis, and others were increasingly used. The word "sex" was subliminized as many as 60 times into the background of some pictures. The use of an amber photographic filter was sometimes helpful in increasing the contrast of the photo to reveal the subliminals to the conscious eye.

1957 - On December 2
A Circular Object is seen between Royere and Bourganeuf, France.

1957 - During December
Armaments were Supplied to Tunisia during the height of the war with France, by both the USA and Britain.
It was no secret that such arms often ended up in rebel hands in Algeria - to be used against the French government forces (Algeria was still a French colony). The French media enlarged the participation and responsibility of the British almost to the point of stating that the British were intentionally supporting the Algerian rebels. French leaders feeling betrayed by the British, drew closer to the Germans.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1958 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
Around the World in Eighty Days; Run Silent, Run Deep; Vertigo; The Defiant Ones; Witness for the Prosecution; Inn of the Sixth Happiness; South Pacific; Auntie Mame; The Blob; Desire Under the Elms; I Want to Live; A Tale of Two Cities; A Night to Remember

Songs:
It's All In The Game; Twilight Time; All I Have To Do Is Dream; Bird Dog; Patricia; Volare; Little Star; Don't; Tom Dooley; Get A Job; Purple People Eater; Poor Little Fool; Yakety Yak; Great Balls of Fire; At the Hop; Peggy Sue; Ballad of a Teenage Queen; I Can't Stop Lovin' You; Devoted to You; Oh, Lonesome Me; Send Me the Pillow You Dream On.

1958 - By this time,
Ferdinand Marcos, a criminal lawyer from the Philippines, had visited the American cities of Chicago and Miami and been to the Bahamas. In each he had met with American Mafia leaders including Chicago Mafia godfather Tony Accardo. A former bodyguard and enforcer for Al Capone, Accardo had taken over the Capone mob and outlasted rival Sam Giancana. Marcos became involved with Harry Stonehill and Ted Lewin, both assisted by Accardo. Marcos also met and became involved in business transactions with millionaire ex-convict Wallace Groves and gambling and black-money interests tied to Meyer Lansky.

1958 -
The USAF XB-70 stealth alien-based technology "BLACK" high security project begins.
It will continue until 1967 when it will be "cancelled". It will receive funding in excess of $1,468,000,000. Reverse engineered and alien-assisted technology are intended to be developed into the aircraft.

1958 - During the period 1958 to 1965,
"Operation Blue Book" logged 4487 cases (an average of over 500 per year); only 113 got through the USAF selection process. The years 1966 and 1967 saw 2049 cases reported in the U.S.A. of which 51 were selected as unexplainable.

1958 - On January 10,
Captain Chrysologo Rocha was sitting with his wife in the porch of a house overlooking the sea near Curitiba, Brazil, when he was surprised to see what he first thought was a new island. With his binoculars, he focused on the object which seemed to be growing in size. He called out to others in the house and soon 9 people were observing the object. It seemed to consist of 2 parts, one in the sea, and one suspended above it. Then, without warning, both parts submerged; soon after a steamer came into view and passed close by the sight where the craft had been. Ten minutes after the ship had gone the object resurfaced. This time, the observers noticed that the upper section was attached to the bottom by a number of shafts or tubes, which were quite bright and small objects were seen to be passing up and down the shafts, in disorderly fashion. This second observation lasted several minutes until the sections closed up, and the whole thing submerged again.
One of the witnesses, the wife of another army officer, telephoned the Forte dos Andrades barracks at Guaraja, and the air force base was alerted. An airplane was sent to investigate but arrived too late to observe anything.

1958 - Early in January,
The "Almirante Saidanha", a survey ship of the Brazilian Navy, was on an IGY mission from Rio de Janeiro bound for the rocky island of Trinidade, where the Navy had an oceanographic station. Just before the ship was to return, Captain Viegas, USAF ret., called to Almiro Baruna, a specialist in underwater photography, that there was a bright object in the sky. Baruna took 9 pictures of the object before it disappeared behind the main peak of the island. Not all of the photos would be released later. It briefly reappeared, appeared to stop, and then moved away swiftly.
Back in Rio de Janeiro, the Brazilian Navy examined the negatives, found them to be genuine sightings, set up a mock re-run of the incident, and computed the speed of the object to be 550 to 600 mph, with a diameter of 40 yards. It was Saturn-shaped and at least 100 people had seen it.

1958 - In January,
Pierre Baranger, a professor and director of the laboratory of organic chemistry at the Ecole Polytechnique in Paris, established in 1794, announced his discoveries before a distinguished audience of chemists, biologists, physicists, and mathematicians at Switzerland's Institut Genevois. His discovery was that plants transmute elements: they have the capacity to change one element into another. This feat is one which human alchemists had tried to accomplish for centuries. Only through the use of alpha particle nuclear radiation in 1919, had Ernest Rutherford been able to modify one element into another. The tiniest blade of grass and the frailest flower achieve on a daily basis what humans require an atom smasher to do. Which is more "intelligent"?
"For me, any meticulously performed experiment is a homage to science even if it shocks our ingrained habits. ... I understand perfectly well that you are astonished by these results. For they are astonishing. I understand perfectly well that you are seeking the error which could make nonsense of these experiments. But so far no such error has been found. The phenomenon stands: plants can transmute elements."

Baranger had established that seeds of Cerdagne vetch growing in distilled water showed no change in phosphorus or potassium content. But seeds growing in a calcium salt solution varied their phosphorus and potassium content by the enormous factor of 10%, and that calcium increased in both groups.

1958 - On January 31,
Explorer I, a 30.8-pound American space satellite was launched with a Jupiter-C rocket to study cosmic rays, micrometeorites, temperatures of the front and rear skin and the nose cone. It discovered the Van Allen radiation belt about the Earth. Before this there was little recognition of interstellar cosmic radiation and some people believed that the vacuum of space would suck an object away from the Earth once it reached a high enough altitude.

1958 - In February,
The WS-117L spy satellite development program was transferred to joint CIA/USAF supervision at the insistence of U.S.A. President Eisenhower, who, spurred on by advisors sympathetic to Operation Prometheus, had become paranoid about Soviet advances in technology. It would be a year before there was a successful launch. 16 of the first 17 satellites would fail.
The project centred around the Corona reconnaissance satellite that would be put into space by a Thor intermediate-range ballistic missile. It would send back to Earth a recoverable photographic capsule. Problems of bad weather conditions and technical difficulties in the release and collection systems were persistent. Technical problems included electrical malfunctions in the launch rocket, radio failures in the photographic trigger mechanism, failure of capsule parachutes to open, ground radar defects that made it impossible to find some units, re-entry over the Soviet Union due to a timing error, failure to achieve orbit. Eisenhower became extremely frustrated.
The American public were told that the satellites were weather/scientific satellites called Discoverer.
The first successful launch was February 28, 1959. The first successful satellite, Discoverer 14, entered orbit in August, 1960. By January, 1961, the Corona was dependable in the eyes of the public and the bureaucrats. The Soviet Union had passed these difficulties much earlier, before worldwide detection and interest became a factor. While the American and Soviet governments would spend billions on outnumbering each others satellites, Project Prometheus and its American counterpart would be sending huge space capsules to the Moon in preparation for approaches to Mars. Since there was no intent to orbit the Earth, detection was not likely.

1958 - On March 17,
Vanguard I, an American 3.25-pound sphere was launched by Navy Test Vehicle 3 to record temperatures and test geodetic instruments.
Used to map islands in the Pacific Ocean, it led to the discovery that the Earth was pear-shaped.

1958 - On March 18,
Explorer III, an American 31-pound cylindrical satellite is launched.
It carries a tape recorder for storage of cosmic ray readings, micrometeor sensing recording, and skin and internal temperature readings. More information on the Van Allen Belt is provided.

1958 -
Calvin C. Girvin claims to have survived death due to the intervention of Venusians who healed him, and for whom he is now an agent.

1958 -
Professor D. Nalivkin, of the Soviet Academy of Science, writes the following in "Geological Catastrophes":
"Observations of catastrophic phenomena are limited by the time span of no longer than 4000 - 6000 years. For geological processes this is a short period and it is quite possible that some of the most terrible catastrophes have not been recorded in the chronicles of mankind .... We must not fit into modern standards all that has happened on the Earth throughout ... its existence."

1958 - On May 15,
Sputnik III, a USSR 7,000-pound conical space capsule is launched with the intention of studying the Earth's magnetic field, its electrostatic field, as well as changes in atmospheric pressure, temperature and micrometeor presence.

1958 -
Gaston Burridge reports that Townsend Brown's propulsion principle based on the Biefeld-Brown effect was successfully used by Brown to fly saucer-like discs and that the method has definite anti-gravitic potentials.

1958 - During June,
Charles de Gaule is elected French Prime Minister.
Political instability had persisted in France since the end of the War in 1945: there had been at least 17 prime ministers in the period. De Gaule, the general, would provide the country with a stronger sense of national purpose than it had experinced in a decade. His authoritarian style would mean a ruthless control of and a strategic manipulation of a large and dense population with widely ranging neighbourhood sensibilities.

1958 - On June 24,
British Prime Minister Harold Macmillan wrote the following to his Foreign Secretary, Selwyn Lloyd, with a copy to the Chancellor of the Exchequer:
"I feel we ought to make it quite clear to our European friends that if Little Europe is formed without a parallel development of a Free Trade Area ... we would fight back with every weapon in our armoury. We would take our troops out of Europe. We would withdraw from NATO. We would adopt a policy of isolationism. We would surround ourselves with rockets and we would say to the Germans, the French and the rest of them: 'Look after yourselves with your own forces. Look after yourselves when the Russians overrun your countries'. I would be inclined to make this position quite clear both to de Gaulle and to Adenauer (Germany), so that they may be under no illusion."

Such an attitude was presented.
Such are the spiritual weaknesses of humans and their leaders.
Like a spoiled child, afraid of being excluded from a newly forming peer group, and accustomed to receiving special considerations, Macmillan, representing 50 million people, was demanding acknowledgement and a position of authority. If refused, he was threatening to endanger the very ones he expected respect from, and, he would go so far to endanger the economic safety and political freedom of his countrymen. If his threat were carried out, the British would be totally dependent upon the USA.
In response to Macmillan's "blackmail" coercive communication, General Charles de Gaulle, now leader of the French expressed his determination to acquire a nuclear deterrent "by some means or other." He confirmed to Macmillan that "France's objective was to have nuclear weapons, even if they were made by others." At that point, Macmillan, assuming his perceived "special relationship" with the USA backed off to leave the responsibility for such proliferation of nuclear weapons with the USA. Stating now that Britain only had enough nuclear weapons for "diplomatic rather than military purposes," Macmillan commented that "We did not want these arms to spread much further." Like too often occurs with similar domestic communications between humans, the French would never forget the threat, and, would always desire a position as a nuclear military power in the world.

1958 - During July,
At the Los Alamos Laboratory, U.S.A., a bacterium of the "Pseudomonas" type is found to continue to multiply under the influence heavy doses of radiation. The bacteria could support 10 million roentgens of radiation for 8 hours and in the medium of heavy water in a nuclear reactor it produced every 20 minutes. The mortal dose for humans is 500 roentgens or less. Other bacteria of the Bacillus and Achromobacter types were also seen to be resistant to radiation effects. Micrococcus radiodurans resisted radiation doses 3,000 times the fatal dose for humans. During an experiment involving radioactive mercury, a Pseudomonas species appeared to "digest" the radioactive mercury, making another element unidentifiable at the time.
Louis C. Kervan suggested that the gamma rays impeded the reproduction of the ADN leading to a progressive death of the cells. The speed of reproduction, being considerable, and the enzymatic activity also being considerable, the bacteria could resist an irradiation several thousands of times greater than a lethal human dose. Kervan would suggest in 1960 that these types of bacteria be considered in research as a possible means to the elimination of radioactive wastes from the nuclear industry. For the next 40 years, bureaucratic organizations and the status quo would prevail in opposition to real possibilities for safeguarding the health of humanity!

1958 - In July,
USA President Dwight D. Eisenhower urged the U.S. Congress to authorize the Secretary of State to refuse passports for any reason of national security. Intensive lobbying followed. Eventually, Congress declined to legislate blanket authority to the State Department. By an act of bureaucracy, the loyalty oath, declared illegal in 1958, was retained on passport application forms by the State Department on the pretext that it would be expensive to junk all the old forms.

1958 - On July 26,
Explorer IV, an American 38.4-pound cylindrical satellite is launched to study corpuscular radiation at several intensity levels together with a measurement of internal temperatures.
A greater definition of the Van Allen Belts is noted.

1958 - On August 3,
The Nautilus, a U.S. Navy nuclear submarine, reached the North Pole.
It was in the midst of a 21 day, 8146 mile silent, secret, transpolar underwater voyage.
The 107 crew conditions aboard the submarine included soft lighting, air-conditioning to a temperature of 72 degrees Fahrenheit, sunlamps, fresh vegetables and fresh meat, and purified and regenerated air. A jukebox played music much of the time. Garbage was routinely jettisoned during the voyage, requiring only temporary reductions in speed and depth. Much of the trip was completed at a speed of 20 knots and a depth of 400 feet. The point of departure had been the USN base at Pearl Harbour.
The voyage was hailed as
"essentially a triumph of machinery and of the diverse intellects of the men who had invested in it.
... It was her speed, endurance and marvellous, salmonlike mechanical brain rather than
the efforts of her crew which really conquered the pole. ... Once under the ice, the men of the
Nautilus were simply servants of their wonderful machine. ... It was pretty routine."
By crossing under the "top of the world, Nautilus stamped her name beside that of Sputnik in the minds of millions."
Those who agreed to be interviewed by the media after the voyage included:
Commander William R. Anderson Electrician 1/C James Sordelet Steward Thomas Emmanuel Electrician 1/C Joe Degnan Electrician 2/C Joseph R. Higgins Electrician 1/C Jim Irwin Steward 1/C Walter J. Harvey Engineman J. McNally Jr. Fire Control Tech Chief John Krawczyk Electronics Technician William Hansen Lieutenant Steve White Commander (Dr.) Richard F. Dobbins Civilian technician, Thomas E. Curtis Navigating Officer, Lieutenant Shepard Jenks Executive Officer Frank M. Adams Engineman 2/C David Long Torpedoman 3/C William Patrick O'Neill

The crew were described as
"One would think that Washington had built them to specification ... less likely than any other group in the world to get on each other's nerves, panic in fear, crack under pressure or let each other down. ... honest, open, clean-cut, All-American, small-town ... the only thing they seem to lack is imagination. I suppose they are not only submarine types but the spaceman of the future."

A relatively thin layer of ice covers the polar sea; it is seldom more than 12 feet thick.
In the summer the ice opens into innumerable lanes and "lakes" called "leads" and "polnyas".
The Arctic Ocean is typically quite deep, and at this point, was poorly charted.
The invention of the Fathometer, by physicist Waldo K. Lyon, enabled more accurate and less dangerous soundings to be taken than had been the practice earlier. An earlier 2-year trip aboard the icebreaker Burton Island enabled Robert D. McWethy, now a Commander, to take soundings for over 1000 miles along the Arctic coast. McWethy had been serving in the office of Chief of Naval Operations when the Nautilus was commissioned. Rear Admiral Hyman Rickover had much to do with the design and production of the Nautilus. The Arctic Ocean represents a large basin with a mountain range crossing it and occasional hills and ledges. Its most shallow are is in the western Bering Strait.

During the summer of 1957, Nautilus had been sent under the ice off Greenland to cruise more than 1,000 miles beneath the ice cap and approach within 180 miles of the pole. Numerous soundings and reconnaissance information were collected for future missions. In February, 1958, the Nautilus was sent to New London for high priority, round-the-clock overhaul and modification. Some of these modifications included newly designed batteries and a missile-like guidance system.
The inertial guidance system solved the problems of magnetic anomalies in the area, the lack of access to radio beacon and astronomical sightings, and the fact that the geographic North Pole is a varying distance from the magnetic north pole. The inertial guidance system tracks the position of the ship by accounting for every movement of the ship relative to the Earth, including measuring the Earth's rotation and maintaining a record of where it has been. Two accelerometers help the navigators determine how far and how fast the vessel has travelled from a known starting point. Thus, changes in speed or direction are less likely to result in errors and system confusion than would occur with the use of other known systems.

By June, the Nautilus had been berthed at Seattle.
Commander Anderson and Physicist Lyon, using assumed names and flying on commercial airlines left Seattle, chartered a plane and flew over the Bering Strait to preview the ice conditions. The 90-mile strait between Alaska and Siberia, and the Chukchi Sea, after it - would represent the most shallow part of the proposed trip. There, depths could be as shallow as 120 feet and pack ice could extend down for as much as 75 feet at times. All appeared acceptable and the two men returned to Seattle and prepared the Nautilus to sail. Until it was underway for 12 hours, the rest of the crew were unaware that Lyon was on board. 30 miles under the ice cap and moving into the Chukchi Sea, the submarine encountered ice that thrust down from the surface as much as 80 feet. The local depth of 160 feet left only 80 feet of clearance; the keel to periscope dimension of the Nautilus was 50 feet. With such little clearance it was decided to delay the trip and for nearly 5 days the submarine sailed 500 miles seeking a better passage. Not finding one, Anderson headed the submarine for Pearl Harbour.
On July 23, the Nautilus sailed off again to attempt the mission.
A 30-second radio fix was taken while submerged at Little Diomede Island, before entering Bering Strait any distance. This time, the route was changed such that the submarine went through the Barrow Sea Valley. For 800 miles of the 1,800 miles of ice covered sea, the bottom was uncharted. An undersea ridge in one location resulted in a reduction in speed to 10 knots and a reduction in depth to 200 feet. Underwater television cameras displayed the underside of the ice sheet on submarine monitors. On Sunday, August 3, the Nautilus was recorded as having reached the North Pole. The voyage then continued to a surfacing near Iceland and port duty in England.

1958 - During the year,
The U.S.A. National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) is created formally.
It is publicly given overall responsibility for the American space program.
It would become a nationally owned industry in which decisions were made more on the basis of politics than science. Private enterprise of a non-essential nature would benefit as Congressmen would lobby for the letting of contracts in their voter district. NASA quickly learned that it would have better acceptance of its budgets if as few as 25 workers in a Congressman's area were benefiting from NASA contracts. NASA was an extension of the Presidency; it had no purpose defined within the constitution; it did not fulfill an absolutely necessary function for the country; it represented the will and pride of a nation.
90% of the NASA budget would go to aerospace and defense contractors.
When the General Accounting Office (GAC) investigated the efficiency of NASA programs in the 1980s it would find that 25 out of 29 programs were overbudget an average of 77% with some running as high as 400% over. Project completions were up to 8 years late - with an average lateness of 48 months. NASA property (tools, instrumentation, facilities) valued at $13 billion dollars were administered from such poor records that the location of some equipment was unknown and the actual amount which had been paid out was unknown. NASA officials and statisticians were known to present budgets which were outright lies in order to get initial project funding.
Once begun, Congress could sometimes be counted to approve project overspending out of fear of embarrassment at cutting a program into which tens or hundreds of millions of dollars had already been sunk. In other cases, Congressmen slashed monies from needed programs to ensure the continuation of programs which were employing voters in their region in opposition to recommendations to cancel the programs as no longer of value. With this degree of poor documentation and cost overruns, - fund skimming, relocation of equipment, bribes, most of all - budgeting based on theoretical designs and imaginative projections - would all be possible, and likely.

1958 - During the year,
Dr. Manson Valentine, a paleontologist, geologist, and underwater archaelogist, began taking photographs from small planes as he flew over and near the Bahama Banks.
"Since that time we have located well over 30 areas where there are probably man-made remains either on the sea bottom or below it. For example, between Diamond Point and Tongue of the Ocean there is a network of modular straight lines intersecting at right, obtuse, and acute angles. It resembles an architect's plan for a complex urban development with still more lines in the distance ...
Between Orange Key and Bimini, I saw a series of enormous rectangles along the sea bottom connected by straight lines. ... I considered them man-made as they were straight lines running along the sea bottom right to the dropoff of the continental shelf .... At Riding Rocks a vast expanse of (the seabed under) shallow water is divided into squares. At Orange Key, south of Bimini, there is an absolutely straight rectangle the size of a football field. All the way to Bimini there is a succession of architectural patterns, square and rectangular, indicating the size of what lies below. ..."

1958 - During August,
"Project 627" (Leninsky Komsomol), the first nuclear-propelled Soviet submarine was completed.
The Americans would not be aware of it for two years.
Nato codenamed the November, it had a 2-reactor propulsion plant, which was referred to by Western Intelligence as both a Type 1 and the HEN. It used pressurized water as the heat exchange medium to produce 30,000 horsepower, compared with 15,000 horsepower for the American Nautilus and only 7,500 horsepower for the subsequent Skate (SSN 578), the first USA series-produced nuclear submarine. The November had a submerged speed of 30 knots; at first, the American intelligence rationalized it at less than 25 knots.
Between 13 and 15 units were completed between 1958 and 1963.
With an overall length of almost 360 feet (109 m.), a beam of almost 30 feet (9.1 m.) and a draft of over 25 feet (7.7 m.), its surface speed was rated at 16 knots, while its submerged speed reached 30 knots. Its rated depth now increased to 985 feet (300 m.); the crew totalled 80; 24 torpedoes were on board. The November was faster than contemporary USA submarines and could dive deeper. The crush depth of the November was close to 1400 feet; German Type XXI submarines had a crush depth of 1082 feet; American late WWII submarines had a crush depth of only 606 feet. 5 of the Novembers underwent extensive modification with 36 feet (11 m.) being inserted to provide underwater docking and transfer facilities and a boardroom. A number of engineering casualties and fires were experienced in the group; some were the result of nuclear technology, others were the influence of ultranationalist individuals.

Nuclear propelled submarines changed life on board.
9-month sea terms could now be planned.
During most of that period there was minimal communication between the submarine and the rest of the world. From time to time, an antenna would pick up news from the USSR, Europe and the USA. The ships never surfaced unless there was an accident and danger of a sinking. Daily drills went through evasion proficiency strategies including deep crash dives and full-speed race and turns. There was lots of time to read and think. Professionalism in the contact of speedy carrying out of orders in the most proficient manner was consider a matter of safety and survival and the personal responsibility of each member. In such circumstances, the human mind was influenced. One generally became more aware of the political and scientific possibilities which were deluded in less secluded operations. For the senior officers, it was partially a form of forced meditation.
On several of the Soviet submarines, a few people became irritated with politicians and diplomats which seemed to make the world a worse place for all humanity. The officers knew of instances during Stalin's leadership, and even with Krushchev, when capable scientists, engineers, and Navy commanders had been arrested and sent to work camps or exiled - because they posed a thread to the leadership by the loyalty of their following and the success of their projects. Surrounded by the sea continually and intimately in contact with the influence of the weather, submariners increased beyond the average standard of environmental awareness. The atmosphere was one of growing anxiety of waiting for the command to arrive, to attack. The officers on board were becoming more independent of their politics and their political bureaucracy. Once they left port, no one could touch them.

1958 - On September 4,
In a reply to USA Senator Bricker-Ohio, Bourne Adkinson, Col. Deputy, in the absence of W.P Fisher, Major General, USAF Director, Legislative Liaison, wrote
"The United States does not possess a flying saucer as you describe.
However, many devices which we do possess could be mistaken for unidentified flying objects under unusual conditions."

1958 - On October 3,
Freight Train No. 91 was paced by 4 UFOs for 1 hour and 10 minutes on a run between Monon, Indiana, and Indianapolis. The incident was reported by the crew.

1958 - On October 11,
Pioneer I, an American 84.4-pound toroid satellite is launched by a Thor-Able I rocket to measure radiation in space.
It fails as a moon probe but demonstrates that the Van Allen Belts of radiation are bands rather than continual space structures.

1958 - During the year,
A Commission for the "Study of the Snowman Question" is set up by the Soviet Academy of Sciences.
It is to correlate the mass of information already produced about the Almas (Wild Man) as well as its larger counterparts. An exploratory expedition will be sent to the Pamirs. Professor Boris Porshney and Dr. Marie-Jeanne Kauffman will go on that expedition to carry out a systematic fieldwork program.
Porshney would consider the majority of the reports found to be genuine and the question would still be informally discussed in the Soviet Union at "Hominoid problem seminars" in the early 1980s. By then, Porshney will have died and Dmitri Bayanov will chair the seminar with his colleague Igor Bourtsev at the Darwin Museum, Moscow.
The Altai mountains, the region with the majority of the sightings, is rugged, honeycombed with caves, has ample resources of food, water and good raw material for making tools. It is also a very remote region which is virtually uninhabited by humans.

1958 - By November,
Meo Tribesmen in Laos were being organized into a guerrilla anti-Communist organization.
By the summer of 1961, about 9,000 tribesmen were equipped with munitions, armaments and military supplies to conduct guerrilla operations. The once peaceful and largely balanced society of the Meo would be transformed into a dependent society which would follow the orders of their newfound war gods who brought them food, magical technology and taught them racial hatred and mass murder. Over the next decades, hundreds of thousands of Laotians, including many of the Meo, would be killed by an imported war and an imported military form of tribalism in which brutality and slaughter were rewarded with captured booty and material benefits from the gods (American CIA and DOD agents and advisors).

1958 - In November,
A.M. Sinyukhin, a research scientist in the Soviet Union, referred in an article to the work of Sir Jagadis Chandra Bose, of India. Sinyukhin noted that the work of Bose had been buried during his lifetime by sceptical Western science and hardly ever cited since his death. Sinyukhin made clear that the biologists of the U.S.S.R. were so impressed by the achievements of Bose during the 1920s that they were going to mount a research campaign based directly upon his long-ignored conclusions. In December, 1958, a meeting would be held in the main conference hall of the U.S.S.R. Academy of Sciences in celebration of the 100th anniversary of the birth of Bose.

1958 - During the year,
An accidental nuclear disaster almost occurred when an atomic bomb slipped from a B-47 flying over South Carolina, USA.
The triggering mechanism was unarmed.
The impact exploded the TNT in the bomb, shattering a nearby house.
Anxiety increased amongst the public.

1958 - Beginning in 1958,
The USA Balance of Payments fell into deficit.
The relevance of this is that when a country imports a higher worth of products than it is exporting the situation is comparable to an individual buying on CREDIT. In ideal global economic harmony, each nation trades an equivalent worth of goods between itself and each nation it trades with. The individual accumulates capital which is spent on goods which sustain a lifestyle. When the individual begins to purchase more than his capital income will cover, a debt begins to accumulate which either greater capital income is required to eliminate, or, a reduction in the standard of living is necessary. Without such adjustments, the amount of capital outstanding continues to grow until the capability of the individual to reduce or even sustain the debt load fails and bankruptcy occurs.
In 1958, the American dollar deficit was 3.5 billion dollars while the EEC surplus jumped to 2.7 billion dollars. The foreign exchange reserves of the EEC were increasing inversely to those of the USA. This reversal of circumstances brought about a change in attitude towards Europe in both the American business community and in the Eisenhower Administration. The business community began to fear the emergence of restrictive regional trading blocks such as the EEC and the EFTA, and the Administration looked toward the prospering EEC Six to pick up a far greater share of the "Free World's" financial burden.
American capitalism had prospered on government expenditures motivated by war and the industries of war - weapons production. Now, war was over, or was it? The USA was not being successful in developing a co-dependent economic relationship with Western Europe. Instead, Western Europe was largely asserting itself as self-sufficient plus saving enough capital through their lower percentage per capita defense budgets and their norm of a lower standard of living. America needed an economic fix. It could not control Europe, nor depend upon it to remain economically dependent on the USA: Europe had recovered. High level officers of the USA Administration consulted their experts at the Rand Corporation, the National Security Council, the Council on Foreign Relations and prominent big business leaders: Where was there a market to be exploited to the benefit of American capital?

1958 - In November,
Atmospheric nuclear tests were stopped by the USA and Britain, in response to public demand and with President Eisenhower having changed his mind from favouring the tests to favouring a test ban agreement. They invited the USSR to follow their example. The Russians, still far behind in nuclear weapons technology, responded by setting off ever bigger, ever dirtier explosions.
Earlier, the AEC and the USA Department of Defense had strongly resisted the possibility of a test ban treaty. Such would have terminated the careers of military officers and nuclear physicists, so together, they falsified their records and purposely ran tests to strain any proposals put forward for enforcement of such a treaty by detection. The AEC declared that underground tests could not be detected over long distances. To demonstrate, it produced a report on an underground test it had run and declared that it had not been detected beyond 250 miles. The test had actually been detected 2,300 miles away by AEC monitors. Suspicions increased on both the American and Soviet camps that explosions either set off deep underground or high in the atmosphere might go undetected. In November, their efforts to keep the military development establishment humming came to an end temporarily.

1958 -
Following the election of Nelson Rockefeller as governor of New York, Rockefeller mounted a test campaign to provide every home in the state with a fallout shelter. By 1961, 5% of American families had made structural alterations or additions to prepare their homes for a thermonuclear war; 20% had stocked up with extra food, first-aid kits, and other emergency supplies.

1958 - On November 10,
The Berlin Crisis was precipitated when USSR leader Khrushchev issued an ultimatum to Britain, the German Federal Republic, France and the USA demanding the withdrawal of Allied troops from West Berlin. It had become an "island" in the middle of East Germany surrounded by a massive concentration of Soviet military power. Khrushchev believed that it would only be a matter of time before West Germany would be armed with nuclear weapons. Berlin was to the USSR what Cuba was to the USA. France supported the German political position more consistently and strongly than either the British or the Americans. The latter gradually came to be seen in the world beyond their own borders as political opportunists who would change sides and the strength of their support on the basis of rationalizations of their self-interest.
The North American and British public would largely remain ignorant of such opinions and their media would intentionally avoid printing alternate points of view which did not wholly or partially support the policies of the USA and Britain. One may recall the Abbott and Costello skit of "Who's on First", and reference it to the truth of expression in modern politics: Who is telling the truth? What part of the Truth? What is the relevance of the Truth? Words without relevance are like a picture before a blind person: the meaning all depends on what third parties tell you they think it means.

1958 - By December,
Evidence for Vegetation on Mars is summarized in an article by R.H. Garstang in the "Journal of the British Astronomical Association". A test carried out at Harvard Observatory designed to detect the presence of vegetation on Mars, and the results are described. Terrestrial plants show an absorption band at about 3.4 u due to the C-H band of organic molecules. The radiation received from Mars was analyzed theoretically into 2 parts, one being the thermal radiation from the planet, the other the reflected solar radiation. The reflected radiation shows an absorption band at the wavelength of the organic band and so provides further evidence for some kind of vegetation on Mars.

1958 - In December,
Robert Welch and 11 friends and acquaintances met for 2 days at an Indianapolis hotel which ended on a third day with the formation of the "John Birch Society". John Birch, an American missionary, had in 1945 been shot dead by Chinese Communist soldiers in vague circumstances. The Society saw him as the first American to be killed in the Cold War.
To the Birchers, the situation was ever urgent with 2/3rds of the world already in the greedy hands of the Communists. Like the early Leninist groups their philosophy was that
"What is not only needed but is absolutely imperative, is for some hardboiled, dictatorial and dynamic boss to come along."
Within 3 years the Society would have a membership of 50,000, concentrated in the cities of Los Angeles, Boston, Memphis, and Atlanta - all military centres.

By 1961, Welch toured the country speaking to large groups of people and had written a booklet in which he identified President Eisenhower as an agent of Communist conspiracy, in company with Earl Warren and Harry Truman. The booklet, The Politician, Welch held from the public until 1963 on the basis that the truth it carried was too dramatic for readers other than the leadership. A Leninist tactic, it increased the curiosity, expectancy and respect of the common people such that when it was freely made available, 100,000 copies quickly sold. The accusations against Eisenhower divided the Birchers and diminished their effectiveness.
Many of the originators of the Society were closely connected with those who stood to lose the most if Communism became popular. They had operated successful businesses of all sizes, were in favour of the elimination of all taxes and were staunchly anti-Communist. Three former presidents of the National Association of Manufacturers were members of the National Council of the John Birch Society. Retired military officers and Catholics were attracted by Welch's authoritarianism. It became the antithesis of the Communist movement - a Capitalist reaction movement; the two shared intolerance for others, simplistic solutions to human political and economic problems, deception as a tactic, character assassination and dramatic exaggeration as means of communication. Those who supported either ideology filled what Korzybski would have cautioned as elements in search of war, anarchy, power and human misery.

1958 - On December 6,
Pioneer III, an American 12.95-pound conical satellite is launched by a Juno II rocket to measure radiation in space.
It discovers a second radiation belt yet fails to orbit.

1958 - In mid-December,
The first U.S.A. covert Gemini flight was made.
The first publicized one would be made years later when the procedure was mundane and the technology already superseded by the Apollo craft.
Black programs were classified secret for purposes of national security so legislatures and voters never knew what they were approving, the degree of progress made, and , often never saw the outcome. Typically, in the high technology areas, once a black project had exceeded its budget by 50 to 1000%, it was "terminated". That removed the spent monies from criticism even to the point of everyone feeling "satisfied" that unproductive or inefficient programs had been terminated. Then, new black programs were substituted.

The degree of covert financing could only respectively be hidden at the 5% of total spending threshold, so for increased funding, an increasing defence budget was required. The U.S.S.R. had their own similar covert funding programs which were more easily hidden than the American ones because of the national security budgets traditionally put in place under Joseph Stalin. ... Neither Americans or Russians had any racial liking for Orientals or Blacks. It would be expedient to enlarge areas of conflict involving either, if the end result was to distract the American voters, increase the American economic growth, increase the military budget, and eliminate "expendables": lower class Americans, Blacks, Asians. The Soviet participants recognized that time did not permit a great deal of capital expenditure and scientific innovation on their part due to the structure of their politics and economy, so they took the position of frustrated adversary: opposing the U.S.A. - but never too strongly.

In the coming years, John F. Kennedy, would take the game too seriously and almost destroy both countries. He was supposed to keep a sense of humour, rattle his sword, raise the defence budget, and maintain a public balance of power. But Kennedy wasn't from the insider military-industrial mindset; he believed the publicity and apparent dangers were real, and that made him a danger!

1958 - On December 18,
"Project SCORE", a USA .. 8,750-pound capsule is launched by a WS107A-1 (Atlas) rocket.
Its intent is to demonstrate radio transmissions from space as well as recording and receiving.
The human passenger is eluded with the media being told that a tape of a human voice is beamed from the satellite. Indeed, a Christmas message is broadcast from a tape recording made earlier by "President Eisenhower". This was the failed Gemini flight.

1958 - By the end of the year,
The GRAYS had perfected their Sensor Implant Process.
"Corrections" included: 1. Most selected subjects were now children; 2. Advanced hypnotic-like techniques were easiest applied to children; 3. Human children were less fear indoctrinated than adults; 4. Children were more tolerant to the presence of "strange beings"; 5. Children proved to be more easily astonished and reverent; 6. Children were more easily "persuaded" than adults; 7. Children were most likely not to be believed about any memories; 8. Children provided the potential for more extensive developmental study.

The goal of the GRAYS was still to bioengineer a hybrid such that their lifeform could colonize and utilize the Earth's ecology in a self-sustaining manner. To do that, the GRAYS wanted to develop an understanding of the sources for the destructive (from their perspective) facets which the human species expressed: species self-destructiveness (war); ecological waste; destructive emotional expression. With insectoid biology, these patterns of behaviour in humans were totally confusing, and alien. It would be necessary to determine first as to whether these aspects of the human species were biological adaptations, which could be bioengineered, or simply cultural modeling and training. If they were the latter, no bioengineering would be necessary. If they were of biological benefit to the Earth's ecology, the ecology might have to be altered, or, abandoned as "toxic". It was expected, as would be the case with insects, that such adaptations were biological in nature. At this point, there was certainly growing evidence that these human characteristics were both destructive to the species and to the ecology which sustained it. If that were the reality, it would require extensive surveillance and experimentation to determine which human species genes required alteration or substitution in order to remove the offensive characteristics.
Substantial pseudo-genetic changes had already been introduced with the placement and activation of the implant sensors. From the insectoid point-of-view, speeding up the biological process of the human species, subtly, would enable faster experimentation to be performed. Sort of like running a motion picture - movie reel a little faster than normal: the end result was the same; the dull parts were minimized. If desired, you could stop the film, or slow it down, for a moment, adjust the light or sound - then speed it back up. The subtle enhancement of the pituitary function meant that female subjects began to menstruate a few months or years earlier than their peers; males became sexually preoccupied earlier and began masturbating and/or having nocturnal emissions earlier than their peers; females began to develop breasts earlier and to a more mature form; both genders began to grow subtly taller. And the attraction towards addictive substances and activities grew. Alcoholism, tobacco use, physical and sexual abuse, narcotics use, hypochondracism, sexual addiction, workaholism, ... would all subtly intensify. These factors would have been more noticeable if it were not for the reality that the dominant human cultures adopted, or retained, destructive communications and awareness training, and, advertising and music patterning which promoted lower self-responsibility, greater despair, and increased reactionism. The presence of the latter would provide easy rationalizations for the presence of the abuses.

The link which enabled passive human response to this seemingly increasing tendency towards self-destructiveness, as a species, was the intimate experience of the changes effected by the implants. Children who became sexually preoccupied came to feel confused, ashamed, and guilty of their obsessive thoughts and actions. The less self-control and self-understanding and "weirdness" that they perceived in themselves, the more their spirit became defeated and weak. Each such thought or action became, at first, a seering spiritual pain which burned to emotional oversensitivity, and then to emotional death.
Others, unfettered by social and religious expectations - simply allowed themselves to act out as unrepentant exploiters and delinqents. Each minority would come to occupy opposite ends of the social spectrum. One, would see themselves simply living life to the fullest; the other, would tend to atone for their sins and shame through reverence for the status quo and an abject fear of exclusion and "fall" into their opposing minority. In both cases, subtle manipulation would lead to spiritual illness and deprivation - spreading throughout "civilized" humanity like a cancer.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1959 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
Ben Hur; Carry On Nurse; Return of the Fly; Story on Page One; Aku; The Sound and the Fury; Journey to the Centre of the Earth; The F.B.I. Story; They Came to Cordura; Plan 9 From Outer Space; Mission in Morocco; Rio Bravo; Some Like It Hot; The Jayhawkers; The Giant Gila Monster; North by Northwest; Tiger Bay; The Best of Everything; Operation Petticoat; Up Periscope

Songs:
Mack the Knife; Dream Lover; Smoke Gets in Your Eyes; El Paso; Stagger Lee; Personality; Donna; La Bamba; Charlie Brown; Kansas City; Sleep Walk; Heartaches by the Number; My Heart is an Open Book; Venus; Lonesome Town; He'll Have to Go; White Lightning; Don't Take Your Guns To Town; Waterloo; The Battle of New Orleans; When It's Springtime In Alaska; Under Your Spell Again; Am I That Easy To Forget?; Scarlet Ribbons; Wishful Thinking.

General News:

The St Lawrence Seaway, between Canada and the U.S.A. opened this year.
Costing half a billion dollars, it is 192 miles long.

1959 - On January 2,
Lunik 1 (Luna 1), a USSR 3,245-pound spherical space probe is launched from Tyuratam and sets off around the Sun and past the Moon. It was the first probe acknowledged to have reached Earth escape speed (40,234 km/hr).
Also called MECHTA, it takes the first publicly released pictures of the far side of the Moon.
It passes within 5955 km of the Moon.
It is the fourth USA-known Soviet space launch.
Failures had occurred on September 23, October 12, and December 4 of 1958 as well as during the 2nd quarter of 1959.

1959 - By February,
In South Vietnam, relocation of families within communities had begun and, in contrast to land development and refugee activities, these relocations were often forced. The restructured villages, surrounded by moats and barbed wire were much like concentration camps. People were taken from their plots of ground, where their houses, their rice-fields, their ancestral tombs, etc., were located, and moved to totally unsuitable areas where they could be "protected". ... The houses and fields of those being located were burnt, in order to deny their use to the guerilla Viet Cong. ... Hunger struck most of the strategic hamlets. In the village of Karom, in central Vietnam, 200 persons, mostly children, died in a single month. Many people had not eaten anything decent in months, and as a result, their anal muscles had become so dilated that every time they ate or drank something, it would pass right through them in not more than a few minutes.

1959 - On February 10,
Frank Figgures, an Undersecretary of the British Treasury and Chairman of the Mutual Aid Division, wrote to Derek Heathcote Amory, the Chancellor of the Exchequer regarding the question of Britain becoming closer politically and economically to Western Europe or to the USA:
"In a situation where three-quarters of our trade is with the world outside Europe,
whereas three-quarters of the trade of the Six is with Europe, things that are
fundamental to us appear marginal to them."

1959 - On February 17,
Vanguard II, a 20.74-pound spherical American satellite is launched carrying photo cells to produce images of cloud cover.
A malfunction makes the data difficult to interpret.

1959 - On February 25,
39 Persons on board an American Airlines DC-6 airliner piloted by Capt. Peter Killian, observed 3 UFOs for 45 minutes while the plane was enroute between Bradford and Erie, Pennsylvania.

1959 -
The Inter-American Development Bank (IADB) was organized to foster economic development in Latin America by arranging project financing with its own funds and loans by private banks. Membership was originally limited to the member countries of the Organization of American States. It is an extension of the purpose of the International Finance Corporation, begun in 1950. Its purpose is to enable economic colonization of South and Central America by the USA.
Its support will largely go to fascist dictators and military juntas, many of the leaders of which are educated or trained in USA universities and military colleges. The commoners in such countries are considered too numerous and too backward to be persuaded with material "bribes" to wholly change their lifestyle and become indentured servants of a government which taxes them to cover budgetary deficits incurred through the acceptance of "development" loans after being "bribed" with government foreign aid from the USA, Canada and other countries. It would later include 26 Latin American countries, the USA, Japan, and 14 European countries.

1959 - On March 3,
Pioneer IV, an American 13.4-pound conical satellite is launched to measure radiation in space and test photoelectric sensors in the vicinity of the moon.
It goes into a 406.95 day orbit around the Sun.

during 1959 ???
Edwards Air Force Base, Calif. - unable to cut into the metal for purposes of examination and molecular or atomic identification.

1959 - Between March 14 to 26,
The "Skate", A USN atomic-powered submarine, made a trip from Spitsbergen, near Greenland, under the polar ice cap to the Earth's geographic North Pole, surfaced through the ice, carried on westward to cruise a jagged course along the Soviet coast, deployed SCUBA (Self-Contained Underwater Breathing Apparatus) divers twice from the surface, almost became trapped in an ice pack, and headed on to an American naval port.
Commander James Calvert skippered this second publicized voyage of the "Skate" since the Nautilus made its transpolar expedition in August, 1958. The expected air temperature above the ice for the entire trip was an average of minus 30 degrees Fahrenheit. Leads ("river") and polynyas ("lake") openings in the pack and cap ice were expected to be all frozen over. The ice cap would be 10 feet thick in most places. For decades, Beluga whales had been seen to surface through the 6- or 8-inch thick ice which covered the leads or polynyas by striking the bottom of the ice with their massive backs. The Skate weighed 3,000 tons and was almost the length of a football field. The navigators would note the positions of the polynyas they discovered by the use of the fathometer and sonar and confirmed with the underwater television cameras. They would receive the reference of "Skylight, #".

The crew numbered over 100, described by the Commander as
"picked for intelligence, stability, and high motivation: they understand their mission and want to carry it out. They trust God and they also trust the machine. A sub crew is too busy seeing that things work properly to brood over failure and death. They are aware of the dangerous possibilities, but training and trust allow them to keep these in proper perspective."
Behind the authoritarian euphemisms, in cold reality, one would find "technical skill" for intelligence; "fear, hate and heroism" inspired by political conditioning for motivation; "duty" for mission; "seniority of command" for God; "desensitization" for training. These are not inspired traits within such American crews only. They are common to most military troops. Soviet, German, British, Japanese, and other submarine crews would ALL be equally described by their respective Commanders.

"Skylight 1" appeared to be several hundred yards in both length and width with ice markedly thinner than that of the surrounding pack ice which ranged down to 40 feet. It was chosen for the first surfacing. Forward motion was stopped, ballast was slowly pumped out, and the submarine slowly floated up to bump against the underside of the ice. On the second attempt, the Skate broke through the ice. For photographic pleasure, the submarine was taken down and brought up in another region of Skylight 1; however, the cold air had frozen the camera mechanism of the photographer. The water temperature was a constant 29 degrees below zero Fahrenheit. Rising into an air temperature which could be 60 degrees colder than that created instant freezing problems which necessitated immediate clearance of the ice blocks from the top of the submarine and constant de-icing of mechanisms and warming of critical devices located near to the outer shell of the Skate.
On March 17, the Skate arrived in the vicinity of the geographical North Pole.
Only a small skylight was found to surface through, making such somewhat dangerous.
The burial ashes of Sir Hubert Wilkins, who had made the first subpolar attempt in the WWI submarine, "Nautilus", unsuccessfully in 1931, were honoured with a hasty alter, posting of the flags of the USA, UK, and Australia, a 3-man rifle salute, and then the scattering he had requested. Homage was also extended for Peary's believed arrival in 1909. A small cairn of ice blocks was left behind with a waterproof cylinder with a record of the events. The Skate then submerged and cruised along the Soviet coast, making sure to stay outside of the 100-mile international territorial line.

Commander Calvert recognized that the Soviet researchers were the world experts on the arctic, having conducted submarine and other explorations of the area for decades. An exhaustive report of the area made by Fridtjof Nansen, more than 60 years previously, was found to be quite accurate. With fathometer readings, the Skate verified the location of the huge underwater Lomonosov mountain range, which stretches for 1,200 miles and rise in some places 9,000 feet above the sea floor. SCUBA divers were employed several times to measure the depth of ice ridges, make minor repairs, and inspect the hull. Above surface deployment was more hazardous than an undersea deployment would have been because of the quick-freeze air conditions and the possibility of sudden surface ice movements.
A surface repair was scheduled for 15 hours in Skylight #6.
After 1 hour the ice began to move and the pressure ridges on either side closed in several yards.
"The sounds were fearful.
The ice shrieked and crashed and then groaned against the hull of the shuddering Skate.
The noise was so loud that Lieut. Al Kelln and (Commander Calvert), standing together on the bridge, had to shout to make ourselves heard. It seemed as if the ice were literally screaming as it inched forward to crush us. ... (Below deck) it was like being violently rattled in a great steel barrel. After more than half an hour of this, I noticed that the Skate was beginning to take on a definite list. ... Even under emergency conditions it would take 5 minutes to drop Skate beneath the surface."

Just when the order was about to be given to prepare to dive, the ice appeared to be slowing down.
It stopped. In less than 7-1/2 hours the work was completed and the Skate was submerged to continue. Several days later, the under-ice cross-polar voyage ended with the Skate rising to make radio contact with its USN home base.

1959 -
Frank Edwards gives examples of the latest techniques for suppressing UFO reports:

1) numerous conflicting solutions are offered to cases which have been given widespread publicity, thereby confusing the public;
2) pressure is applied to officials of the agency employing an alleged witness to ask the witness to keep quiet about the UFO sighting;
(3) Congressmen requesting available information about the UFO phenomenon are given
"a brush-off to the effect that everything adds up to nothing."

1959 - In the Spring,
Off the northeastern coast of Japan, a USAF jet is ordered to intercept a stationary object that had been picked up on radar.
The pilot saw the object visually and was authorized to fire on it.
The rockets had no effect on the unknown craft, which started chasing the jet while the radar followed the whole event. The two spots merged: the resulting single object remained stationary for a while, then disappeared. Searches conducted over several days failed to find any trace of the jet.

1959 - During the year,
AMWAY (American Way) is founded by Jay Van Andel and Rich DeVos, previous partners in a variety of businesses, who introduced a biodegradable household cleaner to the market from an office and warehouse in the basements of their homes in Ada, Michigan State. Within a year, the company would consolidate its operations at a nearby facility and would begin manufacturing many of its products, particularly cleaners and laundry products.
Van Andel and DeVos discovered that personal direct door-to-door sales was productive yet time consuming and restrictive in terms of development of a customer base. They were confident that with a basic household repetitive purchase commodity that an excellent product and good customer service would provide referrals. Past experience deterred them from mass marketing through standard retailers due to the marketing expense usually required plus the margin desired by the distributor. These costs, together with costs of production and product development royalties, typically cut the gross profits by as much as 90%. Hiring salaried sales or marketing staff proved too undependable for some persons had much better persuasive and motivating skills than did others (and, sometimes, were more dishonest and deceptive) while some were unproductive yet resisted self-improvement methods. Commissioned sales staff were difficult to attract during an era in which industry provided steady employment, a dependable income, and a reasonable standard of living: benefits and disadvantages proved to be more extreme than salaried staff.

Van Andel and DeVos found that some of their customers were enthusiastic about the products and that they were also interested in earning an extra income, either as a mother working part-time, or, as an ambitious man wanting a business without the high overheads associated with hired personnel, warehousing, advertising, .... A sales program was introduced whereby a satisfied customer, who had purchased the products at retail, could purchase products at a discount for retail sale to their own contacts. The margin represented the earnings of the customer-distributor. Successive branches of further referrals from original referrals effectively passed on the initial highest level of margin to the "active" customer-distributor-salesperson, with an additional smaller earning on the sale accruing to the sponsoring distributor - who had originally sold the products to the new distributor, and, who had invited and encouraged the new distributor -salesperson to enter the business.
Like many concepts which rationally appear positive and are well-intentioned, the foundation of the program was the desire to obtain maximum profit, live a materially extravagant lifestyle, and receive the prestige and power of social acceptance, popularity, and material envy. Over the next 20 years, sales-distributors, with the sanction of the founders, or, often acting out of their own independence - would introduce a number of "programs" which were unethical and bordered on illegality. The independence of activity and the motivation of greed, melded with the idealistic intentions of helping others succeed and sharing the wealth - provided no spiritual direction nor mentoring and no limitations on modifications to the original marketing program. Too many "opportunists" would engender a defensive attitude toward the company and toward Multi-Level Sales, as an industry. As a reaction to these negative practices and to the growing success of AMWAY, many other MLS organizations would be started as time progressed. Some of the common misrepresentations of the AMWAY "Program" included pyramid sales induction of distributors; presentation by ridicule, envy, pride, sloth and reaction; persuasion by familiarity, association, over-confidence and over-enthusiasm.

The Pyramid Sales Induction of Distributors (PSID) was introduced by those persons who were motivated by greed, too lazy to develop good sales skills, revered the controlling position of the manager-supervisor, held the marketing and sales tasks of the business as a demeaning and unsophisticated position, were largely unconcerned about the quality or pricing competitiveness of the products. Their presentation of the "Program" was that people made high profits by recruiting other people (who had to buy a minimum package of products) who would either sell large quantities of the products, or, would "introduce" large numbers of new recruits - which would repeat the cycle of expectations. Those who were fortunate enough to attract someone who believed in the product, had sales ability and sufficient self-esteem to sell large quantities of the products - did become successful. In the usual 80-20 Parieto's Rule scenario, at least 80% of those who purchased the introductory kit of products would never make any money in the organization; 20% would make money; 5% would be truly materially successful. In other words, 80% would have a bad experience.
Presentation by utilization of the spiritually weakening, within the Christian context of "evil") techniques of ridicule, envy, pride, sloth and reaction encouragement were usually "staged" in large rooms and auditoriums to which current distributors and their "guests" initiates were invited. The crowd atmosphere was heightened by expectance, drama, and a mentored reverence for the speakers: human gods of material opulence. Reverently, the audience would be stilled and cued for response to the speakers words with carefully placed adherents initiating the responses. Some of these adherents would be instructed directly that by infusing a sense of enthusiasm and confidence (reverence) into the audience, the adherent would benefit through increased success in recruiting and increased profits from the stimulated and devoted members. Others simply learned to mirror the cues of earlier members by their desire to be part of the privileged priesthood of wealth. Predictable of human crowd dynamics, many guests were motivated to become distributors and purchase their initial supplies; others were motivated to remain hopeful of their prospects and continue to recruit others and/or to market products. This was a more spiritually devastating program than the pyramid-like sales approach. More powerful conditioning techniques were used her to modify the basis of human behaviour, the spirit, to adopt attitudes and behaviours mentored by the speakers.

A typical "opportunity seminar" would result if the following.
The speaker would be introduced as a simple commoner who had become rich through his or her reverence to AMWAY and a short period of devoted and single-minded persistence in promoting the products and the distributor sponsorship program. The speaker would proudly describe a recent experience of gluttony, lust, or sloth - and follow with a challenging ridicule of the stupidity of the audience for following the occupational and lifestyle example which their culture had presented to them and which their schooling and religions had encouraged. If what they were doing was so great, why were they in the audience as poor needful persons? Further motivating examples of fine clothing, expensive cars, exquisite jewelry, majestic houses, romantic voyages, exciting travels, the friendship of persons of influence and power, and more than ample family time were described. A personal expression of humiliation might be added in which the speaker would describe how by trying to change the "program" to their individual abilities, rationales, or expectations - they had failed miserably.
Only when they had accepted the god-like wisdom and direction of the leaders of the organization and sought to emulate them were they graced with god status and material wealth. The speaker finished with a "prayer" of invocation to the adherents and the new initiates that they take upon themselves the mantle of material goal obsession, buy the products (many of which were more costly than competitively priced products), bring in new "friends" to share the "program", and, to work hard and become rich. After 48 hours of emotionally inspired enthusiasm, long imprinted patterns of low self-esteem, security obsession, and authority-based economics - recaptured most of the crowd into tradition and routine. Those who were converted, would become evangelical disciples of the new religion - until they either succeeded, or were spiritually broken by disappointment and lack of fulfillment. In the latter case, persons would become social rejects, ridiculed by their friends, shamed to themselves - depressed, aloof, distrustful, defensive, intolerant.

Another common and negative approach was persuasion by familiarity, association, over-confidence and over-enthusiasm. Naive individuals, unfamiliar with business, marketing, sales, product comparison, and product composition were likely to transfer trust to a friend or associate who appeared to be successful and professed to the quality of the products marketed, the lucrativeness of the AMWAY system, and the trustworthiness of the founders and mentor-speakers. Never having been in any position other than a consumer or a line employee, the individual's analytical skills, positive self-esteem, and self-assertiveness were largely absent.
Accustomed to being told what to do and being rewarded for compliance, such an individual would be easily persuaded to buy products they did not need, and try activities for which they were ill prepared and lacked positive skills. Such persons were hypnotically induced during presentations to adopt beliefs and attitudes expressed by others they had accepted as significant others to themselves. Again, 80% would have spiritually weakening experiences as they were stimulated with an adrenalin intensity to try, unsuccessfully, to overlay long imprinted and modeled behaviours. When resident energy blocks could be overlaid with new traumatic experiences, there was a possibility of "conversion". It can be a traumatic experience to see a "god" and risk alienation and a return to despair, hopelessness, frustration, and poverty.

1959 - During June 21 and 26-28,
Father William B. Gill, Anglican Mission Director at Boianai, Territory of Papua and New Guinea, and his followers see humanoids in hovering spacecraft. On June 26, 4 humanoid figures waved to the 38 humans from a saucer-shaped craft that hovered overhead for 4 hours and 19 minutes.

1959 - In July,
The U.S. Court of Appeals, of the District of Columbia, ruled in opposition to the direction taken by the U.S. Congress in 1958 regarding the granting and removal of passports to and from citizens. After black journalist William Worthy had returned from China in 1956, the Court now upheld that geographical restrictions lay beyond judicial intervention against State Department decisions. Noted writer Waldo Frank was refused permission to travel to China although 40 other newsmen had recently been allowed to do so, the implication being that discrimination was personal. The Supreme Court refused to review these decisions.

1959 - On August 7,
Explorer VI, an American 142-pound paddlewheel-shaped satellite is launched by a Thor-Able III rocket to extend the measurements of radiation in space, map the Earth's magnetic field, study radio wave transmission characteristics between Earth and space and record micrometeor presence. It provided the first photos of the Earth taken from space which were released to the public. In the typical static scientific thinking of the time, it would not be recognized for a decade that the magnetic field readings taken were NOT permanent. The Earth's magnetic field is influenced by a variety of factors including the intensity of radiation and magnetic flux from the Sun which changes constantly.

1959 -
An article, authored by C.H. Hapgood and published in the "Saturday Evening Post" states:
"One of these periods of wholesale destruction of life occurred at the end of the last Ice Age. That was a natural disaster, which, according to one writer, destroyed 40 million animals in North America alone. ... It is apparent that millions of animals once flourished in areas now bitterly cold."

Scientists are still speaking of an Ice Age with the suggestion of a gradual onset, freeze, and release - yet the information before them refutes the theory! An animal does not stand in one spot for hundreds of years with food in its mouth, never swallowing, never becoming emaciated for lack of nourishment, and, waiting while snow and ice gradually build up around it - so that it can suddenly die and be frozen - upright.

This is an example of one of humanities worst species characteristics: learning by modeling.
Unlike some hominids, which learn chiefly by the individualistic processes of intuition (frequently) and trial and error (infrequently), the major institutionalized system of learning on which all authority-based agricultural and industrial societies have been built - is imprinting, modeling, mentoring.
The benefit of such a characteristic is that it can encourage the development of powerful political groupings of individuals in which most individuals are imprinted with an authority-dependency pattern of response; information deemed beneficial by the idiosyncratic social, religious and political leaders is classified as truthful and valuable; a great conformity of attitude and behaviour can be generated in the masses - to the end of peace, or prosperity, or war.
The disadvantage of such a characteristic is that it discourages the development and use of spiritual-based decision-making, frustrates intuitive decision-making and alienates creativity and innovation as negative considerations frequently labelled as ridiculous, insane, heretical, "unscientific", rebellious, or stupid. It promotes a general intolerance to other than institutionalized conclusions and makes it risky to the stability of a human's identity to offer suggestions which the basis of authority in the culture does not benefit from.

The danger of such a characteristic is that IF a human-originated, or natural catastrophe were to occur which dramatically influenced the climate or other characteristics of the Earth, earth-bound humanity would be unlikely to respond constructively. First, most human political authorities would believe that it would be disadvantageous to their own social position to inform their citizens that such a possibility could occur, UNLESS, it was believable within the cultural patterned learning system AND they had answers on how to cope with or prepare for such a disaster over which they had COMPLETE CONTROL. Consider these points carefully.

1959 - By September,
The world's First Nuclear-Propelled Ballistic Missile Submarine (SSBN) was completed.
It would be codenamed the "Hotel Class" by Nato.
It was Soviet Project 658 and 8 units would be on patrol by the end of 1962.
It was about the same size as the November Class was.
Its major difference was that each carried 3 SLBM (6 in later models) in addition to 2 kinds of sophisticated torpedoes. They would be outfitted like some of the November Class had been - with a conference room and underwater docking port for transfers between submarines. The independent attitude of some Commanders would increase more. In effect, they had the power to start or respond to a nuclear confrontation.
Every third day, on average, the crew would practice a full readiness for missile launch down to the last switch. Before the exercise was completed only the Commander knew if the last signal translated from the airwaves was a message calling for a strike. By a prearranged agreement, coded stories were broadcast over popular radio stations, as news, to indicate interim destinations and immediate action. It was not a good system but it seemed the best until an improvement could be found - or so the politicians believed. What would happen if a true story was broadcast which contained the codewords meaning "launch all missiles"!

1959 - During the year,
Dr. Morris K. Jessup is found dead in his car in a park.
He has made some enquiries about the 1943 Philadelphia Experiment, even though sceptical.
Two well dressed men were seen walking away from the car early in the morning.
Jessup's death is recorded as a suicide although there is neither a suicide note, orpersonal circumstances which would warrant depression. It would never be officially acknowledged that two CIA agents had assassinated Jessup to keep him from further investigation into and promotion of public awareness about the Philadelphia experiment.

1959 - During September,
The "Lenin" becomes the world's most powerful icebreaker and is propelled by 3 nuclear reactors.
Two were sufficient to propel the ship and the third was available for backup.

1959 - On September 12,
Lunik II (Luna 2), a USSR 858.4-pound (390 kg.) spherical satellite, is launched from Tyuratam to study the magnetic fields of the Earth and the Moon. It crashes into the Moon east of the Sea of Serenity.

1959 - On September 18,
Vanguard III, an American 100-pound sphere launched by a modified Navy Test Vehicle 3, was sent into orbit to measure the Earth's magnetic field, solar X-rays, and environmental conditions in space.

1959 - On September 24,
Nikita Khrushchev, of the Soviet Union tells Americans:
"Your country has attained a high level of industrial development.
The rapid development of industry in the United States of America astounded the whole world
and aroused admiration and even envy in other countries.
Under revolutionary conditions, on a new social basis,
we utilized everything valuable that you had created and we proved that
your achievements could not only be equalled but also surpassed."

1959 - By October,
Vladimir Grigorievich Karamanov, director of the Laboratory of Biocybernetics of the Institute of Agrophysics, in the U.S.S.R., published an article on plant intelligence. As a young biologist, Karamanov had been inspired by Abram Feodorovich Ioffe, a mentor, to become familiar with semiconductors and cybernetics. He began building microthermisters, weight tensiometers, and other instruments to register the temperature of plants, the flow rate of fluid in their stems and leaves, the intensity of their transpiration, their growth rates, and characteristics of their radiation. He was soon picking up detailed information on when and how much a plant wants to drink, whether it craves more nourishment or is too hot or cold.
He showed that an ordinary bean plant had acquired the equivalent of "hands" to signal an instrumental brain how much light it needed. When the brain sent the "hands" signals, they had only to press a switch, and the plant was thus afforded the capability of independently establishing the optimal length of its "day" and "night". Later, the same bean plant, having acquired the equivalent of "legs", was able instrumentally to signal whenever it wanted water. "Showing itself to be a fully rational being, it did not guzzle the water indiscriminately but limited itself to a two-minute drink each hour, thus regulating its water need with the help of an artificial mechanism.

In replying to suggestions that the achievements were a sign of humanity's progress in control over plants, Karamanov replied:
"Nothing of the sort!
That plants are able to perceive the surrounding world is a truth as old as the world itself.
Without perception, adaptation does not and cannot exist. If plants had no sense organs and
didn't have a means of transmitting and processing information with their
own language and memory, they would inevitably perish."

Karamanov also predicted that in the long run it would be possible cybernetically to direct all the physiological processes of plants not for the sake of sensation, but for the advantage of the plants themselves. When plants are able to auto-regulate their own environment and establish optimal conditions for their own growth with the help of electronic instruments, this will be a long step toward larger harvests of cereal grains, vegetables, and fruits.

1959 - During the year,
USA Secretary of State Herter when asked by Senator Wayne Morse under what conditions the Eisenhower Administration would employ nuclear weapons, he replied:
"I cannot conceive of the President involving us in a nuclear war
unless it became certain we were in danger of devastation ourselves."

De Gaulle recognized that the USA reluctance to expose itself to Soviet retaliation placed in doubt the previous defense policy of the USA nuclear umbrella over Europe. For France, defense of Europe was a question of its survival; for the USA, it had now become a matter of risk. De Gaulle would now promote the development of nuclear weapons for its own defense, a position which Britain had tried to disuade France from on with the concept of non-proliferation.

1959 - During the year,
The first English translation of "The Phenomenon of Man" written by the Jesuit philosopher and paleontologist Pierre Teilhard de Chardin, who had died in 1955, was published. He presented an abstract image of the Earth as consisting of a set of concentric spheres with the physical geosphere being surrounded by a biosphere, which was surrounded by a "noosphere", that is, a collective mind or intelligence. This suggestion of a single consciousness was denounced by institutionalized religions. It gave the suggestion that all people could "tap" into this consciousness at will, and that undercut the purpose which many churches had taken for themselves as to being the interpreters and conduits of the directions of God to the rest of humanity. History certainly had not supported this claim to greatness.
James Lovelock, a British biologist and inventor, put forward the "Gaia" (earth goddess) hypothesis. In it, he extended Chardin's concept to include the image that the earth was a "living organism" which was capable of adapting to many changes to sustain life. Proponents argued that even if the biosphere has remained more or less the same over many centuries, there have been changes, sometimes catastrophic, and that small changes in the future could wipe out humankind even if they left most of the remainder of living things intake.

According to oft-demonstrated human traits, if we survive as a species, we may do so not really because of our human reason, which at its best is little more accurate than a guess supported by a an excuse. North American decisionmaking was analyzed in the early 1990s to be split between those who decided as leaders and those who decided as followers. The modes of decisionmaking utilized by "leaders" with its attendant accuracy were found to be as follows: factual analysis, 50%; undetracted intuition, 75%; spiritually trained meditation or prayer, 100%.
Leaders represented 4.1% of the population.
Followers, on the other hand represented 95.9% of the population.
Following the example of an authority figure was good enough for 40%; it was 40% accurate.
A further 20% followed the example of the majority; its accuracy dropped to 25%.
Media authority had climbed in the culture to dictate the decisionmaking of 15%; its accuracy rose to 32%.
Guessing and chance decisions, with a historical accuracy of 50%, were the choice of a further 10% of followers. Procrastination, or letting time and events decide for you, was the choice of 5.9% of followers; it was only constructive 15% of the time. Finally, superstition, as a followers decisionmaking style resulted in the choices taken by 5%; its accuracy was 20%. These represented the most frequent choice of decisionmaking style by the type of decisionmaker. In light of the criticism of the Gaia Hypothesis, our knowledge may not save us, although we will probably believe it did.

Expressed in the Chardin concept:
IF our knowledge saves us, it will be because we have learned to use better decisionmaking skills with a higher degree of accuracy. Those we are using we have learned. To the extent that we have been socially "programmed" to be leaders or followers and to use decisionmaking choices which encourage failure, we should recognize that most of what human culture has to offer, in terms of survival and harmony with the universe, is garbage.

1959 - During the year,
The overhearing of active communications was shown to be possible by the use of a brilliant beam of light.
Some of U.S.A. President Eisenhower's intelligence staff witnessed how a conversation carried on in a car or room blocks away could be overheard by "shooting" a beam of light off a window.

1959 - On October 4,
Lunik III (Luna 3), a USSR 614-pound space station was launched from Tyuratam.
It carried 2 cameras for photos of the far side of the Moon.
It was placed in an elliptical Earth orbit with an apogee of 480,000 km so that without mid-course corrections lunar gravity would pull it around the Moon at a distance of about 6200 km. Equipped with cameras, processing and transmission systems, a number of photos were scanned and transmitted back to the Earth. Three were published including a composite full view of the far side. Two large seas were named Mare Moscovrae (Moscow Sea) and Mare Desiderii (Dream Sea). It decayed April 1960 after 11 orbits totalling 177 days.

1959 - On October 13,
Explorer VII, an American 91-pound satellite was launched to study radiation balance and test the Lyman-Alpha X-ray.

1959 - On December 13,
Billy Thomas Peterson, a welder on sick-leave from General Motors, who lived near Pontiac, Michigan, was found burning in his garaged car. A passing motorist had seen smoke coming out of Billy's garage, had raised the alarm, and led firemen and police to where Billy sat smouldering. They took him to Pontiac General Hospital, where he was pronounced dead.
Billy had died, said the doctors of carbon monoxide poisoning, for he had coupled up a flexible pipe with the car's exhaust. There is no doubt that Billy intended suicide, even though he had just left his mother, whom he had been visiting. Billy, a welder on sick-leave from General Motors, was suffering from a serious kidney complaint. But whence came the fire which burned him so badly? 'His left arm was so badly burned that the skin rolled off. His genitals had been charred to a crisp. His nose, mouth and ears were burned.'

There was also the fact that 'the hairs on his body, his eyebrows, and the top of his head were all unsinged. Even through burned flesh hairs protruded unharmed.'
Even more mysteriously, all Billy's clothing remained unscorched and undamaged in a fire so hot that it burned his genitals to a crisp and melted a plastic religious statue on the dashboard.
... The 'theory' - 'reasoned out' to account for the fact that Billy had been badly burned, his clothes not at all - held that Billy had first been stripped; then tortured; then put back into his clothes and into his car - to die of carbon monoxide poisoning. Even the police rejected this attractive theory.
And whilst They were burning the naked Billy, why should there have been a fire in the car of such intensity that the plastic religious statue was melted? And how ... And why was it heat of such a curious type that it did not ignite the petrol tank; melted plastic, but confined itself to the area around the driving-seat ...?

The Medical Director of the Pontiac General Hospital, Dr. John Marra, who was Deputy Coroner for the district, issued this report on the death of Billy Thomas Peterson.
"A conclusion was reached as to the appearance of the burns on Mr. Peterson's body.
It was determined that these were caused by intensive heat in his car which resulted from the exhaust pipe's being connected to the front seat, causing a fire in the upholstery. His blue jeans became so heated that superficial burns of the skin resulted."

So the gases from the exhaust, led into the car, heated Billy's jeans so much that they burned Billy 'to a crisp', but not enough that they themselves were in the slightest degree scorched.
This ability on the part of the authorities to make pronouncements which ignore the insistent claims even of the common sense accessible to a low-grade moron is a consistent aspect of the mysterious, the unexplained.

The official explanations in the case of Billy Person being obviously unacceptable, I decided to do some checking of my own. [testing the effect of exhaust gases routed from the tailpipe to the driver's seat, I found] vinyl covering was not even discoloured ... seats still did not ignite; they did not even scorch. ... the (seat) stuffing ... was not even scorched. ... not so warm as to hurt me ... not to burn me ... or anything else. ....
... not only do we always have the convenient and willing 'explainer' to 'account for' (and so dismiss) the various incidences of the Unexplained, but that, in such glib and irrational 'explanations', even the common sense of the public is willingly set aside so that the public may enter into the conspiracy of silencing with the silencers.

1959 - On December 14,
The USSR Strategic Rocket Forces (SRF) was formed by Soviet leader Nikita Krushchev as a separate military service for the purpose of developing and controlling all Soviet land-based long-range (strategic) and intermediate-range missiles. With longer distance and space capable rockets, the requirement for submarine-launched ballistic missiles for the strategic attack role was largely reduced and transferred from the Navy to the Army.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1960 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
The Time Machine; Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, The Alamo, The Apartment, Suddenly Last Summer; Can-Can; Carry On Regardless; Psycho; The Magnificent Seven; The League of Gentlemen; Oceans 11; The Apartment; The Millionairess; The Big Show; The Entertainer; Village of the Damned; Shadows; The Great Imposter; The World of Suzie Wong; Doctor in Love; Little Shop of Horrors; Exodus; Saturday Night and Sunday Morning; Red Nightmare

Songs:
Theme From A Summer Place; It's Now Or Never; Stuck On You; I'm Sorry; He'll Have To Go; Cathy's Clown; Running Bear; Last Date; Save The Last Dance For Me; Greenfields; A Thousand Stars; You Send Me; Itsy Bitsy Teenie Weenie Bikini; Handy Man; Wings of a Dove; Please Help Me I'm Falling; Alabama; North To Alaska; You're the Only Good Thing; One More Time; Sink The Bismark.

General News:
The Trans-Canada Highway, the longest continuous motor traffic artery in the world, was completed this year.
Xerox introduces a document reproducing machine to the Canadian market.
Birth Control Pills are cautiously introduced to Canadian women; regarding their influence on the pituitary gland, a spokesman for the Planned Parenthood Federation stated
"You're tinkering with the entire endocrine system - which is like
turning out all the lights on the whole block just to fix a fuse in your house".

John Fitzgerald Kennedy becomes the first Roman Catholic President of the U.S.A., narrowly defeating Richard Nixon by 118,550 popular votes.
The U.S.S.R. shot down a U.S.A. U2 spy plane piloted by Francis Gary Powers; later a trade took place for KGB super-spy Rudolf Abel.

1960 - On January 4,
The European Free Trade Association (EFTA) was formed at the Stockholm Convention.
The Swedish government had proposed the establishment of the trading group; unlike the EEC, its purpose was that of intergovernmental trade in manufactured products only. It resulted in the uniting of "The Seven" economically. The Seven were: Austria, Denmark, Norway, Portugal, Sweden, Switzerland, and the United Kingdom. Conspicuously absent were Germany and France. The EFTA involved neither agricultural trade (important to France where agriculture represented 40% of the economy) nor a political commitment (which the UK wished to avoid). The relationship which developed between the members was so fragmentary and tenuous that communications were awkward. It is difficult for members of a group to discuss and negotiate to a common process for action if each member persists in acknowledging and expressing only their own self-interest.

1960 - By this year,
The USA Federal Government was encouraging institutionalized science at the rate of 10,000 fellowships and traineeships each year. More than 100,00 students took out Federally-financed loans. There were 300,000 students entitled to GI Bill educational support, mainly from the Korean War. There were also 7,000 foreign student being educated on American campuses courtesy of the State Department. Despite so much Federal money and the emphasis on science, there did not, in the end, appear to be any sizeable increase in the production of scientists. Instead, there was a more notable growth in the social sciences, which accounted for only 20% of Federal monies.
The "Matthew Effect", derived from Matthew XIII,12:
"For whosoever hath, to him shall be given, and he shall have more in abundance ..."
- appeared to apply to favourable universities such that by 1958, the University of California was receiving grants totalling $150 million a year, with the top 20 recipient institutions accounting for more than 61% of all funding. CIA research "fronts" included many foundations, institutes and some universities: MIT, UCLA, Brookings Institute, RAND Corporation, Rockefeller University. Even scholar engaged in unclassified research had to submit to Federal security screening and to swear a loyalty oath if they wanted government support.

A tendency with humans, the politicians and bureaucrats who provided the grants to encourage a devotion to science and greater invention and creativity, found that simply supplying money did not produce results. Students were motivated by the needs which they saw around them, to favour the social sciences. True scientific endeavour is often most productive when the student is allowed to "experiment" with ideas and equipment with the basic intent being one of "playing around" in order to reach new insights of understanding. Scientific motivation can seldom be encouraged by force feeding or by profit, for such directions focus the mind by obsession and such narrows the mind to tradition.

1960 - On January 12 and 13,
A Special Economic Committee convened at the request of the USA.
Government leaders from 10 European countries attended: Belgium, Denmark, France, Germany, Greece, Italy, the Netherlands, Portugal, Sweden, Switzerland and Britain. Representatives of the USA and Canada, as well as the EEC Commission, also attended. Douglas Dillon chaired the meeting. The Committee reached the following agreements:

1. the establishment of a workable procedure for the reorganization of the OEEC ...;
2. the establishment of a working committee, including the USA and Canada, to discuss the trade problems of the Six and Seven;
3. the establishment of a small group ... to better coordinate assistance to less developed countries.

A Trade Committee was the generally welcomed outcome.
The USA was moving closer to a recognizable position as a self-appointed director of the European market.

1960 - On January 14,
Nikita Krushchev, in a speech to the Supreme Soviet noted:
"The Soviets intend to conceal vast 'reserves' of missiles and warheads, hiding them in places throughout the expansive Soviet Union where the 'imperialists' could not spot them. Later, they could be launched ... in a nuclear war."

1960 -
Arleigh J Dagenis summarizes details of sightings including the June 1952 appearance of mysterious objects over the White House and Capitol.

1960 - In the February "Motor Life",
Daniel P. Moynihan, former Acting Secretary to the Governor of the State of New York and present Director of the New York State Government Research Project, wrote of his concern over the "Epidemic On The Highways". Moynihan demonstrates both the technical orientation of the American culture at this time together with its defeating self-denial. In part, he writes:
"At the height of the Korean War, the United States Air Force suddenly found itself seriously interested in the traffic safety down on the ground: it was losing more men from automobile accidents than from enemy action. A further check revealed this was true of the entire armed forces. Moreover, the automobile injuries were generally more serious and required longer hospitalization than the battle casualties.
... the traffic toll has proved much greater than anyone believed: 5,000,000 injuries a year, 25,000,000 days in bed at the hospital or at home - and despite publicity to the contrary, the problem is getting steadily worse. ...
It is characteristic of most public-health problems that they arise so naturally out of the environment that the population affected usually accepts them as inevitable and will even resist efforts to do anything about them. .... Misconceptions about traffic safety are now shared even by many who are intimately involved with the problem. The National Safety Council is a case in point."

Mr. Moynihan goes on to demonstrate how the Council, set up in Chicago some 46 years earlier, regularly builds its public respect by the publication of inaccurate weekend traffic death projections, inaccurate "official" figures for motor-vehicle injuries, avoidance of injury rate statistics, and an attitude which suggests that all vehicular deaths are the result of individual carelessness.
Moynihan points out that: a) Accident figures for New York State had risen by 21% (1948 - 1957); b) Injuries nationwide may be 350% higher than Safety Council figures; c) The number and RATE of injuries has been rising; d) Doctors are getting better at keeping victims alive; e) Death statistics are not motivating - Americans don't relate to death; f) Numbers of cars on the highways is increasing: 70,000,000 now; g) Accidents result when drivers cannot respond correctly to situations.

Moynihan acknowledges:
"It is quite possible that future research will find that a man who has just had a furious argument with his wife is inclined to knock down pedestrians with his automobile. But how shall we go about preventing husband-wife arguments? [A constructive culture takes responsibility for the skill development of its participants so that they can cope and interact well: institutional schooling.]
This is the dilemma of all approaches to the safety problem that are based on influencing driver behaviour: the significant personal characteristics seem to be so personal that it is hopeless to think of doing anything about them for the limited purposes of traffic safety. .... Temperament seems to have much more to do with accident experience than physical abilities (young adult statistics) .... Dr. Ross McFarland of Harvard University has concluded that the high accident rates must be regarded in terms of 'inexperience, emotional and social immaturity, and temperamental qualities associated with youth.' ...

The involvement of alcohol in serious injuries is probably still underestimated.
One recent study showed that over an 8-year period 49% of the drivers killed in single-car accidents ... were legally drunk ... and another 25% were either well on their way or suffering from hangovers."

While indications existed that alcohol and inadequate coping skills contributed greatly to the death and accident rates, strongly deterrent against- 'drinking and driving' legislation would not be passed in any North American states and provinces until the early 1990s. The instruction of teens and young adults in constructive communications patterns and non-abusive behaviour would not be part of the national teaching curriculum in any state or province up to 1995. The carnage would continue against the status quo of "social alcoholism" and the immature behaviours of "object-love" promoted by billions of dollars of advertising. Profits would be more important than lives. The legacy for the living: high rate of spiritual, emotional and physical abuse.

Moynihan did also acknowledge physical influences:
h) Little evidence supported advertisements against speeding; i) Most accidents occurred on country roads between 35 to 50 mph; j) Auto manufacturers had higher sales for cars advertised as "hot" ; k) Auto manufacturers have promoted the 'horsepower race' for power; l) Federal control of highway design had reduced accident rates 85%; m) Seriousness of injury related to car interior design; n) Mechanically hazardous features might cause 75% of fatalities; o) General Motors has opposed the use of seat belts from the start; p) Carbon monoxide was suspected of having put drivers to sleep; q) Only the Federal Government could regulate the auto industry; r) In America it had become safer to fly an airplane than drive a car.

He noted further:
"The police officer's job is not to understand traffic accidents but to find out who is legally responsible for them. ... The statistics collected by most motor-vehicle bureaus are hopelessly inadequate - and often inaccurate as well. ... (It might be easier and more cost-effective to) concentrate instead on changing the environment ... automobile design ... more sensible to put off the problem of influencing the behaviour of 80,000,000 drivers and concentrate on a matter that in the United States is subject to control by perhaps a dozen persons. ... The automobile industry did not oppose ( Kenneth A. Roberts, chairman of the Health and Safety of the House Interstate and Foreign Commerce Committee) it just ignored (his safety concerns)."

Seat belt use had been adopted by race car drivers from 1950.
Federal government requirements would not save lives for another decade.
The expedient political response of legal coercion (a dozen men) rather than increased awareness and higher level of self-esteem would never become an American approach. Automobile design would largely change according to what could be advertised as a part of the "American Dream."

1960 - By March,
The first USA Polaris Submarine, the USS George Washington/SSBN 598 was completed.
41 would be built and commissioned by April, 1967. The initial Polaris missile range was 1,200 nautical miles (2,222 km). By 1968, the USA Polaris A-3 missile had a range of 2,500 nautical miles (4,630 km).

1960 - During the year,
The Sabin Polio Vaccine would become available.
Dr. Albert Sabin had worked on a weakened virus vaccine in order to produce one which would be less costly and easier to administer than the Salk Vaccine of 1954. Proved effective, it was approved for use this year. More than 70 million school children would eat sugar cubes soaked with the weakened virus. Most would be immunized; a small number would get polio from the active vaccine. It would continue to be the vaccine of choice for polio.

1960 - Beginning this year,
The Polaris Submarine Launched Ballistic Missile (SLBM) would become the first USA-developed SLBM and the mainstay of the British nuclear force during the 1970s and 1980s.
After 4 years of research and development, the USA Navy began deploying nuclear-powered submarines armed with 16 Polaris missiles each. The Polaris was 31 feet (9.4 m) long and 4.5 feet (1.4 m) in diameter; it was powered by 2 solid-fueled stages. Three models would be developed.

The A-1 had a range of 1,400 miles (2,200 km) and a 1 megaton nuclear warhead providing each submarine with a destructive force of 16 megatons (million tons). The Hiroshima nuclear bomb had a destructive force of about 14.5 kilotons (thousand tons).
The A-2 would have a 1,700 mile (2,700 km) range and a 1 megaton warhead.
The A-3 would be capable of delivering a 200-kiloton warhead a distance of 2,800 miles (4,500 km).
The United Kingdom would adopt the A-3 in 1969, refine it and rename it the A-3TK, or Chevaline, and would fit it with electronic jammers and decoy warheads to permit its penetration of ballistic missile defenses around Moscow.

1960 - By March 10,
Assassination planning directed at Cuban leader Fidel Castro were being addressed formally and informally by the U.S. presidential advisory Special Group, the 5412 Committee. The President and Dulles even proposed a "package deal" to include some of the other Cuban leaders since any that were acceptable to the administration were then outside of Cuba. Eisenhower would later in the year approve the attempted assassination of Patrice Lumumba in the Congo. The CIA had introduced standby capability for "Executive Action" from January.

1960 - On March 11,
Pioneer V, an American 94.8 pound paddlewheel satellite for the investigation of interplanetary space between Earth and Venus and the testing of long-range radio transmissions was launched.

1960 - Early in April,
The Trade Committee agreed to in January, met for the first time.
Britain was positive to the prospect that the Committee would smooth over the differences between the EEC and the EFTA making way for wider economic cooperation amongst the capitalist countries of the West and providing Britain with the advantages of its "special relationship" with the USA which it assumed would lead the Committee. The USA saw the Committee as a vantage point from which to insure that European continental economic policy evolved consistent with the objectives of Washington: the expansion of the American economy and its capital interests. France, on the other hand, held reservations about the formation of the new Committee. It feared that once again Britain would use the opportunity to press for special concessions and negotiate its way out of certain concessions.
In hopes of defusing rising tensions between France and Britain, Prime Minister Harold Macmillan met with Prime Minister Charles de Gaulle two weeks previous, in mid-March. At that Paris meeting, Macmillan urged de Gaulle to oppose proposals to accelerate the transitional stages of the Common Market in return for Britain trying to persuade the USA to accept de Gaulle's September 1958 proposal to Macmillan of a Tripartism nuclear club consisting of the USA, Britain and France - in which Britain provided nuclear technology to France. Of course, should the USA show any reservations, Britain would back away from the concept completely rather than risk annoying the USA. For de Gaulle such a consideration was considered of worth for while France enjoyed "the full support of the USA," it had "refused to give any help" in assisting France into the nuclear weapons club. The British offer was for manipulative purposes only at the time.

In Geneva .. Britain, the USA and the USSR were cooperating on a nuclear test ban treaty which was hoped to lead towards nuclear disarmament. Had Macmillan's offer become public, it would have jeopardized the Geneva talks. Entry into the nuclear club was not as simple as it may sound. Nuclear arms technology was expensive. Britain had been attempting to build the "Blue Streak" nuclear missile and was finding budget constraints too tight to finish the project. Before the end of March, Macmillan had visited Washington, not to ask about French admission into the club but rather to request assistance in its own quest. With Eisenhower's commitment to supply Britain with the American Skybolt missile as a replacement, the British cabinet would formally cancel the Blue Streak program - millions of allotted capital, which had found its way into covert programs - would be written off, out of sight. The downside of the visit was that a week later the USA, in hopes of gaining earlier economic benefits, supported the proposal to accelerate the Common Market - as "a major contribution to a general lowering of world trade barriers." Britain was left to register its "deep concern" over the American pronouncement.
While visiting the USA, Macmillan had suggested that Britain would have no other choice but to lead another peripheral alliance with Russia against Germany and France, if they implemented their exclusionist plan. The American press, dramatized the communication behind headlines of "leaked reports". Macmillan was alleged to have voiced concerns about the potential for Nazi expansionist pretensions resurfacing in Germany. European press reaction was immediate and negative to the comments. Both French and German officials felt betrayed and deceived by Britain. More tactfully expressed later, after the damage had been done, Macmillan stressed his fear that an economic division of Europe would lead to a political and even military division. As the USA officials seemed to doubt the imprtance which Macmillan had placed on the matter, Macmillan had restated his concerns with the exaggerated and intense words which resulted in the predictable European enmity. Humans taught by their cultures to converse in authoritarian patterns become so alienated from their naturally expressed assertiveness as a child - that they seem incapable of avoiding miscommunications and of worsening those with their attempts at clarification.

The first meeting of the Trade Committee was largely a clash of objectives.
Members of the EEC wanted the Common Market to consolidate quickly and to avoid the bureaucracy of the EFTA while doing so. Members of the EFTA sought to limit the rift which had developed between those who sought political accommodation for economic benefit and those who sought economic benefit without surrendering political individuality. In other words, pride and self-interest clashed with idealistic economic rationalization. Britain had wanted the best of both worlds: special accommodations and free trade. France had scuttled free trade to protect its agriculture. If one were granted special considerations, then why would others not equally expect special attention. If all maintained their individuality, what was the point of trying to work together?

1960 - On April 1,
Trans-Canada Airlines introduced the first scheduled jet service by a Canadian airline.
The inaugural flight involved a DC-8, carrying 127 passengers, flying between Montreal and Toronto, and then to Vancouver, in 5 hours, 26 minutes.

1960 - On April 1,
Tiros I, an American 270 pound hatbox-shaped satellite, is launched to test experimental television techniques and to photograph the Earth's cloud cover. It transmitted almost 23,000 film-strip frames.

1960 -
Canada's Prime Minister John G. Diefenbaker fulfils a promise made in Parliament by having the Emergency Measures Organization (EMO) of the Privy Council Office prepare and issue " Your Basement Fallout Shelter", a 35 page booklet with blueprints. The Prime Minister in the Foreword stated
"Should a nuclear war occur, the risk of radioactive fallout will be very widespread, and will endanger many of us in our homes, even though a long way from the bomb explosion. The best and simplest way to safeguard against fallout is by household shelters which will provide protection."

During the next 2 years, the government would issue 6 booklets on nuclear war survival with number 6 concentrating on "Blast Shelters". The Prime Minister and Provincial Premiers would personally and publicly stand before models of shelters at large fairs extolling the virtues and preferability for citizens to provide for their own safety. The possibility of nuclear destruction was promoted as imminent and encouraged a cultural change of attitude to the concentration on personal immediate desires to the loss of societal considerations.

1960 - On April 13,
The Transit IB, an American 265-pound sphere is launched to test the capability of using a satellite as a navigational radio beacon.

1960 - On May 1,
Francis Gary Powers, an American civilian, is shot down while piloting a U2 espionage plane over the U.S.S.R.
Hired by the CIA to pilot the plane, both he and the plane are captured; Powers is presumed to have committed suicide and to have blown up the plane as planned for in such a mishap. Powers is interrogated at length, U.S.A. President Eisenhower denies the flight, Powers AND the plane are produced, Eisenhower admits he lied, publicly, Powers is given a very public televised trial in the U.S.S.R. and found guilty of spying. He was exchanged for Rudolph Abel, a Colonel in the KGB, who had been captured earlier in the U.S.A. and convicted of spying.
Only two other CIA-U2 flights had been made earlier in the year.
Since its development in 1956, about 20 flights had been sponsored by the CIA over the U.S.S.R. and most of those were during 1957 and 1958 with few flights in 1959. All had been tracked on Soviet radar, with some complaints, and denials. Bissell and Dulles, proud of their achievement, had offered the U2 for sale to the British (who took five), West Germany (who took one), and the French. About 22 were made in total with some being used into the 1980's. Power's flight was prompted by Soviet advances in missile technology over the previous 2 years and their satellite program. The U2 had a complicated self-destruct mechanism which Powers was unable to activate due to the circumstances of his escape from the disabled craft. He decided against the poison. The U2 missions provided a complete mapping of the U.S.S.R. providing researchers at the NSA headquarters with the ability to construct site plans for any installation covered.
Photos of equipment seized from the U-2 showed a pistol equipped with a silencer, a dagger, a 3-inch long poisoned pin, personal items and photos of military sites.
This ended U2 flights over the Soviet Union.
They did continue over China and other countries into the 1980s.

1960 - On May 2,
"Red Flag" expressed the sentiments of Nikita Krushchev:
"Nuclear war is not something for communists to fear, for on the debris of a dead imperialism, the victorious people will create with extreme rapidity a civilization thousands of times higher than the capitalist system."

The true danger and permanency of nuclear radiation fallout was still poorly understood by most persons at this time.

1960 - On May 9,
Soviet Defense Minister Rodion Malinovsky says that:
"anyone who raises the sword against this country will be wiped off the face of the earth. Our armed forces are equipped with nuclear weapons including intercontinental missiles which can destroy the enemy on any part of the globe. We are indestructible .... We are warning the accomplices (of the Gary Power's U2 spy plane mission) our technology is so perfected we can see not only where the airplanes start, but we can take measures to wipe out those bases altogether."

1960 - On May 10,
The USA announced that it was developing 2 spy satellites to replace the U-2 missions:
SAMOS (which will be launched January 31, 1961) and MIDAS (expected to be launched in 1963).

1960 - On May 12,
At "The Conference on World Tensions" being held in Chicago, Illinois state, 6 former nobel prize winners met in an open session.
Dean Malan Cleveland and Professor Irving Swerdlow of Syracuse University noted that:
"After a decade and a half ... we are still tackling 20-year problems
with 5-year plans, manned by 2-year personnel with 1-year appropriations."

Lord Boyd-Orr of the U.K. proposed as a first step, reductions of 10% in the world's armaments budgets, of which 5% should be used to reduce taxes and 5% to set up a fund for underdeveloped nations. He estimated this would be $ 5 billion a year - which could be used to double food production in 20 years.
On May 16, Lord Boyd-Orr would conclude:
"Don't blame the politicians.
The best politician cannot lead where people are unwilling to follow."

Dr. Ralph Bunche added:
"Whatever and wherever the tension ... it is the attitudes, suspicions, fears,
and other emotions, spontaneous or propaganda-inspired, informed or misguided,
of the individual, expressed in mass, which are ultimately culpable."

Others who attended included: Sir Norman Angell, U.K. Philip Noel-Baker, U.K. Rev. Dominique G. Pire, Belgium Lester B. Pearson, Canada Professor Arthur H. Compton was also present, as an observer.

1960 - On May 13,
An Apparent Intensive Survey of Brazil is carried out by UFOs which follow an orthotenic pattern, such as that first discovered by Aime Michel in 1954. Dr. Olavo T. Fontes writes an article on it for the March-April issue of "Flying Saucer Review".

1960 - On May 16,
The Launch of SPUTNIK IV, a 10,008 pound space vehicle is announced by the USSR.
No attempt is made to retrieve the space vehicle and its 2-1/2 ton space cabin.
A supposed dummy pilot enjoyed the comfort of an ordinary dwelling unit.
Retro rockets fired incorrectly or misfired speeding up the capsule and lodging it into a larger orbit.
A 1958 picture of a cosmonaut is released.
By this time, at least 6 apparent manned space flights had been detected by amateur shortwave radio listeners. Space communications to both the USSR and the USA would largely be transmitted and interpreted through electronic scrambler-descrambler units from now on. According to both Russian and English "space" communications heard earlier, astronauts and cosmonauts had both been killed during space explorations and research. Although denied, this Soviet flight had resulted in the failure of directional rockets required for re-entry. The 2 pilots aboard took "termination" pills when they discovered that there was no way for them to survive.

1960 - On May 24,
Tidal Waves from a Chilean earthquake hit Japan at 500 mph with a height of 33 feet.
900 fishing boats are sunk, 800 people are killed, and the city of Sendai is temporarily submerged. Other cities are also damaged.

1960 - On May 24,
MIDAS II (Missile Defense Alarm System) is launched by the USA from Cape Canaveral.
Its intent was to provide a 30-minute warning to the USA in the event of a nuclear weapons attack from the USSR by missile. Midas I, launched on February 26, was not mentioned in NASA publicity because it had failed to reach a suitable orbit. Midas II would use a super-cooled infra-red sensor. The 5000-pound cylindrical satellite malfunctioned. Both it and SAMOS "detected" a land- or submarine-launched missile by comparing its hot plume with the cooler background. Unfortunately, sunlight glinting on clouds could sometimes mimic and did mimic the infrared radiation (IR) signature (pattern) of a missile launch.
On 3 occasions, MIDAS II readings prompted urgent calls from the American President to the Soviet Premier as preparations were being made for WWIII. When it was discovered that the "alerts" were all errors due to the nature of the electronic sensor abilities, the President ordered the satellite destroyed. A triple humiliation before an avowed enemy which could have led to nuclear war was too much. The frustration was redirected against Fidel Castro, the new leader in Cuba. He was regarded as more "touchable" yet equally hated.
It would not be known for decades that the USSR was technically capable of positioning a nuclear bomb directly over the USA in a satellite as early as 1953, making satellite detection of missiles somewhat limited in value. There would have been NO WARNING had Stalin lived to carry out his first strike strategy.

1960 -
The "International Development Association" (IDA) is formed for the purpose of making long-term (up to 50 years) loans at low interest rates. It is supported by periodic contributions from World Bank member countries. The World Bank itself raises capital for lending by selling bonds in the capital markets of member countries and from direct contributions of member governments.
Selling bonds to the many members of the World Bank lessened the burden for loan capitalization from the USA and allowed many other governments to become willing co-conspirators in the spread of capitalism into less materialistic societies. Somewhat supportive, idealistically, of the mythical aims of foreign aid, commercialization, industrialization, political and social mass orderliness - some became enthusiastic contributors. Other members contributed from a position of political maneuvering - if you bought bonds (and received interest) you had a better chance of obtaining loans totalling several times the amount you contributed.
It is important to note that part of the reserves of independent nations could thus be "transferred" to the Association, which would hold these reserve deposits to support lendings. The major difference of the IDA "Bank" from the World Bank (IBRD) is that the former is not referred to as, or regulated like, a bank. Further, while the IBRD was unable to sell its own securities to raise capital, the IDA could. The other significance of this change is that it indicates that MORE capitalization of developing economies (and their military) was desired.

1960 - On May 25,
An Earthquake in southern Chile kills more than 5,000 persons and 9 inactive volcanoes become active.
On the following day, 2 more earthquakes strike Chile together with 15 foot tidal waves.
One quarter of the population, 2 million persons, are left homeless.

1960 - On May 30,
Soviet Defense Minister Rodion Malinovsky orders USSR military bases to launch rockets against any base from which a plane takes off and proceeds to violate Soviet airspace. The American deceptive use of the U-2 spyplanes has been detected on every mission by the advanced Soviet radar. At the same time, most of the USSR has been reconnaissance photographed in previous U-2 flights making future flights largely redundant. Soviet politicians have complained repeatedly to international political organizations about the invasions of its state privacy. The Soviet public believe that the USA intends to invade them.

1960 - On June 22,
Transit II-A and GREBI, two satellites, are jointly launched by the USA, using a Thor-Able Star rocket.
Transit II-B, a 223-pound sphere will be used for navigational purposes and to measure cosmic noise above the ionosphere. GREBI, a piggyback 42-pound satellite was intended to measure solar radiation. They were put into a polar orbit.

1960 - On July 14,
Elio Bianca (Brother Eman) self-proclaimed prophet of Italy, expected the world to come to an end.
Much attention was given in the media with many believers in Britain, Africa, Asia, America, the Philippines, South America.

1960 - On August 10,
Discoverer 13, an American 1,700-pound satellite is launched for the purpose of recovery.
A 300-pound instrument capsule is retrieved from the Pacific Ocean.

1960 - On August 12,
ECHO I, an American 137.4-pound satellite is launched to provide worldwide telephone, radio and television communications.
The 100-foot aluminum-coated plastic sphere was used to echo back radio signals.

1960 - On the night of August 13-14,
Patrolmen Stanley Scott and Charles A. Carson sight a football-shaped UFO near Corning, California, and pursue it for over 2 hours.

1960 - During August,
The first FBI COINTELPRO (Counterintelligence Program) was illegally initiated by Hoover against groups advocating independence for Puerto Rico.

1960 - On August 18,
Discoverer 14, an American 1,700-pound satellite was launched to effect recovery of an instrument capsule.
A 300-pound capsule was recovered in an aerial snatch by a C119 Boxcar Plane over the Pacific Ocean.

1960 - On August 19,
Sputnik V, a Soviet Union 10,141 pound capsule carrying 2 dogs and smaller animals, insects and plants is recovered after a flight of 27 hours.
Frequent publicized launches would continue by both the USA and the USSR from this time forward.

1960 - By September 12,
An affirmation to assassinate Patrice Lumumba of the Congo was made in the U.S.A. National Security Council.
During 1960, the Belgian Congo was one of 16 African nations to receive independence.
Its new name became the Republic of the Congo.
Eisenhower had personally ordered the assassination in July.
On August 25, Allen Dulles, CIA Director had personally directed Lawrence Devlin, the CIA station chief in Leopoldville, urging "removal" of Lumumba as a Communist threat. Lumumba had requested assistance directly from Eisenhower. Eisenhower was thoroughly intolerant of the social customs of Lumumba on his visit to Washington (he had requested a sexual consort openly) and had refused to communicate further with him. Lumumba had then gone to the Soviets for assistance and they began sending troops, planes, technicians, and weapons in September. The U.S.A. had already sent 10,000 troops under the auspices of the UN.

1960 - By September,
Eckhard Hess and James Polt, psychologists at the University of Chicago performed an experiment that promised to provide a scientific method for decoding the unconscious motivations and interests of individuals through recognition of external signs, specifically those presented by the human eye. He found that the size of a person's pupil varied according to his psychological state. In addition to responding to background changes in intensity of ambient light, even mild changes in mental or emotional activity affected pupil size. An unbiased, culture-free manner of mind-reading had presented itself. What would humanity do with it?
Hess declared that when a person experienced positive feelings toward something, their pupils enlarged, but when they experienced negative feelings the pupils contracted. The stronger the feeling, the more pronounced the dilation or contraction of the pupil. These responses had been known to scientists for a time and were further recognized as being connected to the autonomic nervous system. Hess's work and the research it would stimulate, used modern equipment and technology and greatly increased the specificity and accuracy of the results. Now mental effort, task difficulty, and emotional intensity could be measured without relying on conscious feedback from the human subject. This presented enormous significance to advertising agencies for the judgement of the effectiveness of their proposals during the development stage. As the research and technology improved, political entities would also use it to screen members and applicants for true motives and character assessment. Intelligence agencies would be able to discretely extract information from a target without the use of any form of torture or coercion.

Sophisticated pupilometers, which projected the subject's dilations and constrictions, and provided a precise and continuous record of its diameter would be available within 10 years. Whittaker Corporation's Space Sciences Division, in Waltham, Massachusetts, would have models for sale to the public in 1974 with price ranges from $7,600 to $10,000. Equipment combining the pupilometer with an eye-view monitor - which would project on a separate screen the scene the viewer was watching and indicate the exact point of the subject's gaze, would market for $13,000 to $20,000. The upper-range models could include a 3-channel computer-compatible recorder for the pupilometer, and a videotape recorder for the eye-view monitor.
Since sales, rather than creativity is the focus of the multi-billion dollar advertising field, those in it expressed interest in pupilometer research and results. The assumption would be made that the greater the positive response, the greater the possibility of a purchase at some present or future time. High human response to sexual themes relative to all others would be a strong motivator for the subliminal use of sexual images and words in the backgrounds and photo matrix of advertising. Confounding the conclusions was the fact that anything new or changed to the perspective of the subject usually would gain a high response indicating neither attraction or repulsion. Canadian researcher Herb Simpson would demonstrate in the early 70s that there was no evidence of pupil constriction to negative words; rather, the more intense the stimulation, positive or negative, the greater the pupil size. It would then be found that images of shock value would produce greater pupil size followed by constriction responses once the subject had become familiar with the image.
Further still, John McLauglin and W. Scott Peavler noticed that when a man viewed a provocative stimulus, his pupillary response did not subside immediately upon removal of the stimulus, showing a residual influence. Daniel Kahneman and his co-workers would determine that mental effort would result in enlarged pupils - as in situations eliciting recall. Peavler and Tamara Geacintov would find that pupilometers could be used to determine the fatigue factor of different approaches to the performance of tasks thereby determining which was more effective. With these results, this "scientific" method yielded several interpretations. Less spectacular than first desired, for the purpose of manipulation rather than understanding, the use of pupilometers could be used to determine the emotional and mental attachment which a subject would express relative to particular images and words.

1960 - In the October issue of "Spaceflight",
M.H. Briggs wrote an article entitled "New Evidence on Martian Life".
An abstract of it stated:
"Studies of the infrared spectra of Mars have shown the presence of absorption bands probably due to organic compounds. These absorptions are characteristic of the spectra from the dark areas of the surface. This evidence points to the existence of complex organic substances in these areas of Mars. The absorptions typical of carbohydrate molecules were found in the spectrum of a lichen. The presence of plants of this type would provide an explanation of the negative results for chlorophyll."

1960 - in the January-October issue of the "Journal of the British Astronomical Association",
R.H.Garstang wrote an article titled "Vegetation on Mars".
An abstract summarized it as follows:
"A further explanation is given of the discovery of spectrographic absorption lines probably due to vegetation-related organic molecules on Mars. Three absorption bands at 3.43 u, 3.56 u, and 3.67 u were found which appear to be peculiar to the dark regions of Mars. The first 2 bands are well know in plants, but only recently the band at 3.67 u has been found in the alga Cladophora and appears to be produced by carbohydrate molecules in the plant. The longer wavelength is due to the attachment of both oxygen and hydrogen atoms to the same carbon atom."

1960 - On October 20,
USSR leader Nikita Krushchev asserted openly that the Soviet Navy had nuclear-propelled submarines and that they were capable of firing rockets with nuclear warheads. A year later, the Soviet public would be told. USSR had launched its first such submarine almost 2 years earlier.
In the following month, Commander George P. Steele, USN, wrote in a paper submitted to the U.S. Naval Institute Proceedings:
"The present and future threat to our control of the sea which is posed by the modern submarine is of such magnitude that our national policy is in jeopardy .... After six years of operating nuclear submarines, we still do not have at sea a weapon system able to cope with even one of them. There are rare lucky hits; the submarine captain might make a gross error and expose himself. But we cannot, with any degree of assurance, prevent him from working his will. The (nuclear submarine) can destroy our cities or our ships."

1960 - During October,
The CIA initiated MK-Ultra Subproject 94
"to provide for a continuation of investigations on the remote directional control of activities in selected species of animals (was reported as demonstrated). Miniaturized stimulating electrode implants in specific brain center areas will be utilized."

Such projects resulted in dogs, cats, and monkeys being used as guided microphones and bombs.
"Initial biological work on techniques and brain locations essential to providing conditioning and control of animals has been completed. The feasibility of remote control of activities of several species of animals has been demonstrated. The present investigations are directed toward improvement of techniques."

By April, 1961, Gottlieb's staff had a "production capability".
One of the first assignments for Dr. Gottlieb was the collection of various lethal toxins and biological materials which could be taken to the Congo and used to assassinate Patrice Lumumba. Believing it was "part of my duty" in service to the chief executive of his country, Gottlieb prepared the substances and took them to Lawrence Devlin, in the Congo, in late September. His reward was directorship of the MK-Ultra Programs.

1960 - During October,
30 mummies from an unknown civilization at least 10,000 years old were discovered in a cave in the state of Sonora, Mexico.
They had been embalmed by an unknown method and were still perfectly preserved.
It is unknown what became of them (see 1560).

1960 - Dated the 15 of November,
A memo to all U.S. base commanders from the Secretary of the Air Force, stated
"There is a relationship between the Air Force's interest in space surveillance and its continuous surveillance of the atmosphere near the earth for Unidentified Flying Objects - UFOs."

1960 - During the year,
A Long Metallic Aerial Object is seen by 2 California highway patrolmen, at 11:00 P.M.
They first thought they were witnessing the emergency landing of an aircraft and they stopped their patrol car and set off on foot to give assistance. Each drew his pistol when they suspected there was something odd about the incident. The object quickly rose to a height of 30 to 60 metres and remained hovering. Subsequently, it moved away and the officers followed it in their car, keeping it in sight for 2 hours. Other people confirmed the presence of the object from different vantage points. It was additionally described as having powerful lights at each end and influencing strong radio interference with any receiver which became close to it.
The official explanation provided by the USAF Bluebook team was that the people had seen "refraction of the planet Mars, Aldebaran and Betelgeuse." When it was pointed out that none of these was visible at that time and place, Capella was substituted for Mars?

1960 - During November,
A Huge Soviet space rocket launch disaster occurs.
During liftoff, the fuel tanks of the huge rocket burst to result in the command centre and the launchpad region being completely enveloped in superheated flame. The leader of the Soviet aerospace program and at least 30 technicians die. The accident would not be admitted nor documentation released until April, 1996 - 35 years later.

1960 -
In an article in the "Saturday Evening Post", a scientist notes:
"About 1/7th of the entire land surface of our earth, stretching in a great swath around the Arctic Circle, is permanently frozen ... the greater part of it is covered with a layer, varying in thickness from a few feet to more than a thousand feet, composed of different substances. It includes a high proportion of earth or loam, and often also masses of bones or even whole animals in various stages of preservation or decomposition.
The list of animals thawed out of this mess would cover pages ... the greatest riddle, however, is when, why and how did all these creatures, and in such countless numbers, get killed, mashed up and frozen ...?

These animal remains were not in deltas, swamps or estuaries, but were scattered all over the country. Many of these animals were perfectly fresh, whole and undamaged, and still either standing, or at least kneeling upright.
Vast herds of enormous, well-fed beasts, beasts not specifically designed for extreme cold, [were apparently] placidly feeding in sunny pastures at a temperature in which we would probably not even have needed a coat. Suddenly, they were killed without any visible sign of violence and before they could so much as swallow a last mouthful of food, and then quick-frozen so rapidly that every cell in their bodies is perfectly preserved."

1960 - During the year,
Dr. Robert Nathan, later to be at NASA's Jet Propulsion Laboratory in Pasadena, conceived the concept of image processing.
Through enhancement of photographs, by computer and other means, the intent was to determine what an indistinct image was. Later developments would allow for computer simulations, computer animations, analog-to-digital-to-analog imaging. By the late 70s, video sequences could be made which would be used as evidence that the reverse of what had really happened in a circumstance had happened. Idealistically, image processing is an attempt to improve the technical quality of a recording medium. Realistically, the process attempts to "sell" the results of an investigation by manipulating them to become what the viewer expects, wants, or, is excited to see. Pragmatically, the process turns garbage into gems. Analytically, the results of image processing can never be relied upon with any certainty due to the mass of variables involved in determining how a shading of light should be interpreted IF a representation of reality is the goal.

1960 - From 1960 to 1980,
Worldwide Military Outlays would grow from $100 billion to more than $500 billion a year.
The last figure would be more than the 1981 gross national products of Mexico, the entirety of Central America and all of the various Caribbean nations combined.

19xx no date -
Madison, Wisconsin: Mrs. Marie Knipper, a lady in her fifties, her friend, and two teenage girls were driving from Janesville, Wisconsin, to Stoughton and a UFO appeared over the interstate highway. It buzzed the car and followed them all the way to Stoughton and left the interstate when they turned off it. It stopped and hung above the interchange. There, it sparked and seemed to throw off some "slag" pieces, some were found later, before continuing on with them. Mrs. Knipper had to follow a roundabout "C"-shaped route to get to her house because of bridges she had to cross.
The craft, as if knowing of her destination, took a straight route, arrived at her house before her and hovered about it awaiting her arrival. A fellow who lived 50 miles away and considered himself to be a master mentalist, knew her slightly and knew there was going to be something exciting going on over at her house that evening and had driven over in the meantime. He also witnessed the sighting. A farmer had picked up some of the metal which had been knocked off the craft and gave a piece to researcher, Warren Smith. After several days of investigating in the area, he was approached by 2 men who said they worked for a government agency. They threatened to endanger himself and his family if he did not relinquish the piece of metal, so he gave it to them. They had been following him for several days as he had been trying to investigate the sighting and find more pieces of whatever was dropped.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX
Memory Stimulators.
1961 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
Voyage to the Bottom of the Sea; X-15; The Young Doctors; A Raison in the Sun, A Taste of Honey; One-Eyed Jacks; The Outsider; Carry On Regardless; Splendor in the Grass; Come September; The Curse of the Werewolf; Bachelor in Paradise; The Guns of Navarone; The Secret Partner

Songs:
Tossin' and Turnin'; Big Bad John; Exodus; Runaway; Runaround Sue; Will You Love Me Tomorrow; Travelin' Man; Michael; The Lion Sleeps Tonight; Blue Moon; Surrender; Take Good Care Of My Baby; Hit The Road Jack; Run To Him; Crying; Foolin' Around; I Dream Of Hill Billy Heaven; I Fall To Pieces; Walk On By; Under the Influence Of Love; Signed, Sealed and Delivered; Losing Your Love; Soft Rain.
Books: "Silent Spring" by Rachel Carson.
Stage: "Camelot" opens on Broadway.

NEWS:

Consumer Price Index: 89.6
The USSR announced that it had set off a 50 megaton nuclear blast (2500 times more powerful than the Hiroshima, Japan, bomb of 1945. Protest marches followed, worldwide.
President Kennedy of the U.S.A., only 90 days after assuming power, and at the urging of the C.I.A., supported an invasion of Cuba by Ex-patriots. President Castro found out in time leading to the "Bay of Pigs" slaughter of the invaders.
In launching his "New Frontier", President Kennedy states "Ask not what your country can do for you - ask what you can do for your country."
Prime Minister Diefenbaker, of Canada, leads Canadians in a rush to build fallout and blast shelters; the government Emergency Measures Organization circulate free copies to thousands of do-it-yourself shelter plans.

1961 - On January 17,
Prime Minister Patrice Lumumba, of the newly independent Congo in Africa.
He and President Joseph Kasavubu were opposed by Joseph Mobutu.
Fewer than 20 Congolese had higher academic education at this point.
When Lumumba had visited President Eisenhower in the previous July, he had asked that the State Department supply him with a blond prostitute to stay with him at Blair House, the President's guest quarters. He was also known to smoke hemp, practice witchcraft and be "undisciplined" in other ways. This behaviour was totally repugnant to Eisenhower and the establishment of the time who knew nothing of the customs of other nations and could not "suffer fools quietly".
As early as January, 1960, Richard Bissell, in charge of the NSA and its U2 project, had ordered William Harvey to set up a "standby capability" for what was called euphemistically "Executive Action", by which was plainly meant a capability for assassination of foreign leaders as a "last resort". At he time, both of these employees of the CIA were convinced that the White House had orally urged the creation of such a planning capability. In January and March of 1960, secret discussions in a subcommittee of the Special Group had spoken about assassination planning with the proposed target then being Fidel Castro of Cuba.

In July, 1960, Lumumba had visited Washington.
At that time, black troops in the Congolese army rebelled; there was a bloodbath.
Both President Joseph Kasavubu and Prime Minister Lumumba appealed to Eisenhower for help.
Eisenhower did not want to open the door to U.S.S.R. involvement so he sent them to the UN (United Nations) which typically discussed it. At that point, Lumumba made it clear that he would take aid from anyone. The Soviet Union obliged and immediately the U.S.A. intelligence community began speaking of Lumumba as "a person who was a Castro or worse." By August 25, 1960, Dulles had sent a cable to the CIA in Leopoldville, Congo, asking who would get rid of Lumumba. Minutes of the Special Group on the same day, and later of the National Security Council (NSC) on September 25, 1960 had stated "It was finally agreed that planning for the Congo would not necessarily rule out getting rid of Lumumba."
During September, Dr. Sidney Gottlieb, the CIA's resident toxic-substance expert, was asked by Richard Bissell to make preparations for an assassination attempt. The design was to obtain various toxic biological materials that would produce a disease indigenous to that part of Africa; in late September he took the materials to Lawrence Devlin, the CIA district officer in Leopoldville, Congo. To avoid identification with the U.S.A., the NSA hired two non-Americans who never knew each other, sent them to the United States to be trained by the CIA to be professional killers; then sent them to the Congo. Only then, when Justin O'Donnell, a CIA agent, was called on to supervise the killers, did an American refuse to follow the string of orders. The problem was resolved without American assistance when Lumumba was captured by Mobutu's troops flown to Elizabethville and murdered by Congolese. The planning and preparation had been done; as time progressed, the process would be refined.

During the above period, other targets considered and planned for were Colonel Abdul Kassem in Iraq (killed in his own country by firing squad before the CIA-NSA completed their plans), President Rafael Trujillo, the dictator of the Dominican Republic (ambushed and assassinated on May 30, 1961 by non-Americans using guns supplied by the CIA), and Fidel Castro, in Cuba.

Only "committed" people who followed authority without question, who believed in the cause-effect, right-wrong, black-white, divine-satanic, two alternative view of reality, and were religiously conservative enough to see themselves as supporting the ONLY righteous alternative could support a high cost, high power deception of the voters in the performance of murders and cheating as a sacrifice required to defeat an evil enemy. Given that such has been established, who would they disdain in their own country and would they seek to "protect" it from him by assassination?

1961 - On January 22,
U.S.A. President John F. Kennedy is inaugurated into office.
He has been critical of Eisenhower's approach to many things.
He opts for a more diplomatic handling of State Department affairs.
While he has been in politics for a time, his military service in WWII does not put him in sympathy with the conservative views promoted by former Generals and high ranking career officers, nor with high ranking career government bureaucrats. His social circles have been more focused on university academics, senators, and the financially fortunate. He has an idealism which encourages him to make America more equal in opportunity and civil rights for all and believes in diplomacy before force.
Kennedy's approach to politics was termed by some as "pragmatic", a subtle form of authoritarianism - for it was a view of the world in which some men led other men. To Kennedy, politics came down to personalities, not to major forces or crucial issues. What mattered first of all was the handful of men who exercised leadership. Political ideas, political institutions, political programs were of interest only to fill in the details. Politics was a matter of who had power and what they did with it. His background had taught him that public image in politics was everything; the mass media could make or break your career. In addition, he knew that a stance of confidence, authority, and directness often conveyed a sense of power to others. Winning was everything, and the only way to win was to have power and use it. Power was the charisma of image built on a base of privilege and wealth. He played his part with conviction and planning, like a good poker player. He was the first Catholic elected President in the U.S.A. He knew nothing of the NSA's activities, the existence of MJ-12, the communications with the REDS, BLONDS and the arrangements with the GRAYS.
Elected partially on the paranoia generated by a media campaign that exploited a non existent USA-USSR missile gap, Kennedy initiated a buildup of USA strategic and conventional military forces. He accelerated the development of the Polaris submarine-launched ballistic missile and the Minuteman land-based ICBM, giving these projects the highest national priorities. Krushchev's earlier Soviet strategy of emphasizing land-based ICBMs at the sacrifice of submarine-launched missiles and manned bombers as well as conventional military forces - a more defensive approach - would now have to be scraped. A clash over where each nation could place these nuclear missile armed devices would arise.

1961 - In January,
USA Secretary of Defense, Robert McNamara appointed by President Kennedy, determines that there is no missile gap after all between the USA and the USSR. Much of the previous political campaign had revolved around the nation's military posture and its suggested weakness. Unannounced to the public, McNamara now found that there was indeed a missile gap - and the Russians were on the unpleasant side of it. Shortly before the November, 1960 USA election, the USS George Washington submarine had launched 2 Polaris missiles at targets more than 1,000 miles distant and struck them both. The subsurface-launched missile revolutionized modern strategic warfare by suggesting second-strike force. Such became the core of the USA deterrent policy; it would take the Russians more than a decade before they could match the technology.

1961 - During January,
U.S.A. President John F. Kennedy concludes that the Pentagon under the direction of Robert McNamara is not responding fast enough to his desired shift from deterrence to counterinsurgency; he initiates a "Special Group for Counterinsurgency" and the "Green Berets". The intent was to shift from a basic philosophy of "massive retaliation" and nuclear deterrence to counterinsurgency to enable America to fight "brushfire" guerilla warfare around the globe. The weapons of insurgency: defoliation, napalm, anti-personnel and incendiary bombs, massive air power replacing ground troops, and psywar tactics reflected a massive change in military strategy and co-depended heavily upon the military-academic-scientific-industry unit to function. To the intellectual idealist that Kennedy was, the "professional" solution was more attractive than the brutality of hand-to-hand combat and safer for the home troops. By May, 1961, 100 Green Berets would be assigned to Vietnam, thus officially assigning the first combat troops to that country. Eisenhower had sent "military advisors", beginning in 1955.

1961 - During January,
Robert Kennedy is sworn in as Attorney General of the USA by his brother President John F. Kennedy.
At the age of 35 he was the youngest man to sit in the infrequent meetings of the Cabinet.
Within days of his appointment he created a "Hoffa Unit" within the Justice Department and gave it priority over other business. Jimmy Hoffa, noted labour union leader now found himself confronted by a superior force bent on convicting him of illegal activities. Kennedy had more money, more lawyers, and an obsession of religious zeal toward riding America of what he believed was rampant organized crime. Robert (Bobby) set out to convict all major criminal elements even if the only charge he could snare them with was the owning of too many Mourning doves (Joseph Aiuppa) or the fact that they had made a false statement on a Veterans Administration loan application (Louis Gallo).

1961 - On January 31,
SAMOS II (Missile Defense Alarm System) is launched by the USA.
Its intent was to provide a 30-minute warning to the USA in the event of a nuclear weapons attack from the USSR by missile. Both MIDAS II and SAMOS II "detected" a land- or submarine-launched missile by comparing its hot plume with the cooler background. Unfortunately, sunlight glinting on clouds could sometimes mimic and did mimic the infrared radiation (IR) signature (pattern) of a missile launch. On 3 occasions, MIDAS II readings prompted urgent calls from the American President to the Soviet Premier as preparations were being made for WWIII. SAMOS II, publicly described as having a mission of photographing terrain and both sensing and recording electromagnetic radiation was, more specifically, a reconnaissance satellite with improved sensors for sudden infrared patterns. It proved as inaccurate as MIDAS II. At first, neither all Soviet launch sites were covered nor were impact predictions accurate. Sudden volcanic eruptions, jet aircraft suddenly emerging from heavy cloud cover, sunlight glinting off aircraft and other influences could result in the relay of a signal which would be interpreted by the human operators as a missile launch. In one observation, misread light from the rising Moon was misread to indicate a missile attack.
Machine vision would require 15 years of intensive research and development to become somewhat dependable.
Human scientists, through their errors, demonstrated how little awareness they had of the complexities involved in "processing" optical information and in the environmental factors influencing vision on the Earth. Until their efforts turned from development of "detection" technology to "processing and interpretation" technology, such satellites and devices would remain highly unsuitable as indicators of when to begin a nuclear retaliatory attack against another nation. SAMOS II only increased the confusion over what a positive detection meant and when it would be suitable to begin the countdown to a counterattack.

1961 - Between February 3rd and 5th,
Astronomical factors, eight planets in conjunction under the sign of Capricorn, contributed to a prediction from India that the earth would split into pieces. The Hindu in India prepared en masse. In England, George King, leader of the Venusian Society and claiming to be the Venusian candidate to the United Nations also forecast February 5 as the final day. Fewer earthquakes and volcanic eruptions were recorded than usual.

1961 - During the year,
In the U.S.A., an underground cave in which an atomic device had been detonated on September 13, 1957, was entered by three specialists. The device had been placed in an artificial cave hollowed out of rock 800 feet down, at the end of a zigzag corridor 2000 feet long. Scientists had originally calculated that access to the cave would be impossible for a hundred years, because of the heat absorbed by the rock. Soundings made by means of special instruments indicated that this margin of safety had been grossly overestimated and clearing of the corridor leading to the cave began.
The cave had originally been hollowed out in the form of a sphere with a diameter of 120 feet.
The explosion had reshaped and enlarged the cavity such that it now was 150 feet wide and only 30 feet high. The temperature inside was found to be 120 degrees F. and the siliceous rock was covered with crystals created by the fusion; many had been reduced to fragments by pieces of shattered rock. Among these crystals were rubies and diamonds. It is unreported as to the quantity and quality of the precious stones taken from the cave. There is no current record of how many similar tests were planned and executed after this finding.
Before the global agreement against underground nuclear tests was declared in 1991, more than 868 such tests had been conducted.

Retrieval and sale of 100 pounds of precious gems and sale on the wholesale market could result in a capital appreciation of $770 million at 1961 dollar values. Construction of interconnecting underground tunnels linking secret facilities under U.S. Navy control and NSA security and funded by black operations began in 1964. The Vietnam/Laos/Cambodia war produced 200 billion dollars of contracts over 25 years or 8 billion per year. If only 5% of those funds were allocated to top secret "black" projects which were cancelled, the funding available for the construction of underground bases and tunnels would average a minimum of .4 billion (40 million). These figures are not adjusted for purchasing power at today's values and typically represent 10 to 15 times the purchasing power of the 1994 dollar. Base locations were chosen as military bases and tunnels frequently pass under Federal or private owned park reserves or Indian reservations. Monies came from or were supplied through Rockefeller companies or affiliates and defense industry contractors.

1961 - In January,
Soviet Premier Nikita Khrushchev delivered a militant speech avowing Soviet support for wars of national liberation.
Intended for the Chinese, the American adminstration interpreted it as a virtual declaration of war.

1961 - During the year,
Leonard Hayflick, while at the Wistar Institue in Philadelphia, made the discovery that the only cells with the capacity for indefinite cell division (growth) were cancer cells. The assumption before that time was that most body cells of the human would simply replicate forever, in a proper environment (except those of the brain, nerves, muscles, and kidneys). Hayflick found that there was a maximum number of times that ordinary body cells will double by division in a laboratory culture dish. For human cells, it is about 50 times.
Cells divide much slower in the human body than in a laboratory culture.
Cells which Hayflick had taken from the lung of a 20-year-old human divided in the laboratory a further 20 times and stopped. Cells which had been frozen at he 15th division stopped dividing until they were then thawed. Active once more, the cells which had divided 20 times continued on for another 32 divisions. Yet each species was different. Mouse cells divided 12 times and stopped.
Years later it would be found that old female rat ovaries that had stopped cycling, began to cycle again when placed into a young rat. And young ovaries transplanted into an old female stopped cycling. Before 1980, humans would know very little about the operation and multiplicity of hormones in their own bodies and less where it concerned other species. Cell division rates and hormones could influence longevity, aging symptoms, and cancers. Several decades of increasing life expectancy in the USA stopped in 1954.

1961 - In a January 30
USA State of the Union Address, newly elected president John F. Kennedy warns the nation that in Vietnam "the tide is unfavourable.
The news will be worse before it is better."
During this year and leading up to it hundreds of new nations were struggling to break from their colonial past and establish modern institutions. Kennedy called upon Americans to be the "watchmen of the walls of freedom" and promised to assert firm, vigorous leadership. The new frontiersmen of the Kennedy administration - young, academic, energetic, proud, aggressive - accepted without question the basic assumptions of the southeast Asia containment policy and believed that the apparent advance of Communism must be met directly and stopped. A massive buildup in nuclear weapons and long-range missiles was ordered in preparation for the expected armageddon.
In settling the major policy issues, Kennedy would be cautious rather than bold, hesitant rather than decisive, and improvisational rather than sly and calculating. The public will was always a consideration and its potential opposition to politically rationalized deceptive and coercive policies aimed at other nations; such policies were first tried as intelligence and "black" programs with the hope that their success would make it unnecessary for the administration to ask its citizens for support, and, reveal the true nature of the involvement in Vietnam and elsewhere. Victory would sanction all and replace the sting of rejection with the label of heroism. In private, the restraints came away, and, as promised, the leadership was intellectualizing in decision-making, aggressive and intolerant in action, insolent of other nations and cultures through pride in one's own.
Kennedy would increasingly fear that the survival of the United States would depend on its capacity to defend "free" institutions. Unfortunately he and his administration would neither understand that "undeveloped" nations were not naturally capitalistic nor that an expansionist economic system of any colour might be detrimental to their striving for self-directedness. Previously colonized states were typically schizoid in wanting the materialistic benefits of their former masters while idealistically adopting or rejecting a parallel economic system to their previous host nation. It was a half-lie to suggest that formerly colonized nations would automatically have a "free" perception once granted independence constitutionally. It was a half-lie to suggest that a "defense" of freedom could be carried out with military coercion, political manipulation and taxpayer deception.

1961 - By the beginning of February,
The Foreign Intelligence Advisory Board (FIAB) was reactivated by President Kennedy.
Established by former President Eisenhower in 1956, the FIAB had fallen into disuse. Now, an 11-member board of prominent businessmen, scientists and other outside government decisionmakers and capitalist society authorities again served to directly influence the decisions of the American President who believed that crucial decisions were having to be made, or would have to be made, which could not be delayed for a discussion and acceptance by the somewhat democratic legislatures of the government. President Kennedy was always predisposed to the intellectualism of professionals and academics at the expense of military leaders or elected government representatives. This predisposition would increase and promote the degree to which the American public would be deceived and manipulated by those who ultimately decided on the foreign policy and the covert use of their tax monies.

1961 - During March,
Wilbert B. Smith, head of "Project Canada" in Canada, delivers a speech to the Vancouver Flying Saucer Club.
He imparts information allegedly obtained from extraterrestrial sources that casts doubt on the validity of some basic concepts of North American science and the cultural ideas of the time. He mentions having made "hardware that works" from information given him by extraterrestrial intelligences.

1961 - During March,
British Prime Minister Harold Macmillan was directly advised by French leader Charles de Gaulle, and indirectly through USA President John F. Kennedy, that admission of the Great Britain into the EEC would be allowed to proceed only if there was a political as well as an economic commitment made to Europe by Britain. De Gaulle, frustrated with the cost and complexities of developing a unilateral nuclear deterrent, provided Macmillan with an opportunity to barter nuclear technology for an entry into the EEC. Between the autumn of 1961 and the spring of 1962, British diplomats would appear to be pursuing a sincere desire to enter the EEC.
Diplomatic documents, released to the public more than 30 years later, from their safety in government secrecy classification, would reveal that an intent of Macmillan and his advisers was to transform the EEC from within into an institution which favoured Britain's interests. The public were told the opposite by their media. Macmillan was painted to appear as the humbled leader who in the interest of Britain and Europe was willing to accept a position at the EEC table as an equal among equals.

A further complication arose in that some politicians believed that a closer unity with European nations would downgrade the priveleged status which Commonwealth countries enjoyed with Britain. Could Britain afford to alienate them in hope of better economic returns from the EEC membership?
Another rising anxiety for Macmillan was the civilian situation in Britain in which rising numbers of unemployed and social service difficulties were resulting in demonstrations of unrest. Entry into a free trade common market was increasingly being feared by the British commoner as a factor capable of aggravating the economic sacrifices already being made.

1961 - On April 12,
Yuri Gagarin, a 27 year old major in the USSR Air Force, became the first man to be publicly acknowledged for rocketing into space.
The Vostok 1 ("East") spacecraft circled the earth once in 108 minutes, reaching an altitude of 187 miles. His first words while in orbit were: "I am in good spirits. The machine is working perfectly".
It would not be revealed until 1991 that the retrosection failed to separate before re-entry, breaking away only when the retaining straps burned through. Gagarin was declared to have remained inside the spherical capsule for the landing, but like the 5 subsequent Vostok cosmonauts he did use an ejection seat at 7 km altitude because of the high landing speed. Gagarin was purely a passenger; the controls were locked against his interference. This was common on many Soviet space flights. Gagarin became a national hero; he never made another space flight. He allegedly died in March, 1968, at the age of 34 in a jet aircraft training flight.

1961 - On April 17,
The Bay of Pigs Invasion of Cuba by the U.S.A. CIA trained and supported "La Brigada".
The troops with their tanks and supplies sailed from Guatemala where they had trained to mount an essentially conventional military assault originally intended to be structured as a guerilla operation. It would be superseded by Operation Mongoose, a CIA operation to secure Fidel Castro's overthrow.
Adlai Stevenson, ambassador to the United Nations, opposed it when he heard plans of it on April 10. Chester Bowles, undersecretary of state opposed it also on hearing of it. On April 12, President Kennedy publicly stated that the U.S.A. would not intervene militarily in Cuba. On April 13 he ordered that the air strike planned for April 15 had to appear as if it had originated in Cuba with defecting Castro pilots. A cover story was prepared at the last minute for the news media to suggest that planes flown from Nicaragua to Florida had actually originated in Cuba.
At mid-day on Sunday, April 16, President Kennedy gave the final go-ahead.
Hours later he cancelled the air strike after Stevenson demanded that he stop the operation: only the air strike was still within his control. The plan had called for effective air cover together with strategic bombing of communications facilities: a microwave-based telephone system, bridges, railways. Also designated were Cuba's airfields, naval facilities and armoured vehicle depots. With these left operable and the Cuban populace supporting their leader, success of the invaders was doomed.

At dawn on April 17, La Brigada landed on the beach at Zapata, on the Bay of Pigs.
After 3 days of fighting they surrendered. Lacking air support, the Cuban Air Force had sank one of the two Brigade transports involved, which carried most of the ammunition. The President approved an air strike on the morning of April 18 only to have it frustrated by low clouds over the targets and three of the B-26's shot down with others damaged. The President was strongly encouraged by the military to respond again while civilian and state advisors advised against it.
Kennedy was only 90 days in office.
He had consulted with many advisors in the White House, the intelligence organizations, the military and the state department. His brother, Bobby Kennedy, had virtually assumed responsibility for the operation on the idealist assumption that defeating Communism in the neighbourhood would make him and his brother heroes - to both the American people and to their father. Together, he and Jack had surrounded themselves with action-oriented people who held strong opinions regarding what should be done, how and why. Bobby was easily impressed by the power and high technology which now appeared to be at his disposal and motivated by the military and intelligence feedback that Communism was the devil and that their own political bureaucracy was a sham for action, Bobby believed that his position as Attorney General justified his assumption of command and leadership. His brother, John F. (Jack) was more mature both in experience and political negotiation: he considered and worried about the consequences of how such military interference in the affairs of another state would appear through the media to the rest of the world. President Kennedy compromised ordering U.S. plans to protect the B-26's and landing craft but not to fire on Cuban planes or ground targets. A timing error resulted in the B-26's being delayed; the invaders were driven back to the sea.

The pride of achievement through action in the face of vast media attention provided the opportunity for the greatest of media celebration or the most humbling of media exposure with the considerable impact on the international community regardless of the direction. The physical discomfort which Jack had endured through the 1950's from his WWII back injury had left him with an attitude of "take action now, for tomorrow you may not be here". Such a "live for the moment" attitude had led to desperate actions taken on the basis that the end justified the means. His father Joe had always emphasized success by action, not by participation; results meant success. Jack was surrounded by advisors, who, for other reasons, shared the attitude: they had not been promoted, decorated, hired - because they were team members - they were aggressive, results-oriented leaders - who like General/President Eisenhower had got the job done regardless of cost or ruthlessness.
This failure would be a constant source of embarrassment to the Kennedy brothers; they would make it one of their mountains of shame. Predictably, Jack would react by becoming more individualistic in his decisions and less trusting of advisors. Instead of admitting that he had been caught doing wrong, morally, he admitted that he had made mistakes by listening to experts rather than reaching his own (immoral) decisions. Both Jack and Bobby were out of their league. They were playing with realist thinkers. They were talking about guilt and innocence, right and wrong: justice; they had forgotten what it meant. In time, their pragmatism and idealism would be hated as immature, destructive and embarrassing by those who had the power behind the scenes: the people who could really call the shots.

The Grays and Reds were completely confused by this aspect of human behaviour.
How could humans be so distrustful and inconsistent in their behaviour.
Why would humans elect and appoint persons to leadership positions who were, on the one hand, apparently inconsistent in behaviour - said they believed in one thing and then supported the opposite, and, on the other hand, seemed to lack any greater spiritual awareness than the average citizen? American politicians talked about principles of freedom and tolerance and the importance of self-determination for states, and their military were supposed to support such aims, yet they spent great sums of taxpayer's monies doing the opposite while deceiving the taxpayer of the real purpose and means.
Human individuals appeared neither to recognize nor be able to control the influence of parental, spousal or cultural imprinting and training by self-directed behaviour guided by spiritual principles such as love, humility, self-responsibility, reverence, sharing and compassion. To the Grays, such demonstrations confirmed to them that humans were even of questionable value as future slaves/robots. The Reds felt greater sorrow and disappointment for what they knew would be the future of humanity on the Earth.

1961 - On April 18,
Joe Simonton, a 60-year -old Wisconsin poultry farmer, saw a bright silvery flying saucer when he stepped out into his yard in the morning. It was hovering above the ground. A hatch opened and he saw 3 humanoids inside dressed in black suits. They were human in appearance but unusually short.
One of the beings held up a jug and made motions which suggested to the farmer that he wanted water. When he returned, he found the beings "frying food on a flameless grill of some sort". In exchange for the water, the "men" in the saucer gave Simonton 3 of the pancake-like objects that they had been cooking. They closed the hatch and took off over the trees. Simonton reported the incident to the sheriff who found no evidence but felt that Simonton was telling the truth. Simonton ate one of the cakes, mentioning that it tasted like cardboard. The others eventually made their way to the Food and Drug laboratory of the U.S.A. Department of Health, Education and Welfare. Technicians there found that the cakes had been made of buckwheat, soybean hulls and wheat. This fact led to critics declaring that the fact that the mixture lacked scientific sophistication and possessed basic earth-food ingredient indicated that it could not have come from outer space!

Thus, one of the common expectations and preconceptions often expressed in this area of investigation was again voiced by "scientists", government authorities", and so-called "educated" persons. Apart from whether the incident happened or not, the same composition of ingredients in the late 1980s and the 1990s would have classified it as a "health food" superior to most mass produced foods in both its level of nutrition, digestion, and freshness. In addition to this factor, if an extraterrestrial could sustain itself on a food found on a distant planet, why would it have made any sense to continue to use flight reserves as well as giving away such a precious commodity to another being who might not be able to ingest it or appreciate it?

Simonton received a lot of ridicule following from the articles written about his experience and he eventually voiced regret at having shared his experience and vowed never to do so again, should he be so fortunate again in the future. This has been the typical reaction to which observers have been subjected when expressed in any technologically advanced nation with any level of political power or media presence.
Jacques Vallee, a mathematician and astronomer, later drew a parallel between the Simonton report and the traditions of European farmers. By custom, they had left clean water for fairies who exchanged food with them, particularly wheat and buckwheat. Legend has it that the fairy folk were notoriously ill-tempered, and therefore were to be respected.

1961 - During late April,
John McCone a former defense contractor and a former head of the Atomic Energy Commission (AEC) was made the new CIA Director.
President Kennedy was enraged at the Bay of Pigs result and at first threatened to splinter the CIA into a thousand pieces. He settled for the then director of the CIA, Allen Dulles.

1961 - On April 27
On Lake Onega, NE of Leningrad, 25 witnesses saw a bluish green oval object the size of a jetliner, flying silently at very high speed, scrape the lake ice then rise and fly off. Sample pieces of the ice contained a residue of magnesium, aluminum, calcium, barium, and titanium. A strange piece of metal and tiny black grains, resistant to acid and heat, were found to be composed of iron, silicon, sodium, lithium, titanium, and aluminum.

1961 - On May 5,
Navy Commander Alan B. Shepard, aboard the U.S.A. Freedom 7 spacecraft, travelled 116 miles high in a sub-orbital flight that lasted 15 minutes. He becomes the first publicized American man-in-space.

1961 - On May 11,
The U.S.A. sends additional troops to South Vietnam.
President Kennedy orders 400 Special Forces troops and 100 other American military advisers sent. No publicity is given to either move. Although the numbers are relatively small, it represents the first such expansion of American military presence in Saigon beyond a 685-troop limit, which, if done openly, would be the first formal breach of the Geneva agreement by the U.S.A.
President Diem, in a letter to President Kennedy, asks for "considerable" build-up of the U.S. forces and an increase of 100,000 men in the South Vietnamese Army. "Inflated infiltration figures" are used to support the threat of Communism from the North. The Presidency agrees to finance a 30,000-man increase in South Vietnam's Army. The Joint Chiefs of Staff estimate that 40,000 U.S. servicemen will be needed to "clean up the Vietcong threat." National intelligence estimates report "little evidence" that the Vietcong rely on external supplies. U.S. General Taylor meets with President Diem and thereafter recommends a Mekong Delta flood 6,000 to 8,000-man "relief task force, largely military in composition," including "combat troops" for protection and warns that they may "expect to take casualties" but that they can be removed or phased into "other activities." While President Kennedy approves the major recommendations, Diem is upset with the response. Previous American demands for liberalized reforms and insistence on American participation in decision-making with the Diem government are withdrawn.

On the same day, President Kennedy orders the start of a campaign of covert warfare against North Vietnam to be conducted by South Vietnamese agents directed and trained by the Central Intelligence Agency (U.S. C.I.A.) and some American Special Forces troops. Within weeks, the North Vietnamese Government makes repeated protests to the International Control Commission (I.C.C.) that its airspace and territory are being violated by foreign aircraft and South Vietnamese ground raids across the demilitarized zone (DMZ) which separates North and South Vietnam. Nothing was done.
Also on May 11, orders from President Kennedy called for the infiltration of South Vietnamese forces into southeastern Laos to find and attack Communist bases and supply lines.

1961 - During May,
A nuclear power-plant failure and contamination incident involving a Soviet Hotel Class nuclear-propelled, nuclear ballistic missile submarine occurred during a missile test in the North Atlantic test range. Near the coast of England, crew members and other submarine passengers were seriously contaminated when a reactor cooling pipe broke. Parts of the ship, and the missiles themselves were also contaminated up to a level of 5 roentgens per hour in the worst contaminated areas. After a 2-month ventilation of the submarine, the missiles were transferred to 2 diesel submarines for testing. The completion of the launch tests were considered a great success. The submarine's reactor plant was replaced at Severodinsk during 1962, and it was put back into service.

1961 -
The Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD), centred in Paris, became a group of 24 nations, including most of the major industrialized countries. Its members included Canada, the USA, Japan, and 18 western European countries. Its purpose was to coordinate economic and social policies amongst its members and promote economic assistance to developing countries.
It had now become accepted by the major Capitalist countries that a global economy would evolve under the capitalist norms which each of them had adopted and accepted as preferable and inevitable. Included in this awareness was the perception that the greatest collective profit would be derived from the maximum "development" of early capitalist economies and through a segmentation of the world market. The former could be best attained through collective support for third world indoctrination through continued "development" loans, aid, and other material "bribes". The latter would best be managed by the major industrialized nations promoting themselves in the world market with products and services which best related to their culture AND produced little competition with their associate countries. Furthermore, social and political stability would remain important in their own countries in order to effect efficient production and maximum profit.

Keynesian economics is a major consideration here with the prospect of incurring high deficits in order to increase the dependency and passivity of one's own citizens while encouraging addictive consumerism. An addict is easily manipulated and becomes a mercenary to the supplier. Free will is lost to the majority. Absolute, though not obvious, power - and its suggestion of security and wealth - are the motivators of the political leaders.
The O.E.E.C. (Organization for European Economic Cooperation) is now terminated and an expansion of world trade with a co-ordination of Western aid will become the most noticeable economic changes.

1961 - On May 25,
The American Lunar Program was proposed by President John F. Kennedy.
The USA would pursue as a national goal a manned landing on the Moon by the end of the decade.
It was intended to raise the American spirit from the humiliation of the Bay of Pigs, divert their attention from the Southeast Asian conflict, and provide the next example of a rationalization of public debt to finance economic recovery already dependent upon the armament/defense industry. Aerospace might become a substitute for defense in the budget and employment considerations of the future. To maintain a healthy capitalistic economy one had to have an expansive economy. That had only been attained in past human history by:
1. conquest and thievery of the goods and the capital of others; 2. enslavement of dependency of workers as cheap labour; 3. increased stratification of society into rich and poor sectors; 4. increased production through capital intensive industrialization; 5. increased production by civilian motivation (fear, urgency, ...); 6. drastic decrease in population numbers by disease, famine or war; 7. decrease in competition by monopolization and privilege; 8. provide financing to buyers (loans) to increase market activity; 9. create a market by government debt financing of the economy.

The American Lunar Program would inject $24.5 billion ($118 billion in 1991 valuation) into the economy between 1961 and 1972. It would provide tens of thousands of higher than average paying jobs across the nation in previously (and future) armaments industries.
North American Rockwell was selected as the prime contractor for the Apollo Command and Service Modules. Twenty would be built; 17 would be used. Although the modules never publicly held more than a crew of 3, they could have been fitted for a crew of 6. Grumman Aircraft received the contract for the Lunar Modules. In 1995, it would be part of one of the top ten most powerful entities in the world.

The fundamental benefits of the Apollo Program were that it provided a distraction for the American, a higher standard of living for them, the pride of having a few men stand on the surface of a satellite which would not easily support human life, the retrieval of 385 kg of rock and soil in one of the most expensive mining explorations, and the development of sophisticated technologies at 20 times the cost that would have been necessary if a practical on-Earth purpose had been devised in the beginning. Choices - humans have them. War or peace; wealth or pride?

1961 - By the summer,
USA White House adviser Walt W. Rostow, economist and former MIT professor, and other advisers were urging President Kennedy to undertake an all-out effort in Vietnam. Rostow had long advocated the employment of such "unexploited counterguerrilla assets" as helicopters and the newly created Green Berets. In a statement typical of practical thinkers about the subject of technology, he stated: "It is somehow wrong to be developing these capabilities but not applying them in the crucial theater. In Knute Rockne's old phrase, we are not saving them for the junior prom." He warned Kennedy that to "turn the tide" the United States must "win" in Vietnam. If Vietnam could be held, Thailand, Laos, and Cambodia could be saved, and "we shall have demonstrated that the Communist technique of guerilla warfare can be dealt with." Obviously, Rostow had no first-hand experience of guerrilla warfare.

1961 - In the June report,
TDSI-24, discussing Nuclear Reactor Power Runaway, also referred to in the industry as a "Significant Event", popular causes for such incidents are noted. Entitled "Douglas Point Nuclear Power Plant Preliminary Accident Analysis", it was produced by Atomic Energy of Canada Ltd., Nuclear Power Plant Division, Toronto, Ontario. Its findings include:
"A. Reduction or loss of cooling in the reactor, if 1. boilers, or 2. feedwater system fails; 3. circulating pump failure; 4. flow channel becomes blocked; 5. coolant circuit develops a serious leak; 6. loss of power to pumps or boilers; 7. failure of safety valves; 8. failure of signalling devices. B. Excessive Reactor Power develops from 1. increases in the moderator level; 2. removal of absorbers; 3. insertion of boosters; 4. decreased admium content in the moderator; 5. Xenon poison burned out of the fuel; 6. advancing fuel in the channels; 7. draining off coolant from fuel channels."

Of significance is the fact that there are this many defined circumstances during which the CANDU reactor model, the SAFEST known reactor system ever to be designed in this century and the LEAST utilized system internationally, can reach a self-destruct point of core meltdown. This state is described in the industry as "The China Syndrome" after the fantasy that such an operational stage would melt a hole through the bottom of the reactor and continue through the Earth to the opposite side of the planet.
In reality, much of the excess power generated would have the capacity to at least explode the reactor and spread nuclear fallout over hundreds of square miles, depending upon the prevailing weather at the time and during the following week. Regional ground water sources would likely be contaminated and the land and the produce grown on it afterwards could become toxic for human use. Some of the conditions mentioned involve the failure of components; other, involve systems of apparati containing hundreds of parts - each capable of wear and failure.
The report goes on to quote the USA Federal Power Commission statistic regarding the average operating duration of the plants in its jurisdiction as 9 years. The industry regards a longevity of 20 years to be a safe consideration. Many would be continuing in use after a period of 30 years!

1961 - On June 21,
A 300-Foot Diameter Metallic Disc hovers over a ground-to-air missile base outside of Rybinek, USSR, about 92 miles north of Moscow, at an altitude of 20,000 feet. Missiles launched toward the object explode when they reach a distance of a mile and a quarter from it.

1961 - On June 29,
The USA Transit 4A Able Star stage exploded in space leaving a quantity of space debris in orbit.

1961 - By July,
A Breeder Reactor on the shores of Lake Michigan was shut down just seconds before it would have exploded and annihilated the city of Detroit. No public information that the incident had happened was released until 1978.

1961 - On July 9,
Many Citizens and Police Officers sight UFOs over Waterford Township, Michigan.

1961 - During July,
Harold Macmillan, British Prime Minister, announces to the British Parliament that he will seek the entry of Britain into the European Economic Community (EEC), a stance which is the opposite of his position taken in 1956. What or who had changed his mind?
Macmillan had succeeded Eden as Prime Minister in January, 1957.
Had Macmillan's earlier opposition to the membership simply been a political intellectualization taken by a member of a democratic parliament. Such would indicate the uselessness of such an institution if members simply opposed proposals for the sake of asserting one's identity apart from any relevancy to the citizens and any personal commitment to any concept of efficiency and truthfulness.

1961 - On July 21,
Virgil I. (Gus) Grissom, aboard the U.S.A. Liberty Bell spaceship, made a 15 minute rocket flight from Cape Canaveral; his capsule sank under him in the Atlantic forcing him to swim until assistance arrived. It is the second publicized Mercury flight.

1961 - During July,
North Vietnam announced that it had captured 3 South Vietnamese undercover agents and was putting them on trial.
They had survived the crash of a plane shot down while preparing to parachute them into North Vietnam territory. The North Vietnamese protested formally to Britain and the Soviet Union - the co-chairmen of the 1954 Geneva conference on peace in Vietnam. They described in detail what they said the captives had disclosed about their American training and equipment.

1961 - On July 29,
British Prime Minister Macmillan acknowledged that his negotiations with the 6 European Community nations, and in particular France, were uncertain. Trying to maintain political popularity in high unemployment Britain and push for entry in the EC had left the British Delegation continually under stress. They were being forced to carefully and tactfully express their comments, first to other nations representatives at the Brussels negotiations, and secondly, to the British press. Who was lying to whom. Or, was it a case of telling so many half truths that in the end one had forgotten what they were supposed to be commited to?
In the ongoing childish political feud between de Gaulle of France and Macmillan of Britain, each wanted to have leadership influence over all the other members in a union of equals - yet no one would make the embarrassing mistake of actually saying that was their position. In a supposed union of equals, Macmillan insisted on protecting Commonwealth trade, preserving the benefits of domestic agriculture and respecting the obligations to Britain's EFTA partners - whose basis for economic union was one of free trade. Political unification of the union would be the next step. Military alliance had been the first step. Britain, with the help of the USA, had its own nuclear weapons; France intended to develop its own.

Clouding the issue of the acceptance of Britain as a member were applications received from Denmark and Ireland at the same time. Britain accounted for over 40% of Ireland's imports and consumed 60% of its total exports. It was assumed by members of the Council of Ministers in Brussels that the three applications were related and somewhat dependent upon the acceptance of Britain. Thus the British application received primary consideration with the other two being left for later consideration. The suggestion, often made by supporters or participants of an elitist-driven democracy is that leaders are somehow more intelligent or more adept at decisionmaking than members of the general public. Human leaders continually prove this to be a fallacy.
In this case, the senior elected officials of the European governments were assuming that nations wishing to join their union were already working covertly with Britain for the purpose of hedging their chances. The truth was that such a rationalization was purely spurious and circumstantial. There was no evidence of such an expectation; no one mentioned such an expectation; no one asked about such an expectation; everyone believed that there was such an expectation. And it was on the strength of the communication skills of these leaders that a global economic crisis could be initiated or avoided - and, that a global nuclear war could be averted or begun.

1961 - On August 6,
Gherman Titov, A USSR cosmonaut in Vostok 2 ("East"), circled the earth 17 times in 25 hours, 18 minutes, before returning to earth. A factor in progressing to a 17 rev flight from a single rev was that suitable landing sites could not be found in the USSR for the lesser numbers. On landing Titov experienced serious disorientation and had inner trouble for some time afterwards. He never made another flight.
Unlike American manned flights, Soviet flights were made with cabin air of the same pressure and composition as at the Earth's surface. Ejecting at a high altitude under such conditions would require instant equalization of pressure in the inner ear in order to avoid damage. In American flights, pure oxygen was used, increasing the hazards of fire and explosion markedly, and, a reduced pressure - presumably on the rationalization that the lower the difference in pressure between the outside in space and the inside, would provide less chance of a rupture. Soviet probes were always built heavy and sturdy; this was never a factor for them.

1961 - During August,
The Berlin Wall was built by the East Germans to divide the city of Berlin in Germany.

1961 - In September,
Hurricane Carla became the biggest American hurricane on record, cutting a swath of devastation from the Gulf Coast to Kansas. It drove nearly 500,000 people from their homes, yet massive evacuation kept the death toll down to fifty.

1961 - During September,
"Newsweek" magazine warned Americans "We stand on the brink of war."
During September, Diem urgently requested additional economic assistance from the USA.
By early October, both the Joint Chiefs of Staff and the National Security Council were considering the introduction of sizable American combat forces into Vietnam. Kennedy flatly rejected a negotiated settlement, as suggested by Undersecretary of State Chester Bowles and former diplomat W. Averell Harriman. Harriman knew by spaceperson contact that the war would only worsen for the USA and eventually be lost. Better to withdraw now before being more closely involved, than to place one's whole international image in the fire. Kennedy, afraid and proud and unaware of the true past of Japan's surrender, believed that "strength and determination" would defeat the enemy.
Kennedy knew the mass media versus reality risk:
"The troops will march in; the bands will play; the crowds will cheer, and in four days everyone will have forgotten. Then we will be told that we have to send in more troops. It's like taking a(n alcoholic) drink. The effect wears off, and you have to take another," he told Arthur Schlesinger, Jr. Kennedy opted to "increase significantly the volume of American assistance and the number of advisers" in full awareness that it was violating the Geneva Accords of 1954.

1961 - In September,
The Vietcong drastically stepped up their operation for a brief period.
They seized a provincial capital just 55 miles from Saigon.
Intelligence analysts reported a substantial increase in the size of the Vietcong regular forces.

1961 - On the night of September 19/20,
Betty and Barney Hill were returning to their home at 953 State Street, in Portsmouth, New Hampshire, by U.S. Route 3 from Canada, near Cannon Mountain. Betty was a Social Worker and Barney worked as a Postman. At about 11 pm, they became aware of a 'bright star' in the southwest. They became fascinated by it as they drove and Betty became adamant that it had a "pancake shape". South of Indian Head, the light swung in front of the car, hovered above the road and was seen by Barney through binoculars to be a flattened disc with a line of windows along its edge. A red light appeared to either side of the 'pancake'.
Barney stopped the car, got out, and taking the binoculars went out into the road for a better view. As he did so, the object moved to the left. It was silent and was coming closer. There were about a dozen figures silhouetted against the windows, and they seemed to be looking at the Hills. The UFO tilted and began to descend. The 2 red lights moved outwards, appearing now as 'fins' protruding like stabilizers from the body of the 'pancake'. The figures inside were seen to be rushing about as if preparing for something. Betty was extremely concerned about Barney's health; he was muttering to himself, "I don't believe it. This is ridiculous."

Closer now, the entities inside could be described.
They wore dark one-piece suits and walked very smoothly.
By this time, the UFO image completely filled the field of Barney's glasses.
His fascination turned to horror and he began screaming, "They're going to capture us!"
He jumped back into the car and sped off down the road. They must have driven underneath it, for they lost view of it and then heard a beeping noise from behind and the car began to vibrate. The next thing either could remember was Betty saying, "Now do you believe in flying saucers?" and her husband saying, "No". There were more beeps and they recognized they had driven quite a way down the road.
Arriving home, the Hills were confused by the blank in their memory of part of the road and the fact that they arrived several hours later than expected. Within 10 days, Betty began having recurrent nightmares, during which she saw alien faces with large cat-like eyes and images of being carried on board the craft. These seemed to her to be dreams and she assumed that her mind was simply trying to fill the memory gap she was worried about. Barney could not recall anything of the period and also experienced difficulty sleeping although he had no nightmares.

Betty went to see her doctor about the nightmares and he sent her to a specialist, Dr. Duncan Stephens. After one year, conventional approaches (drugs,etc.) showed no success so he recommended them to Dr. Benjamin Simon, a prominent Boston psychiatrist, who was noted for his use of hypnosis to remove memory blocks caused by traumas. It was into 1964 before treatment relieved the trauma and both Betty and Barney independently described similar memories.
Their memories were of an experience of being taken aboard a craft in a sort of cataleptic state, both being subjected to medical examinations and having a sort of telepathic conversation with these aliens, who showed them a map of the heavens to explain where they came from. Description of the beings included one that "looked like a red-headed Irishman", to one "with a black coat" with a black scarf thrown around his neck, to those with insect-like faces with a wide, thin mouth and huge slanting eyes. Under hypnosis, Barney was most terrified of the eyes of the being, "Oh, those eyes! They're in my brain!"
A New England journalist, John Fuller later wrote up the transcripts of the sessions into a book The Interrupted Journey. It became a best seller and was made into a movie The UFO Incident in the 1960's. Barney died of a stroke in 1969.

One of the early taped sessions includes the following recounts of their experiences.
Each was hypnotised separately and were unaware of the experience of the other.

Simon: "... not going to trouble you, you can remember everything now."
Barney: "I try to maintain control so Betty cannot tell I am scared.
God, I'm scared.
Simon: "Alright go on, experience it."
Barney: "I gotta get my gun (screaming)
And I put it in my coat ... and then I get out the binoculars and it is there ... and I look and I look and it shifts over. And I think I'm not afraid I'll shoot it down but I'm not afraid and I walk - I walk out and I walk across the road. And there it is up there. Oh God (screaming) it - it's very big and it's not that far - and I can see it tilted toward me"
Simon: "You say tilted, what did it look like?"
Barney: "It looks like a big, big pancake with windows and rows of windows - and I look up and down the road, can't somebody come and tell me this is not here. It can't be. There, ther's a man! (hysterical) Is he a captain? What is he? And he's gonna look at me ..
(Barney later drew a sketch of what he saw: a disk-like object with humanoids stationed around the edge looking out through windows; one was at a control panel and one figure grinned. Barney thought that the size was similar to that of a 4-engined aircraft of the time.)
******************************
Betty: "So then they roll me over on my back and the examiner has a long needle in his hand - and I see the needle - and it's bigger than any needle I've ever seen - and I ask him what he's going to do with it (terrified) - and he said just a simple test that won't hurt me - and I ask him what? - and he said he just wants to put it in my navel - it's just a simple test - and I tell him NO, it will hurt, Don't do it. Don't do it! And he said 'no it won't hurt.' And I'm crying and I tell him that it's hurting, it's hurting and hurting - take it out! And then the leader - he comes over and he puts his hand in front of my eyes and he says 'It'll be alright, I won't feel it.' - and the pain goes away."

1961 - October 6,
A large luminous object flew over Lake Maracaibo in Venezuela, frightening many fishermen who jumped into the water. One of them, Bartolome Romero, drowned accidentally.

1961 - On October 10,
The EC Ministers were addressed in Paris by the head of the British Delegation, Mr. Heath.
In increasingly typical political deception, British Prime Minister Macmillan attempted to suppress publication of the speech in London - the central media source for the population supposedly represented by the speech. That is, the people whom the leaders were speaking for were not supposed to know what their leaders were telling the leaders of other nations who had been and could remain economic competitors.
Heath prefaced the statement supporting Britain's application for membership in the EC by praising the Treaty of Rome, the foundation of the EC, which had specified the elimination of internal tariffs, a common customs tariff, a common commercial policy, and a common agricultural policy. He then went on to propose the concept of an "enlarged community" which subverted the essential core of the EC concept - unity and commitment.
"We hope to see an enlarged Community including ourselves and as many of our EFTA partners as may wish to become full Members. As to the remainder of the EFTA countries, we should like to see an association between each of them and the enlarged Community ... the wider trading area thus created would include, not only the members of the enlarged Community, but also the remaining Members of the EFTA ...."

This was like an individual applying for membership in a club, the importance of which were the oaths of allegiance to each other as members, of a willingness to favour and work closely with other members, and, of an acknowledgement of the benefits of the strength against competitors from such a membership - and then, expressing a willingness to enter partly into a secondary membership with less requirements and obligations. Adding more dilution to the concept of membership and union, Heath, speaking for Britain, had spoke of letting anyone in the neighbourhood join as partial members or affiliates. These modifications of the original concept of European Union were quite intentional.
In the original concept of the EC, France had been the most influential member by virtue of its wealth of imperial history and military power, in addition to its physical size. All of the other nations respected and looked to France as an unannounced leader. British politicians conserved their pride in their equally grandiose imperial history and military power. In addition, they assumed political influence with the USA because of their combined efforts in building the first atomic bomb, in combined military intelligence operations during WWII and in the interim, and, in the nostalgic affiliation which many North Americans shared with Britain by way of their ancestors. Britain would not take second place in a real union which was assumed to be responding like a federation. The way to break the spell of France's influence would be to diffuse the perception of a tightly commited membership - which for humans, demands a leader to determine and maintain order.

Britain's suggestion of an "enlarged Community" was like having a co-op style business approached by a prospective member who proposed a new marketing plan, new structure, and new identity - so that they could be a member. The benefit proposed was that then many more people could become members, part-members, affiliate members, and wannabe members. If the "co-op" took the bait, the new member would acquire the influence of a leader in the new structure. It would be the first example of such a rogue membership, it would be the largest and most powerful of the foreseeable applicants, and there would be many more such members - seeking maximum benefits for minimum commitment - than either the original commited members, or, the potential new applicants willing to opt for full involvement.
The possible and further speedy extension of the EC would politicize such an organization making it closer to that of an extended NATO, and, potentially, a larger and stronger Western Alliance against the USSR and communism. Macmillan, who had drafted the speech, had presented this possibility to President Kennedy (USA) who particularly favoured the military advantages. What Kennedy did not appreciate were specific references to the Commonwealth, which he considered irrelevant, and, references to the EFTA, which he considered obstructive. Ideally, Kennedy supported the EC becoming a political counterpart to NATO; an enlarged economic community would be counterproductive to the USA: it would segregate trade away form the USA and its branch plant economy in Canada.

France would remain in opposition to the concept of an "enlarged Community" which would change the European identity of the Community to a fragmented global one. If Britain were to drag in all the Commonwealth nations with it, African, North American, Caribbean, Asian and Pacific nations would become members of a European Community. For De Gaulle, Britain was desired but not at the expense of it bringing a bunch of foreigners and outsiders with it. Macmillan countered to this perception with the pride of noting that Her Majesty's Government would be seen as abandoning its (economic and political) commitments all over the (Commonwealth) world in the defence of Europe if it were to accept their exclusion from the EC. If that was the choice, Britain would have to turn away from Europe and withdraw its military support for the defense of Europe against the USSR. In spite of these threats, de Gaulle continued to hold open an invitation to Britain, without this concession.
The proposal for an "enlarged Community" could only be constructively considered if acted upon with speedy negotiations and flexibility. Macmillan was not known for flexibility, and, due to the inherent potential complexity of the multi-tiered concept, delays would see the discussions handed over to as many bureaucracies. If it reached that stage, government academicians and theorists and legalists would bury any further consideration for years. By then, a mountain of paperwork would make further consideration slow and nearly impossible.

Presented with the (obvious) choices of either using the Treaty aspects which were acceptable as bargaining tools to extort the new concessions, or, to concede such aspects immediately as a point of goodwill and an apparent strong foundation on which to construct the remainder, Macmillan opted for the former, and more lengthy approach. Deception, manipulation and coercion - those favoured tools of human political negotiation - would be used, rather than straightforwardness, assertiveness, and flexibility. The outcome would build an unfavourable attitude towards the membership of Britain by all 6 of the current EC members. Increasingly, for them, Britain's position was too far removed from the central intent and agreement of the current members.
The political deception was played out on several levels.
Britain's economy was sick during this period. Rushing into the EC might convey to the rest of the nations on the Earth that Britain really had become, as it was in reality, a third-rate economic and political power. Macmillan had proudly made it his private political mission to preserve Britain as a Great Power.

1961 - On October 12,
A Glowing Ball-Shaped Object is witnessed by many people over Indianapolis.
It is the first sighting of Frank Edwards who will become a UFO researcher.

1961 - On October 13,
U.S.A. President Kennedy gives secret orders for allied forces to "initiate ground action, including the use of U.S. advisers if necessary," against Communist aerial resupply missions in the vicinity of Tchepone, in the southern Laotian panhandle.

1961 - During October 14-15,
A Wave of UFO Sightings occurs over Argentina.

1961 - During October,
The "SWP Disruption Program" was initiated by the FBI Cointelpro against the Socialist Workers party (SWP).
In a secret FBI memorandum, the operation was justified on the grounds that:

- the party had been "openly espousing its line on a local and national basis through running candidates for public office and strongly directing and/or supporting such causes as Castro's Cuba and integration problems ... in the South."

Hoover was using the FBI to block legal political activity that departed from the capital-based economic system and bureaucratic status quo, to disrupt opposition to state policy, and, to undermine the civil rights movement.

1961 - Beginning in November,
"Operation Mongoose", a CIA - U.S.A. Attorney General program to assassinate Cuban leader Fidel Castro is formed.
It will be spurred on by Robert Kennedy's constant prodding and will renew the CIA's association with known organized crime leaders including Robert Maheu, John Rosselli, and Sam Giancana. Until his decision to take over informal direction of the CIA's covert activities towards expediency in Cuba and Vietnam, Robert Kennedy had fiercely attacked the above organized crime leaders as well as Jimmy Hoffa, a major union leader.
Some persons described Robert as "avid" and "a wild man" in his determination.
Bobby often bypassed the chain of command, including the Director and senior CIA officers, to speak directly to junior officers as he pressed for results and action against Castro. On January 19, 1962, Robert addressed the 5412 Committee, stressing the President's interest in getting rid of Castro. It was "the top priority in the U.S. government - all else is secondary. No time, money, effort, or manpower is to be spared ... Yesterday ... the President had indicated (to Bobby) that the final chapter had not been written - it's got to be done and will be done."
On May 7, 1962, Robert met with Richard Helms, Lawrence Houston, and Sheffield Edwards and was briefed regarding the CIA- organized crime connections and their attempts to get rid of Castro. Shortly afterwards, Giancana was approached with a proposition of paying $150,000 to hire some gunmen to go into Cuba and kill Castro. The failure of the Bay of Pigs invasion ($50 million) had left the Kennedy's humiliated and Robert was willing to do anything to satisfy his anger, broken pride, and assumption of power. He had seen his brother humiliated to the point of openly crying.

Robert's brother, and President, John F. Kennedy knew of the plans to kill Castro and destabilize Cuba, and was equally in favour of them. His instructions were to assess and implement whatever schemes were appropriate to get rid of Castro and his government. Killing Castro was within the scope of the assignment. The President had accepted responsibility for the failure of the Bay of Pigs invasion of Cuba and had put it down to listening to experts rather than reaching his own conclusions. Now, he and brother Bobby flaunted their power over the CIA in their determination to run everything their way and force success. Their father, Joe, had brought them up in a household where "We're winners, we don't have any failures around here."
The Mongoose team came up with 33 different plans; some to be carried out by "Task Force W".
They included a poison dart gun, an explosive seashell, a poisonous wetsuit, disinformation spread to the Cubans, a poison stick pen, industrial and crop sabotage and other methods. Even after the Director, John McCone, had instructed his staff to stop all such operations, on the direction of Robert Kennedy, as the Cuban Missile Crisis mounted in October, 1962, two groups of CIA-trained Cuban assassins were landed on Cuba. A major in the Cuban Army, Rolando Cubela, was approached in Paris and given a poison pen to use against Castro; he declined, asking instead for a sniper rifle. At least 6 major operations were carried out inside Cuba by CIA-Cuban teams in 1963; each of which was aimed at disrupting government and damaging industry and agriculture. Operation Mongoose formally came to an end in October, 1962. Task Force W was disbanded by early 1963 and replaced by a CIA group called the Special Affairs Staff.

1961 - By mid-November,
President Diem of South Vietnam angrily protests the American offer to increase aid and numbers of military advisers provided certain political administrative modifications are made in Diem' government. He tells Ambassador Frederick Nolting that South Vietnam "did not want to be a protectorate." State Department officials confirm to Kennedy that Diem is the only politician capable of the presidency and the emphasis of American action is shifted from reform (ethical) to efficiency (materialism).

1961 - On December 15,
Geological uplift/decline trends are announced:
Rising - southern France Sinking - North Sea European coast - Spain - north central France - Scandinavia (south) - mid-Atlantic range (2 to 3 feet/year): Iceland, Azores, Ascension

1961 - During December,
U.S.A. President John F. Kennedy takes measures to end U.S.A. involvement in Southeast Asia.
With Top Secret NSC memos, he changes the responsibility for all paramilitary and covert operations to the Joint Chiefs of Staff from the CIA-NSA thereby bringing him into direct knowledge of all covert activities.

From this time, until his assassination in the Fall of 1963, covert funding of Spaceperson/human shared projects was reduced by 70% and the possibility of the President finding out the full background and reversing Eisenhower's 1954 decision to keep the presence of the Space cultures hidden was almost certain. Nelson Roosevelt's leadership and that of others in directing the covert funding operations for "the survival of American culture and peoples in the coming annihilation of much of the world" was threatened by a "spoiled naive idealist" who was becoming a threat to that survival.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1962 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
A Taste of Honey; Whatever Happened to Baby Jane?; The Music Man; Whistle Down the Wind; Advise and Consent, The Manchurian Candidate; Dr. No; Damn the Defiant; The Longest Day; To Kill A Mockingbird; Carry On Cruising; The Prince and the Pauper; How the West was Won; Lawrence of Arabia; Trial and Error; The Counterfeit Traitor; Days of Wine and Roses; The Playboy of the Western World; The Fast Lady

Songs:
I Can't Stop Loving You; Big Girls Don't Cry; Roses Are Red; Stranger On the Shore; Sherry; Johnny Angel; Return To Sender; Soldier Boy; The Stripper; Breaking Up Is Hard To Do; Ramblin' Rose; Good Luck Charm; Loco Motion; Bobby's Girl; Monster Mash; The Wanderer; Devil Woman; She Thinks I Still Care; Misery Loves Company; Charlie's Shoes; The End Of The World; P.T. 109; The Ballad of Jed Clampet; A Little Bitty Tear; A Wound Time Can't Erase; A Girl I Used To Know; Woverton Mountain; You're For Me.

General News:

Consumer Price Index: 90.6

Examples of American Cost of Living: $17,600 One-Family home $2,650 Annual college costs - Harvard $2,529 Intermediate-sized car $8.00 Monthly Electric bill $1.00 Haircut $0.31 Gasoline per gallon $0.05 Daily Newspaper $0.04 First Class Postage stamp $5,021 Production worker gross earnings: after-tax as a % of gross: 88

USA President Kennedy orders a quarantine of Cuba until the USSR removes missiles already installed there.
Canada sends its first satellite, Alouette, from a California base into a 600-mile-high orbit at a cost of $2,900,000. It was designed to study ionosphere interference that plagued radio signals in the Far North. Canada becomes the third nation to send a satellite into space.
Marilyn Monroe is found dead of an apparent suicide in the bedroom of her Hollywood bungalow.
An autopsy shows that she swallowed three dozen sleeping pills. She was 36.
Her later known intimate relationship with USA President Kennedy and reports of agents dressed in black searching and removing documents from her house before the death was officially discovered, raises questions as to whether she was murdered.
Unusually strong volcanic activity is reported in Antarctica under the 3000 foot layer of ice.

1962 - By this year,
At least 20 major radical right American organizations were active, including the John Birch Society.
Their combined membership was about 300,000; their annual budgets topped $20 million; the total number of sympathizers approached 5 to 10 million people. One such group, the Minutemen, supposedly had 25,000 men trained ready for combat against any invading Communist force.
Senator Barry Goldwater of Arizona became a spokesperson for the Conservative Right.
He denounced Federal matching grants to states as a "mixture of blackmail and bribery." The UN was full of Communist spies and the USA would be best served by leaving it. Foreign aid was a giveaway. The USA had to continue nuclear testing. The Federal government had to get out of education, agriculture, urban renewal, and Social Security. Rich and poor alike should pay income tax at the same rate. Thus ran the creed.
The old apparent certainties of pre-Depression days had gone; nothing had replaced those expectations and dreams. The intervening governments had not returned the American Dream that hard work and education would equal material wealth, respect and happiness. Instead, so often characteristic of human endeavours, - population density, deficient education in coping and communication skills, a hypocracy of faith and denial, inflexible traditions, obsessive fears and trauma induced obsessions - provide a basis for masked anarchy.
While everyone tried to say, do, wear and support the "right" principles, they subverted their own expectations by destroying those of others. Individualism, gossip, favouritism, prejudice, and pride all ran free of a strong spiritual guideline. Without a vision for the future or coherent perspective on the present, people frequently sought for a return to what was idealized as the "good old days" - few of which had been that good. To the degree that people felt helpless, adrift, desperate or betrayed - they sought dramatic forceful political action to set everything back into order for them.

1962 - During the year,
The Use of Common Prayers and Bible Classes in American state schools is declared unconstitutional.
Morning devotions and Bible studies in American schools as a tradition stops except in some state institutions where the community leaders favour the devotions with the support of the teachers and general community. The use of such prayers and studies in some state schools is made an issue in 1995 when a Lutheran Christian family raise objections in an all-Christian community with the protest that they disagree with religious instruction or patterning in the schools.

1962 - In January,
A panel report of the USA Arms Control and Disarmament Agency (U.S.G.P.O), concluded that:
"It is generally agreed that the greatly enlarged public sector since World War II, resulting from heavy defense expenditures, has provided additional protection against depressions, since this sector is not responsive to contraction in the private sector and provides a sort of buffer or balance wheel in the economy."

1962 - On January 14,
The European Community Agricultural Policy (CAP) agreement was reached by the then 6 members.
According to the Treaty of Rome, if the Policy had not been concluded by the end of 1961, the EEC could not proceed to the second stage: Common Market. In 1957, France had made considerable concessions to German industrial power when it accepted the Common Market Agreement. Now Germany, with a less efficient agriculture than France, was being asked to make comparable concessions. Industrial jobs in France had been lost to Germany. With this agreement, agricultural jobs in Germany were likely to be lost. With considerable opposition from Germany and marathon negotiating sessions through late 1961 and up to this date, the Agreement was concluded - effective retroactive to the first of the year.
It should be remembered: politicians are assigned the authority to make laws, change laws and cancel laws. They can change the truth with the stroke of a pen. They can change economic and political reality without consensus, and, frequently, without consultation. In this instance, the leaders of the 6 European nations changed the reality of the timing of their agreement in order to allow them to support the laws which they had passed for their own guidance and censure, and, which they had failed to concur with.

Individuals who make future economic or career plans which are dependent upon the consistency of political actions or intentions are in danger of building their house on sand in a valley: the changes which can happen are all beyond their control.

1962 - During the year,
Defoliants become "a central weapon" in the overall Chemical and Biological Warfare (CBW) strategy of the U.S.A.throughout Southeast Asia.
Known as "Operation Ranch Hand", more than 50,000 tons of herbicides were dropped on South Vietnam between 1965 and 1970; the country being protected received the majority. Beginning in 1961 the U.S.A. had used the defoliants in South Vietnam on an "experimental" basis. Very conservative estimates of the crop and jungle destruction between 1961 and 1968 noted five million acres of land "sterilized", that is, 12% of the country. Between late 1961 and October of 1969, Vietnamese estimated that 43% of the arable land and 44% of the total forest area of South Vietnam were sprayed at least once and in many cases two or three times with herbicides. Large populated areas were sprayed as well?
The agents used consisted of "Orange", a mixture of 2,4-D and 2,4,5-T, used on general crops; "White" 20% picoloram and 80% isoprophlamin salt from 2,4-D; and "Blue", a form of arsenic; as well as Phenol compounds and "earth sterilizing" agents. During 1968 alone, the U.S.A. spent $70.8 million on defoliation. After 9 years of spraying, the program was temporarily suspended in June, 1970, long enough to use the C-123 cargo planes to transport troops and supplies to Cambodia. The spraying then resumed. Symptoms of exposure included difficulty breathing, tiredness, fever, thirst, vomiting, cramps, muscle paralysation, numbness of extremities, miscarriages, mutations, loss of hair, heart and back pains, red rashes, blistering, internal bleeding, mental instability.

1962 - On February 5,
The AQUARIUS Zodiac Astrological Age begins.
Seven planets will be aligned in Aquarius on this day.
Both Leo Taxil (1880s) and American clairvoyant Jeane Dixon would reckon this day or the next as the birth of an Antichrist - who would be responsible for beginning a war of Armageddon near the year 2000. The Peruvian spiritual messenger Willaru Huayta, of the Quechua nation, and familiar with the Inca calendar, also chose this month and year for the commencement of the Age of Aquarius.
According to the present calendar, the signs of the zodiac complete one cycle every 25,725 years, according to the present relative positions and paths of the planets in the Earth's solar system. As there are 12 sections or "ages" to this cycle, each cycle has a duration of 2143 years according to the modern calendar. It should be noted that because in the current calendar there is both a 1 B.C. and a 1 A.D., going backwards beyond these dates requires an allowance for them by the addition of 1 year. That is, the previous age of Pisces began approximately in 180 B.C. (1962-(2143+1)). The dates of previous ages are more approximate than the present because the historical dates used by humans were based on differing lengths of calendars which were not as accurate as the current one. Also, at a distant enough time, the length of year of the Earth was different than today and variations in day length are also probable.

Aquarian traits include:
sympathetic > humanitarian, kind, parental; independent > eccentric, freedom-loving, tactless, indifferent; spontaneous > friendly, willing, risk-taker, pioneer; rebellious > progressive outlook, straining to be unconventional; originality > authoritative, egotistical, inventive, initiator; dynamic > a reforming spirit, rebellious, contrary; passionate > faithful, loyal, follower of causes, idealistic; analytical > intellectually inclined, fixed in opinions, distant; addicted > unpredictable, absent-minded, irritable;

An Aquarian culture is one in which the participants all want to do their own thing, as long as it is exciting or intellectually stimulating, and, as long as it suggests commitment to the improvement of some situation for which credit can be assumed internally. Since a great number of issues, topics and causes may be intellectualized to fit this agenda, such a culture is likely to have many revolutionaries, each working according to the status quo which is personally believed to be most beneficial for everyone else. This compulsion to exceed, manage, control, and set in motion can produce anarchy and a considerable amount of conflict within the civilization.
Passionate individuals and groups may each vigorously promote and support causes which are as opposing as right-to-life vs women's rights; world peace vs national expansion and independence; communism vs capitalism; socialism vs elitist autocracy; save-the-whales vs open fishing rights; ecological protection vs market expansion; bureaucratic permanency vs economic self-sufficiency; human rights liberalism vs criminal justice conservativism; protest vs terrorism; religious fundamentalism vs occult variability; conventional medicine vs wholistic health care; industry subsidies vs product bans and limitations; addictive substance availability vs substance abuse awareness; justice for all vs privelege for special groups; "pure" science vs dedicated science; lust vs hate.
The challenge of the Aquarian culture, as is the challenge for each stage of astro-civilization, is to find a balance between what one is inclined to do and what is necessary if constructive options are to be followed which promote survival. At best, some focus will coordinate all of the explosive energy expended to truly revolutionize, in a positive manner, all aspects of civilization. At worst, anarchy will result in much effort being lost in ego-centred pseudo-idealistic battles which result in little or no improvement in the self-destructive traditions inherited from earlier ages.

Decisionmaking in the Aquarian society is at once limiting and imaginative.
The Aquarian seeks to change society according to the status quo ideals which he or she has been taught - without the feedback and input of the rest of the culture. This limitation of outlook is further intensified by a denial of one's emotions and spirituality - although each may be sought in confusion, and its justification by the use of hollow self-rationalization. You can never outwit nor out-rationalize an addict. They have required so many excuses in the past to reaffirm their compulsions that their life has become a contest of self-justification. Because rational thought is often based on imagination, projection, suggestion, intention, expectation, orderliness, originality and independence - the benefits of experience and spirituality are equally often either ignored or debased. Yet experience can offer a context to reality, a demonstrated capability of definition of difficulty, an awareness of individual differences, and a context for group support. And spirituality can bring an awareness of the apparent randomness of some realities, respect, openness, insight, focus, and, survival.
Thus, the Aquarian is inclined to respond from within the same reasoning-need framework of the Taurean, Arian and Piscean - all the while irritated by the constraints produced by the failures and destructiveness of each and attempting, be reacting, to correct each. The challenge is whether the Aquarian can be truly a rebel and not just a reactionary. Can the Aquarian do what he or she is inclined to reject, in reality? Can the Aquarian find the error within and make fundamental changes which can spark a "recovery" from the abuses of history? The Aquarian Age presents a challenge of responsibility , self-responsibility. If individuals fail to be self-responsible, what can they offer by way of example for the masses which form the civilization? And yet, all of the rationalizations possible will be ineffective against actions taken. If the Aquarian remains content to be self-obsessed with toxic shame and acting out with pride, distance and passion - whatever destructiveness has arrived as heritage will be magnified in the future. Spiritually, humans always have constructive and enduring positive choices. But from their historically noted "fall from grace" have they, can they, will they - ask for and follow spiritual guidance and direction?

Family and emotional relationships in the Aquarian Age are likely to be typified by independence, absence, loneliness, intellectual, ambivalent. Aquarians, in attempting to release the identity constrictions of their heritage, have a tendency to rationally excuse immature behaviour deny their children of equality. Children, too often may fit the "to be seen, heard, and ignored" pattern. Yet human children require a sense of parental guidance and mentoring if they are to develop a confident identity. Being treated like ornaments, not-yet-equals-of-adults, dependents, fragile beings, an integral part of the family "structure", and, as emotional confidants and friends - all serves to communicate to the child that their parents are really "out-of-touch"!
Children, during such times - unless their parents develop good emotional awareness, listening and empathy skills and spiritual decisionmaking abilities - will be left lost in perpetual childhood, or, parented by other institutions in the civilization: schools, peer groups, mass media, commerce. Since each of these extended families has a different and obsessive focus - the evolving adult will, under such circumstancs, be encouraged to be clever, disoriented, open-minded, traumatized, depressed, prone to addiction, mercenary, deceptive, manipulative, well-intentioned, distrustful. It doesn't have to be this way, IF parents and institutions can find and provide a focus for human civilization. The door is open, everyone cares, stimulation is constant, desperation alternates with coping out, everyone is busy and hurrying - but what is the destination?

Careers and occupations which are likely to benefit in the Aquarian Age are those which call for originality in place of, or in addition to, formality (structure), productivity and innovation (risk), facilitation and motivation (sales) skills. All of the earlier status quo activities are now reaching a point of being "maxed out." Yet the competion demanded by the capital-based economies, expanding and confliction populations, and inevitable declines in resources - demands new frameworks and new foundations. Anything less will lead to a slow death punctuated by dramatic catastrophes. What are beneficial occupations to such a cause may not be the chosen ones, for so great is the amount of deception, manipulation, misinformation, fantasy, and intellectualization already present from history - that realistic constructive choices will prove difficult for the individual to discern. Challenges will abound between what may be constructive and what may bring employment; between what is ethical and what pays the bills.
Sociologists, charity workers, astrologers, astronomers, archaeologists, and communicators all have the opportunity to increase the awareness and reality of human civilization. To do so effectively, most will have to escape the bonds of cultural and intellectual confinement - often at the potential or real loss of such current traditions as permanent employment, long-term relationships, social recognition, promoted material luxury, and, self-denial. Other, perhaps more likely Aquarian pursuits will include those which promise fantasy, excitement, elitism, humanistic rationalism, and self-obsession: entertainment, mass media, space exploration, sales, technological invention (irrespective of intent), biochemistry, market competion, special interest groups. Originality may lead to experimentation with options either rejected before or newly inspired. Originality may result in unmediated disasters or spontaneous miracles. Originality is fundamentally a choice to be different; its danger and its benefit is that constructive traditions may be discarded and that constructive traditions may be acquired. Human choice, and possibly, extraterrestrial contribution, will determine whether this astrological age determines the extinction of human civilization, or, a true revolution in its focus.
Afterthought:
There are 12 Zodiac stages.
Gemini is considered the most "youthful" sign.
If we set an average human lifespan, guided by healthy self-management strategy, as 83 years, then each "age" is equivalent to the degree of human development achieved over a 7-year period.

Thus a Gemini Civilization is relative to the development of a human from birth to age 7.
Taurean civilization relates to human development between ages 7 and 14. Arian covers ages 14 to 21. Piscean takes us from 21 to 28. That leaves the Aquarian Age as relative to human development between the ages of 28 and 35. With this analogy, how confident and safe do you feel in knowing that the fate of humanity is the responsibility of a civilization with the coping skills of a human aged 28 to 35? It's your world.

1962 - During the year,
Vatican II, a Catholic leadership and ecumenical conference, allows nuns to adopt less formal habits (costumes)and reviews and eliminates some convent procedures and rules. Twice as many women as men are involved in the lesser authority positions of priest and nun. Many nunneries have continually built more and more authoritarian institutions with impractical, wasteful, and demeaning regulations for their participants. The self-depreciation encouraged in numerous nunneries has led to increased incidences of some forms of female cancers. Priests are in the midst of epidemics of alcoholism and abuse of patrons which the church and the community will hide and deny for another 2 decades. Both priests and nuns have been used as cheap labor for centuries in order to build the material wealth and power of the Catholic Christian Church. The archaic habit outerwear of the nuns has increasingly distanced the church representatives from the people whom they seek to help and guide towards a more spiritual and socially fulfilling lifestyle. Less extreme outerwear and a greater flexibility to take positions of service in the community plus a greater freedom for self-acceptance and assertion will lead to both greater positive influence within the community than in the past and a growing desire to assume positions of authority reserved previously for men only.

The institution built to place secular power and authority behind the spread of greater spiritual preparation for humanity has more frequently encouraged the development of inequities of extremes in the past. Can it undo the negativity and destructiveness that it has assisted in spreading and encouraged by way of the hypocracies which its founder fought against?

1962 -
Hermann Oberth, Dr. says that ... UFO's ... (2) fly by means of artificial gravity fields; and (3) produce high-tension electric charges to push air out of their paths so that it does not start glowing, and strong magnetic fields to interact with ionized air.

1962 - Early in the year,
A strategic hamlet program is introduced into South Vietnam by American advisers.
Developed by the British counter-insurgency expert Sir Robert Thompson, on the basis of experiences in Malays and the Philippines, and designed to isolate the Vietcong from its principal source of support, the people of South Vietnam. According to the plan, peasants from scattered villages would be brought together into hamlets surrounded by moats and bamboo stake fences and protected by military forces.
The hamlets were regarded not only as a means of protecting the people against Vietcong terror but also as the instrument of a social and economic revolution that would bind the people closely to the government. The re-institution of village elections, the establishment of land reform programs, and the creation of schools and medical services were expected to persuade the people that life under the government offered more than under the Vietcong.
The original program had been instituted to protect Malays against Chinese insurgents.
Here, Vietnamese were being protected from Vietnamese - who could tell the difference?
By the end of the year, 3500 hamlets were declared as established with 2000 more under construction. Many peasants had to relocate and many were left landless. Much of the money sent from America to institute services for the villagers ended up in the hands of the Vietnamese underworld or with corrupt officials. Largely, the people were further alienated from Diem and the Americans. In many cases, no relevant security existed for the hamlets and they were quickly overrun or changed support to the Vietcong. Now, the ARVN and American forces had villages which they had fortified, as enemies.

The problem, oblivious to the slaves who tried to impose it was that many of the peasants had been content with the freedom of their fields and small villages and wanted it to remain that way. Those shepherded to the hamlets felt more like prisoners than free persons. They were now surrounded by "mercenaries" whose position it was to make them dependent on a central political authority, a government, even as they, the mercenaries were. All of the troops depended upon the state for their food, clothing, social prestige and employment. Previously, the peasant had depended on no-one but himself and his neighbours.
The policies of the Vietminh promised to correct the inequalities of land ownership.
The South Vietnamese Army (ARVN and Civil Guard) promised, yet delivered only coercion and restrictions. Inevitably, some of those housed in the hamlets were or became sympathetic to the Vietcong and rebelled against ARVN or American advisers, or assisted the Vietcong. This increased distrust between the parties, and, in fear and paranoia, more and more innocent Vietnamese were brutalized or murdered in an effort to stabilize the situation. Vengeance only enhanced the anarchy on both sides.
The primary United States contribution at this time was "Project Beefup"
The Military Assistance and Advisory Group (MAAG) was replaced by an enlarged and reorganized Military Assistance Command (MAC), headed by American, General Paul Harkins, located in Saigon. American military assistance more than doubled to Vietnam between 1961 and 1962 and included 300 military aircraft and 9,000 American military advisers. Idealistically committed veterans from WWII and the Korean War set up regional civil action programs, used helicopters to move ARVN troops and both supervised and flew bombing and strafing missions. At first the use of helicopters, unknown to the Vietnamese, frightened the superstitious peasants and the Vietcong out of hiding and made them appear suspicious and easy targets. The routine of the air strike followed by landings of troops largely defeated the intent of the exercises.

1962 -
Basil Van den Berg claims to have deciphered the hieroglyphics on a photographic plate allegedly given Adamski by Venusians and to have constructed an anti-gravity device based on them.

1962 - On Feb 09,
Ronald Wildman, while driving on the Irvinghoe Road, having left Dunstable and approaching a set of crossroads at Tringford, in Bedfordshire, England, saw an oval-shaped object ahead of him. It was white with black markings at regular intervals around the perimeter. It appeared to be 20 to 30 feet above the road, and at least 40 feet wide. His car engine power began to fade as he drove within 20 yards of it. As he drove on the UFO stayed about 20 feet above and ahead of him. Suddenly, a white haze appeared around the perimeter of the object and it veered off to the right at high speed. After it disappeared, the car's engine appeared to return to full power.

1962 - During February,
The Shah of Iran was fortunate when an attempted assassination by the U.S.S.R. KGB, failed.
Ivan Anisimovich Fadeikin, born in Moscow, was in charge.
Just before the Second World War, Fadeikin completed his studies in the Faculty of Journalism in Moscow State University and was accepted for work in intelligence. After the war, he continued in intelligence, and became first an officer and then the chief of "V" Department, which mounted direct actions (sabotage, diversions, and the physical liquidation of enemies of the Soviet regime). It was in this capacity that Fadeikin first visited Iran.
After WWII, Iran had been protected by the U.S.S.R. occupation troops until the Communist Tudeh party formed an autonomous government in Azerbaijan and Kurdistan. Iran had been a key to the British empire for it was one of Britain's major suppliers of oil. A Briton had owned all the oil rights since 1901 on a 60 year lease; Britain bought most of the interest for its navy and paid royalties to the Shah. Withdrawal of British troops was followed by UN demands for the U.S.S.R. to withdraw. In 1949 there had been an assassination attempt on Mohammed Reza Pahlevi (Shah from 1941 and British sympathizer) when he refused to step down before the commonly elected Muhammad Mussadegh who eventually became Shah and nationalized the oil company in 1951.

By 1953, Britain and the U.S.A. agreed to cooperatively undermine Mussadegh by intelligence efforts.
British concerns were to regain the oil; the U.S.A. wanted to prevent the U.S.S.R. from access to it. The British played up the dangers of Soviet expansion and this together with growing American fear and distrust of Stalin motivated the American Executive Office. In June, 1953, the U.S.A. CIA undertook Operation Ajax which was successful in overthrowing Mussadegh in September and making General Fazlollah Zahedi prime minister. Following this CIA-organized coup in Iran, the new Shah became a personal dictator. Reforms were complicated by corruption, the Islamic sects, the socioeconomic gap between the uneducated and the restless intelligentsia. The Shah became increasingly anti-Soviet, remembering humiliation he had been subjected to by Stalin during WWII. These apprehensions convinced the U.S.S.R.leadership that the Shah was simply going to become part of the American empire and as such a threat: the Shah must die.
The decision had to be made by the Politburo and when made, such tasks were referred to as "special Central Committee tasks", shrouded in the strictest secrecy. Khrushchev was then the Soviet leader and during this time he met with American President Kennedy. The plan was simple in that a remote detonated explosion, packed in a small car along the route most often taken by the Shah's car, would kill him as he passed or the illegal (non-KGB hired local citizen) would finish the job with a sniper's bullet. The explosives were delivered in small amounts through the diplomatic bag to the Soviet embassy and the car, when packed to the roof, was primed and parked. In February, as the Shah was driven past, the illegal pressed the remote control button, and nothing happened. The bomb was defused and driven away; the control was sent back to the lab. The illegal had pressed the button, yet without holding it down, the detonator would not work. Had the bomb gone off, it was estimated that everyone in a radius of 500 metres would have been killed, including the illegal!

The failure had no effect on Fadeikin's career as it resulted from a technical malfunction.
However, in demonstrating the oft unprofessional petty background to what could determine your career in the KGB, or the Communist Party, he was demoted from a promotion to chief of the First Directorate in 1974. Fadeikin was a tough, disciplined man and an enemy of alcohol. He forbade the sale of even beer in the canteens. To mark his well deserved promotion, he gave a huge banquet in the KGB headquarters in Karlshorst. After he had allowed himself to take a little strong drink, he loosened up and mentioned briefly how Semyon Tsvigun, who was then first deputy chairman of the KGB, was not the most intelligent of people. It happened that someone who attended the banquet immediately reported to Tsvigun the uncomplimentary remarks. Tsvigun was married to the sister of Brezhnev's wife, who had no difficulty persuading Andropov, the KGB chairman, who was himself a distant relation to the sister, that Fadeikin should be punished. Fortunately, he belonged to the party establishment and only received a demotion out of the KGB to atomic industry security. As the Russian proverb says, "One raven never pecks out the eyes of another."
"Operation Ajax", which resulted in the coup placing Zahedi in power, was immensely successful for an early CIA effort of its kind. That, unfortunately, led the U.S.A., as feared by the chief agent involved, Kermit Roosevelt to conclude:
"Foster Dulles had been so pleased and mesmerized by the success I'd had in Iran that he just figured I could solve any problem anywhere in the world. I tried to explain to him very carefully just why it was we'd succeeded in Iran: because careful studies had convinced us that first and foremost the army and secondly the people wanted the same things we did. ... And I said, if you don't want something that the people and the army want, don't give it to clandestine operations, give it to the marines."

Pride would get in the way in the future and the decision-makers would have a tendency to get involved where they were not wanted and then be shamed into stubbornly trying to stick it out. The above described activities show how easily one can be manipulated by fear and distrust and the lengths to which some governments will go to try and alleviate those fears.

1962 -
Leon Davidson in an open letter to saucer researchers states that
"The Central Intelligence Agency ... took over the public image of the 'flying saucer' created by secret flights of U.S. aircraft and artificial meteor research, ... during the period 1947 - 48. By 1950, the CIA had set in motion a plan encouraging public belief in interplanetary travel through a psychological technique of guiding the release of planted information, ordering secret tests of authentic military developments which gave misleading impressions to observers. CIA delegated the Air Force to act as official "investigator" to stave off public inquiry. It secretly sponsored the formation of saucer study groups and contact clubs ... set up many saucer publishers, sponsored the publicizing of ... (books), and sponsored the wave of saucer articles in 1952 in 'Life' and 'Look', etc. The CIA also conducted hoaxes ... in addition to other activities of this nature.

1962 - On February 20,
U.S.A. astronaut John Glenn orbited the Earth 3 times in a public display of American space technology.

1962 - On March 16,
The Cosmos Series of USSR Satellites began.
The general name would be a disguise for the large number of CIS/Soviet military launches; well over half of the series will be for this use. By 1992, there will have been 2176 or more satellites launched in this series. Frequent useful longevity would be 2 to 5 years, thereafter requiring replacement. Launches would sometimes be first announced under the Cosmos title, and only after successful deployment be named Venera, Mars, Meteor or some other final designation. In this manner, interplanetary probes, in particular, would go unnoticed if they failed. Launch numbers would reach a high of 101 in 1976. During the first 10 years 500 satellites were orbited. The annual launch rate would never be less than 70 between the years of 1970 and 1987.
Accordingly, the Cosmos Series will be launched from the 3 main Soviet space facilities of Tyuratam, Plesetsk and Kapustin Yar; most will go from Plesetsk. Cost of each is impossible to estimate because of the variety of payloads, locations and a lack of reference to hours of labour and quantities of materials used. Without the latter, no accurate comparison can be made to the cost of American or other launches. Soviet citizens are usually paid considerably less than Americans as regards standard of living and materials may be gathered/mined/processed by prison labour equally as well as commune labourers. A suggested average per launch cost of rocket propulsion vehicle and satellite payload of the American production of a comparable unit would be US $15,000,000 (1962).

1962 - During the year,
The S.S. Streatham Hill, a British freighter leased by the Soviet Union, struck a reef with its propeller and limping in damage went into the harbour of San Juan, Puerto Rico for repairs. Many of the 80,000 bags of Cuban sugar on board were offloaded into a warehouse during the period of repairs. CIA covert forces took the opportunity to contaminate most of the sugar with "a harmless but unpalatable substance."
President Kennedy was informed by a White House official who had seen a report of the action.
Kennedy was furious because he had not been informed of the action and it had been undertaken without his direct authority. This indicates the naivety of Kennedy about the covert actions being undertaken by his intelligence agencies as well as the power of decision which had already been assumed by such agencies. Many such actions had and would occur between the USSR and the USA.

1962 - During April,
Flight Commander P.J. (initials) attached to the TAC FighterWing, was deployed at Wright-Patterson AFB and mistakenly entered an air hanger where he thought the gym was located. Upon entering the hanger he was approached by an air police sentry with a sub-machine gun. Behind the sentry was a saucer-shaped object of approximately 12-15 feet in diameter suspended off the ground by two engine test stands. There were no markings or insignia on the saucer. It had no rivet markings. The saucer was roped off and 8 guards stood at parade rest around it. P.J. returned to Myrtle Beach AFB, South Carolina, later.

1962 - On April 18,
An object was reported to have exploded over the deserts of Nevada.
The roar was heard for miles and the flash of light was so bright that it lit the streets of Reno like the noonday sun. Lieutenant Colonel Herbert Rolph, a spokesman for the North American Air Defense Command in Colorado Springs, Colorado, told reporters that the first observers had seen a glowing red object, heading to the west, over the Oneida area. It was at great altitude. Radar picked up the object and Nellis and Las Vegas Air Force Bases were alerted. Interceptors were scrambled from Phoenix. It was seen as a glowing red object over Nephi, Utah by witnesses and it landed near Eureka, Utah for a few minutes disrupting the electrical service from a power plant there.
Continuing westward, it disappeared from radar screens 70 miles northeast of Las Vegas, coincident with a brilliant explosion. Other witnesses described the object as an oval-shaped orange object that was making a quiet whirring sound. The ground around it was lighted as if the sun were coming up when it passed over Eureka. Because of the apparent control which the security agencies held over the media, only one newspaper appears to have carried the story at the time and most of the country heard nothing about it. Officially, the incident was justified as a meteor, but meteors cannot be tracked by radar, they do not set down and take off, and they do not make 120 degree turns as this one would have in order to light up the streets of Reno and then explode over Las Vegas.

1962 - On April 30 and again on September 5,
Eugenio Siragusa, of Catania, Sicily, received communication from UFO spacepersons by mental telepathy.

1962 - During the year,
U.S.A. President John F. Kennedy initiates the formation of a military anti-terrorist organization known as the "U.S. Navy SEALS". They will typically conduct covert operations worldwide in which they wear black jumpsuits covering all except part of their face, use high-tech person-to-person communications and equipment including the use of black unmarked helicopters. Their activities will largely be unknown and uncensored by the citizens who finance their existence.

1962 - In May,
Louis Kervan publishes his "Biological Transmutations".
In it he made clear that those who believe in a system of farming which takes into account chemistry alone are in for a rude shock and that man and animals nourished on diets formulated by chemists will not long survive. Kervan freely accepted the formulation set out by Antoine Laurent Lavoisier, who had founded chemistry, that as far as chemical reactions were concerned elements could be shifted but not transmuted; elements could be combined but nothing created nor lost. The mistake made by science, Kervan contended, was to assume that all reactions in living organisms are chemical in nature and that, consequently, life should be interpreted in chemical terms.
Kervan wrote that one of the main purposes of his book was "to show that matter has a property heretofore unseen, a property which is neither in chemistry nor in nuclear physics in its present state. In other words the laws of chemistry and biochemists lies in their desire to apply the laws of chemistry at any cost, with unverified assertions in a field where chemistry is not always applicable. In the final phase the results might be chemistry, but only as a consequence of the unperceived phenomenon of transmutation."
Cultivation based on classical chemistry alone fails wherever intensive and abusive methods are employed. The marked crop increases can last only a certain time. The use of chemical fertilizers has led to a mounting lack of resistance to pests. The increase in infestation is no more than a consequence of biological imbalance. "Classical soil scientists and agronomists attached to the dogma that biology equals chemistry cannot conceive that all that is within plants has not been put into the soil. They are not the people to advise farmers; farmers should be guided by the enlightened and intelligent agriculturalists who have long recognized the division between a purely chemical and biological agriculture. ... If they are men of good faith, they will admit their past errors, but one doesn't ask that much - only that they act."

1962 - In June,
The U.S.A. begins aerial spraying of herbicides over large areas of Vietnam.
A Japanese scientific study concluded that by 1967, American chemical attacks had ruined more than 3.8 million acres (or one-half) of the arable land in South Vietnam, and were a direct cause of death for nearly 1000 peasants and more than 13,000 head of livestock. Another source would report that in 1967 alone, the Pentagon would use 60 million dollars' worth of defoliants and herbicides, that is, 12 million gallons, which was enough to cover nearly half of the arable land in South Vietnam.

We now know that this degree of Ecocide sends signals from the plants affected into space and that those signals are more effective in reaching highly technical intelligent beings than the electromagnetic radio signals we beam proudly into space. Interpretation of such signals would relate only one thing: a part of this planet is horribly dying.

1962 - By June,
The USA had adopted a "Flexible Response Strategy" to replace its earlier "massive retaliation" defense policy.
That is, previous to Sputnik I, in 1957, the USA considered that they were invincible to USSR nuclear weapons - believing that they would have to be delivered by bomber. With direct threat of attack out of the question, the USA felt able to offer a "nuclear umbrella" of protection over Europe in defense of a conventional attack by the USSR. In that case, nuclear bombs could be delivered to targets in the Soviet Union from bases leased from NATO countries. Massive retaliation would be the response.
Now, American politicians and military advisors recognized that a direct nuclear attack could possibly be made against them from space. It seemed unreasonable to risk an attack against oneself for offering to defend someone else. The new strategy was designed by a team headed by former Secretary of State Dean Acheson. First, a significant increase in NATO conventional forces in Europe would be undertaken. Secondly, Exclusive American control over the Western nuclear deterrent was considered necessary.
At this time, Secretary of Defense, Robert McNamara explained the policy at University of Michigan commencement exercises thus:
"In short, then, limited nuclear capabilities, operating independently, are dangerous, expensive, prone to obsolescence and lacking in credibility as a deterrent .... At the same time, the general strategy I have summarized magnifies the importance of unity of planning, concentration of executive authority, and central direction. There must not be competing and conflicting strategies to meet the contingency of nuclear war."
In other words, "Europe, look after yourself." This left Britain defending Europe with its limited nuclear capability, and, some would say, under the direction of the USA. Within a week, McNamara had to clarify this point publicly by stating that "Britain's Bomber Command ... is part of a thoroughly coordinated Anglo-American striking force ... I was therefore not referring to Britain ...." Britain could act independently as part of a joint strategy! The truth was that President Kennedy had written in in April that "over the long run it would be desirable if the British decided to phase out of the nuclear deterrent business."

1962 - During June,
British leader Harold Macmillan, entered into an agreement with French leader Charles de Gaulle to provide nuclear assistance to France in exchange for French support for Britain to be admitted into the EEC. Britain's own nuclear deterrent program was highly dependent upon American support in terms of research results and technology at the time. If France developed a nuclear capability, where might it use it? Southeast Asia and North Africa had provided continuing colonial disappointment to the recovery of the former French Empire. With the USA begging off direct protection for Europe and Britain not a member of the EC, France was the only nation capable of developing and maintaining a nuclear deterrent.
Earlier in the spring, the USA had encouraged France to purchase American conventional war weapons in order to improve its economic balance of payments. De Gaulle responded enthusiastically by sending an emissary with a shopping list for nuclear components. It had been rejected. Kennedy reaffirmed his policy of not feeding a series of national nuclear deterrents based on each developing an insecurity based on the possession of such by a neighbour. If they wanted such a deterrent, each would have to develop its own.
In May, Macmillan had suggested to Martine de Courcel, French Ambassador to London, that "it might be possible for Britain and France, within the framework of NATO, to hold their nuclear power as trustees for Europe." Asked if this would be possible without American agreement, Macmillan replied that it would. Macmillan rationalised the arrangement on the basis that France stood to gain little from Britain's entry into the EC. Increasing their joint military capability seemed to better justify allowing Britain into the EC, or, perhaps act as a bribe to France for such support.

1962 - On the night of June 25-26,
Rocket-like Objects were seen to emerge from and return to a hovering UFO near Tucson, Arizona, by several teenage boys.

1962 - In the summer,
Sedan and Small Boy atomic bomb tests were fired in the Utah test range.
Sedan was 100 kilotons, and created a crater over 1200 feet in diameter and over 300 feet deep.
Small Boy, was fired slightly above ground, where it could be expected that fallout would be heavy. Particularly after these two tests, highly contaminated milk was found in 39 local dairy farms. It was estimated that up to 250,000 children might be involved in thyroid uptake of the I-131 through milk.

1962 - In July,
Telstar is launched and becomes the first human communications satellite, able to relay television signals across the ocean.

1962 - During the early 1960s,
Eckhard Hess, a German-born psychologist, developed the pupilometer.
It measured the pupil, that round spot in the middle of the human eye, as it expanded (dilated) and contracted. These changes were an indicator of how intently the subject was examining a picture which had been presented to it, or, anything else in the field of vision. Many of the American advertising agencies and university laboratories became very enthusiastic of its potential, expecting that the results would indicate what people liked.
The machine could not tell the experimenters what it was in a particular and that the subject liked or disliked but it could indicate as to whether there was a strong response (which could be either positive or negative) when the subject was exposed to a test ad or picture. A further complication was that the subject's pupil was more likely to dilate at the sight of dark colours than of light colours as a simple adaptation to brightness of image. The development did, however, spur interest in technical developments which would more directly indicate the true and largely subconscious interests of individuals.

1962 - On July 17,
The First Voyage to the geographic North Pole by a USSR sub, the November Class "Leninsky Komsomol" occurred.
It was 4 years after the USA submarine "Nautilus" had sailed under the North Pole and before the "Skate" had surfaced there. The Soviet press reported that the submarine had manoeuvred under the Arctic ice "to detect and destroy 'enemy' nuclear submarines trying to approach Soviet shores." Upon return to Murmansk, on July 20, Krushchev personally decorated both Engineer-Captain 2nd Rank R.A. Timofeyev, and the flotilla commander, Rear Admiral A.I. Petelin, with the nation's highest medal of recognition making each a Hero of the Soviet Union. As usual the mass media was being used for mass deception. The Soviet citizens were not informed of the earlier exploits of the Americans in the Arctic.

1962 - On July 22,
Mariner 1, a USA 202 kg planetary exploration satellite, was launched by an Atlas Agena B rocket from Cape Canaveral. An attempted Venus flyby, it failed because of an error in the flight guidance equation. Atlas veered off course immediately following launch and had to be destroyed.

1962 - On August 5, at 3.45 a.m.,
Marilyn Monroe was murdered at her house in California.
Most of the information surrounding the event would not become public for 30 years until the publication of "The Marilyn Files", compiled by Robert F. Slatzer and published by S.P.I. Books in 1992.
Marilyn carried trauma induced energy blocks from her childhood and her adult years which increasingly influenced her emotionally as well as physically. She experienced hypersensitivity reactions to environmental factors which are only in the 1990s beginning to be understood. Those reactions gave her chronic tiredness, depression, respiratory infections, digestive upsets and headaches, particularly after 1961, - which the doctors of the era serving her misdiagnosed, missed or simply misprescribed for.

Her father had deserted her mother before her birth and her mother had suffered a nervous breakdown shortly after her birth. A ward of the County of Los Angeles, she was in a dozen foster homes before she was 15. She married on the advice of a foster father and later divorced her first husband when faced with the choice of housewife or movie star. Her second marriage failed when her Joe DiMaggio could not cope with her greater popularity than his and her busy career schedule. Her third marriage ended after two miscarriages and perhaps because of her relationship to JFK. Lack of a father image and her underprivileged childhood left her with insecurities which made her sensitive to the approval of outsiders, in awe of privileged society, and attracted to intelligent men with high social standing.
This insecurity and lack of self-esteem plus her natural beauty encouraged the retention of a social mask which suggested to the public that she was a naive, little girl, dumb blonde - which brought her lots of attention - usually of the kind her spirit did not want. It led to many, both acquaintances and associates, believing that her illness symptoms were little more than hypochondria of a self-centred spoiled woman. Many women despised her or were jealous of her for this apparent ploy of helplessness which attracted men to her as well as her beauty. The reality of her illness and the associated learned defense reactions plus her inappropriate coping skills often kept others from accepting and acknowledging her as the sensitive, empathic individual desirous of knowledge which she was.

Marilyn's liaison with John F. Kennedy (JFK) was to prove to be one of the most enduring in her life.
It continued through her marriages to Joe DiMaggio and Arthur Miller and spanned most of a decade, beginning before 1954. They first met at Jack Kennedy's brother-in-law's, screen star Peter Lawford's, beachside hideaway in Santa Monica. JFK was attracted to all beautiful women and at first saw Marilyn in much the way that men of the time saw sexual conquests. Her attraction to him was more obsessive from the beginning for he was handsome, intelligent, socially recognized, from a privileged background, and confident - all of which she felt she lacked. She wanted the freedom and acceptance which appeared to go with those traits. JFK, who had initiate the relationship, put ambition first, and to that end Marilyn was doomed to lose.
At JFK's Spring 1962 birthday gala at Madison Square Garden, a fundraiser for the Democratic Party, Jacqueline Kennedy, his wife, chose to stay away when she heard that Marilyn would be attending. Further, she stipulated that if JFK did not terminate his relationship with Marilyn completely, she would divorce him. After the gala, at a reception, JFK and his brother Bobby took her aside and told her the news. JFK would not risk the end of his career and the disgrace of such a humiliation. JFK never called her again nor answered any of her letters. On or about July 25, 1962, Marilyn attempted suicide in total spiritual depression and became a RED Walk-in.

In the interim, Robert Kennedy, brother to JFK and then Attorney General of the U.S.A., had become her confidant and in going to her rescue while she was on the rebound from Jack, she became compulsive about him. Walk-ins are not perfect. They try to do the best they can with the physical body, the person's skills and contacts, and the higher spiritual nature and capabilities which they bring to the identity they have taken over. Marilyn's situation was a mess. She had beauty; she had influential contacts in the highest political offices; those contacts were in jeopardy of losing their political and social power by virtue of her association with them; Herbert Hoover, Director of the F.B.I. hated JFK but wanted to safeguard the office of the Presidency; the Mafia hated both brothers for their war on organized crime and wanted to see them disgraced; the military-industrial complex feared and disliked the JFK for his curtailing the influence of the CIA and Black Projects and threatening to withdraw from Vietnam. Alternative 2 and 3 leaders became her worst enemies.
"Reborn" as a Walk-In, Marilyn (1962) brought with her, knowledge of the "alien" contracts which had been made with the U.S.A. military-industry-government representatives by the GRAYs, BLONDS, and REDS. She now knew of the negotiations, the secrecy, Alternative 2 and 3 Projects, the likely disasters to follow, the choices offered by the REDS and the idealism of the Kennedy's which might finally release the truth to the world which Eisenhower had been afraid to do - tell the world about the presence of other world beings and of the choices of servitude or salvation offered by the differing groups.

There was a sense of urgency and Marilyn (1962) called Bobby.
He couldn't believe what she was saying and thought she had gone insane.
Bobby conferred with Jack. If they were afraid before that their association with her might end their careers, now they were terrified - she was unstable, she might go public anytime. She was discreet, but her enthusiasm and new self-directedness before Bobby was taken as a nervous breakdown and he enlisted the aid of a doctor to give her a stronger than usual dose of her regular sedative. Then they left, shortly after midnight on the morning of August 5.
Marilyn and the Kennedy's had been under surveillance by the F.B.I. for some months.
Her house had been electronically bugged by the F.B.I. and an agent overheard all of what she had said. For some reason, he took the information mentioned to be of national security interest and contacted a source within Alternative 3. While Bobby was making arrangements for and having Marilyn tranquillized, the officials in Alternative 3 contacted Marilyn's psychiatrist, Dr. Ralph Greenson, and told him to get out to the house and finish the job, permanently.

An ambulance was called to her home by Pat Newcomb, her publicist, to arrive at about 3.30 a.m. The attendants, Hall and Leibowitz, found Marilyn inside a guest bedroom, lying face-up on the bed, nude, unconscious and in obvious distress. Her pulse was very weak and rapid and her respiration was almost nonexistent: classic symptoms of overdose. The two attendants could not provide CPR without a strong back support, and the floor space being too small they carried her out to the foyer. She slipped from Hall's grasp and fell to the floor on her fanny, explaining a bruise found later. A second bruise formed on one of her upper arms - where Hall had grabbed her. Dead bodies don't bruise. The CPR, Hall maintained was effective almost immediately as her colour began to return.
Just then, a man carrying a doctor's bag and identifying himself as her doctor walked in.
He ordered Hall to remove the resuscitator and while Hall tried to continue directly, the doctor misapplied CPR. Frustrated, Hall suggested they exchange places. The doctor ignored Hall and pulled out a hypodermic syringe with a heart needle already affixed. Two other men entered the room, one wearing a police officer's uniform and the other later identified as Peter Lawford, relative of the Kennedy's. The doctor, later identified as Dr. Ralph Greenson, Marilyn's psychiatrist, took a pharmaceutical bottle from his bag, filled the syringe, and with verbal dialogue tried to push it between the 6th and 7th ribs. He did it incorrectly, at a slant, hitting a rib. He pushed harder, snapping her rib and entering her heart. He then leaned over with the stethoscope on her chest and advised the ambulance attendants to leave as he was going to pronounce her dead. Fifteen minutes had passed: it was 3.45 a.m..

The police officer walked into the living room and used the phone.
Hall and Leibowitz filled out their reports and gathered up their equipment.
Preparing to leave, just before 4.00, they were surprised to see the first-call ambulance from a local mortuary already parked beside theirs to pick up the remains. The body first went to Westwood Memorial Park before being taken to the coroner's office: Why? Within hours of Marilyn's death, FBI agents visited the phone company and confiscated all the records of Marilyn's long-distance phone calls to Bobby Kennedy. Released after nearly 30 years, they show that Marilyn made nearly a dozen calls to Washington in a futile attempt to reach Bobby Kennedy. At 6.05 a.m., Peter Lawford made a 20 minute call to JFK at the White House.
The autopsy was tainted by Dr. Greenson's declaration of suicide.
While there was enough drugs in the body to have killed a dozen people, no evidence of pills were found in the large intestine, nor was any evidence of the use of suppositories found in the rectum. "A purplish discoloration of a portion of the sigmoid colon" was noted but not followed up even though it was an odd indication. The liver analysis showed that it had taken several hours for Marilyn to die. Little note was taken of the two bruises at the time. After discovering evidence of an overdose, the coroner did not bother to analyze the rest of the samples he had taken. Later, when he went to check the samples, they were missing. According to former Deputy D.A. John Miner, organ samples have disappeared from the Los Angeles County Coroner's Office only twice in history:
Once in the death of Marilyn Monroe. Once in the death of Bobby Kennedy.

1962 - On August 5,
The British Application for EC Membership Negotiations ended with the British delegation declining the offer on the table even though it satisfied - and even exceeded in part - the very terms and conditions which British Prime Minister Macmillan had been so insistent upon. Since the beginning of the negotiations, Macmillan's decisions on strategy had slowed the progress of the negotiations. Political events had turned in his favour such that the EC members had found themselves with a poor defense against the USSR. Britain, with its nuclear weapons, could both assist in filling the gap left by the USA change in policy and by its assistance to France in the development of a nuclear weapons capability for them. Macmillan had proudly sought for special concessions as well as a restructuring of EC membership into levels of commitment and responsibility. Rather than enter the EC as a member amongst equals, Britain no could command considerable political influence with other potential new members. Why then walk away?
Popular sentiment in Britain in favour of Britain joining the Common Market had peaked shortly after the Prime Minister's announcement in July 1961. The gallup Poll taken one month earlier revealed that just under 50% of respondents said they would approve if the Government decided to join the Common Market. From that point forward, public opinion swung increasingly against the Government and its continental initiative. Growing negativity towards the Macmillan Government was reinforced by the Commonwealth media urging Britain not to join Europe.

As far back as September 1961, when the Commonwealth Economic Consultive Council met in Accra, the official media release at that time had been: "It was feared that United Kingdom membership in the EEC would fundamentally alter the relationship between the United Kingdom and Commonwealth countries. Indeed, this relationship might be so imperiled as to weaken the cohesion of the Commonwealth as a whole."
British politicians added to this concern by reminding the voters of how military forces from the Commonwealth countries had come to the aid of Britain during wartime, even before assistance had been received from "friendly" nations like the USA. While both of these persuasions garnered good media exposure - with the media as usual looking for stories of drama to print rather than stories of relevance - neither represented fact. And, it was the political choice of Macmillan and the ECC Council not to disclose the nature and context of the negotiations as they progressed.

In fact, Britain's membership in the EC, with concessions to allow Commonwealth countries to join - provided a factor for an increased strengthening of the Commonwealth. And the second representation was in fact deceptive. Commonwealth nations had supported Britain in past wars because they were colonies and were obligated to provide support; not all did so with enthusiasm. In addition, at present, many Commonwealth nations had, were, or planned to request independence from Britain, and, like children who had not left home yet, many were insecure in independent economic and political policies and decisions. With the truth not readily before the public, presumptuous opposition could fan the fires of public anxiety, pride, insecurity, and co-dependency both in Britain and the Commonwealth nations.
In March and April of 1962, the British public had expressed their concern in a series of by-election losses for the British Government. The Liberals benefited greatly from this with their share of the vote now rising from 16% to 26%. Support for the Conservatives (Tories) fell to 33%, its lowest since January, 1946. This left the Labour Party in the lead. The Conservative Party's unpopularity became a matter of obsession amongst the Conservative members of Parliament. Increasingly uneasy with Macmillans leadership, back-benchers had formed their own Committee in April, 1962. Terms such as "vacillation, weakness and incompetence" began being attached to the situation and a final report called for the appointment of a Minister to the position of Public Relations for the Governement.

William Deedes, was advanced from the benches (non-executive) to become a Minister without Portfolio, and, immediately made a member of the Common Market Negotiating Committee. Macmillan had always tended to ignore advice, act independently, disclose little to the public, negotiate with deception and threat, and, assume an elitist stance for Britain. On July 25, 1961, his Government had announced emergency economic measures which had included a freeze on wage increases and a bank interest rate increase from 5% to 7%. For the common voter, the influence was increasing unemployment, social unrest, and hardship over the next year. After the July 31, 1961 announcement of Britain's intention to join the EEC, an Anti-Common Market League formed within Macmillan's party, encouraged by the anxiety and confusion over international economic and political realities which faced the average Briton. As always, the majority of the humans involved looked for simplistic solutions. By September 1, 1961, the League had pledged itself to influence public and parliamentary opinion in order to achieve a reversal of this "disastrous" decision. Deedes now represented this intention.
By March 27, 1962, Macmillan seemed to be still too isolated in his thinking to appreciate this shift of opinion - not reduced by the secrecy of his strategy and intentions - for Sir Cyril Osbourne, the Member of Parliament for Louth, drew his attention to this "growing anxiety" of the public. In the military "game-playing" tactics so popular in politics, Macmillan chose NOT to cope directly and constructively with this opposition but rather to use it to place more pressure on the ECC Council to accept Macmillan's request for modifications and special considerations. It was the old strategy of playing hard-to-get, when you wanted into a relationship, such that the suitor would convey greater respect, authority and control to you than you deserved in reality.

As the deadlines became closer, and the ECC member's attraction to Britain's nuclear contribution became greatly appreciated, Macmillan sensing power, backed away in confidence. Macmillan left the task of regaining public support to his party members - who he encourage to convey the advantages which Britain would derive from the ECC membership. This proved difficult for many were ignorant of his strategy and intentions. Macmillan hoped to be able to sway the public at the last moment with an appeal to emotion, believing that the opposition of the public to his Party was solely on the basis of an erroneous perception of the reality of his (fantastic) negotiations.
But as much or more than the average human, Macmillan failed to be aware of and perceive the other reasons for the public's rising opposition - until, it was too late. It was the middle classes who felt most deprived by the national economic policies. While Selwyn Lloyd, the Chancellor of the Exchequer, called for economic restraint, the public - trying to cope with rising unemployment and welfare numbers - demanded expansion. As is typically a problem with elected officials in a democracy, the non-executive Conservative members took up the cry in fear of losing their position in the next election. Expansion became the public, media, and back-bencher's singular answer to all economic woes. The Cabinet members had never been well unified and rumours of resignations began to abound in the media. Precisely when the domestic crisis was at it peak, the EC Council was offering acceptance to Britain's application for membership.

Macmillan had been putting together a strategy for the Conservative Party Conference which was to be held in early October. In general, he was considering replacing some of the Cabinet with younger and/or more aggressive members. A leaked report of this expectation to the newspapers on July 12, forced Macmillan to move earlier. That evening he terminated Selwyn Lloyd, and the following day, Friday, July 13, Macmillan requested the resignation of one third of his Cabinet with only a few hours notice. Lord Kilmuir (the Lord Chancellor), Harold Watkinson (Minister of Defence), John Maclay (Secretary of State for Scotland), Charles Hill (Minister of Housing), David Eccles (Minister of Education) and Lord Mills (Minister without Portfolio) completed the seven dismissals. Other changes included Edward Boyle (Education), Keith Joseph (Housing), William Deedes (Information), Lord Dilhorne (Lord Chancellor) and Peter Thorneycroft (Defence). Rab Butler (Home Secretary) was elevated to Deputy Prime Minister and Henry Brooke was given his former position. Julian Amery, Macmillan's son-in-law, was appointed Minister of Aviation - but excluded from the Cabinet - to reduce suggestions of favouritism. The public had wanted a change of government and Macmillan had provided them with an inexpensive alternative - a coup.
Since the public had been kept ignorant of the strategies, intentions and moves of Macmillan regarding the developments concerning Britain's application for memmbership into the EEC, he could now declare whatever position he wished and the public would not know the difference between a lie and the truth. Later, Jeremy Thorpe would be quoted as having said: "Greater love hath no man than this - that he lay down his friends for his life." Others considered the move similar to the generation exchange which had taken place in the USA administration when John Kennedy had gained the presidency: the older establishment of political analysts and realists had been replaced by the younger naive idealists and pragmatists. The following day, Macmillan wrote to the Queen a letter excusing his dramatic, and undemocratic action, as necessary to prevent a potential "palace revolt" built on "Parliamentary and Party intrigue" - clearly both the politicians and the media had failed to adequately inform the citizens and their contribution in the manipulation which followed depended on that failure. Following the status quo, confusing the truth with half-truths through intellectualization, and, over-dramatizing and looking for the sensationalistic news story - had simply fed the political machine of deception.

On July 17, 1962, two weeks before the decision to decline admission, Macmillan was closely questioned in Parliament in a manner which seemed to now present the issue as one of commitment to the domestic concerns of Britons, or, to the political needs of union with Europe. The public had followed the poorly documented and lengthy negotiations between the British delegation and the ECC Council. During that period, economic problems at home at appeared to escalate. The public could only presume that the negotiations might continue for another year. It wasn't prepared to wait that long on an issue of their opportunity to earn an income and lead a status quo lifestyle. Macmillan began to waiver in his stance.
First, Macmillan used political half-truths to state that he would have to judge the benefits to Britain and the drawbacks by progressing in a "step by step" fashion. Chancellor Adenauer of Germany could be expected to be furious with this apparent untrustworthiness of Britain: promises and confidence followed by a declining commitment and aloofness. Macmillan, hoping to counter this response sent a letter to Adenaur on July 21, stating:
"We have been watching with sympathetic interest the efforts of the Six to move toward greater political union and I can assure you that once the British negotiations are successfully concluded we shall join wholeheartedly in this task."

Adenaur didn't believe the letter: Macmillan was lying to someone; it was better to be cautious than to be a fool. Adenaur publicly accused Macmillan of deception - requesting German support for the British application for membership, and then, withholding its support for political integration. When Adenaur would meet with the Lord Privy Seal, Heath, representing Britain, in October, 1962, he would question how it was that, as Lord Dilhorne would state, it was not possible for one Parliament to bind its successors to upholding an Act of law.
On July 26, with the new Cabinet presented to the Parliament, the opposition introduced a motion of non-confidence and called for an election on the rationalization that the coup only confirmed the declining support of the public as had been shown by recent by-elections. The majority Conservative representation easily won the vote with not one abstention from their membership. As elected representatives facing the potential of a near future election and a hostile public, non wished to risk losing their paycheque. And with the current example of all of Macmillan's opposition from within his party having been replaced, non dared reveal their dissatisfaction now. Yet public opinion regarding the leadership of Macmillan continued to decline in confidence. Polls taken on July 11 had indicated that 47% of those polled were satisfied with his leadership (even though few knew the reality of that leadership), versus 39% dissatisfied. On July 20, only 36% remained accepting of his leadership - with at least 52% expressing dissatisfaction. Public support was now in favour of the Labour Party; the Conservatives knew it and so did the representatives of the ECC Six.

In a report on July 30, the (British) Common Market Negotiating Committee became reluctant to finalizing any agreement in Brussels regarding the admission of Britain. If the Conservatives reached an agreement and gained membership, there was a good chance that they would not be re-elected at home - possibly in the near future. Yet, in the context of the possibility of a stabilization of politics at home, time to persuade - and now accurately inform - the public of the negotiated special-to-Britain benefits of EEC membership, and, sway the voters in favour of the Conservatives - it would be politically constructive to proceed in seeking the maximum benefits possible for Britain, as if membership when offered would be taken. That is, they were advocating leaving all their options open with the possibility of reversing their loyalties and commitments on a moments notice if it became a question of local re-election.
Across the North Sea and through multiple bureaucracies and translations, the EEC members, the British position should have appeared, from what Macmillan had recently said, and, from the changes in the British Cabinet and the polls - that any Agreement signed by the current administration could be overturned by a subsequent, and possibly near future, administration. In reality, the Cabinet agreed with this assessment on July 31 - that "any agreement accepted in Brussels at this stage would be open to effective challenge in Parliament and the meeting of Commonwealth Prime Ministers, which was scheduled for the coming September.

In early August, Lord Dilhorne, the Lord Chancellor, speaking on behalf of Macmillan, spoke in Parliament about how the Treaties of the EC would require the passage of an Act of Parliament for them to become binding; they could just as easily be severed by repealing the Act. These statements would not go unheard in Europe. They were expressions of a commitment, vigorously promoted for months, now being revealed as increasingly weak. This new position by Macmillan and his Government seemed to betray the sacrifices which some EC members (Belgium and Holland) had made for Britain to reduce the antagonism which France had originally expressed against the British application.
Before the EEC Council, Heath, representing Macmillan, now chose to persuade the members that Britain was sincere in its application, that Britain's refusal to accept the terms presented was based on Britain's political relationship with its farmers (voters) and the Commonwealth (political allies) rather than on any economic concerns over agricultural domination by France or Commonwealth exclusion from ECC benefits. While the EEC members had now adopted the proposal to consider admission of Commonwealth nations (as second, or third level members), the British delegation wanted something more specific which they could present to their public and at the September Commonwealth Meeting. Politically this was absurd.

Britain, which had frustrated, dragged out, and sought preferential membership and a total restructuring of the EEC in return for its membership - in what was supposed to be a union of equals working together for the benefit of the union - was now asking for the EEC to sell the British membership to the British and the Commonwealth. They were, without awareness, admitting that they had lost the confidence of their citizens and their allies - that they had "played the game" of political deception, half-truths and manipulation so long that those closest to them no longer believed them.
This had partially come about because during the ECC negotiations, Macmillan and the British politicians and media had not sought to gain an understanding of and an empathy for ECC members as potential economic and political allies and convey that to their dependents. Instead, the historical experience and characterization of the ECC members as political enemies, political laggards, economic competitors, and symbols of hate and frustration to Britons had been exploited to retain an emotional intensity which would sell papers, gain viewership, and gain debating points. Reality, for those addicted to intensity is dull. For too many humans, indoctrination in a lust for intense and destructive emotional reactions and motivations has superceded an awareness and experience of the benefits of balanced constructive emotional expression: contentment, happiness, independence, ....

Part of the unreality had arisen from the very nature of political negotiation: secrecy.
It is not considered "fair" and honest policy for negotiators to reveal the content of their discussions. The content - the discussion, the offers, the threats, the compromises, the deceptions, the commitments - these are considered the "job" of those involved and a justification for their representation of those who pay them. It is the outcome of negotiations which becomes public and on which the concerned parties judge the success or failure of their negotiators and the relevance of the result. For this reason, the content of most political negotiations remains secret for up to thirty years, as it did in this case. By that time, historically, humans usually show little interest in what the reality was - finding it simpler and easier to accept the usual intellectualizations and excuses which have been promoted in the interim.
Of course, this endemic political ignorance enables and promotes the repeat of such activities regardless of whether they have been constructive in the past or not. Each new repetition is treated as a new revelation by a new generation - which simply proves the failure of human culture to learn from its mistakes. If you wish to be truly informed, you must do yur own negotiating. But that requires smaller groups of people, lower densities, controlled level populations. Coping with this conflict between trust and authority is fundamental to constructive political action. Constructively, negotiations have to be direct, honest, straightforward - without deception and manipulation - without "playing the game", or, they will drag on, become bureaucratic, and fail to satisfy.

The British delegation had not negotiated constructively.
They had manipulated considerable special considerations for themselves.
Yet they had manipulated so intensely and for so long that now almost no one trusted that what they said was what they meant, or, what they could deliver. In France, 20% of the population were farmers; they produced more for less than any other ECC member. In Britain, 2% of the population were farmers. In a federation, how could special treatment for 2% be justified to the 20%; and how could it be guaranteed to the 2%. British farmers did not trust Macmillan or the EEC to be able to protect their inefficiency within a Common Market. Conversely, the EEC members believed that the unrealistic stance of the British delegation could be coped with as the Common Agricultural Policy evolved. Asking for a written declaration of what would be before it had been decided that there would be a future was not taken seriously by the EEC Six.
Fundamentally, the EEC had the intent of liberalizing global trade, beginning with the simplification of European trade. Britain was aggravating this intent by requesting special considerations for its own farmers and then asking for these considerations to be extended to all of the Commonwealth nations. Macmillan had promoted the Free Trade Area proposal in 1958; now he was advocating an elitist trade structure which would take the EEC into conflict with the American drive for a global economy. Popular perception of Macmillan's efforts would for decades be lies. Macmillan had not made a genuine effort to bring the Brussel's negotiations to a close quickly. He had "played the game" and extended them as long as possible while manipulating for the most elitist representation he could get. He had not argued in good faith. When he had gained the confidence of the EEC members, he turned his back on them. Macmillan had a majority representation government and as long as 3 years before he could be forced to call an election - he didn't have to turn coward. Rather, it became, for Macmillan, a matter of how to continue to "play the game" and stay within perceived control. He wasn't strong enough spiritually to now change and get real with the public, his allies, and, his new partners. By trying to satisfy everyone, he ended up aggravating everyone.

This entry is not a condemnation of British politics, or a criticism of the EEC, or of the media, or of the public. Look at the political leadership of any human twentieth century nation and you will find similar examples deception and manipulation of public perceptions - that is, if you can get access to the facts, and, if you take the time to do so. The above is not a description of a problem. It is the description of a symptom. Humanity devoid of spirituality is self-serving. Leadership devoid of spirituality is self-service united with power.
Simplistically, reduce the human population by 95%, remove all knowledge of leadership structures and group prejudices, introduce self-sufficiency and hunting-gathering band organization, and enable a steady state population, and, you have heaven on Earth - if the environment hasn't been degraded any further than at present. Realistically, now, provide all humans with the true reality of where they have come from and where they now stand and you can provide them with the awareness that either they must set GLOBAL goals of self-discipline and spiritual direction, or, eventually perish, or wish they had.

1962 - During August 11/12,
The Soviet Union publicly launched Vostok ("East") 3 & 4 which would orbit the Earth simultaneously.
Andrian Nikolayev, in Vostok 3 (64 orbits), and Pavel Popovich, in Vostok 4 (48 orbits) were the cosmonauts.
At one time the two craft were within 5 km of each other.
They landed 193 km and 6 minutes apart.

1962 - On August 17,
Rivalino do Aleuia Mafra, in the small town of Duas Pontes, Brazil, observed two small beings digging a hole near his house. They ran away as he approached them and moments later an object "shaped like a hat and surrounded with a red glow" took off from behind some bushes.

1962 - On August 19,
Rivalino do Aleuia Mafra and his three sons, in the small town of Duas Pontes, Brazil, were awakened by the sound of heavy footsteps. They saw shadows of human shape floating through the house, and they heard voices that threatened them.

1962 - Between August 19-30,
A Wave of UFO Sightings result in numerous observations and some films of the incidents which took place over Sheffield, England.

1962 - On August 20,
Raimundo do Aleuia Mafra, the eldest son of Rivalino (see August 19), in the small town of Duas Pontes, Brazil, went outside to get his father's horse. He saw two balls floating in midair side by side, about a foot apart, and three feet off the ground ... they were big ... one of them was black, with a kind of irregular antenna-like extension and a small tail. The other was black and white, with the same outline ... Both emitted a humming sound ....
He called his father out of the house ... walked towards the objects and stopped about 2 yards away. At that moment, the two big spheres merged into each other. There was only one now, bigger in size, raising dust from the ground, and giving off smoke that darkened the sky. With strange sounds, the large ball crept slowly towards the father, Rivalino. He became surrounded by yellow smoke and disappeared inside it. Raimundo ran after him into the yellow cloud which had an acrid smell. He saw nothing except the yellow mist. He yelled for his father, but there was no answer. Everything was silent again. The yellow smoke dissolved. The spheres were gone. The father was gone.
Raimundo was interviewed by the local police chief, a priest, and a psychiatrist - all of whom concluded that he was telling what he believed to be true. Dr. Giovani Pereira, a local physician, testified that he had seen a disk-shaped object on the same day.

1962 - On August 27,
Mariner 2, a USA 202 kg planetary satellite, was launched by an Atlas Agena B rocket from Cape Canaveral.
After a 109-day journey, it flew past Venus at 24,830 km, providing 35 minutes of instrument scanning time. The surface temperature was recorded as 428 degrees Centigrade, far higher than expected. The cloud layer was unbroken with one spot near the southern end of the terminator 11 degrees cooler. No strong magnetic field or radiation belt were detected.

1962 - On August 29,
A Number of people witnessed, in broad daylight, a veritable ballet dance of unknown aerial craft over the Village of Vauriat, France.

1962 - By September,
The USAF SR-71 Blackbird reconnaissance aircraft had made its first flight.
Flying at more than 80,000 feet (24,000 meters), it was virtually in space and the pictures taken were often better than those obtained from satellites into the mid-80s.

1962 -
In the UN report, "Economic and Social Consequences of Disarmament" it is noted:
"... the world appears to be expending roughly $120,000 million annually on military expenditure. This is equivalent to about 8 to 9 percent of the world's annual output of goods and services or to at least 2/3rds of the entire national income of all the developing countries, and is close to the value of the world's annual exports of all commodities.
Nearly 20 million people now serve in the world's armed forces.
When other persons occupied directly or indirectly in servicing the needs of these armies are added, the total may well amount to over 50 million. ...

About 85% of the world's military outlays is accounted for by 7 countries - Canada, France, mainland China, U.S.S.R., United Kingdom and United States.
Among the major military powers military production is highly concentrated in a few industrial sectors, notably munitions, electrical machinery, instruments and related products, and transportation equipment, including airplanes and missiles."

Conspicuous, although unnoted, is the fact that NON of the skills required for the production of armaments contribute to the individual's self sufficiency. They will not sustain the individual in a time of catastrophe or economic downturn. In addition, those skills differentially required in the armaments industry require specialized training and usually result in higher wages than found commonly in other industries. Hence, workers in armaments industries surrender their capacity for independence and become slaves dependent upon their employers who attract them with the hope of the ability to sustain a materially more opulent lifestyle. Humans have seldom been found who would willingly restrict their material lifestyle to counter the status quo.

1962 - During the year,
AMWAY, an American Multi-Level Marketing (MLM) organization, would expand its operations into Canada.
It had now become an international corporation.
It was demonstrating that such an organization could be introduced into a similar capitalist-based economy successfully, especially if the commercial laws were similar. AMWAY would become an emissary of a style of material-based capitalism to the world. By mid-1994, AMWAY would have 2,000,000 distributors spread over 60 countries and territories.
Many other MLM companies would be started and would attempt international exposure; most would fail.

1962 - In the October issue of "Commentary",
David T. Bazalon, wrote:
"Nothing is more ironic or revealing about our society than the fact that hugely destructive war is a very progressive force in it ... War production is progressive because it is production that would not otherwise have taken place. It is not so widely appreciated, for example, that the civilian standard of living rose during World War II (for Americans)."

1962 - On October 4,
A Cigar-Shaped Machine is sighted over Vauriat, France.

1962 - On October 11,
The USA Trade Expansion Act was passed by Congress.
It enabled President Kennedy to personally use the bargaining power of negotiating a substantial increase in the free exchange of goods across the Atlantic to EC members ... reductions in American tariffs by as much as 50% ... to be employed only if the United Kingdom became a member of the EC. Military and political union of an expanded European Union had suddenly become more important than economic balance.

1962 - In October,
The Cuban Missile Crisis threatens to lead to nuclear war.
Of the choice between Nixon and Kennedy to become President and negotiate a settlement, Kennedy was preferred by the REDS. They made this known to a third candidate running for the election in 1960. Had he not withdrawn and thrown his support behind Kennedy, Nixon would have won. Nixon, more conservative, more intolerant, and more aggressive would have precipitated a nuclear war, few have denied. Unfortunately, Marilyn Monroe was killed before her new awareness could influence Kennedy. It is an indication to all spacebeings of the backwardness of humanity that either of the more popular of 3 choices of leadership of one of Earth's largest nations would bring humanity to the brink of self-annihilation.
Ironically, as soon as Kennedy had entered the White House, in January, 1961, he had ordered a new and expanded emphasis on the armed forces essentially changing a defensive force into an offensive one. This had eventually led to Krushchev ordering medium-range missiles and nuclear-capable bombers to be secretly based in Cuba.

Almost pitiful because of the mass ignorance expressed, North American civil defense programs followed naive assumptions about the true nature of the destructiveness and possibility of survival of and from a hydrogen bomb attack. A 15 minute warning was expected. In patriotism and hysteria, duck-and-cover drills conditioned schoolchildren and workers to expect terror and that the flimsiest of barriers might actually save their lives from a nuclear bomb blast and its attendant firestorm and destruction. Shelters were constructed with the expectation that after a 2 week hibernation, the outside would be safe to emerge to. Scientists knew that the likely effects of fallout after a major attack would remain deadly for as long as 14 months, after which an emergence to a world rampant with disease and anarchy, and endangered food and water supplies was likely. Politicians proudly continued to proclaim that God had given the limitless power of the atom to America, a claim made since 1945, and therefore, God would see America through the crisis.
During this period, the Soviets had 5 diesel-electric submarines operating in the western Atlantic-Caribbean area. The Soviets had previously provided Cuba with anti-aircraft guns, surface-to-air missiles, MiG fighter aircraft, and associated radars. They were now delivering bombers and medium-range ballistic missiles. The USA imposed a quarantine on Cuba to halt such shipments beginning on October 22. Soviet submarines in the area were ordered to surface for identification by the use of signal charges.

Two days later, Krushchev requested a meeting with William E. Knox, the president of Westinghouse International, who was in Moscow. He stated that stopping and searching Soviet merchant ships on the high seas "would be piracy", and that "the United States could stop and search one maybe two, but if we did, he would instruct his submarines to sink the American naval vessels."
On the morning of October 27, USA Secretary of Defense Robert S. McNamara advised President Kennedy that 2 Soviet freighters were within miles of the USA quarantine line, at which time they would be intercepted by US warships. "Then," according to Attorney General Robert Kennedy, "came the disturbing Navy report that a Russian submarine had moved into position between the two ships." The decision was made at the White House to have the Navy signal the submarine by sonar to surface and identify itself. If the submarine refused, signal explosives would be used. Robert Kennedy recalled: "I think these few minutes were the time of gravest concern for the President. Was the world on the brink of a holocaust? Was it our error? A mistake? Was there something further that should have been done? Or not done? ... I heard the President say: 'Isn't there some way we can avoid having our first exchange with a Russian submarine - almost anything but that?'"

Preparations were made to engage the submarine if it refused to surface and be identified.
A messenger brought word that the Soviet freighters had stopped. That aspect of the crisis was over. All 5 Soviet submarines in the western Atlantic and Cuban areas were detected by USA anti-submarine forces, harassed, and forced to the surface for identification, sometimes after lengthy efforts. A 6th was detected north of the Azores, refuelling - it had apparently been returning to the Soviet Union at the time of the crisis. The others were all Foxtrot Class submarines - long-range submarines. They were over 300 feet (91.5 m.) long, 24 foot, 7 in. (7.5 m.) wide and had a draft of 20 feet (6.1 m.). Powered by 3 diesel engines, 3 electric engines and having 3 shafts with 6 bladed propellers - they had a surface speed of 16 knots; slightly slower when submerged. They carried a crew of 78 and an armament of 22 torpedoes. Submerged performance was 7 days at low speed and their range was 20,000 nautical miles. No aggressive charges were used by the USA during the search and identify hunt which was conducted almost entirely during daylight hours for photographic purposes. It was a pseudo-war instance.
The Soviet submarines sought to evade detection by short bursts of speed, radical maneuvering including backing down and stopping, taking advantage of thermal layers, turning into the wakes of ASW ships, and releasing "slugs" (bubbles) of air and acoustic decoys. The submarines made extensive use of radar, which in wartime would have increased the probability of their detection. The Captains clearly understood that they were not in a position of lethal attack. They relied extensively on electronic countermeasures to detect USA anti-submarine ships and aircraft. Extensive snorkeling also occurred with durations of 1/2 to 11 hours detected by USA forces, more frequent and longer than would have been attempted in wartime. Even with large numbers of ships and aircraft available, unrestricted use of communications and a lack of counter-attacks by their prey, USA anti-submarine forces found it difficult to track down and force identification of the Soviet submarines. Further, the signatures of the Soviet ships were found to be significantly different than what had been expected. In addition, the Soviets made no attempt to deploy their 30 nuclear-propelled and ballistic missile armed submarines into the area during the crisis.

Much would be concluded after the "game" was over; depending upon the degree of your spiritual strength of perception you might have concluded any of the following:
The USA was willing to use conventional weapons against the USSR in the West; The USA conventional strategic weapons could overwhelm those of the USSR; The Soviet Navy was unable to support an overseas adventure; The USA was willing to risk annihilation rather than risk economic containment; The USA leaders were willing to risk annihilation to maintain their pride; The USSR leadership were not willing to risk a nuclear war for Cuban liberty; The USSR sub capability was adequate to mount a successful pre-emptive strike; The USA and the USSR did not understood, trust, or be truthful to each other; Humanity was incessantly preoccupied with defending against fears rather than working in harmony.

1962 - In the November issue of "Comentary"
David T. Bazelon wrote:
"Why is war so wonderful?
Because it creates artificial demand ... the only kind of artificial demand, moreover, that does not raise any political issues: war, and only war, solves the problem of inventory."

1962 - During November 13-18,
C.D. Jackson and R.E. Hohmann presented a paper at the 17th Annual Meeting and Space Flight Exposition of the American Rocket Society in Los Angeles. It was titled "An Historic Report On Life In Space: Tesla, Marconi, Todd."
They pointed out that during the years 1899 to 1924, three experimental scientists - Nikola Tesla, Guglielmo Marconi, and David Todd (each working independently) - observed laboratory data and related phenomena which suggested the possibility that they were monitoring interplanetary communications. During the same period, the Russian theorist Konstantin Tsiolkovsky deduced a model of an intelligence existing independently of terrestrial influence.
Tesla, Marconi, and Todd did not know that they were working with identical data, nor did they know that these data corroborated, in a quantitative manner, the theoretical model built by Tsiolkovsky. The investigations and experimental data of Tesla, Marconi, and Todd were presented. The data were first assembled in a historical model (1899 to 1924), then shown to be the natural complement of a current theoretical model (1959 to 1962), and finally recommended for assembly into a quantitative model according to the theoretical outline described by Tsiolkowsky.

1962 - By late year,
The Vietcong had regained the military initiative in South Vietnam.
Now accustomed to the American helicopters, they learned to bring down the slow, clumsy aircraft, and, at other times, to hide until after the air-strike and then ambush the landed troops. As losses mounted, Diem instructed his commanders to rely more on air strikes than troop involvements - resulting in higher civilian casualties. Men, women and children were "sacrificed" with little justification. Whole villages were demolished on the suspicion that they harboured several Vietcong. Diem and Harkins vigorously promoted the use of napalm, a greasy petroleum substance ignited and sprayed over villages and onto suspected and obvious Vietcong. You could not wipe off or wash off napalm; victims would be burned alive or disfigured horribly. The Generals wanted subservience of the Vietnamese through an imposition of fear.

1962 - By December,
Frank B. Salisbury of Colorado State University had authored an article published in "Science" entitled
"Martian Biology: Accumulating Evidence Favours the Theory of Life On Mars, But We Can Expect Surprises."
An abstract of it stated:

"Of all the proposals put forth to account for observed Martian phenomena, the idea of life on Mars seems to be the most tenable. And if this idea is accepted, we are immediately drawn to the conclusion that this life is a very well-adapted and flourishing one. The suggested criteria seem to eliminate all the known terrestrial life forms, but of all these forms, a higher plant would require the least modification in order to meet the criteria. The basic shape of the leaf of a higher plant seems suited to conditions on Mars, but the lower gravity might well result in some interesting modifications in morphology. Some life forms on Mars might resemble our own higher plants, but we should be prepared to encounter some interesting surprises in biochemistry.
In light of the thriving nature of Martian organisms, we should expect to see the operation of many principles of dynamic ecology among them, surely, food chains and elemental cycles. A succession in the development of life forms must occur (was the new area in 1954 an example of plant succession in the desert or of an organized reclamation project?). What about intelligence? If plantlike organisms have solved the problem of growth in the Martian environment so well, one might surely expect to find mobile forms comparable to our animals that feed on plants. And from there it is but one more step (granted a big one) to intelligent beings.
In view of the evidence, we should at least try to keep our minds open so that we could survive the initial shock of encountering them. A manned landing could solve all the problems posed in this article, but even telescopic observations from a satellite, especially one orbiting Mars, could provide us with extremely valuable data."

1962 - During December,
The Lowestoft Sightings are observed over East Anglia, England.
Newspaper accounts are carried in the Eastern Daily Press on December 5, 10, 20, 27, and 28.

1962 - On Sunday, December 23,
The first group of Bay of Pigs invasion prisoners returns to the U.S.A., arriving at Homestead Air Force Base, Florida. Their freedom has been negotiated by Robert Kennedy in return for $53 million of food, 500 tractors and drugs demanded by Castro. President Kennedy accepted the invasion force's flag and promised the survivors in front of 40,000 people: "I can assure you that this flag will be returned to this Brigade in a free Havana." 1,200 prisoners were exchanged. Including the cost of the invasion, the dollar cost alone to the USA was near $85,000 per prisoner in 1962 dollars. How much benefit could have been provided to Americans with improved educational and health plans.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX
Memory Stimulators.
1963 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
Warning from Space; Wives and Lovers; America, America; Call Me Bwana; Cleopatra; Dr. Strangelove; The Birds; The Great Escape; 55 Days at Peking; The Raven; The Nutty Professor; The Cardinal; From Russia with Love; Flipper; Twilight of Honour; Children of the Damned; Cairo

Songs : Sugar Shack; He's So Fine; Hey, Paula; Blue Velvet; Louie, Louie; Sukiyaki; My Boyfriend's Back; I Will Follow Him; Walk Like A Man; It' My Party; Surf City; Deep Purple; Stay; Our Day Will Come; Ring Of Fire; Detroit City; Act Naturally; Abilene; Sweet Dreams of You; Mountain Of Love; Guilty.
General News :

Consumer Price Index: 91.7
Joe Valachi provided evidence against the Cosa Nostra in the U.S.A..
The Beatles, a 4-member music group, was a big hit in Britain.
Bob Dylan (Zimmerman) was gaining popularity w/social protest songs.
Valentina Tereshkova, a U.S.S.R. cosmonaut, became the first woman in space.
--- She orbited the earth 48 times with cosmonaut Col. Valeri Bykovsky.
Pope John XXIII died in Vatican City after beginning the ecumenical movement to bring Protestants and Catholics together.
Lester B. Pearson, became the Prime Minister of Canada with a minority Liberal government in April.
Camping out and moving to the cities were increasing trends through the 1960's.
"We shall overcome" became the theme song for the civil rights movement of the Rev. Martin Luther King who made his "I have a dream ..." speech in Washington.
TCA Flight 831, Canada's worst plane crash, > all 111 passengers killed.
The Canadian Medical Association got the Federal Government to launch a $400,000. campaign to curb smoking among the young.
Between 1961 and 1963, 160,000 Vietnamese civilians died in the Vietnam war.

1963 - By this year
Popular music became inescapable as a medium throughout most of North America.
Transistor radios carried the sounds everywhere. Music, as it always had, continued to be a cultural conditioning medium. In particular, the use of melodies which carried a beat equal to or a multiple of the human heartbeat proved to be hypnotic in attraction. Any nature of lyrics infused into such melodies, more often became unconscious conditioning mechanisms than chosen statements of belief. It became less and less unusual to find a person humming the melody to a song, the lyrics of which offended them when the meaning was consciously drawn to their attention. There would be instances in which a human would be found humming and singing a popular song, completely oblivious to the meaning of the words being sung. The potential deception of music is that if the listener does not listen with conscious awareness to the attached word meanings, and, rationally utilize selectivity, the habit-forming part of the human mind will adopt everything heard as truthful, real, acceptable.

Themes in popular music would frequently applaud on irresponsible sexual relationships, possessive relationships, alcohol and drug use, rebelliousness to the status quo, whining grief, obsessiveness and self-indulgence. Political and cultural leadership essentially refused to set or acknowledge standards for the public media on the excuse of freedom of individual expression backed by the increasing reality that such media promotion yielded millions of dollars in profits. The industry was most effective in conditioning the political and social responses of young adults into near mob-like reactions in which many of the participants were swept along by momentum rather than by determined choice. The hazard was that humans could be encouraged by such a medium to socially and politically demand simple solutions to complex problems, effectively placing a bandaid on a traumatic injury, with the possible outcome of greater infection and necessary amputation. The growing response to problems by North American youth would be denial, intolerance, passivity, reactivity, and acting out. ALL of these approaches intensified the retreat from true spiritual alternatives.

1963 - During January,
Britain's Application to join the EEC is rejected when French President Charles de Gaulle uses his veto. French Minister of Agriculture, Edgar Pisani comments to the British Minister of Agriculture, Christopher Soames, only 48 hours before de Gaule's press conference:
"(translated from the French)
My friend. It is very simple. Now, with six (members), there are 5 chickens and one rooster. If you (Britain) join (the other nations), there will be seven or eight chickens. But there will be two roosters. Such is not a good outcome."

1963 - In the February issue of
"Engineering Science", Solomon W. Golomb of the Jet Propulsion Lab (JPL), California Institute of Technology (Caltech) authored an article:
"When is Extra-Terrestrial Life Interesting?" His abstract follows:

"Life is defined as a systems concept which is composed of organisms capable of growth and replication. The different components of the system may differ from one celestial body to another, but this will make it more possible for life to occur elsewhere. So it appears that future astronauts will have to look for other replicating systems based on chemicals other than nucleic acids. The question of biological contamination of other planets is discussed, but it is thought that the biological contamination of the Earth by extraterrestrial organisms is more serious. If a foreign replicating system were introduced on Earth, and if it proved to be better competitor for the molecular substrate need for growth and replication, then the nucleic acid system may become extinct. This problem is of considerable danger to life on Earth, and a great deal of thought should be given to it."

1963 - During the year,
Walter M. Hollister submits his dissertation to M.I.T., Cambridge, MA, titled:
"Mission for manned expedition to Mars".

1963 -
Renato Albanesi reports communication between ET's and Eugenio Siragusa was by mental telepathy.

1963 - During the year,
J.I. Rodale showed that a mother plant did not have to be growing near children for them to benefit from her "protection". The mother could apparently be in the next city, the next country, across the ocean, or anywhere on Earth. This suggests that plants use a form of communication, like telepathy, which can be carried on between two known entities at almost limitless distances. This concept serves to emphasize that advanced plant intelligences may represent a higher form of spiritual lifeform than more ego dominated lifeforms such as animals and humanity.

1963 - In March,
Jean Lombard, a geologist, in a preface to Louis Kervan's book, "Natural Transmutations", wrote:
"The true workers of science, who are always ready to welcome new suggestions, sometimes ask themselves if the greatest obstacle to the progress of science is not bad memory on the part of the scholars; they wish to remind the latter that some of their predecessors were burnt at the stake because of proposed "interpretations" which have now become foremost truths. If pioneers of science were still being burnt, I would not give much for Louis Kervan's skin."

1963 - In the May issue of
"Planetary and Space Science", Carl Sagan of the University of California, Berkeley, wrote an article:
"Direct Contact Among Galactic Civilizations by Relativistic Interstellar Spaceflight".
An abstract noted:
"An estimate of such civilizations (in this galaxy), based on the number of poorly known parameters ... is 10 to the power of 6. The most probable distance to the nearest such civilization is several hundred light-years. Interstellar spaceflight at relativistic velocities is found to have several advantages over electromagnetic communications with these communities. Some of the technical problems involved in the construction of starships with relativistic velocities are discussed. It is concluded that with nuclear staging, fusion reactors, and the Bussart interstellar ramjet, no fundamental energetic problems exist for relativistic interstellar spaceflight. It is shown to be a statistical likelihood that Earth was visited by an advanced extraterrestrial civilization at least once during historical times."

1963 -
Wilbert B. Smith, head of Canada's "Project Magnet" 2-year study of UFO's, describes his communications with intelligences claiming to be extra-terrestrial and laboratory experiments suggested by these entities that confirmed the validity of their alien science. There is a transcript of a tape recorded speech delivered in Ottawa, Canada, on Mar 31, 1958, which is made public now.

1963 - On May 5,
J. Oro, presented "Experimental Organic Cosmochemistry, the Formation of Biochemical Compounds" at the Proc. Lunar and Planetary Exploration Colloquium. Parts of his abstract follows:
"Simple combinations of carbon, nitrogen, oxygen and hydrogen are important constituents of relatively cool star atmospheres, interstellar space, comets and cold planetary atmospheres. ... Model experiments involving the use of such simple compounds as water, ammonia, hydroxylamine, hydrazine, hydrogen cyanide, formaldehyde and cetaldehyde have led to the synthesis (in the University of Houston laboratory) of hydroxyl acids, amino acids, and amino amides, including glycolic acid, lactic acid, glycine, glycinamide, alanine, B-alanine, aspartic acid, valine,and lysine; monosaacharides, including ribose and 2-deoxyribose; purines and pyrimidines, including adenine, guanine and uracil; purine intermediates, including 4-aminoimidazole-5-carboxamide, 4-aminoimidazole-5-carboxamidine and formic acid; homo- and heteropolypeptides; and other compounds of biological significance. ..."

In other words, it was possible with simple combinations of basic physical elements to produce complex biochemicals which are necessary to terrestrial lifeforms. Such lifeforms may thus exist, or be made to exist, elsewhere in the universe.

1963 - During the Spring,
Professor Yves Rocard of the College de France, head of the physics department of the prestigious Ecole Normale Superieure, published his book on dowsing. Still untranslated to English by 1973, his work had been translated and put to use in the Soviet Union by that date. There, Soviet geologists began using dowsing effectively to locate minerals from airplanes and helicopters and to locate underground archaeological artifacts.

1963 - On May 15,
"Formation of Adenine by Electron Irradiation of Methane, Ammonia, and Water", was the title of a report written by C. Ponnamperuma, R.M. Lemmon, R. Mariner and M. Calvin. Their investigation of the possibility of a synthesis of heterocyclic bases from mixtures of primitive gases established that:
1. adenine is indeed a product of electron irradiation of the noted gases; 2. there is an inverse relationship between the amount of adenine synthesis and the amount of hydrogen gas present; and 3. of the 5 nucleic acid bases, adenine is the one most readily synthesized under prebiotic conditions.

1963 - On May 16,
A Mercury spacecraft with astronaut Cooper aboard reported strange voices picked up on special frequency and while passing over Perth, Australia, saw a large UFO also observed by the checking station on Earth. It completed 22 orbits.

1963 - On May 19,
R. Dean Johnson, priest-in-charge of "All Souls Episcopal Church" in Waukegan, Michigan, reports observing a low-flying drum-shaped UFO for 15-20 minutes.

1963 - On June 11,
Thich Quang Duc, a Buddhist Monk, expresses great opposition to the leadership of Diem over South Vietnam by committing suicide by fire on a Saigon street. Sensitive to the potential media value of drawing media attention to their cause, the Buddhist leadership had tipped foreign newsmen to the event, and pictures would soon appear in newspapers and on televisions around the globe. Others would follow Duc's example.
The incident could have been foreseen.
The Diem administration, with its authoritarian and paranoid approach had rejected any suggested show of defiance. Buddhist leaders had been increasingly concerned over the abuses of both the Diem government and the American presence. Abuse of bureaucracy - greed, laziness, intolerance, patronage and bribes - were becoming rampant. Abuses of military occupation - assaults, murders, rapes, drug and prostitution trade - were increasing. Family solidarity was being destroyed by the relocation of families and the pitting of family member against family member for survival. Buddhism taught that the honourable person does the morally right thing and will be divinely judged for the wrongs he or she has participated in. More and more Vietnamese simply wanted the war to stop. The Buddhists had been promoting a form of conscientious objection amongst the Vietnamese at a time when Diem was trying to further expand his military presence; some troops were simply leaving service following morally repugnant experiences: to Diem these actions constituted support for the Vietcong.

1963 - During the year,
USS Thresher, a new, fast, attack, USA nuclear-powered submarine, capable of deep diving, broke up while underwater 220 miles east of Boston. Its captain, Lt. Commander John W. Harvey, was credited with over 100,000 miles of undersea travel aboard American nuclear submarines and had been under the Arctic cap at least twice, aboard "Nautilus". Thresher sank in 1,400 fathoms (8,400 feet) of water and resulted in a crew loss of 129 men. It was the worst recorded submarine disaster in American history.
It was the fastest-moving, deepest-diving and most silent-running submarine which the US Navy had ever had. The Thresher had been at the Portsmouth harbour for renovations after 2 years of service and this would be its first test depth dive. "Skylark", a rescue vessel, accompanied it. 17 civilian workmen were aboard to check equipment they had installed or repaired. It was the first time in 9 months that the ship or the crew had been submerged.

About 30 miles southeast of Portsmouth, the "Thresher" took two shallow, periscope depth tentative dives to determine if the submarine was watertight and steering properly. Surfacing in the late afternoon, the officers made ready for the expected crucial test: a dive to its maximum test depth. The submarine dived again and began working down from one plateau depth to the next through the night. At 9:00 A.M. the next morning, Harvey ordered the submarine down to its test depth. The message was broadcast to Skylark : "I am diving." Skylark was informed that Thresher would surface in 6 hours. At 9:17, Harvey told the crew of Skylark that Thresher was "approaching test depth," which was expected to be 500 feet. The last transmission, minutes later, was garbled.
Six hours later, Thresher did not surface and Skylark called Portsmouth base.
The ocean had been heavy, overcast with a rough sea, for much of the period. Search planes and other ships joined the search and at nightfall an oil slip, bits of cork insulation, gloves and other floating debris, were found. Thresher was presumed lost. Among the crew:
Lt. Commander: John W. Harvey Machinist's Mate: Donald McCord Machinist's Mate: Dick Podwell Fire Control Technician: Charles Wiggins Engineman: Billy Klier and many others

It was later found that many of the valves on the ship had been installed with reverse-to-normal controls requiring that the operator turn open the valve in the direction opposite to what was usual. Under the strain of a crisis, it was suggested, members of the crew may have oriented the ship for a critical dive at a time when reduced depth was called for. In such a situation, hull splitting due to excessive exterior water pressure could have confounded the situation in that even a small leak, at substantial depth, would quickly raise the temperature of the air within the hull. Further, halting a downward momentum and changing it to an upward plane would have required a highly coordinated effort and/or a period of time. Other production deficiencies were pointed out in the investigation which followed.

Several obvious questions should have been asked, such as: 1. Why were reverse-to-normal operation valves not removed beforehand?; 2. Why was a crew, uncoordinated by 9 months of waiting, rushed?; 3. Why take a possible failure dive in rescue inaccessible depths?; 4. Why force a 24-hour test-weary crew into a hazardous procedure?; 5. Why not maintain communication throughout a crucial testing period?; 6. Why was a crucial test undertaken in a heavy sea?

Any of these factors could have individually resulted in the test failure.
Clearly, greed, pride and overintellectualization all played an unfortunate yet human part in this catastrophe. Greed resulted in the use of cheaper, specifications-incorrect parts. Pride encouraged overconfidence in the crew, a need to quickly set records, and overconfidence in the machinery. Overintellectualization enabled the designers and officers involved to underestimate the impact which each of the above-mentioned factors could make, plus others. In high technology, it is easy to theorize as to how or why a variation or "improvement" should work. In reality, only repeated relevant successful experience, or clean meditation provides dependable answers and guidance. neither were used here.

1963 - On June 14,
"Vostok ("East") 5", completes an 81-orbit, 119 hours and 6 minutes publicized flight for the USSR with Valery Bykovsky as cosmonaut. It will remain a public record for more than 2 years.

1963 - On June 16,
Valentina Tereshkova, aged 26, in "Vostok ("East") 6" becomes the first publicized woman-in-space.
She makes a 48-orbit, 70 hour and 50 minute flight in tandem with Bykovsky. Tereshkova had been substituted at the last minute for the first-choice woman, who had become indisposed. She experienced some disorientation and spacesickness on her return.

1963 - During the year,
The only legal sweepstakes in the USA began operating, in the state of New Hampshire.
Twice a year, on the basis of races at Rockingham Park, the state offered a top prize of $50,000.
The lottery was intended to provide several million painlessly raised dollars each year for the schools.

This became the start of a rising dependency among North Americans on the prospect of "luck".
In humans, the psychology of Luck is such that it fundamentally opposes spiritual values including positive self-esteem and positive self-direction. The person who depends on luck affirms that the culture in which he/she lives does not provide a fair potential for economic support, recovery, or expansion on the basis of participation. Work, whether voluntary or paid, has been relegated to a level of a subsistence norm where it has become necessary in order to survive, not particularly enjoyable and does not hold an image of positive expectancy indicative of conventional capitalism. Work may or may not be seen as including risk without acknowledgement in the form of compensation.
In a materialistic society, lack of compensation believed fair for the degree of risk and sacrifice involved promotes anarchy in which individuals become lax in responsibility, productivity, and flexibility. Cultural leadership which institutionalizes "gambling" is a leadership which directs its population to become increasingly self-centred, irresponsible, undependable. Enterprising activities are likely to drop in frequency , or, to be replaced with fraudulent activities in which the benefit to the customer is, in reality, very secondary to the profit of the so-called entrepreneur. Legalized gambling, accepted openly, at the local and national levels conditions a population to become dependent, rather than self-directed.

1963 - By July,
"Project Redlight" had begun near USA Nellis AFB and was secretly being conducted at "Area 51", also called Groom Lake. The project involved the flight testing of a UFO which had been shipped from Edwards AFB. Information regarding the existence of the project was sent to the MUFON Journal by a radio maintenance engineer at Nevada's AEC. The craft flew silently, was about 20 to 30 feet in diameter and had neither wings nor tail.

1963 - During the year,
A Family of Almas (Wild Men) are seen by a doctor visiting the Altai mountains.
It consists of a male and female and a single infant. He is told of another sighting of a male almas in the area, carrying an infant.

1963 - On August 3,
On August 3, The Limited Test Ban Treaty, went into effect: all future atomic weapons tests were to be fired underground. Theoretically safe -- venting, seepage, cratering, fault lines, underground springs and other realities led to further environmental contamination. The U.S.A. had squeezed 80 tests into the previous 2 years; most had been underground. The problems were evident. The treaty was good public relations to placate the concerned but uninformed masses.

1963 - In mid-August,
A USSR Hotel Class nuclear powered, nuclear ballistic missile submarine was "accidentally lost" after intercepting a news report on Moscow radio which translated to say "launch all missiles". It was within target range of Washington, D.C. The unusual new report concerned a dog which had been found infected with a fatal virus. It had been cremated to ensure the disease did not spread. Pre-arranged codewords had been given to the Commander of the sub who held the final "key" to arm the missiles. Pre-selected targets had been designated for each geographical segment of the undersea tour.
A BLOND who was working as a senior technician on the crew sabotaged the ship resulting in a major steam leakage from the turbines and twin reactors just before the Commander was going to sound the launch alarm. In case of a potential "meltdown" of the nuclear cores, the Strategy defined by the Defense Ministry was that the sub would descend to a depth of 600 feet until the problem was rectified or the ship disintegrated. This was expected to muffle the effects, if a disaster occurred and hide the evidence. Because there had been no contact between the Hotel and the USSR for at least 10 days, the submarine was never found. It is on the ocean floor in the Atlantic Ocean at a depth of 1610 feet.
The sabotage ensured that the sub sank fast enough to just miss a full meltdown.
That plus implosion, silt, depth, lack of current and remoteness of site have ensured minimal radiation leakage. All documentation relating to this particular Hotel Class sub was destroyed and the relatives of the crew (all crew were to remain unmarried until they finished their submarine duty) were told that the submarine had been lost in a critically important and secret training accident. A special communication capability used by the BLONDs enabled the saboteur to relay the incident description, while it was in progress, to BLONDs in an underground Earth base. Neither the Soviet Union nor the USA ever discovered the true facts of the incident. Even if they had, who would admit it?

1963 -
The Soviet MiG-25 (Mikoyan Gurevich design bureau) fighter jet aircraft is designed and built.
It demonstrates the Russian design philosophy of strength, simplicity and ease of repair.
While Americans find they cannot use steel for their high-speed aircraft and must rely on more expensive titanium alloys, the Soviets develop advanced welding techniques which allow them the steel alternative. Its radar uses vacuum tubes for solid-state alternatives are not yet sufficiently developed to be reliable. In 20 years, the MiG-25 would still be in service and be highly maneuverable and dependable at the limits of its performance.

An indication of Soviet design philosophy, the Soviet Union had for some time now had launch vehicles capable of sending 20 ton payloads into space to destinations including the Moon. Such launch vehicles could now be used in cold or heat, in snow blizzards or rainstorms. American capabilities paled by comparison.

1963 - On August 21,
Ngo Dinh Nhu, brother of President Diem, directed his American-trained Special Forces to carry out massive raids against Buddhists in Hue, Saigon, and other cities, ransacking the temples and arresting 1,400 Buddhists.
A frail, paranoid and self-obsessed man, he and his brother controlled the Vietnamese military as they desired. Nhu's wife became known as the "Dragon Lady" for her resemblance to a North American cartoon caricature, her increasing spokemanship for the family and her ambitious, ruthless attitude towards the Vietnamese people. Together, the government had prohibited all forms of public gatherings, weddings and funerals included, unless approved by the government. Rigorous censorship was applied to anything written, Vietnamese or American.

Reporting evidence that Nhu was planning the execution of the Buddhists as well as discussing with Hanoi a sellout of the independence of South Vietnam, some Vietnamese Generals inquired of the USA how it would respond if they enacted a coup against Diem and Nhu. On August 24, the Vietnamese Generals were given assurances, by the CIA, that the USA would not assist a coup, but that it would assist a new government that appeared to be strong. The Generals could then not secure support of the key army units in Saigon, who distrusted the American position. On August 31, the coup was cancelled.
Early in September, proposals for a negotiated settlement between North and South Vietnam were put forward. In return for the removal of American troops and the resumption of north-south trade, Hanoi agreed to a neutralized South Vietnam in which Diem would be permitted to preside over a coalition government. Diem was cautiously positive. France promoted the concept. A USA advisor complicated the issue by suggesting its withdrawal from Vietnam on the withdrawal of the U.S.S.R. influence from Cuba. The Kennedy administration turned down the consideration and sent officials to Vietnam to assess the situation.

1963 - On August 28,
The Reverend Dr. Martin Luther King and 200,000 supporters of more uniform and expanded civil rights participate in a non-violent demonstration in Washington, D.C., U.S.A.. The march is described by commentators as disciplined, dignified, determined. It reaffirms the proclamation given by former President Abraham Lincoln in 1863 "that all men are equal". Many times during the march, the participants sang "We shall overcome", and in his speech, Dr. King states: "Let freedom rein ... I have a dream ... Free at last." Mr. King met with President John F. Kennedy and Vice-President Lyndon Johnson. In 1964, a new Civil Rights Bill would be passed into law by the U.S.A. government. The effectiveness of the movement over the next decades would be thwarted by increased civil drug use leading to increased criminality, poverty, and despair. Both the President and Dr. King would be separately assassinated.

1963 - On August 31,
The U.S. National Security Council - minus the President (Kennedy) hold a session regarding policy making for southeast Asia. With no long-term policies or insight into the conflict in Vietnam, many possible options have been lost by past positions taken.
The most radical position advanced at the meeting was that given by Paul M. Kattenburg, a 39-year-old diplomat who headed the "Vietnam Interdepartmental Working Group". He proposed disengagement - thereby, becoming the first official on record in a high-level Vietnam policy meeting to pursue to its logical conclusion the analysis that the war effort was irretrievable, either with or without President Diem. Representatives of the military and intelligence communities became increasingly obsessed with the need for victory and the belief that a major offensive was required.

1963 - During September,
The Chinese begin building a road through the jungles and mountains of northern Laos as a barrier between the two countries. Although unknown for almost a decade, the purpose of the road was to ensure that the advancing North Vietnamese would not overtake all of Indochina. Up to 20,000 soldiers, protected by Chinese antiaircraft batteries, had been involved in the project on the territory of another sovereign nation. President Souvanna of Laos often asserted to the Americans that it was built against Laotian wishes; the Chinese declared that it was authorized by prior consent. No supplies ever went down the road which sat on the flank of the advancing North Vietnamese, and for that reason, the Americans never bombed it.

1963 - In September,
"The Rockefeller Report on the Americas" was delivered to President Nixon.
Written by Nelson Rockefeller and chief aides James M. Cannon, Hugh Morrow, and William Butler, a vice-president of the Chase Manhattan Bank. The report suggested that trade preferences be given to Latin American nations to help limit the "forces of anarchy, terror and subversion" which were loose in the Americas. The report lamented the decrease in Latin American military assistance from a level of $80.7 million in the last year of the Eisenhower Administration to $21.4 million for fiscal 1970 and urged the U.S.A. to increase the level of military assistance set aside for both training security forces and for providing military assistance to existing governments. At the same time, the report warned of the "appeal to the new military, on a theoretical level, of "Marxism".
In general, Nelson Rockefeller supported military assistance which would safeguard the existing free-enterprise system and in which U.S.A. business could thrive which maintained the poverty and enslavement of the peasants. Philanthropy of the father's generation of Rockefellers provided a priceless reputation to the Rockefellers as being considered highly capable in the use of power over public affairs: as having a special competence for promoting the public interest. This allowed the Rockefellers to operate as if that gave them the license to ignore and override any opposition, to use their power to influence public officials, and to reject valid and popular alternatives to their own plans. What the public had been lulled to forget was that the Rockefeller fortune had been built on the ruthless self-interest which had led to the formation of Standard Oil over the abuse and murder of smaller operators who got in the way.
This ethic would again arise in their support for the Bilderbergers, in which they would again operate as if they believed that when special interests, including themselves, benefited from projects, the benefits that would trickle down to the public would be sufficient justification for those projects. It was not in the public interest to finance terror campaigns demanding huge increases in U.S. military spending, when the U.S.A. already maintained military superiority. Paternalism and contempt repeatedly marked the defense of the Rockefeller brothers' favoured projects.

1963 - On September 29,
A Soviet November Class nuclear powered submarine, commanded by Captain 2nd Rank Yu.A. Sysoyev, surfaced precisely at the North Pole. Those men not on watch went out onto the ice, and the Soviet flag and naval ensign were raised. The crew engaged in sports on the ice. Sysoyev was awarded the "Hero of the Soviet Union" medal on his return home. As is often the case, humans whose efforts could be manipulated for personal prestige by the political leaders of their nations received social achievement awards; those who achieved as great an exploit without the cameras and publicity often received little more than their daily orders.

1963 - By October,
Pierre Baranger, a professor and director of the laboratory of organic chemistry at the Ecole Polytechnique in Paris, France, had proven that in the germinations of leguminous seeds in a manganese salt solution, manganese disappeared and iron appeared in its place. Experimenting further, he discovered that a whole web of complexities related to the transmutations of elements in seeds, including the time of their germination, the type of light involved, even the exact phase of the moon.

1963 - During the year,
"MK-Ultra Subproject 142" was initiated as "a small biological program of electrical brain stimulation" involving some new approaches to the subject ... The reason for separating this work financially from the other efforts ... is to allow it to engage in some very practical experiments at some point in the work which would present security problems if this effort were to be handled in the usual way. Some of the uses proposed for these particular animals would involve possible delivery systems ... or for direct executive action type operations as distinguished from the eavesdropping application." In other words, the ability to turn self and other species into guided bombs or similar.

1963 - During this year,
The word "Scam" would enter the English language.
Presumed to be derived from the carnival lifestyle, it would carry the meaning of a dishonest scheme or swindle as well as the actions of cheating, defrauding and swindling. This will contribute to a watershed in the moral norms of the North American and other industrialized societies. It would take 30 years before scamming would become a viable, popular, sanctioned, capital acquisition activity. Known only in the back alleys, ghettos, penal institutions, and, to hawkers in the beginning - it would move up the scale of social wealth and respectability. It would always be utilized by those who have not lost their spiritual strength - they had forgotten what it was and where they put it. A liar, thief, or murderer knows what they have done and do so in the full awareness of their hurtfullness and indignity to the victim; a person who operates a scam remains in denial of the pain they cause others and conversely take great pleasure from their ability to deceive themselves as well as their "mark," - the target.

1963 - On October 5,
A policy of selective pressures was enacted by the USA administration against the Diem government in South Vietnam. In return for increased civil freedoms and land reform in South Vietnam, foreign aid from the USA would not be cut. As a sign of determination, the CIA station chief in Saigon, John Richardson, cut off funds to Nhu's Special Forces and suspended shipments of tobacco, rice, and milk, under the commodity import program. The Vietnamese Generals had again requested the American position should they effect a coup. While the American administration remained divided, Nhu considered staging a fake coup and using it as an excuse to murder suspected opponents. W. Averill Harriman (who wanted the war to end) and others stated their belief that Diem should go; Vice-President Johnson, top CIA and Pentagon officials (who wanted the war to continue) and others stated their support for Diem, as an allegiance to a 9-year ally.

1963 - In October,
Laser-guided bombs became a U.S.A. military technology development program.
By 1970, the Department of defense would state that laser-guided bombs, introduced in 1968, had led to a ten-fold increase in accuracy in hitting targets in Southeast Asia. Laser finding equipment would be used by the USAF to improve night bombing in Southeast Asia.

The development of lasers began as an attempt to reverse engineer spacebeing technology and in that light it was the result of insight and incentive provided by the observation of incredibly advanced technologies. The uses to which that technology was placed were purely, and regrettably human. Many more people have been killed or injured through the use of laser technology than beneficially assisted in health by it.

1963 - In the October 12 issue of
"Nature", D.G. Rea, was the author of an article entitled "Evidence for Life On Mars".
In it the author notes that the various colours, including green, exhibited by dark areas, the seasonal changes in the visual albedo and the polarization of the dark areas; the ability of the dark areas to regenerate after an extensive dust storm; and the presence of 2700 to 3000 cm-1 absorption bands, attributes to the possible presence of lifeforms.

1963 - On October 17,
A Secret FBI Memorandum identified Clifton De Berry as an individual whose file was being reviewed to determine if "there is anything derogatory in his background which might cause embarrassment to the National Committee of the Socialist Workers Party (SWP) if publicly exposed." Under the direction of Hoover, the FBI were seeking to discredit anyone who dared to oppose the white establishment.
De Berry had begun organizing textile workers in Louisiana in late 1942.
He later organized the workers in a John Deere farm equipment plant near Nashville, Tennessee.
The economic boom during the war and the perceived urgency for production had resulted in more Black Americans being hired into factories. After the War, American workers in general mounted strike campaigns to lobby for better wages. Hoover took this civil unrest to be an indication of Communist influence and set out to destroy it.
By 1948, Hoover was keeping files on De Berry and having investigators check with his employer every "three or four days." The school desegregation decision of the USA Supreme Court in 1954 and the lynchings of Blacks in the southeastern states which followed, De Berry had organized a "Station Wagons to Montgomery Committee" during 1955-56 to purchase vehicles for bus boycotters. It was at that time that Martin Luther King had entered the civil rights movement. In the early 1960s, Be Berry had addressed socialist meetings. During the same time, Black nationalism was growing. In late 1963, the FBI had tried to create a scandal to discredit Be Berry by arresting him at a speaking engagement on charges of non-support of his wife. At least 20 agents were involved in the tactics of the operation.

1963 - On October 18,
Three Robots reportedly accosted truck driver Eugenio Douglas near Monte Maix, Argentina.
On October 21, the entire Moreno family, in Cordoba province, Argentina, saw a landed UFO.
Five other flying discs seemed to keep the family under seige for a time with beams of light which made the house "hot as an oven."

1963 - On Oct 23,
Near Trancas, Argentina, Dora Martina, Senora Yolie de Valle Moreno and her sister Yolanda, saw 2 bright Disc-shaped objects joined by a shinning tube. A number of humanoid silhouettes, estimated at 40, were moving in the illuminated tube. Later, they saw a disc-shaped, domed object with 6 brightly lit windows. It was some 30 feet wide, metallic in appearance, it had a number of sections which were joined together with rivets at the seams. The dome was also metallic, but it was darker and had no rivets. The object was rocking gently to and fro.
Suddenly, a multicoloured band began to rotate inside the windows and a whitish mist thickened around the object, which emitted a faint hum. The witness became aware of a sulphurous smell. Then, a tongue of flame shot from the object, hit Dora and hurled her and the 2 sisters to the ground. At the same time, three more discs along the railway, over which they had seen the first object, lit up making 6 in all. A tube of light emerged from the top of the object and probed the features of the house. Double tubes of light probed forward from 3 of the objects on the railway line, each towards a separate building. The ends of these 'solid' light beams or tubes edged forward slowly, penetrating a fence as they went. The beams were perfectly cylindrical, about 10 feet wide. There were no shadows anywhere.
Indoors, the temperature had risen to 104 degrees and everyone felt a burning, prickling sensation in their skin.
The light influenced the household animals and dogs by their become quiet and listless rather than their usual fierce nature. The tubes were moved around, withdrawn back to the craft. The objects then moved together and flew off at a low altitude towards the Sierra de Medina mountains. The cloud that had formed did not disperse for 4 hours. Underneath the spot where the object had hovered, the Morenos found a perfect cone 3 feet high composed of small white balls, half an inch in diameter. Others were found on the railway line. Under investigation, the balls were found to disintegrate under gentle pressure and contained 96.48 % calcium carbonate and 3.51% potassium carbonate.

1963 - On October 31,
8-year-old Rute de Souza was playing near her home in Iguape, SW of Santos, Brazil, when she heard a roaring noise which was rapidly becoming louder. Looking around, she saw a silvery object coming down from the sky, heading towards the nearby Peropava River. After passing over the house, the object hit the top of a palm tree and began to twist, turn and wobble in the air. Rute saw it fall into the river close to the far bank and started running back home when she met her mother coming to see what the noise was about. Raul de Souza, the child's uncle, had been working nearby and came over also such that the 3 of them ended up watching the river where the object had submerged. The surface boiled up, then there was an eruption of muddy water, followed by one of mud. Fishermen on the far bank had also observed the incident including a Japanese gentleman, Tetsuo Ioshigawa. The description of the object was "shaped like a wash basin, about 25 feet in diameter; it had hit the palm tree at no more than 20 feet off the ground. Divers searched the waters but found nothing and engineers with mine detectors failed to locate the object.

1963 - November 1:
The Army of the Republic of Vietnam (ARVN) overthrow the government, killing the prime minister, Diem, and his brother and head of the police, Ngo Dinh Nhu. Diem had been talking with U.S. Ambassador Lodge when Vietnamese Generals seized key military installations and communications systems in Saigon, secured the surrender of Nhu's Special Forces, and demanded the resignation of Diem and Nhu. Staling for time, Diem phoned Lodge to determine the American administration's attitude towards the coup. Finding support nowhere, Diem and Nhu escaped the palace by using a secret tunnel to a Catholic church in the Chinese district. They were subsequently captured, and, in retaliation for the fear and brutality they had brought to so many Vietnamese, were murdered brutally in a personnel carrier. U.S. troop strength in Vietnam is at 11,000.
U.S.A. President John F. Kennedy, shocked at the murders of the political leaders, opposed further involvement in Vietnam. He regards it as his greatest failure in foreign policy. He had placed his shared background of Catholicism and politics with Diem before the intolerance and suppression which Diem had effected on the Vietnamese. Kennedy is now briefed on earlier UFO findings and official contact with extraterrestrials and considers releasing all details to the world with the intent of encouraging peace worldwide. His bleached blond friend, and, in her last days, a RED Walk-In, Marilyn Monroe, knows that the world may end in nuclear disaster unless world peace through negotiation and conciliation is followed with tight controls on the development and use of technology. Because of their earlier intimate relationship, her statements, relayed by brother Bobby, encourages him that such a course would diminish mankind's preoccupation with armaments, war and destruction and provide an opportunity for worldwide human spiritual upliftment in the form of international cooperative support for the conquest of poverty, illness, aggression.

The C.I.A. and Pentagon Majority 12 believed:

1) that the President had been duped by a communist spy (women were frequently recruited by the KGB as spies) and that his "hard" line against the Soviets in Cuba and Berlin was only a "front" to gain him media and political support,
2) that they did not have the control over, or the privilege given them by former Presidents, who came from the same institutional origins or would defer authority to them (Kennedy made extensive use of scientific committees),
3) that most military careers would be decimated, as would the armaments-scientific-engineering-oil industries together with the privileges of authority (including material, rank, and sexual) that often were associated with same,
4) that in making public the plans of the Bilderbergers, and, the presence of other world beings, total anarchy would result in the English speaking world.

The Mafia (American organized crime) are very disturbed by the efforts of Robert Kennedy, John Kennedy's brother, and Attorney General to end their careers in jail terms.

1963 - On November 22,
President John F. Kennedy, was assassinated, while travelling in an open car, surrounded by CIA agents, following a CIA planned route.

1963 - By November,
The USAF Titan II intercontinental ballistic missile (ICBM) was operational.
It was over 100 feet (30 meters) long and was the biggest missile ever deployed by the U.S.A.. The Titan II had a launch weight of 330,000 lb. (150,000 kg) and could carry a 9-megaton nuclear warhead a distance of 9,325 miles (15,000 km). 54 of them were deployed, many in underground silos. Two exploded in their silos leading to the withdrawal of the others in the 1980s. By 1988, the Titan II was being used to carry secret military payloads into orbit and at least 68 more were to be built by Martin Marietta Corporation to diminish the military's reliance on the space shuttles. 20 launchings per year were taking place in 1991.

1963 -
Wilbert B. Smith in another speech, imparts information allegedly obtained from extraterrestrial sources that casts serious doubt on the validity of some basic concepts of our science and on our ideas of time. He mentions having made "hardware that works" from information given him by extraterrestrial intelligences. The speech was given in Vancouver in 1961.

1963 - By December,
Giovanni Battista Montini, Archbishop of Milan, is elected Pope Paul VI.
In theory, any male Catholic who has the use of reason may be elected Pope.
In practice, all Popes since the 14th century have been chosen from among the cardinals or archbishops.

1963 - In issue 212:2 of "Atlantic",
R. Jastrow and H Newell authored an article entitled "Why Land On The Moon?".
An abstract stated:
"Moon exploration may help solve one of the classic problems of science, the origin of the solar system. The moon with no oceans or atmosphere to destroy the surface may still hold the key to the origin of life and the probability of other living organisms in the universe. If the moon and the planets were formed in a near collision of two stars, then life must be very unusual, possibly unique because space is very empty and collision between stars extremely rare. If planets were formed as a natural condensation process in which our sun was born, the creation of planets must have accompanied the formation of nearly every star in the universe. Since most of these stars are expected to have planets around them, there must be many cases in which size of one planet and its distance from the star are suitable for the development of life in a form somewhat as we know it. These are the fundamental questions involving the physical origin of our solar system and its living organisms, on which a powerful attack can now be made with the aid of lunar and planetary exploration."

This represents one of the many examples of the human weakness of reality denial by substitution of intellectualization. While ALL of human history demonstrates an inherent inability to live in harmony with the ecology of the Earth, in harmony with each other, and in reverence for life - the consideration of anything of concern beyond that which directly influences the Earth represents a weakening of the possibilities for human survival. If we went to and encountered an extraterrestrial lifeform, what of advantage could humans offer it, other than a threat to its existence and balance?

1963 - The winter,
in North America, was the worst in living memory with the intense cold killing hundreds of people.
Rumours began that the Earth might be on the verge of a new ice age.

During 1963/1964,
St. Augustine Volcano, Alaska, has a giant eruption.

During 1963/1964,
A Filovirus Outbreak occured amongst the tribes and monkeys on the north side of the Ugandan volcano, Mount Elgon. Located in a rainforest environment, along the Greek River, few non-Africans visited the region and there were few roads and virtually no means of mass communication. When a visiting agricultural inspector, working on the eastern slopes of the mountain was told, by the local chieftans in his region, how the diseased, in another area, acquired a rash and subsequently bled from all orifices and died - he thought little more about it assuming that it was possibly a superstition or a ploy to keep him from the diseased region. In a few years, the virus would prove to be extremely lethal to humans.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1964 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
Failsafe, Goldfinger; Woman of Straw; The Yellow Rolls Royce; Your Cheatin' Heart; Mary Poppins; My Fair Lady; Robin and the Seven Hoods; A Fistful of Dollars; Advance to the Rear; Carry On Spying; Carry On Jack; The Lively Set; The Unsinkable Molly Brown; El Greco; Lilith; Father Goose; Bedtime Story; Seance on a Wet Afternoon

Songs: Anyone Who Had A Heart; Laugh, Laugh; A Summer Song; It's Not Unusual; Baby, I'm Yours; Girl From Ipanema; Last Kiss; Hello Dolly!; I Get Around; Where Did Our Love Go; Mr. Lonely; Everybody Loves Somebody; Chapel Of Love; Rag Doll; Leader of the Pack; Understand Your Man; Dang Me; My Heart Skips A Beat; Don't Be Angry; It Ain't Me Babe; Chug-A-Lug; Together Again; Four Strong Winds.
General News:

Consumer Price Index: 92.9
Timothy Leary and the teenage drug cult become popular in North America.
Beach parties, drugs and promiscuity became the vogue for teenagers.
Beatlemania and Go-Go girls, topless dresses and swim suits along with increased TV watching served as reality diversions for North Americans.
The Canadian Parliament spent much time debating on a new national flag.
Spy movies and serials became popular: "James Bond", Man from U.N.C.L.E..
The U.S.S.R. sent 3 cosmonauts into space in a single spacecraft.
The U.S.A. spacecraft, Ranger 7 , sent back pictures from the moon.
Lyndon Baines Johnson, wins the American election over Barry Goldwater.
During 1964, 100,000 Vietnamese civilians die in the Vietnam War.

1964 - By this year,
3 Fukienese Chinese heroin labs had been set up in Manila to meet the rising American demand as well as consumption by locally-based American troops. The Fukienese labs primarily produced No. 3 heroin for local consumption. Lim Seng, a Chinese Chiu Chao businessman, set up his own lab now, financed by an overseas insurance agency and a leading Filipino textile magnate who was a friend of Philippine President Ferdinand Marcos. Lim Seng brought in a Chiu Chao chemist from Hong Kong and began producing small quantities of No. 3. The sudden oversupply forced the Fukienese out of business.

1964 - On January 2,
A report from Major General Victor H. Krulak of the Marine Corps, to U.S. President Johnson, advised that the 34A "destructive undertakings" to be conducted throughout the year would be designed "to result in substantial destruction, economic loss and harassment" to the North Vietnamese. The President throughout this period was supportive of any measures that would maintain a position of "noncommitting" to combat. This involved covert operations, financing of Vietnamese troop strength and the supply of armaments.
The 34A operations ranged from U2 flights over North Vietnam, to parachuting sabotage and psychological warfare teams into North Vietnam, commando raids from the sea to blow up rail and highway bridges and the bombardment of North Vietnamese coastal installations by PT boats. The clandestine operations were directed for the President by Mr. McNamara through a section of the Joint Chiefs organization called the "Office of the Special Assistant for Counterinsurgency and Special Activities". General Krulak first held the position of special assistant until February, 1964, when he was succeeded by Major General Rollen H. Anthis of the USAF. The attacks were given "interagency clearance" in Washington by coordinating them with the State Department and the C.I.A..
A covert force of propeller-driven T-28 fighter-bombers, varying from 25 to 40 aircraft, were also used in air operations over Laos in the war against North Vietnam. The planes bore Laotian Air Force markings, but only some belonged to that air force. The rest were manned by pilots of Air America (a pseudo-private airline run by the C.I.A.) and by Thai pilots under the direction of U.S. Ambassador Leonard Unger. Reconnaissance flights by regular USAF and U.S. Navy jets, code-named Yankee Team, gathered photographic intelligence for bombing raids by the T-28's against the North Vietnamese and Pathet Lao troops in Laos.

1964 - On January 7,
Clifton DeBerry was nominated as the candidate for USA president representing the "National Committee of the Socialist Workers Party" (SWP).
Lyndon Johnson was running for re-election, opposed by Barry Goldwater.
Johnson campaigned as a 'peace candidate' who was opposed to escalating the war, while Goldwater favoured increased bombing in Vietnam. Most of the voters believed Johnson's rhetoric and gave him a landslide victory. Only the SWP clearly, and accurately, described Johnson as an imperialist warrior. DeBerry became the first Black person ever to run for president of the USA.

1964 - On January 29,
General Nguyen Khanh leads a group of younger officers to overthrow the divided military junta which had taken power in South Vietnam. The 12 army officers of the junta had been educated in France and had spent much of their careers working for the French administration. They were conditioned followers and dependents and lacked the capability for political leadership, had no program, and were more often identified with Diem than with the opponents to the old regime. Suspicious of those around them, they became intolerant like their predecessor. Khanh was widely known among the Americans as a militant anti-Communist and as one of the ARVN's most able military commanders. The Johnson administration cautiously accepted him.
Guerrilla incidents were increasing throughout South Vietnam and coming closer to Saigon.
Disappointed with the lack of any progress in the attempted negotiations of the previous months, the North Vietnamese encouraged the Vietcong, and a record number of attacks and heavy casualties for the ARVN had occurred more recently. They were again within 50 miles of Saigon and were attacking U.S. Special Forces training camps elsewhere.

1964 - On January 30,
"Elektron 1 & 2" became the first publicized dual satellite launch.
They were launched from Tyuratam aboard an Sl-3 rocket and studied the inner and outer zones of the Van Allen radiation belt and the Earth's magnetic field to provide more information to allow greater protection for humans on manned spacecraft.

1964 -
Bert Gammie, a rancher from Green Lake, British Columbia, briefly saw an enormous spherical craft circle above his car. It was a dull metallic colour and had a series of exhaust vents at one end which emitted multi-coloured gases. He reported this to the RCAF in Vancouver who sent 2 senior air force officers to interview him. They brought a bulky portfolio of glossy prints of UFO's, many showing crafts in fine detail, for comparison. On leaving, they mentioned that if their visit received any publicity, they would deny they were ever there.

1964 - In March,
The Good Friday 8.4 Magnitude Earthquake in Prince William Sound, Alaska, resulted in extensive damage to Anchorage, generated landslides and produced a large tsunami, which swept across the Pacific at 500 mph, and - which claimed victims as far south along the coast as Crescent City, California. Striking in the late afternoon of a holiday, many residents were in safer locations than otherwise; number of people dead or missing was less than 200.
A chasm opened in Valdez harbour which temporarily drained it.
Many of the 1,500 townspeople had gathered near the dock to watch the unloading of the "S.S. Chena", a frieghter. When the quake occurred, the freighter was tossed up into the air several times as if it were a toy. One moment it was higher than the 2-storey warehouse, and twice it hit the bottom of the harbour. The warehouse, itself, went flying up into the air, crashed down into the water, and disappeared. Buildings collapsed or were split into pieces, water mains broke, oil tanks fractured and fires broke out. Tons of silt were forced up on the beach by the quake. Within minutes, 75% of Valdez was either destroyed or uninhabitable. More than 40 boats were smashed by the tidal waves and dozens of automobiles had been crushed by falling telephone poles and buildings. Live electrical wires thrashed about the streets, and transportation became largely limited to helicopters. The force generated was later calculated to have been equal to 50,000 Hiroshima atomic 15 kiloton bombs.

It was considered to be the strongest quake, to that date, to have been recorded in North America; surpassed worldwide only by Chile's 1906 quake rated at 200,000 megatons. In downtown Anchorage, the largest city affected, the buildings and pavement dropped 20 feet. Off and on all that day a light snowfall had misted down over Anchorage. During the quake some buildings moved back and forth as much as 5 feet in each direction. The states vital fishing industry was badly crippled and the total damage was estimated at $350 million. Massive federal aid - not just loans and relief - would be needed to help repair the towns and the economy.
At the Standard Oil dock in Seward, the "Alaska Standard" tanker was connected to the storage tanks by a series of hoses. "All of a sudden the dock just lifted up 10 feet. The ship went up - or maybe I went down. All of the hoses parted and there was a spray of gasoline in every direction. The dock just fell in and I saw this big comber wave full of timber rolling in 'way above me." Resurrection Bay was suddenly empty of all water and the tanker fell out of sight of some of the people a short distance ashore. Flames erupted from the Standard Oil tanks and set off some other tanks, some holding up to 11,000 barrels of fuel. The blazing fuel poured into the bay until the entire surface was aflame. A tidal wave hurled a wall of fire against a Texaco storage tank farm 8 city blocks from the shore; another big tank collapsed. Water and burning fuel then surged over the railroad tracks and into the lower north end of the city. Dozens of homes and house trailers were crushed along with waterfront shops and the radio station - and then set afire. Vehicles carrying fleeing people were swept off the streets. A train had been coming down the tracks into town; it suddenly disappeared.

1964 - On March 12,
Malcolm X stated at a heavily popularized news conference that:
"Nineteen sixty-four threatens to be a very explosive year. ... We should be peaceful, law-abiding, but the time has come for the American Negro to fight back in self-defense whenever and wherever he is being unjustly and unlawfully attacked. If the government thinks I am wrong for saying this, then let the government start doing its job."

The USA Administration responded by telling Hoover to do his job of ensuring civil law and order against the disorder advocated by civil rights activists.

1964 - On April 02,
"Zond 1", a USSR spacecraft similar to the Soyuz with no orbital module, smaller solar panels, no backup motor, and additional heatshielding to cope with the higher re-entry speed. Launched from Tyuratam, the 825 kg Venus probe completed a flyby of Venus on July 19 at 100,000 km. Contact with the probe was lost earlier, in May.

1964 -
Laura Mundo describes an alleged visit to Mars and the information she learned about both the Earth and Mars from her experiences and "guide".

1964 - During the year,
60 Kilograms of Plutonium are discovered to be missing from a plant in Pennsylvania state, USA. Supercritical mass for Plutonium, enough to produce a 20-megaton nuclear weapon is defined as 35.2 pounds (16 kgs) and this amount may be reduced to 22 pounds (10 kgs) by surrounding it with the more common and easier to obtain U-235 uranium metal. In other words, the amount of missing plutonium could be capable of enabling the construction of six 20-megaton nuclear weapons.

1964 - On April 24,
Gary Wilcox, while working on his farm in Newark Valley, N.Y., sees a UFO in a nearby field.
The craft was "bigger than a car in length ... shaped something like an egg ... no seams or rivets ... estimated at 20 feet in length, 4 feet high, and 15 feet wide and felt to touch like a metallic canvas". The crew are 2 humanoid 4-foot-tall beings who are holding up specimens of soil and sod and who identify themselves as being from Mars. They explain that although they had been obtaining their food from the atmosphere, they had to find a way to rehabilitate their soil and raise food. The entities said there would be changes in the solar system and that Mars would change in position to where the Earth is now.
Wilcox would later speculate that the "food taken from the atmosphere" might by similar to the celestial manna described in the Bible in Exodus; the angels described there were cherubim - little people.

1964 - In the early evening of April 24th,
Lonnie Zamora, a Socorro, New Mexico police officer took off in his cruiser after what he thought was a speeder. Following it out of town, he heard a loud roar, saw a flash of light, and thought a nearby dynamite shack had exploded. Driving near to a gully, he spotted over 400 yards away, at the bottom of the gully, a bright, white object. At first, he thought that it was an overturned car and near it he could see two "people". Zamora stopped the patrol car and got out. He couldn't see the figures in the gully well but thought that they were smaller than normal adults. They were wearing some type of "white clothes", but he couldn't see any other details. He realized that the object was not an overturned car, nor a car on end, sort of a vertical oval supported on girderlike legs. It was an egg-shaped 20 foot long, 4 foot high, 15 foot wide metallic canvas object.
The beings said they came from Mars, could only come to Earth every 2 years, warned about people being sent into space as unhealthy for them, that they did not fly near our cities because the pollution affected the flight of their spacecraft, that their atmosphere would be too thin for Zamora to breathe, and that they were learning about our organic materials because of the rocky nature of their Mars.

As he started forward, the humanoids apparently saw him.
Everyone turned to run, the aliens scrambling back into the object, and Zamora bumped into the patrol car. Zamora heard several thumps followed by a roar which rose gradually in pitch and saw a blue and orange flame rise from the ground. The oval shape turned horizontal and passed above the ground at 15 foot height before accelerating away. Four burn marks and 4 depressions were found at the site marking a circular pattern with the main burn mark in the centre. Four small round "footprints" were found to one side of and within the quadrilateral.
Seconds after the object disappeared, Zamora called Sergeant Chavez, a state police officer.
Chavez saw the markings where the UFO had stood and one bush was still smoking when he arrived. Several clumps of grass were burned and 4 holes were pressed into the ground. Several investigators from the USAF arrived over the next few days from various AFBs. Eventually, for they could not find any holes in the story, they acknowledged it as a sighting which could not be identified. Hynek and other government agents did their best then, and later to try and find something to discredit Zamora. Theories to discredit or complicate the described experience all fell apart when tested in reality.

1964 - By April
U.S. President Lyndon B. Johnson, totally dependent on his advisers for foreign policy, had begun to increase American involvement in the Vietnam war. American troop strength would be increased from 16,300 to 23,300 during the year and an additional $50 million in aid would be pledged. Covert operations against North Vietnam increased. Intimidation of North Vietnam by the use of air strikes were now threatened and used in an attempt to exclude North Vietnamese support for the Vietcong. Despite extensive American-sourced bureaucratic and theoretical planning, few programs were effectively implemented by President Khanh. Sympathy for the Vietcong grew and desertion from the ARVN grew also.

1964 - On June 03,
The "Gemini 4" spacecraft with crew McDivitt-White while passing over Hawaii almost collide with a silver cylinder, oval with a luminous trail. They photographed it.

1964 - On June 19,
Linus Pauling, winner of the Nobel Peace Prize (1962) and the Nobel prize for Chemistry (1954),
gave a speech "Nuclear Weapons and World Sanity" at the UNESCO House in Paris as part of a series on Science Education and its Responsibilities. Some of his points were as follows:
"It is the duty of society as a whole to make the important decisions regarding social, political and economic matters but it is the special duty of the scientist to contribute with his special knowledge and understanding to a greater extent than other people and to help his fellow citizens to reach the right decisions. ...
Never before had it been dangerous to people the world over for military establishments to carry out tests of their future weapons; but now damage has already been done to members of the human race by nuclear weapons tests. ...
High energy radiation, it is known, causes gene mutation, and it is possible to estimate the amount of gene mutation resulting from radiation from cesium 137, carbon 14 and other radioactive nuclei produced in the testing of nuclear weapons and liberated into the atmosphere. These radioactive substances, and particularly carbon 14, will continue to produce defective children for thousands of years.
If the human race survives."

1964 - On July 11,
"Elektron 3 & 4" became the second publicized dual satellite launch.
They were launched from Tyuratam aboard an Sl-3 rocket and studied the inner and outer zones of the Van Allen radiation belt and the Earth's magnetic field to provide more information to allow greater protection for humans on manned spacecraft.

1964 - During the Summer,
The murder of 3 Civil Rights Workers took place near Philadelphia, Mississippi.
Clifton De Berry later revealed that "While the 3 kidnapped youths were in jail ... their co-workers became fearful for their safety, and telephoned the FBI in Jackson. The FBI agent ... refused to help and told the rights fighters that he wouldn't have any more dealings with them." The 3 were forcibly removed from the jail and taken to a gravel pit where they were murdered and buried. Over the next several months, the media focused the attention of citizens on this action. Public sympathy was becoming favourable to social disorder; President Johnson was becoming intense: he ordered Hoover to clean up the mess. Between 200 and 300 FBI agents with lots of money to pay bribes, were sent to Mississippi. The bodies were found and Klan violence ended for awhile.
Hoover, always the supreme bureaucrat, knew that a bureaucrat never infringes on the apparent authority and role of other agencies and organizations with whom he is expected to carry out his purpose: a humiliation now can lead to a revenge later. His perception of the role of the FBI was as a overseer of policing in the Americas with the responsibility for maintaining "political" order: the status quo of the capitalist elite. Hoover was selective about which areas his agents would become involved in. Their investigations were largely intended to provide other law enforcement agencies with "favours" of disinformation and "evidence" by which social irritants could be muzzled, disgraced, or detained.
Hoover would not allow his agents to become involved further than this until instructed directly to do so by his superiors, the Attorney General and the President of the USA. As a bureaucrat, he could then always justify the actions of his agents against those of other law enforcement agencies and elitist racist groups by deferring the responsibility to his superiors. The public would not forget his tardiness of response despite his media contrived image favouring courage and integrity.

1964 - In July,
A Moritorium on Civil Rights Demonstrations until after the November presidential election was issued by a group of major civil rights leaders including Roy Wilkins and Martin Luther King. They had met with Lyndon Johnson who had promised them passage of a Civil Rights Act if they helped him get elected. The purpose was to make it easier for Johnson to hold on to the racist vote which was threatening to go to Barry Goldwater. Clifton De Berry condemned the move: "This is the surest way for Negroes to get nothing ... Black people must develop independent legal force. That's the only way they can be a power and the only way they can defend themselves against the attacks of the racists which will come whether Johnson or Goldwater is elected."
Johnson would fulfill his promise, the Civil Rights Act would be passed.
Laws don't change persons minds. A law in only as feasible as the structure provided for its enforcement and the degree to which justice is served.

1964 - On July 31,
The U.S.A. "Ranger 7" spacecraft lands on the moon:
Its intended target was a plainlike region about 400 miles south of the great crater of Copernicus, which appeared through Earth telescopes to be one of the smoothest in its part of the moon. Ranger returned 4,300 pictures in 17 minutes, providing a view estimated to be 1,000 times clearer than through any earthbound telescope. The dual television cameras focused on a 300,000 square-mile segment of the moon before it landed. The TV cameras scanned 1,150 lines per image, as compared to 525 lines in ordinary North American TV images. 300 foot secondary craters appear to cover about half the surface and evidence of "erosion" was suggested by the ground down craters and smooth stretches between the craters. Up to 50 feet of erosion is expected to have taken place since the moon came into existence.

1964 - On August 01,
Tinker AFB Radar tracks many UFOs reported throughout Oklahoma.

1964 - In August,
"Alva", a nuclear test blast at the Utah test range, spread radiation off the site; the government denied the safety failure.

1964 -
U.S.A. President Lyndon Johnson, part of the old government-military bureaucracy, continues the U.S. military buildup and involvement in Vietnam. The destroyer "Maddox", in the Gulf of Tonkin, on August 1, is singled out for media attention following an attack on it by DRV torpedo boats. South Vietnamese gun boats had bombarded the nearby island of Hon Me the preceding evening; the North Vietnamese had assumed that the Maddox had supported the attacks. The U.S. destroyer "C. Turner Joy" was sent to support the Maddox.

On August 4, an attack is alleged during operations in heavy seas, based on admittedly unreliable sonar and radar contacts. American media dramatize the "unprovoked attacks" against their freedom loving troops and the pride of American politicians is aroused. In vengeance, American aircraft are sent to strike against the DRV.
On August 6, Khanh assumed dictatorial powers, and like his predecessors, imposed heavy restrictions on civil liberties. Thousands of Saigonese demonstrated in the streets and the humiliated General resigned. Anarchy reigned in the streets for days with Buddhists and Catholics waging open war as did gangs of thieves who pillaged and fought with hatchets and machetes. Vietnamese politicians negotiated and quarrelled for power.
On August 7, Congress grants Johnson the authority for all future military involvement to be taken "to repel any armed attacks against the forces of the United States and to prevent further aggression." The administration will now be able to rationalize any degree of involvement. The first direct attacks on U.S. bases in Vietnam comes in November; the NLF now controls 75% of South Vietnam. Troop strength in Vietnam will grow from 11,000 in 1963 to 82,000 in March, 1965, to 125,000 in June, 1965, to 200,000 in December, 1965, to 250,000 in April, 1966, to 375,000 in December, 1966, to 463,000 in June, 1967, with a request for 200,000 more in February, 1968. By November, 1968, there will have been 107,700 bombing raids, dropping 2.6 million tons of explosive - more than twice the tonnage dropped by all Allied air forces in Europe during WWII. Johnson has served the Pentagon, dutifully. And the Pentagon has served American manufacturers.

Clifton De Berry, a a previous Black American candidate for president, protested that "The incidents between the US destroyer and the PT boats were the pretext, not the cause, of the U.S. air attack." It would be several years before he would be proven correct. De Berry went on to protest: "We of the Socialist Workers party say, get all the U.S. troops, planes, and warships out of Vietnam - North and South. If as Johnson claims their purpose is to 'protect democracy,' then send them to Mississippi and let them do some protecting of Black Americans there."

1964 - On September 04,
Mr. Frank Sergi and other observers in Glassboro, New Jersey, saw a red glowing object hovering over the woods near the town. Sergi and another man watched as the object descended, hovered and finally landed. When it was gone, several minutes later, they searched the woods and found a burned crater in a clearing. The next day, they went back to the site to recheck their findings and on leaving mentioned it to 2 boys who were fishing nearby. The father of one of the boys was the local NICAP (National Investigations Committee on Aerial Phenomena) representative. Other residents later reported seeing strange red flashing lights at night for several days before the landing. Mrs. Freda Dufala saw a spherical, red, glowing object hovering close to where the crater was found. Carol Smith saw an orange-yellow object near the woods on September 7th, 3 nights later. From under it, came a bright red glow and she watched it land, take off with a thundering roar and then land again. The Air Force became involved after noticing reports in a number of newspapers beginning September 10 in conjunction to numerous calls to McGuire Air Force Base.
In the crater, they found a firecracker, which an Air Force colonel seemed to think was very significant. By September 14, the USAF had completed its investigation. They were convinced it had been a hoax. Other researchers publicly disputed the official conclusions and findings. Mr Sergi said that the USAF investigators had arrived after thousands, maybe as many as 4000 curious people had trampled through the woods. On September 12, a group of high school students went to Glassboro to conduct their own investigation because of discrepancies between the media, USAF, and NICAP findings. They were saddened for not coming earlier before the site had been so disturbed. They did confirm that the ground indentations were 18 inches deep by 9 inches square and had been made by a great force which had crushed some tree roots as opposed to having been dug, which would have cut the roots. The distances between the indentations were 23 feet by 23 feet by 26 feet. Above the site, several tree limbs had been broken.

In January, 1965, a young man came forward declaring that he had faked the sighting because he needed money to continue his college career. All the government officials were impressed and he was fined 50 dollars for his ingenuity. The sentence was suspended and he paid 10 dollars in court costs. Other wondered about the trial and if the "confession" was a convenient hoax for the authorities. Ostensibly, the boy had obtained a quantity of radium dioxide and spread it around the site, even though reports had shown only normal levels of background radiation. Access to the dangerous, costly chemical was never explained.
Other expertise established that "It would have required heavy machinery or the combined weight of 10 men to break the tree limbs. The root system was sprung downward. There was a scar of recent origin at the base of the trunk that would have required a powerful piece of machinery and a smooth metal cylinder." They didn't know how it could have been done without leaving any traces/tracks of the machinery. Leaves from the top of a 40 foot oak tree were examined and found to be singed to the last degree but not burnt. A NICAP investigator concluded "it would require some type of flame-thrower, in very skilful hands to singe but not burn the leaves." Further, the outside of the crater had been singed, as if by very intense heat. The sand had fused, forming glass-like particles. The distribution of heat had been uniform because the depth of the burning was uniform. It had been extremely hot but present for only seconds because the ground was not burned very deeply. The fact that nothing accounted for these findings did not sway the USAF from its conclusion of "hoax".

Evidently, according to the USAF, 3 teenage boys spread an expensive chemical around the site, but no one found it; used heavy equipment to break tree limbs, but left no traces; dug uniform holes but were sophisticated enough not to break the roots; burned the inside of the crater with something hot enough to fuse the surface sand quickly but not burn the subsoil. They did all this expertly, quickly, and quietly. Then they left the secluded area for others to find and suspect a UFO landing. They somehow got many other residents to come forward and support their hoax by reporting sightings.

1964 - During September,
A Nobel Prize for Physics is awarded for Fundamental Laser Research to physicists in the Soviet Union: Aleksander Prokhorov, Nikolai Basov. Such research will contribute to the development of compact disk players, laserdisk players, military targeting devices, and military weapons as well as high temperature cutting beams.

1964 - By the end of September,
Edward Albert, a pseudonym for a man interviewed by a New Delhi "Statesman" reporter had been interviewed and written about in a local publication. Albert had been found sitting "bare-naked in one of the cave-like monuments at Mehrauli near the Buddha Vihara." The man had been living in the cave for 5 months, ever since his arrival in India. He was portrayed as a man "not eager to talk about his experiences ... doesn't want publicity; he doesn't care if anyone believes him or not."
He revealed to the reporter, S. Vankatesh, that "I have not only seen the objects from outer space, but have taken photographs and even travelled in them." He showed the reporter about 80 photographs, "all taken with a folding camera and neatly kept in an album." He said he had taken over 400 such photos, but most of them had been stolen in Jordan and India. He declined to give any of them to the reporter. Vankatesh described what he had seen in the photos as "vary in size and shape ... One is a globular object with a round disc in the centre; another is funnel-shaped; a third is like a neon lamp; a fourth is a big, bright cross and others bright zig-zag lines. Some of these have been taken on the ground and some flying in the sky." The man said he had taken the photos in Greece, Jordan, and India.
Albert said that he had been frequently visited by the spacepersons and had travelled to at least one other inhabited planet. On this unusual planet, "All of the objects were white," and the spacepeople looked very much like humans except they were taller, had a certain glow about them, and were spiritually more advanced. They expressed themselves through the transmission of thought patterns. Vankatesh noted that the man had few possessions - several articles of clothing, his photo album, a folding camera, and two small bags. Travelling with him was a pet monkey named Emperor. At the end of the interview, Albert and Emperor were to pack up their few belongings and, with a new friend, begin hitchhiking back across the Middle East to Switzerland. Albert expected to relate to German scientists his experiences, show them his photos and the objects which he said he had collected from the planets he had visited.

Timothy Good, a UFO researcher, later tracked the man down, he believed, to be one Eduard Albert Meier who lived in the foothills southeast of Zurich. Good played for the London Symphony Orchestra, which during a winter orchestra tour in 1965 played in Zurich. (see 1975 for the continuation).

1964 - By October,
Richard Price, an American 8-year-old in 1955 when he perceived himself to have been abducted and implanted with a device, confided his secret to a schoolfriend. Within days all of the students had learned of the story by gossip and proceeded to ostracize and make fun of Richard. School authorities became alarmed at the fact that he had told such a story and had Richard taken to a state hospital for psychological testing and assessment. He was released after 3 months only after he realized that nothing else would be accepted except his denial of the incident - which he admitted. At no time was he ever physically examined to determine if indeed anything resembling a physical abnormality or implant was present. For a young teen, the social and political experience was traumatic as all his human relationships seemed to have been destroyed by his telling what he believed was the truth - and for which he had the physical evidence. He would not mention it to others again until 1981.

This appears to be a common human social response to the reporting by individuals of experiences, the reality of which threaten the authority and quiet confidence which the listener holds in the narrow status quo: disbelief, persecution, ostracism, restriction of freedoms, coercion to conform.

1964 -
A USA Rubella (German Measles) Viral Epidemic leaves 15,999 to 20,000 stillbirths and 15,000 to 20,000 children with genetic disorders including blindness, total deafness, imbecility, deformed limbs and heart problems. Epidemiologists predicted that the next epidemic would occur in 1970-71. Publicity of the thalidomide drug-induced genetic disaster, which resulted in the birth of 8,000 deformed children worldwide was much more prominent and intense. The drug problem had been stopped. Awareness and preparation could stop rubella pregnancy disorders, IF the general public were informed periodically and without the terror tactics so common to the drama-seeking media.
In 1961, two groups of investigators, one headed by Dr. Thomas Weller at Harvard, the other by Dr. Paul D. Parkman at the Walter Reed Army Institute of Research, isolated the virus and devised ways of cultivating it in the laboratory.

1964 - On October 12,
The USSR publicly launches "Voskhod 1", a 3-man space vehicle carrying a pilot, doctor, and scientist. The Voskhod was a modified 2-man Vostok and 2 publicized missions were completed before the Soyuz had been perfected. Vladimir Komarov (pilot), Konstantin Feoktistov (a Vostok-Voskhod designer) and Boris Yegorov (physician) were launched and completed 16 orbits. The cramped conditions were such that the crew flew with no bulky pressurized suits or ejection escape system. It was an example of the Russian military-political design philosophy of "do-it-simple and make sure that it works". The Voskhod flights proved to be the last made under the leadership of Sergei Korolev, the chief designer for launchers and spacecraft. He died at age 60 on 15, January, 1966, his health undermined by 6 years in Siberian concentration camps under Stalin's regime. Only after death was his identity in the space program revealed to the public. Premier Krushchev received the customary conversation with the cosmonauts; he was deposed before they landed.

1964 - By November,
Eduard (Billy) Meier, while in India, had been allowed to photograph the spacecraft of his spacewoman mentor, Asket. This was high above the Ashoka Ashram on the outskirts of Mehrauli. In the photograph, the craft appeared distinctly disk-shaped, topped by the slight rise of a dome, but otherwise undetailed. Asket left him later this year. Before leaving, she told Meier that for his own benefit as well as that of his new contacts' he would be monitored for the next 11 years. At the end of that time, if assured that he had achieved the proper spiritual plane to allow face-to-face contact, the new beings would reveal their presence to him. She further stated that:
"Your forefathers came from the Constellation Lyra. And when you have become mature enough to hear the new explanations concerning these matters, you will have the answers from the descendants of your forefathers themselves. The eternal truth remains for all times the eternal truth."

1964 - On November 05,
"Mariner 3", a USA 261 kg planetary satellite, was launched by an Atlas Agena D rocket from Cape Canaveral. Battery power depleted early and did not allow TV pictures to be broadcast from a distance of 13,840 km from Venus.

1964 - On November 14,
The Reverend Father Benito Reyna of the "Society of Jesus", saw and photographed a "flotilla" of flying saucers from the vantage point of the Adhara Observatory, San Miguel, Buenos Aires, Argentina. He reports also seeing and photographed 3 UFOs which followed in close proximity to and on a route perpendicular to the orbit of and on the same plane as Echo II (communications satellite) through the powerful telescope at the Observatory.

1964 - On November 28,
"Mariner 4", a USA 261 kg planetary satellite, was launched from Cape Canaveral by an Atlas Agena D rocket. A new fairing design was used in hopes of countering the problem which had arisen with Mariner 3.
After 228 days and 523 million km Mars was passed at 9844 km on July 14, 1965.
During the next 10 days 21 TV images & 22 lines of a 22nd were received at the Jet Propulsion Laboratory (JPL), California, as a tape recorder played back the digitized pictures at 8-1/3 bits per second. These images covered about 1% of Mars, an area that appeared to be heavily cratered, very dry and with no trace of surface water.

1964 - On November 30,
"Zond 2", a USSR spacecraft similar to the Soyuz with no orbital module, smaller solar panels, no backup motor, and additional heatshielding to cope with the higher re-entry speed. Launched from Tyuratam, the 1145 kg Mars probe completed a flyby of Mars on August 6, 1965 at 1,500 km. Contact with the probe was lost earlier, in April, 1965. It was a suicide mission with human observation for as long as possible.

1964 - In the Devember issue of "American Scientist",
R. Bieri of Antioch College authored an article entitled "Humanoids on Other Planets?"
The author's abstract follows:
"If life has evolved on other planets in other solar systems, and if some population has reached the level of conceptual thought, it is highly probable that the organism so endowed will bear strong resemblance to homo sapiens. Theory is based on the premise that the physical properties of the elements, the forms of energy available, and the environmental conditions which would allow life to arise and evolve are such that severe limitations are imposed on the number of routes available to evolving forms. The number of alternative possibilities is by no means infinite; on the contrary, the number is limited. This number of available routes has led to the innumerable cases of convergent evolution in plants and animals. Evidence shows that, again and again, animals and plants have independently evolved not only similar structures but also similar biochemical systems and similar behavioural patterns as solutions to the same fundamental problem."

1964 - On December 01,
Limited bombing raids against infiltration routes to South Vietnam are approved by U.S. President Johnson with immediate initiation. They would extend into Laos.

1964 - During the year,
Marshall McLuhan had his "Understanding Media: The Extensions of Man" published.
He tried to bring the awareness to people-in-general that the medium through which a communication is communicated affects the content and effect of the communication. The difference is felt both by the sender of the communication and the receiver. Listening to a radio program encourages the development of human visual imagination. The human mind seeks to "fill in" that part of reality which is missing. Watching TV, on the other hand encourages the human mind to fill in another aspect of reality: form. The flat image on the picture tube is enhanced by the human imagination such that it seems to "come alive". Observers speak of the images which they are seeing as if they are in the present tense, even though they may have been photographed decades before, or, may represent a future yet to happen. Actors are often spoken of as if they are really the people they are portraying and the plots are true to their life. We feel emotion for them, as if we knew them like neighbours. Yet it is all illusion.

Failure to recognize the illusionary nature of all media is to allow oneself to be manipulated, deceived, informed, and programmed by that media. The escape from its power is not through denial of its power nor through a comprehension of how it "works". Rather, it comes only by an assertion of one's own personal experience and interaction with reality and the understanding of how the media can compliment or skew that true reality. Allowing yourself to accept the authority of the medium, because it refuses to acknowledge you is little different than selling your spirit into slavery.

1964 - In December,
The "Report of the U.S. Special Commission on the Nation's Health" was given to the President.
It concluded that half of the population of the United States suffered from some form of chronic disease, and only a small percentage of all Americans are free from any kind of physical ailment or defect. Also to be noted was the fact that the USA had more mental hospitals and sanitoriums, more psychiatrists and psychoanalysts per capita than any other Earth nation. It was estimated that one out of every ten Americans might spend part of their life in a mental (health) institution.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1965 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
Doctor Zhivago; The IPCRESS File; The Sandpiper; A Patch of Blue; The Spy Who Came In From The Cold; Cat Ballou; Shenandoah; Soylent Green; The Bedford Incident; The Sound of Music; War of the Planets; Mirage; She; The Cincinnati Kid; Thunderball; The Agony and the Ecstasy; Town Tamer; Those Magnificient Men in their Flying Machines; How to Murder Your Wife; Baby the Rain Must Fall; What's New Pussycat?; I Saw What You Did; The Truth About Spring; The Pawnbroker

Television : Run For Your Life, Get Smart, Voyage to the Bottom of the Sea, Lost in Space, The Man from U.N.C.L.E..
Songs : Satisfaction; You've Lost That Lovin' Feelin'; Downtown; Turn! Turn! Turn!; Stop! In The Name Of Love; Liar, Liar; Do You Believe In Magic; This Diamond Ring; My Girl; I Got You Babe; Get Off My Cloud; Sounds of Silence; Help Me Rhonda; Tamborine Man; Eve of Destruction; King of the Road; What's He Doing In My World; Ribbon of Darkness; The First Thing Every Morning; May the Bird of Paradise Fly; England Swings; Make The World Go Away; Is It Really Over; 10 Little Bottles.
General News :

Consumer Price Index: 94.5
Toys in North America mirrored mass media violence based on technological sophistication (James Bond, Johnny Seven) & black humour (The Munsters).
Skiing for the family became increasingly popular in Canada.
Long hair became a method of acting out for North American teens.
Electric appliances became the norm in North American households.
Instant and frozen and TV dinners became established in supermarkets.
Motorcycles by Honda and Yamaha became popular with teenagers in Canada.
During 1965, 100,000 Vietnamese civilians will die in the Vietnam War; 415,000 since 1961; 47.5% are estimated to have been under the age of 16.

1965 - On January 01,
USSR Premier Alexei Kosygin pledged the Soviet Union to an "active policy of peace and relaxation of international tension." He offered joint actions between the USSR and other countries for general and complete disarmament, outlawing of nuclear weapons, and an agreement to end "foreign interference" in the internal affairs of other states. He also sent a letter to "Comrade Premier Chou en-Lai urging similar measures in reply to Chou's invitation to hold a summit meeting on nuclear weapons.

1965 - During the year,
The Earth will be in Opposition to Mars and an increased intensity of UFO sightings, particularly in the area of the eastern seaboard USA states, are reported.

1965 - During the year,
Both France and the USSR favour a return to the Gold Standard for trade exchange.
The USSR wishes to become more involved in the international trading market yet is hampered by its minimal trade with the USA and its resultant small amount of US dollar international exchange. Its customers want to be paid in dollars, not in rubles. A return to the gold standard would enable the Soviet Union to trade some of its gold for US dollars. In France, a leader in the possibility of a unified European federation, a return to a gold standard would provide a fair chance for the common currency of the federation to become as internationally accepted for trade as the USA dollar has become. French and European pride is debased by having to "worship" the American currency; they would rather revere their own.

1965 -
A letter from USSR Foreign Minister Gromyko to North Vietnamese Foreign Minister Suan Tui repeated an earlier promise that the USSR would help North Vietnam if it came under attack. (It has been rumoured that the USA plans to use force to stop supplies reaching pro-Communist guerrillas in South Vietnam by attacking North Vietnamese bases.) Gromyko also added "demands that the USA end all interference in the affairs of South Vietnam. The Vietnamese, he said should be left "to settle their internal affairs." The Soviet government believed, Gromyko said, that it was the duty of all parties to the Geneva Accords on Indochina "to take the necessary steps to frustrate plans of the US military for extending the aggressive war in Indochina."

1965 - On January 06,
China denounced the United Nations as "a United States imperialist instrument of aggression" and a tool of colonialism. In an editorial in the People's Daily, which supported Indonesia's withdrawal from the UN, it described the UN as "an infamous organ in the service of old and new colonialism and a vile place for a few powers to share the spoils."

This was an expected response towards an international organization, ostensibly set up for world peace which as part of its record has provided a division of Korea, has allowed the build-up of war in Indo-China, and, has refused to acknowledge the existence of the majority of the Chinese peoples for several decades after its formation. The elitist Security Council veto as part of the basic structure of the UN condemned it from the beginning from taking any truly peace providing action in situations involving the strongest and most colonial nations on the Earth. This has equalled token contributions to peace while the nations with the economies most dependent upon military production and the politics of warmongering appear to receive tacit approval for their ventures by virtue of the UN's contractual hands-off policy towards them.

1965 - On January 08,
President Charles De Gaulle, of France, determined to develop his own European nuclear deterrent, seemingly at any price, is now out-bidding West Germany for German rocket scientists working in Egypt. Two French projects for placement of repatriated German rocketeers are the 3-stage Dimant and the underwater Mer-Sol-Balistique-Strategique. Twenty German rocket scientists already are working on the Dimant, a middle-range ballistic missile, under the Franco-German cultural and scientific exchange agreement. The MSBS is General de Gaulle's copy of the USA polaris. The two missiles are designed as carriers for nuclear warheads. West Germany is refusing to enact legislation forcing the repatriation of the scientists helping President Nasser develop a family of Arab missiles to menace Israel.

1965 - On January 11,
A USA-built U-2 reconnaissance plane was shot down over northern China last night, the New China News Agency reported. The plane "of Chiang Kai-shek's gang" according to the agency, was reported to have been the 4th U-2 shot down in the past 2 years. Meanwhile, China has launched a program for a substantial build-up of naval forces and coastal defenses.

1965 - On January 11,
The USSR announced that it had orbited "Cosmos 52", the 52nd successful and reported launch of a space series to gather data for manned flights. Beginning with 12 launches in 1962, 52 known launches would be made during this year. This designation, "Cosmos", would also be applied to launch failures, well into the 1980s, for satellites originally intended to be part of the Venera or Mars designated programs.

1965 - On January 13,
Development of the Voyager spacecraft and other aspects of the NASA space program, receive a budget allocation of $5.25 billion by the US government.

1965 - On January 18,
The worst gales in more than 10 years with winds up to 101 mph, left a trail of death and destruction in Britain.

1965 - On January 20,
The USA considered charging the USSR with violating the limited test-ban treaty as a result of an underground explosion on January 15 in central Asia. The USA AEC said last night that the blast had produced some fallout in the northern Pacific near Japan. Officials noted that, under the treaty, fallout is supposed to be kept within the boundaries of the testing nation.

1965 - In January,
A crewman aboard a Provincial Aeronautical Bureau aircraft photographed a cigar-shaped capsule estimated to be about 8 metres long and 1 meter in diameter which fell at San Miguel, Argentina. Local inhabitants said the object was a flying saucer and that they had seen little individuals working around the craft in uniforms like diver's suits that gave off a strange phosphorescence.

1965 -
A USSR supersonic rocket carrying plane was pictured in a recent (before January 25) issue of the Soviet Army newspaper "Red Star". The paper declared that the plane can launch a missile to any spot on the globe with 100% success (not accounting for intercept capabilities of other nations, spaceperson interference, or, solar flare precipitated electronic irregularities.

1965 - On January 27,
Lt. General Nyuyen Khanh, commander-in-chief of South Vietnam's armed forces, assumed power today by toppling the USA supported civilian government headed by Premier Tran Van Huang. It is the 6th political upheaval in the past 15 months in Saigon and it followed a week of Buddhist-inspired rioting. It is the result of a "purge" initiated by younger officers and Vice Air Marshal Nguyen Cao Ky and General Nguyen Chanh Thi following weeks of unproductive effort by an fragmented civil government. American representatives express severe concern to the officers. They offer to cooperate with civilian politicians to form a new government but Buddhist leaders refuse to participate and begin more demonstrations, hunger strikes and immolations. Protestors publicly demand the resignation of Ambassador Taylor and 5000 students sack the U.S. Information Service library in Hue. The Vietcong decimate two elite South Vietnamese units in major battles during this anarchy.

1965 - On January 28,
Responsible Witnesses had reported UFO sightings over Langley Air Force Base.
Strangely, the Air Force failed to investigate the incident and subsequently misrepresented the facts. Why?

1965 -
Jerome Clark speculates that UFO beings might put a false cover over their activities ... to discourage legitimate inquiry into the saucer field by making it look ridiculous, and to instill false ideas into the minds of those who do go to investigate the subject.

1965 - By February 01,
The first atomic bomb for Indonesia was being worked on by 200 scientists.
Brigadier General Hartono said last November that Indonesia would explode an atomic bomb in 1965 and that it has begun surveying the possibility of producing intercontinental ballistic missiles.

1965 - On February 02,
A plan to set up nuclear submarine and weapons bases in Japan by the USA was announced on Moscow radio. The USA nuclear submarine "Seadragon" is making a second visit to the port of Sasebo today. "US imperialists are planning to make the Japanese islands their bases for nuclear-powered submarines and weapons. It cannot be ignored that a Japanese port becomes the entrance for vessels equipped with nuclear rockets to the great ocean extending up the coasts of other peace-loving countries of Asia."

The Cuban Missile Crisis of the earlier 1960s presented exactly the same risk to the USA by the USSR and almost resulted in World War III. This time Japanese demonstrators against the locating of US nuclear submarines in their ports would eventually be resolved by the Japanese Navy acquiring a number of late model nuclear submarines and continuing to provide a real and maximum threat to the USSR through to the end of the 1990s.

1965 - On February 02,
In Pavia, Italy, NOISE as a cause of increased frequency of heart attacks was stated by Professor Salvatore Maugeri, a prominent Italian physician and director of the Labor Medicine Clinic. In long studies which he conducted in the noisiest Italian cities, he found that noise placed extra strain on the human heart resulting in overwork and contributing to fatal heart attacks.

1965 - On February 02,
It was announced that the Egyptian government would issue a special bonus of 10,000,000 birth control pills at low cost for Bairam, a 3-day festive period starting today. Bairam comes at the end of the Moslem fast of Ramadan, a month long period of self-denial between sunrise and sunset.
Information was not given to suggest that the recipients of the pills would be given any instruction in their use, as to how long the pills would have to be taken before becoming effective, or whether supplies would be allotted in packets to cover a particular period. No "next-day" tablets are now available. Most birth-control pill medications are recommended to be taken for up to 2 months before being intimately involved without other forms of protection.

1965 - On February 06,
"Flaming Dart", a plan of reprisal air strikes, is approved by President Johnson following Vietcong attacks earlier in the day on a US Army barracks at Pleiku and a nearby helicopter base. American aircraft strike North Vietnamese military installations just beyond the 17th parallel DMZ. On February 10, after Vietcong attacks on an American enlisted men's quarters at Qui Hhon, Johnson orders another heavier series of air strikes. A few advisers have maintained from the beginning that he air strikes are unlikely to diminish North Vietnamese resolve. The rest are more interested in action and vengeance. Thousands of Vietnamese have died; now less than a dozen Americans have been killed.

1965 - On February 07,
Egypt was preparing to receive a large consignment of Soviet arms while Jordon had received several dozen USA tanks. Israel's Army Chief of Staff, General Izhak Rabin said in Tel Aviv, "These arms programs are part of an overall Arab policy with no other purpose than aggressive military preparations aimed at Israel". In Cairo, President Nasser declared that Egypt will sever relations with West Germany if that country doesn't stop giving arms to Israel. The Middle East would become one of the most densely armed geographical regions due to the competition of arms merchants represented by many of the major industrialized nations.

1965 - On February 10,
Rome's worst blizzard since 1796 bogged the city down in snow, slush, broken trees, tangled power lines and traffic jams. A day-long storm blanketed the city and a large part of Italy with 10 inches of snow.

1965 - During February,
Pope Paul VI increases the number of cardinals in the Roman Catholic Church from the previous standard of 70 to 101.

1965 - On February 11,
West Germany halted arms shipments to Israel in an attempt to stop the Arab world granting diplomatic recognition to East Germany. The arms agreement was said to have been made in a secret meeting in New York in 1960, but until now Bonn had refused to confirm that such an agreement existed.
Political showmanship resulted in action in a situation where the parties to an agreement had knowingly subverted the contract in order to make more sales and deliveries (for money and jobs) in hypocracy to their avowed morality. Seems to be a human characteristic.

1965 - By mid February,
"Rolling Thunder", a policy of gradually intensified air attacks against North Vietnam, is initiated, with little discussion, by the U.S. administration. Control gradually diminished as the use of napalm was authorized for greater destructiveness, and pilots were given authority to strike "alternative targets" without prior authorization if the original targets proved inaccessible. In April, American and South Vietnamese pilots would fly 3,600 sorties against North Vietnamese targets. Anticipating Vietcong attacks against U.S. Air bases, General Westmoreland requests extra ground troops to protect the base at Danang. The administration, ignoring the relevance of the decision, agreed almost routinely. On March 8, two battalions of American Marines splashed ashore.

1965 - On February 15,
A five-power conference to revise the United Nation's Charter, including China, as requested by President Charles De Gaulle of France, was brushed aside today; yet Moscow praised De Gaulle for favouring a return to the gold standard and called for an end to the supremacy of the USA dollar in international trade.

1965 - In February,
The U.S.A. begins bombing North Vietnam.
At the time, no known North Vietnamese troops were in the South.
The reason given for the bombing was that the U.S.A. forces were rescuing the South Vietnamese from "aggression"; since the government of South Vietnam had been installed by the U.S.A. and the people it was protecting was the South Vietnamese, then the North Vietnamese must be the "source of the aggression".

1965 - On February 16,
USSR Premier Kosygin demanded, in a message sent to a preparatory meeting of the Indochinese People's conference in Phon Penh, capital of Cambodia, that the USA withdraw its forces from South Vietnam. "The Soviet Union resolutely demands the withdrawal of USA troops and military equipment from South Vietnam, the cessation of armed provocations against the Democratic Republic of Vietnam, Laos and Cambodia and the rejection of any military interference in the internal affairs of Indochina ... (or) the USA would be responsible for the dire consequences."
At the same time, China charged that a USA warship intruded into its territorial waters northeast of Pingtan Island this week, and issued the 362nd "serious warning against this military provocation."

1965 - On February 21,
In New York, Malcolm X was assassinated as he rose to address 500 people.
The Afro-Asian Unity which he had founded, he left recently after returning from a trip to Mecca. A week before, his house in Queens, New York was bombed when 4 Molotov cocktails were thrown through his living room window. During a recent 18 week European and Middle Eastern tour he was barred from France and was accused of fanning racialism in Britain. He had declared recently that he believed in the oneness of mankind, the Creator - to whom colour does not matter, and, that a person should be judged by outward acts.

1965 - On March 02,
John Reeves, a retired longshoreman, at his home on the outskirts of Brooksville, Florida, late at night, while taking a walk behind his house came upon a landed object. From his left came a "robotlike" being that was walking towards the craft. It stopped, turned, and raised something to its face, almost like a tourist raising a camera. There was a flash, like a lightbulb going off. The being returned to the object, the 4-legged landing gear retracted, and the UFO took off with a roar and a whistling sound. As he was without his glasses, Reeves' descriptions could not be too specific. The object was 20 to 30 feet in diameter and 8 to 10 feet thick. The being wore a stiff, silvery suit and seemed to have an inverted glass bowl on his head.
After the object left, Reeves found 2 sheets of paper on the ground near where the being had first appeared. They had strange marks on them like hieroglyphics. Reeves described them as a combination of Chinese characters and shorthand symbols. Reeves made a photocopy of them.

Shortly afterwards, USAF officers arrived, interviewed him, took the papers and left.
Initially, a sheriff's deputy arrived and cutting a corner off one of the pages, he touched a match to it. It burned like flash paper -- a quick, bright flame with almost no smoke and very little residue. Several weeks later, the USAF returned what they said they had taken, claiming that the papers bore a message saying that it was from Mars and was a request for a traveller to return home. The returned paper did not burn like the original had, the marks on it were not the same, and a deputy agreed with Reeves that it was not the same papers.
Several months later, a second landing took place in the same area as the first.
This time footprints were found. Also found were some small metallic objects and a short piece of wire. The metal turned out to be pure titanium, extremely rare in a pure state because of its high melting point. The sensation-seeking press so dramatized and changed the events that many thrill seekers mobbed the site; in an effort to "clear" the site for serious investigators and possible future contact the APRO said the case was a hoax. Why did the USAF switch the evidence ?

1965 - During the year,
Limitation of population growth began to be taken seriously.
Since the late 18th century, when Walter Malthus had warned that population could grow faster than resources, eventually putting human existence in question, little acknowledgement had been given to the concept. Now, scientists and ecological experts, in increasing numbers, warned of the dangers of irresponsible population growth. Rejected as irrelevant during the 1950s, former presidents Eisenhower and Truman now agreed to serve as co-chairmen for Planned Parenthood/World Population. President Johnson sent a message to the U.S.A. Congress warning of the disastrous consequences of the world population explosion; it responded the next year by granting money to the Health, Education, and Welfare (HEW) and to the Office of Economic Opportunity (OEO) to support birth control programs both locally and internationally.

1965 - On March 03,
A single management for the Common Market, the "European Atomic Energy Commission" and the High Authority of the European Coal and Steel Pool has been promised by early 1966 in a unanimous decision of the 6 Common Market Members. The decision, after a year of discussion, was hailed by members as "decisive step towards European integration." The future single executive commission will be located in Brussels; the European Parliament will sit in Strasbourg, and Luxembourg will be the seat of the European High Court, the European Investment Bank, and various financial, statistical and juristical services.

1965 - On March 04,
New underground nuclear tests were conducted by both the USA and the USSR.
The American test, in Nevada, was described as a low intermediate range test equivalent to less than 200,000 tons of TNT. The force of the Soviet test was expected to be smaller.

1965 - During the year,
Peter Goldmark Sr., director of CBS Laboratories, develops Electronic Video Recording, which turns an ordinary TV set into a movie screen when a film cartridge recorder/player is attached.
A native of Hungary, he had joined the CBS Labs in 1936, developed the world's first practical colour TV in 1940 after seeing the color movie Gone With the Wind. He changed the history of recordings in 1948 when he developed the 12-inch 33 RPM long-playing record, ending the need for heavy, 78-rpm discs. Before dying in December, 1977, in a car crash, he would state:
"It is not hardware, gadgetry or beautiful labor-saving devices that will give man the peace of mind he craves. Our bathrooms are more luxurious than those of ancient Rome. We jet around the world faster than Caesar would march from Pompeii to Rome. But have our basic instincts and thinking processes improved? If we could have push-buttoned our way to happiness, we would already have reached nirvana.
Scientists have developed ways to communicate with astronauts circling the moon.
What we need now is a better way to communicate, person-to-person here on earth."

1965 - On March 05,
The state of Kurdistan, in northeastern Iraq, was set up by 2 million rebellious Kurd tribesmen.
They expect attacks from the Iraqi government forces in the spring. Led by Mustafa el Barzani, they have been demanding autonomy and battling government troops for four years. Their new state has independent juridical, customs, fiscal and military organizations says Ismet Sherif Vanly, Barzani's representative in Paris.
During the 1930s, the Kurds were then bombed and gased by the British colonial government who tried to subjugate them. Within another 25 years, Iraq will attempt again to bring them totally under Iraqi control and obedience.

1965 - On March 05,
The USA announced that it will destroy its Strategic Air Command fleet of 1,100 B-47 nuclear bombers - a nuclear force more powerful than the combined French, British and Chinese forces - because they are too expensive to operate and maintain. Cheaper and militarily more effective new missiles will replace them. Combat will become more cybernetic (combining intellectualization and technology) and less determined by communication, negotiation and other interpersonal skills. In summary, fewer people will now be required to make the decision to begin and to initiate a nuclear war of global influence.

1965 - On March 07,
In Selma, Alabama, USA, freedom marchers were brutalized by state troopers and mounted deputies.
The 600 marching Negroes were charged by 2 dozen troopers, at the edge of Selma's business district as they knelt to pray. Witnesses told of posse-men using bullwhips and ropes to flail the Negroes while crowds of whites stood by and cheered. Others were beaten with clubs. At least 67 Negroes were injured, 17 are in hospital with broken legs and arms, head injuries and hysteria. In Washington, the Justice Department has asked the F.B.I. for a full and prompt investigation of reports that unnecessary force was used to dispense the marchers. It was later announced that FBI agents would arrest and charge up to 100 law officers who had used unnecessary force.

1965 - On March 09,
USSR cosmic space probe ZOND-2, once reported dying in space, is now said to be "quite alive" and headed for a spectacular pass within 900 miles of Mars on August 6.

1965 - On March 10,
American crime statistics for 1964 were reported by J.Edgar Hoover of the FBI.
Reported serious crime jumped by 13%, with suburbia showing an increase of 18%. Forcible rape and aggravated assault showed the sharpest rises. During the last 5 years, the crimes reported rate has risen 5 times as fast as the population.

1965 - On March 11,
USA federal control over illicit drug trafficking was increased when the House of Representatives passed a bill on a vote of 402 to 0 to limit the availability of LSD-25, an experimental drug, amphetamines (pep pills) and barbiturates (goof balls). During the previous 2-day debate, crimes, sex orgies, and other abnormal behaviours were cited and attributed to the use of these drugs, including instances at Harvard University.
No plans were made nor discussions offered as to why humans were turning to such coping options of denial and withdrawal and no awareness was demonstrated that the governing body might be more constructively concerned in the psychological health of a population which was becoming drug dependant.

1965 - On March 15,
The 1965 British gang war (mods vs rockers) opened in the seaside resort of Clacton, where last year, in one riot, 120 teenagers were arrested in 36 hours. As usual, telephones were ripped from booths, windows smashed, benches tossed into the sea - but patrol cars and motorcycle policemen were better prepared and ushered the troublemakers out of town.

1965 - On March 20,
President Lyndon B. Johnson of the USA, federalized the Alabama National Guard and ordered them to protect demonstrators on the march from Selma to Montgomery. Governor George Wallace had told the President that he was unable to call up the Guard to protect the marchers, although he was willing, because the state could not afford the $360,000 cost. Johnson was facing increasing concern over the impact that international media coverage would inflict on the American image when viewed in Communist and allied countries. More pictures of unarmed passive civilians being beaten by government police officers would hardly convey a picture of freedom, unity and prosperity.

1965 - On March 24,
A Marathon Teach-In and Anti-War Protest lasting 34 hours was held at the Berkeley, California campus. Organized by the Vietnam Day Committee, in which the National Committee of the Socialist Workers Party (SWP) and the YSA played a role, 30,000 people attended.

1965 - On March 24,
The independent republic of El Pato, a region of southern Columbia controlled by "bandits" for the past 13 years, was destroyed. Columbian warplanes and helicopters airlifted several battalions of infantry and national police into the region, seized strategic sites, and "cleared out" the bandits. They had set up their own government, created a militia-like force, and established a tax system.

1965 - On March 24,
R.R. Sen, director general of the United Nations Food and Agriculture Organization, warned that if population growth is not stabilized, the world will face massive famine and starvation. It was the first official UN comment linking the population problem and the fight against world hunger. Mr. Sen said that if solutions were not found to both problems "we will face disaster of an unprecedented magnitude." He stressed that family planning must be accepted and food production must be substantially improved with more equitable distribution under international cooperation.

1965 - On March 26,
New York City Correction Commissioner Anna K. Kross stated a request to use 2 aircraft carriers - the 27,000 ton Franklin and the 40,000 ton Champlain , both due to be scrapped - to be used as floating prisons, noting that
"We're badly in need of jail space."

1965 - On March 28,
An earthquake in central Chile struck during the noon hour striking the village of El Cobre with the greatest loss. Felt over a large part of southern South America, a 230 foot reservoir dam was shattered 75 miles north of Santiago resulting in a deluge of 2 million tons of water and mud down the valley and over the copper mining village of El Cobre. Numbers of homeless reached 27,000 and over 250 persons died.

The GRAYs see such devastation as typical of human cultures and a confirmation of their superiority and right to occupy the Earth. From their viewpoint, only humans would have been so military power obsessive as to build a dam in a known earthquake region to produce power for a mining operation operated by workers who were kept at a subsistence level and produced a material largely of use to the "wasteful" (their term of reference) forms of electrical energy production and the military production of powerful nations. The GRAYs accept that the patterns of intelligence (habits) which they have developed on other planets and moons are the only CORRECT way to engineer a culture. Incidents of this nature provide the GRAYs with the confidence that with little assistance, humans will eventually annihilate themselves leaving use of the Earth to them.
The REDs grieve when they see such devastation for they know that had humans chosen to develop their spiritual powers culturally, the need for the reservoir and the copper and the incidence of poverty, lack of consideration for the environment, and irresponsible population growth - would not have occurred and peace, harmony and happiness would have been the result. The REDs continue to mentor individual receptive humans in the hope that humanity will respect and acknowledge the information which these humans reveal and choose to adopt a more spiritual, and less destructive, lifestyle.
The BLONDs view incident of this nature as a confirmation that their rational abilities, had they been used to "manage" this situation, would never have allowed such a circumstance to occur. First, by educating, negotiating and enforcing peace - vast requirements for this type of electrical power and quantities of copper would not exist. Secondly, they would have managed population growth in accord with the resources of the "culture" to provide a full participation, contented, healthy population. Third, they would have considered environmental factors in any such construction. The BLONDs anticipate a future period when human organization will be so fragmented that humans will invite and accept the leadership and direction of the BLONDs.

Although many humans have a trait of blaming their "God" for the disasters which befall them, it is they who bring, by group influence, ALL catastrophes on themselves. Even natural disaster influences on humans could be avoided by the use of "spiritual" intelligence by which individuals receive guidance from the "God-Intelligence" of the world.

1965 - During the year,
Richard Hofstadter's "The Paranoid Style in American Politics" is published.
In it, he demonstrates with examples how groups which tend to show overt concern about, and to develop theories of conspiracies, have always been a part of American history since the arrival of the Europeans. A number of received threats appear to be recurrent: Jews, internationalists and globalists, senior government officials, and, gun control. In a large country there will be differences of community cultures, that is, minority interests and concerns, contained within the whole. It is always the challenge for leaders of nations to maintain a unified national spirit while acknowledging legitimate regional or minority concerns. Human history has usually demonstrated weaknesses in the accomplishment of this balance. Frequently, the monarchal or the federal government involved has been impatient and intolerant of minority interests and has sought to suppress them by force, political manipulation, information-based contrivance, or, simple denial. Sometimes, these abuses of authority are not forgotten; sometimes they remain hidden for a long time.
Hofstadter finds that such passive-aggressive groups model their reactions after the passive-aggressive authoritarian style of the national government. So, the abused minority becomes abusive to those who represent the abusive administration. Because the rebellious minorities pursue socially negative means of expression, positive ones having not been modelled by the national government or having been ignored by it - the national administration, in turn, becomes increasingly paranoid about these apparent threats to the "nation, a culture, a way of life." Without either distractions or resolution of some of the abuses, an increasingly wider expression of paranoia may develop. Within the American context, the local militias began the War of Independence against what they felt to be an abusive monarchy. The KKK wore vestments in their attacks against Jews, Roman Catholics and Black Americans, thus mirroring the image of authority presented by the officials and some of the participants of the target groups. In a similar manner, the John Birch Society, formed into small groups called "cells" in their paranoic fear and hatred of Communist political movement supporters who traditionally had formed into cells.

1965 - On March 31,
A USA "pilotless high-altitude reconnaissance military plane", a drone, was reported shot down by the Chinese Army, on what was expected to have been a spy mission over South China. The New China News Agency said that this was the second such incident in 3 months.

1965 - On March 31,
Brilliant Balls of Fire are observed and reported in newspapers throughout British Columbia and parts of the northwestern USA.

1965 - On April 01,
A huge earthbound fireball roared over Chase, British Columbia, a lumbertown in the interior of B.C., 350 miles east of Vancouver. The object shook houses in that community as it lighted up the sky in a thunderous path stretching from the northern Peace River country to the south-central Kootenay mountains. Two fires flared up seconds after it flashed by. Constable Homenuk said fireballs are larger than meteorites and give off a great glare as they vaporize, leaving behind a plainly visible trail.

1965 - On April 03,
Soviet-built MiG Interceptor Fighters are first reported over Vietnam.
American Navy planes were attacking a highway and railway bridge 65 miles south of Hanoi, in North Vietnam at the time. Some older MiG-15s and MiG-17s are believed to have been given to North Vietnam to assist its defense. The Americans left the area before any confrontation took place. Any casualties resulting were among the North Vietnamese citizens and forces on the ground.

1965 - On April 05,
The USA satellite "Snapshot", powered by a nuclear reactor and launched Saturday, will undergo a critical test today. A ground signal will order it to turn on a tiny ion engine changing the satellite's thrust to an almost invisible electronic beam instead of hot gas power. If successful, it will mean a new and more powerful form of propulsion for space vehicles.

1965 - On April 08,
USSR astronomer Alexander Kalinyak reported the discovery that the 3 moons of Jupiter - Io, Europa, and Ganymede - have atmospheres.

1965 - In the April 16th edition of
"Time" magazine, an article on "The New Pornography" noted the following for the reader:

"With everyone so afraid of appearing square, the avant-garde is obviously trying to determine just how far things can be pushed before anyone will actually admit to being shocked. ... sex is an obsession with the Americans. ... The Greek term "pornographos", meaning literally "the writing of the harlots," has always been relative and subjective. ... In 1957, ... the Supreme Court ... defined obscenity as material "utterly without redeeming social importance," and set up as a test "whether to the average person, applying contemporary community standards, the dominant theme of the material taken as a whole appeals to the prurient interest. ... (Henry) Miller considers such (concerns) trivial in the light of the (hydrogen) Bomb.
'We are now passing through a period of what might be called "cosmic insensitivity"', a period when God seems more than ever absent from the world and man is doomed to come face to face with the fate he has created for himself. At such a moment, the question of whether man be guilty of using obscene language in printed books seems to me to be inconsequential.'

... the church today ... must help create an attitude of self-censorship and responsibility, otherwise, we're dead ducks. ... An open mind towards the new, the shocking, even the intolerable in art is an intellectual duty. If only because so many great and shocking artists from Swift to Joyce were so vehemently condemned at first. ... In their defense, it is often said that the new immoralists merely seek to show the world as they see it, in all its horror and lovelessness; but that is simply the old error of confusing art with the event, a propagation of the notion that a novel trying to convey dullness must be dull. Sheer nightmare does not redeem a book any more than sheer pollyannaism. ... Apart from making sex hideous and inhuman, the new pornographers also make it hopelessly dull. ... Much of the current writing on sex approaches this quality of mechanical repetition and unreality. ... Powerful words should be reserved for powerful occasions.
... Many authors today treat sex the way Marxist's treat economics: they see it as the root of everything, and daydream about sexual triumph the way revolutionary writers daydream about power. ... sex is a personal boast, a mystique and an ideology - and in all three capacities, solemn and unconvincing. ... The purpose of sex in serious literature is to help convey the feeling and meaning of life as it is. The literature neither denies the existence of the wildest abberations nor the use of the most clinical or bawdy language - but does not celebrate the norms.

1965 - On April 21,
An additional 40,000 American troops were decided as necessary for deployment to South Vietnam at a conference in Honolulu. Defense Secretary Robert McNamara, the Joint Chiefs of Staff and U.S. Ambassador Taylor determined that these troops would be restricted to an enclave strategy proposed by Taylor. Deployed in enclaves around U.S. bases, their backs to the sea, they would be authorized to undertake operations within 50 miles of their base area. This was hoped to deny the Vietcong an effective attack against the air bases thus permitting continued bombing of North Vietnam.
President Johnson, now beginning to see the complexity of the problem (American pride, American ideals, American involvement, South Vietnamese independence, Vietnamese common support for the Vietminh and the Vietcong, Chinese and Soviet backing for the Vietnamese, difficult battle terrain, unstable South Vietnamese political leadership, Buddhist opposition to American involvement and many South Vietnamese politicians and the war, rising casualties, ...) would not risk debate in the Congress or a formal declaration of war - which could bring the Soviet Union or China formally into the war. Johnson was well known in the Congress from his long tenure there and the confidence which the Congressmen held in him to adequately inform them and to do the right thing continually resulted in their undebated approval of his executive initiatives. Meanwhile he was deceiving them in hopes that power and force would win a victory and salvage American pride while maintaining "the Great Society". During April, 12,000 demonstrators protesting the war gathered in Washington. Open debate might destroy the "Great Society" of Johnson and its global influence.

1965 - On April 22,
Pope Paul VI said that a good Christian can be a good soldier & urged the faithful not to shirk military duty on the grounds of conscientious objection. His pronouncement was seen as a rebuke of Catholic priests who favour conscientious objection.

It is this style of authoritarian religious leadership which has contributed to human misery and intolerance for 1200 years. Spiritually, the question should never be one of going to war because a military, political or religious leader tells one. Spiritually, the decision is one which can only come to the individual who asks for guidance from the God of the Universe. Human wars are seldom more dignified than murder, rape and other forms of aggression committed under the excuse of a human authority who seeks to establish power, take revenge or build pride. The question of defense is often confused by the reality of who has been intolerant, vengeful, envious, or, simply a poor communicator - in the interaction with other groups of humans.

1965 - On April 23,
The USSR launched "Molniya 1" (Lightning 1) as their first reported communications satellite.
The broadcast of television programs between Vladivostok and Moscow, an overland distance of 5,700 miles, was carried out. The purpose of the satellite, which will follow an elliptical orbit ranging from 310 miles to 24,610 miles, is to relay TV programs and long-distance 2-way multi-channel telephone, radiophoto and telegraphic communications. Lightning 1 is orbiting the Earth every 11 hours and 48 minutes.

1965 - On April 24,
E.A. Bryant encountered 3 individuals from a landed spacecraft near Scoriton, England.
One of them allegedly identified himself : "My name is Yamski." (George Adamski, a UFO investigator, reporter and writer died on April 23.)

1965 - On April 24,
The USA National Academy of Sciences, issued a statement that Mars may harbour living things capable of subsisting without oxygen or water and using ultraviolet radiation, deadly to most earthly organisms - as a harmless source of energy.

1965 - On April 26,
Chinese Premier Chou En-Lai was reported to have told a senior Indonesian official, Sastroamidjojo, that China now considers it no longer necessary to insist on enrolment in the UN, since Indonesia has left the organization. "Instead, we are now considering the creation of a new world body which is progressive and revolutionary in nature," Chou was reported as saying.

1965 - On April 29,
The highest and fastest flight yet by a human-designed aircraft was reported as having taken place over the USA Edwards AFB in California when a SB70A bomber reached a speed of 1,630 mph at 62,000 feet on its 11th flight.

1965 - On April 30,
The number of poor in the USA, according to new standards set by the "USA Office of Economic Opportunity", is 34,600,000 - 80% of them are white. Under the old system, a poor family earned less than $3,000 a year and an individual $1,500. Now a family of 4 with an annual income below $3,130 and an individual grossing less than $1,540 is rated as poor.

1965 - On April 30,
The number of people who had died in Soviet concentration camps was stated as 10,000,000 by Professor Mihajlo Mihajlov, 31, to a court in Zadar, where he was accused of insulting Russia. He defended his statements on the basis of historical fact.

1965 - By May,
Dr. Bernard Grad, a research biochemist at Allan Memorial Institute of Psychiatry of McGill University in Montreal had performed some tests which demonstrated that the hands of some humans radiated healing energies. Working with a retired Hungarian Army colonel, Oskar Estebany, as a subject with demonstrated healing powers in his hands, Grad found that the sprouting of grains and the total amount of green plant issuing therefrom could be significantly increased when compared to controls, by watering them with a solution sealed in bottles and exposed only to the healing energy of Estebany's hands. Testing further, Grad found that the most important influence on a saline solution with which plants were watered was the mood of the person who held the solution beforehand.
The person who felt positive emotions about the possible good influence they might have on the plants resulted in healthier plants. A psychotic person was found to imbue the solution with energies which resulted in the slowest plant growth. The unemotional and uninformed person who held the solution produced an interim amount of growth between that of the person with the depressed mood and that of the person with the pleased mood. These findings were extended to offer an explanation for cultural prohibitions against menstruating women being involved in activities such as the canning of foods, the survival of cut flowers, etc. Presumably the accompanying mood of depression negatively influenced the life energies involved in the activity.

It should be of particular importance that if as a culture, humans see themselves as greatly superior to the plants which they grow for their survival and express moods of pride, impatience, anger, and disdain toward the plants, the crop may be less healthy than the one grown by the farmer who expresses sincere concern for his plant "children" who he acknowledges are equally a part of God's creation and worthy of respect. This attitude may one day mean the difference between the success and failure of a space colony in which the attitudes of the humans in charge of growing the food supply determine the difference between eventual starvation or community distress and adequacy and contentment. The history of humanity overall demonstrates an inability for humans to adopt, instill and practice this spiritual awareness for their survival on Earth.

1965 - During May - June,
Close-Range Sightings take place along the New South Wales/Queensland coast of Australia.

1965 - On May 03,
The Palestine Liberation Army got its first troops.
The PLA was formed last year after an Arab summit conference decided to train Palestinians to regain their homeland. A regiment of Syrian-trained commandos make up the new force.

1965 - On May 04,
$400,000 additional military support for South Vietnam is requested from the USA Congress by President L.B. Johnson; it is approved quickly and without dissent as support for troops already in the field. Hanoi had released proposals for a settlement several times, as recently as April 8, but American officials had got stuck in bureaucracy: it was easier to remain at war than to change direction, even for peace. With no further progress, the Vietcong began a new offensive in May.
In South Vietnam, a civilian government had been formed headed by Phan Huy Quat in February, but now a crisis arose around a cabinet shuffle and Air Marshal Nguyen Cao Ky and General Ngiyen Van Thieu dissolved the civil government and assumed power. With the uncertainties, General Westmoreland, the Joint Chiefs, and Walt Rostow of the State Department urged an intensification of the air war. A drastic expansion of the ground forces by 179,000 additional USA troops was also advocated by Westmoreland and the Joint Chiefs. Only George Ball and Washington attorney Clark Clifford vigorously opposed the commitment. Ball stated, "Once committed, there would be no turning back. Our involvement will be so great that we cannot - without national humiliation - stop short of achieving our complete objectives. In early July, Secretary of Defense, Robert McNamara, following a trip to Saigon concluded that with the increased Vietcong activity and the amount of territory held by them - the only alternative to withdrawal was a further commitment of 100,000 American combat forces.

1965 - On May 05,
Murray Rankin, President of the "Canadian Mental Health Association", expressed concern over the 2 million plus Canadian deemed to be damaged, disabled or impaired by mental and emotional disease and disorders. He said there had been a tragic increase of mental illness in the mid-teen group. A Boston psychiatrist who has studied children admitted to hospital with bruises and a lack of interest in life, told the American Psychiatric Association convention attendees that doctors "are reluctant to consider the diagnosis of parental abuse because it is personally abhorrent; it threatens to burden them with the role of the accuser ..." He said many parents who ill-treat their children seem normal in most ways, except in relation to their children. They expect them to have adult powers, he said.

Whenever humans are deprived of a happy (positive experience), hopeful (positive attitude), playful (positive education) childhood, their emotional development is suspended in favour of intellectual development. Subconsciously, the individual reacts against this "loss" by forever holding the world around him or her as negative and threatening. Linked with the unsophisticated and immediate "now" time emotions of anger, desire, sorrow and happiness - an underlying negative expectation promotes the development of behaviours which are obsessive in activities, interests, or ideas; depressed, socially withdrawn or compulsively interacting; likely to replicate their behaviour in those (adults and children) around them through imprinting, modeling and coercion.
Adults and children exposed to war or other catastrophic experiences and children without the guidance of responsible adults, or, encouraged to act as adults from an early age - are prime candidates. To a child, a "Cold War" potentially carries with it more terror than a "fighting" war. In the former, the participant must continually expect violent death and great destruction. The longer such actions do not take place, the more the child either withdraws emotional attachment to living - resulting in chronic depression, or, the more the child builds the irresponsible behaviour - built on a destroyed sense of reverence and spirituality - of live-for-today, do-whatever-you-feel-like responses to living.
In most militarily powerful nations now, the human participants have developed a tradition of several generations of family patterning in this negative abusive relationship direction. Child and adult sexual and physical abuse, both within the family and within institutions, became prevalent from the beginning of WWII. It would receive little social and political widespread acknowledgement until the late 1980s!

1965 - In May,
Mrs. C. Ehgvetz, a reader of one of Canada's major newspapers, wrote the following letter to it:
"Following a flash radio report that "perhaps hundreds had been killed and thousands left homeless and injured" by a cyclone in East Pakistan, May 12, there were no further details in the evening papers that day.
As we know someone in the Dacca area we were concerned and phoned the press.
We were informed that since no Canadians were involved it was not considered newsworthy. By Saturday, May 15, it became newsworthy enough to warrant a two-column headline, "20 Million Homeless, more expected and 5,000 killed" in 7 lines of type.
True there may have been no Canadians involved but what about Pakistan families here who want details of their homeland in distress? What about business houses doing business there? And our missions and schools there?
What about people concerned enough to want to send aid?
Can we ignore human suffering as immense as this disaster?"

This was a perspective on editorial and ownership selectivity of the news for the North American society. This one indication typified news awareness amongst the majority of humanity about each other in EVERY country. Political, entrepreneurial and sociological leadership in large-group human society has consistently taken a subculture-centred view of the world in which most of what happens on the planet is of no concern unless it directly benefit or threatens the subgroup on a daily basis. This is largely true of newspaper coverage of events throughout history.
A major earthquake which hit Japan in mid-1994 received comparable coverage to the above referenced event. War in which millions of troops were killed over a period of several years (Iran-Iraq) would receive a single 2-page story every 9 months, while the death of 6 nationals would be headline news for days. This is another example of the lack of spiritual emphasis which humanity place on their existence. Material self-interest and subculture egocentralism appear consistent with human culture.

1965 - On May 11,
A cyclone went through East Pakistan killing up to 5,000 persons and leaving 5,000,000 homeless.
On May 20, East Pakistan's Governor Abdul Menom Khan said that 12,033 persons had died in the cyclone and tidal wave that struck the nation. Such storms are not uncommon in this area of dense population and environmental degradation in which no preventive preparatory measures are taken.

1965 - On May 12,
A Cyclone struck East Pakistan.
It left more than 20 million persons homeless and resulted in over 5,000 deaths.
Unnumbered thousands were injured. In North American mass media there was hardly a mention of the occurrence. Cultural ethnocentrism remains high in spite of the potential it carries for greater awareness and understanding of others and their cultures. Very little news originating outside of North America is printed in North American newspapers and magazines, UNLESS there is a political motivation. Therefore, singular deaths of Americans in foreign countries and of small numbers of troops in Vietnam receive major coverage while 20 million requiring humanitarian assistance rather than armaments go unnoticed. Human have choices. Their leaders are responsible for informing them and for the choices made on their behalf.

1965 - On May 12,
Fred Smith, warden of the Collins Bay Penitentiary, said that by 1973, construction of new penal institutions in Canada for the prison population of 10,500 will be more than $120,000,000. That represents $11,429 per inmate: enough to provide counselling, retraining and housing for each inmate for 2 years. Instead, authorities would continue to imprison many offenders only to find a return-to-prison rate of over 65% within 2 years of release.

1965 - On May 14,
A plot by a secret Nazi organization in Sweden, the "Carl Ernfrid Calsbergs Foundation", has led to the arrest of the leader, Bjoern Lundahl, and six others. Lundahl is an aide to the Klu Klux Klan in the USA - registered as a Grand Dragon, carrying card no. 1-03-58. Together with these seven, police are questioning 100 others about plans to kill the Jews in Sweden with war gases, which documents revealed, were to be obtained from Egypt.

1965 - On May 14,
China exploded another nuclear bomb, this time over western mainland China.
A broadcast from Peking said: "This nuclear test is another achievement scored by the Chinese people in strengthening their national defense and safeguarding the security of their motherland and world peace." It was also used as a sign of victory for the political system.

1965 - On May 17,
Collie Leroy Wilkins, 21-year-old Klu Klux Klansman accused of killing Detroit civil rights worker Mrs. Viola Liuzzo, smoked cigars and signed autographs during weekend Klan fund rallies in North Carolina. Crowds in 3 towns cheered Wilkins, whose murder trial recently ended in a deadlocked jury. Chief Klan lawyer Matt Murphy Jr. said no white jury in Alabama would ever convict the trio.

1965 - On May 19,
American jet planes would fly over Hanoi, drop leaflets, and then bomb an ammunition depot, railway bridges and rolling stock, and a radar station south of Hanoi. On May 20, 40 US Navy planes from the carrier Coral Sea would again attack North Vietnam, bombing a radio station and strategic installations. These attacks followed a 6 day break in the air war against North Vietnam.

1965 - On May 24,
The USA openly increased its combat role in South Vietnam by using USA jet fighters against guerilla targets at a time when France, the Soviet Union and the UN are calling for a reconvening of the 1954 Geneva Conference on Indochina. President Johnson argued that "no meaningful proposals for negotiations" had been made and was apparently displeased at the UN's Mr. U. Thant declaring that Southeast Asian negotiations would eventually "enable the United States to withdraw gracefully from that part of the world." The USA is now reacting to historical events as Japan did before the end of World War II: there is no honour except in winning!

1965 - On May 26,
Jose Gorositza, Mexico's Nuclear Energy Commission director, announced that the country had the necessary elements to manufacture an atom bomb. He added that Mexico would never permit the manufacture or transportation of nuclear weapons in the country nor the installation of nuclear launching bases.

1965 - On May 27,
The Soviet Communist Party newspaper Pravda reported:
"It would be incorrect to hold that only a world war can bring about the unity of the Socialist camp and the world Communist movement." The statement was a criticism of China's opposition to efforts aimed at reaching a peaceful settlement in Vietnam, in opposition to the USSR. The newspaper editors believe that China is promoting a World War III confrontation to resolve the Vietnam conflicts.
Meanwhile, four destroyers of the USA 7th fleet shelled Communist Viet Cong coastal targets for the first time in South Vietnam. In reality, the destroyers had carried out fixed firing missions in the coastal areas of Binh Dinh, Dinh Thuan and Phu Yen provinces, Central South Vietnam from May 20 to May 27. 900 Australian troops left their country yesterday to join USA forces and New Zealand has pledged to send 120 troops.

1965 - On June 13,
For more than 10 days, South Africa's Cape Province would receive heavy snowfalls in the mountainous districts, effectively isolating the farmers in the remote regions. Army helicopters would begin dropping food and supplies to families after 10 days.

It is, unfortunately, indicative of larger human cultures that a segregation and specialization of activities by the participants makes each dependent upon the others. In such circumstances the state exercises ultimate authority over the individual, for freedom and equality, as interpreted by the state. To the earliest and longest sustaining human organizations, hunting and gathering bands, a situation in which the band unit (family and neighbours) could not cope with every challenge by themselves, was one equal to death. Each band provides all of the skills and supplies required for survival.

1965 - From June 15th on
A heat wave of high temperatures would be experienced through much of Italy for over 2 weeks.
Tens of thousands of people flocked to the beeches where numbers of drownings swelled. Dozens of others experienced nervous breakdowns. In the Alps, the heat melted ice and brought to the surface the skeleton of a man, believed to be a World War 1 soldier buried in the Adamello Glacier for nearly 50 years. The situation was complicated on June 30 by the start of a 3-day strike by garbage collectors which posed a serious health threat.

1965 - On June 18,
The worst drought in the history of Australia was reported to have spread over 1/3rd of the nation including areas of Queensland, New South Wales, South Australia, Western Australia and the Northern Territory. Sheep and cattle would be lost together with a part of the wheat crop.
Also on June 18, Tornado-created floods spread through Colorado, USA, after torrential rains of up to 6 inches rainfall, made evacuation of towns in the southwest - La Junta, Lamar, and Holly - a lifesaving measure. Ironically, the same area had been experiencing a prolonged drought. Governor John Love asked President Johnson to declare the state a disaster area. The flood originated in Kansas state, along the Arkansas River and would force more than 18,000 people from their homes. The flood would be the greatest in western Kansas history.

1965 - On June 19,
A "Flotilla" of UFOs were seen by scientists from Argentina, Britain, and Chile from their Antarctic bases.

1965 - On June 21,
Carlos P. Romulo, former President of the UN General Assembly and now president of the University of the Philippines, told the 12th congress of "World Federalists" in San Francisco that the UN probably won't last another 10 years unless it is strengthened to "keep the human race from committing suicide." Further he said, "The United Nations charter must be revised in this generation or there may never be a next generation."

1965 - On July 01,
Just after 5.45 a.m., Maurice Masse, while working in his lavender fields on the Valensole plateau in the Basses Alpes of SE France, heard a shrill whistling noise. He looked around to see a dull-coloured object the size of a Renault Dauphine car, shaped like a rugby football, with a cupola on top. It was standing on 6 metallic legs, and there was also a central support, which appeared to be stuck in the ground. Close to the machine, Masse saw what he assumed to be 2 boys, bending over a lavender plant. Believing them to be vandals, he crossed the vineyard only to find that the beings were not boys but 2 small humanoids with large bald heads.
He was about 15 feet from them when one of them turned and pointed a pencil-shaped instrument at him. Immediately, he was frozen in his stance. The beings were less than 4 feet tall, and were wearing close-fitting grey-green overalls. They had huge pumpkin-shaped white-skinned bald heads. Their cheeks were wide and fleshy, narrowing to very pointed chins; the eyes were large and slanting. The mouths were like thin slits and opened to form lipless holes. The beings appeared to communicate with each other, but not with their mouths, for inarticulate sounds seemed to come from their mid-body regions. Their glances were not hostile and Masse did not feel afraid of them. Several minutes later, they returned to the craft, seeming to bounce in their walk as an astronaut would on the Moon. They seemed to slide along bands of light to enter the object through a sliding door. They watched him from within the craft.

There was a thump and the central support retracted, the legs began to spin, and the object floated away at a 45 degree angle, making a shrill whistling sound. At 65 feet, it just disappeared, although traces of the direction of its flight were found on the lavender plants for more than 100 yards. Initially, these plants withered, then recovered and grew taller and finer than the others nearby. Masse remained frozen in movement for about 15 minutes, then began to regain his abilities. His "paralysis" may have been the result of a post-hypnotic type of suggestion for a true full-body paralysis would have stopped his heart.
Masse ran down to the nearby Valensole Cafe des sports, where he mentioned the incident to a friend, the owner. The owner confirmed the marks in the field as did Masse's daughter. Marks of only 4 of the feet of the craft were present and what had been a patch of wet mud where the central support had been turned to concrete-like hardness by morning. Two years later, a 10 foot diameter space populated only with weeds, despite ploughing and replanting, remained where the craft had landed. At first, Masse had not wanted to mention the incident to the police or gain any publicity, fearing uncertainty and ridicule. He soon did receive considerable publicity and, in the end, he sowed the field to wheat so as to conceal the site. Masse also did not reveal until later that during the week preceding the contact, he and his father had noticed that young lavender plants were damaged as though someone was taking cuttings from them.

1965 - During July,
UFO Activity in the Antarctic is viewed by a number of observers.
On July 3, scientists and naval personnel from Argentina and Great Britain sight a UFO off Deception Island.

1965 - On July 02,
Police in Port Said, Egypt acted on the charges of ship captains who complained that their crews were bringing pornographic pictures aboard their ships. Nearly half a million pornographic books and a large number of obscene pictures were seized from a shop near the docks.

1965 - In the July 22 issue of
"Time" magazine, Psychiatrist Herbert Spiegel, an assistant professor in Columbia University's College of Physicians and Surgeons, and Dr. James H. Ryan, a Columbia instructor, presented their findings on the capacity to hypnotize people through the medium of television. Theoretically, the researchers expected the answer to be "no" because the capacity to go into trance was believed to lie with the subject.
Using a closed-circuit system, Spiegel sat in front of a TV camera in Columbia's Psychiatric Institute. A 20-yr.-old girl, whom he had hypnotized several times before watched a receiver 4 floors above. After some chitchat, Spiegel told the girl, "I'm going to count one, two, three, and your eyes will close and you'll go into a relaxed state," and she promptly did. Spiegel told her that her forearm would become paralysed and numb, and that this condition would persist, even after she "came to", until he touched her elbow. When he ended the trance, the girl remained rooted before the receiver, her left arm numb and inert. After the usual wait for the hospital elevator, Spiegel walked into the laboratory and touched her elbow. Only then did she regain sensation in the arm and the power to move it independently.

The next subject was a stranger to Dr. Spiegel, a 30-yr.-old man, who went through the same TV routine. This time, the subject was told that he would not be able to unclasp his hands until the psychiatrist touched his head. Sure enough, he kept his hands gripped together after the trance and released them only on the prearranged signal.
Spiegel and Ryan suggest that TV hypnosis might be useful "in mass education, group treatment and research." It might be valuable, they add hopefully, for pilots in long space flights, to help them cope with feelings of isolation and loneliness - a radio message from Earth, for example, could activate a previously implanted suggestion of encouragement and companionship. But they also warn that unscrupulous operators might "confuse, exploit and deceive hypnotizable subjects." This experiment, they concluded, "emphasizes the compelling need to maintain responsible, stringent safeguards and controls over the personnel having access to public broadcasting systems."

Much discussion and some research would be done to highlight the possibility of a "brainwashed" and manipulative society and the upward societal trends developing in community violence and community alienation. Nothing would be dramatically done and no true understanding of the situation would successfully weather the criticism and lobbying of advertisers, opportunists, and politicians.

1965 - On July 07,
The USA "Gemini 7", 2-week space flight, planned for later this year, was reported by Houston NASA authorities, as scheduled to test the "death-ray" laser beam for use as a communications link. If successful, the astronaut's voice will be transmitted along the pencil-wide beam of light to a tracking station in New Mexico.

1965 - During July 10 and 11,
Flying saucers made world-wide headlines after being sighted in Portugal, northeastern Argentina, and Uruguay, matching descriptions of similar objects seen in the Antarctic last week by Argentine and Chilean military officers. The Azores weather bureau reported that interference from one of the objects stopped its electromagnetic clocks.

1965 - On July 14,
Typhoon "Freda", the worst storm of the region this year, left damage in the South China Sea and Philippines.

1965 - During the Summer,
FBI Observers continued to AVOID their Responsibilities.
Civil rights demonstrators in Jackson, Mississippi, had taken refuge on the property of the federal building to avoid violence from the local police. Federal marshals threw these individuals from the federal building steps, against their legal authority to protect the demonstrators, into the possession of the local police. These, along with others were savagely beaten and thrown into stockades. Beside being clubed on the head and bruised bodily, some had truncheons jammed up their anus or into their vagina - resulting in permanent physical damage. Some males were struck so forcefully in the testes as to sustain permanent damage and the risk of death from shock. None of the injured would ever be compensated for the actions of the authorities charged with protecting them.

1965 - On July 14,
In the evening, the USA "Mariner 4" began using its miniature television camera to start taking the first of 17 close-up pictures of Mars from as near as 6,770 miles away. Launched on November 28, 1964 by an Atlas Agena D rocket from Cape Canaveral, it travelled 228 days and 523 million km. and passed by Mars on this day at 9844 km. 21 complete images were sent back to cover less than 1% of the Martian surface. The images showed a heavily cratered arid surface.

Mariner 1, intended to explore Venusian atmosphere, cloud cover, magnetic field and radiation environment, was launched on July 22, 1962, and had to be destroyed immediately after launch when the rocket went off course.
Mariner 2, launched August 27, 1962, as a follow-up to Mariner 1, passed by Venus at 38,830 km after 109 days of travel. Surface temperatures of Venus were recorded far higher than expected, at 428 degrees Celsius. No strong magnetic field or radiation belt were detected and an unbroken cloud layer appeared to cover the planet. Possibilities of instrument error were not considered. Mariner 5 would record temperatures much lower, at 267 degrees, in 1967. At that time, a small magnetic field would be reported and the existence of an ionosphere beginning at 500 km.
Mariner 3, launched November 5, 1964, by an Atlas Agena D rocket, from Cape Canaveral, was intended to record 21 TV pictures as it passed Mars at 13,840 km. It was reported that the solar panels failed to deploy and the battery power depleted after less than 9 hours. No pictures were ever reported received to the public.

1965 - On July 18,
"Zond 3", a USSR spacecraft similar to the Soyuz, was launched from Tyuratam, weighing 1145 kg.
It transmitted 25 lunar far side images from 9960 km to 11,570 km out - after developing and digitally scanning them. Transmission was repeated still later as the craft travelled on into space. A Mars flyby had been desired, but the launch was delayed by that of Zond 2.

1965 - By July 19,
The worst flooding since 1956, had stranded and displaced many people in the German states of North-Rhine Westphalia, Lower Saxony and Hesse, following sudden thunderstorms.

1965 - On July 20,
Floods were covering districts of New South Wales, Australia, which were drought areas a week ago.

1965 - On July 21,
Floods in South Korea had resulted in 221,933 people being reported homeless while the death toll had risen to 207 and 89 were reported missing.

1965 - On July 26,
Fidel Castro, Premier of Cuba, charged that the USA in continuing to infiltrate agents, arms and explosives into Cuba in an attempt to mount counter-revolution against his government. Since coming to power on July 26, 1953, Castro says his forces have killed or captured 2,005 "bandits" in the hunting down of guerilla bands in the Escambray region.

1965 - In late July,
American commitment to the Vietnam war was increased by President Johnson.
B-52 saturation bombing in South Vietnam was approved plus increased bombing of North Vietnam. Johnson personally approved the targets in advance of most of the air strikes. He approved immediate deployment of an additional 50,000 troops with a promise to commit 50,000 more before the end of the year. For the first time, Johnson also authorized General Westmoreland to "commit U.S.troops to combat independent of or in conjunction with GVN forces in any situation ... when ... their use is necessary to strengthen the relative position of GVN forces." Against the advice of McNamara, Johnson continued to mislead Congress and the public as to the significance of the steps he was taking on their behalf.
Johnson and Rusk had been at the center of the political debate that had followed the fall of Chiang Kai-shek and the rise of Mao Tse-tung at in 1949, and, traumatized by the event, Johnson was now certain that the loss of Vietnam to the Communists would yield "a mean and destructive debate that would shatter my Presidency, kill my administration, and damage our democracy." International consequences were feared even more. With such FEARS, there was only one choice: stay committed. Johnson's objective became to inflict pain on the Vietnamese opposition until it "sobers up and unloads his pistol." None of the American officials could understand that such a backward (materially and technologically) country could resist for long the power of the USA. Strategy was always improvised and short-term rather than well-planned and longer-term: no-one believed the war would last much longer.

Yet air sorties against North Vietnam would increase from 25,000 in 1965 to 79,000 in 1966 and 108,000 in 1967; the tonnage of bombs dropped increased from 63,000 to 136,000 to 226,000. B-52s carried cargoes of 58,000 pounds of bombs each. As many as 1,250 civilians were killed per week during periods of heavy bombing. The material cost of a B-52 mission ran to $30,000 for the bombs. During 1965 and 1966, the cost of the air war to the Americans amounted to more than $1.7 billion; aircraft losses exceeded 500. In all previous wars there had been limited success in the use of airpower. Well noted before, was the point that bombs did not discriminate between civilians and troops when dropped on populated areas. Every civilian killed or seriously wounded yielded a score of relatives committed to fighting against you. Frequently, air strikes created a larger enemy force than they destroyed, although there would be material losses. Bombing was accepted as a cheap strategy: it cost fewer American lives; it seemed to offer a quick and comparatively easy solution to a complex problem.
The ground war deteriorated to one of "search and destroy" of the enemy - who looked the same as the ally. Broad discretion was provided to General Westmoreland by the Johnson administration as to how he carried out his strategies. Increasing numbers of innocent civilians were being killed by "friendly" forces. High technology and fear combined with insufficient expertise to use the technology resulted in losses from "friendly fire".

1965 - By July 27,
The worst floods to occur in Chile in a dozen years add misery, isolation and heavy damage to wide areas of central and southern Chile. Streams swollen by 4 days of continuous heavy rain and the runoff from land saturated by almost a month of rain and snow roared beyond their banks in a 1,000-mile-long area. Bridges, roads and railways were washed away. Landslides and fallen trees blocked some highways and railway routes and cut power and electric service. The agricultural area south of Santiago was hardest hit.

1965 - On July 28,
President Nasser of Egypt, in addressing professors at Alexandria University, in a celebration of the 13th anniversary of the Egyptian revolution, spoke of the need to increase the defense budget each year "because Israel will not hesitate to repeat the 1956 (Suez campaign) if it finds encouragement from imperialism." He defended Egypt's missile construction program by saying that "Some people say rockets without atomic heads are not significant. This is ignorance. The building of rockets means that there is a base here of great industrial possibilities. It means a great industrial transformation here." The army budget is now $600,000,000, that is, three times as large as Syria's national budget.

1965 - On July 30,
The 17-nation Geneva Disarmament Conference warned that China will probably explode its third nuclear device soon. The threat of rapid Chinese atomic progress was cited in support of Western demands that the conference begin urgent negotiations aimed at halting the spread of nuclear weapons. The USA, Britain and Italy have all called for the conference to give top priority to the issue.
Lord Chalfont, Britain's chief negotiator, warned that the current disarmament session is "the last chance" for agreement. He said if a treaty is not reached in a few months, it will choke off all paths to other disarmament measures.

1965 - Beginning on the evening of August 1,
A wave of sightings of UFOs occurs over the next 5 months.

1965 - On August 02,
A paperboy in Tulsa, Oklahoma, U.S.A., photographed an object seen by many others.
The Condon Committee confirmed that it was a large object and that the dark stripes seen between the bright patches were neither sky nor space, but some kind of structure. The object changed slowly from black, white and gold to a uniform blue-green. The USAF concluded that it was either a genuine UFO - or a tri-coloured Christmas tree light.

1965 - On August 03,
Rex Heflin, a California, U.S.A. highway inspector, takes a series of polaroid photos of a UFO from his car while parked near the Santa Ana Freeway. The pictures are quite clear and are confirmed as authentic (and continue to do so). They show an object shaped like a straw hat floating above the ground.
His report is investigated by the USAF and later by the Condon Committee.
Heflin said he had turned over 3 or 4 of the originals to a man who said he represented NORAD (North Atlantic Treaty Organization). NORAD later denied sending any investigator. Heflin over the years underwent much criticism from those who simply wanted to maintain the status quo or those who took it as a challenge to disprove with rationalizations any concept which found conflict with cultural authorities. See October 11, 1967.

1965 - On August 03,
Eduard (Billy) Meier, lost the lower part of his left arm.
He was riding in an old bus, near the coastal city of Iskenderun, Turkey, when it collided with another bus. Thrown from a window, his arm was severed just above the elbow in the accident. He was left for dead by the side of the road and lay unconscious for several hours before a doctor happened by, checked him for signs of life, and had him taken to a local hospital. He spent 2 weeks there, and when he felt well enough to travel again he continued on to Greece. There he settled into a hotel in Thessaloniki, selling shirts "with German, with my hand, my eyes, my mouth, with my feet, with a pencil and paper." At a party on Christmas Day, he would meet a 17-year-old Greek girl named Kaliope Zafireou, who would travel with him and become his wife.
Asket, his spacewoman guide had told him
"You are selected as a truth offerer like numerous others at very early times before you. You have to become greater in knowledge than every other human being of your time. Because of this, you have come under the controlling guardianship of a certain form of life which had to protect, lead, guide, and educate you. This embodies a law of Creation which cannot be acted against, even by will, for truth offerers are not called for their mission at a certain age; they are destined from the time of procreation. Such a life will be difficult, for the creature concerned has extraordinary things to perceive."

1965 - Beginning this year,
Villages were "secured" in South Vietnam as part of the U.S.A. support of "pacification".
The intent was to root out "Viet Cong infrastructures" and determine which villages were loyal. By August of 1967, official U.S.A. data stated that the number of hamlets under total Saigon government control was 168, in contrast to 3978 totally controlled by the Viet Cong. The rest of the hamlets were listed as contested. As the hamlet program was initiated by the U.S.A., this clearly indicated that the process had been counterproductive. One way of "winning the hearts and minds of the people" taken by U.S.A. forces was to send out American forces with bulldozers and bombers to raze the villages to the ground; subsequently, the inhabitants were transported to so-called "camps for refugees fleeing from Communism" in and around larger towns and cities where they could be "protected".

The total failure of the American military-academic alliance in their "psywar approach to the war in southeast Asia is demonstrated by the evidence that many of these actions of abuse of rights, torture and destruction resulted in the attainment of the opposite goals sought. The strategies were devised by university students located in America who had no knowledge of the country nor the culture of its people and had little practical experience in working with adults in the world outside of the protection of the academic lifestyle. They were paid to conjecture how they would feel most protected if they lived in a foreign country in which their lives were constantly under threat by hard to identify enemies.
The dramatic difference in reality came from the facts that the South Vietnamese knew and were comfortable with their countryside: it was their home! The majority were either non political at the beginning of the war or were inclined to be supportive of a guerilla force which sought to protect them from a race that did not look like them, treated them with force and derision, destroyed their livelihood, possessions, crops and forests, bombed their land and killed their relatives.

1965 - On August 11,
Waves up to 50 feet in height, in the worst storm in 40 years, have battered 1,500 miles of Chilean coast. Destruction has been brought to many ports and townships. Blizzards, rainstorms and avalanches would destroy over 40% of the farms and isolate hundreds of towns.

1965 - In August,
A UPI newspaper account of routine Vietnamese civilian casualties the following was reported:
"I got me a VC, man. I got at least two of them bastards."
The exultant cry followed a 10 second burst of automatic weapon fire yesterday, and the dull crump of a grenade exploding underground. The Marines ordered a Vietnamese corporal to go down into the grenade-blasted hole to pull out the victims. The victims were three children between 11 and 14 - two boys and a girl. Their bodies were riddled with bullets ... "Oh, my God," a young Marine exclaimed. "They're all kids ..." Shortly before the Marines moved in, a helicopter had flown over the area warning the villagers to stay in their homes.

This style of incident was repeated often with the numbers often higher and usually involving children, old men, and women.

1965 - During August,
R.M. (initials), a 23-year government employee, while visiting the USAF Museum in Fairborn, Ohio, went through a doubledoor marked "Off Limits" and suddenly came face to face with a being having blue skin and a self-contained spacesuit. It was 4.5 feet tall, walked stiff-legged, had a translucent dome over its' large head, was not human, had large eyes under a heavy brow, no noticeable nose, a slit for a mouth. When the being walked it did not appear capable of bending its legs. R.M. later found out from a retired USAF colonel from Wright-Patterson AFB, that 2 live Aliens were held in captivity in an artificial environment. The Colonel also said that the 2-man sized craft that had crashed near Whitewater Lake, Indiana (unknown date) was a result of an electrical disturbance in the atmosphere.

1965 - By August 24,
Killer Bees were reported released in Brazil.
African bees, imported into Brazil to improve the native bee stock had been crossbred at a research farm and were still under experimentation when a worker released the queens without authorization. At first, farmers complained of their chickens being killed but little action was taken until cattle and people began to be attacked. Now, the mayor of Campos has urgently requested advice on "bee warfare".

1965 - On August 25,
A report from Irene B. Tauber and Leo A. Orleans, two American scientists, described China's population problem as "unmatched anywhere on Earth." It concluded that because the current population of 750,000,000 is likely to reach 1,000,000,000 by 1980, China may have to reassess some of its economic policies in order to avoid a major catastrophe.

1965 - By September,
Alick McInnes, of Scotland, had become known for his "Exultation of Flowers", introduced to the public in 1956. They were being used to treat illnesses and emotional difficulties in humans, diseased animals and insects. McInnes had found a way by which he could transfer the vital energy from highly vitalized plants to water without destroying or harming the plant. McInnes spent 30 years in India working for the British Raj. He became interested in plants after visiting the Bose Institue near Calcutta. In South India, he spent a couple of weeks as the guest of Ramana Mohan Maharishi at the foot of the holy hill Arunachalam. McInnes was astonished to see that during the Maharishi's daily walk in the evening cattle, dogs, children, wild animals, birds and even snakes would congregate behind him peacefully and quietly following along - only to disperse back to their habitats quietly at the end of the walk.
As McInnes interprets the phenomenon of human and plant radiations, each individual member of either kingdom modifies or qualifies with his own wavelength the fundamental energy radiated through him. The same applies, says McInnes, down to the finest particle of matter: "Everything radiates wavelengths which can be identified as sound, color, form, movement, perfume, temperature and intelligence."

McInnes says the radiations from some flowers are circular, others go from left to right, others from right to left. Some go up and down; others down and up; some go diagonally from left to right; others in the opposite direction. Some feel cold; others warm. But the same flower species always gives off the same radiation. McInnes found it possible to transfer flower radiations to water, where the radiations will stay more or less indefinitely. Each flower species has a time when its radiations can best be transferred to water, usually, though not always, when the flowers are at the peak of their maturity, which is also usually near a full moon. Far from damaging the plant, McInnes says that just at the moment when its potency is transferred to water, other members of the same species for miles around brighten up and appear to grow more vigorously than before. The resulting potentized water McInnes calls an Exultation of Flowers, which he says is not a specific treatment of any diagnosable disease, but operates in a subtle way on the radiations coming through the human body, on animal or the soil, and in so doing raises the vitality of the person, animal, or soil concerned. When vitality is raised to the necessary level, illness disappears. There are parallels with the Bach Flower Essences developed in 1932.
McInnes prescribes his "Exultation" to be taken by mouth, so many drops at a time for varying conditions, as a salve for cuts and burns and other problems of the skin, and as a tonic diluted in one's bath. Of the forty-odd varieties not all can be mixed. Some seem to cancel each other out; others disturb the mixture; others upset the temper of the radiations already in preparation. Chemists who ridicule his Exultations as nothing more than water, he points out that magnetized steel and ordinary steel show the same chemical ingredients but are obviously quite different from each other. McInnes believes that all forms of life are created to live in harmony, but mankind has so misused this dominion over created things that there is now disharmony everywhere, which is expressed in physical disease in human, animal, and plant life, the life forces coming from the Source of the Creation becoming more and more distorted. "If we deliberately cause suffering and disease in other lives, we increase our own suffering and disease." All creation suffers when plants in their millions are burnt by chemical weed killers, when animals are inflicted with diseases in laboratories, when work is demanded of half-dead, diseased and suffering animals.

If McInnes is correct, then any intelligent advanced plant lifeforms in the universe would feel the pain of the millions of acres of plants sprayed with defoliants in southeast Asia during the Vietnam War. So also would all of such a species mourn at the decreasing vitality which humanity emanates from the Earth as its degree of endemic chronic illness rises and its degree of political unrest and global catastrophe increases in balance with its decreasing degree of true spirituality. How painful it might be for such an intelligence, perhaps spiritually progressed far enough to feel the distress and know that it would be wrong to interfere in the choices which humanity takes for itself. RUST-likes are humanoid with plant-like digestion. From our perspective, they are spiritually perfect. They absorb energy as their mode of "digestion". They time travel and traverse space both in semi-physical and spiritual form. They seldom show themselves to humans and on such occasions they express concern for the future of humanity and a wish for humanity's spiritual upliftment. Are we too proud to listen?

1965 - In the September - October issue of
"Flying Saucer Review", Jerome Clarke speculates in his "The Meaning of Contact" that the UFO beings might put a false cover over their activities so as to keep officialdom or anyone else from coming close to the truth. He suggests that contact claims become a tool with a two-fold purpose: to discourage legitimate inquiry into the saucer field by making it look ridiculous, and to instill false ideas into the minds of those who go to investigate the subject.

1965 - By September 11,
Kenya was experiencing its worst drought in 22 years.
More than 13,000 families faced death by starvation and schools were closed because children were too weak to attend classes.

1965 - On September 14, at 1.00 a.m.,
An engineer, Paul Green, was riding his motorcycle southwards along the B1025 road, which runs between Colchester and West Mersea in Essex. As he was approaching Langenhoe Hall he heard a high-pitched humming noise to his left. Looking up, he saw a small point of blue light about 5 miles away over Brightlingsea. Watching it, it moved rapidly towards him, growing brighter and flashing. As it drew closer, the humming became louder and it became larger. His motorcycle engine began to miss, then quit, and his headlamp went out.
The flashing blue light was just over a mile away then.
Within the extreme brightness was a huge object that resembled the upper half of a large spinning top, with a dome on the upper part. The fierce blue flashes came from within the dome. The object began to descend, and at one point tilted its underneath towards him. The outer rim of the underpart carried round objects spaced equidistantly so that an impression of a "luminous ball-race" was given. Getting off the bike, Mr. Green took a few steps towards the object and then stopped, feeling paralysed. The flashing blue light seemed to flash in rhythm with his heart beat and was so bright that it was painful. It seemed to hit against his chest and he tingled in sensation all over like the electric shock one receives from an electrified cattle fence.

At last the humming died down and the object descended towards the farmhouses at wick.
Paul's head began to throb, and felt as though there was a band tightening around it. With a great effort he made himself move. At first, unable to restart the bike, he pushed it down the road and bump started it, riding home quickly. The next day his hair and clothes were so charged with static electricity that they crackled continuously. Dr. Bernard Finch, an investigator with the Flying Saucer Review interviewed him several weeks later and concluded that
'he described symptoms which can only be ascribed to the effects of a very powerful magnetic field on the human body ... if this field were strong enough, it could produce a kind of light yet unknown to our science.'

1965 - On September 15,
Professor Klaus Fuchs, now deputy director of the "Central Nuclear Research Institute" at Rossendorf, East Germany, stated that enough military-grade plutonium to make 6 A-bombs a year will be produced at the West German research centre at Karlsruhe by 1968.
Fuchs had helped build the first exploded nuclear weapon for the USA, had been imprisoned in Britain for selling secrets from that research to the USSR, and was returned to East Germany after his release in 1959.

1965 - On September 20,
Geoffrey Maskey, while driving at 10.30 p.m., down Walton Avenue, Felixstowe, Suffolk, England (20 miles from the Langenhoe sighting 6 days before), when one of the two friends with him, Michael Johnson, opened the door, got out, and disappeared into the night. After waiting for him for a few minutes, Maskey and his other passenger, Mavis Fordyce, heard a high-pitched humming noise. An orange-coloured, oval-shaped object, 6 feet in length and about 100 feet above the lane was seen: the glow lit up everything nearby. The object then disappeared behind trees with the humming very much present. Geoff called out for Michael and reversed the car along the lane in search of him. Michael suddenly stumbled through the hedge, clutching his neck and eyes and staggering away from the car. He collapsed unconscious in the road and his friends got him into the car and took him to Felixstowe Hospital.
At the hospital, Michael regained consciousness. He did not recognize his friends.
He was diagnosed as in severe shock with burn marks on the back of his neck and a bump below his right ear. He was transferred to Ipswitch Hospital and released the next afternoon. He spoke of being pulled from the car by a force and of seeing "a man in the flames pointing at him". The doctors did not take the incident with any seriousness and the media suggested that the trio had mistaken the local Propane Gas Plant flare-stack for a UFO.

1965 - In late September,
Two French submarines, the "Junon" and the "Daphne", escorted by the logistic support vessel Rhone, were in layover in Fort-de-France, Martinique, one evening when a large UFO was seen. The helmsman on the deck of the Junon observed the arrival of the object and went up to the conning tower, where he grabbed 6 pairs of binoculars which he distributed to his companions. There were 300 witnesses, including 4 officers on the Junon, 3 officers on the Daphne, a dozen French sailors, and personnel of the weather observatory.
All witnesses aboard the Junon, whose bow was pointing east, saw the object as a huge ball of light or a disc on edge arriving from the west at 9.15 P.M. It was the colour of a fluorescent tube, about the same luminosity as the full moon. It moved slowly, horizontally, at a distance estimated at 10 kilometres south of the ships, from west to east. It left a whitish trace similar to the glow of a television screen.

When it was directly south of the ships, the object dropped towards the Earth, made three complete loops in series at descending altitudes, then hovered in the midst of a faint "halo".
Michel Figuet, the first timonier of the French fleet in the Mediterranean at the time, saw the last part of the trajectory through binoculars. He was able to see two red spots under the disk. Shortly thereafter, the object vanished in the centre of the glow "like a bulb turned off." The trail and the halo remained visible in the sky for a full minute.
At 9.45 P.M. the halo reappeared at the same place, and the object seemed to emerge as if switched on. It rose, made two more loops and flew away to the west, where it disappeared at 9.50. It was confirmed the next day that the incident could not have involved any of the following: an aircraft, rocket, meteor, balloon, disintegrating satellite, plasma phenomenon such as ball lightning. If the object was 10 kilometres away, then it represented a disk 90 metres in diameter.

1965 - During the year,
James Flynn of Fort Myers, Florida, was almost knocked down by a blast of wind when he approached within a few yards of a UFO, which shot a light like that of a welder's torch. He was unconscious for a full day and woke up almost totally blind, with a dark spot on his forehead. His later symptoms included loss of hearing and numbness.

1965 - On September 28,
Major General E.B. Lebailly, Secretary of the Air Force Office of Information, wrote a memo to the Military Director of the Air Force's Scientific Advisory Board, requesting "that a working panel composed of both physical and social scientists be organized to review Project Blue Book ... and to advise the Air Force as to any improvements that should be made in the program to carry out the Air Force's assigned responsibility." His request followed on the proposal of J Allen Hynek that a panel of civilian scientists carefully review the UFO situation to establish whether a major problem really existed or not.
As a result, the "Ad Hoc Committee to Review Project Blue Book" was formed, headed by physicist Brian O'Brien. On the panel were psychologist Launor F. Carter, psychologist Jesse Orlansky, electrical engineer Richard Porter, astronomer and space scientist Carl Sagan, and electrical engineer Willis H. Ware. All but Sagan were members of the Air Force Scientific Advisory Board. Sagan was young in his career, which blossomed greatly from this time on. The committee met for one day, February 3, 1966.

1965 - During October,
The first "Counter Terror (CT)" program sponsored by the CIA in Vietnam was started by William Colby, CIA Chief, Far East Division. Known as "Provincial Reconnaissance Units" (PRUs), it was a unilateral American program, never recognized by the South Vietnamese government. CIA representatives recruited, organized, supplied and directly paid such teams which consisted of Vietnamese. Their function was to use Viet Cong techniques of terror - assassination, abuses, kidnapping and intimidation - against the Viet Cong leadership. Provincial interrogation centres were constructed with CIA funds in each of South Vietnam's 48 provinces and were little more than torture cells.
As time continued, the units were infiltrated by Viet Cong who in turn used their position to eliminate non-Viet Cong. 10,000 or more piastres (dollars) were paid on the presentation of a head or an ID card or an ear to identify the enemy. This encouraged the mercenary element to kill a lot of people for little apparent reason including people to whom their families owed money or with whom they had personal differences. Provincial interrogation centres became overcrowded as citizens could be detained without justification and those who did so were rewarded according to body count or capture.

Working in a foreign country with a different culture, in a threatening environment, with people who looked and spoke differently, who were poor and whose social and legal system had been disrupted for 20 years left the Americans trying to convey a system of ideals which they had abused themselves with their first involvement. It was hypocracy; it was mercenary idealism: shoot them and then say you did it for their benefit, or, try to patch their wounds and leave them in misery. It caused much grief amongst the Reds who saw humanity becoming less spiritual in almost every way with material gain, profit and power replacing love, compassion, tolerance, self-directedness, humility and reverence as ways of living.
The GRAYS were disgusted by humanity's continued expression of a lack of reverence for life and order, whether it be human or of other forms. It confirmed their earlier decision to remain outside the sphere of human activity on the obvious presence level and to continue monitoring humans until they destroyed their power and political base, perhaps even each other, and then the Grays would have the Earth to themselves, with their allies. The Blonds interfered as often as they could to frustrate operations and save lives, but little could be done without self-exposure.

1965 - On November 09,
The Great Northeast Blackout, plunges 1/6th of the continent's population, 30 million people in eastern Ontario and 8 American States into darkness. The power failure, presumably caused by a switch at the Sir Adam Beck No.2 Generating Station, Queenston, Ontario, and running up to 3 hours or longer in length, is accompanied by a myriad of UFO sightings both before and during the event. The tripped switch is later found to be OK. Some researchers suggest that the influence of UFO's travelling parallel to high tension wires could induce a power overload.
A round glowing object was seen near the Niagara Falls power plant near that time.
The U.S. military authorities were aware of UFO presence in the sky over New York City through to Pennsylvania at least 45 minutes before the power failure.
1964/65 also represents the start of Sunspot Cycle 20, a minimum sunspot occurrence period.
Geomagnetic impulses of a global character occur in association with rapid changes in sunspot numbers near the minimum. At these times in the 11-year cycle, the Earth's atmosphere tends to cool slightly and high altitude drag on satellites decreases. Solar maximums, which this is not, do strongly influence the Earth's magnetic field, satellite navigation systems and electrical power transmission lines. This would not be an influence in this incident. Perhaps a spaceculture wanted to experiment to determine how humans would respond in such an incident as a reflection of the strength of the North American culture, its dependency upon electricity, and as a warning to prepare for a future incident which would not be initiated by the spacepersons nor within the control of them.

1965 - During November - December,
A wave of UFO Sightings is reported over the USA.

1965 - On November 02,
Norman Morrison, an American citizen, protests the American involvement in the Vietnam war by Immolating (burning to death) himself on the steps of the USA Pentagon. The validity of his protest would not be acknowledged until 1995.

1965 - During November,
Aaron Kaback, while on guard duty at Fort Riley, USA, at 2 a.m., had a duty officer drive up to him and order him into the jeep. He and 3 other officers were driven out to a remote area where a large oval object was resting on the ground. An Army helicopter was hovering above the object and shining a bright light on it. The object was approximately 35-48 feet in diameter, had a fin on the end and an exhaust port or some kind of hole below the fin. It had rows of squares around the rim and remained completely quiet for the 2-1/2 hours they guarded it.

1965 - By late year,
The leadership of the C.I.A. had taken a decided turn towards bureaucratic anxiety over job security and an increasing commitment to the Agency as a separate form of reality. With an increasing amount of the work being highly secret and politically sensitive (invasive), employees recognized that job employment after government secret service did not offer many benefits. The American public was still not comfortable with nor knowledgeable about the secret activities conducted presumably on their behalf. Going to a prospective employer with a resume which could not specifically address the nature of your duties in your past employment would not be a plus. Good wages and an obsessive sense of self-righteousness within the CIA did not prepare one for later employment in positions which held no adventure and risk of political motivation.
Their position at the CIA provided them with a degree of authority whereby their opinions were considered valuable. In the open marketplace, worthiness of opinions could be based more on personal desirability, interaction with superiors, profitability of decisions, and practicality of suggestions. Within the agency, intellectual innovation, decisiveness of action, commitment to political success, and, individualism were often preferred and at odds with the commercial environment. Once in, the agent was beginning to feel committed for life. On that commitment, your allegiance was to the Agency first and to your country second. This "conversion" was nothing new to agents of the KGB in the USSR. They had assumed this position of "morality" from the early 1960s. Intelligence "worlds" were being created within both nations, completely separate from the cultural world they were created to serve.

1965 - On December 04,
The "Gemini 7" spacecraft with crew Borman-Lovell take pictures of an enormous UFO with propulsion systems, following the capsule. After the 14-day flight, the doctors examining the astronauts find that they have lost approximately 25% of their red blood cells during the flight.
Dr. David Turner would later suggest that the loss had arisen as a consequence of insufficient Vitamin E in the diet of the astronauts. Yet, the Aerospace Medical Association at a meeting in Miami, Florida on May 13, 1964 had already decided that every astronaut going into outer space should have a diet fortified with vitamin E. Fatigue had plagued all of the astronauts of this and previous American missions on their return. What would be so debilitating?

Cosmic rays had been discovered in 1958 in the upper atmosphere; their presence and strength would eventually be found to be 220 times greater in space than at sea-level on the Earth's surface. Their danger would reside in the fact that they could penetrate steel and earth further than the components of nuclear weapons radiations and that their ionizing properties could damage cell tissues. The astronauts had cosmic ray radiation poisoning. It was subtly different than alpha radiation; its influence was more direct, cleaner, deadlier. Vitamin E had not yet been added to the diet of these astronauts; a vitamin E deficiency does not arise normally in humans within a 14-day period; vitamin E is stored in human fat reserves. Dr. A.L. Tappel would state in his article in "Nutrition Today" (July-August, 1973) that "Many months of deprivation (of vitamin E) would have to pass in order to deplete the body stores." Obviously, something in space was accelerating the deoxidation of the cell membranes in the human body: cosmic rays.
A protection against cosmic radiation would have to be devised for future space missions.
A flight capsule made with 2 foot thick walls would be too heavy; a 2 inch interior coating of lead would also present many engineering difficulties. The best current protection would be either no more flights, shorter flights, or flying at lower altitudes where some of the cosmic radiation had been deflected away from the Earth or diffused by the Van Allen Belts and the ozone layer. Which would be done?

1965 - In December,
"Drill", a nuclear test shot at Yucca Flats, Utah, spread radiation off site; the fact was denied by the government.

1965 - During December,
The Second Vatican Council convoked by Pope John XXIII in 1962, ended.
Pope John had died in 1963; Pope Paul VI completed the term of the Council. He called for efforts to fight hunger, poverty and social injustice. The "Index of Forbidden Books" was abolished. Topics discussed included reform of the liturgy, the position of the laity within the Church, the relationship of the Church to the modern world.
"The Pastoral Constitution on the Church and the Modern World" recognized that there would always be war in this sin-filled world. That being true, the church still had the obligation to work against war and to see that, in the tragic event of war, the basic canons of the natural laws are not broken. The council insisted that governments make "humane provisions" for those who are conscientious objectors to war. It also insisted that armies were for the defense of a country and not for the acquisition of advantage or territory. Those who were in the armed forces should 'regard themselves as agents of security and freedom on behalf of their people. As long as they fulfill this role properly they are making a genuine contribution to the establishment of peace'.
Some of the articles enunciated by the Council included:

(80) Total War
Any act of war aimed indiscriminately at the destruction of entire cities or extensive areas along with their populations is a crime against God and man himself. It merits unequivocal and unhesitating condemnation.
The unique hazard of modern warfare consists in this: It provides those who possess modern scientific weapons with a kind of occasion for perpetuating such abominations. Moreover, through a certain inexorable chain of events, it can urge men to the most atrocious decisions.

(81) The Arms Race
... The arms race is an utterly treacherous trap for humanity, and one which injures the poor to an intolerable degree. It is much to be feared that if this race persists, it will eventually spawn all the lethal ruin whose path it is now making ready.

(82) Commitment to Peace
It is our duty, then, to strain every muscle as we work for the time when all war can be completely outlawed by international consent. This goal undoubtedly requires the establishment of some universal public authority acknowledged as such by all, and endowed with effective power to safeguard, for the sake of all, security, regard for justice, and respect for rights.

(83) Causes of War
Wars thrive on [causes of dissention], especially on injustice.
Many of these causes stem from excessive economic inequities and from excessive slowness in applying the needed remedies. Other causes spring form a quest for power and from a contempt for personal rights. If we lok for deeper explanations, we can find them in human jealousy, distrust, pride, and other egoistic passions.

1965 - On December 08,
Marcel Lefebvre, a French-born archbishop, on the last day of Vatican II, declares that he has legal grounds on which to oppose Vatican II and the decisions of the Council. Two Italian priests would later support his views. He states that he has received permission from the Vatican to start his own institute at Econe in Switzerland. The mass media dramatize the apparent split in the Church.

1965 - On December 09,
The apparent crash of a fiery object is reported to have been seen near Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.
It was determined to be travelling at a speed of 1,062 mph and as it made a 25 degree turn, it was not believed to be a meteorite.

1965 - On December 15,
U.S.A. astronauts Walter Schirra and Tom Stafford in "Gemini 6" approached to within a foot of Frank Borman and James Lovell in "Gemini 7" to perform the first space rendezvous during a 14 day, 5,000,000 mile orbiting journey around the earth. Gemini 7 was actually launched first when Gemini 6 was delayed twice. The remaining Gemini flights, all scheduled for 1966, are designed primarily to practice rendezvous maneuvers. The rendezvous came after they had travelled 100,000 miles at speeds of more than 17,300 miles an hour.
It took six hours of maneuvers to bring the two ships within a foot of each other.
The pilots had practised the maneuver at least 80 times on a simulator at a period of 90 minutes each time. Problems coped with included where to put the garbage ? (behind the seats); how to sleep so as not to be tired ? (simultaneously, so as to prevent being disturbed by communication between the awake astronaut and the Earth); how to maintain a regular day cycle ? (cover the windows with filters as needed and work on a Houston day cycle)

1965 - On December 30,
President Ferdinand Marcos and First Lady Imelda Marcos entered the Malacanang Palace as the new Philippine political leaders. Ferdinand had won the November general election by some 670,000 votes after an 18-month campaign in which almost $1 million dollars had been spent on propaganda. A half true biography had been written by a professional writer and published; an equally half true autobiographical movie had been produced and distributed; reporters had been paid great sums to print pictures and favourable stories about the Marcoses; a professional writer composing a biography for Ferdinand's political rival had been murdered; Ferdinand bought a private Cessna aircraft to travel around the islands and deceptively declared that he flew it himself (which he did not); Ferdinand capitalized through the mass media on his fake wartime medals and heroism; Ferdinand used a CIA-trained secret policeman to gather political intelligence; Imelda staged tea parties, fed campaign workers and constituents at least 60 breakfasts, 250 lunches, and 30 dinners "each day"; a worshipper of Hollywood, Imelda acted the star on the political stage - wearing the most eye-catching colours, singing, speaking, and mingling with poor and rich; both Marcoses freely used bribes to obtain convention votes for Ferdinand. At the beginning of the campaign, the CIA and the White House distrusted Marcos and believed that he would be a liability in their war with Vietnam. Reaching the election, Marcos had outdone them at their own game: he had bought the election through skilful and persistent manipulation of the mass media, and, skilful manipulation of individuals.

During his first month in office, Ferdinand used his new presidential powers to shut down, restrict or control his underworld adversaries. He sent paratroopers into the smuggler's island of Semirara; sent marines wading ashore at the village of Capipisa on Luzon's south coast. A private aviation company was shut down; over 170 other private companies would be seized. He reorganized the Constabulary (Police Force) to bring it under his control. Within a short period of time all military, intelligence, and police forces would be coordinated by him or members of his extended family. The prisons were included. The effect was such that the price of smuggled American cigarettes rose 30% in one month, and Ferdinand's share increased markedly. Imprisoned criminals willing to work with or pay bribes to Ferdinand were set free.
Personal associates or relatives were sent to the USA for special police or military training and then placed into positions of authority. Special monopolies were set up, tobacco production and manufacturing being one, with Ferdinand as the mastermind and the secret police running interference against the dissatisfied peasants. When Congressman Floro Crisologo, who had been made front man for the monopoly began threatening to expose the entire operation because Ferdinand was allowing more and more smuggled cigarettes into the Philippines, he was murdered while he knelt praying by two assassins who stepped out of confessional booths and shot him in the head. The killers were "silenced" by officers of the secret police while trying to collect the fee. After 10 months of squeeze, not one boss or financier of a smuggling syndicate had been imprisoned. Instead, they had come under the employ of a new boss.

Ferdinand continued the arrangements he had so often made with businessmen when he was a Congressman: for 10% of the stock of the company, they would receive favours. In the presidency now, importers routinely paid him a "donation" for every package of goods or carton of sardines that entered the country. By special arrangement with Ferdinand, transhipment of products, illegal for sale within the Philippines, found their way into Philippine marketplaces. Technical smuggling went on in the open as customs officials forged and falsified documents so that some companies paid much lower duties than others. This destroyed fair competition and limited the general economic prosperity which the government was trying to achieve. Past-due and tainted goods ended up in Philippine food markets and discount stores.
Manila port became infamous for pilferage and diversion of shipments.
Government appointees who were effective in reducing underworld commerce and limiting Marcos inspired government corruption were replaced by Ferdinand's lawyer or other associates who would often complain of the problem being too big to control and request that the government call a commission to investigate and assess the problem. This would typically give a two year "open season" for illegal activities to proceed while legislators fed their egos intellectualizing about what was obvious.

During the first year in office, Imelda would appear to the press and the people, to be a woman of compassion and caring. Yet it wasn't so. Imelda held a Christmas drive for the poor; all the cheques were made out to her - and were deposited into her account: none of the money was used to assist the poor. When foreign governments and companies sent aid for disaster victims they changed from cash to goods.
Imelda held up the distribution for two days so that the bags could be tagged: "A Gift from the First Lady." She used her desire to be an actress to perfect her skill at deception and manipulation. She entertained, negotiated, begged, challenged, wept, and flattered - in order to get donations for a lavish cultural centre, which in the end was only 3/4ths completed because the costs rose 300% through kickbacks to intermediaries.

1965 - By the end of the year,
An Entebbe Monkey Trader in central Uganda, on the northwestern shores of Lake Victoria, was becoming rich by exporting thousands of green monkeys to Europe for biological research and disposal. During the next year he would supply over 10,000 monkeys.
The trader negotiated with the villagers in the Sese Islands, in the northwestern part of Lake Victoria, to buy the local monkeys from them. With a rising population density and a trend away from rainforest living to agriculture, the local people were finding the monkeys to be of increasing annoyance as pests. Much of the time, the trader could obtain the supply he required for his European laboratory clients.

A necessary part of the trade was the maintenance of some degree of quality control.
Obviously damaged or diseased animals could contaminate a batch and individually or as a group, the lot could be refused by the European buyer. To remedy this, the trader hired animal inspectors whose job it became to separate out the unacceptable individuals. It was commonly believed on inspection, that such animals would be killed. Local customs did not permit such slaughter such that premeditated killing of a monkey was viewed as somewhat similar to the second-degree murder of a human: a highly shameful act likely to bring bad luck or spirits to the person or village in which the murderer lived.
So, just as it has been popular for humans to segregate other humans with communicable diseases into special environments, the trader removed the diseased or injured monkeys to one of the islands in or near to the Sese Islands: it came to be known as the "isle of plagues." The island soon became a wildlife laboratory for mutating monkey viruses.

As the trade in monkeys continued to increase, occasions would arise when the trader had more orders than supply. At such times, he would go out to the "isle of plagues", catch the required makeup number of monkeys and return to complete the shipment. As viruses often have a dormant or a gestation stage within a new host, an apparently well host may be an infected carrier - preparing to "bloom." Viruses, whether lethal to humans or only to other animals, frequently multiply and mutate in regions which have a congested population and in which the primary animal resident is forced by unusual and disadvantageous environment to adopt a new and less rewarding lifestyle. Green monkeys can't swim.
In papyrus reeds and flatlands on the western shore of Lake Victoria facing the Sese Islands is a fishing village: Kasensero. Over the next 3 decades, Kasensero would become one of the epicentres of the greatest modern human plague and of several of the most destructive viral mutations. A large portion of the inhabitants would die from these diseases and numerous villages along the shores of Lake Victoria would become ghost towns. The Kasensero villagers, while fishermen, would also become famous as smugglers - moving illegal goods across the lake and using the Sese Islands as secret storehouses. No biological warfare department could hope for a more dynamic "laboratory" for the development of the next "black plague."

BACK to PEAR
INDEX
Memory Stimulators.
1966 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
Born Free; Flight of the Phoenix; The Sand Pebbles; Doctor in Clover; The Good, the Bad and the Ugly; Torn Curtain; Cool Hand Luke; Fantastic Voyage; Destination Inner Space; Our Man Flint; The Bible; To Sir With Love; Blindfold; To Trap a Spy; Funeral in Berlin; For A Few Dollars More; The Wrong Box; Blowup; The Russians Are Coming; Romeo and Juliet; Apache Uprising; Maya; Return of the Seven; Matchless; A Midsummer Night's Dream; The Appaloosa; Carry On Screaming; A Man Called Adam; Alvarez Kelly; Way ... Way Out; The Ghost in the Invisible Bikini; Bang, Bang, You're Dead

Television:
Tarzan, The Wild, Wild, Wild West, Mission Impossible, Shane, The Road West, The Pruitts of Southampton, The Monkees, Occasional Wife, Star Trek.

Songs:
I'm A Believer; Winchester Cathedral; 96 Tears; Soul and Inspiration; Snoopy and the Red Baron; Monday, Monday; Good Vibrations; Reach Out, I'll Be There; Cherish; Good Lovin'; Sunshine Superman; Wild Thing; Strangers in the Night; Poor Side Of Town; When A Man Loves A Woman; Take Good Care Of Her; I Want To Go With You; I Got the Fever; Don't Come Home a Drinkin'; The Bottle Let Me Down; Evil On Your Mind; Distant Drums; Swinging Doors.

NEWS:

Consumer Price Index: 97.2
The first Hovercraft is launched by Canada's National Defence Department: it could travel 250 miles with a payload of 2 tons over rough terrain or water.
The U.S.A. admits that citizens are being killed by bombing of Hanoi.
Public debate begins on the "God is dead" question.
Clothing Fashions included transparent dresses, paper clothing and minidresses which were 6 inches above the knee.
Ralph Nader testified before the U.S.A. Senate Committee defining unsafe car models despite attempts by General Motors investigators to discredit him.
Richard Speck, aged 24, mass murders 8 student nurses in their Chicago apartment.
More spy stories enter Canadian media with Gerda Munsinger and George Spencer.

1966 - By this year,
A centralized computerization of information of individuals was under consideration by the American government. The plan was that one gigantic computer system would assemble all of the information on individual Americans held by 20 federal agencies. State and municipal authorities could also be canvassed. Included would be the Internal Revenue Service, the Social Security Administration, and the Census Bureau. The pooled information could contain every citizen's income, dependents, military service, employment record over the years, and many other oft deemed private matters.
In 1974, it would be estimated that the federal government had at least 5,000 computer installations for keeping records. This did not account for information kept on file cards or in file folders. The Senate Judiciary Committee estimated that the federal government had a billion files, that is, five times as many files as there are individuals. Added to those were perhaps another billion personal files in local, county, and state government agencies.
By 1977, a brief outline of the expansiveness of some of these sources is as follows:
The Department of Defense had at least 16,000,000 life histories. The Civil Service had at least 10,000,000 extensive files on individuals. The Internal Revenue Service had well over 100,000,000 files on individuals. The F.B.I. had at least 6,500,000 files on USA residents, including 600,000 computerized criminal histories, and, over 250,000 files on residents considered as possible Communist sympathizers at some point in time. The Secret Service had computerized files on over 290,000 "persons of interest" of which a protest against ANY proposed or adopted government regulation was cause for inclusion.

These records would never be formally integrated: other means would be found to compile 100s of millions of files of personal confidential information for use by marketing, insurance, finance and lending companies. At no time could the public be informed that such files would stay confidential OR accurate. Inaccuracies in inputting, transferring, and even the initial recording of data would be found to be incorrect in as many as 30% of the computerized files by the 1980s. Careers, loan approval capacities, tender acceptances and even the freedom of some individuals would be destroyed by the existence of some of these errors, the source of which was never revealed to the disadvantaged parties.
The larger and more authoritarian a society becomes, and that the citizen becomes dependent and passive, the greater is the potential for the government to manipulate, deceive and abuse the citizen. In a spiritually focused society with a spiritually focused leadership, self-responsibility limits dependency and honesty limits abuses. Materialistic-centred societies rationalize structures to allow for discrimination. With an extensive computerized database of individual profiles on a population, a powerful, influential, desperate organization could be extremely selective in targeting prospective Designated Movers and Consignment Participants.

1966 - In the January issue of "Popular Science"
A common U.S.A. magazine, an article describing a January 4, 1954 sighting by General Curtis E. LeMay was published. In a sidebar column, Major Hector Quintanilla Jr., head of the USAF Project Blue Book, was quoted as saying that almost 10,000 UFO sightings have been reported to the Air Force since 1947, when the Project was set up. He went on to state that
"Not one has ever given any indication that it was a space vehicle under intelligent control .... We're certainly not trying to hold anything back, the Air Force would have a lot of technical knowledge to gain from examining a real UFO."

The Major conceded that the origin of at least 672 of the UFOs could not be accounted for. At the time, Quintanilla admitted being stymied over the April 24, 1964, sighting by Patrolman Lonnie Zamora of Socorro, N.M. because of the considerable physical evidence found and the fact that it had been well investigated and researched by experts. Quintanilla mused that the UFO might have been an experimental lunar-landing vehicle. IF he had the full backing of the USAF, wouldn't such information have been available to him?

1966 - On January 11
Prominent City Officials and Others corroborate sightings over Wanaque, New Jersey.
Mysterious aerial activity occurred over the Wanaque Reservoir.

1966 -
Mel Noel, an ex-USAF lieutenant, gives details of a 1953-1954 USAF assignment during which on three occasions, he and others saw 16, 5 and 5 UFO's with the commanding colonel meeting aboard their craft in the third instance.

1966 - On January 19
George Pedley, a banana grower, sees a "vapor-like saucer" take off from a "nest" in the reeds near Tully, Australia.
Two more "nests" are discovered by cane farmer Tom Warren and school teacher Hank Penning during the month.

1966 - On January 31
Luna 9, a 1583 kg Soviet satellite launched by an SL-6 from Tyuratam, made the first recorded soft landing on the Moon followed by the first TV transmission from the surface. After a 79 hour flight, a 100 kg 58 cm diameter spheroid instrument capsule was ejected when the probe touched the surface and the retro rockets shut down. The capsule, weighted to assume an upright position, was stabilized by the opening of 4 petals. Three panoramas from the eastern edge of the Ocean of Storms, with different Sunlight angles, were transmitted over a 3-day period.
Luna 4, launched April 2, 1963, had missed the Moon. Luna 5, launched May 9, 1965, had impacted in the Sea of Clouds. Luna 6, launched June 8, 1965, had missed the Moon. Luna 7, launched October 4, 1965, had crashed in the Ocean of Storms. Luna 8, launched December 3, 1965, had crashed in the Ocean of Storms.

1966 - On February 1
It was reported that Dr. Alexander Kliarin was in charge of a special child development area at the Institute of Pediatrics in Moscow, U.S.S.R. There are 500 beds at the Institute, many of them filled with critical cases of lung ailments and allergies while about 50 "normal" children, who've been abandoned by their parents are also being raised there. The techniques used are considered scientific, and, as one senior scientific worker and master of medicine at the Institute, Dr. Vladimir Tatochenko, voiced, "Just because a woman bears a child does not mean that she knows how to raise one properly."
Experiments in conditioned reflexes are conducted on the children and periodically they are put into a large capsule for monitoring of brainwave, heart response and muscle reaction in connection with stimuli.

Both Dr. Kliarin and Dr. Tatochenko believe nature is unnecessarily slow in developing children; that science can help speed the process of growing up and acquiring intelligence. They've found that children can distinguish colours at birth - not after 6 to 10 months as once believed. Babies one week old can recognize voices and there is evidence that babies brains are more advanced than was previously believed.
Tests are made on pre-born children.
"Intellectual milestones are being reached well before the child is actually born.
The infant's brain develops so fast that the whole learning process can safety be speeded up," said Dr. Kliarin.

Stimulation of the brain of the foetus and placement in a synthetic environment will develop brain complexity before birth: this is known by the GREY-RUST spacebeings from Sirius.

1966 - On February 3
The Ad Hoc Committee to Review Project Blue Book met.
It reviewed the Robertson Panel report of 1953 and was briefed by the current head of Project Blue Book, Major Hector Quintanilla, and the staff of the USAF Foreign Technology Division (a newly-formed division which took over UFO investigations). The Committee's report, released in March concluded:
1. Resources assigned to the Project had been quite limited; 2. Some cases classified as "identified" had insufficient evidence; 3. Greater scientific investigation and resources were desired; 4. Contracts with selected universities to provide scientific teams were recommended (only the University of Colorado Condon Committee was formed, later widely viewed as a whitewash); 5. Wide unsolicited circulation of Project Blue Book reports was desired (no files were released nor documents circulated).

1966 -
Oliver Knaggs concludes that there are definite grounds for believing military authorities are keeping details of UFO activities from the public to avoid possible panic since there are so many factors they cannot explain themselves.

1966 - During the year,
Bertrand Russell, in his new book "Against the Crime of Silence", writes:
"it is in the nature of imperialism that the citizens of the imperial power are always among the last to know - or care - about the circumstances in the colonies."

1966 - On February 9
A typical example of capitalist market response to peace was provided in a story by David Deitch in the New York Herald Tribune:
"Wall Street was shaken yesterday by news of an apparent peace feeler from North Vietnam, but swiftly recovered its composure after about an hour of sometimes indiscriminate selling."

1966 - During February and March
UFO Sightings and Unexplained "Footprints" are made and found in the vicinity of Tully, Australia.

1966 - Late in February
The 262nd episode of Perry Mason, an American television drama series airs.
It will be the only colour segment of the 271 episode series - the others were all black and white. The series had begun in 1966 and will have run for 8 seasons by its end. Plea bargaining, an increasingly common resolution to American criminal charges - usually to avoid the costs involved with a court trial in exchange for a reduced charge and sentence is the climax of this episode. While it signaled the end of the Perry Mason court drama, it also indicated the end of common law justice in America.
The intent of the justice system to provide a closure for the victims of crime by enactment of an approved penalty to fit a specific crime would be increasingly defeated in the future. If the public lose faith in the justice system, it loses faith in its government. A lack of confidence in the government, in a democratic government is justification for a change in political leadership and direction. When such fails to happen a coup d'etat by an elite or the slow cancer of citizen defiance may rise against and threaten government integrity.

1966 -
President Lyndon Johnson, of the U.S.A. gives in to AEC political pressure and allows the Weiss research and reports to be withheld from the public.
Edward Weiss, of the U.S. Public Health Service and a respected epidemiologist, had completed a study of young people surgically treated for thyroid disease between the years 1948 to 1962, in Utah. His findings showed that Thyroiditis had increased twofold. Thyroid cancer had increased almost fourfold. An examination of death records in southwestern Utah showed an excessive number of leukemia deaths over the normal rate in the years of 1950 to 1964. Negative press regarding radiation hazards was expected to hamper both the government's testing of nuclear devices and the peaceful applications of nuclear energy. Lawsuits would also arise in large numbers. The report would not be made public until January, 1979, after the passing of the Freedom of Information Act in 1974 and a congressional hearing beginning in 1978.

1966 - On March 1
"Venus 3", a USSR interplanetary earth satellite became the first projectile from Earth to reach the planet Venus.
Competing rationalizations by scientists as to the nature of its surface could be classified in 7 broad categories:
1. moist, swampy, teeming with life; 2. warm, enveloped by a global carbonic-acid ocean; 3. cool, Earth-like, with surface water and a dense ionosphere; 4. water, massive precipitating clouds of water droplets with intense lightning; 5. cold, polar regions with ice caps 10 km thick and a hot equatorial region far above the boiling point of water; 6. hot, dusty, dry, windy global desert - extremely hot and cloudy, with molten lead and zinc puddles at the equator, seas of bromine, butyric acid and phenols at the poles; 7. a young planet with a thin crust, high rates of volcanism and slightly more heat radiating from it than the Sun radiates onto it.

With such a wide range of suspicions, humans had betrayed their propensity to intellectualize about what they had no knowledge of; the human pride and insecurity of covering up one's ignorance and preventing feelings of insecurity and confusion by adopting and planting suggestions as to the possible reality. While this process provides humans with an added degree of control over their environment and an added pride in their conscious rational ability, the accuracy of the result is usually "forgotten", or, indeed, never reflected on if the reality ever is determined.
This "scientific" conjecturing tends to have an accuracy of about 1%, in fact, so the recent cultural attraction to its use over the past 600 years cannot be regarded as constructive. The use of reflection is much more humbling and much more accurate in the realization of patterns. The constructive use of meditation and prayer is even considerably further accurate; it requires self-discipline, humility, reverence, and self-direction - which human political systems have tended to downplay > perhaps because they undermine human-based authority systems.

1966 - In March
Part of the conclusion of the O'Brien commission set up to review Project Blue Book procedures was as follows:
It is thought that perhaps 100 sightings a year might be subjected to this close study, and that possibly an average of ten man days be required per sighting so studied. The information provided by such a programme might bring to light new facts of scientific value.

1966 - Beginning in March and extending over the next year
"Project GHOST" (Global HOrizontal Sounding Technique) resulted in the release of 88 weather balloons intended to float around the globe at a constant height of 12 km about 20 times during a period of over 200 days. With the development of new, high modulus, strong plastic films, unvented spherical balloons could be made such that they could withstand large and varying overpressures without breaking and with negligible volume change. The advent of microelectronics allowed the development of lightweight electronic systems for balloon location and data telemetry in ways which would not be hazardous to commercial aircraft. Development of Earth satellites over the previous decade would now enable accurate balloon location and rapid transmission of data from any place on the globe for many thousands of balloons.
The heart of the GHOST is the 'superpressure' balloon.
The most familiar balloon in use throughout the world at this point is the expandable, unvented balloon, made from rubber or synthetic rubber and designed to ascend until the expanding gas stretches the balloon wall to the breaking point. Balloons of this type were used to carry aloft many hundreds of radiosondes launched each day by the various national weather services to take measurements in the upper atmosphere.

The other two types of balloons are non-extensible, made of one of the plastic films.
The more common type is used for carrying scientific packages ranging from film packs, used to investigate cosmic radiation, to heavy and complex astronomical equipment. This type has been used for almost all manned flights and is known as a zero pressure balloon because it permits the expanding gas to escape once the balloon envelope has been filled to its full volume. This results in the internal gas pressure equalling that of the outside atmosphere. With the volving off of this 'free lift' gas, neutral buoyancy is quickly achieved and the balloon floats at a relatively constant altitude. As the gas in the balloon begins to cool, lift is reduced, the balloon begins to descend and ballast must be expended if the same altitude is to be maintained.
The superpressure balloon does not vent.
It rises until the mass of the displaced air equals the mass of the balloon and the instrument package, and the internal pressure of the balloon becomes considerably greater than the atmospheric pressure. The heating and cooling influences of the environment increase or reduce the internal balloon pressure but the mass of the balloon remains constant so that it continues to float at a constant density altitude. Changes in balloon skin stress eventually result in some expansion and contraction such that a 1% change in the internal balloon temperature can result in an altitude change of 10 metres. Cloud and terrain variation are the major influences. Superpressure balloons usually provide less of a hazard to aircraft than other types because in the upper atmospheres where they are flown and found, the film making up the skin is much more brittle due to the cold temperatures than the material used for other types usually found at lower altitudes. If a superpressure balloon is struck, it usually shatters.

The EOLE (France) and IRLS (USA) satellites are expected to be used with computer programs to interrogate the balloons, locate them by two range measurements between the balloon and the satellite and result in a land-based station coordinating the data. The eventual aim of Project GHOST is to keep 6000 (six thousand) balloons circling the Earth, at altitudes between 5 and 24 km. The whole system would cost about US $60 million per year to maintain. The result would be a global watch on the weather.
The introduction of high speed computers and "weather" surveillance satellites has produced the capability to produce tens of thousands of pictures and had been heralded earlier as the key to accurate weather forecasts. Computers can only use digital data and the pictures are still in analog form. Other present options for devising a global weather network demand the positioning of a great number of reporting ocean based stations (boats) to fill in the data gaps existing over the oceans. Such an option is prohibitively expensive. With Project GHOST, the New Zealand Meteorological Service and the Environmental Sciences Service Agency of the USA are joint research partners with the National Center for Atmospheric Research, in Boulder, Colorado State, conducting the computer analysis.
While this program undoubtedly contributed to the number of false UFO sightings, it was largely abandoned with the further development of the electronic digitizing of pictures and improved telemetrics. The major impetus behind this development was military surveillance, not global weather reporting. The high cost of the R&D involved was largely hidden in military and "black" program project expenditures.

1966 - On March 19
A Horned UFO was sighted near La Porte, Indiana.
It was described as being about the size of a railroad tank car, brilliant white, and surrounded by misty white rings; a round reddish light shone from near the centre of the object.

1966 - On March 20
Many Witnesses observe UFOs over Dexter, Michigan, and the Ann Arbor area.

1966 - On the night of March 21-22
87 coeds at Hillsdale College in Michigan watched a glow of red, yellow, and green lights rise from a swamp only a few hundred yards from their dormitory. Football-shaped, the glow seemed suddenly to fly at the dormitory. Then it stopped. Then it flew back to the swamp where it hovered. The county civil defense director watched the glowing object through binoculars for 3 hours. The deputy sheriff took a 12-minute time exposure photograph.
The following night, 63 miles away, 12 people in Dexter, Michigan, several of them police officers, watched a glowing object rise from a marshy area on a farm. At about 1000 feet altitude, the object stopped and hovered for a few minutes, and then flew away. A farmer and his son had approached to within 500 yards of the object and heard it take off with the sound of a ricocheting bullet.

Dr. Allen Hynek, USAF special advisor to Project Blue Book, was dispatched to investigate the sightings. Reporters and journalists responded with a frenzy for drama and urgency in the stories spurred on by the near hysteria in the communities and the rush for recognition in their profession. A botanist had called Hynek from the University of Michigan to draw attention to the possibility of swamp gas as a possible explanation. While such could only be considered on a theoretical approach by an absent observer unaware of the details, in the press of reporters Hynek apparently mentioned the words "swamp gas". As often happens in such cases, the media responded with the most unrealistic and poorly researched information rather than discuss the known facts and await a considered conclusion.

Both Hynek and the USAF would be considered foolish, untrustworthy and in support of a conspiracy from here forward - by those who had been witnesses, and by others who had or would become witnesses. Fully intending the reverse, the "cover-up" would now appear confirmed to some observers, based ironically, on the disinformation of the profit-oriented media.

1966 - In the March 22 issue of "Look" magazine
Betty Rollin writes of the current North American obsession with Pop-Camp-Junk art and entertainment:
"After their 1940's heyday, when superhero pulp comics sold about 17 million copies a month, television, in the 1950s, depressed the entire comic book industry. Realism was running high, and suddenly, the only heroes left were sandwiches. Then, horror showed up, and that did it. ... deliberately wanted to take something tasteless and lowbrow and organize it into art. ... In the early sixties, not only Pop, but a stowaway, Junk, hit the penthouse. Of course, Junk had a new name: Camp. And with Camp came a new accolade: "Isn't it awful ? I love it!" ... Writer-sociologist Paul Goodman calls it "moronism." ... Everyone is out for a cheap laugh. ....

Dr. David Manning White ...
"Our world today is filled with malaise and confusion.
Even intellectuals yearn for simplicity. ... We're helpless about 20 years of the cold war, says Feiffer, "we're helpless about Vietnam. We look for Superman at a time when we feel most impotent.

Dr. Edgar Friedenberg of the University of California ...
"If kids are caught up in this thing, its their way of saying to grownups,
'I'm not getting involved in your lousy world.'"

Plans to distract the average American from reality and self-direction were proven to be working by such indications as these: If everyone tuned out, control would be left to the TRI-GALAXY Government.

1966 - On March 26
An Incident occurred at Attigneville, France in which a strange white wheel with red spokes at its periphery was seen travelling at a constant speed of about 30 km per hour.

1966 - On March 28
Gerald R. Ford, as House Republican minority leader, before becoming President of the U.S.A., wrote to the Armed Services Committee Chairman, Mendel Rivers, to say that he was not satisfied with government actions on the UFO subject because
"I think there may be substance in some of these reports and because I believe the American people are entitled to a more thorough explanation than has been given them by the Air Force to date."
He went on to request that the House of Representatives hold a UFO hearing, inviting testimony from all quarters. Ford concluded,
"I think we owe it to the people to establish the credibility regarding UFOs and to produce the greatest possible enlightenment on this subject."

His constituents in Michigan State were particularly angry about the suggestion by astronomer and USAF consultant J. Allen Hynek that sightings in Dexter, Michigan, and Hillsdale, Michigan, might be attributable to swamp gas.
The request resulted in the "House Armed Services Committee Hearings", which were held on April 5, 1966.

1966 - On March 28
Near Conisbrough, Yorkshire, Stephen Pratt photographed with his instamatic camera what he saw as a throbbing orange-coloured light in the sky. The film when developed showed 3 objects which appear to be solid saucer-shaped objects.

1966 - On March 28
In Hamilton, Ontario, behind the Hamilton Mountain police station, Charles Cozens, saw a luminous oval object descend towards him followed by a second. The metallic craft was making a buzzing sound as it settled into the grass. Around the rim which was about 8 feet in diameter, he noticed a string of multicolour lights "flickering like a computer". He approached the craft and on touching it found it to be about body temperature, hard and smooth. One of the craft had a long gun-like antenna protruding at one end and in shape was thicker at the base and narrowed to the size of a nickel at the top. When he touched the antenna, he received an electric shock and saw a flash. Other sightings followed in Hamilton and between Toronto and Windsor over the next week.

1966 - By early April
Daytime television serials and game shows reached over 140 million North American women a week.
The main components of such games shows as " Let's Make a Deal" were avarice, gluttony and envy.
Housewives were tempted to watch others wilfully do what they would normally be ashamed of for the purpose of getting as much money or prizes as possible, prizes which the housewife would wish she could afford. Lust won viewer's closest attention and devotion encouraging them to live dangerously through the roles portrayed. Daily dramas portrayed the regular occurrence of death, disease, violence, alcoholism, attempted suicide, amnesia, rape, malpractice and child-custody suits. Frequently, these traumas were not coped with in a constructive fashion lending a real life air to the storyline. And while the viewer was captured by the drama, excitement, and glamour - they displayed sloth.

As a cultural patterning medium, television was used to educate one in all the ways in which a person could respond to situations negatively or poorly. As these were often the level of coping skills which the viewer had, these portrayals often served to strengthen weak personality skills rather than mentor the viewer to constructive and unpopular skills.
With Unconscious hypnotic-like imprint patterning, this type of programming encouraged the viewer to maintain levels of low self-esteem by emotionally identifying with the tragedy before them and accepting the authority of the medium as "just the way life is". When people develop a self-indulgent and a chronic "viewer" behaviour, they wait for life to come to them; depression sets in from inactivity. Depressed persons tend to involve themselves less in the decisions governing what their government does on their behalf.

1966 - On April 5
A brief "House Armed Services Committee Hearing" was held.
Secretary of the Air Force Harold D. Brown revealed that an ad hoc group of scientists called the O'Brien Panel had secretly convened only 6 months earlier to review the UFO problem. The panel had concluded that UFO sightings had potential scientific value and recommended that the USAF supplement the Blue Book program with science teams from selected universities who could mobilize quickly, gather data while fresh, and evaluate that data thoroughly. The Air Force had done nothing.
With the press coverage of the recent sightings, the pressure from Congress - Secretary Brown told the Committee that the USAF would immediately begin a search outside the military for teams of scientists to study the UFO problem. Several Universities refused to participate because of the controversy. After several months, the USAF would offer a $313,000 grant to Dr. Edward Condon at the University of Colorado to conduct the entire study.

1966 - In the April 8, "Time" issue
An article "Seven Deadly Daytime Sins" outlined soap opera viewing aspects:

"Daytime TV now reaches about 140 million women a week, women who are in the money - and in the market for detergents, beauty aids, foods, baby products and hundreds of other advertisable commodities. ... the housewife is bombarded with programs whose aim is to exploit at least 5 of the 7 deadly sins. Avarice and gluttony are the main components of such game shows as "Let's Make A Deal" ... But it's lust that wins the viewer's closest attention. ...

For variety, the housewife can tune in (soap operas) where the actors still say 'You mean ...' and 'It can't be true!' and regularly face death, disease, violence, alcoholism, attempted suicide, amnesia, rape, malpractice and child-custody suits. The viewer can be forgiven if she becomes a victim of another deadly sin - pride - at having a family who, no matter what their vagaries, must seem to be the epitome of middle-class morality compared to the atrocity-ridden citizens of (the soaps). ... sloth can easily be accounted for.

1966 - On April 8
Bent headlight beams were reported by a motorist who nearly drove off the road in Victoria State, Australia.
The motorist was driving along the road between Bendigo and St. Arnaud, when his car headlight beams suddenly appeared to bend to the right. He momentarily became disoriented by the experience and almost drove off the road. As he stopped the car, a UFO arose out of a nearby field.

1966 - Early in April
The Report of the Special Study Group for the USA advisory group to the President, formerly known as the "Majority Twelve", was reviewed. It had taken 2-1/2 years to complete and was the result of numerous 2-day brainstorming weekends held by selected cultural representatives for the purpose of formulating political and social options for the future of the USA. The general idea for the kind of study had originated before 1961 and had been resolved to be undertaken in early 1963. The focus of the study was a consideration of the possibility and desirability of Peace. The proposals of the Group would be studied and largely assumed to be acceptable by the current and future senior staff of the White House and the intelligence agencies of the USA. It would also be shared with British government contemporaries.
The committee was authoritarian in structure.
Cultural representatives believed to represent the intellectual greatness of the capitalist ethic of the USA were chosen by the senior intelligence officials and asked to volunteer. They included:

an historian and political theorist;
a professor of international law;
an economist, social critic and biographer;
a sociologist often involved in public affairs;
a cultural anthropologist;
a psychologist, educator, and developer of personal testing systems;
a psychiatrist who had conducted extensive studies in human behaviour;
a scholar and literary critic;
a physical chemist and Nobel prize winner;
a biochemist who had made important reproductive discoveries;
a mathematician affiliated with the Rand Corporation;
an astronomer, physicist, and communications theorist;
a systems analyst, international relations writer and war planner;
an industrialist who had done many special government assignments;
and a person of unnamed background.

It should be noted that only in an authority-based society would it be considered possible for a group of socially decorated and privileged persons be considered capable of representing hundreds of millions of people and of being worthy to suggest social and political options which could affect the livelihood, safety, health and survival of the masses. This is a hazard of mass human political cultures. As is so often true in human history, the conclusions of the report would be afforded god-like authority NOT because of their inherent wisdom; rather, they would be sanctioned as a projected reverence for the office of the President and the national intelligence agencies.
The discussions carried out were informal to the extent that each member accepted the status of authority provided each by their social accreditation and selectivity for the Group. The decisions of the Group were decidedly political in that unanimity was mandated by the chairman, the aggressive (intolerant) members of the committee, and the (political) originators. Eventually, agreement was reached - and, because the conclusions presented bore the context of unanimity - the points stated were taken to be beyond question by most of its future readers.

Forecasting techniques involving the liberal use of statistics, computer simulations and artificial intelligence, and linear detached intellectualization were utilized in an attempt to reach strong indicators of general directions preferable or possible in future decision-making. Certain assumptions were made which were never discussed nor even recognized. Some of these included the positions that the future of the world must carry a mass political structure; the future of the world must be of an expansionist capitalist economic basis; the future of the world must preserve the privileges of a decision-making class of persons while upgrading the general welfare of the dependent masses; the future of the world will follow an authority system in which a very small minority of persons make decisions in secret which determine the direction of humanity as a whole.
Totally beyond consideration were such possibilities as true democracy, individual self responsibility, a steady-state economy, honest and open communication in politics, the dignity of the individual, appreciation for life at he expense of technology. The fact that the "desirability" of peace even had to be considered demonstrates that a spiritual approach was certainly NOT at work here. What would the reasons for considering peace to be undesirable be?

In brief the expectations concerning General Disarmament were these:
a. Industrial development would be diminished; b. Industrial development would be decentralized; c. High income science and technology jobs would be slashed; d. No program for economic conversion to peace was available; e. Conversion of military output to social projects was untenable; f. No "acceptable" political means for the conversion existed; g. Some kinds of waste may have a larger social function; h. War is the most effective technique human capitalist authorities know of which controls employment, production, and consumption; i. Foreign policy is irrelevant without the means to enforce it; j. Failure to "control" anti-social elements leads to anarchy; k. Removal of war would require a substitute for expression of..;

General statements of "fact" included in the report:
A. The world war industry accounted for 1/10th of the world economy: The USA accounted for the largest share of the expenditure of the world's wealth on armament production, $60 billion per year, including billions per year spent of missile development. B. Modern war production required rigid specialization of careers: Some fields of science & technology would be eliminated; other fields would be decimated; the social hierarchy would be dramatically altered. C. Since the institutionalized norms of USA mass communication, education, politics, and religion all encouraged anxiety, competition and aggression - only the option of coercion seemed obvious as a means of conversion to a peace centred economy. D. The organizing principle for any system of human authority (politics) is war. E. A professional military force must create a need for the regular exercise and appreciation of its "talents". F. Without a long-established war economy, and without its frequent eruption into large-scale shooting war, most of the major industrial advances recorded in popularized human history could never have taken place. G. National political and military "legitimacy" is only derived from the credibility of an external war threat to its followers. H. Codified laws originated as the imposition of the norms of the conqueror over those of the subject. I. Class relationships are maintained by a(n) (authority-based) war economy; the prospect of poverty provides incentive for compliance. J. The military institution is a "safe" place for the segregation and control of the anti-social elements and unemployables of society. K. Primary social organization requires allegiance; allegiance requires a cause; war is such a cause; war is a basis for society. L. The political abstraction of persons into "enemies" makes it acceptable for human masses to condone vengeful carnage of others. M. Ancient blood sacrifice is assumed to be indicative of a society's willingness and capability to make war. N. Removal of war as an institution would require a substitute which "involved real risk of real personal destruction ... scale ... and complexity of modern social systems. O. Humanity has ecologically "adapted" to overpopulation by systematically destroying the surplus through warfare. P. Medical advances have both compounded the growth of human population demands and the survival of undesirable genetic traits; war is a mechanism for reducing the presence of such traits. Q. Sustained human "art" invariably carries a war or conflict theme; "peacetime" art tends to experimentation with meaningless forms. R. War is the principal motivational force for the development of science at every level - every significant discovery. S. War provides for a general social release of anxieties - encouraged by the abuse inherent in an authoritarian system. T. War stabilizes authority structures (political and economic) by allowing the older and more powerful members of the society to regiment, model, imprint, and kill off the younger members. U. War provides a basis for "international understanding" such that "would-be" powerful nations learn to adopt the technologies and tactics of "have-been" and "currently domineering" nations. V. To maintain the social needs of economic expansion, increasing health sophistication, mass indoctrinative education, palatial housing, segregation of work-dwelling-recreational locations, mass use utilities, reduction of poverty, political cohesiveness, and a control of "destabilizing" social elements - a surrogate Institution would be required.

Proposed strategies included in the report were these:
1. Concern for social order necessitates a continuation of "war"; 2. No action towards a peace-based economy should be taken until a thorough plan was is place for all contingencies; 3. Ecological imbalance resulting from thermonuclear war is likely; 4. "Stockpile" birds to counter radiation-resistant insects; 5. Mandate "Selective Service" duty of 2 years of state employment; 6. Re-introduction of slavery, re: military service; 7. Development of "blood games" to control individual aggressive responses, afford "social purification", and "state security"; 8. Substitution of alternate enemies: cancer, aliens, pollution; 9. A giant space research program to justify scientific advancement; 10. A permanent War/Peace Research Agency established by executive order of the President; funded by nonaccountable funds; 11. Insurance of the continuance of the war system as long as is judged necessary.

Considerations for the reader:
01 : A lifestyle built on a foundation of war is obsessional; 02 : Unless motivated by the truth of reality, humans avoid change; 03 : Lack of commitment and motivation = lack of innovation; 04 : Peace was never assigned a social spiritual priority; 05 : Human societies have been organized for the purpose of long-term environmental survival (Egyptian, Inca, Aztec); 06 : "Threats against the national interest" have usually been manufactured by the political manipulation of citizens; 07 : Should the powerful have the right to direct the peaceful?; 08 : Wilful reverence follows from sincere spiritual development; 09 : Instead of segregating the traumatized, why not counsel them and upgrade their skills towards social inclusion?; 10 : Reverence for God and respect for all life can be an organizing principle for human societies - but it requires individual self-esteem and social acceptance of self-worth. 11 : Blood sacrifice was an "immature" misunderstood response of a primitive humanity willing to sacrifice one to avoid "war". 12 : Behavioural patterns do not change unless the motivating traumas which drive the obsessions are met positively. 13 : More of humanity has died, with less agony, through disease, than through the selective slaughter of war. Population control is possible without the barbarism of abortion, infanticide, sexual mutilation, murder and massacre. If the commitment was present, positive means and attitudes would evolve. 14 : War does not have any demonstrated "eugenic" benefit to humanity; war traumatizes the survivors: energy blocks weakens them. 15 : Art mirrors the appreciations and anxieties of life; a life filled with conflict, aggression and war will produce such art; the conflict centred society is likely to be restricted in its appreciation of life to its simplistic norm of "survival". 16 : The "balanced" creativity of peaceful spiritually-guided innovation would surpass the regressive destructive innovation of the authoritarian-guided iniquity-filled society. 17 : Many of the inventions and innovations of authority-based society have their requirement in creating destruction or coping with it; war creates a magnitude of medical emergencies and leads to an improvement in technical procedures for the correction of them. 18 : A "spiritual" society does not have imposed authority; persons choose, on an individual basis to be guided for the good of all. 19 : International understanding and respect would not require or accentuate envy, fear, greed, hate, gluttony, and possessiveness. 20 : A no-growth economy does not require growth producing structures. 21 : To maintain the social needs of economic stability, increasing self-responsibility, shared and acknowledged truth, comfortable housing, multi-purpose work-dwelling-recreational locations, family sized utilities, self-sufficiency, spiritual unanimity, and a control of "low self-esteem" social elements - a new norm could evolve from the eradication of society-wide energy blocks. 22 : "Blood games" ensure the non-spiritual training of children. 23 : "Selective Service" and military duty "slavery" are effective forms of modeling and imprinting of human behaviour. 24 : Who decides what deserves to be secretly funded as research? 25 : Who makes the decision that war is still "necessary"?

Some specific quotes from the report:
"Lasting peace, while not theoretically impossible, is probably unattainable; even if tit could be achieved it would almost certainly not be in the best interests of a stable society to achieve it."

"The economic impact of general disarmament, to name only the most obvious consequence of peace, would revise the production and distribution patterns of the globe to such a degree that would make the changes of the past 50 years seem insignificant. Political, sociological, cultural, and ecological changes would be equally far-reaching. What has motivated our study of these contingencies has been the growing sense of thoughtful men in and out of government that the world is totally unprepared to meet the demands of such a situation." "Without a long-established war economy, and without its frequent eruption into large scale shooting war, most of the major industrial advances known to history, ... could never have taken place. Weapons technology structures the economy."

"There is no question but that a universal requirement that procreation be limited to the products of artificial insemination would provide a fully adequate substitute control for population levels. ... It cannot be established while the war system is still in effect. The reason for this is simple: excess population is war material. As long as any society must contemplate even a remote possibility of war, it must maintain a maximum supportable population, even when so doing critically aggravates an economic liability." "But the principal cause for concern over the continuing effectiveness of the war system, and the more important reason for hedging with peace planning, lies in the backwardness of current war-system programming. Its controls have not kept pace with the technological advances it has made possible."

1966 - In April
Rudolf Hauschka, in his book "The Nature of Substance" states that life cannot possibly be interpreted in chemical terms because life is not the result of the combination of elements but something which precedes the elements. Matter is the precipitate of life.
"Is it not more reasonable to suppose that life existed long before matter and was the product of a pre-existent spiritual cosmos? ... The elements as we know them are already corpses, the residue of life forms. Though chemists can derive oxygen, hydrogen and carbon from a plant, they cannot derive a plant from any combination of these or other elements. What lives, may die, but nothing is created dead."

Hauschka found that plants could not only generate matter out of a nonmaterial sphere, but could "etherealize" it once more, noting an emergence and disappearance of matter in rhythmic sequence, often in conjunction with phases of the moon.

1966 - During April
A Film of a UFO flying over Catalina Island, California, is taken.
A reasonably clear photographic record of a circular distant silvery-coloured shape is shown flying over and around the peaks of the mountains on the island. It would become one of the most known pieces of UFO evidence. There is a USA Navy base on Catalina Island.

1966 - On April 12
The Mu Gia Pass, in North Vietnam, 75 miles north of the demilitarized zone, was bombed by 30 U.S.A. 8-engine B-52 bombers.
A narrow, 2-1/2 mile wide pass in a very mountainous region, it had been selected as the most important and most vulnerable point in the transportation system conveying supplies from the north to the war in South Vietnam. Thousands of tons of bombs were dropped on a three mile section of the 21 mile long pass. The concentration bombing was intended to "really pulverize that pass" and to close the road for a significant length of time. Many delayed action bombs (set to go off at times varying from minutes to days after the attack) were dropped in the attack to impede the efforts of North Vietnamese crews to clear the pass. Returning pilots said that a large section of the mountain appeared to have crashed into the pass in a huge landslide.
On April 24, Cyrus R. Vance, then the U.S.A. Deputy Secretary of Defense, reported that the saturation bombing had closed the pass only briefly and that two days after the massive attack fighter-bombers had to be sent in to attack trucks that were using the reopened pass. Damage that could be caused by the bombs had been overestimated. Trucks can and did maneuver around or over bomb craters and landslides.

This was one of many challenges to the mechanistic, academic intellectualized, spiritually devoid strategies devised for the war in Southeast Asia by the U.S.A. Commitment was never to Peace or freedom but rather to Subjugation of Southeast Asia to the economy and politics of the U.S.A. The Rockefeller headed group working with the GREY-BLOND-GRAY REPTOID Trilateral Confederation had only one goal in mind, either consciously or subconsciously: to siphon off enough money to finance the survival of part of the American culture in the coming apocalypse. To do that, they had discovered that by promoting huge expenditures for military technology, both in research and in production, the American voter could be deceived and manipulated.
High emphasis on technology meant less troops endangered in a greater area and intensity of war; higher numbers in the statistics of the actions, suggesting policy effectiveness; the increasing size and intensity of the war would also suggest the increasing threat of loss in the war increasing the reflexive fear response of authorizing more effort; the higher the budget, the higher the military industry production, the more jobs including higher paying more specialized jobs. If the voter was distracted adequately with good incomes and anxiety about a war, no one would be looking at where all the money went.

1966 - On April 17
Sheriffs Dale Spaur and W.L. Neff saw a UFO near Ravenna, Ohio.

1966 - On April 22
3 Brightly lit Oval Aerial Objects are observed by several women in Beverly, Massachusetts.
It hovered only 6 metres above a schoolhouse.
When one girl beckoned, one of the objects left the others and hovered at the same height over her head.
In response to a phone call, two police officers arrived by car. Convinced of the reality of the observation, they phoned the USAF, which dispatched interceptor jets. By the time they had arrived, the objects had disappeared. The incident was conspicuously withheld from the media.

1966 - On April 25
"Pinstripe", a nuclear test blast was detonated as a deep shaft explosion, one of 40 tests fired during 1966.
There was a substantial venting of radiation products from this relatively small 20 kiloton blast.

1966 - On May 18
J. Robert S. McNamara, a senior USA government officer and rationalist advisor, Secretary of Defense, delivered an address before the American Society of Newspaper Editors (ASNE), in Montreal, P.Q., Canada, in which he stated the following:
"Some people are afraid even to look over the edge. But in a thermonuclear world we cannot afford any political acrophobia. ... (the USA) has devoted a higher proportion of its gross national product to its military establishment than any other major free world nation. This was even true before our increased expenditures in Southeast Asia. ... Even in our own abundant societies, we have reason enough to worry over the tensions that coil and tighten among underprivileged young people, and finally flail out in delinquency and crime.
What are we to expect ... where mounting frustrations are likely to fester into eruptions of violence and extremism? ... It seems to me that we could move toward remedying that inequity [of the Selective Service System] by asking every young person in the United States to give two years of service to his country - whether in one of the military services, in the Peace Corps, or in some other volunteer developmental work at home or abroad. We could encourage other countries to do the same."

1966 - Early in May
A Cornell University 5-year study of Indoor Plumbing concluded that North American bathrooms were "a disgrace to the space age."
Theodore Kira, an architect and head of the research team, said, "The average bathroom is minimal in terms of contemporary knowledge, technology, values and attitudes." The teams findings were set forth in a 116-page report illustrated with 46 photographs and diagrams bearing such captions as "postural mechanics of entering and leaving a bathtub." Specific findings included: "No (bath)tub made today permits a person to relax unless he happens to be a contortionist. ... The standard washbowl has a basin rim only 30 inches from the floor, ... roughly a foot lower than desirable for the use of the adult population."

It seems that the American culture has been able to make jet interceptor pilot seats more comfortable than the toilet seat on which most Americans sit several times a day. Astronaut couches have been made comfortable enough for a person to remain in for as long as a week, yet, the style of bathtub which many Americans may use once each week, is only considered capable of comfort for a contortionist.
And while thousands of sophisticated and expensive helicopters are being used to raise and lower and transport bands of troops to and from combat zones, a bathroom sink - which many Americans will use at least 3 times daily, cannot be made for use at a comfortable height. All cultures display their priorities by the results of their behaviours, regardless of expressed intent. Wellbeing of the citizen appears, here, to come far behind political expressions of power.

1966 - May 24
8 Crew Members of the USS WASP who had reported sighting UFOs on this date were confined to a psychiatric ward in a USA Navy hospital and "treated" as schizophrenics.

1966 - On June 03
The "Gemini 9" spacecraft with crew Stafford-Cernan have their capsule accompanied from takeoff by many UFO's seen by ground personnel as well as by capsule crew.

1966 - In June
Increasing the numbers of American ground forces in Vietnam received authorization from President Johnson.
A force level of 431,000 was to be reached by mid-1967.
Westmoreland requested a further increase to 542,000 by the end of 1967.
The best of technology publicly available was now taken to the war.
Portable radar units, "people sniffers", IBM 1430 computers, herbicides and other items were added to the arsenal.
General William Depuy, one of the principal architects of the "search and destroy" tactic, believed that the solution was - materiel - more bombs, more shells, more napalm - till the other side gives up. From 1965 to 1967, South Vietnamese and American airmen dropped over one million tons of bombs on South Vietnam, more than twice the tonnage dropped on the north. Retaliatory bombing was used against villages suspected of harbouring Vietcong. A large amount of air-strikes employed indiscriminate raids against enemy base areas; entire areas of South Vietnam were designated "Free Fire Zones" which could be pulverized without regard to men, women or children; friend, innocent or enemy.
"Operation Ranchhand" was instituted with C-123 aircraft being used to spray 100 million pounds of defoliants and other chemicals over millions of acres of forests, an estimated 50% of South Vietnam's timberlands were destroyed and the soil made toxic to humans.

1966 - On June 13
Following a violent explosion at Altafona, Brazil, many persons saw a flaming object fall into the sea.

1966 - On July 08
The "Gemini 10" spacecraft with crew Young-Collins reported 2 UFO's following until asked ground station for radar observation. Later observed huge object.

1966 - During July 8, 9, and 10th
The "Third National Convention of the Amalgamated Flying Saucer Clubs of America" was held in the Centennial Coliseum, Reno, Nevada, USA.

1966 - During July
A Joint GRAY-"American" Co-existence Agreement is formally initiated stating that in return for access to GRAY technology, the GRAYs may have limited access to American citizens by way of "controlled" abductions. These abductions are to be conducted in such a manner as to leave the subject largely unaware of the transpired investigation and free of physical ailments. No mutilations are to take place. Humans are to be implanted with "monitoring" devices for the sole purpose of research into the activities and capabilities of humans. Bioengineering is to be allowed on the basis of gene-splicing and egg implantation and foetal recovery. The humans involved in the decisionmaking have been told that the GRAYs are dying as a lifeform and want to acquire enough human characteristics to enable them to survive and prosper on the Earth or elsewhere. Although a series of underground bases already exists, future endeavours will have a wider acknowledgement by very senior American political decisionmakers.
A joint human/GRAY base is to be constructed at Area 51 (Groom Lake) in the Las Vegas, Nevada area, near the AEC nuclear test site. Construction and planning begin now and will be completed in 1973. Primary technological exchange will take the form of advances in computer technology and specialized armaments at levels which are archaic by GRAY standards yet far beyond the spiritual ability of most humans to use constructively.

1966 - By August
The Reverend Dr. G.W. Goth, minister of Metropolitan United Church, London, Ontario, Canada, had written the following in a national newspaper:

"Man is not likely to be enslaved by personal dictators.
There is a much greater possibility that he will endorse a system which will strangle him by inches.
We shall be threatened with counter-revolutions and rear-guard actions by those who are determined to turn back the clock. These primitives are doomed to fail.

Complexity and great corporations are inevitable in our society.
The neighbourliness and simplicities of the pastoral community are no more.
The individual is in grave danger.
The huge system which, like a snowball, rolls on to a mammoth size, has little sympathy for the person who wants to retain his identity and his significance. ...

Controls will increase.
The individual will be hemmed in by skyscrapers, health regulations and an endless number of rules, necessary amidst the increasing complexities of our urban society.
The prophet warned us long ago not to worship the things we manufacture.
The machinery is here. We should see to it that it remains the slave and not the master.
We must learn to keep first things first. ...

We should resist these pressures.
The summons is that we are to live and live abundantly.
For what will it profit any one of us should we succeed and inspire wonderful obituary notices if, we go under and lose our real selves? ...."

1966 - During August
Bob Low, soon to become project coordinator of the Condon Committee, wrote in a memo to the University of Colorado officials:
"It is not respectable to give serious consideration to such a possibility (that UFOs exist). ... The trick would be, I think, to describe the project so that, to the public, it would appear a totally objective study but, to the scientific community, would present the image of a group of nonbelievers trying their best to be objective, but having an almost zero expectation of finding a saucer."

One way to achieve this, he suggested, would be to stress the investigation of the psychological makeup of people who claimed to see UFOs, and to downplay the physical evidence. Other universities had turned down the 313,000 dollar research project and some scientists had expressed a concern that IF the project was conducted on an objective basis, it would present the possibility of admitting that UFOs exist.

1966 - On August 17
Two Young Electronics Enthusiasts who had witnessed the June 13 Altafona, Brazil sighting were found dead with strange masks of lead beside them on the Morro do Vintem hill at Nieroi. A prominent citizen reported seeing an unusual object flying over the area that evening.

1966 - On September 1
The USAF set forth the use of Napalm in a letter to Senator Robert Kennedy: Napalm is used against selected targets, such as caves and reinforced supply areas. Casualties in attacks against targets of this type are predominantly persons involved in Communist military activities. Estimates provided by doctors who worked in the areas influenced witnessed that a large number of burn victims were children and that most often the incident involving them was the napalming of an entire village from the air. Thousands of children and mothers were struck with this burning gel every month, killing, grossly disfiguring, and resulting in numerous suicides.

1966 - In September
President Ferdinand Marcos of the Philippines, flies to Washington with Imelda to meet with American President Lyndon Johnson. In return for promising to back LBJs stand in Vietnam, they received millions of dollars in cash from the President's special "unvouchered funds" annual reserve. These went into secret Swiss bank accounts which the Marcoses held privately. In addition, Johnson made credits available to them through the State Department, the Pentagon, the International Monetary Fund, and the World Bank. On the eve of the November American Presidential elections, Ferdinand's visit to Washington would be of major political value to Johnson if he could show Ferdinand as a staunch ally from the are of conflict: Southeast Asia.
The US State Department (David Bell) proposed to LBJ that he advance $4.5 million in unvouchered funds for Fiscal year 1965 to the Philippines "from unvouchered funds" ... "to effectively conceal the U.S. payment" intended to be used to train and equip Philippine armed services replacements for deployment in Vietnam. Ferdinand had campaigned on NOT sending Filipinos to fight battles elsewhere, yet after only 6 weeks in office he reversed his opinion.

Prior to the visit, members of the Marcos administration sent gifts to President Johnson along with at least 10 telegrams of what would be appropriate for Johnson to provide to Marcos, finally settling on a desk set, a silver cigar box, and a silver picture frame. When they met, LBJ played to the vanity and ego of Marcos by affirming Ferdinad's supposed military heroism; in return, Marcos played to the pride and sentimental sympathy of Americans with a speech to the Congress affirming their (expected) support of the aims of the Philippines. Deception built upon deception built into manipulation and bribe: image at a price.
The visit over, Imelda's cousin, Finance Secretary Eduardo Romualdez noted that the Philippines could expect to receive $125 million in aid and credit spread over the next 2-1/2 years. It included an additional $25 million a year for increased veterans benefits, $20 million for military upgrading, $45 million for state infrastructure programs, $10 million for surveys and research. In addition, LBJ personally authorized $38.8 million in secret Pentagon military funds, with no insistence on accountability, over and above the regular $61.6 million given to the Philippines as normal military aid during the period 1966 to 1971. The open-ended new credits from the IMF and the World Bank that became ongoing programs, eventually ran into the billions. From the Philippine veteran's special educational funds, $28 million set aside by Congress, Imelda would use $3.5 million towards her white elephant Cultural Centre.

Some of the money was later traced as follows: The cash grant of $3.6 million in unvouchered funds to help train and equip military replacement troops was delivered by courier in quarterly instalments of $500,000 paid in US Treasury cheques endorsed and cashed by Defense Secretary Ernesto Mata and deposited into the Philippine Veterans Bank in an account set aside as a "special Intelligence fund" for the personal use of Ferdinand Marcos. The Bank had been set up in 1963 with a U.S. grant of $25 million dollars. Ferdinand held trust over half of the shares so the bank was totally under his control. By 1984, the bank had $64.9 million in bad debts in the form of loans made to Marcos associates during the time that Marcos secret police chief Fabian Ver was the bank's chairman. Other disbursements followed a similar pattern.
Johnson persuaded Ferdinand to host a Manila Peace Summit regarding Vietnam: it would take Johnson away from the antiwar demonstrators for awhile; it would make a 2 day visit to the troops in Vietnam seem reasonable; it would suggest to the peace demonstrators that LBJ really wanted peace, and, thereby justify a longer period of war - if the peace talks failed. Convened simply for image, the conference achieved little. The six Pacific nations backing the American supported Saigon administration - America, Australia, New Zealand, Philippines, Thailand, and South Korea - agreed to leave South Vietnam 6 months after peace, whenever that occurred. Thereafter, any time Ferdinand Marcos met LBJ, he would pressure for more cash or aid. Johnson had bought a mercenary and mercenaries are only loyal as long as they are paid.

1966 - On September 12
The "Gemini 11" spacecraft with crew Gordon-Conrad observe a long object over Madagascar.

During 1966 -
CIA headquarters, Langley Field, Virginia: a report was issued noting that the construction of a captured "UFO" appears to be tongue-in-groove system

1966 -
In a U.S.A. Gallup opinion poll, 5% of Americans polled indicated that they believed that UFOs or flying saucers were real and not just a figment of imagination or cases of hallucination and had seen one. 95% indicated that they had heard of the objects.

1966 - By September
A USA Government Armaments Sale to Britain totalling $2-billion worth of jet fighters, fighter-bombers and transport aircraft would result in sizable contracts for the American military producers "General Dynamics", "McDonnell Douglas Corp"., and "Lockheed Aircraft Corp". Such industries only occupy about 5% of an American economy which politicians try to sustain in an ever-present state of growth. Less than 100 companies and institutions dominate this market. Because the greatest production and profits are made by about 20 companies, it is easy for economists and politicians to "overlook" their impact on the economy. ALL of the companies involved are guaranteed to make continual substantial profits for as long as they build what the government wants and/or can sell. The American government has a policy of selling $2-billion worth of armaments annually until 1975, out of a total American military-industry annual sales projected total of $3-billion.
Are such industries becoming dependent upon government promoted contracts? Are such companies becoming dependent upon government policy, or is the government being "lobbied" into armaments promoting strategies, or, do armaments producers and a weak-spirited government believe that armaments can provide the foundation for an expansive American capitalistic economy?

At this time, the top 15 major suppliers to the USA Department of Defence which had an annual budget itself of $75 billion are these:
McDonnell Douglas Corp. American Telephone & Telegraph (AT&T) General Dynamics Corp. General Motors Corp. Lockheed Aircraft Corp. Ling-Temco-Vought, Inc General Electric Corp. Textron Inc. United Aircraft Corp. Grumman Aircraft Engineering Corp. Boeing Co. Sperry Rand Corp. North American Aviation RMK-BRJ Westinghouse Electric Corp.

Those which are capable of contributing to the long-term global strategies and short-term variances of the USA Administration will remain or become global "kings" of their industry specialization.

1966 -
Total Body Radiation studies are conducted by the U.S. Atomic Energy Commission (AEC) with the results being sent to NASA. The experiments were conducted at the Oakridge, Tennesee, Medical Clinic set up for the joint benefit of NASA and the Pentagon. A major reason for the experiments was to determine the dangers of solar flares for astronauts and pilots. The reports would not be made public for almost 30 years at which time government staff involved in the program would be of the understanding that the records had been destroyed. NASA "retired" and destroyed most of the records in 1981. Dr. Lushball personally ordered destruction of most of the records.
According to the data remaining, most of the patients involved were initially extremely ill.
Benefits of the total body radiation were uniformly discouraging yet the reports suggested that the experiments continue to find out the effects for national defence preparations for nuclear war. Partial body radiation provided much more positive results for some patients who experienced "remissions" for up to one month from leukemia. Such remissions are now known to be equally the result of the patient's attitude as when told and believing that they will get better.
Since the clinic unit would have been closed if it ran out of patients, relatives of the prospective patients were told that "free" medical care would be provided for their sick child and that while the procedures were experimental, the child would die under normal treatment: this was the only alternative. All of the families involved were low income supported by blue collar employees with little education. All of the children in the program died. One patient, Dwayne Sexton, was administered 350 roentgens of radiation and died within 4 weeks. A dose of 200 roentgens is usually credited with the loss of 1/2 of the white blood cells of an average adult.

1966 - On September 1
A "very, very extraordinary unidentified flying object" is observed over Majorca by aviation expert Air Commodore Whitney Straight (Deputy Chairman of Rolls-Royce and former Managing Director of B.O.A.C.) and Lady Straight. The sighting is further confirmed by Michael Higgins who, with his wife, observed the object over a 4-hour period.

1966 - During September
Edward Uhler Condon, chairman of the Committee slated to meet in 2 weeks time to study the UFO problem, was quite clearly negative toward the subject of UFOs at a dinner he shared with Dr. Allen Hynek. Condon had been instrumental in the development of radar and as deputy director of the Manhattan Project, yet, his earlier challenges to the government establishment (bureaucracy) had almost preventing him from obtaining the security clearances he needed for his positions and almost lost him his security clearances later. He had learned whose command to follow and what could and could not be said publicly for him to keep his employment and prestige.

1966 - During September and November
USSR Fractional Orbit Bombardment System (FOBS) were tested, unannounced by the Soviet Union.
Cosmos U1 and U2 were the initial of 18 test projectile satellites and were launched from Tyuratam, with a retro stage fitted to the warhead. Nine were tested by the end of 1967 and all were completed by August 8, 1971 when they system was considered operational, expected to be compromised by planned USA radar developments, and, to be superseded by new Soviet strategies.
FOBS left the USA completely open to unannounced nuclear attack and as such they caused much concern amongst the American military. Fired into an orbit of 160 km and then braked for re-entry, their potential nuclear warheads would fall on the enemy before completion of the first revolution. This made it possible for American targets to be attacked by way of a South Pole route which would not be monitored by the BMEWS (Ballistic Missile Early Warning System) of North America and Britain. In the tests the warhead was brought down over Soviet territory. Their presence and capability encouraged the Americans to invest hundreds of millions of dollars in new technology of increased complexity. There were 18 FOBS launchers at Tyuratam.

1966 - By October
Frank Walton, a CIA special agent, had instituted radical changes in the training, organization, and management of the Philippine police and armed forces. He had previously reorganized the police of South Vietnam into a paramilitary force for counterinsurgency and urban population domination. After he finished in Manila, he would present his report to President Johnson, begun under the USAID Office of Public Safety (AID/OPS). He would then continue on to reorganize the Shah of Iran's police into a paramilitary force and remodel the secret police, SAVAK, into a terror organization. In all three locations, the ruthlessness, torture and oppressive tactics employed would end in the downfall of the government.
Under Walton's supervision, the USA provide counterinsurgency training for hundreds of Filipino police and army officers at military schools like Fort Bragg and Fort Benning, the U.S. Army Intelligence School, the International Police Academy in Washington, the FBI National Academy, and the Border Patrol training centre in Los Fresnos, Texas. In the Philippines, academies were established at Baguio, Fort Bonifacio, Legaspi City, Bacolod City, Cebu, Tacloban, Cagayan de Oro, Zamboanga, and at the Constabulary's Special Warfare Training Center at Laur, Nueva Escija. ALL of these centres were later turned into detention camps for political prisoners.

The latest techniques in torture, surveillance, explosives, terrorism and other forms of suppression were conveyed by American specialists into new territories "to institutionalize the most advanced techniques of information and confession extraction from psychological torture, and selective beatings - methods similar to those employed in Brazil, Korea, Vietnam, Iran, Chile and Uruguay. They also had or would see Walton and receive significant amounts of OPS assistance, training and funding. Other students would hail from El Salvador, Paraguay, Argentina, Guatemala, and Honduras. No country was too small or too primitive not to benefit from effective torture techniques.
Some were trained at the Political Warfare Cadres Academy at Peitou, outside Taipei, Taiwan.
Since 1959, the Academy had offered 2-month courses in "psychological warfare and techniques of interrogation." Attendees were typically taught that in order to defeat Communism they had to be cruel; as cruel as the enemy. A certain degree of propaganda and selectively exaggerated disinformation utilized both real instances of Communist atrocity and liberal amounts of Fascist-Capitalist barbarism. Taiwan customarily offered to pay the expense of all the "students". Back in their own country, it would not have been unusual to find crude electric shock, pieces of metal rods near hotplates, and internal injury apparatus at most of the new stations.

Walton was enthusiastically greeted in the Philippines by Filipino intelligence officers who had been trained by Edward Lansdale and the CIA in the early 1960s. As many as 10,000 counterinsurgency positions in Indochina were filled by Filipinos, in CIA-financed fronts such as Operation Brotherhood, Eastern Construction, Vinnel Corporation, International Volunteer Services, Air America, and Bird & Sons. Methods shown to the Vietnamese, Cambodians and Laotians would in turn be learned and used with a vengeance against those who murdered and tortured both civilian and non-civilian. Methods routinely used against the Vietnamese would now be used against the citizens of the Philippines themselves. By the middle of 1970, more than 10,500 policemen had been trained, more than 2,000 specialist in police communications, and 50 senior police officials had attended the Police Academy in Washington, D.C.
In July, 1967, the Metropolitan Command (METROCOM) would be created to control civil unrest in the Philippines. USAID would supply them with computerized identification systems, set up at Camp Aguinaldo, hooked to an Inter-Police Coordinating Center in Camp Crane in Manila containing thousands of Filipino citizens witnessed or suspected of being political activists. Anyone on the system was open to arrest during any police activity. Fabian Ver, one of Ferdinand Marcos's most loyal followers and new secret police chief (of the "civilian" Presidential Security Unit), was placed in charge of the system. Anyone consider dangerous or an annoyance to the Marcoses and their close associates could end up on the system. Ver, a policeman all his adult life, and trained extensively in the USA special institutions noted above, was given 1200 men, computers, telecommunications with scramblers, armored cars, helicopters and navy patrol vessels. He was also charged with the use of the "black room" at Malacanang Palace where special political prisoners never left alive.

1966 - During October
The medical specimens of U.S.A. President John F. Kennedy, preserved in a metal tray in the National Archives, after his assassination in 1963, are found to be missing. This limits the amount of evidence that will be available in later years on which to refute or confirm the possibility of a conspiracy behind the shooting.

1966 - Early in October
The Condon Committee held its first meeting.
Soon afterwards, Dr. Hynek was surprised to find Bob Low, project coordinator, already writing on a blackboard chapter headings and conclusions for a report that as yet had not been researched and would not be completed for another two years.

1966 - Between now and mid-1968
"Operation Hoodwink", under the direction of the USA FBI, would attempt to incite organized crime organizations against the Communist Party. Fabricated documents were circulated by the FBI in the hope that criminal elements would carry on the work of repression and disruption in their own manner - extortion, assault, mutilation and murder. A national law enforcement agency funded by the public was advocating the use of these illegal measures against its own citizens.

1966 - On November 12
A photo taken from the Gemini XII space craft indicated a distant bright object.
NASA claimed it was just rubbish discarded from the space craft.

1966 - By December
H. David Froning, Jr., an astronautical engineer at McDonnell Douglas Corporation, working in the highly classified field of military defense, maintained that the barriers of space and time were not insurmountable in humanity's quest for speed in travel. He pointed out in an article that 20 years earlier hardly a scientist or engineer believed that man could break the sound barrier and survive. Many pilots died trying. Yet, predicted Froning, in the late 1980s hypersonic airliners would fly from New York to Madrid in less than an hour, or five times faster than the speed of sound.

1966 - By December
The Asian Development Bank had been organized to lend economic assistance and technical support to developing countries in Asia. Membership was open to members and associate members of the United Nations Commission for Asia and the Far East, which would be renamed the Economic and Social Commission for Asia and the Pacific in 1974. The USA membership was authorized by the Asian Development Bank Act. The bank lends capital assistance through the Asian Development Fund, a soft loan window which will be established in 1973; otherwise, and initially, it was supported by member contributions, and transfers from its own capital. Borrowings in the world financial market are also done.

1966 - On December 18
An anonymous witness photographed a 'long object with hump on back' hovering over Bear Mountain in New York State.
The USAF took possession of the negatives and photos, exhaustively interviewed the witness, and later labelled it a hoax ... against the recommendation of Dr. J. Allen Hynek, one of their respected and sceptical investigators.

1966 -
Oliver Knaggs concludes that there are definite grounds for believing military authorities are keeping details of UFO activities from the public to avoid possible panic since there are so many factors they cannot explain themselves.

1966 - On December 30, at 8.15 P.M.
Near Haynesville, Louisiana, Dr. G., a professor of physics and his family were travelling north in their car, between Haynesville and the Arkansas state border on U.S. Highway 79. His wife called his attention to a red-orange glow appearing through and above the trees ahead to their left. They continued to observe it as they drove on. It appeared as a luminous hemisphere, pulsating regularly, ranging from dull red to bright orange, with a period of about 2 seconds. There was no smoke nor flame to suggest a fire. When the car reached a point in the road about a mile from the source of the light, it suddenly brightened to a blinding white, washing out the headlights and casting sharp shadows. This burst of light not only forced Dr. G. to shield his eyes, but it woke up the children who had been sleeping on the back seat. After about 4 seconds the object returned to its red-orange appearance.
Several sightings were described by other persons in the area.
One witness reported that about 6 days before, a similar bright light had been seen near the same location.

The Condon Committee later investigated the incident, concluded that it was "of interest", and remained so as the project was disbanded. A researcher who had been part of the investigation later made photos available which had been taken by the Barksdale Air Force planes, which had flown several infrared photographic missions over the area; the exact site over which the object had hovered had been pinpointed by Dr. G. and a researcher. It presented a clearing about 30 feet in diameter, located to the west of the railroad tracks and clearly visible in the photographs. No rolling equipment was within 50 miles of the location that evening.
All of the trees at the periphery of the circle were blackened or showed a burning of the bark in a direction pointing to the centre of the area, as if exposed to an intense source of radiated energy. The energy output calculated from the distance and the brightness and size of the object suggest a minimum energy output of 500 MW, in the range of a small nuclear reactor. This may be of little more use than calculating the power of a vehicle's headlights as a reference to its engine power.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1967 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
Bonnie and Clyde; Valley of the Dolls; You Only Live Twice; Tobruk; Barefoot in the Park; The Dirty Dozen; In the Heat of the Night; The Happening; Our Mother's House; The Tiger Makes Out; Point Blank; Theatre of Death; Cool Hand Luke; Aliens from another Planet; Far From the Madding Crowd; Guess Who's Coming to Dinner; Hawaii; The Good, the Bad and the Ugly; Banning; The Fox; Thoroughly Modern Millie; Ironside; The Reluctant Astronaut; Griffin; The War Wagon; In Like Flint; Billion Dollar Brain; You're a Big Boy Now; Casino Royale; The Fastest Guitar Alive; The Incident; The Wild Bunch;

Television: Andy Griffith; Lucy; Gomer Pyle; Red Skelton; Ed Sullivan.
Songs:
Ode to Billy Joe; Daydream Believer; Light My Fire; Windy; Groovin'; Incense and Peppermints; Little Bit O'Soul; Never My Love; Tonight Carmen; Can't Take My Eyes Off Of You; Kind Of A Drag; Pied Piper; Woman, Woman; Ruby Tuesday; I Was Made To Love Her; It's The Little Things; Here Comes Heaven; For Loving You; By The Time I Get To Phoenix; Your Tender Loving Care; Turn The World Around; Laura; Sing Me Back Home.
General News:

Consumer Price Index: 100.0
Failing USA banks lose $10.878 million dollars.
Canada's centennial year with Montreal as scene of EXPO '67.
The Beatles go to India to learn meditation; Nehru jackets appear.
The Quotations of Chairman Mao become available in N. American bookstores.
The Six Day War results in Israel trouncing the Arabs.
Dr. J. Robert Oppenheimer, 'father of the atom bomb', dies.
High-rise buildings and subterranean shopping malls grew in number, in Canada.
Race riots broke out in more than 100 U.S.A. cities including Detroit.

1967 - By this year
Mary Weiss and Howard Green, researchers at the New York University in the USA were fusing cells of mice and humans. Biological cell fusion had been pioneered in 1960 by a team headed by George Barski at the Institut Gustave Roussy in Paris, France. Mouse cells had been fused then.
When the newly created mouse-human hybrid cells were placed in a nutritive solution, they divided in the usual way that cells do. After many divisions, all of the mouse chromosomes remained but only certain of the human chromosomes remained. This was apparently not due to any dominance of mouse genetics over human but rather to differences in the rates at which cells of the two species mature and divide. The systematic isolation of different human chromosomes - and the order in which they were shed - made it easier for the mapping team to spot where actions of specific genes originate.
Further to all of this, it had been demonstrated that the faster maturing species would become dominant and survive. In Earth biology, humans are amongst the slowest species to mature. Would it be possible to produce hybrid rodents with some human capabilities?

1967 - In January
The British Premonitions Bureau began operations.
In its first year it received about 500 premonitions of natural disasters, disasters involving planes and other vehicles, political events, deaths and assassinations. Most of these 1967 predictions were of air crashes, with earthquakes second.
In February, 1969, The Bureau would come under the control of the "TV Times", a weekly newsmagazine. By October 31, 1973, over 3,000 reports had been received, of which 1,206 were recorded. Premonitions of a personal nature, as in the case of involvement of a family member, are not recorded - as they are not presumed to be of public interest. They are much more often of a dream nature than others; hence, the proportion of dream sourced premonitions in the Bureau files are dramatically reduced from the more frequent 60%+ proportion found in more generalized studies.
It should be also noted that virtually every human dreams during every sleep period taken and that the relevance of such dreams varies more widely than the conscious experiences of the individual concerned. Many premonition dreams go unreported for a host of reasons not the least of which is that individuals do not discipline themselves to screen premonition type dreams from the many other kinds which they have. The proportions of the 1,206 Bureau recorded cases would fall into the following categories:
10% dreams 70% audio-visual 5% impressions 15% others

In premonitions of significance, the images or details remembered are frequently NOT the accurate details of a reality which happens soon afterwards. Rather, they are frequently accurate images of what the mass media report immediately after a catastrophic event.

An individual may dream that an airliner loses communication with a monitoring airport, crashes into a mountain during a thunderstorm and that 124 people die out of a passenger list of 125. News stories released immediately following the crash may state as facts the conclusions which the news reporter has assumed based on the first uncorroborated pieces of information available cemented together with gossip. As the reality unfolds, it may be found that an airliner has crashed, that it crashed into a hill after passing a mountain, that radio contact had been lost, that the weather was unsettled but not violent, and, that 120 persons of a passenger loading of 125 died.
It is not the event which triggers the premonition.
Rather, it is the spiritual energy transmitted by the many individuals who feel intense concern on their first exposure to the story - through the media. This collective energy has a dynamic ability to traverse the time continuum. The stronger the collective spiritual impulse, the greater the possible transfer through time - either forward or backward. Thus, a horrific catastrophe with few survivors and with little mass awareness may result in premonitions which occur days before the event; a relatively moderate catastrophe, the reports of which stimulate massive public interest and concern, may result in premonitions which are received for weeks or months before the event.

A true awareness of the nature of premonitions qualifies the manner in which they are considered. Rather than seeing them as accurate and divinely provided forewarnings - to be revered with terror and misdirected concern, they can be perceived of as challenges for a society to both prepare to cope with such a disaster, and, for it to begin preparing to take measures to limit the repetition of such a disaster. Disasters need not be as intense in degree of injury and public distress if relief services are in a high state of readiness and well organized at the time, and, if systemic measures have and are being taken to limit the extent of this and potential future similar forms of disaster. As a saying goes: "It's not the fall which kills you, it's the abrupt stop at the end!" So too, in many disasters, it is not the injury or crash which kills the human - it is the recklessness and disrespect which encouraged the incident and the physical shock and emotional trauma which followed it.
The disaster, crash, or injury may not be preventable within the time remaining, yet the outcome may be modifiable by awareness and preparation. God has given humans a capability, which, if developed as a cultural spiritual tool could save lives and avert distress. The present regard for and utilization of premonitions by humans often results in the opposite result: increased sensitivity of the public to fear, a tendency for the media to overdramatize by means of shock the incidents which follow, and, a general emotional avoidance of things spiritual in the fear of receiving such a "bad" experience.
As a result of the efforts of Mrs. and Dr. Barker who set up and operated the British Premonitions Bureau, a Central Premonitions Registry would be started in New York City, USA, in June, 1968.

1967 - During the year
A 200-Ton Shipload of Natural Uranium is stolen in the Mediterranean Sea.
It will not be found for 10 years. The 200 tones of uranium ore represents perhaps 8 to 80 pounds of refined U-235 metal. As the supercritical mass (required to generate a nuclear chain reaction) is calculated at 110 pounds (50 kgs), the refined ore by itself would be insufficient to build a nuclear weapon. If mixed with as little as 22 pounds (10 kgs) of Plutonium, the U-235 metal could be made into a nuclear weapon. Making Plutonium requires a large nuclear power reactor of 2 megawatts or more so this factor diminishes the number of potential customers available. Of course, this shipload could be refined along with other quantities of ore to produce the desired amount. Sources of such ore are plentiful for the major military powers, and their allies, at this time, again reducing market prospects. Finally, the receipt of such a shipload of contraband ore, if discovered, would make the receiving nation equally guilty before all nations of contracting for the theft or encouraging such a theft to be repeated. Negative consequences to the public image of such a nation could be devastating.

1967 -
Anthony Greenbank provides advice on what to do in the event of encounter with an alien crew:
(1) avoid rapid forceful movement; (2) use no shrill sounds; (3) breathe quietly; (4) avoid giving a direct menacing gaze.

1967 -
A 17-year old pupil from the local boarding school at Lakeville, Connecticut, U.S.A. photographed a bright light moving erratically through the sky. Other observers confirmed that it blinked or pulsated regularly. Sightings were reported from this area for 4 months.

1967 -
Otto O Binder speculates that the reason that the USAF does not declare that UFO's are real is because "the USAF cannot admit that they are unable to protect America from UFO surveillance or they would be out of business in short order for having failed in their main mission."

1967 - During January
Edward Condon would address an honourary scientific fraternity, telling them,
"It is my inclination right now to recommend that the Government get out of this business. My attitude right now is that there's nothing to it. ... But I'm not supposed to reach a conclusion for another year."

Condon revelled in telling stories of the most absurd sounding reports that came to him while discounting and not revealing the many accounts which were truly puzzling or constructively revealing in their conclusions. Diplomacy had never been a strong point of Condon. In the another direction, Condon followed up with persons who declared themselves to represent other galaxies or who notified him of imminent landings by spacepersons with an aloofness that seemed only concerned with putting the details down on paper so as to justify the Committee and its foregone conclusions. If encouraged by MJ-12 to discount UFO incidents, Condon's efforts were counterproductive by his obvious directness of a prejudicial opinion.

1967 - On January 27
An American Manned Apollo Mission failed at Cape Canaveral when an electrical arc from wiring within the capsule ignited the 100% oxygen atmosphere and burned the 3 astronauts to death within seconds. Unlike USSR designs, which used normal Earth air combinations at regular Earth atmospheric pressures, the American designs would always use the more hazardous and more complicated pure oxygen low atmospheric pressure combination. Astronauts Gus Grissom, Ed White and Roger Chaffee died. The program was subjected to intense scrutiny, rationalization, delay and cost for 18 months. The basic design remained unchanged.

1967 - By the end of January
The influence of apartment environments on family relationships becomes news to the public through daily newspapers.
Some of the findings:

Pre-schoolers clung more closely to their mothers than did children from single homes. By about age 7, boys make a sharp break with their homes and become precociously independent, running in small gangs dominated by older boys.
Parents in one apartment complex had no idea how far afield their boys had wandered until they received a complaint from a supermarket several blocks away and located across a dangerously busy street. The boys had been running up and down the aisles, bothering the customers. In contrast, a study of normally independent 14-year-olds from a suburban, single-home street revealed that they spent most of their day within shouting distance of home, popping in and out frequently for a bite to eat or to get game equipment. The apartment boys used the parking lots and the first-floor corridors as playgrounds.

Youngsters from apartments have far less respect for property than children who come from private homes. ... family members, frustrated by a shortage of space, got (annoyed easily) with each other. ...
The effect on apartment mothers, according to the survey, was almost as clear as on the children. They held more coffee klatches, shared more baby-sitting or shopping errands with neighbours than mothers from private houses.

Apartment doors were often left open all day.
The women were deeply involved in neighbour's lives. In an apartment building that houses many children, the "impersonal" atmosphere which apartment blocks are believed to have is a myth.
The mothers also confessed to more tension and anxiety about their children if they lived in units where they could neither hear nor see youngsters at play. Some spent most of their day trying to keep track of their children. ...

Dad became a pretty passive figure.
With no lawns to mow or plumbing to fix or basement workshop to putter in, he became little more than mother's helper in the eyes of the children. His role, says researcher Kumove, was "chiefly emotional, as an affectionate or moody figure." In fact, men fade from view in apartment life. "Women dominate the apartment landscape. One sees them and hears them; they are in motion. Men seem quieter, less mobile, or are absent."
Comparing apartments with row-houses and maisonettes ... men were found (in the latter) playing ball with each other, calling out to each other, working on their cars and spending more time with their children. Their impact on family life was evident and strong.
(Other studies) found that more apartment families (than other lifestyles) have no close relatives (living nearby); wives went out less frequently to social and church events and held more jobs. Apartment family incomes were (lower). ... They do more things apart as individuals and less together as a family unit. The car becomes more important to the family than their home.

Human family relationships had been declining in cohesiveness in post-WWII industrializing countries largely due to the displacement of low-skilled workers from rural to urban environments. Lack of population control-family planning on an effective basis together with viable skill upgrading programs and appropriate social support environments encouraged a decline in human standards of morality and cohesive relationship-based coping skills.
Humans were becoming more dependant upon the state infrastructure which was adapting by reacting to circumstances with increasing policing and denial and unplanned experimentation. Possibilities requiring a long-term justification of cost were not considered in North America and most other places - leaving only bandaid approaches, and, steadily downgrading-to-anarchy behaviours.

1967 - On the evening of February 8
Chalk River, Deep River, Ontario, Des Joachims Hydro Generating Station, in NE Ontario, Ontario's 4th largest hydro-electric station at that time, was the location of a UFO sighting. The craft was described as "a circular craft with a large core of dazzling pulsating yellow lights in its centre. From this core, red lights appeared to be pulsating outward towards the rear of the craft, resembling the pulsations of an intricate multicoloured neon sign. The television set at the nearby farmer's house went off and when the object disappeared after about 40 minutes, it came back on. Also in the nearby area are the Nuclear Power Demonstration (NPD) station and the Chalk River Nuclear Laboratories.
Fourteen witnesses viewed it.
Eight were OPP (Ontario Provincial Police) officers who had seen it earlier in the day for 45 minutes.
For 5 minutes it had hovered over a barn. Its brightness had varied from very bright to a dimmed red tinge.

1967 -
R.H.B. Winder discusses the practical application of a fusion-powered hydromagnetics spacecraft and problems of operation in the planetary atmosphere.

1967 - On February 19
Dr. James E. McDonald, professor of meteorology at the University of Arizona and senior physicist at its Institute of Atmospheric Physics was quoted in the "London Enquirer":
The U.S. Air Force has been scandalously blinding the public as to what is really going on in the skies. The Air Force investigations have been absurd, superficial and incompetent ... and scientists all over the world had better stop accepting the ridiculous Air Force reports and start investigating the problem themselves at once .... It's a problem demanding truly international investigation."

McDonald's 27 page report included examples of UFO sightings which had been given unlikely or even impossible explanations by the USAF. He noted that there had been 1500 reports the previous year. He described UFOs as constituting "the greatest scientific problem of our time." He stated that the CIA had asked for a "systematic debunking" of UFO reports in 1953. He noted a number of sightings which had been observed by multiple witnesses. As any good debunker knows:
"Pick any observation or experience you want and examine it in enough detail and you will find something which can be used to intellectualize the unimportance or irrelevance of the incident."

1967 -
Jean Goupil explains the behaviour and phenomenon associated with sightings by a theory of controlled magnetic field that serves as a means of propulsion. ... also shows that the shapes reported for flying saucers are the ideal configurations for spacecraft using a repelling force field as a means of propulsion.

1967 - During February
A Disc-Shaped Object was observed by 2 girls while they were driving along the Sacramento Freeway in California.
It followed them at speeds up to 130 km/hr and approached to within 100 metres distance.
A highway patrolman, independently reported the same or a similar object 30 minutes later.
Over 200 similar reports were made. A common feeling of fear seemed to come over most of the observers at the time and as they fled, the continued presence of the object suggested to them that it was chasing them rather than only curious in them.

1967 - Sometime during the year
Near Maumee, Ohio, a collision was reported between a UFO and a car. The driver found a small lump of metal at the site the next day and some "fibrous" metal on the car. The fibrous sample turned out to contain 92% magnesium.

1967 -
Hans Lauritzen states that in the space program of the Soviet Union a mechanical accelerator is being used as the propulsion system ... magnetic motors. Experiments seem to indicate that its range comprises all fields of velocity through the speed of light and perhaps many times faster than light.

1967 - In March
Cuban Air Defense radar picked up an unidentified object over Cuban air space.
Two Cuban jets were sent to intercept the UFO.
When the jets made the intercept, they tried to make radio contact but were unable to.
Ordered to shoot down the object, one of the jets was vapourized by the UFO when it attempted to attack.
The incident was monitored by the USAF Security Service, Detachment A, 6947th, based at Homestead Air Force Base.

1967 - On March 1
Lt. General Hewitt T. Wheless, USAF, sent a notice to all branches of the military warning of persons imitating military officers and harassing private citizens and confiscating UFO photos.

1967 - On March 4-5
The Soderstrom Family see 2 disc-shaped, 30-metre diameter objects near Vilhelmina, Lapland, at an altitude of 25-40 metres and at a distance of 100 metres. They appeared stationary for about 15 minutes and then accelerated rapidly and disappeared into the distance, giving off a reddish glow.

1967 - On March 21
A 22-Year-Old Girl was followed by a disc-shaped flying object as she bicycled between Gullbringa and Tjuvkil, Sweden. She observed the object for 10-15 minutes as it alternately rose and descended; it was seen at an altitude of 150 metres and a distance of 400 meters. A powerful, intensely green light was emitted.

1967 - On April 22
Dr. James McDonald, atmospheric physicist, University of Arizona, stated
"There is no sensible alternative to the utterly shocking hypothesis that UFOs are extraterrestrial probes ...."

1967 -
Peter Gilman reports on an April 24, 1964 meeting between Gary Wilcox and 4 foot tall humanoids who explained that they had obtained their food from the air on Mars but now needed to find a way to rehabilitate their soil, and, hence, the reason for their trip to Earth.

1967 - In May
In the Malagasy Republic, 23 soldiers, their officer and 4 NCOs of the French Foreign Legion were part of an incident which would remain secret for 10 years by virtue of their military oath of secrecy. The troops were eating lunch in the bush country when they all saw a bright metallic object resembling an egg in shape falling rapidly, accompanied by a piercing, whistling sound, then thump into the ground. All the soldiers were 'paralysed' for what was later determined to be 3 hours, for which they have no conscious memory. Then they saw the object take off.
The object was estimated to be 23 feet high and 10 to 13 feet wide.
On leaving, it rose slowly at first and then vanished at high speed. It left 3 marks in the ground and a 10 foot deep crater at the bottom of which was a sort of vitrified ring of coloured crystals. None of the witnesses could recall what happened during the missing hours, but for 2 days afterwards they all had violent headaches, with constant 'beating' in the region of the temples and a continuous buzzing sound in the ears.

1967 - On May 6
A Family of Four observed a disc-shaped UFO at close range over their chalet, near Strasbourg, France, for several minutes.

1967 - During the week of May 8
A Metallic "beep-beep" began after dark and continued until dawn in Hoogdal, Washington.
Observation of aerial "fireballs" was also reported in the area at the same time.

1967 - During May
A Critical Rotational Position (CRP) was defined by George and Marjorie De La Warrs in their researches on plants.
If the seedling is transplanted in such a way that it continues to grow in its CRP, it will thrive better than plants which have been transplanted out of that orientation. This phenomenon was also independently discovered by Hieronymus, who found that a reading on the dials of his radionic device was maximum when the plant was rotated in a given position with respect to a compass rose.
The De La Warrs had also found that, because of this apparent relationship with the geomagnetic field, a plant has a pattern of radiation around it. Nodal points within this pattern or web which seem to concentrate the field of radiation can be located by a portable detector with a probe and a rubbing plate similar to that on their radionics device.

In respect to humans, these findings support the "Feng Shui" pattern of orienting the sleeping area such that the resting person is positioned in line with the Earth's magnetic field. Sensitives will detect that the aura of a person who possesses a higher degree of spiritual strength than another will correspondingly have a larger aura extending further out from themselves. The use of Bach Flower remedies according to determination by meditative, muscle testing or dowsing means, demonstrates how the life energy of the plant, concentrated in the essence, can influence the human life system towards a better balance by retuning the out-of-tune frequencies of the less-than-perfect human, one-by-one, toward the balance of health.
Dramatic increases in positive awareness, self-direction, and self-esteem together with decreases in negative communication, interaction and disease promoting patterns has been achieved. These finding further support recommendations such as that of hugging an oak tree for 30 minutes to reduce symptoms of fatigue: a practice known by wise persons (witches) before the Spanish Inquisition, Black Death, and wars suppressed the knowledge. Bach remedies were available by 1934; Feng Shui was known in China from 1525 B.C. Why has humanity avoided these "spiritual" remedies?

1967 - On May 20
At Falcon Lake, Manitoba - Stephen Michalak, while amateur prospecting, saw 2 cigar-shaped objects with humps on them about halfway down from the sky, descending and glowing with an intense scarlet glare. As they became closer to the ground they became more oval-shaped. One stayed in mid-air while the other landed nearby. Moments later, the other craft took off at incredible speed, silently, displaying a dazzling array of colour. The landed craft changed colour from red to gray-red to light gray and then to the orange colour of hot stainless steel.
Estimated at 40 feet in width and 15 feet in height, it resembled an immense bowl with a small dome on top. Below the rim of the bowl he noticed a rectangular opening from which a brilliant purple light was pouring. As a pungent odour of sulphur filled the air, there was also a soft high-pitched hum similar to the whine of an electric motor. Then he heard a hissing which closely resembled the sound of air being sucked in. As he approached the craft, the purple rays became more and more intense, forcing him to periodically turn his head away.

He heard voices coming from the interior of the vessel which sounded human, muffled by the sounds of the motor and the rush of air that was continually being expelled. Believing the craft to be from the American space program or some other earthly origin, Michalak addressed the voices in a combination of languages without reply.
Approaching near a porthole, he placed green lenses over his goggles and stuck his head inside.
The inside was a maze of lights. Direct beams running in horizontal and diagonal paths and a series of flashing lights seemed to be working in a random fashion. The walls of the craft were about 20 inches thick. As he stepped back from the blinding lights (this happened at midday), 3 panels slid across the opening, completely closing it off. Touching the craft, it felt hot (it melted the surface of his rubber-coated glove he was wearing), and was apparently made of highly polished, steel-like substance resembling coloured glass.

All of a sudden, the craft tilted, expelled a blast of hot air from a grid-like vent underneath, catching Stephen's shirt on fire and leaving a grid-like burn on his chest. The craft rose and he felt a strong downward blowing all around him as it flew away.
Approaching the site again, Michalak felt nauseated and a headache started.
The site was swept clean forming a 6 inch high ridge of debris at the circumference.
Additional symptoms including intense headache, cold sweat, repetitive vomiting, blurred vision .. began. He was treated at Misericordia Hospital for chest burns. A strong stench he perceived for a longer period, he lost his appetite and 22 pounds weight, his blood lymphocyte level dropped, he developed periodic rashes on the skin which had been exposed, bloated red spots where the burns had been, blackouts and a coated tongue indicative of exposure to intense microwave and/or nuclear radiations. Other symptoms which continued were dizziness and swelling of his hands and chest.

1967 - Between June 5 to 10th
The Six-Day War between Israel and the U.A.R., Syria, Iraq and Jordan, resulted in an armistice, with the Israeli occupied territories remaining occupied (Gaza Strip, Sinai Peninsula, Western Jordon, Golan Heights). Border incidents with Arab neighbours, acts of sabotage by the Al Fatah (Palestine Liberation Organization - PLO) had followed the withdrawal of UN forces from the Gaza Strip. The UAR had blockaded the Gulf of Aqaba.
The 5 nations involved had about 3,300 tanks in this Middle East War, more than Hitler employed in the invasion of France in 1940. While Nazi Germany had produced its own tanks, non of these countries had. They had obtained their tanks, planes, artillery, trucks, signal equipment and the bulk of their small arms and ammunition from the USSR, the USA, Britain and France. In Sinai, Israel's French-built Mirage and Mystere jets destroyed Egypt's Soviet MIG-21 fighters and Ilyushin bombers. On the Jordanian front, both Israelis and Jordanians drove into battle at the controls of USA-made Patton and Sherman tanks.

Last year, Henry J. Kuss Jr., deputy assistant secretary of defense for international logistics negotiations, a USA civil servant who works on the 4th floor of the Pentagon, said that the more than $9 billion in sales of armaments which he had made over the previous 20+ years had resulted in nearly $1-billion in profits to American companies and about 1.2-million man-years of employment, spread throughout the United States. He also noted that increasing government involvement in weapons sales promoted the defensive strength of USA allies, fostered common weapons systems between them and eased a balance-of-payments federal treasury problem.
In other words, American arms sales earn dollars, which ease the gold drain strongly influenced by the American armed forces presence overseas. Without these profits and tax revenues, the practical considerations of the Administration would result in the Congress demanding the reduction of troop commitments in order to stabilize expenditures. Instead, the USA must actively promote unrest in the countries of allies, suggest that it is the result of "enemy" activity and then offer, and sell to, these allies the armaments which will provide the profit to allow the USA to continue its military interference in the politics of other nations.

In addition, any industry which intends to remain competitive and in the forefront of technological development must have a research and development program. Such programs are customarily financed from company profits. A company must have a good level of monopolistic, low-competition sales in order to make large profits. It must also have massive assembly-line sales of its products if it is to attain a degree of efficiency which contributes to a profit margin. The initial supplies of a complex military weapon are tremendously expensive, because they must absorb the R&D costs, unless, the required number of units can be expanded by stimulating demand.
In other words, developing new, large, complex technology will result in the production of enough units for the host country, at a considerable per unit cost, or, it can result in the production of a great many lower-priced units of the new device for the home market benefit and a large sized export market. To a government bureaucrat charged with getting the greatest benefit for each dollar spent, the lower he can influence the unit cost of the new technology to go, the more he will be appreciated. In short, the distribution of armaments to other countries promotes the economy of a military-dependent capital growth economy. Mr. Kuss intends to maintain a Pentagon sales volume of $2-billion annually until 1975.

What is forgotten in all of these considerations is that during this war, the confrontations between the USA and USSR to keep each and its allies OUT of this regional war almost resulted in a nuclear WWIII being started.

1967 - On June 17
China exploded its first thermonuclear (hydrogen) bomb.

1967 - On June 24
Ray Rosi, while taking his dog out for a walk near the north side of the Mansfield Dam, in the area of Austin, Texas, saw a bright, elongated, solid-looking blue object just above the horizon. A minute before the UFO appeared, 2 men in a small red sports car had driven by, slowing down near him, then speeding on a further 250 feet to pull over to the side of the road with the lights tilted up the hill. They flashed their headlights several times and a short time later the object appeared on the NW horizon. The red car pulled over to the other side of the hill, out of sight of Rosi.
He took out his big spotlight and began flashing the code for the symbol pi (3.14). After he flashed the code several times, the object stopped, the illumination faded for a second or two, and then brightened again. The object continued to hover and eventually started to move along its original path. He flashed the code again, and the movement of the object duplicated its original response. A few minutes later, the craft disappeared into a low cloud cover moving in from the south. Collecting his dog, Rossi drove to the nearest phone and called the Air Force.
The USAF sent Lieutenant Robert Foreman to interview Rossi and complete the standard form.
Rossi mentioned that he had a feeling of being watched during the discussion. Later, Rossi received a reply from the USAF stating that there was insufficient data for scientific analysis. Rossi was displeased with the response and wrote back that considerable information had been provided and that perhaps the allegations of negligence against the USAF in such investigations were correct. After reviewing Rossi's technical background and the reports once again, the USAF changed the status of the report to "unidentified".

1967 - During the summer
The U.S.A. Joint Chiefs of Staff convinced President Lyndon Johnson to authorize unlimited bombing attacks against every conceivable target connected with transportation, including many bridges that had previously been declared off limits. The bombing effort had NO effect on infiltration south. On October 26, 1967, a U.S. military spokesman reported that there had been "no significant reduction in the flow of supplies south within the last month or two." Two months later, the U.S. command in Saigon actually reported an increase in traffic down the Ho Chi Minh Trail in Laos.

Once again, the belief that technology could replace the influence and determination of a mass of people and that military conflict could be more efficient and effective than political negotiation and the right to self-determination was proven wrong in the resulting failure of the strategy. At the same time, potential increases in the effectiveness of the sensors use to monitor the areas may have provided data which was incorrectly analyzed as indicating steady state or increasing infiltration numbers when in reality the same or decreasing numbers were present which were evading detection less!

1967 - On July 3
R.T. (initials), with "Alpha Red Top Secret" Crypto Clearance, assigned to Canine Corps at Camp Pendleton, San Diego, CA., states that he and his dogs were air transported 2.5 hours to a site in a desert where a UFO had crashed. The object was saucer-shaped, metallic, 30 feet in diameter, domed top, no windows. He also saw a large walk-in refrigerator, empty body bags, and men working with technical instruments at the location.

1967 - By early July
Samuel Cummings, the founder, owner, and president of "International Armaments Corp." one of the leading private arms merchants in the world, had completed a negotiation with the USA Pentagon for the purchase of $40-million in American weapons for sale to other countries. The "Interarmco" president suggested that his arms sales were below $100 million annually from his headquarters in Monaco. Through 17 affiliates and subsidiaries, he sells about 250,000 small arms and small cannon - everything from pistols to 20-mm guns - to sportsmen, collectors, non-Communist foreign police forces and armies. It also acts as a broker for the sale of tanks, jet fighter-bombers and missiles. He does not manufacture the arms himself so it can be understood that he chooses to sell the surpluses of assembly-line produced arms which are surplus to the needs of the host country.

1967 - On July 10
Philip Lanning was driving south of Meridian, Mississippi, in the evening when his car coasted to a stop and the radio faded. Lanning got out to check the engine and then an object of "excessive size passed forward of my position and perhaps two to three hundred feet over my head". The object was moving silently except for the "rushing of an extreme wind". It was headed to the east and looked like it would crash into a clump of trees. "Just before reaching the trees, it tilted upward, appeared to be moving rapidly at an angle almost straight up and disappeared into low-flying clouds."
Lanning described the object "like a cymbal on a drum set and was a dirty metallic grey in colour on the underside. When it tilted upward, Lanning was able to see the top, which he said was coloured "like the bluing of a good weapon". He saw no portholes or hatches, and could hear no sound. For size, he said "it compared with the length of a house". He sent his report to a friend in Naval Intelligence as he felt that someone in the government should know. The USAF received it and began an investigation.
Lanning was a former military officer, had received a great deal of training, and was, therefore, considered reliable. Nearly a year later, and as one of the last cases in "Project Bluebook", the report was stamped "unidentified". Observer background often reflected on how and if the report would be given a mundane rationale or taken seriously.

1967 - During July
The Marburg Virus had been discovered for the first time to modern medical science.
At the Behring Works vaccine factory in the old city of Marburg in central Germany, several imported African green monkeys developed the disease. The factory had imported 500 to 600 of the monkeys by air shipment with the intent of using their kidney cells to produce vaccine. Similar animals to humans are used as hosts to human or human-like diseases to produce antibodies which are then injected into humans as a deterrent against the offending disease. Perhaps 5 or 6 of the green monkeys imported were incubating a new virus.
Within days after arriving at the Behring Works, the infected monkeys became ill at ease, contracted a fever, began haemorrhaging, experienced kidney and liver failure and reached a stage at which their physical body seemed to dissolve into massive failure resulting in death. Soon afterward, the virus mutated and spread to the local population of humans.

1967 - On July 17
A Wave of UFO Sightings throughout Italy, by responsible individuals results in wide newspaper coverage.

1967 - On July 17-18
UFOs are sighted in France, Switzerland, and Italy by witnesses including astronomers.

1967 - By August
The use of new surveillance technologies by American government agencies against its own citizens began to increase.
Over the next 6 years, the U.S. National Security Agency (NSA) would hear virtually every overseas telephone call and inspect virtually every cable. The C.I.A. would open more than 200,000 personal letters illegally. The F.B.I. would conduct mail-opening projects in 8 states. More than 200,000 Americans would become the subject of active surveillance in the latter years of that period by their own government.

1967 - On August 8
Klaus F., an employee at the Behring Works in Marburg, Germany, began exhibiting symptoms of the Marburg virus and subsequently died 2 weeks later. He fed the imported green monkeys and washed their cages. Very little information was ever made available to the public about the symptoms or progression of the disease.

1967 - On August 13
Heinrich P., a monkey-keeper at the Behring Works in Marburg, returned from his holidays and began his job of killing monkeys from the 14th to the 23rd. The first symptoms of his having contracted the Marburg virus, a devastating, very infectious mutated monkey virus, began on August 21st. He developed headaches, fever, blood clotting, expulsion of blood products followed by dehydration and organ failure shock and death.

1967 - During August
George Rouse, structural geology Graduate student at the Colorado School of Mines, noted the apparent existence of 16 seismic zone belts which intersected the Earth's surface and were tangental to the core. Later called the "Rouse Belts", he had noted that deep earthquake zones angle into the Earth at an average inclination of 60 degrees to the horizontal. Projecting these zones onto a flat plane slicing through the Earth he discovered that along the circle formed on the crust, where the plane intersected the surface of the Earth, there were other earthquake and major fault zones. After determining 15 additional circles, Rouse found that most of the 19 points on the Earth's surface where 3 Rouse belts intersected coincided with areas of major earthquake or volcanic activity. Each plane passed tangentially to the core.
By September, Rouse presented his findings to Professor Ramon Bisque at the Colorado School of Mines Geochemistry who received it with enthusiasm. Together, they discovered that primary mineral deposits, mountains, ocean-floor ridges and trenches and island chains also correlate with the location of the Rouse belts. To demonstrate the possible physical stresses underlying the belts, Rouse and Bisque fashioned a mantle around a solid core using children's Modeling Dough. The core was attached to a spindle and the model was accelerated to simulate the effects of an active magnetic field. When the modeling compound dried and formed a thin crust, its cracks clearly defined major stress planes that were tangent to the core.

1967 - On August 28th
Renate L., a laboratory assistant at the Behring Works in Marburg, accidentally broke a test tube that was to be sterilized and which had contained infected viral material from the monkey virus which had broken out earlier in the month. On September 4th she would fall ill with the illness. Eventually, 31 people would contract the virus; seven died in pools of blood with bodies half liquified by the onslaught of the virus. The Marburg virus was found to kill 25% of those infected with it.
The monkeys which first displayed infection by the virus were imported from the rainforest regions of Uganda. The Marburg virus would be found to be a filovirus, that is, a thread virus - all other forms of viruses on the Earth are spherically shaped. Marburg particles sometimes roll up into loops and is the only ring-shaped virus known.

In Germany, the effects of the Marburg virus on the brain resembled the effects of rabies: it destroyed the brain. The rabies virus particle takes the shape of a bullet. At first, the Marburg virus was called stretched rabies. Like the effects of nuclear radiation, the Marburg virus damages virtually all of the tissues in the body. In particular, it is most damaging on internal organs, connective tissue, intestines, and skin. All of the survivors of the Marburg virus either went bald or partly bald: their hair died at the roots and fell out in clumps. Haemorrhage occurred from all orifices of the body. One's face was usually expressionless. Chest, arms, and face became speckled with blotches and bruising, and droplets of blood might stand on the victim's nipples. Most of the patients showed a sullen, slightly aggressive, or negativistic behaviour. Two patients had a feeling as if they were lying on crumbs: they may have felt nodules of the virus collected beneath their skin. Symptoms were not always consistent. One person became psychotic as his brain functions deteriorated; another showed few warning signs until he experienced a fatal central brain haemorrhage.
Recovery, while possible, was difficult.
The skin peeled off the hands, feet and genitals.
Some men suffered from enlarged, semi-rotten testicles.
The virus was also found to linger in the eyes of infected persons for many months.
One man infected his wife through sexual intercourse. It appeared that neither monkeys nor humans were the common host of the virus for neither lived long when exposed to it. While concerned World Health Organization (WHO) investigators attempted to track down the exact location of the source in Uganda, nothing helpful was discovered until 1982.

1967 - In the September issue of "Science Journal"
Gordon Rattray Taylor noted in the monthly comment on the scientific scene that:
"As an ex-newspaperman, it is inconceivable to me that the local press would not run such a story (of a UFO sighting), if it held water ( or even if it didn't); that the national and international press would not at once follow it up; and that TV companies would not be frantic to get these women and policemen on the screen. At this point, I suddenly find myself disbelieving the whole business."

Taylor betrayed his reputation-by-adherence-to-status-quo position by inferring that if the mass popular media did not acknowledge an event, then it probably never happened. For a previous newspaperman, either he was displaying naivety, ignorance, or, his conspiracy with the military-political establishment. Any professional and informed reporter could have known at this point of the routine manipulation of the media by the governments of so-called democratic nations during the current century. If a lie can be made to look real, the truth can be made to look like a lie. Britain, Germany, the Soviet Union, the USA and other nations had provided many past and current examples. A weakness of humanity, demonstrated here by Taylor, is the swarming behaviour of siding with the direction of the crowd without concern for the truth.
In his comments, Taylor questions the current increasing concern over UFO sightings and possible government coverups. He points out what could be a legitimate concern put forward by Dr. James E. McDonald, notes several specific instances of multiple witness sightings and then proceeds to rationalize the possible factors and directions which an investigator could have followed to make such reports scientific. Theory and intellectualization is cheap and usually a waste of time because there is no true connection of it to the experience of reality. Taylor could easily "disbelieve" the possibilities because he was not concerned enough about the truth to do a personal followup on even one of the cases he mentioned. His motivation was to reinforce the status quo which provided him with a job, recognition and ?

1967 - By September
Dr, Homer Newell, of the New York Museum of Natural History had reviewed the population size of many different animals and found that there were several periods of time during which many species had become extinct. These occurred at the end of the Devonian, Permian, Triassic, and Cretaceous geological periods. Often, the species extinctions seemed to occur just after a magnetic-field reversal had taken place. Furthermore, if the reversal occurred following an exceptionally long period of a relatively stable field, the species extinction was much more extensive. It appeared as though the life-forms of the quiescent time adapted themselves to that magnetic field; the longer it went on, the greater the impact of the next reversal.
By considering the reversal of the Earth's magnetic field as having a field strength which exhibits a sine-wave variation, there is a suggestion of when the next major reversal influence will occur. By plotting the approximate age of the Earth's geological ages - those noted in Newell's research - and noting an interim half-length period during which minimal change in magnetic flux strength occurs, one can arrive at the following conclusion:
GEOLOGICAL time from the present AGE to the end of the AGE INTERVAL Part of WAVE ======================================================================= Devonian 295 million years ago 54.3 million near centreline ........ 27.15 " crest/trough Permian 215 million years ago 54.3 million near centreline ........ 27.15 " crest/trough Triassic 135 million years ago 54.3 million near centreline ........ 27.15 " crest/trough Cretaceous 54.3 million years ago 54.3 million near centreline NOW crest/trough

To be noted is that maximum magnetic field change occurs during the crest/trough part of the sine-wave variation. The next reversal is due NOW.

Near the time of the last reversal, about 54.3 million years ago, a huge comet struck the Earth in the Caribbean area and left evidence from the Yucatan peninsula to Haiti. While dispensing a terrific amount of energy on impact, the comet also brought with it about 1/3rd of the Earth present water mass. A previously much drier Earth suddenly became extremely wet, and, warmer - for a period of time. There is a cyclical comet shower (Oort) racing through the universe which has traversed the path of the Earth several times. The impact of one or more of the massive comets on the Earth accounts for the presence of all of the water on its surface today and of the periodic major magnetic reversals in the past.
Each shift is the result of the Earth's crust, floating on a heavy molten iron-nickel interior core, being struck with a force, which by its nature, jogs the skin-like crust almost 180 degrees in position. In modern times the result appears to show that the magnetic core has radically changed direction at these times. The reality is that the core has retained its integrity while the skin of the planet has been given a "facelift" - temporarily disassociated with the liquid core and slipped forward to glide to a new position between 120 and 195 degrees different from before. Only the relatively "cold" impact of a massive comet would have provided this result. The "hot" impact of a comparable planetary or asteroidal mass would have fragmented the Earth.
Robert O. Becker would write in 1990 that the Earth was in the initial stages of a reversal, with declines being noted over the previous few decades.

1967 - During the year
The USA Space Program is extolled by President Lyndon B. Johnson for providing USA national security, CIA and NSA, with the accuracy of USSR armamentation. In actual fact, the reconnaissance satellites in operation provided photographs of buildings in which the construction and storage of armaments MIGHT be occurring. There was very little confirmation of suggestive information to real fact. It would later be revealed that for much of the period 1960 to 1975, the estimates of the CIA rationalist analysts were more a factor of conjecture and fantasy than of reality. Paranoia and the self-importance gained by reporting dramatic findings would at first grammatically increase American reliance on its military-industrial complex. Once the billion-dollar-per-year market was established, rationalizations would be made to continue to inflate surveillance findings, when they were then known to be incorrect, in order to maintain the economic status quo.
Meanwhile, hundreds of thousands of humans would be killed, burned, disabled, terrorized, orphaned and starved - for what humans called "peace".

1967 - By September
The "Phoenix Program", called "Phung Hoang" in Vietnamese, had been started. It was a joint MACV (Military Assistance Command, Vietnam) - CIA program called "ICEX" (Intelligence Coordination and Exploitation). Its purpose was to identify and then remove Vietcong personnel hidden within the civilian population of South Vietnam, either by capture or killing. Its agents were Vietnamese. It followed on the first Counter Terror (CT) program which had been started by William Colby, CIA Chief, Far East Division, in 1965.
Most of the CT teams and interrogation centres set up earlier were incorporated into the program. The Phoenix groups were infiltrated by the very people they were trying to defeat and were then turned by them against the South Vietnamese government. Too frequently, persons were assassinated on the spot or taken to interrogation centres and tortured to death without a second opinion. Some members reported people whom they owed money to or had long-standing family fights or personal arguments with. Considerable overcrowding of the centres with persons brought in for little reason made it expedient just to eliminate (murder) a suspect in the field rather than deal with the paperwork and housing. Success was often measured according to body (corpse) count. For people who were mercenary by application, endemically poor because of relocation and destruction of private property, and socially unskilled by 20 years of anarchy in war, people who were considered complicit in their association with the Viet-Cong were murdered. 10,000 or more piastres (dollars) might be paid on the presentation of a head or an ID card or an ear to identify the "eliminated" suspect.

An intellectualized plan to reduce the opposition devised by college researchers and CIA office staff had been placed into operation by agents who were working in the hostile environment of war under the auspices of secret deceptive intelligence guidance which authorized terror to surpass terror. While comfortable professors and well paid consultants were proud of their strategies, practical desperate men encouraged by greed for power and money carried their good intentions out through murder and torture. Would humans ever learn to do otherwise?

1967 -
An American movie, "Valley of the Dolls", tries to alert the public to the excesses becoming popular with mass market entertainers and the dangers of drug use. The story focuses on the lives of 3 women who each are trying to become or remain famous in Hollywood. Unhappy love affairs, drug dependency, simulated sex and intense emotional displays were all portrayed in greater frequency and to a depth greater than previously in a single movie. Critics rated the movie as a LOSS at the boxoffice. Time would betray that many of the concerns expressed were neither overdramatized nor over-represented. The fact was that the public did not want to acknowledge the problems much as addicts do not want to admit that they have no control over their habit.
For Americans, the characters portrayed were the losers who couldn't control their own lives; Americans largely dissociated themselves from the warnings. Patty Duke, as the primary "bad" girl of the movie, acted her part so expertly that enough of the audience identified her, in reality, to the part. As an example of how much the public identify movies with reality, the career of Patty Duke would be hampered for decades as people who remembered her role in this movie expressed hatred for her personally - rather than themselves becoming more aware of the warnings intended for them. As time would demonstrate, many who saw this movie would go on to prove to themselves and the world that they wanted the glamour lifestyle and that they could handle the stresses and the drugs - and fail! Like many well intentioned movies, the audience perceived it as they wished, not as it was intended.

1967 - September 11
Douglas Point Nuclear Generating Station, Douglas Point, Ontario, Canada's first full-scale nuclear power station, within weeks of first going into operation, became the scene of a week long series of sightings between September 11 to 17th. The mysterious disk-shaped craft seemed to have monitored both the station and the water quality of Lake Huron in the immediate vicinity. At least 17 people made the sightings. The craft was seen to pass over the station, hover about 1-1/2 miles out over the lake and drop something into the water. A similar craft appeared 2 nights later and for the next 5 nights appearing to be searching over the lake for the dropped object. One witness said he saw the craft hover near the station. Two others said they saw sparks coming from it over the lake.

1967 - By October
Suburban housewife nervous breakdowns in North America had become a trend.
In the "Toronto Telegram" newspaper "Weekend" magazine supplement, Hugh Garner wrote an article: "The Canadian housewife is cracking up". In it, he notes:
"The most prevalent disease among Canadian housewives today is not cancer, arthritis, heart, lung, stomach or kidney trouble, post-natal complications or "female complaints". It is not really a physical illness at all, at least not in the beginning, but a psychological sickness she calls "nerves". Doctors diagnose it variously as a psychoneurosis, depression, anxiety state, or the "suburban syndrome," which all means the same thing in layman's language - the nervous breakdown.
It has now reached endemic proportions throughout Canadian society, meaning it is a disease that is present more or less continuously in a community.

The nervous breakdown is not confined to housewives; men have them, too. ... A physician ... told me that 50% of his women patients are suffering from psychosomatic complaints rather than physical or organic ones, .... Among Canadian women perhaps one out of four who goes to her doctor has nothing physically wrong with her.
Psychoneurosis in its various forms, whether classed as anxiety or depression, has become general among Canadian housewives. At the onset of psychoneurotic illness ... the most common symptoms are growing fatigue, irritability, tenseness, edginess, lack of patience, crying spells, loss of appetit, loss of weight. ...
In some cases this reassurance from her doctor (that she is not suffering from any physical illness) is all she needs to break the vicious circle of worry that brought on her symptoms. ... (the doctor) is usually too overworked to give her the psychotherapy she really needs. ... prescription for barbiturates, sedatives or tranquilizers, .... (She) may become dependent on it and soon find herself unable to function normally without this pharmaceutical crutch.

... The real trouble ... they don't know how to fill the time on their hands ... I advocate outside interests, crafts or hobbies that will give them something other than themselves to think about. ... Generally speaking, the suburban woman has more money and comes from a more affluent family background. She has given up an interesting career, as a nurse, teacher, secretary, airline stewardess, or whatever, and now finds herself tied down in a ranch-style jailhouse with a couple of toddlers as jailers.
... What she wants now are just closer ties with her husband, more communication with him, and a better relationship that will give her his shoulder to beef or weep on. ... she finally has to go to her doctor seeking the substitute husband who will give her the sympathy and understanding that is really all she needs. ... Most husbands who drive their wives into a psychoneurotic illness do so inadvertently, through plain neglect or carelessness. The women ... suffer from a lack of interpersonal relationship, either with their spouses, their neighbours, or both.

... the downtown women (of Latin or Middle European birth) suffer more from depression while my suburban (Anglo-Saxon) patients suffer more from anxiety. ... The major complaint was the frequent absence of the husband ... only nine of the wives (of 50 physicians) had a satisfactory sexual adjustment ... It is generally accepted ... that the loss or potential loss of a significant relationship frequently precipitates depression. ...
Dr. Merville O. Vincent, the assistant medical superintendent of Homewood Sanatorium, Guelph, Ontario, Canada, the largest private psychiatric clinic in Canada ... notes 3 areas of marriage difficulty that precede a "nervous breakdown" in a doctor's wife. "Many couples can share ideas and talk about things, but rarely can they talk about their feelings. They can express neither warmth, love, and tenderness, nor hostility and aggression .... The second difficulty is that the roles of the husband and wife have not been clearly defined ... third difficulty ... is a tendency to carry over his authoritarian hospital personality into the home ...."

... Some (men give their wife a nervous breakdown) by losing themselves in their work, for gain, fame or fantasy; others by seeking male companionship in club or pub; others by hiding themselves in the sports pages or in front of the TV set. What they are all doing is isolating themselves from their wives, on purpose or not. ... By the time (the average woman) has reached what we call a nervous breakdown, she has arrived at a state of debilitating illness which demands constant care or hospitalization. This follows years of being vaguely ill, out-of-sorts, ridden by depression and anxieties, and these symptoms ... affect between 25 and 50 % of Canadian wives at one time or another in their marriage.
... Dr. William D. Westlake, a psychotherapist who counsels more than 500 ... couples a year ... My psychotherapy, often with the use of hypnosis, alters harmful behaviour on the part of either the husband or wife into behaviour of a not so harmful form, and takes only a few weeks as against years of psychoanalysis."

You can give your wife a nervous breakdown by demanding sex when "you" want it, and denying it to her when she wants it. By making your wife feel inferior, unwanted or unnecessary .... It is the far less obvious things that a wife psychologically resents about her husband: his inability to take the masculine role in the family, to win her female respect and the respect of her children, his silly and empty goals in life, or his compulsion to over-achieve ...
Giving your wife a nervous breakdown is easy, ... and it's cheap.
Curing her is what costs the money .... Avoiding all this might only cost you a little more love and attention at home, a restaurant dinner once in a while, perhaps a weekly trip to the local movie, or even just a talk with her after you put the kids to bed tonight.

This situation was endemic throughout North America.
The option had been offered to the American people through their leadership by spacepersons over a decade previously, of making North American society more spiritual. This was declined in favour of maintain the technologies of war, making new ones, and allowing a secret government to take actions to further pacify the people whom they supposedly represented.
Allowing themselves to lust after material excesses and go into denial about the decisions of their mass representatives, North Americans chose to be manipulated, deceived, overworked, robbed of positive and constructive personality traits. Those common people in the Soviet Union experienced the same end by intimidation, penalty, and informing on one another. Either way, the most powerful human societies allowed their collective spirituality to be bled away.

1967 - By October
"The Probability Theory" had become fashionable in the public media.
First set out 300 years ago by the French mathematician Blaise Pascal, for a gambler who wanted to know how to calculate the odds on certain dice thrown, it is now being used by party hosts, businessmen, economists, social scientists, physicists, politicians, military strategists, and others to rationalize any number of decisions. Simply described, if you note all of the alternatives possible for decisions to a particular set of circumstances, groups of options will form which suggest the degree of risk or likelihood of an event taking place or of certain relationships being capable of providing a basis for predictiveness.
Professional gamblers calculate the odds before placing their bets.
They know that appearances, and the rational mind, are often incorrect.
An adept gambler might bet you even odds that of the license plates on the next 20 passing cars, at least 2 will match each other in their last two digits. It may sound good, but, in reality, the odds are 7 to 1 in his favour - if you work out the possible combinations.
The "small-world problem" demonstrates the interconnectedness of non-agrarian societies.
You meet a stranger from across the nation; talking, you learn that you have a friend in common. Astounded, one of you exclaims, "Its a small world!" In a study done by social scientists at M.I.T., it was found that the average person in the USA is in direct contact with 500 people. Each one is a link in many chains of acquaintance. If any 2 Americans are chosen at random, it was statistically calculated that about 1 in 200,000 will know each other. Yet the possibility that one will know a friend or acquaintance of the second are much higher.

Then there is the "birthday paradox".
You are with a group of 23 people. What is the probability that 2 of the 24 were born on the same day of the same month? By calculating all of the combinations possible, the probability actually falls to just less than 50%. With larger groups, the probability of a match increases. With 50 people, the chances are better than 97 out of 100!
It is easy for the novice to become overconfident in their application of the theory and find erroneous and deceptive "solutions". Assuming that certain events are related, or not related, can lead to many spurious conclusions. Each time there is a choice of action, beginning from the same origin of circumstances and considerations, the probabilities of certain conclusions remain the same. No matter how many times you have flipped a 2-headed coin, the odds remain 50% on each toss that a "tail" or "head" will show when the coin falls to rest.
At the other extreme, if each time we try a potential option, it fails, and we can remove it from future considerations, the probabilities increase in favour of the options left occurring or being chosen. In addition, if we have calculated or believe that an event will happen once in 100 operations - sooner or later that event will happen. Also, if we fail to include all of the behavioural options available because of a lack of awareness, compulsive behaviour, energy block, or misunderstanding - the likelihood increases that our complete range of probabilities is incorrect: that we are deluding ourselves in a search for control and certainty.

Analysts would spend countless manhours calculating and exercising the Probability Theory to arrive at conclusions as to whether a nuclear war should be fought, could be won, should be initiated by a first-strike, how many persons would die, which population centres would be hit, how many missiles would fail or succeed, how best to safeguard a global destruct system from accidental or "unauthorized" activation. On what information and options would they base their conclusions? What if they were wrong?

1967 - On October 11
Rex Heflin, see August 3, 1965, was approached by a Captain C. H. Edmonds of "Space Systems Division, Systems Command", a unit of the USAF that had been involved in the earlier investigation of his photos. It was at the time of the Condon Committee investigations and the man went to Heflin's home. As the interview proceeded, Heflin noticed the man's car at the curb. "In the back seat could be seen a figure and a violet (not blue) glow, which the witness attributed to instrument dials. He believed he was being photographed or recorded. In the meantime his FM multiplex radio was playing in the living room and during the questioning it made several loud audible pops." All attempts to find Captain Edmonds failed.

1967 - In the October issue of "Commentator"
In "James Bond Lives Again",
"... one must never believe appearances ... no one is asking you to believe anything, for James Bond movies are comic strips for grown-ups, complete with gadgetry and shock effects ... The formula is wearing thin ... The appeal of a James Bond movie always was that it showed an individual triumphing over a mechanical world dominated by evil syndicates, but to really successful, the individual must be destructible. Sean Connery survives every murder attempt and every harrowing sequence without a change of expression. It won't do.

1967 - In October
The British Isles experienced their largest number of UFO sightings ever with most of the reports being submitted by police officers. Prior to 1967, the Ministry of Defence had held records on sightings submitted to them for only 5 years, after which they were destroyed. That practice was stopped in 1967, and presumably, records from 1962 are in the MoD archives. Journalist Robert Chapman, wrote a book Flying Saucers over Britain? about the 1967 wave. The Ministry recorded 362 sightings for the year of which about 11 percent remained unexplained. These files are retained by the Air Staff at Whitehall and evaluated by RAF intelligence. As Britain has a 30 year rule on classified documents, those from 1962 cannot be released until 1992!

1967 - In the October 13 issue of "Time"
An article related the communications theories of Marshall McLuhan to the medium of television:
"... television is a 'cool, low-intensity' medium that projects a fuzzy image ... the TV image demands the viewer's involvement by requiring him to complete the picture himself through his own imagination. Hence, there is no need for television to project an orderly or "linear" progression of a story; the viewer (assumes) that himself. In other words, TV's first principle is that form counts more than content. ... murky story lines are submerged in frantic action or personal interaction. ...
Youngsters especially reflect the McLuhan notion that plot is less important than image. Says (NBC Audience Measurement Vice President Paul) Klein: 'Television-oriented people don't care about stories. There's no need to tell a story with a beginning, middle and end. They care about people doing things, and all at once.' ... an interesting and warm relationship that is projected ... some of the most adventurous and entertaining productions on the screen are the TV commercials that get their messages across through imagery ...."

1967 -
During this American television season, "Laugh-In" will become the biggest success of the year.
It will display ambience, artful spontaneity, a kind of controlled insanity, emerging from a cascade of crazy cartoon ideas. ... silly punch lines fly like birdshot. Childish name games produce outrageous amalgams of sound. There are graffiti. There are off-colour, high-school-calibre homilies. Absurd definitions. And sniggering questions. Fresh one-liners. Unbelievable two-liners. Ancient three-liners. Plausible four-liners. There is an element of reverse sophistication in this with outrageous jokes thrown in to create contrast and surprise and give viewers a chance to catch up with the fast pace of the show.
The calculated aim is to create a state of sensory overload, a condition that audiences nowadays seem to want or need in an effort to withdraw from reality and self-responsibility. Blackouts, slapstick, instant skits and subliminals which last only an eight of a second are linked together with an almost continuous raucous laugh track designed to keep the audience attention and in near hysteria. The effect is to have the audience reduce their power to discriminate and evaluate, reduce their anxiety about new or radical concepts, and, create an almost mob mentality amongst the viewers. Laugh-In offers something for, and against, everybody. Stinging as some of the lines may be, the delivery is so whimsical, the targets so varied, that it is hard to be outraged.

Among the regulars:
-------------------------------------------- Judy Carne - always getting drenched with water; Arte Johnson - playing charicatures of other nationalities; Goldie Hawn - playing a giggly unintelligent blond; Ruth Buzzi - playing a man-obsessed un-attractive woman; Henry Gibson - recites nonsense poems and plays a conservative parson; Jo Anne Worley - uses mugging antics and a raucous, snorting laugh.

Without the canned laughter, many times the audience and viewer would not join in the laughter - showing its ability to modify human behaviour. The question is: "Does this activity contribute to the spirituality of a nation?" It contributes to racial stereotypes, exchanges denial and complacency for concern, encourages reactive responses rather than prayer-derived or rationally planned, provides an escape from reality and responsibility into fantasy, and makes acceptable verbal and physical abuse of unconventional norms.
The audience is conned into "feeling" that such destructive communication approaches are acceptable because they are accompanied by laughter. The hysteria, engaged by the fast-paced activity, and accompanied by the incessant laughter, encourage a passive acceptance of whatever goes - just go with the flow. Such surrender of identity and self-control by the individuals who form a culture signify their total dependence on such a culture, and, a total distraction from spiritual aspects which make life meaningful and pleasant.

1967 - On October 21
"The Air", and article by Michael J. Arlen, written in Saigon, reflecting on the use of television and the press in Vietnam, was published in "The New Yorker". In it Arlen notes the following:

"(The word "complex" tends to be one of our contemporary talismans; whatever you touch with it becomes somehow embalmed and unreachable, and the "complexity" itself is likely to become more interesting or important than the subject it is supposed to enfold.) ... Vietnam may be the No. 1 story, but journalists ... Virtually none of them speak Vietnamese. Most ... are here on only six-month tours of duty, which is hardly enough time ....
Vietnam isn't a fast-breaking news event most of the time.
The papers back home have their deadlines; the TV stations have their scheduled news broadcasts ... a lot of chatter comes out of the newspapers and picture tubes, but sometimes nothing really happens. Or, when it does happen, it happens in a time and space that often isn't very meaningfully evoked in terms of standard hard-news copy. People have this feeling they're not getting the "true picture" of Vietnam from daily journalism.

Television, with all its technical resources, with all the possibilities of film and film editing for revealing fluid motion, continues for the most part to report the war as a long, long narrative broken into 2-minute, 3-minute, or 4-minute stretches of visual incident. ... press distorting the picture ... there's a certain amount of that - a certain amount of deferring to official pronouncements that one knows are biased, a certain amount of translating battles in which we lost a cruel number of men into gallant actions that were "gallant" because we took so many losses - ...
What really seems to be standing in the way of an accurate reflection of Vietnam right now ... partly that much of the press, especially the wire services and television, just doesn't have either the time or inclination to investigate the various parts of the Vietnam picture - ... And, more important, when they do get a hold of one of these parts, neither most of the newspapers nor most of television seems able to anything more with it than treat it as an isolated piece of detail - ... isolated in any case, cut off by the rigors and conventions of journalism from the events and forces that brought it into being, cut off, from the events and forces that it will in turn animate.

... it seems true to say that most journalists here convey a more firmly realized picture of Vietnam in a couple of hours of conversation in the evening ... than they've achieved sometimes (in complicity with their editors and their public) in six months of filing detached, hard-news reports. ... one of the notable results of all this has been ... It Obsesses people, certainly, but more as a neurosis (which it's become, it often seems, largely as a result of this inability to confront it) .... for the most part television ... has operated on a level not much more perceptive than ... television crews racketing around the countryside seeking to illustrate the various stories that are chalked on the assignment boards in Saigon .... like journalists everywhere, they complain of not having enough time to cover the "right stories", and of the pressure from New York to provide combat coverage. ....
For the most part, "television's war" is a prisoner of its own structure, a prisoner of such facts as that although television is the chief source of news and information for the majority of people (in North America), the "News & Information Act" is still just another aspect of the world's greatest continuous floating variety show, that the scope and cost of the television news requires an immense weight of administrative-managing from above, that for TV the newsworthiness of daily events is still so restrictively determined by visual criteria. For example, people watching (an event) ... might reasonably conclude, ... that there was some special significance to (the event) ... that its presentation on the screen in front of one said something useful about the war. In all too many cases, though ... there is a lot of smoke, and that is about it. ...

It is now especially evident, and damaging, in Vietnam ... American journalism ... approach to the war that even the journalists covering it know to be non-consecutive, non-activist, a war of silences, strange motions, where a bang on the table gets you nothing and an inadvertent blink causes things to happen in rooms you haven't even looked into yet, .... The public does indeed want and need hard news, something concrete amid the chaos, ... regardless of the number of casualties, regardless, especially, of the relevance of this operation to the rest of the war, the story will run on for days, particularly in the pages of the small-to-medium-circulation newspapers that buy most of the newswire copy. The public also presumably wants and needs a sense of progress, and since this is a public that tends to measure progress numerically - ... there is a tendency on the part of the dispensers of information ... to scour Vietnam for positive statistics and dole them out to newsmen, ....
When President Johnson stands behind the podium in the East Room, looks into the cameras, and declares that he has 'read all the reports' and that the reports tell him that 'progress is being made', it isn't that he's lying. He doesn't need to lie for the situation to be potentially disastrous; all he needs to do is defer to the authority of a repertorial system )one is thinking especially of the government's) that, in terms of the sensitivities, the writing skill, and the general bias of the reporters, is unlikely to be automatically accurate, or anywhere near it.

... TV tends to remain so consistently nerveless and conventional in its use of film. And both the papers and the TV could stand being a great deal more investigative, because if the Emperor doesn't have any clothes on you're surely not doing the emperor much of a favour by saying he does. Right now, for example, there's a big public-relations push going on among the military and the Embassy people here to get across the idea that the ARVN is a fine, competent, reliable, modern army, which it certainly isn't - partly because we spent three years (between 1959 and 1961) training it to be an old-fashioned army, and partly for reasons of corruption and such matters.
... We're all prisoners of the same landscape, and it hardly seems realistic to expect that we'll ever derive a truly intelligent, accurate, sensitive reflection of actuality from a free-market communications system that is manned and operated by people like us, and that will, inevitably, tell us for the most part what we want to know.

... Governor Reagan, one reads, advises that we should use the "full technological resources of the United States" to win the war. ...
... sometimes one has the sense that maybe as great a tragedy as any other will be that we will indeed do something shortly (this nation of men and women that always has to be doing something to keep sane) - distracted, numbed, isolated by detail that seemed to have been information but was only detail, isolated by journalism that too often told us only what we wanted to hear, isolated, in fact, by communications - expressing pieties, firmness, regrets, what you will, citizens patting each other on the back ... and not know what we did. Or why. And, once again, will have learned nothing."

1967 -
During the Vietnam War, American Troops would acquire Traumatic Experiences of adequate intensity such that 500,000 would be "infected" with "Post Traumatic Stress Disorder" (PTSD). The origin of such a disorder is an experience or series of experiences which shock the human mind according to the magnitude of difference between the Educated theoretical perception used to prepare the individual to cope with reality and the experienced reality with which that individual must cope.
Many of the servicemen and women would encounter hypocracy and emotional shock as their primary triggers to this obsessional state of confusion. Attempting to justify in moral or intellectual terms what they had done and seen during their tour of duty in southeast Asia would place them at the doors of insanity, addiction dependency, the abusiveness of acted out frustration, reactionary spirituality, desperate and calming "New Age" theories, and, rebellious anti-government activities. ALL of these would assist them in the fragmentation of their surrounding society AND fuel the paranoic concerns of government intelligence officers about the necessity to provide for a large scale civil uprising.

Factors contributing to PTSD development included these:

1. On the basis of "US Army Edgewood Arsenal chemical warfare experiments", a marijuana - LSD covert supply network was set up by the CIA and Army Intelligence. This made a supply of these drugs available to the troops in the field, ostensibly without the permission of or knowledge of the commanding officers involved. Those involved in the distribution network made hefty profits and, in some cases, were so debilitated or misdirected by their own developed drug dependency, that they died in the field. When the authoritarian and coercive and abusive behaviour of some became intolerable, they became subject to fragging: they were killed by one or more of their own soldiers. Others became so self-confident of their physical abilities, as an influence of the drug use, that they willingly placed themselves into what would normally be interpreted as suicide missions, and were killed.
In addition, some soldiers responded, predictably, to the influence of the addictive psychotropic drugs by fantasizing and projecting their surroundings and their enemy as more powerful and terrifying than they were. This led to reactions which further endangered their lives and those who were near to them. Also, and equally predictable, these "expendable" troops were "medicated" by their drug use into being undependable, unemotional, and unaware. This inefficiency was met with increased and needless casualties as well as with soldiers who utilized intense behaviour patterns in an attempt to counter the mind-and-emotion dulling influence that was idiosyncratic to them. Of those who acted out in this manner, no act of murder or ruthlessness seemed capable of arousing emotion in them - so they repeatedly tried more intense expressions of such behaviour in the hope of stimulating those lost emotions that had seemed to leave them as shell humans.

2. The endemic criminality of the adopted governments supported in South Vietnam by the USA government, clashed with the idealistic perception of most of the troops that their purpose in southeast Asia was to support a valid, legitimate government which was morally superior to that of the enemy. The longer that an American soldier remained in southeast Asia, the more obvious it could become to them that the government which had the interests of the commoners most in focus was that of the enemy. Self-immolations by anti-government Buddhist monks, defections from the South Vietnamese Army, assassinations of local officials by CIA agents, local support for the Vietcong, and other factors became difficult to ignore.

3. The debilitation of the population and the countryside being "protected" by the American troops and those whom they trained became increasingly obvious. Once lush and exquisitely beautiful rainforest was destroyed in wholesale fashion n by the use of defoliants, military bulldozers, and carpet bombing. Small bands of farmers living in open communities were forced to resettle into crude fortresses which made the people dependent upon USA aid and protection.
The general emotional immaturity and permissive upbringing of many of the troops together with the drug use and the general lack of respect for southeast Asians promoted the extension of the prostitution trade from a minor industry status to a major industry status, particularly in the urban areas. Disruption of the local economy and of the traditional lifestyles plus the introduction of many new imported manufactured commodity products encouraged the development of an extensive black market economy. As the war continued, the evidence of social and environmental debilitation became more recognizable.

4. Atrocities and the "mistakes" of war were highly disturbing to any sensitive, caring individual who had Hollywood expectations of the "excitement, adventure, and morality" of fatal combat. The desperation and the rage of the Vietcong against foreigners who had invaded their country, were destroying its countryside, raping (from their term of reference) their women and murdering their relatives and families had its own form of brutality and ruthlessness. In the mid-1990's, US airmen shot down over North Vietnam, during a USA undeclared war, while bombing civilian targets and producing thousands of maimed and killed civilians - still found it difficult to understand why they were treated as if they were criminals! Others paid the price of awareness and social ostracism.
The American public would be shocked by televised informal executions of bound prisoners in the middle of public streets by South Vietnamese officers - trained by Americans. They would read front page testimonials of proud soldiers who had cut off the penis or ear of an enemy and stuffed it into the victim's mouth as a form of torture; the soldiers were Americans; the victims were Vietcong - or, at least they were suspected of being Vietcong. Villages of civilians were napalmed by American planes in order to kill the Vietcong which were, or might be, sheltered there.
With drug induced terror, paranoic vigilance, or combat rage - American troops entered harmless villages of peaceful families and murdered every living thing found, human, pig, dog, or goat. As an extension of the same motivating factors, civilians were indiscriminately machine gunned from helicopters and jets - because they were oriental in appearance: in a guerrilla civil war, the physical distinction between enemy and ally is minimal beyond that of uniform. Often, that distinction is not present.

5. The reality of war: its boring, monotonous, regimentation - and its frantic, desperate, life-and-death immediacy, were punctuated by the disgusting. When friend or enemy died, they bled and their bowels relaxed. This, mixed with the stench of sweat, fear, gunpowder and burning flesh - fouled the air before the sight of bodies or the screaming rush of the enemy. Numerous kinds of traditional jungle traps met the North American invaders as they tramped and crept across the countryside. Disguised pits with sharpened stakes pointing up, took their toll of grisly injuries and deaths. Tree-strung implements, triggered by a trip wire or remote pull string, sent a set of sharpened stakes through the torso of the victim, puncturing organs and pinning the victim into an upright grasp from which death was the only salvation. Poisonous snakes were everywhere. The enemy learned some of the techniques demonstrated by the invaders. They also planted minefields and attacked troop camps. Soldiers lost hands, arms, feet, legs, genitals, and eyesight. Sometimes the torture of pain or malfunction of those parts of the body "saved" would seem worse than had they simply been severed. These realities the American government and free enterprise tried to counter with contrived reality.

6. The marketing of distraction, denial and deception grew as the war intensified and lengthened. Concerts expressing the popular, though non-satirical, musical themes from America were provided, spiced with bikini-clad shapely females and highly respected comedians and stage performers. Some were present by "duty"; some came for the career promotional considerations; all came for the money. The latest and the more historical examples of war and adventure movies were brought in to raise morale and motivation. News stories and crews concentrated on successful military maneuvers as well as fabricated ones which consistently made it appear that the American and American-trained troops were obviously winning the war. These methods were use to augment drug use and civilian terrorism as the best university-theorized psywar techniques.

With all of these factors and more, it was not difficult for someone to become "confused" about the true "meaning" of the war and one's participation in it. That, together with the shock of the gruesomeness and brutality of the war, could sear images into the humans memory that would return, and return, and return. On their return to America, the soldiers would complete an interview form which questioned the influence of the war on them. Although many requested help in coping with the recurrent terrors of PTSD, almost none of the 500,000 so affected every received any formal government sponsored counselling or therapy. Their reports, at best, were funnelled to government sponsored university research projects with the intention of "designing" better psywar strategies.

1967 - On November 3, in a "Time" magazine article on beverages
It was noted that advertisers had expanded their market attraction in the $14 billion a year liquor industry to include women:
"... the pleasure reserved for adults is more and more a woman's pleasure as well as a man's. Of some 65 million U.S. women over the age of 18, probably six out of ten, by the inexact statistics of the liquor industry, drink at least occasionally. That represents a 1/3rd increase in women drinkers in only 10 years. Moreover, women now make about 45% of all liquor purchases, usually for the family. ... the industry is doing everything from putting out primers on cordials ... to promoting fashion shows ... holiday wrapping ... colour combinations of blue, green and lavender and the expensive embossed paper and fabric wrappings are mainly meant to attract feminine eyes. ... they want the store to be neat and convenient ...."

1967 - On November 9
"Apollo 4" became the first unmanned test of the Apollo spacecraft-Saturn 5 rocket combination.
It was successful.

1967 -
David Seewaldt, of Calgary, Alberta while returning home from a friend's home on November 19, late in the afternoon, heard a high-pitched sound. He saw a silver-greyish object flying in the sky with coloured lights all around the centre part flashing off and on in all colours. He next remembered running through his parent's front door -- some 45 minutes later. His sister, Angela noticed he was terrified and on questioning he could only relate that he had run away from a flying saucer.
Five months later, David awoke from a nightmare to vividly remember what had happened.
He had been taken aboard a UFO and subjected to a medical examination by beings so different from humans that he could only call them monsters. He could not recall the rest until he was hypnotised. Even then, a block kept him from revealing the details until he was asked to relate it as if he were watching it on a TV. An orange beam from the middle of the bottom of the craft shone on him and put him into a trance and moved him into the ship.

The beings, (there were 4) he described as having a brown crocodile-like scaly skin, with holes for its nose and ears and a slit for a mouth. Their faces were round, they had 2 hands with 4 fingers and no thumb, they stood about 6 feet tall on 2 feet with 4 toes on each. They communicated in a strange language which sounded to him like bees buzzing or high voltage electrical static. His clothes are removed and he is observed all over. Then he is put on a different table and taken to another room which has all sorts of lights in it. He is transferred to another table and something greyish in colour is thrown over him and a huge orange-coloured light is brought down to shine on him. A gray small needle is stuck in his arm by one of the beings. Next he sees himself being taken through a computer room into a hallway from where an orange beam conveys him back to the ground and he hears a high-pitched sound. The sound is loud and frightens him so he runs home. It seems to follow him and when he is almost home it goes straight up and disappears.

1967 -
This became the bloodiest election year in the history of the Philippines as the newly reorganized police and armed forces, under the direction of Ferdinand Marcos, contributed to 117 politically motivated killings; in the last 36 hours, 37 people were killed. The murderers were all USA-trained paramilitary and police agents.

1967 - By November
"Operation Chaos" (MH-Chaos) was started in James Angleton's Counterintelligence Staff of the CIA in response to a directive from U.S.A. President Johnson. It was a joint CIA-FBI program intended to determine whether the anti-Vietnam movement was getting any foreign financing or manipulation. It involved the compilation of thousands of files on individual Americans who lived and worked within the United States. It showed that there were no foreign financing or manipulation, yet it continued into the Nixon Presidency with CIA agents infiltrating protest groups inside the U.S.A. and Canada to provide authentic cover stories they could use when travelling abroad and joining foreign antiwar groups. It was not officially known to exist until it was revealed by the Rockefeller Commission and the Church Committee hearings of 1975.

1967 - November
New Hampshire - a truck and a car approaching each other on a road simultaneously suffered engine failure when a large egg-shaped object crossed the road between them.

In 1967-1968
In Vietnam, the U.S.A. dropped high quantities of bombs: More than 3-1/2 million 500- to 700-pound bombs which excavated more than 2-1/2 billion cubic yards of earth, that is, ten times the excavation required for the Suez or Panama canals. The craters of these blasts occupy an area of almost 100,000 acres. Indochina contains enough bomb craters to occupy an area greater than the state of Connecticut's 5,000 square miles.
According to Pentagon sources, aerial bombardment of Indochina from 1965 through 1969 reached 4-1/2 million tons, nine times the tonnage used in the entire Pacific theatre in WWII.

1967 - During November
"Brainwashing Can Be Good For You", an article by Mike Cowley, was published in the "Weekend Magazine", issue 46, supplement to the "Toronto Telegram", a national Canadian newspaper.
Douglas Quirk, a research psychologist working at Toronto's Clarke Institute, spoke of brainwashing an entire population:
"I know it can be done.
Given unlimited time, we can condition people in the way one programs a computer.
We've had the power available for years. ... I think the possibilities in this field are endless. Given a free hand, we could help people achieve their optimum level. Unfortunately, we can't create supermen because of biological limitations. You can teach imbeciles to solve complex mathematical problems, but you can't give them intelligence. ... There is a possibility that we may be able to condition body organs through nervous condition responses. Then, of course, we could condition them to fight disease. ... (Speaking of mass brainwashing) Not just a group, a hospital ward or even a city - but the whole of Canada. By purchasing one minute of prime time on the national television network, over a relatively short period I could wipe out a major phobia such as sensitivity to dirt. Then, perhaps, I would start on aggression."

Dr. Richard Steffy, working with psychologist Nancy Marlette, at the Lakeshore Psychiatric Hospital in Toronto, Ontario, stated: "... to critics who say we are being superficial and possibly harmful, you have to ask what about the harm done to the patient by not curing him at all? You weigh that against not curing the symptoms. The root of the problem has often been long forgotten and plays no real importance in the treatment." Dr. Steffy was discussing aversive behavioural treatment strategies which had proven effective in the modification of socially negative behaviours expressed by pedophiles, child molesters, and alcoholics.
Dr. Narroll, of the Clarke Institute, in Toronto, acknowledged that:
"Admittedly these procedures give us a great deal of power over the patient,
but we only condition people to meet the accepted standards of society."
Cowley notes that - On the question of enforced brainwashing, most psychologists are hesitant to make a statement. However they do admit that their techniques were adopted by the North Koreans to program prisoners during the war (of 1950 - 53).
National television WOULD be used over the remainder of the century to condition the preferred behavioural reactions of North American audiences to the daily events around them. Largely motivated by profit tied to audience ratings, dramatic, fear-based events programmed the following responses by demonstrating uncriticized patterns an average of 4000 times per year - much beyond the requirements of Dr. Steffy.
- reaction with action rather than with reflection, thought, meditation; - reaction with denial, blaming, possessiveness, defeat, victimization; - reaction with distancing, voyeurism, spectatorship, passivity; - reaction with dependency, obsessiveness, lack of self-esteem. - opposing reaction patterns of action and passivity would provide increasing emotional insensitivity and confusion and withdrawal.

NONE of these responses encourages creative, constructive solutions, and, most, encourage abuse, poor interpersonal communication and both a breakdown of cultural stability with an inclination towards spontaneous group reactivity. ALL other Earth animal cultures cope better than this standard, with their challenges and opportunities.

This choice of direction was NOT coordinated by some secretive master organization.
Religious, political, legal and educational cultural representatives vested with power and authority by the people they represented, failed consistently to Spiritually choose and support a standard of preferred behaviour. Instead, this human culture came to rely upon leaders who had not forgotten spiritual lifestyle choice; rather, they had never known them.
Leaders cannot be inspired by what is unknown to them.
Dependents sacrifice their soul when they substitute others to make decisions on their behalf who are no more capable than themselves. A culture which has lost contact with God has lost contact with their responsibilities in the universe; anarchy of direction will eventually result in a reordering by the forces and standards of the universe: if you destroy the integrity of the air you breathe, you will suffocate, and die.

1967 - By December
A Petroleum eating Bacteria had been developed by Dr. Edward Bennett of the University of Houston under the direction of the CIA, MK-Ultra Subproject #143.
It was used to produce failure in and destroy engines into which it was poured.
Engines which run out of lubrication overhead, resulting in an expansion of the metal parts until they seize and break crucial parts.
It would be used primarily throughout the 1960s and 1970s to destroy the Cuban economy.
CIA operatives were sent to France to pollute a shipment of lubricants bound for Cuba.
The economic sabotage program had begun in 1961 and was authorized all the way up to President Kennedy.

1967 - On December 3
Herb Skinner (Schirmer), a patrolman, was abducted near Ashland, Nebraska.
He had been on duty since 5 pm and was nearing the end of his shift.
He was cruising around deserted roads on the edge of town because some cattle had been bawling and acting up and he wanted to make sure they were not creating any more trouble. As he approached an intersection, the time was 2.30 am. Then ahead of him, he saw red lights which he assumed were hazard warning lights on a truck that had possibly broken down. Going to investigate, he was surprised to see an oval object hovering a few feet over the road; the red light came from a row of small windows. Craning his neck out of the patrol car, he watched as it emitted a screeching sound and climbed upwards (swaying from side to side at first).
When it had gone, he searched the area but found nothing unusual. He had a feeling of paralysis at the time and was nervous, weak, and sick when he returned to the office where he arrived at 3 am. He drank two cups of hot, steaming coffee "like it was water". Before going to sleep thereafter he often experienced a "ringing, numbness and buzzing in his ears ... and other violent disturbances during his sleep." He was puzzled later by a loss of time, being certain that from his first seeing the object until his arrival back at the station should not have taken longer than 10 minutes.

After the Ashland police released the story, the Colorado University team questioned him, were impressed, and sent him to the project headquarters in Boulder. There he was subjected to an enormous battery of psychological tests - including the Rorschach (ink-blot), word-association and various personality profiles. Dr. Leo Sprinkle, a psychologist from the University of Wyoming, was also flown in to perform hypnosis, in an attempt to unlock the memory of the missing time.
The hypnosis did produce a memory.
During the sighting he had felt a "tingling" in his body for a few seconds and local pain behind the base of the ear, as if a needle had been inserted there. A red welt with tiny holes developed at the spot. For three years after the sighting, he experienced throbbing headaches that lasted two hours and were not alleviated by aspirin. For the first 3 weeks following the sighting, these headaches would actually wake him up. His dreams came to include a vision of three mountain ranges, strange domes and UFOs.

At first, he only reported being taken aboard a craft.
After being on the craft, he was left with the feeling that they would all meet again.
As he was moving off the ship, one of the aliens approached him and put his hand on Herb's shoulder and said something in his language the combination of which Herb took to mean that they would meet again. The abductors seemed to have left their own post-hypnotic suggestion in Mr. Skinner as he felt certain after this regression session that he would be able to remember more about his experience on the craft at a later time. The new information was NOT added to the report but was supplied later by the doctor to independent researchers.
Following further regression sessions, he then remembered that he had seen lights in a field and had gone to investigate. Arriving at the site, the car engine died and its lights went out. A force emitted by the hovering craft "towed" Skinner's car up a slight incline towards it. Two beings walked towards the cruiser and one projected a green glow from a "box" that it carried. He began to feel panic until one of the beings placed a little device behind one of his ears. Then, he became very docile. In a sort of trance, Skinner found himself getting out of the vehicle. The face of the being was ashen grey, with a high forehead, and cat-like eyes. No hair was visible on the face, and the body was covered in a tight-fitting one-piece suit that had a balaclava helmet on top. The mouth was only a slit and when the being spoke it used a deep tone, slow and ponderous, which seemed to come without being spoken, as if telepathically transmitted. "Are you the watchman of this town?" the officer was asked. Skinner replied that he was. He was then led up a catwalk that ringed the craft and finally inside it. Here a circle of drums spun around,giving off multiple colours. The entity explained that this was a power source which used "reversible electrical-magnetism" (words that meant nothing to the witness).

In a later session, the officer recalled that one of the "operators" of the craft was a stern-looking man with a piece of dark clothing covering the head. The opening for the face had an ogival shape that gave it a very Gothic appearance. The forehead was wrinkled. The eyes, nose, mouth, and eyebrows were of normal size, although the pupils were enlarged and elongated, giving the eyes a penetrating, fascinating look. Over the left ear there was a small round device with a short antenna, less than 2 inches long. And over the right shoulder was a patch insignia representing a winged serpent.
Both the officer and the alien then "floated" up a sort of gravity-free elevator shaft to another level where he was shown a "vision" or hologram of a sun with six planets. The alien alleged that they had come from another galaxy and were watching the Earth closely. They had landed to obtain some electricity from a power cable. He was then told "Watchman - you, yourself, will see the universe as I have seen it." It was added, however, that he would only remember viewing the UFO from the outside.

Skinner had been a U.S. Marine and subsequently became the youngest man to rise to head of Ashland's police department, after the sighting. His commanding officer told the Condon Committee that he was "dependable and truthful" and that he was personally "convinced (the officer's) report ... was not the result of hallucination or dishonesty". After his memory had been triggered by hypnosis, he was sure that the experience had happened.
Because of his openness and honesty in the sighting, Mr. Skinner was found not to convey the level of confidence and credibility necessary for his job, as someone who professed to have been taken into a flying saucer by aliens. He lost a series of jobs afterwards also as 2 or 3 men would show up at his work suggest to his employer that he was unstable by virtue of his claim to have seen a UFO.

Dr. Leo Sprinkle, the psychologist, was so impressed by all this that he spent the next 20 years investigating similar cases and is now one of the world's leading experts in this area. In 1980 he summarized his view,

"In my opinion the present evidence for UFO phenomena indicates (tentatively) that the earth is the object of a survey by intelligent beings from some other civilization."

1967 - During the year
Smallpox eradication would be declared a purpose of efforts by the UN World Health Organization (WHO).
The last case of the very contagious virus disease would be reported in 1977, in Somalia. It had been an ecological balance endemic disease which had served to reduce human population numbers, though never stabilize them for the longer term; it had only one host: humans.

1967 - On December 10
A long article in "Song", a South Vietnamese daily newspaper specifically begun to justify the American "pacification" program, surmised the following:
"This is a free area - free for depravity, corruption, irresponsibility, cowardice, obsequiousness, and loss of human dignity. ...
... the Americans seem to like us to perform these kinds of activities so that they can have a lot of big statistics to present to both their houses of Congress. The Americans like to count, count people's heads, count square and cubic meters, and count the money they throw out. They think that the more they can count, the better is their proof of success, the proof of their humanitarianism, and the proof of their legitimacy in this war ... How high a figure has the number of refugees who have to suffer and stay hungry reached? Many statistics proudly present the number two million."

BACK to PEAR
INDEX
Memory Stimulators.
1968 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
The Magus; 2001: A Space Odyssey; War and Peace; Yellow Submarine; Rachel, Rachel; A Face of War; Funny Girl; Assault on a Queen; Bullitt; Night of the Living Dead; Where Eagles Dare; Coogan's Bluff; Project X; Villa Rides; Romeo and Juliet; The Producers; No Way To Treat A Lady; They Came To Rob Las Vegas; Hot Millions; The Subject was Roses; Firecreek; Guns for San Sebastian; The Castle; Star!; Finian's Rainbow.

Songs:
Atlantis; I Heard It Through The Grapevine; Love is Blue; Love Child; Sittin On The Dock of the Bay; Honey; People Got To Be Free; Hello, I Love You; This Guy's In Love With You; Harper Valley P.T.A.; For Once In My Life; Those Were The Days; Little Green Apples; Green Tamborine; Cry Like A Baby; Mrs. Robinson; I Wanna Live; Take Me To Your World; Honey; I Walk Alone; How Long Will My Baby Be Gone?; D-I-V-O-R-C-E; The Legend of Bonnie and Clyde; Wichita Lineman; Stand By Your Man; Mama Tried; Wild Weekend.
Books: The Population Bomb.
General News:

Consumer Price Index: 104.2
Biafra becomes the target for famine relief shipments.
One-piece snowsuits for adults appeared in Canadian clothing styles.
Pierre Elliott Trudeau becomes Canada's 15th Prime Minister, after Pearson.
Wigs and hairpieces were so popular that accessories abounded in North America.
Canadian banks began issuing credit cards to everybody with an account.
Mayor Jean Drapeau of Montreal, Canada, initiated the first national lottery.
Boy's Fashions turned to medallions, beads, earrings and long sideburns.
Pope Paul banned the use of the contraceptive pill; 71% of Canadian Catholics felt it was possible to use the pill.
Anti-war sentiment convinces Lyndon Johnson not to seek presidential re-election in the U.S.A.; Ted Kennedy refuses to run after the death of his brothers; Hubert Horatio Humphrey becomes the Democrats choice.
Richard Nixon becomes U.S.A. president with 31,770,237 votes to 31,270,533.
Retired Air Force General Cutis LeMay, surprisingly got 10,000,000 votes.

1968 - By this year,
The following Executive Orders were applicable in the USA.
Under the American system of government, the Presidential Office and the president's advisors may issue Orders which prepare (forewarn) the legislative bodies of the government and the civilian population for direct dictatorial control by the military and the Executive Office if a situation of anarchy or invasion is deemed to exist by the Executive Office. The public is seldom aware of the nature or volume of Executive Orders which have been issued nor of the potential authority which has been given over to the Executive Office should the necessity or the inclination arise to enact the powers. Some Executive Orders are governed by a time limit, supersede and negate previous orders, or, are free running.
10995 - All communications media may be seized by the Federal Government. 10997 - All electrical power, fuels, and minerals may be seized " " . 10998 - All food resources, farms and farm equipment may be seized " " . 10999 - All kinds of transportation ... control of all highways ... " " . 11000 - All civilians may be seized for work under Federal supervision. 11001 - Federal takeover of all health, education and welfare. 11002 - Postmaster General empowered to register every person in the USA. 11003 - All aircraft and airports may be seized by the Federal Government. 11004 - Housing and finance authority may relocate anyone anywhere. 11005 - All railroads, inland waterways and storage facilities may be seized. 11051 - The Director of the Office of Emergency Planning (OEP) is authorized to put Executive Orders into effect in "times of increased international tension or financial crisis."

Consider: in the reality of megapolitics on a global scale, the incitement of international tensions and the precipitation of financial crises beyond one's nation can often prove lucrative and consolidating of one' power.

1968 - This year,
There were 570,000 professional scientists and engineers in the U.S.A.; 82% of them were receiving federal financial support through government contracts to the private companies and universities where they worked. Much of the money came from the Department of Defense (DOD), the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA), and the Atomic Energy Commission (AEC).
Since the end of WWII, the best private and state universities had become large scale business enterprises competing for research contracts from the national government. During the 1930s, 0.5% of the GNP was spent for research and development. During the 1960s, this figure reached 3.0%. The Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) received 80% of its budget from the federal government in 1968. The University of Chicago was receiving 2/3rds of its annual budget from federal funds and only 1/10th from tuition. The Cold War including the Vietnam War was keeping Americans employed and happy.

The businesslike nature of the major universities gave rise to satellite businesses.
The small city of Ann Arbor, the location of the University of Michigan (which received 50% of its budget from federal funds during the 1960s) had only 1 private research firm before World War II. By 1965, it had more than 50. These private research firms were often headed by university professors. One such company, Tracor, Inc. was making $40 million (1960s value) per year by the 1960s. There was a 400% growth in the University of Michigan budget between 1951 and 1966.
Government support of university research was largely the result of military strategies involving the worldwide deterrence of communism. Between 1945 and 1968, the U.S.A. spent almost $1 trillion for defense. This was about 60% of the national budget. In contrast $96 billion, or 6% of the budget, was spent for health, education, and welfare during these years.

This expenditure meant that the national government subsidized the growth of a number of companies as well as universities. Government funds from 1945 to 1968 supplied 60% of the income of aircraft companies, 33% of radio and television manufacturers, and 26% of machine shop companies. It is estimated that 10% of the total national work force was supported by defense spending in 1968, while 42% of the workers of Seattle and 43% of those in Los Angeles were dependent on national contracts. This is tantamount to stating that without the military industrial establishment in the U.S.A. unemployment rates would have been 10% higher nationally, on average, and as much as 50% higher in some localities!
The Department of Defense itself had become the single most important element in the American economy in 1968, with its ownership of 29 million acres of weapons and buildings worth $400 billion. In addition, the Pentagon, between 1949 and 1966, had sold $16 billion in arms and gave away $30 billion in arms to nations in alliances. The flow of much of this production was abroad and the fact that so much of the economy produced weapons, rather than civilian goods, in factories that were increasingly automated, discouraged the growth of an industrial work force. Also, high taxation and a rising standard of living - requiring more income to keep up with the mass media image of the average American, kept workers at their jobs for the same or longer hours as they were enticed into more consumer debt.

The fundamental attitude of denial amongst the working force, manipulated by the government and the media through disinformation and lack of information prompted conflict with the young academia who were naive by lack of experience in the unsheltered world of the active worker and businessperson. Choices had been made by the political-military-economic-media leadership in the early 1950s as to whether to focus on the resolution of fears and insecurities through spiritual growth or economic growth. The inherent iniquities of envy, anger, pride, greed, fear, hate, and weakness had resulted in the choosing of the latter. Beginning in 1968, Bilderberger project finance would take on a new dimension.
Fearing the eventual loss of skimmed money from defense, intelligence and AEC contracts, the Bilderberger leadership also faced growing social dissention which threatened to request more disclosure of government spending. A small group of academia were experimenting with mood and awareness altering drugs while a larger faction were calling for ideals of international peace and increased freedoms and equality within America. These ideals were believed, by the Bilderberger leadership, to spell the end of the American economy.
It was found that immature and poorly self-directed individuals were susceptible to an elevation to hard drug/narcotic usage and other drug abuses leading to addiction and crime. It was then decided, that a covert military-business-intelligence project would be undertaken to diffuse civil unrest by conversion to drug dependency and crime. This would provide legal institutions with the right to detain such individuals and provide intelligence agencies with the information necessary to compromise their integrity. In addition, substantial income could be directed towards the Alternative 2 and 3 programs to replace that being removed by reduced defense budgets. These covert programs rationalize the survival of a relative few at the presumed necessary expense of the majority.

1968 - During January,
Apollo 5, an unmanned USA lunar command module, is successful in its flight to test the Lunar Module systems, including firings in Earth orbit of both the lunar ascent and descent propulsion systems.

1968 - In the January 26 issue of "Time",
"Video Boy" is described in the Television, the Audience section.
The article describes the characteristics of and the world of the North American child television viewer:
"he doesn't climb trees; he watches Tarzan do it.
At three, he spends five hours a week before the magic box.
By the time he is 12, he will devote 25 hours to weekly viewing, or more time than he will spend with his parents or in school or church. ...
Allan Leitman of Boston's Educational Development Center warns that TV is creating a generation of spectators. "Kids come into school today and they wait for people to tell them things. Without handling frogs or flying a kite, they lead less of a life. We're moving along in a mold that will produce people I can't even imagine." ... The drawback, of course, is that much of TV programming has little to do with the real world. Adults are often depicted as bickering, tension-ridden morons. ...

The problem, explains Menninger Foundation Senior Psychologist Marvin Ack, is that for younger and less stable children, TV can lead to a confusion of fantasy with reality. "The most important thing during a child's preschool years is learning how to control his environment. If TV offers only unrealistic and pseudo-educational programming, the child's adaptation is both unrealistic and valueless."
... most of the shows are misguided attempts based on what adults think children want to see. ... They are fed one commercial every 4 minutes, or twice the adult rate. Says Adman Frederick Bruns: "The priceless thing is repetition. You've got to get to a kid three to five times a week to get him to act on the message." Video Boy Acts by nagging his parents to get ... Once he gets it, he is invariably disappointed because the toy is always much smaller and much less exciting than it looked on the overdramatized commercial. Thus Video Boy learns a basic lesson of TV viewing: distrust.

Not surprisingly, children have gradually altered their viewing habits, until today they devote about 2/3rds of their time to so-called adult shows. ... any time spent beyond 25 hours of weekly viewing is regarded as a sign of emotional disturbance.
The best way to guard Video Boy against any ill effects of TV, says Wilbur Schramm, director of Stanford's Institute for Communications Research, 'is to make him feel loved and secure at home, and so far as possible surround him with friends and activities.' In other words, turn off the set a little more often and get acquainted."

1968 - On February 15,
Mary Louise Armstrong, administrative assistant to Bob Low, project coordinator of the Condon Committee, resigned.
This followed by 2 weeks the firing of two Committee members for "incompetence" by Condon for their turning over a memo addressed from Bob Low to Donald Keyhoe suggesting that the outcome of the Committee findings had been deceptively guided from the beginning. Ms. Armstrong stated:
"an almost unanimous lack of confidence (in Low) ... (that Low) had indicated little interest in talking to those who carried out the investigations or in reading their reports." She could not understand how most of the scientists had "arrived at such radically different conclusions (from Low's) ...(there was) "a fairly good consensus among the team members that there is enough data in the UFO question to warrant further study .... To say in our final report, as I believe Bob would like to, that although we can't prove 'ETI' does not exist, we can say that there isn't much evidence to suggest it does, would not be correct. I do not understand how he can make such a statement when those who have done the work of digging into the sighting information do not think this is true ... I do not think it is an unfair conclusion on our part to say that Bob is misrepresenting us."

1968 - In February,
Dr. Felix Zigel, trainer of cosmonauts on the USSR space programme, stated

"The hypothesis that UFOs originate on other worlds, that they are flying craft from planets other than the earth, merits the most serious examination."
Dr. Zigel began educating the Soviet people to report UFOs "for science".

1968 - During the year,
Court-authorized wiretaps became legal in the USA.
Within a space of 8 years, 200,000 Americans had been legally recorded without their knowledge.
During this period, each tap picked up an average of 25 identities.
Many were using pay telephones, chosen by chance. Federal court testimony indicated that less than one recorded conversation in 10 was in any way incriminating.

1968 - Beginning in mid-February,
At Khe San, Vietnam, and continuing for 6 weeks, U.S.A. aircraft mount a heavy attack.
A description by Peter Dale Scott read:
In about six weeks, US aircraft had dropped 100,000 tons of bombs (some five times the equivalent of the device dropped on Hiroshima) and fired 700,000 rounds of machine gun fire into a circular area roughly five miles in diameter .... An Air Force colonel said, "The tonnage of ordinance placed in that circle is unbelievable. In mid-February, the area looked like the rest of Vietnam, mountainous and heavily jungled with very little visibility through the canopy. Five weeks later, the jungle had become literally a desert - vast stretches of scarred, bare earth with hardly a tree standing, a landscape of splinters and bomb craters!"

General Westmoreland later stated that during the 77 day siege, B-52s flew 2,602 sorties and dropped 75,000 tons of bombs. 100,000 175 mm artillery rounds were fired into the area. If spacepersons were observing humanity, what could they conclude about humanity from such a demonstration of environmental and human destruction. Consider also the consequences for American industry and employment- where were the jobs and the profits focused?

1968 - By late February,
"Mission Impossible", a North American TV series had become the highest rating suspense series.
Characterization and motivation are replaced with an emphasis on fast plots, dazzling footwork, bizarre technical contrivances. It is always the "how" of a story that keeps viewers pinned to their TV sets, since nearly everything else on the program is deliberately made familiar. A task is outlined, the leader picks his team and they set off to rescue someone without revealing their plan to the audience. The plan is always a variation of the con game with each operative earning the enemy's trust by playing a separate innocent role. Together, the heroes catch the villain off guard and everything falls into place just in time for the team to complete its mission. Most viewers still had black and white televisions, but at 25% of households having colour, it was expected that color would dominate within several years. The series ran weekly during the period 1966 to 1973. For 16 weeks during this year the theme song would be a top hit single on the radio and in record stores. By 1996, it was suggested that 3 billion viewers had seen the series.
As a cultural training tool, the series encouraged North Americans to look at others in black and white, good-bad moral roles. Technology was the magical power which won the day together with teamwork and deception. Deception provided the suspense as to whether you would be found out; like a child having done something wrong and waiting and wondering if the discovery would me made. This emphasis on action, and technician-style completion of the plan encouraged the viewer to strengthen their childish, intolerant, self-centred, responses to problems. The means to an end became justifiable and the American way of morality was presented as superior to any other and a status quo to be honoured at any cost. It was an expression to the public that law and mass appeal were no match for totalitarianism, and yet, it promoted the totalitarianism of an elite force defining and delivering justice as necessary to the delivery of justice. Spiritual development of empathy, assertive communication, and negotiation were totally absent.

1968 - On March 2,
Zond 4, a Soviet spacecraft similar to the Soyuz except for no orbital module, no backup engine, and additional heatshielding on the descent module, was launched by a SL-12 Proton rocket from Tyuratam. Weighing perhaps 5140 kg,, it was a pre-manned lunar landing. Contact was lost just after landing on the Moon.

1968 - On March 6,
A USSR GOLF II class submarine sunk in over 16,000 feet of water in the Pacific Ocean 750 miles west of Hawaii.
Golf class submarines comprised the world's first submarines built to launch ballistic missiles.
328 feet (100 meters) in length with a beam of 27 feet 11 inches (8.5 meters)and a draft of 21 feet 8 inches (6.6 meters), they had a speed of 17 knots surfaced and 12 knots submerged. They carried a crew of about 80 men and 3- SS-N-5 SLBM missiles. At least 23 units were constructed and completed between 1957 and 1962. In the Golf II series, one unit was completed and 12 were modified to the Golf II configuration.
Sophisticated tracking of Soviet submarines by the USA involved satellite and underwater monitoring devices which were the resources of the US Navy, the National Security Agency (NSA) and the CIA. The US Navy suggested the attempted salvage of the submarine to the 40 Committee (MJ-12 successor) advising the White House, by 1969.

1968 - During the year,
John Walker, of the US Navy began selling military secrets to the USSR.
A coding machine with electronic key lists which were changed daily was used for communications between Navy transmission points was compromised when Walker relayed the key information to the Soviets. He was involved in a difficult marital relationship at the beginning. He later recruited Jerry Whitworth to pass information. Whitworth retired from the USN in 1976. He was never told to whom he was passing the information. Whitworth's brother and son also became involved in the espionage. Perhaps as many as a million messages were intercepted by Soviet agents before Walker and the Whitworths were charged in 1983.

1968 - During the year,
A North American, Submarine launched ICBM Early Warning System was activated with the use of 8 radar sites located on the Atlantic, Pacific and Gulf coasts of the USA. Detection and tracking of submarine launched ICBM and course determination was provided to NORAD.

1968 - During March,
The "HMS Resolution" becomes the first British nuclear-propelled submarine, carrying nuclear warhead ICBMs capable of striking target nearly 3,000 miles distant. Ernie Bradford, formerly with the Navy, and author of several books on naval subjects, - went along on its initial 4-day submerged trial to write a report for the mass media. What struck him on the Resolution was "the contrast between the ultra-modern equipment and the men using it - 'exactly the same as the characters I knew at sea 25 years ago.'"
With captain, Commander Kenneth Frewer, on the bridge, the submarine left the Loch Long, near Greenock, on the west coast of Scotland. It had set out from the main submarine base on the River Clyde, at Farlane on Gare Loch. With nuclear power, there is no telltale smoke, nor diesel engine sound of the common submarine. The nuclear reactor, located in the after section, is referred to by the crew as 'The Kettle.' Unlike earlier submarines with their cold, damp, stale-aired insides - these vessels are air conditioned for the freshest of air and the most comfortable of environments. Like earlier submarines, garbage (gash) is disposed of at sea.

This British Polaris has explosive warhead power greater than all the bombs dropped by all combatants during WWII. The British consider HMS Resolution to be "possibly the largest submarine in the world." In addition to the Polaris missiles it also has 6 conventional bow torpedo tubes. At a displacement of 8,000 tons of water, when submerged, it is about as large as one of the British Colony-class cruisers used during WWII. Three similar submarines are expected to join the ranks of the HMS Resolution shortly: HMS Renown; HMS Repulse; and HMS Revenge - all proud and aggressive titles to fit their purpose. The vessel is 425 feet long, draws as much water as he Queen Mary passenger liner, has a beam of 33 feet and a crew of 150 men. Together with missiles, its cost is estimated at $135 million (battleships used to cost $8 million).
The 16 Polaris rockets on board, their vertical tubes, the aft section which houses them and the guidance system are all American by design. The remainder is British. The rocket area is split between 3 decks: the lower deck contains the rocket propellant area; the main deck houses the body of the rocket; the upper level provides access to the nuclear warheads and their self-contained inertial guidance system. Measuring 31 feet in height, these rockets are, for the media, considered a second-strike weapon - to be launched against a known attacker.

Lt. Jack Hart, Assistant Polaris Systems officer, directing the Missile Centre, aft, kept Bradford informed. The rockets are cosetted and kept at an even temperature by a permanent watch-keeping staff of one officer, several petty officers, and a number of ratings (ordinary seamen). Bradford was assured that there was no chance of a rocket being fired accidentally or by the effort of a rebellious captain or officer. There were to be double-checks at all stages of the technical procedure; interchecks would make it necessary for both the captain and a second officer to verify the order to fire; the chain of command in London (political) was also to have been equally safeguarded.
The Missile Control Centre, with twin computers, to guard against redundant malfunction, and an inertial navigation centre would control the path and destination of the rockets. They would determine the parabolic course and make a myriad of allowances to ensure that the rocket reached its target thousands of miles away.
To keep this expensive tool efficient, there are 2 crews, which rotate for sea duty.
This is a technician's Navy. There are 7 science degrees in the wardroom, while Higher Rates and even Junior Rates (levels of authority) abound with specialist technical qualifications. Cheerful self-confidence and a "very deep sense of responsibility" typify the crew. These are men who are adept at their roles and eager to follow orders. Their reward: excellent food, hot showers, good rum, a beer ration of 2 cans per day, scrubbed, warmed and air conditioned air, largely predictable and stable work schedules, adequate rest, interesting work, and a movie shown almost every night for each of the officer, senior ratings, and junior ratings groups of seamen.

1968 - In March,
The U.S.A. Federal Budget should have shocked the voters:
In 1968, there were 570,000 professional scientists and engineers in the country.
82% of them were receiving federal financial support through government contracts to the private companies and universities where they worked. Government support of university research was largely the result of the new military strategy of the worldwide deterrence of communism.
Between 1945 and 1968, the United States spent almost $1 trillion for defence, while ostensibly at peace!
This was about 60% of the national budget. In contrast, $96 billion, or 6 % of the budget, was spent for health, education, and welfare during these years. Over the 6 year period from 1962 to 1968, every American family paid $600 in taxes for the direct support of the war in Southeast Asia. Individual income taxes in the same period jumped from $48.8 billion to $92.2 billion. At the same time, corporate profits increased by 33% while weekly gross earnings for nonagricultural workers increased by 15.2% - before taxes.
The best private and state universities had become large-scale business enterprises competing for research contracts from the national government. The Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) received 80% of its budget from the federal government in 1968. MIT has always been a civilian front for the CIA. The University of Chicago (which was a focal point for the Manhattan Project) was receiving 2/3rds of its annual budget from federal funds and only 1/10th from tuition. The businesslike nature of the major universities gave rise to satellite businesses. The small city of Ann Arbor, the location of the University of Michigan, had only one private research firm before WWII. In 1965, it had more than 50. One such company, Tracor, Inc. was making $40 million a year by the 1960s. There had been a 400% growth in the University of Michigan's budget between 1951 and 1966. Government funds from 1945 to 1968 supplied 60% of the income of aircraft companies. It is estimated that 10% of the total work force was supported by defense spending in 1968, while 42% of the workers of Seattle and 43% of those in Los Angeles were dependent on National contracts.

In comparison, the total combined assistance to SE Asia by the USSR and China for the period 1965 to 1968 was estimated at $2 billion.

The Department of Defense had become the single most important element in the American economy in 1968, with its ownership of 29 million acres and weapons and buildings worth $400 billion. Its foreign policy consisted in selling arms to nations which surrounded the U.S.S.R. Between 1949 and 1966, the Pentagon sold $16 billion in arms and gave away $30 billion in arms to allies of the U.S.A. As much as 8% (3.68 billion) was diverted from arms sales contracts to the construction and maintenance of Spaceperson/human shared facilities. Between 2 and 5% of the defense budget went annually to construction and maintenance of these facilities, interconnecting tunnels, a duplicate space exploration program, and reverse and alien-assisted engineering development.

1968 - During March,
Ferdinand and Imelda Marcos set up their first separate numbered accounts at Credit Suisse in Zurich, providing the bank managers with their real names and the aliases William Saunders and Jane Ryan. Eventually they opened more than 12 secret accounts in Switzerland alone, mostly in Credit Suisse and the Swiss Bank Corporation, and deposited in them over the years more than $5 billion. In addition to using aliases, the Marcoses gave their Swiss bankers an elaborate code to authenticate all messages they sent from Manila, a code that varied according to the month of the year.
Ferdinand made sure that his "magic" number "7" appeared in his account numbers.
Other sums were deposited in accounts of offshore corporations (over 20) and foundations (over 35) based in Hong Kong, the Netherlands Antilles, the Bahamas, the Cayman Islands, Liechtenstein, Switzerland, and other locals. Roberto Benedicto and Antonio Floirendo set up those located in the first four locations mentioned. Banks used to hold the monies included Chase Manhattan Bank, First National City Bank (Citibank), The Hong Kong Bank, Credit Suisse, Swiss Bank Corporation, Barclay's Bank, and others.

The Sandy Foundation, a Liechtenstein account, was accessible to either Imelda or Ferdinand and they instructed its trustee Markus Geel in Zurich that when either of them wanted to withdraw cash, they would send a cable wishing him "Happy Birthday". When he received the cable, Geel would fly to Manila to get their instructions personally.
In Hawaii, Ronald Rewald of Bishop, Baldwin, Rewald, Dillingham & Wong, became a conduit for CIA funds, and Marcos and other wealth Filipinos - for investment and banking there. The CIA also used the Nugan-Hand Bank in Australia, which had branches in Manila, Hong Kong, Singapore, and elsewhere, to funnel Marcos black (illegal) money out of Australia and Hong Kong.
In the Philippines, the Marcoses dutifully carried on the charade, to the media and the citizens, that they were modest income person - claiming a gross income of only $17,000 in 1960; $60,000 in 1961; $69,300 in 1966 - the year Ferdinand ran for President and had well over $1 million in election expenses. Outside the Philippines, the story was different.

When Imelda took her eldest daughter Imee on a shopping trip to the USA in June, 1968, when the Cultural Centre was still broke, the two spent a total of $3.3 million in only 8 weeks, or just under $100,000 each shopping day. Imelda wanted to keep some petty cash aside for such shopping sprees so she set up accounts in Europe and America with the aid of close friends. Hundreds of thousands of dollars went into the accounts and, eventually, the names of the friends were removed as signing authority on the accounts only to leave Imelda. Particularly in the early days at the Palace, Imelda had been overheard to complain of the bags of money which kept arriving for Ferdinand being too much to count. Eventually, as she became more comfortable with the handling of such amounts of illegal monies, she cut out the middlemen and sent couriers with suitcases of money directly to her account at Credit Suisse in Zurich - so many suitcases, that the bank managers had to ask her to stop!
The CIA and the USA White House knew from 1969, that the Marcoses had stolen hundreds of millions of dollars by profiteering, mail fraud, wire fraud, extortion, embezzlement, theft, transportation of stolen property, and illegal laundering of funds. Knowing and condoning was the price to pay for deceiving the American people and many others that the Vietnam war was a just war. Pride came first. Power came second. Greed came third. Throughout was a string of lies and half lies.

1968 - On March 31,
A dramatic curtailment of American bombing of North Vietnam is announced by USA President Lyndon B. Johnson at the same time as he announces that he will not run for re-election.

1968 - On April 4,
Martin Luther King, U.S.A. civil rights activist, is shot dead in Memphis, Tennesee by James Earl Ray, later caught in Toronto, Ontario, Canada.
Initially, J. Edgar Hoover, FBI Director, showed little interest in finding the killer of the man he had grown to hate. King was a black; he was educated more than Hoover; he had a greater social and media presence than Hoover; he threatened the priveleged white supremacist status quo in which Hoover had been raised and in which he had lived all his life. Hoover had used his power to provide disinformation about King and other civil rights activists (Malcolm X, H.Rap Brown, Huey Newton, Eldridge Cleaver, Walter Elliot, Morris Starsky, Professor David Herreshoff, Maude White, Roy Wilkins), through the Cointelpro operations of the 1960s. After considerable public pressure, Hoover relented and assigned 3000 agents to find the murderer.

1968 -
G. Rattray Taylor, author of "The Biological Time Bomb", commenting on the state of biological warfare research states:
"At Fort Detrick, Maryland, where the government used perhaps the best facility for physical containment in existence to conduct experiments for biological warfare, there have been 423 accidents - escapes by the tiny biological inmates - leading to 3 deaths in the past 25 years. ... our present state of knowledge makes it almost impossible to project where research now being undertaken will lead us."

1968 - During the year,
Dwight McDonald's "Theory of Mass Culture" would be published.
In it he asserted:
"There are good theoretical reasons why Mass Culture is not and can never be any good. I take it as axiomatic that culture can only be produced by and for human beings. But in so far as people are organized (more strictly, disorganized) as masses, they lose their human identity and quality ... its morality sinks to that of its most brutal and primitive members, its taste to that of the least sensitive and most ignorant."

In the same year, Ernest van den Haag would write:
"In popular culture ... art ... distorts human experience to draw 'substitute gratifications' or reassurances from it. Like the dreamwork (of Freud), it presents an 'illusion in contrast to reality.' For this reason, popular 'art' falls short of satisfaction. And all of popular culture leaves one vaguely discontented because ... it is only a 'substitute gratification'; like a dream, it distracts from life and from real gratifications."

1968 - During April,
Apollo 6, the second test of an unmanned USA Apollo-Saturn 5 proves only partially successful when it is beset with pogo vertical oscillations affecting the first stage.

1968 -
The American movie, "Bullitt" was to become a model for many movies and several TV series in which police officers conducted high speed, dangerous, and destructive car chases through populated areas after suspected criminals - who always turned out to be real criminals. Based on the book, "Mute Witness", by Robert L. Pike, the movie followed a storyline of deception, contract murder, the increasing emotional dissociation of the police professional, obsessive fixation on duty and task, political interference with policing procedures, and the suggestion that the intensity of crime in America now sanctioned the resolute actions of individual police officers.

While this movie mirrored a form of crime which accounted for less than .001% of crimes committed in the USA, and, which did call for the actions of the police detective involved, both the public and many police recruits hereafter would adopt the aggressiveness, ruthlessness, and deadliness of this storyline as their mentor for the treatment of ALL criminals and suspects. Independent action was promoted ahead of team action; aggressiveness ahead of negotiation; ruthlessness ahead of compassion; autocracy ahead of public service. The movie was quite successful; its influence depended upon the spiritual strength of the nation. The result indicated that there was a spiritual weakness.

1968 - Between May 3 and July 31,
The First International Exhibition of EROTIC ART is held at Lund's Konsthall, Museum of Art, Lund, Sweden.
Representing a survey of erotic fact and fancy in the fine arts, it had been organized by Drs. Phyllis and Eberhard Kronhausen; a compilation was published in book form, volume 1 in 1968 and volume 2 in 1970. The first combined English language volume was produced in 1978.
The view taken by Drs. Kronhausen was that:
"sexual censorship presently interferes with the constitutionally guaranteed freedoms of conscience, opinion, and expression, for a substantial and ever growing liberal minority in modern society to the view that the sexual drives are not at all in basic and necessary conflict with other constructive personal or social aims. On the contrary, this minority view holds, the candid recognition and freer expression of these sexual drives are essential to individual well-being, mental health, and social progress. ... It is our deep personal conviction that erotic art ... serves important social and therapeutic functions. In addition, it can be and often is a vehicle for social criticism or the expression of important philosophical, political, or religious ideas. By attempting to suppress erotic art, society not only deprives itself of a potential source for growth and insight, but cramps artistic production by blocking the free imagination of the artist and closes up a vital channel of communication.
Finally, erotic art expresses the demand for sexual freedom - a freedom vital to individual happiness and mental well-being. And sexual freedom, in turn, cannot exist without a high degree of political and economic freedom as well. In that sense, erotic art carries a truly revolutionary message: it demands no less than extension of freedom, not only in the sexual area, but in every sphere of social life."

They noted that China, Japan and India had, by far, produced the greatest part of erotica in the (Earth) world. In those regions, picturesque scrolls and love manuals had been produced and circulated much like marriage manuals. The major intent appears to have been the encouragement of variety and expertise in stimulating one's partner such that the intimate relationship be physically fulfilling for both and that the relationship grow through consideration and respect for one another.
Representation in the U.S.A. tended to stress the object-gratification of sex and included voyeuristic poses of nudes in provocative positions, images suggesting disrespect for the opposite gender and oneself, violence and force, and, obsession. Obviously, repression and ignorance were not constructive coping mechanisms for a culture. With some exceptions, American erotic art would not markedly change in its representation before the end of the century.

1968 -
Robert S. Easley and Rick R. Hilberg provide a report on the MIB (Military Intelligence Bureau) regarding mysterious men dressed in black who have terrorized UFO witnesses and investigators in all parts of (the U.S.A.).

1968 -
The Asteroid, "Icarus" approaches very close to the Earth in its travels.

1968 -
Dr. Rojer Broughton, working at McGill University in Montreal, Quebec, Canada, establishes that bedwetters experience an inability to wake quickly enough from deep sleep. When their bladder signals them that it needs emptying, they begin to wake, but don't quite make it all the way to consciousness.
This research would direct the understanding of enuresis away from "weakness" of character and mind towards a concept of disease or mental disorder - allied with other parasomnias, that is, disorders related to states of partial arousal from sleep. As such, bedwetting would now be understood as part of a family of problems like sleepwalking or night terrors that arise from an inability to fully wake from slow-wave Rapid Eye Movement (REM) deep sleep.
Drug treatments would now be sought to "control" the condition, in addition to the mechanical alarm systems used since the 1940s. Bedwetting affects about 15% of children as a delayed development ability. Popular pseudo-psychological rationales which had been introduced in the past would continued to be used and believed by the less aware practitioners and patients. These time-honoured methods used threats, embarrassment, shame, and physical force to encourage the offending child to abandon his or her "weak" psychological strivings for more attention, lack of will, or, chronic fears and worries. Professional and public awareness about new approaches and considerations would be meagre for decades - effecting an influence on millions of impressionable humans trying to establish an identity. The utilization of Broughton's findings would be used predictably within the North American society - the "cause" was assumed to have been found and a "quick fix" pharmaceutical would be sought.

1968 - During May,
After an accident, Nuclear Waste is dumped into the waters adjacent to Novaya Zemlya, a 500 mile long island that extends into the Barents Sea, Arctic. The Soviet military would use the waters on both sides of the island as a dumping ground for nuclear reactors from 18 nuclear submarines and icebreakers before 1990. Eight of the reactors will contain hot fuel. Uncounted canisters of nuclear waste are also dumped into the waters. Nuclear bombs are tested here as well. The accident resulted in the deliberate sinking of a nuclear submarine here at this time. The presence of nuclear waste in ocean waters will lead to local fish kills and declining fish stocks, species mutations and unfit water for drinking, cleaning, and bathing uses.

1968 - Early on the morning of June 5,
Robert Kennedy, after winning the U.S.A. California presidential primary, was shot dead by Sirhan Bishara Sirhan, an Arab nationalist, in Los Angeles. Evidence held in the Los Angeles Coroner's office would disappear in the second only known such incident in the history of the department between its inception and 1990. The other, and first known incident of "lost" evidence involved evidence connected to the death of Marilyn Monroe.
Sirhan had been born in Palestine and was a youngster during the 1940s.
He had witnessed the terrorist acts of the Jews, who before the declaration of the state of Israel, had numerous times thrown dynamite explosives into groups of Palestinians waiting at bus stops. Sirhan had held high respect for Robert Kennedy until Kennedy began supporting the sale of armaments to Israel and until he had become involved with the Scientology organization. In the latter, Sirhan learned how to use affirmations, positive or otherwise, to pattern compulsive attitudes and behaviours within himself. For a time before the shooting, he had written repeatedly in a notebook that "Bobby Kennedy must die."
After his arrest, an earlier poorly treated head injury, experienced after his arriving in the USA with his family, was said to have resulted in definite changes in his behaviour. Yet throughout the trial and afterwards, inconsistencies developed between Sirhan's testimony and the evidence. While Sirhan professed not to remember the shooting, a considerable degree of preparation and attention to detail were required in carrying out the act. While these are still consistent with hypnotic conditioning, self-induced or not, Sirhan instructed his mother to destroy his incriminating notebook immediately after his arrest. Of particular note, made in his defense, is the fact that the murder of innocent people and a lack of justice through conviction and penalty afterwards always encourages close survivors of the victims to develop internalized feelings of rage. Events occurring decades later can, by association, motivate a human to act out such rage through acts of violence.

Of further note is the fact that assassinations are NOT simplistically unified.
They may happen for a variety of reasons covering a full range of murder motivations.
In reality, so-called assassinations may technically be murders, assaults, assassinations, or accidents.
The case of Sirhan Sirhan demonstrates that, in a human authority-based political structure, one person, sufficiently motivated by any of a range of factors, CAN substantially influence the direction of human history - for good or ill.
In this instance, there was no conspiracy, no sanction by a political organization, no massive rejection of Kennedy, no lacking of security to protect the presidential candidate, no direct personal act by Kennedy effected against Sirhan, no American abuse of Sirhan or his parents and family. As humans are known to do frequently, Kennedy was associated with the Zionists of Sirhan's childhood symbolically, and, symbolically, to kill Kennedy became a substitute for the execution of those terrorists.

1968 - Late at night on June 13,
Senor Pedro Pretzel, while on his way home, saw an object on the highway some 55 yards from the Motel La Cuesta, on Highway 20 near Villa Carlos Paz, in Argentina, where he lived with his wife and daughter. The object had 2 bright red lights and projected beams of great intensity at the motel. He ran to the motel to find his 19-year old daughter, Maria Eladia, lying in faint on the floor. Minutes before she had bid farewell, for the evening, to her fiancee and some guests.
On recovering she described how she had seen the lobby flooded with light, had switched the lights off, and went to investigate. She was horrified to find herself face-to-face with a man 6 feet tall, dressed in what looked like a diver's suit that had shiny sky-blue coloured scales. He was fair-haired, and was holding up his left hand, on the palm of which was a sky-blue ball or sphere which was moving about. There was a huge ring on the fourth finger of the being's right hand which he moved constantly up and down in front of her. She was overcome by weakness as if her strength was being drained from her. Light came from the being's finger-tips and feet and it seemed that she felt weaker when they were pointed towards her.
The being showed no aggression, smiled throughout, and emanated an impression of goodness and kindness.
He tried to communicate with her and although his lips did not move, she heard a mumble which sounded to her like Chinese. After a few minutes, the humanoid walked to the open side door with slow precise movements, went out, and closed it after him. She then lost consciousness and her father found her moments later on the floor. Senor Pretzel reported the incident to the police who promised to investigate it. For some days after, Maria was extremely nervous and subject to fits of crying.

1968 -
A teenage girl was driving down the road to meet her girlfriend to go shopping when she saw what she thought was a work crew on the road ahead. As she neared she noticed that there were a number of them at the sides of the road and two standing in the middle. It seemed odd because there were no warning signs or flagmen. She then noticed that they were all very short, almost identical in stature and dressed in blue-gray coveralls. As she approached, her car stalled and the two in the middle of the road turned towards her. Their eyes seemed hypnotic and their heads either had some form of headgear on or they didn't have hair. As the one got closer she could see that its eyes were solid in colour without any pupil. The next thing she remembered was driving and feeling compelled to turn to look back and being told not to.
She continued on to her girlfriend's house.
She thought she had arrived on time and was initially annoyed with her girlfriend who had changed into her houseclothes until her girlfriend pointed out that she was 2 hours late. Under regression, she described how the beings came to her car and that telepathically she was hearing that they wanted her to get out of the car. She was led across the road and over to a dome-shaped craft in a corn field. The craft was flat on the bottom and was resting on a tripod-like landing gear. A hinged ramp was resting on the ground. She next described feeling as if she were in a refrigerator as the interior of the craft was cold, yet very bright.

The materials of which the craft were composed inside were like metal but were almost like a plastic-type metal. Everything was a very bland gray. She was placed on an examination table above which were instruments which the attendants could reach up and take down. There were two monitors, one on each side of the table. There was a counter that wrapped around the outer circumference of the room. At one point one of the beings brought a needle and inserted it in her abdomen. Another took what appeared to be a blood sample from her finger. A humanoid which she assumed to be female came in and took a scraping from her arm.
She thought the humanoid, different from the others, was a female because it had very dark, long hair, the eyes and face were different from the others ... almost human. It was also taller than the others. The majority of beings she described as having long slender fingers without fingernails. There were 5 fingers but one did not represent an opposing thumb, as in humans.

1968 - On June 14,
Near Cabanas, Cuba - a round object with a dome and a series of antennae on top was sighted.

1968 - Representing the year,
Lee Fryer, an American agricultural and nutrition consultant who operates "Earth Foods" in Washington, D.C., states that the figure being spent on commercial fertilizers in the United States for the year 1968 exceeded $2 billion (about $4.5 billion in 1994 purchasing power). This sum would have bought 100 million tons of "Fletcher Sims's Biodynamic compost", which, if applied at the rate of one ton per acre would cover the whole state of California with enough left over for an area as large as the 6 New England states. For the cost of only a few days of the Vietnam war, the whole of the United States of America's soil could be given an annual treatment. Using a mixture which originated with Sim's, Fryer brought to market a product which could multiply production yields considerably, even under adverse climatic conditions. There was never any known government acknowledgement or support given to the approach.

This represents one of many instances in which a more spiritual approach to lifestyle and long-term goals by the American public and their political representatives could have resulted in dramatic positive changes. If "putting one's own house in order" had been placed ahead of "destroying one's neighbour's house", even in a minor way, the health of the agricultural industry would have improved considerably. This change would have lessened or negated later increasing numbers of bankrupt farmers, widespread lowering of yields, malnutrition of increasing numbers of children and of urban adults, and an increasing departure from rural areas into urban concentrations. It was this type of decision-making that several spaceperson cultures had warned representatives of humanity from the 1950s about, which would lead to global catastrophe on the Earth.

1968 - In the July 12 issue of "Time", ...
"And Now a Word about Commercials", an article on television advertising notes the following:
"They are part of the background music, as it were, of the American scene. ... commercials obviously represent the American materialist vision of the good life ... Roughly 20% of TV air time is given over to commercials. This year 2,000 advertisers will pour $3.1 billion into television advertising - twice the budget of the poverty program - reaching 95% of the nations homes. What's more, the TV spieler has a unique license. He doesn't have to stick his foot in the door. He's already in the living room ... Conveniently deaf, he just smiles and (authoritatively) hammers home his quota of 600 'brief messages' a day.
The bloody events in Viet Nam, incongruously flanked with sales messages glorifying the good life at home, leave the viewer with the inexplicable sensation that the commercials and the war are one and the same: Which is the more real? ... the cost of a one minute commercial - rehearsals, filming, reshooting, dubbing, scoring, animation, printing - runs an average of $22,000 or about 5 times more than a minute of TV entertainment.

The only way to sell certain analgesics was to make the viewer queasy just watching ... after 20 years of hard-sell harangue, viewers developed a kind of filter blend up front. They did not turn off their sets; they turned off their (conscious) minds (resulting in) CEBUS (Confirmed Exposure but Unconscious). In one recent survey, 75% of the viewers had no recollection of what products they had just seen demonstrated (but would make buying decisions in favour of the product).
... the uncommercial, (the consumer) ... identifies with the characters who for once look almost like real people - fat, scrawny, drab, sassy, ordinary. He is caught up in ... the mood and the moment ... is washed in the nostalgia. ... You have to touch (the consumer), show them humanness and warmth, charm them with funny vignettes. You have to make them feel good about a product so they'll love you (and so you can deceive them).

THEATER OF THE ABSURD. ... The shamming, the touch of half-suppressed hysteria, is unsettling ...
THEATRE OF CRUELTY. ... does provide a bit of shock.
SURREALISM. mixed with metaphors come to life ... a certain childish charm at first but with repetition it quickly pales.
EXISTENTIAL SLAPSTICK. ... brutally chops down a scent-crazed female ... Nothing like a little good-natured sadism to punch home a point.
FUN SEX. ... At first it seems wrong.
Isn't it the man who is supposed to shout 'Take it off'?
But in an instant the reversal of roles becomes rather charming and even sexy, ....
LOW SATIRE. ... some razz the production style of various other products.
HIGH SATIRE. ... gets a lot of laughs ... sticks in the mind.

Strategies vary, but basic ... is the oldest device of all: crisis-making. ... People may buy certain kinds of products even though they hate the commercial. The axiom drawn from all this is that contempt breeds familiarity, and familiarity breeds sales.
... people don't buy products, they buy psychological satisfaction; the promise of beauty, not cosmetics; oral gratification, not cigarettes. ... a 'hooker opening' or an intriguing scene-setter, plus a memorable catch-phrase or two that dramatizes the need, ....

Lie detectors, word association, sentence completion, and the Minnesota Multi-phasic Personality Inventory ... Target Attitudinal Group ... galvanic skin response test ... pupillary-response camera (are used as methods to determine what will most effectively manipulate the audience).
critics believe that TV commercials, along with all advertising, have a seductive effect upon the population, compelling it to overconsume its own over-production.

1968 - On July 29,
Before the House Committee on Space and Astronautics, Dr. Allen Hynek, Dr. Carl Sagan, Dr. James McDonald, and 3 other scientists testified. McDonald held a master's degree from MIT and a doctor of philosophy from Iowa State University. He headed the Institute of Atmospheric Sciences at the University of Arizona. Highly respected, he had done extensive research on cloud seeding, hurricane reduction, and ozone problems caused by SST emissions. He called the study of UFOs
"the most important scientific problem of our time ... we do not know what they are because we laughed them out of court. ... My own present opinion, based on two years of careful study is that UFOs are probably extraterrestrial devices engaged in something that might be tentatively termed 'surveillance'. ... I have to state, for the record, that I believe no other problem within your jurisdiction is of comparable scientific and national importance. These are strong words, and I intend them to be."

Hynek told the Committee that only two things kept scientists away from UFOs: one was lack of hard data [the USAF and US intelligence agencies had retained all such evidence in secrecy]; the other was the sensationalizing of UFOs by contactees and pulp magazines.

More clearly, sensationalizing by the mass media and infiltration and disinforming of UFO interest groups by US intelligence organizations had created more confusion than the reports of contactees.

1968 - On August 16,
Flying over Regina, Saskatchewan the 8-man crew of a RCAF Hercules C-130E observed a peculiar cigar-shaped craft crossing their flight path. It had 5 or 6 rectangular-shaped patches on the side and its surface reflected the sun. No contrail was observed and it was visible to the naked eye for about 1-1/2 minutes, before it shrank rapidly in size and disappeared to the SW extremely quickly.

1968 - On August 24,
France exploded its first thermonuclear (hydrogen) bomb.

1968 - On September 1, at 3.30 a.m.,
Juan Carlos Peccinetti and Fernando Jose Villegas left their work in Mendoza, Argentina, to drive home.
They had just reached an unlighted part of calle Nequen, near the junction with calle Laprida, when the car suddenly stopped and the headlights went out. Villegas got out to look under the engine hood only to find he was 'paralysed' when he went to shout to Peccinetti. The same happened to the latter when he got out. They found themselves facing 3 small beings, and two more were standing near a circular 'machine', some 13 feet across and 5 feet high, which was floating in the air some 4 feet above a patch of the waste ground at 2333 calle Nequen. A beam of light was directed from the object towards the ground at an angle of 45 degrees. They described the beings as about 5 feet tall, and looked like humans but had unusually large heads, which were hairless. They were wearing 'boiler' suits and approached the alarmed men 'gently and quietly', crossing a ditch 'as though by bridge'.
Both witnesses heard - as though by the tiny earplugs from pocket transistor radios - a voice in Spanish saying repeatedly: 'Do not fear, do not fear'. Villegas also reported that they received a message in the same manner, that the beings had made 3 journeys around the Sun, studying the customs and languages of the system. '... the sun benignly nurtures the system: were it not so then the solar system would not exist ... Mathematics is the universal language.' While this lecture proceeded, another of the entities was using an instrument shaped like a soldering iron to make inscriptions on the doors, windshield and running boards of the vintage Chev car they were in. There were bright sparks from the instrument but when the car was examined later there were no burn marks.

A circular screen then appeared near the hovering craft, and on it the two men saw a series of pictures. The first was a scene of a waterfall in lush countryside; the second showed a mushroom-shaped cloud, and the third, the waterfall again, but neither water nor lushness. After this, their left hands were taken by hands that felt no different from human hands, and their fingers were pricked 3 times. The beings then returned to their craft, ascended to it by way of a light beam. Then there was the sound of an explosion and, surrounded by intense light, the object rose into the sky and disappeared.
The 2 broke into the guardroom at the General Espejo Military College a few minutes later in shock, highly agitated and recounting their experiences. Inspection at the Lagomagiore Hospital identical small punctures in their index and middle fingers and further tests confirmed that they were sane and rational. Inspection of the inscriptions on the car by the Mendoza Centre for Space Research suggested that:
'The sketch done by the humanoids represents two solar systems, the Earth's system, consisting of Mercury, Venus and Earth, and the Jupiter system, containing the planets Io, Europa and Ganymede. Between Ganymede and Earth there are two parallel lines, as though to indicate a two-way trip, and establishing that the source of these beings is Ganymede.'

Staff at the Mendoza railway station had reported a sudden and total blackout of the lighting system and 15 minutes after that, Senora Maria Spinelli telephoned the police from her home in Dorrego, about 4 miles from the site of the encounter, to report that a strange object was flying around very low overhead. Both of these incidents were unknown to Peccinetti, Villegas, the Military College personnel or the hospital staff until some time afterwards.
By September 7, notices began appearing in the Argentine press to the effect that 'the authorities have issued a communique that the spreading of saucer rumours is an offence penalized by law ... that the penal code contemplates prison terms for people indulging in spreading unwarranted fear ...'
Within days, the witnesses recanted and avoided jail terms.

1968 - On Labor Day,
Dr. Manson Valentine, a paleontologist, geologist and underwater archaeologist from Miami, Florida, began investigating and exploring Paradise Cay, near Bimini. With divers Jacques Mayol, Chip Climo, and guided by a local fisherman, Bonefish Sam, Valentine began diving on a reef west of Bimini and in front of North American Rockwell Point. The first thing they noticed was a regular pattern of enormous stones. Valentine considered that it might be part of the Sacbe - the ceremonial white road of the Maya - as it resembled what he had seen in Yucatan. He followed it for hundreds of yards to the big stones that go under the sand. Many of the stones were found to be of flint-hard micrite. "Scientific" criticism, largely by sceptics who had never been to the site nor examined any of the stones, would suggest that what had been found was nothing more than a natural geological formation comprised of beach rock which had cracked in parallel lines in response to settling or expansion. Beach rock is soft.
Many of the stones were found closely fitted, straight, mutually parallel, and terminating in cornerstones. The long stone avenue did not follow the curving beach rock-line, which followed the shape of the island; rather, it was straight. The long avenue was found to contain enormous flat stones propped up at their corners by pillar stones like the dolmens of the coast of Western Europe. Perfect rectangles, right angles, and rectilinear configurations were recorded. One end of the complex swung into a beautifully curved corner before vanishing under the sand.
Valentine would conjecture that it was part of a ceremonial road, the "Sabe", which runs underwater off the shore of Yucatan and continues for more than a quarter mile before disappearing into sediment. The Sacbe was a raised causeway, so excavation under the stones and alongside could reveal buildings. Edgar Cayce had proposed in his psychic readings that "a portion of the (Atlantean) temple may yet be discovered ... near what is known as Bimini, off the coast of Florida." During 1969, a number of pilots including Bob Brush, Trig Adams, Jim Richardson, and Dimitri Rebikoff would fly over the Bimini Banks looking for other evidence. Sites off Andros, the Berry Islands and Bimini would be reported.

1968 - On September 4,
Goose Bay Air Force Base, Labrador, 2 USAF pilots spotted a spherical craft heading south.
During the 5 minute sighting, the approximately round, silver metallic in colour, soundless object, appearing to be 1/2 the size of a jet, between 33 and 41,000 feet in altitude, crossed the jet vapour trail, stopped, did two 360 degree turns, continued on for 1 or 2 minutes and stopped again. It subsequently disappeared from view at 1/2 the original size.

1968 - On September 14,
Zond 5, a USSR stripped down Soyuz with no orbital module, no backup engine and additional heatshielding on the descent module to cope with the higher re-entry speed, was launched by a SL-12 Proton rocket from Tyuratam. It was the first spacecraft to publicly circle the Moon, return and be recovered. All Zond missions were desperate political maneuvers to advance public perception of Soviet space exploration with an expendable crew member (suicide mission). On most flights the crew member was to record observations and take readings, and, was not expected to survive the mission due to cost-saving production-shortening measures taken. A number of the L1 series failed for a variety of reasons (L1-1, L1-3, L1-4, L1-5, L1-6 [Zond 4], L1-7, L1-8, L1-10 [Zond 6], L1-11, L1-14, L1-15). Those which returned useable information were usually redesignated within the Zond series.
Zond 5 was the first human spacecraft to publicly circumnavigate the Moon and be recovered.
Tortoises, insects, plants, and seed were on board. After passing within 1980 km of the Moon on September 18, photos of the Earth were taken from 90,000 km. A Russian voice broadcasted instrument readings. Later, when listeners from other nations mentioned the incident, the Russians said that a tape recording of simulated readings had been broadcasted. On September 21, Zond 5 became the first sea recovery, from the Indian Ocean. It should be remembered that Soviet spacecraft were almost always totally controlled from the ground control station and that crew seldom had any piloting opportunities.

1968 - During the Fall,
Control Data Corporation was chosen by the U.S.A. Pentagon to develop a mainframe (large) computer system with real-time (fast) processing capabilities for strategic planning in South Vietnam. "Seek Data II" was designed to reduce average time for planning day-to-day operations from two days to two hours. It would be in operation by 1970 and in the February 1970 Air Force and Space Digest would be referred to as "a crucial step toward bona fide pushbutton warfare. ... no previous computer programming package ... has been able to provide real-time control of situations as dynamic and ever-changing as the tactical air operations in a major theater. Issuing orders to hundreds of aircraft in rough forward areas is a most difficult command and control task."
Between the beginning of 1965 and the end of 1968, 950 aircraft were shot down over Vietnam; most were helicopters. The combined cost was about $6 billion in defense contract allocations.

Although computers had been in existence since the 1800s, only military urgency and defense budget spending led to the concentration of effort required to develop ways of increasing the speed of the computer, its relative size, and its programmable options. Commercial applications were almost an afterthought and like civilian use of "space" technology provided practical alternatives for voters at costs which would never have been approved for the civilian benefit. Spacebeings have never contributed to the direct development of human armaments, which, one could argue , might be used against them. Their technology and their future "image pictures" have inspired certain technological developments including atomic and hydrogen bombs, lasers, radar-invisible aircraft, propulsion systems using nuclear, magnetic, and ion sources.

1968 -
Canadian Forces Maritime Command Base, Esquimalt, British Columbia - in late September numerous local residents saw several sightings of brilliant objects meandering over the base. This is Canada's principal maritime defense base on its west coast. Hermanus Voorsluys, an amateur astronomer, spotted a UFO high above the Esquimalt harbour as an orange glow which moved from the south, hovered, turned a fiery red-orange and saw pieces of what looked like waste material fall from it and drift to the ground. Afterward, the glow dulled and then went out as if switched off. This repeated on several evenings and Mr. Voorsluys shared future sightings with a former police officer and neighbour, Reginald Neal. They went to where they expected to find the debris only to hear and feel a low bass-like vibrating sound which seemed to come from all over the area.
On September 29th several photos were taken which revealed a central craft resembling a toy top, surrounded by 4 smaller luminous objects. The 4 objects appeared to drop from the leading one and after a zig-zagging descent, returned to the level of the parent body where they disappeared. It was later determined that the objects had been positioned almost directly over a new high-voltage transmitter at the Base. A commercial aircraft pilot, James R. McLean, gave a perfectly matched description of a sighting he also saw while flying over Victoria one evening.

1968 - During October,
President Lyndon B. Johnson announces a complete halt to the bombing of North Vietnam and the beginning of Peace Talks on the eve of the American Presidential election between Hubert Humphrey and Richard Nixon. In the field of political linguistics, this was an example of deception of the public by the slight-of-perception of the electorate. While the bombing of North Vietnam was decreasing, orders ensured that the bombing of Laos and Cambodia were increasing - at an even faster rate. The authorities could always rationalize that they told the people the truth and that no one asked about other relevant facts - so they were not obliged to offer them.

1968 - During October,
"Apollo 7" the first successful manned USA lunar module flight occurred.
Human knowledge about the universe relative to and including the Earth was so rudimentary at the time that the Moon was theorized as being covered with a layer of dust up to 2000 feet in depth! These intellectualized estimates demonstrated the Earth-centred assumptions which humans were using to investigate a world which had few similarities to the Earth: Space. A few of these differences were as follows: the Moon has
A) a much lower gravitational field than Earth, to attract dust; B) a much thinner atmosphere than Earth, to provide less abrasion; C) very low atmospheric pressure, which lessens wind influence; D) a very low level of climactic activity, which preserves from erosion; E) a very small amount of water presence, which limits water wear; F) no significant corrosive atmospheric chemicals, to fragment rocks; G) partial shelter from solar and cosmic radiations by the Earth; H) much less volcanic activity than Earth, to produce dust/chemicals; I) has a much reduced level of biological activity, to fragment rock; J) ALL of the above factors PRODUCE most of the dust (earth) on Earth; K) a consideration of ANY of the above would have decreased the theoretical calculations considerably.

With the assumptions in mind, NASA engineers designed the lunar lander with the longest legs deemed practical. When a landing was made, the dust cover was found to be less than 2 inches in most locations. Again, rather than considering the above obvious factors, the scientists decided that this must therefore indicate that the Moon was considerably younger in age than previously considered.

The hazard involved with human intellectualized decision-making is that it is usually constructed on insufficient and erroneous information with the degree of projection and fantasy not being acknowledged. Once presented by a source to which authority has been conveyed, most other humans assume that the sanctioned authority cannot be wrong. This produces further errors when the original theory is demonstrated to be inaccurate and further rationalizations are made in an attempt to justify, with added assumptions, the original grossly incorrect assumption-projection-fantasy (theory). Inevitably, such pride and fear-based priorities prove to be grossly inefficient for humans when compared to more reality-based priorities such as food production and housing.

1968 - On November 2,
Dr. X., at his home in the SE of France, was awakened after midnight by his 14 month old son, who was crying. Getting up, he noticed some flashes outside. His son was standing in his crib, pointing towards the window; behind the shutters a bright light was moving. At first he didn't pay any attention to it and gave a bottle to his son, who went back to sleep. Since the lights were continuing, Dr. X. went over to a window and opened the shutters. It was 4.00 A.M.
He clearly saw two large identical disks, perfectly horizontal.
The top of each disk was a silvery white, while the bottom resembled the colour of the setting sun.
On top of each object was a tall vertical antenna. On the side of each disk was a shorter, horizontal antenna.
A white beam was directed toward the ground below. It illuminated familiar features such as bushes and trees, which enabled him to get a precise measurement of the distance of the phenomenon later. He computed their size as a diameter of 200 feet by 50 feet thick at a distance of 700 feet from the house.

The two disks moved slowly, got close to one another, emitted small sparks between their horizontal antennas, and eventually merged into a single object that changed course and came toward him. It stopped suddenly, the vertical white beam underneath illuminating the roof of the neighbour's house. Dr. X. noticed that the underside was divided into 11 sections, swept by a horizontal line that reminded him of the sweep of a television set. He was fascinated by the motion of the line within the red illumination of the object.
The disk then made a movement that brought it to a vertical position, and the white beam caught the doctor squarely on the balcony where he had moved to for a better view earlier. He heard a bang and the object vanished, leaving only a whitish form like cotton candy, which drifted away with the wind. A "bright wire" flew off the centre of the object as it dematerialized, rising up in the sky, where it changed into a point that exploded like fireworks. Everything was dark again. The doctor felt a nervous shock and went inside; the whole incident had taken 10 minutes.

Dr. X. had been born in France in 1930.
On May 18, 1958 he had been wounded by a mine explosion in Algeria, where he was serving in the French Army. He was left with a permanent disability on the right side of his body, which made it painful for him to remain standing for a long time or to support his weight on his right foot. Three days before the sighting, he had been cutting wood with an axe when the axe had slipped and gashed his leg, cutting a vein. A haemorrhage followed and the area became inflamed. It had been treated but was still painful.
When he woke up his wife to tell her about the sighting, he walked excitedly around the room apparently in no pain. Not only had the haematoma disappeared, but all traces of the war wound had vanished as well.

Going back to bed, he fell asleep quickly but started speaking in his sleep.
He spoke until 7.00 A.M., and slept until 2.00 P.M.
On November 8, he was weak and had lost some weight. He experienced some abdominal pain.
On November 17 he noticed a curious striated discolouration around his naval.
The next day the area was fully developed as a red triangle whose sides measured about 6 inches. He had dreamt of a triangular shape associated with the disk. The same shape appeared on the abdomen of the child and it reoccurred in successive years. Dr. X. also had a subsequent spontaneous healing of an open fracture. In that case, he was so embarrassed by the rapid disappearance of the injury, that he left town for a few days so that one of his medical colleagues who had tended the fracture would not ask questions as he saw him walking normally. A dermatologist stated that the patch consisted of dry dead cells.
(see November 1969)

1968 - During the year,
The use of professional imagemakers in USA presidential elections became acceptable and considered mandatory. The victorious Republican candidate, Richard M. Nixon, would state that in the future, he would insist that advertising people be "included in the very highest councils of the candidate." One of J. Walter Thompson's (a large ad agency) vice-presidents, H.R. (Bob) Haldeman, of later Watergate involvement, became Nixon's chief of staff.

1968 - By November,
Geophysicists Lula Mansinha and Douglas Smylie who had been analyzing data at the University of Western Ontario for the period 1957 to 1968, discovered that there were noticeable changes in the path of the wandering north and south Earth geographic poles which corresponded to earthquake incidences. Over the course of a year, the poles may wander about in roughly circular 50-foot circular paths. Inward segments of the wobbling direction appear to represent the normal dampening motion which would be expected. Between each of these arc, occurring at periods of 5 to 20 days BEFORE many of the major Earth tremors, there were noticeable changes in the path of the poles which directed them outward, enlarging the wobble.
Columbia University physicist James Heirtzler, theorizes that the pre-quake variations in the path of the poles may rather be responsible for the quakes and that the wobble may initiate climactic changes, mountain building and even the occasional reversal of the Earth's magnetic field.

1968 -
The Hong Kong Influenza kills 28,000 people in the USA alone.
Flu viruses can infect a wide range of domestic and wild animals at the same time as they infect humans.
Indeed, many of the more fatal varieties would be found to originate in China on farms in which pigs and chickens were so intensively farmed that the pens were filthy and the lifeforms mixed. It was a common practice to keep fish and ducks in ponds fertilized with pig manure. Pigs acquire human flu viruses from the farmers tending them. The pigs can also pick up avian flu from the ducks - which can become fatal to humans. With a variety of viruses becoming harboured in the pigs, new forms may combine or mutate with each other. Such new strains may then be transferred to ducks or geese and transferred to other populations when the birds fly about in their migration periods. Influenza viruses mutate quickly and especially where high density populations are living in environments which compromise their health while humidity and heat simply improve the circumstances for replication and mutation. Seals and whales have died of flu viruses even as horse, pigs, cows, ducks, and chickens have.

1968 -
Stuart R. MacKay's book on "Bio-Medical Telemetry" is published. He states the following:

"(6) ... first studies on human subjects were initiated by having the subject swallow a transmitter, after which patterns of pressure fluctuation associated with muscular activity along the gastrointestinal tract could be followed. Such a transmitter left the subject in a completely comfortable state, since he would be completely unaware of its presence. ... The early transmitters of this type were about the size of a large vitamin capsule, but with the reduction in size of normally available commercial components, it is now quite possible for anyone to construct a considerably smaller and more convenient transmitter of this type. ...
(telemetric devices were designed) to study physiological response ... to trace characteristic changes ... fluctuations within the bladder and the uterus ... effects of drugs ... temperature information ....

(12) The pulses can be directly recorded by a magnetic tape recorder for later analysis .... We named such transmitters as these "endoradiosondes," but they have also been called radio pills, gutniks, transensors, and the like. Extended applications in animal studies are suggested by the fact that the range of transmission is almost as great through fresh water or ice or desert sand as through air. ...
(13) In many cases, ... a transmitter is placed within the body of an animal by a surgical procedure rather than through a normal body opening. ... Several days after the surgery, it is often found that the animal has fully recovered ....

(24) It might be noted that some of the methods suitable for telemetry from aquatic animals are also the most desirable for communicating information from inside metallic vessels such as high-pressure reaction chambers or diving chambers or (submarines) ...
Other transmitters turn themselves on and off periodically in order to conserve battery life while achieving great range. Others, called transponders, return a signal only when activated by a radio signal from the investigator; ...

(25) In many experiments in which the information is not instantly needed and in which it is certain that the subject will again be seen it is sufficient to employ a recorder of any sort whose record can later be run off by the investigator. ...
In some cases ... power can be induced into the animal for purposes of stimulation (or motivation) of various sorts. One may wish to monitor the resulting response by telemetry, in order to modify the next stimulating impulse. In this case the use of telemetry and telestimulation comprises almost a dialogue between the subject and the experimenter.
... It may eventually prove possible to do minor forms of surgery without actually going through a body wall .... We have worked with some success already on a blood-vessel clamp which, in response to external signals, would either shut off or restore the blood supply to a particular organ, .... The possibilities are limited only by the imagination of the investigator.

(107) A foreign substance introduced into the body can cause a variety of reactions.
Materials introduced into the blood stream result in clotting. This can be prevented by introducing the drug heparin into the blood stream, but then a small wound can prove dangerous to the subject. Heparin solution can be contained in a thin silicone-rubber bag from which it will gradually diffuse to maintain a useful level at a particular site, ....
A great advance in rendering surfaces nonthromogenic (non-clotting) came as a result of Gott's finding that plastics could be permanently heparinized.

(108) Foreign bodies placed in contact with tissues also cause reactions.
Silicone rubber is excellent in this respect, with Teflon next. Polypropylene is generally somewhat better than polyethylene. The basic material of polyvinyl chloride is brittle, and plasticizers that are added leach out into the body. Some epoxies can prove toxic to tissues. Nylon degrades in the body, as does polyurethane. In all cases a pure polymer without additive is necessary for reliable results. Orlon loses less strength in the body than does Teflon, and nylon loses approximately 80% of its tensile strength in 3 years. Various enzymes attack various plastics, and breakdown products can appear in the urine of the subject a few weeks after placement.

(327) Many systems will transmit to roughly 20% beyond the visible horizon, whose distance in miles over smooth terrain is given approximately by 1.22 times the square root of the altitude in feet. Also a radio signal moving along near the surface of the ground induces currents in the ground, thus dissipating power and diminishing the signal. Therefore an upwardly directed signal from a given transmitter type will carry to a greater distance.
Placing the receiving equipment in an airplane results in an increased detection range, ....
(328) ... monitoring ... with the help of artificial satellites in the sky.
... Physiological information could be transmitted as well as tracking data, and all parts of the globe would be covered in a cyclic fashion. "

1968 - Early in November,
Richard M. Nixon, Republican, wins the USA Presidential election by a small majority over Hubert H. Humphrey, Democrat. Spiro T. Agnew, governor of Maryland, becomes vice-president until 1973, when he is charged with accepting bribes as a governor.

1968 - On November 10,
Zond 6 (L1-10), a Soviet spacecraft, was launched by a SL-12 Proton rocket from Tyuratam.
It was described by Tass, a national newspaper, as intended "to perfect the automatic functioning of a manned spaceship that will be sent to the Moon." The lunar far side was photographed during the swingby on November 14. Re-entry demonstrated a technique to reduce deceleration loads: the capsule's tilt was used to skip off the atmosphere at a shallow angle before the re-entry proper. Several earlier re-entry vehicles had skipped along the atmosphere because of a too steep inclination. Re-entry vehicles, according to speed and shape, must "cut" into the atmosphere from space rather than try to directly penetrate it.
Zond 6 was recovered on November 17 within the USSR.
It had depressurized during descent, the parachute had been deployed too early and the module was destroyed on landing, with any life inside, although the protected photographic system was recovered from the debris.

1968 - On November 15,
The Condon Committee released a document 1,485 pages long.
The Committee had examined 91 cases, each listed in 5 categories: astronaut sightings, optical and radar sightings, old cases, new cases, and photographic evidence.
Dr. Franklin Roach, astronomer and professor of astrogeophysics, wrote the chapter "Visual Observations Made by U.S. Astronauts". A consultant to NASA, Roach had briefed and debriefed the astronauts on their experiences in space aboard Gemini and Mercury flights. Roach could explain only 7 of the 10 sightings selected to investigate. He wrote "Especially puzzling is the first one on the list, the daytime sighting of an object showing details such as arms (antennas) protruding from a body having a noticeable angular extension. If the NORAD listing of objects near the GT-4 Spacecraft at the time of the sighting is complete ... we shall have to find a rational explanation, or alternately, keep it on our list of unidentifieds."
Dr. William K Hartmann, astronomer and photoanalyst, studied 2 photos taken by a farmer in McMinnville, Oregon, in 1950. Hartmann and his staff not only analyzed the original negatives, but found and interviewed the farmer. Hartmann concluded: " ... all factors investigated ... appear to be consistent with the assertion that an extraordinary flying object, silvery, metallic, disk-shaped, tens of meters in diameter, and evidently artificial, flew within sight of 2 witnesses. ... there are some physical factors such as the photometric measures of the original negatives which argue against a fabrication."

Many of the case reports contained conclusions like this:
"If the report is accurate [it was made by 6 Air Force officers and confirmed by ground and airborne radar] it describes an unusual, intriguing, and puzzling phenomenon, which, in the absence of additional information, must be listed as unidentified." And: "In conclusion, although conventional or natural explanations certainly cannot be ruled out, the probability of such seems low in this case and the probability that at least one genuine UFO was involved appears to be fairly high."

Condon, who investigated few of the cases and talked rarely with his staff about the research, wrote the conclusion for the report:
"No direct evidence whatever of a convincing nature now exits for the claim that any UFOs represent spacecraft visiting Earth from another civilization ... nothing has come from the study of UFOs in the last 20 years that has added to scientific knowledge. ... Careful consideration of the record as it is available to us leads us to conclude that further extensive study of UFOs probably cannot be justified in the expectation that science will be advanced thereby."

It was as if Condon had not read the report of his committee.
Even so an 11-member panel from the National Academy of Sciences reviewed the report and supported Condon's conclusions.

Major Donald Keyhoe stated in a press conference on January 11, 1969, that the committee had examined only 50 cases from 1947 to 1967, and those were hardly typical of the "reliable, unexplained" reports. NICAP had 10- to 15,000 such cases in its files.
Dr. Allen Hynek wrote in his review that he would never have wasted his time on nearly 2/3rds of the cases studied and that committee members sometimes stretched so far to explain a sighting they came up with solutions like this: "This unusual sighting should therefore be assigned to the category of some almost certainly natural phenomenon which is so rare that it apparently has never been reported before or since."

1968 -
The ESSA-7 Satellite transmits an image of the Earth's north polar region on 23rd of November showing a circumpolar opening.
Officials at NASA explain that the cause is a malfunction of the image scanning process.
Later, this leads to the discovery of the Van Allen radiation belt, the role of ozone depletion, extensive research in the Antarctic, and theories that some UFO's enter the Earth's atmosphere through these polar "openings".

1968 - On December 8,
"Schooner", a nuclear bomb crater shot of 35 kilotons, almost 3 times the Hiroshima blast, was exploded from 200 feet under ground, at Yucca Flats, Utah. It left a meteorite-type crater 200 feet deep and 725 feet across. It threw nearly 2 million cubic meters of rock, dirt, and debris into the air. The radioactive cloud was 1000 feet thick. There was no news or warnings of the event as the cloud deposited fallout over Nevada, Mississippi, Ontario and Quebec. While officials spoke about "only a minor reading near the test site", the U.S. State Department was having to discuss the unusual rise of radiation over Ottawa and Montreal with Canadian officials. A Utah research team detected the highest levels of fallout in six years.

1968 - On December 9,
In Lima, Peru, a customs official reported that he had seen a UFO from the terrace of his house and that a purple beam had "hit" him in the face. He was astonished to discover that he no longer needed his eyeglasses, which corrected for myopia, and that his rheumatism was gone. It was computed that the object may have been at a distance of 1-1/2 miles. He experienced a "paralysing fear" that placed him in a state close to ecstasy for two or three minutes.

1968 - On December 21,
Apollo 8 with crew Borman-Lovell-Anders sight disc-shaped UFO's as they circle the moon.
Also picked up unidentifiable language on space-frequency radio.

1968 - On December 24,
Apollo 8 transmitted live pictures of the surface of the moon.
Astronauts Borman, Lovell, and Anders were on board.
After emerging from behind the moon and regaining radio contact, the astronauts reported UFOs had followed next to the spacecraft. This occurred on all Apollo flights. Mission Control ordered absolute silence of same in each situation. Colour lunar photographs from the hidden side of the moon were taken. Both browns and greens were much in evidence in these "winter" photos. Fred Steckling in his analysis of the pictures would assert in his 1981 book that the coloration and "clouds" proved the existence of both water and plants on the moon.
Photos in the Tsiolkowsky Crater suggested the existence of large and smaller lakes.
Astronaut Aldrin stated: "When I looked at Tsiolkowsky Crater, it reminded me of a mountain lake with a quiet surface and a small island in the middle." Televised, the astronauts read from the Book of Genesis. All Apollo landing craft hatches were opened when the inside cabin pressure reached 2-1/2 pounds, that is, 1/6 the gravity/barometric pressure of the Earth. Because the lunar atmosphere contains very little ozone, the sky appears black in colour.

T. Galen Hieronymus and his wife Irene (see 1946) decided to use their radionics "eloptic" energy detector to check the ongoing conditions of the 3 astronauts during their flight. Using photographs of each of the astronauts, placed individually into their machine, they were able to track all physiological functions of the men while determining that the transmitted energy could neither be shielded by the metal shell of the space capsule nor affected by the great distance from Earth to the far side of the Moon. They were able to measure the influence of high "G" stress on each during takeoff and re-entry as well as the effects of living in weightlessness - zero gravity - environment for an extended period of time.
When the capsule was on the far side of the Moon, "relative to the Sun", radio signals were easily sent to and received from Earth, whereas Hieronymus' analyzer could pick up nothing. When the capsule was on the far side of the Moon "relative to the Earth", no radio or other telemetered signals could be transmitted back to the Houston, Texas base. Hieronymus' instrument continued to be able to monitor the astronauts during the same period. Sunlight rays seemed somehow to relate to the generation of or detection of the "eloptic energy".

1968 - Toward the end of the decade,
A number of features were noted as significant to North American society:
- Instant Breakfast became a pouch of powder start to the day; - The Topless Bathing Suit is designed by Rudi Gernreich, for publicity; - The cassette tape recorder became portable and available to all; - The miniskirt remained in style; - Stainless steel razor blades became available for men; - Panty hose that stayed up without garters was new for women; - Electric hair curlers shortened women's grooming times; - The Barbie doll was introduced by Mattel near the beginning of the decade; - The go-go girl, usually dancing in a cage, became fashionable in bars; - Panaceas included Scientology; transcendental meditation; nude encounter; LSD; communal living; regression therapy; organic farming; sensitivity training; behaviourist psychology; T-groups; - "News management" becomes coined by Arthur Sylvester for political lying; - The Credibility Gap was used to describe the sum result of political lies; - Starvation would kill 36.5 million people during the decade; - in the Sudan war, almost unknown, 500,000 would be estimated killed.

Few of the above indicate ANY movement towards a more spiritual lifestyle.

1968 - Near the end of the year,
Ronald David (R.D.) Laing would publish his book, "The Politics of Family".
In it he would argue that despite the best of intentions, or even, paradoxically, because of them, the mother and father of a newborn child seem fated to destroy his individual potential, his very being, as they inadvertently retrace the errors of their own parents and their parents before them. When the child reaches school, the teacher quickly smothers whatever innate curiosity and imagination remain. "By the time the new human being is 15 or so, we are left with a being like ourselves, a half-crazed creature more or less adjusted to a mad world. This is normality."
The "dehumanizing process" masquerades as love.
"If you love me," the mother scolds the errant child, "you will do exactly as I say."
"If you value my affection," one friend tells another, "you will do everything in your power to please me."
As a stratagem of human behaviour, "the tactic of enforced debt," ... carry with them a terrifying potential.

Under the banner of mutual loyalty and concern, Laing says, men become nonthinking tools of the group. All those who belong to it are considered We, and merit its protection and privileges; those who stand outside the chosen circle are labeled Them and deemed the enemy - ..." At its extreme, Laing warns apocalyptically, the "demonic group mysticism" of We-Them can evolve into a "brotherhood unto death," as in Nazi Germany.
"Induce people all to want the same thing, hate the same thing, feel the same threat, then their behaviour is already captive. You have acquired your consumers or your canon-fodder ... (with) its cataclysmic credo "to remain true, one for all and all for one, as we plunge in brotherhood to our destruction. ... If the human race survives future men, I suspect, will look back on our enlightened epoch as a veritable Age of Darkness."

Laing describes the basic heritage of North Americans and many Latin Americans and Western Europeans. The foundation is authoritarianism, born in times of human strife when discussion and explanation were considered luxuries expendable for the sake of survival. The strife had been brought on by overpopulation, overconcentration of humanity; by material want leading to material greed; and by hatred, vengeance and envy leading to war.
An imbalance is hormonal/metabolic composition had provided humanity with desires, the result of which were ultimately destructive because humanity refused to take responsibility and control for them. The hypocracy of religious degradation attached to pleasure with a social esteem raiser of family productivity - in both numbers of babies born and in material wealth produced has been a consistent weakness of humanity. In more recent times, Alfred Korzybski had fully outlined the changes in the early 1930's which human leaders could have adopted to enable the formation of a more spiritual, more balanced, more peaceful worldwide human existence. Relationships like those described by Laing were later shown to be the core of many destructive human relationships.

1968 - Beginning from the end of the year,
Naked Reserves became possible for American Federal Reserve Banks.
Previously, Fed banks had to keep reserves in gold certificates equal to 25% of Federal Reserve notes issued.
From 1968, they were free of any reserve requirements against deposits or Federal Reserve Notes issued since 1968.
This intentional weakening of the banking system indicates that the amount of capitalization available for development programs had become progressively small and was aggravating the provision of loans for such purposes. In addition, the amount of gold bullion in the market for acquisition into the international banking system reserves was proving to be inadequate. Rather than cope with the problem by restricting spending or allowing gold to be domestically traded, or increasing the production of gold - the easy human option of avoiding the problem and increasing one's risk was taken.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1971 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
Once Upon A Time In the West; The Wild Bunch; Winning; The Brain; Bob and Carol and Ted and Alice; Alice's Restaurant; Take the Money and Run; Thank You All Very Much; Catch-22; True Grit; The Midnight Cowboy; Isadora; Popi; Butch Cassidy and the Sundance Kid; Along Came A Spider; Three; The Best House In London; Guns of the Magnificent Seven; The Wild Bunch; Goodbye, Mr. Chips; Captain Nemo and the Underwater City; Island of Despair; The Adding Machine; The Prime of Miss Jean Brodie; The Milky Way; Putney Swope; The Love Bug; On Her Majesty's Service; Once Upon A Time in the West; Hello Dolly!; Hamlet

Television:
Adam-12; Judd for the Defense; Hawaii Five-0; The Mod Squad; Smothers Brothers Comedy Hour; Sesame Street.
Popular Songs:
Sugar, Sugar; Aquarius/Let the Sunshine In; Honky Tonk Woman; Everyday People; Crimson and Clover; By the Time I Get to Phoenix; In the year 2525; Leaving On A Jet Plane; Someday We'll Be Together; Crystal Blue Persuasion; Hair; Spinning Wheel; I'm Gonna Make You Love Me; A Boy Named Sue; Proud Mary; Green River; Running Bear; Galveston; Johnny Be Good; Singing My Song; Only the Lonely; Games People Play.
General News :
Consumer Price Index: 109.8 Montreal, Canada became the scene of 30 bombings and 3 major riots. R.C.M.P. sled dogs made their last patrol and were exchanged for snowmobiles. Crime statistics for Canada rose through the '60s: 3,339/100,000 in 1962 to 4,530/100,000 in 1967. Fashions went to maxi coats over mini dresses, bodystockings, heavy zippers.

1969 - By this year,
Chlamydial Genital and Neonatal Infections have become Epidemic, though remain virtually unnoticed and of minor concern to the medical industry. Chronic illness results include increasing death rates from heart disease, apparent endemic symptoms of constipation, increasing rates of prostatitis, apparent endemic symtoms of headache and increasing presence of arthritic symptoms. Researchers are spending great sums of money trying to find a cause by rationalizing back from the symptom rather than closely examining the underlying physical realities: cellular fragmentation and tissue scarring. Rather than spend monies to develop technology which can identify smaller lifeforms, such as the "suspected" bacterial source of chlamydial infections - billions are being spent on the production and development of military and lifeform destructive technology. Factors which have contributed to a vast increase in the prevalence of chlamydial infections over the past 10 years include these:
1. Increasing acceptability of divorce over destructive marriages; 2. Increasing rebellion against a hypocritical status quo; 3. Increasing use of hallucinatory drugs as an extension of alcohol; 4. Increasing sexual activity in accord to increasing desire; 5. Billions of dollars spent to promote alcohol, cigarettes - drugs; 6. Billions of dollars spent promoting everything by allusion to sex; 7. Increasing disassociation of the individual from true reality. In turn, these factors have encouraged a modification of popular behaviours, some of which include the following: A. Increasing numbers of casual and semi-permanent sexual partners; B. Increasing preoccupation with oral sexual behaviours; C. Increasing frequency of sexual intercourse and sexual excitation; D. Decreasing levels of fluid - cellular barrier between partners; E. Increasing frequency and acceptability of homosexual relationships.

Each behaviour has substantially increased the communicability of chlamydial parasites to new hosts as well as to former hosts. Promiscuity amongst teenager and young adults dramatically increased during this period as a response to the sensual abandonment of their parents and the inhibition reducing influence of both common legal drugs (alcoholic beverages) and commom illegal drugs (both of which promoted co-dependent abusive behaviours).
For a wide variety of reasons, marital relationships received little attention or benefit from the cultural leaders and the resulting dearth of constructive coping skills continued to promote a liberalization of divorce laws and a repetitiveness of divorce. Whereas 2 decades earlier, one divorce would have been noteworthy for an individual, 2 or 3 are now becoming more common and acceptable. The overall result is that more infected persons are coming into contact with more yet-to-be infected persons.

While oral sexual behaviour has been observed with all mammalian animals, human oralagenital practices are as ancient as human artforms have been available to depict it. While somewhat sophisticated practices and an extensive awareness were present in early Chinese, Indian, Egyptian, Polynesian, and South American cultures, much of such knowledge had been lost to the majority of at least European and North American modern heritage until recent preoccupations. In reaction to abject ignorance and in the face of obvious sophistication as mirrored in recently published Indian, Arab, and French translations - oragenital behaviour became an imperfect infatuation. Purveyors of erotic literature and movies quickly responded to this interest with a widely prevalent market in visually explicit books, movies, tapes, pictures, and live demonstrations.
Performed between two committed adults as an adjunct to other sensual and sexual expressiveness, such behaviours can be both stimulating and safe. The difficulty arising here is that when participants infected with chlamydial parasites exchange oragenital stimulation with one another an uninfected person can become infected. This is also true of a number of other parasitic infections which are also increasing in prevalence at this time, including candidaiasis. The acceptability and increasing number of homosexual and bisexual adults serves as additional populations for parasitic transfer.

With a media obsession with the promotion of the sexual experience as the central and greatest experience which any human individual can be exposed to, it is little wonder that an chronic level of sexual anxiety and excitation (readiness) and an expectation of performance has led to more regular and more routine sexual intercourse and oragenital contact. With the GRAY bioengineering accidental transfer of viruses to humans, a growing population of high libido individuals also serves to increase average sexual experience frequency.
In addition, increasing trauma-induced energy block formation in humans with a culturally low (and getting lower) level of constructive coping skills - is leading to the generation of a population of individuals who feel obsessed with sexual expression as a means of trying to satisfy feelings of abandonnment, sexual confusion (from childhood sexual abuse), toxic shame, and insecurity. This can also produce an apparent high libido, that is, a high feeling of need for sexual involvement. High libidos can meet with opposition.

Customarily, in the recent past, any level of sexual desire would have been tempered by the inadequate or frustrating means of birth control, or by the knowledge of imminent parenthood and responsibility, or, an increase in same. With the introduction and perfection and promotion of the birth control pill these anxieties were largely removed. Unfortunately, in a number of cases, women on birth control pills (which alter the hormone balance in the female) also experienced a decrease in sexual libido. While making a higher sexual frequency more acceptable to males, birth control pills also encouraged, for some, a conflict in what may have been sexual libido similarity earlier. Lack of constructive coping skills and an unsympathetic authoritarian medical industry and religious institutions frequently are leading to further increases in divorce, and change of partners.
But this is only half of the story for increasingly with the use of birth control pills there is no longer a requirement for barrier control. That is, there is a freedom not to use spermicidal cremes, condoms, shields, and the like to segregate the seminal flow from the vagina. This enables direct and "natural" contact between the male and female reproductive organs, and, the parasites and bacteria which may be carried on their surface or may be exuded in genital fluids. Again, this transfer of infection only occurs when either partner is infected. The difficulty now is that few of those infected are aware of it, the medical industry are lax in diagnosing and effectively treating it, the pharmaceutical practice of misuse of antibiotics is increasing the number of antibiotic-resistant strains, and, there is no easily available and dependable method of testing individuals.

The increasing acceptability of and increase in male and female homosexual relationships add to all of the above. A majority of male homosexuals (not all) at this time tend to lead an object-centred sexual relationship in which personal orgasmic satisfaction is the focus. Multiple ongoing intimate relationships are not uncommon - vastly encouraging the prospect of one infected person contaminating many. Since the chance of pregnancy is not a possibility for either gender of homosexuality, there is no apparent requirement for penile, vaginal, or anal tissue protection. This again increases the risk of transfer of infection. Oragenital behaviours are highlighted in many homosexual relationships as the heterosexual penile-vaginal union is obviously no longer an option. Both anal intercourse and oragenital behaviours become vectors for chlamydial parasitic transfer whether they are engaged in by heterosexuals, bisexuals, or homosexuals - when tissue protection from genital fluids and secretions is not present.
For a reconsideration of the symptoms and signs of chlamydial infections and the potential for devastation from them, refer back to January, 1949.

1969 - By this year,
Panagiotis Takis (Taki) Veliotis, son of a Greek shipowner, who had gone to Canada in 1953, was managing "Davie Shipbuilding", a company owned by Canada Steamship Lines, a subsidiary of the huge "Power Corp. of Canada". He had started as an engineer and draughtsman and risen quickly through the ranks, impressing management with his intellect, his energy and his physical appearance. At 6 feet 4 inches in height, he towered over most of his subordinates. Union leaders liked him because he brought them work. He was remembered as having enormous capabilities. Others referred to him as ruthless, ambitious, charming and sometimes generous.

1969 - During the year,
Andrew Lewis isolates a laboratory created, hybrid cancer virus, the product of natural recombination between SV40 and adenovirus 2, a member of a common, usually harmless family of viruses found in human beings. Lewis reported on his find at Cold Spring Harbor later in the year, realizing that the hybrid virus presented possible hazards of unknown consequences: nobody had any idea of its virulence, its ability to infect, or even if it could be harmful to other organisms.
When he expressed reservations as to who should have access to it and how the responsibility could be shared with a high potential of risk -- he was acosted by fellow scientists, including James Watson, the Nobel Laureate, and accused of hoarding for personal gain ... exactly the motivations of some of the critics. Giving way to such accusations, Lewis eventually distributed the virus to a number of labs with a "Memorandum of Understanding and Agreement" in which the recipients agreed to comply with certain safety precautions. Later, he found that several laboratories had failed to follow either the safeguards or the restriction in distribution of the virus. Had the virus proven to have a high degree of virulence, a worldwide epidemic could have been started. With such a lack of integrity and professionalism in the status competitive field of science, how many such "mistakes" will humanity survive?

1969 - On January 15,
Sojus 5 and Sojus 4, USSR orbiting space capsules, were the site of a publicly announced transfer of cosmonauts from one unit to the other.

1969 - On January 17th,
An employee of NASA (National Aeronautical Space Agency), who asked to remain anonymous for employment reasons, was awakened in the night by an extremely loud hum. The sound fluctuated from very loud to a low buzzing, then back to loud. He got up, went over to the window, and looked towards the sound but saw nothing. After a few seconds, a lighted object appeared in the southeast. As he watched it approach, he noticed that the bottom seemed to be elliptically shaped with blunt ends. It was about 100 feet above the ground, about 30 feet wide, and over 100 feet long. It moved slowly and came within 100 feet of him. Around the bottom of the object, he could see a series of windows that were all brightly lit except for one at the rear which blinked. The windows were rectangular and appeared translucent. They would allow the light out, but he couldn't see in. Each seemed to be surrounded by a glow or haze. The center of the craft was solid, metallic, and reflected some of the light. As the object continued to drift, it rocked gently, with little change in altitude. It made a very gentle turn, tilting slightly and moving to the west. A few seconds later, the craft faded from sight.
He felt a "tingling of his nerves" as the UFO flew by, and he experienced unusual mental impressions and felt a hypnotic relaxation pass over him that calmed his fear. When the UFO disappeared, his wife asked him what he had seen. Picking up the phone, he could still hear the hum and he confirmed with the operator that she could also hear it. He called Langley Field and was routed to the Project Bluebook officer who seemed unimpressed. The same reaction came from his car pool. Some of his friends at work were more interested leading to an interview with a local newspaper. He set out to find other witnesses when he couldn't locate the telephone operator and found several.
The Air Force did not start its investigation for 2 months.
Civilian airport flight plans were only kept for 15 days locally, so they were 45 days late.
Officials tried to convince him that he had seen a helicopter, the Goodyear blimp, or an aircraft taking night pictures. He remained firm in his convictions and eventually they concluded the case "unidentified".

1969 - In the February issue of "Popular Science",
Dr. Wernher Von Braun, Director of NASA's George C. Marshall Space Flight Center, Huntsville, Alabama, U.S.A., authored an article "Lighter Than Aluminum ... Stronger Than Steel!" In it he described how "fiber-reinforced composite materials", that is, high-strength fibers of one substance embedded in a matrix of a different substance, like fiberglass, were providing "breathtaking possibilities". Boron and graphite composites were the first to be developed. By making wings and fuselage parts of the new materials, the structural weight of an aircraft could be reduced by 1/3.
Northrop engineers had calculated that saving just 15% would enable a high-performance military jet to fly 10% further or carry 30% more ordnance on the same amount of fuel. Its takeoff would be 15% shorter; its rate of climb, 10% faster. Other likely uses included space vehicles, solid-propellant rocket cases, jet turbine blades, and nuclear power plants. "Whisker"-like fibers of the materials prove to have the least imperfections and to be the strongest. Current substances used for this use include sapphire (alumina), silver, boron, beryllium oxide, nickel, aluminum, silicon oxide, and silicon carbide (trade named Carborundum). Strengths up to 63,000 p.s.i., compared to 17,000 for pure silver were noted. This is counted as the greatest advancement in strength-to-weight ratio metallurgy since the bronze age.
Curiously, the texture of these materials is suggestive of that described for some of the UFO craft retrieved in the late 1940s and hidden from the public by the U.S. government since.

1969 - During February 11-12,
Dr. Paul MacLean, a neurophysiological researcher, gave a lecture entitled "A Triune Concept of the Brain and Behaviour", at Queen's University, Kingston, Ontario, Canada, as part of the Hinks Memorial Lectures. He divided his lecture into 3 parts:
1. Man's Reptilian and Limbic Inheritance; 2. Man's Limbic Brain and the Psychoses; 3. New Trends in Man's Evolution.

In his introduction, MacLean stated that
"In its evolution the human brain expands along the lines of three prototypes for which I have used the terms reptilian, paleomammalian, and neomammalian. If the three cerebrotypes are pictured as intermeshing and functioning together as a triune unit, it makes evident that they cannot be completely autonomous but does not deny their capacity for operating somewhat independently. Moreover, the word triune has the advantage of implying that the 'whole' is greater than the sum of its parts, because the interchange of information among the 3 brain types means that each derives a greater amount of information than if it were operating alone."

In the first part, MacLean expressed his concerns regarding
"... man's decisions as to how he will utilize his scientific knowledge and plot his future course are essentially a matter of politics. This emphasizes the urgency for a simultaneous effort on the part of all nations to work for world-wide enlightenment. I am referring now to the enlightenment of self-knowledge, and not to the much advertised kind of enlightenment of our western bull-dozer culture. It has been an abiding faith of psychiatry that self-knowledge, more than anything else, holds the promise of reducing those inner tensions of man that otherwise have the potentiality of exploding with catastrophic consequences. ....
It is my own faith, based on the study of the brain, that a wide dissemination of available knowledge about basic brain mechanisms and behaviour would do much to help man live in greater contentment with himself and society."

He went on in the first part to note :

"Man puts so much emphasis on himself as a unique creature possessing a spoken and written language that, like the rich man denying his poor relatives, he is loath to acknowledge his animal ancestry. ... On the basis of behavioural observations of ethnologists, there are indications that the reptilian (part of the human) brain programmes stereotyped behaviours according to the instructions based on ancestral learning and ancestral memories. ... selecting homesites, establishing territory, engaging in various types of display, hunting, homing, mating, breeding, imprinting, forming social hierarchies, and selecting leaders.
The reptilian brain seems to be hidebound by precedent.
Behaviourally, this is illustrated by the reptile's tendency to follow roundabout, but proven, pathways, or operating according to some rigid schedule. ... repetition compulsions ... a recognized tendency .. to return to a recognized frame of reference ... imprinting ... there are certain critical times in the brain's development when it is particularly receptive to forming attachments to things in the environment. ... neurosis bound ... lacking the adequate neural machinery for learning to cope with new situations. ...
Limbic (part) ... is found as a common denominator of the mammalian brain ... olfactory function ... (and) elaborating behaviour with respect to ... self-preservation and the preservation of the species. ... elemental feelings of hunger, thirst, nausea, suffocation, choking, racing heart, or the urge to defecate and urinate, which may be conjoined with a variety of intense emotional feelings such as terror, fear, anger, sadness, foreboding, strangeness, and paranoid feelings. ... expressive and feeling states that are conducive to sociability and (courtship). ... The infantile connection between fighting and sexual excitement ... also help to illuminate oralgenital behaviour. ...

... the neocortex receives its information predominantly from the external environment through signals conducted from the eyes, ears, and somatic receptors ... is externally oriented ... seems to thrive on change, presumably because nature designed it to come up with new ideas and new solutions. ...
Perhaps one of the things we need to do is to spend more time cultivating those simple domestic pleasures ... creating ... with our own hands .... Most urgent at the present time is the need to devise some way of controlling our soaring population and thereby remove pressures that promote man's reptilian intolerance and reptilian struggle for territory. There is now an accumulation of evidence with respect to several species that aggressiveness increases with increasing density of population ... often leading to mortal combat."

In the second part, MacLean observes that :
"... the limbic cortex has a greater turnover of protein than the neocortex. ... testosterone has an affinity for several limbic structures, ... stressful situations could lead to a functional disturbance resulting in persistent paranoid or other abnormal feeling states, with attendant delusional thinking. ... parts of the limbic brain contain relatively large amounts of serotonin and noradrenaline, ...."

In the third part, MacLean concludes that :
"Altruism depends not only on feeling one's way into another person in the sense of empathy.
It also involves the capacity to see with feeling into another person's situation.
To accomplish this with vision - our coldest, most objective, and analytic of senses - nature has had to accomplish a neurological "tour de force".
A further consideration of altruism shows that the two questions of sexual and visual representation are closely related. In its highest expression altruism requires not only insight, but also foresight, in planning for the welfare and the preservation of the species. Psychologically, this means the libido in its early Freudian sense must be translated into unselfish concern ....

Our sense of individuality, therefore, as well as our personal identification with happenings in the outside world, would seem to depend on a bond of internal and external experience. ... memory likewise depends on a combination of internal and external experience. ...
Perhaps the reason that so relatively little attention has been given to internal experience in mechanisms of learning and memory, is that we are so often unaware of the subtle respiratory, cardiovascular, alimentary, and other changes that take place during our preoccupation with happenings in the external world."

The "awareness" presented would largely remain lost to the masses.
Politically and socially there was no money to be paid in raising the awareness of humans - better to keep them stupid, dependent and receptive to manipulation.

1969 - On February 24,
Mariner 6, a 413 kg USA planetary satellite, was launched by an Atlas Centaur rocket from Cape Canaveral.
On March 27, Mariner 7, a twin, was similarly launched. Both were targeted on the planet Mars.

Mariner 6 would travel 387.8 million km in 156 days to arrive July 31.
During the 68 minutes of nearest approach, 24 near encounter pictures were taken.
M6 concentrated on the equatorial region and established that Nix Olypica (later renamed Olympus Mons) was a 24-km high volcano with a 64-km wide caldera. It was previously thought to be a crater. Mars appeared to be heavily cratered and had a thin atmosphere of at least 98% carbon dioxide. A wide angle image from 3600 km revealed lunar-like features with craters ranging from 128 km to 5 km in diameter, some fresh and some barely discernible. In other words, humans should be thankful for the heavier atmosphere and Van Allen belts which the Earth has and the protection they afford from some passing space debris.

Mariner 7 would travel 316.9 million km in 130 days to arrive August 5.
The battery on M7 ruptured enroute and sprayed its electrolyte into space.
It continued on the power of its solar panels. After loss of signal, commands from the Earth station were successful in switching antennas and restoring partial communications. During its 74 minutes of nearest approach, 33 near encounter pictures were taken. M7 concentrated on the southern hemisphere. It confirmed that the ice cap was primarily solid carbon dioxide with some water ice.
Cost of the dual mission was $148 million; that is, $74 million each on an economy trip in which administration and ground control were shared. Was it worth the redirection of this capital from more humanitarian, educational and spiritual building activities carried out on the Earth, or, was this a constructive way in which humans could divert $148 million from an otherwise inevitable armaments allocation?

1969 - On the evening of March 4th,
R.C.M.P. Constable R.V.M., noticed from his post at the Privy Council door on Parliament Hill, in Ottawa, Ontario, a round object passed quickly through the sky to hover over Hull (across the river). Six other R.C.M.P. officers also saw it. Thirty minutes later, R.C.M.P. Constable R.J.S. saw 2 UFO's hovering above Sussex Drive, between the prime minister's residence and Government House, the governor-general's residence. They appeared to be bright flashing red lights. Two other officers saw them as one or only saw one of them.

1969 - On March 7,
Mrs. William Marshall, her husband, daughter, mother and a friend of the daughter, near Duncan, British Columbia, spotted a bright red light which became an observable UFO for 40 minutes. It was round in shape and rotating, and had 4 lights, one each of green, red, yellow and white. It appeared to be looking for something as it hovered, sped up, and slowed down almost to a standstill. It hovered over the Georgia Thermal Generating Station, a large B.C. Hydro station, for 15 minutes. Before leaving, the craft moved over the location of the witnesses and hovered there for several minutes before moving off in the direction of Vancouver, where other sightings were reported that evening.

1969 - During March,
The Shah of Iran met with Henry Kissinger in Washington, while in the USA to attend the funeral of President Eisenhower. He volunteered to Kissinger to help the USA establish a petroleum stockpile to protect against an interruption of oil supplies in a major war. To this end he would sell the USA 1 million barrels of oil a day for 10 years at the amazing bargain price of $1.00 a barrel. The USA could store it in their salt domes. The Shah wanted to sell the oil so that he could expand and update his armaments.
Richard Nixon had recently come to office and it was a point in the world economy when he treated cheap oil as natural and excess population capacity as the main economic problem. At the end of the 60s, the USA imported only 20% of its requirements. By the end of the 70s, the import ratio would be 50% and climbing.

1969 - During the year,
The USA Internal Revenue Service set up special staffing to monitor, investigate and harass "activist" and "leftist" organizations. It came about as a result of the persistent demands for same by President Richard Nixon's administration. The staff compiled dossiers on 8,585 individuals and 2,873 organizations, according to records later brought to the attention of the "Tax Reform Research Group". Some of the organizations included the National Council of Churches, the Urban League, and Americans for Democratic Action. Information unrelated to tax-status was assembled and passed on to other law enforcement agencies.
Several lists of "enemies" were drawn up by White House staff: over 600 names were targeted for thorough taxation review with the suggestion being that something was wrong. Staffers in bureaucracies working under such direction are rewarded for finding anything which discredits the individual or corporation. Sexual, social and drinking habits were sought and noted along with other details. The director, Johnnie M. Walters, and many of his subordinates, hampered the campaign of abuse. Walters eventually resigned after being chastised by White House presidential top aide, John Erhlichman, for his "foot-dragging tactics". Not everyone was devoid of conscience or spiritual values.

1969 -
The "Overseas Private Investment Corporation" (OPIC) is set up as an independent federal agency created by the "Foreign Assistance Act" to insure, guarantee, and finance private investments in developing countries. Private capital investment in such countries was consider speculative by most investors due to the political instability, the poor trading and distribution infrastructure, and the lack of educated or trained workers. A guarantee, or insurance, offered by the USA federal government, would now make the investment as sound as if you had purchased USA treasury bills. Now the larger private investor could have the benefit of high speculation and low risk - an excellent possibility for high profits.
As the OPIC also provided financing for the private investment, it could be used to front CIA, NSA, and other covert political financing, in addition to providing lucrative opportunities for individuals or corporations willing to invest hundreds of millions of dollars for the short term. If I wished to be a covert participant, I could have a company or an associate apply for monies (ie 10 million dollars) for the purpose of lending them to a "developing country".
Then, the applicant would have the loan either insured or guaranteed against default by the borrower. Next, the capital would go to the borrowing country and interest payments would become due. The borrower country was pay the interest on the loan to my associate; my associate would pay the reduced interest fee on the capital submitted on his or her behalf; in the end, I would collect, with my front corporation or individual, a portion of the principal repayment and the difference between the subsidized interest and the interest - until, the project in the country went insolvent. Furthermore, since none or little of my own capital was involved, I could repeat the process continually. Whether I was on the application directly or covertly, I would make money with minimal cost and capital.

1969 - During the spring,
Lim Seng, a Chinese "chiu chao" entrepreneur, already producing heroin in Manila, Philippines, expanded to the manufacturing of the purer grade No. 4 heroin for the USA market. He made large purchases of morphine base from the Golden Triangle countries in Southeast Asia through the Hoi-Sukree partnership in Malaysia and the Lim Chiong syndicate in Bangkok.
By 1971, Lim Seng would be producing more than 100 kilos of No. 4 per month, protected by the government officials and the police of the Marcoses. 90% of his annual production of 1.2 tons, flowed through the USA Clark Air Base and the Manila International Airport to supply 10% of the American market. Late in 1971, Lim Seng ordered $1 million worth of morphine base from the Lim Chiong syndicate and paid to have a Royal Thai Navy gunboat deliver it to Manila, on the pretext of a goodwill tour. The gunboat docked at South Harbour and the morphine was handed over to Lim Seng at his suite in the Manila Hotel. The Philippine government were aware of the transaction and fully sanctioned it, in return for a cut of the profits.

1969 - By April,
"The Madman Theory" of USA President Richard Nixon had been outlined to his chief of staff, H.R. (Bob) Haldeman.
Nixon remembered the tactic used by President Eisenhower in 1953 to end the Korean War, when Nixon had been vice-president. Eisenhower had threatened to use nuclear weapons unless the Soviet Union and China denied further assistance to North Korea. The war had ended shortly afterwards. Nixon now believed that he could repeat the feat.
In the game-playing strategy (deception and threat, sacrifice and surprise) used so often by Nixon, it was necessary for Nixon to appear to be capable of acting as a madman. "I want the North Vietnamese to believe I've reached the point where I might do anything to stop the war. We'll just slip the word to them that, 'for God's sake, you know Nixon is obsessed about Communists. We can't restrain him when he's angry - and he has his hand on the nuclear button' - and Ho Chi Minh himself will be in Paris in two days begging for peace." Nixon's proud intellectualized authoritarian plan had many flaws.

Both the USSR and China now had nuclear weapons and it really could start a nuclear war.
The KGB knew that the American failsafe plan would not allow such a decision to be made by one person. Neither did Nixon have a military background like Eisenhower: there is a huge difference between decisions made according to political theorizing (game-playing) and decisions made according to military strategy (combining history of the opponent's responses, intelligence feedback, practical considerations and a sincere willingness to carry out a threat).
Eisenhower protected his public moral integrity, after-the-fact, by telling his long-time assistant, Sherman Adams, that he had not believed that there was the remotest chance of actually having to carry out the threat; however, a general knows that if you make a threat you are not prepared to carry out and the enemy ignores the threat, and you walk away - you have just demonstrated your weakness to them. They will never listen to your cautions or threats again, and, they may reverse the event by taking out the threat on you. This is an example of hoe human politicians frequently make bad events worse. They believe that the use of the same means which led to their political office will be effective in resolving practical matters: deception; half-lies; boasting; over-dramatization; appearances; manipulation; negotiation by use of threat, bribe, or envy.

1969 - On April 5,
Massive Anti-War Demonstrations in the USA served notice on the establishment that the American people were not being placated any longer by the negotiations in Paris and Nixon's talk of an impending "settlement." New York saw 100,000 march in the rain. There were 50,000 in San Francisco, 30,000 in Chicago, 4,000 in Atlanta, and more in other cities. These provided encouragement to the North Vietnamese and Chinese to resist Nixon's pressure tactics and attempts at manipulation.

1969 - In April,
Dovie Beams, an American actress, had been having an affair with President Ferdinand Marcos for 3 months.
Born in Nashville, briefly married, with one daughter, living in Beverley Hills, and acting in small roles in television soap operas - she was one of two actresses which had been selected to try out for a title role in Marked by Fate , a movie exaggeration of the wartime legend Marcos had created for himself. Beams was to play his wartime sweetheart who had saved his life by taking a Japanese bullet herself. Beams was to replace the Philippine hopeful, Gretchen Cojuangeo, the pretty wife of Ferdinand's millionaire Tarlac Sugar clan friend, Eduardo Cojuangeo. Ferdinand had become infatuated with Gretchen and Imelda had threatened her most strongly to stay away from Ferdinand.
Dovie arrived in Manila for an audition by Ferdinand in December, 1968, and within two days the two were lovers. Dovie got the movie role. He gave her the use of a newly constructed mansion complete with a staff of servants, bodyguards, and a social secretary. He told that he had been impotent and sexually estranged from Imelda for many years as she seemed to be frigid most of the time. After a few weeks of bliss, Ferdinand gave Dovie a trip to Hong Kong to buy jewry, and a holiday in the Bahamas, where he wanted her to deposit some black money. During the trip, Dovie purchased a small tape recorder, which she originally intended to use to record Tagalog and Spanish phrases for use in the movie. However, its use became extended when the tutoring sessions with Ferdinand lapsed into lovemaking, conversations about his business, and his singing a song to her. Dovie had always been straight forward in stating that her goal in life was to make money.

Ferdinand spent as much time with Dovie over a period of 2 years as would be allowed by Imelda's absence on shopping trips or out of town activities. He set up a special financial arrangement for her in one of his secret account banks, invited her over to the Palace when Imelda was away. Dovie began to use her recorder more, and, to steal odd documents from Ferdinand's desk when she was in the Palace overnight. The movie proceeded slowly because Potenciano Ilusorio, one of the project managers, had invested all the money to buy Benguet mining stocks, and the price had temporarily plunged. Ferdinand angrily provided more money and the picture progressed. Dovie, playing Evelyn, the female lead, became a Manila celebrity. To provide her with a "public" residence, a house was made available near the Wack Wack Country Club. Ver looked after security with the intent of keeping all hidden from Imelda.
As time progressed, Ferdinand confided to Dovie that she had saved him from having a nervous breakdown (from lack of sexual and sensual intimacy). He also confided that he had found some of Yamashita's Gold; he carried a poison pill to keep from being tortured if caught by his enemies; he had baited the opposition party to pick a weak candidate as their leader; he would win the upcoming election by any means, including the activity of the Communists as an excuse to declare martial law.

1969 - By the Spring,
George and Marjorie De La Warr realized that the real key to getting plants to flourish was simply asking them to do so and an article was published in his journal, "Mind and Matter", entitled "Blessing Plants to Increase their Growth". He asked readers to produce evidence to support his own experimental results which conflicted with the commonly accepted materialistic atomic theory which implied that chemical fertilization was the only substantial variation applicable to plant health.
One of the most crucial steps in a 15-step procedure outlined in the article was that in which the experimenter was to hold bean seeds in his hands and invoke a blessing, varying according to his faith or denomination, in reverent and purposeful manner. Though warmly received by readers, the article evoked a harsh reply from officials of the Roman Catholic Church, who took umbrage because, as they pointed out, it was inadmissible for anyone below the rank of deacon to perform any act of blessing. To still the waters of protest, the De La Warrs renamed their experiment "Increasing the Rate of Plant Growth by the Mental Projection of an Undefined Energy".
Results were reported by the Reverend Franklin Loehr, Dr. Robert N. Miller, and others.

1969 - On April 23,
Near Hammond, Ontario, outside Ottawa, 3 witnesses observe a pinkish saucer-shaped craft, estimated to be 30 feet in diameter hovering above the high tension transmission wires running parallel. The craft then was seen to "follow along the wires, rising and falling with them, seeming to draw power from them".

1969 - During 1969,
The University of Colorado became the site of a U.S. government sponsored "scientific analysis" of the UFO subject: the Condon Committee. Dr. Edward Condon, a high security physicist who had been prominent in the Manhattan Project, was chosen to head the team. Within days he was joking publicly about how the project was a waste of time. Radar expert Gordon Thayer, a participant in the study stated in his report he sought to show that the sightings over Washington and other locals were mirages. Other specialists, including Dr. James McDonald, an atmospheric physicist at Arizona University, and a specialist in optics, commented on the impossibility of such conclusions. Retracting his "mirage" proposal, Thayer stated that "This unusual sighting should therefore be assigned to the category of some almost certainly natural phenomenon, which is so rare that it apparently has never been reported before or since." Despite the 1,000 page survey, A Scientific Study of UFOs , finding one-third of its cases unexplained, the official conclusion of the committee was to advise the U.S. government to forget about the subject.
Edward U. Condon had been at the Westinghouse Research Laboratories in the 1940s; had been a vice-president of Westinghouse; had been a member of the board for Corning Glass; had been a director of the National Bureau of Standards. In 1943 he had been made an administrative assistant to Oppenheimer at Los Alamos by General Groves who mistakenly assumed that Condon should be experienced at administration because of his previous positions. After about 6 weeks Condon resigned. He was anxious about the security restraints which Groves had instituted between the laboratories and feared that he would unintentionally broach security in his practise and belief that all scientists should be friends and willingly share information. In addition, complaints, at that time, from the War Manpower Commission, the U.S. Employment Service, the American Federation of Labour and the local construction companies at Los Alamos were evidence of inadequate negotiating, supervising and delegating skills. An excellent technician and laboratory researcher does not require these skills.

Condon was encouraged by Leona Marshall Libby, who knew him from the Manhattan Project, to take the Committee position feeling that a forward investigatory exploration of UFO phenomenon by the use of satellites able to detect vapour and ion trails of high flying and fast moving objects could have answered some questions about UFOs and encouraged the development and use of technology capable of practical benefits as in weather research. Condon took the position but under a backward looking exploration in which previous reports were examined, usually with the intent of discrediting them. He fired a professor from the University of Arizona for incompetence because the man disagreed with his narrow opinions and intents. Demonstrating his own incompetence in this administrative area, the University settled out of court the lawsuit advanced by the fired professor.
Condon's actions and directions support the suggestions that he was approached by government intelligence and told, that for matters of national security, he would use the committee to ridicule and disprove the topic. Condon did not like the restraint that the military-political authorities could place on scientists and the public but he was forced to respect the result of the Manhattan Project which culturally was assumed to have safeguarded the American way of life and saved millions of lives with the end of World War II.

1969 -
On Parliament Hill, Ottawa, Ontario, three R.C.M.P. constables and 3 young tourists saw a luminous craft hovering over the Ottawa River behind the Parliament Buildings. It emitted a dazzling array of lights, changing from red to green to red to white. Minutes before, all the lights on Parliament Hill - East, West, and Centre blocks - went out. Ontario Hydro could not ascertain the cause. The craft continued in a ping-pong ball fashion until it reached a point across the river from the Prime Minister's residence, where it hovered for 5 minutes with its lights blinking off and on. Ten minutes later, it left the area and throughout no discernable shape could be determined. Twenty minutes later, 2 craft were seen in another direction over the RCAF base at Uplands Airport where they floated around for 15 minutes before leaving. Neither the sightings nor the blackout received any noticeable media attention and no jet interceptors were scrambled to investigate.

1969 - During the year,
"Venezuelan equine encephalitis" begins working its way north from South America.
Carried by mosquitoes, the disease proves devastating. Horses infected by the virus usually die a painful death within 72 hours, often wandering dizzily in circles until they fall to the ground. Within 2 years Mexican officials would report that at least 10,000 animals had been killed by the disease in a period of less than one year. Thousands more were dying in the southern state of Texas with reports of dead horse floating down the Rio Grande river.
Humans can also contact the disease if they are bitten by the virus carrying mosquitoes.
Several thousand inhabitants of the northern Mexican town of Rio Verde would represent just one instance. The flu-like symptoms include headache, fever, aching bones, nausea and vomiting. Chances of recovery with this strain for humans are excellent with most people recovering in several days.

1969 - On May 3,
Mental illness, was the subject of a "Toronto Telegram" newspaper article written by Ernest E. Barr.
Writing about the Canadian population, he mentioned that:
"Each year, mental illness disables more of our citizens than tuberculosis, heart diseases, and cancer, combined. Mental patients occupy half of the hospital beds in the country and "the cost of care and treatment of mental illness in Canada has been estimated at more than half a billion dollars a year; more than one million dollars a day." Reliable surveys show that in any area on this continent, at least 35% of the population has suffered "definite mental illness, with at least temporary disability." One survey, conducted in Sterling County, Nova Scotia, Canada, found that only 17% of the citizens were "probably mentally well."
Mental health experts predict that one of every 10 Canadians born today will spend some time during his lifetime, in a mental institution. ... mental illness ... is diagnosed by the presence of manifest symptoms, and the aim of therapy is to bring about a remission of these symptoms. Doing this, however, does not necessarily eradicate the pathology which originally caused the illness and the symptoms. The patient becomes "well", but not necessarily mentally healthy! There is a danger that his illness may recur.

... The mentally ill person ... suffers in his social relations, and is often handicapped in his capacity to work and earn a living. ... The late Dr. Karen Horney called such blockages "neurotic trends".
Examples of neurotic trends found in "normal" people are excessive independence, an over-evaluation of cleanliness and tidiness, scrupulous honesty, compulsive thrift, and over-industriousness in work or play. It is easy to see how neurotic trends may be rationalized as virtues, and passed off as lofty principles and laudable ideals. ... A person may possess the pathology, without becoming mentally ill; and "latent" illness is extremely common."

Had so-called advanced industrialized societies utilized the finding of Alfred Korzybski, beginning in the early 1930s, a propensity for the "teaching" of neurotic trends in such cultures could have been eliminated. The release of positive traits into the general population would have assisted in the understanding, treatment of, and release of "energy blocks", as referred to by ancient Chinese medicine. Such energy blocks are the automatic reactions which the biological lifesystem of the individual has both inherited and constructed from traumatic events on the basis of future attempted avoidance of situations for which one does not have coping skills which are constructive.
In addition, a past traumatic experience, conscious or not, responded to in a manner which leads to either successful OR destructive resolution of a problem, will leave the human brain "programmed" to respond the same to any experience or decision in the future which the brain identifies as similar to the original trauma. Since such responses are automatic, they seldom enter the conscious mind of the human, thereby preventing acknowledgement, reflection, or modification of the singular response.
Humans in such societies often identify and excuse such responses of failure by either apologizing for, or rationalizing that, the response they have taken is simply the way they (their identity) is. Such pride and unawareness condemns them to a life of frustration, intolerance, obsession and extremes - relative to that of a "balanced energy", constructive and flexible responding individual. The invitation of the spacepersons to major industrialized cultures in the early 1950's to follow a more spiritual and happier lifestyle had, of course, been denied by human leaders responding, without control, to internalized "energy blocks".

1969 - During May,
Ronald Reagan, USA California Governor, received a letter from 62 Ph.D. scientists warning him of the dangers of continued use of DDT. California is the largest user state of the chemical in the USA. Arizona state initiates a 1-year moratorium on the use of DDT when the pesticide residue is found in its milk supply.

1969 - Between May 18 to 26,
Apollo 10, on a lunar orbital flight, was manned by astronauts Stafford, Young, and Cernan.
The crew reported the presence of two UFOs while in lunar orbit. Their photo, # AS10-32-48109, shows 3 domes constructed in the "Triesnecker Rilles" area, built by beings other than human. Two photos from the flight showed 8 objects 'parked' on the rim of a crater and 4 objects 'parked' inside a separate large crater. On May 22, "Orbiting at only 69 miles above the Moon, astronaut Stafford sighted two volcanoes". One of them was white on the outside and black on top.
Many different colours were reported on the Moon's back side, while the centres of some craters were just said to "glow in the lunar night", by astronaut Cernan. From an altitude of 9 miles, the crew described a landscape very much like the southwest desert and badlands of the U.S.A. Repeatedly, they spoke of brownish soil on the Moon's hidden side. Photo # 10-32-4810, of an area 130 miles north of the Triesnecker Crater, showed a white bridge-like structure spanning two mountains. On the same photo, and at a distance of 80 miles north of Triesnecker, a large entrance could be seen cut into a mountain.

1969 - On May 24,
An article "The Noise Is Getting Impossible", written by William Spencer, was published in the "Weekend" magazine of the "Toronto Telegram" newspaper. In summary:
"Noise ... is much more than just a disruption of thought. It has been blamed for causing heart attacks, ulcers, high blood pressure, nervous breakdowns, and even affecting sexual potency. And ... in our big cities, the noise is getting worse. In the past 40 years, the noise level in the average North American home has more than doubled. ... as little as 50 decibels of noise can cause restlessness and headaches to a sleeper."

Noise levels would continue to increase, largely due to unrestricted expansion of roads, traffic density, human density, technology expansion and consumer electronics and music marketing. A spiritually guided content, productive and happy lifestyle appears to usually be discounted by human cultural leaders and the individuals who have surrendered their authority to others.

1969 - By June 20,
The first Rubella Vaccine had been made, tested, and the public informed of it.
Dr. Paul D. Parkman, of the Army Institute of Research, and a fellow paediatrician, Dr. Harry M. Meyer Jr., had developed a vaccine which would cause no disease symptoms yet would trigger the making of antibodies against the Rubella by the human body. Their strain, HPV-77, would be licensed and form the basis of the present vaccine. They had also developed a relatively simple blood test to indicate whether an individual had already contracted rubella and built antibodies to further infection.
Merck Sharp & Dohme researchers, after a false start with a virus strain of their own, adopted HPV-77 and further refined it in cultures of cells from duck embryos. Three other USA pharmaceutical houses took their own strategies in the competition for a market estimated to be worth at least $100 million over the next several years. The first rubella vaccine licensed anywhere in the world was a Belgian product, approved in Switzerland in April, 1969, and taken over for USA marketing by Smith Kline & French Laboratories. By early June, the USA Department of Health, Education and Welfare had only licensed the Merck product. Merck had 650,000 doses ready for shipment and promised another 2,000,000 by August with an expectation of a further 18 million doses within a year. The cost to doctors is expected to be about $2.50 for the individual vial of vaccine, which must be injected.

1969 - On July 2,
India-born Maqbool Jung, wrote, as the first of a second series of observations on Canadian life (much like American) an article on "The great noise barrier that isolates us from each other". It demonstrated that technology plus population density can strongly influence the effective communication between humans, the tone of interactions, the degree of awareness:
"... a civilization that has almost gone out of control.
Noise tends to isolate. ... Noise seems to force its way between out thoughts and our actions, so that everything we do is mindless and mechanical.
Noise also tightens the tension in us ...
Stand on a downtown city street during rush hour and you'll see that people, feeling the pressure of the noise of the traffic and the policeman's shrill whistle and the cry of the newspaper vendor, are a little ruder, a little more pushy and abrupt, than they are when the traffic is more leisurely, and the policeman guides it by a wave of a white-gloved hand rather than by the blast of his whistle.

... Noise isolates me from you, and what's more, isolates me from myself.
The power mower not only makes neighbourly talk impossible, it numbs the mind with its clamour. ... Quiet often makes the loudest protest. ... Gandhi was able to overthrow a government that had ruled India for more than 200 years in one of the quietest ways history has ever witnessed.
A campaign for quiet might save the world's sanity."

1969 - During the year,
Louis Giuffrida is appointed head of the California National Guard by Governor Ronald Reagan.
Together with Edwin Meese, he organizes "war-games" to prepare for "statewide martial law" in the event that Black nationalists and anti-war protestors "challenged the authority of the state." Giuffrida would later write that "Martial Rule comes into existence upon a determination (not a declaration) by the senior military commander that the civil government must be replaced because it is no longer functioning anyway. ... Martial Rule is limited only by the principle of necessary force."

1969 - On July 5,
Near the small town of Anolaima, Colombia, about 40 miles northwest of Bogota, at 8.30 P.M., two children saw a luminous object 300 yards away. They grabbed a flashlight and sent out signals. The object came closer - about 60 yards from them. The children called the rest of the family, and all 13 people who lived in the farmhouse watched the light as it flew off and disappeared behind a hill, the glow remaining visible. The father, 44-year-old Arcesio Bermudez, took the flashlight and went to investigate.
When he returned, he was scared.
From a distance of less than 20 feet he had seen a small person inside the top part of the object, which was transparent, while the rest of the craft was dark. He saw the being when he turned on his flashlight. The object became bright and took off.

Over the next few days, his health started to deteriorate.
Forty-eight hours after the sighting, Arcesio felt very sick.
He was cold and his temperature began dropping. He was unable to eat and he had dark blue spots on his skin. There was blood in his stools. On the seventh day after the incident the family took him to Bogota, which is 2 hours away. He was seen by two physicians who diagnosed acute gastroenteritis. They were not told of the UFO incident. He died shortly before midnight. Since gastroenteritis is the third leading cause of death in Colombia, the diagnosis was accepted. One of the doctors commented later that if he had known of the incident, he would have performed more tests. The doctors learned of the incident two days after he died.
Dr. Luis E. Borda, one of the doctors, noted that Arcesio was suffering from vomiting and diarrhea; the pulse was almost unnoticeable, his face was pale. He gave him 2 centigrams of "emetina" because the liver was inflamed, and also a tonic for the heart. Arcesio's temperature had dropped to 35 degrees C. by 10.00 A.M. The cardiopulmonary system exhibited pericarditis, asphyxia, cough, painful thoracic oppression, slow pulse. The digestive system was affected by bloody diarrhea, black vomit, dry mouth, painful abdomen, especially on the right side. ... The skin was dry, pale, cold, dehydrated.

He returned to the house early in the evening and found him worse with no pulse and his temperature below normal. Suspecting gastroenteritis, he asked Arcesio what he had eaten last and was told sardines and sausages. The whole family had eaten the same meal and none of the others were affected.
The weather at the time was clear.
The farmhouse is located in hilly country with abundant vegetation.
There was no electrical power on the farm. Humidity was 65% and the temperature was about 62 degree F. at the time of the incident.

1969 - On July 11,
"Sex as a Spectator Sport" was the title of an article published in "Time" magazine.
The article noted that ...

From stage and screen, printed page and folk-rock jukeboxes, society is bombarded with coital themes. Writers bandy four-letter (swear/obscenity) words as if they had just completed a deep-immersion Berlitz course ... In urban America, at least, the total taboos of yesteryear have become not only acceptable but, in many circles, fashionable musts as well. ... A nation gets the kind of art and entertainment it wants and will pay for. ... Morally and psychologically, it may signal a deeper unease connected with a crisis of values. It also has its political aspects. ... Today, many of the young (or would-be young) use sexual display or obscene language quite deliberately as shock weapons of protest against "the Establishment." ... which may produce a backlash that could lead to a general mood of repression. ...
Last year Lyndon Johnson appointed leading educators, sociologists, psychologists and lawyers to a presidential commission on obscenity and pornography. Its interim report .. will recommend ... that all erotic wares in the marketplace be stamped Adult Material.

Cultural leaders have been polled for their leadership and cannot derive a standard of public sexual expression for the community. Part of the problem is that there has been a confusion between public and private standards of sexuality within many human authoritarian cultures. Without a public standard there can only be an anything goes attitude which leads to political anarchy and increasingly abusive and physical-focused expressions of sexuality.

1969 - Between July 16 to 24,
Apollo 11, The first manned lunar landing had on board astronauts Neil Armstrong, Edwin Aldrin and Michael Collins: the latter stayed with the mother ship. On the first day of their flight, a very strange object, whose distance, dimensions and shape were practically impossible to determine was seen. Armstrong described it as 2 interconnected rings; Collins as a hollow cylinder; Aldrin thought that it looked like a huge half-open book. It eventually disappeared. It is known by some sightings reported that some spacebeings have the ability to alter the images we see as reality as in making an object appear differently to different people.
The astronauts heard strange noises on the radio when they neared the Moon.
The sounds were similar to that of a train whistle, a fire engine siren, and a power saw.
They appeared to be modulated as if they were coded messages. Prior to first moon landing, 2 UFO's and a long cylinder hover overhead. When Apollo 11 landed inside a moon crater, 2 UFO's appeared on the crater rim and then took off again. Aldrin photographed them. Television viewers on Earth could see a UFO moving into view on their screens, from the right, for about 6 seconds. The two objects were Federation of Peoples craft and the intent was to hopefully scare the humans and the crew at Cape Canaveral and have them resolve to stay out of space and off the Moon. To the surprise of even humans in the Federation, the U.S.A. space industry-government bureaucracy concealed the reports from the public and quietly downgraded the priority of future Moon flights.

During the walks on the Moon, Armstrong was heard to exclaim:
"What was it? What the hell was it? That's all I want to know."

From Apollo 11 to Mission Control:
"These babies were huge, sir ... enormous ... Oh, God you wouldn't believe it! ... I'm telling you there are other space-craft out there ... lined up on the far side of the crater edge ... they're on the Moon watching us ..."

Glowing objects on or close to the lunar surface were recorded in photo # AS 11-42-6334.
The crew reported some strange spots on the inner wall of a crater: they seemed to have a slight amount of fluorescence. While colours in twilight were gray, in sunlight they were shades of tan and brown. A photo, of the IAU-308 crater, taken on the lunar back side, shows a dark cross symbol on the centre peak as well as dome-shaped objects and a platform nearby. Photo NASA # 11-37-5438 shows a glowing cigar-shaped object close to the Moon. Photo 11-37-5436 also shows a cigar-shaped UFO, this time in lunar orbit, with 7 or more rings around it.
While descending in the lunar lander, "Eagle", from an altitude of 2,000 feet, several unexpected incidents occured. The spacecraft's computer repeatedly flashed the computation overload codes of "1201" and "1202." The lander was advancing toward a crater rather than setting down in a smooth area; between 300 and 200 feet altitude - its forward speed suddely increased to 80 feet/second (about 55 mph) from 8 feet/second. Mysteriously, the astronauts, perhaps too busy at the time, did not mention anything of the approaching crater; landing in it would possibly destroy the craft. Two minutes and twenty seconds before touchdown, they experienced some drift at an altitude of 75 feet: the craft had to be landed manually. With less than 94 seconds to go a red warning console instrument light came on to indicate that only 5% of the descent fuel remained. With less than 30 seconds of time available, the troublesome crater was overshot and a gentle landing was made.

The lunar soil often looked similar to the colour of cocoa and appeared almost wet.
All of the astronaut's footprints were well-defined. The astronauts set up a number of instruments and loaded many pounds of lunar rock and soil into the Lunar Landing Module: Eagle. The soil was later tested and some of it was found to contain high quantities of glass particles and titanium. Remember? What are the properties of titanium when it is heated and exposed to ultraviolet radiation in space ?
After returning to the Earth, Buzz Aldrin was soon complaining bitterly about the Agency having used him as a "travelling salesman". Two years later, following reported bouts of heavy drinking, he was admitted to hospital with "emotional depression". What was he "selling"? - the "official" version of the truth for the rest of the world; a cover up for the space program that preceded them and the unnecessarily large expenditures for program development?

T. Galen Hieronymus and his wife Irene (see 1946), continuing their researches from earlier monitored flights, used their radionics "eloptic" energy detector to check the ongoing conditions of the 3 astronauts during their flight. Using photographs of each of the astronauts, placed individually into their machine, they were able to track all physiological functions of the men. The Hieronymus' most startling discovery was that of a lethal radiation belt around the moon, which during the landing of Apollo 11 apparently extended from an altitude of roughly 65 miles down to about 15 feet above the moon's surface. While the astronauts were travelling through or within the belt, Hieronymus noted a drop in the vitality of the astronauts. When they got out of the capsule and climbed down the ladder onto the surface, trends showed a dramatic turnaround.
On later flights, the lower level of the lethal atmosphere was as high as two miles above the moon's surface. Its altitude was thought to have been influenced according to time period and exact position over the surface of the Moon with some influences including the altitude of the lunar topography.
The solar wind, an ionized, or electrified, gas constantly streaming away from the Sun at speds of 200 to 400 miles a second - would be sampled as it sped past the Moon and over its surface. The magnetic field around the Earth usually deflects this form of radiation away from the Earth's surface. Its effects are seen on the Earth when a small amount of the solar wind passes through the atmosphere in the polar, magnetic "hole" regions. Now accelerated by the lines of magnetic force, rather than being deflected, this stream of ionizing gas produces a brilliant aurora, that is, a shiny envelope, high in the atmosphere. The Moon lacks such a strong magnetic field; the solar wind washes over the surface exposed to the Sun, continuously. Ion concentrations will later be shown to be hazardous to human health and include the influence of such symptoms as tiredness and depression.

1969 - On July 20, after a flight of 4 days and 6 hours,
The Apollo 11 moon landing saw the first human steps taken on the moon.
More than half the Canadian population over the age of 2 years watched it.
"National Geographic" magazine, December, 1969, carried major articles with photos taken on the moon.
The astronauts, Neil Armstrong and Edwin Aldrin, would leave their Lunar lander, "Eagle", to conduct experiments on, take pictures of and explore the lunar surface. Armstrong would stay outside the longest - just over 2 hours and 20 minutes. The metabolic rate for both astronauts remained at lower levels than was expected and half their oxygen supply remained unused when they left the lunar surface. Decades later, when the evidence of conspiracies and the rumours of conspiracies would abound, questions regarding the legitimacy of the lunar landings and the lunar pictures would arise.

Several of the criticisms later made about the lunar walk and the lunar pictures would include the following:
a) Why were there no stars or planets in the sky ?
With the Moon supposedly having no atmosphere nor radiation belts to diffuse the sunlight and starlight - the sky should have been black and filled with many more stars than one would see on a clear evening from the Earth's surface. Since the Moon was not supposed to have clouds or water vapour, the sky would be totally clear. ALL of the pictures showed a black sky, easily available in an Earth-sited television studio. Inserting the correct arrangement of star canopy would be exceedingly difficult for it would have to appear accurate and be 3-dimensional. Any misplacement of stars and planets relative to the horizon and the Earth would be noticed by someone. The introduction of additional stars in places which would prove wrong with later explorations would prove hard to justify.

b) Why did the boots of the astronauts leave such deep impressions ?
Under the influence of 1/6th of the Earth's gravity and without an atmosphere, any dust on the moon would be expected to be tightly compacted. It is air which enables dust and soil to move easily by providing the lubrication of free space. If the lunar surface was free of an atmosphere, had an 83% reduced gravity compared to the Earth, and did not have moisture in the soil - impressions in and movement of the surface would have been minimal.

c) Why did the landing of the lunar lander leave NO surface disturbance ?
During the decent to the lunar surface, rockets were fired continuously until touchdown. The pictures most widely circulated afterwards, as in the noted National Geographic article, show NO disturbance of the lunar surface beneath the Eagle . That is, a surface purported to be several inches thick in dust, at low gravity and without an atmosphere - responding to the repulsive forces required to slow a vehicle "falling" from an altitude of 2,000 feet - does not have a grain of matter moved.
Basic physics dictates that, in space, a force exerted on a mass, will accelerate that particle or item to a speed relative to its innertia, and, that the substance will continue at a constant speed forever, outward - unless and util it encounters another opposing force. That is, sand should have been blasted up into the sky such that the resulting cloud should have risen at least 8 times further than a comparable cloud of dust on the Earth. Also, 8 times as much soil and dust as would have been disturbed on the Earth by a similar sustained blast should have been raised from the surface of the Moon.

d) Photos taken of the astronauts are artificially lighted ?
No indication of movie set-like lighting having been set up on the Moon was ever made. In space, side of anything not facing the Sun is heavily shaded. Yet, at dawn, facing away from the Sun, the front of the suit of Edwin Aldrin is well illuminated.

e) After days in space working under altered and reduced forces of gravity, the astronauts experienced no difficulty in standing and walking immediately after being "rescued" from their charred Apollo Columbia following its re-entry and landing in the Pacific Ocean. Other astronauts, both American and Soviet, had displaced obvious disorientation and weakness on their return to Earth's gravity. Did Aldrin and Armstrong ever leave the Earth ?
In 1995, Bill Kaysing, author of "We Never Went to the Moon, America's $30 Billion Swindle", would make some of these allegations. He was then former chief of technical production at Rocketdyne Propulsion Laboratories, a rocket engine developer. He would maintain that a phony moon mission media promotion, codenamed ASP (Apollo Simulation Project) was carried out on a top secret base near Mercury, Nevada. A sophisticated and extensive communications system fed the ignorant and technology worshipping masses what they wanted to believe was possible yet totally lacked an awareness of the complexities.

What were the political pressures ?
1. The USSR were expecting to land Zond 7 in the next several days; 2. Luna 15, a USSR lunar probe was already orbiting the Moon; 3. The media had changed the Cold War into a technological contest; 4. Cost of the USA space program to date: 22 billion dollars+; 5. Voter demographic impact of the USA program: 20,000 contractors; 6. Technological complexity of the systems involved: 5 million parts+; 7. Energy expenditure during space injection: 15 tons of fuel/second; 8. Population financially supported by NASA & related programs: 1.5 M.

ALL openings in suits, landers and modules must have gaskets to ensure the safety of the crew from depressurization. After returning to the Earth, all of the recovered mission hardware was inspected for wear, ageing, and failure. All of the organic components of the mission hardware exhibited excessive ageing. Rather than having been on the surface of the Moon for a period of 2-1/2 hours, they looked as if they had been in use for 10 to 12 months. A conservative estimate of their likely point of failure was double the period of exposure, or less. A suit failure in space is the equivalent to an astronauts body exploding through depressurization - death. What could have caused this ? What was ageing the components so quickly. Gaskets are made of organic materials. Organic materials contain oxygen. ....
Scientists at the Rand Institute, a think-tank for the NSA, CIA, Defense establishment, NASA and AEC, were given the problem for consideration. The project carried an "Above Top Secret" classification.

1969 - On July 20th,
Monique D., a resident of Hull, Quebec, and an employee of the National Research Council (NRC), noticed a bright oval object overhead as she was going to work. Resembling a giant watermelon, the orange craft hovered over her momentarily before zooming noiselessly across the Ottawa River to stop directly above the Parliament Buildings, Ottawa. After several minutes, it quickly departed.

1969 - During the year,
Lassa Fever, an infectious disease with a fatality ratio of 50%, is first defined.
Cases would only be found in Africa. Caused by a virus, harboured by a type of rat - it will be found to be most frequently transmitted by inhaling droplets of the rat's urine, or by exposure to blood from air coughed by an ill person.
The virus will be found to incubate 3-17 days within the human body before becoming noticed by symptoms including fever, headache, muscle aches and a sore throat. Severe diarrhea and vomiting may then develop and even with hospitalization 25% to 35% can be expected to die.
A blood test will be developed to assist in diagnosing the disease; an antibody serum would become effective in treating it. The anti-viral drug ribavirin would prove helpful in managing the disease to hold its progress short of fatality.

1969 - On August 5,
Mariner 7, an American interplanetary satellite, would be the first publicly recognized satellite to transmit pictures from the planet Mars.

1969 - On August 7,
Zond 7, a stripped-down manned Soyuz spacecraft from the USSR was launched by a SL-12 Proton rocket from Tyuratam on a 3rd circumlunar mission. The far side of the Moon was photographed from 2000 km on August 11 in addition to joint Earth/Moon imaging. A skipping difficult re-entry was again made. It was recovered on August 14 within the USSR. An attempt made January 20, 1969 (L1-11) had failed when the stage 2 and 3 engines had failed.

1969 - In August,
Near Woodstock, U.S.A. on Max Yasgur's farm, 500,000 people gathered for several days to hear popular music.
Only 1/2 of the attendees paid admission with the remainder climbing over fences and barricades.
The end result was a deficit of over $1 million for this celebration of love, peace and justice: greed, disorder and illegality were the winners!
Beginning in February, 1968, and continuing to April 1975, major events were assisted in their formation by special C.I.A. operatives. Research gathered through university and private research projects funded by the federal government, undertaken during the period August, 1958 to December, 1961 - indicated that drug dependency was a key to the formation of a directed society. Persons who were drug-dependent could easily be manipulated, were destructive to the unity of society, and created social anarchy through dysfunctional family and social relationships. Alcohol, marijuana, LSD and other drugs had been determined as ideal for purveying to a young, emotionally insecure generation. The states of drug induced "awareness" enabled the individual to express denial, fantasy and acting out with complete oblivion as to the consequences on others as well as their own reduced coping capabilities. The long-term strategy of Phase Three was to develop a mind numbing industry which embraced schizoid principles: a guarantee of public disorientation.

In the early days of the "protest movement", the idealistic participants wanted to reduce hypocracy, turmoil and materialism by personal example and through communal support group relationships. Political power and organization were not priorities. Relatively strict Christian ideals with a minimum of alcohol use, minimal smoking, and no other drug use was common. The targets of Phase Three were mystics, revolutionaries, beatniks, draft dodgers, and other social protestors. Covert financial assistance was directed to underground newspapers and organizations through advertisements placed by front organizations: money was "donated" to small groups for the purpose of building their business through advertisements. Media so treated were encouraged to print stories praising the negative aspects as much or more than the positive attributes of the social movement. The C.I.A. became responsible for the initial importation of large quantities of marijuana.
The immaturity of many of the small idealistic groupings, encouraged and motivated by a consensus on how evil the world was and how they could not cope provided an atmosphere of depression in which denial was easily served by the spiritual deadening influence of drugs. Manipulating your body to force yourself to feel better when a situation truly exists which requires remedy only delays coping with the difficulty or problem until it is larger and more difficult to resolve. In some cases, the procrastination inserted into the process results in the opportunity for change and resolution being lost, then your choice is truly lost. Such behaviour patterning encourages the individual to adopt limiting, self-centred, low esteem expectations which grudgingly support the status quo.

For three days, at Woodstock, all those who saw themselves in or wanted to be part of the biggest carnival of an insecure generation, rejoiced in sharing music and idealism amidst rain, mud, and an absence of toilets - while a dozen pushers sent by the C.I.A. dispensed marijuana and photographed participants.
The photographs and names would lend themselves to C.I.A. files on potential insurgents.
Centralization of political destabilization individuals was a major success. Phase 3 would continue until April, 1975, during which time the pop music industry including the tour industry was encouraged through financial and mass media avenues. Also, the illegal drug business would be built so that it would become widespread and secure.

1969 - During August,
The intention of a nuclear pre-emptive attack against China by the Soviet Union is spread by the KGB.
Rationalized afterward as a threat, posed by aging Soviet leaders, to put fear into the Chinese leaders and have them retreat from their aggressive stance with the Soviet Union over the past decade - such an explanation was nothing more than an attempt to understand the situation by those not involved.
Human political structures were failing to be constructive and spiritual in approach, as usual.
China had exploded its first nuclear weapon in June, 1967. China had been increasingly adverse to the Soviet Union's interference in the affairs of other states (Czechoslovakia, the Middle East and others) and a major border incident had occurred in March, 1969, at the Ussuri River border between the USSR and China. China was paranoid that the USSR would try to take some of their territory, or worse. Consideration by American military and White House leadership for the use of tactical nuclear weapons in Southeast Asia had been increasing. At the same time USA paranoia was concerned with the potential for USSR nuclear fueled and armed submarines mounting a first-strike attack on the USA. Nixon had been planning since April to use his "madman theory" to force an end to the war. Tension was mounting everywhere.
The CIA and other sources "leaked" the news to China.
China believed it. The KGB was instructed to find the insiders responsible for the disinformation. The USA announced their interest in withdrawal from Vietnam and their desire for arms limitations talks in return for the USSR withdrawing support from Castro, in Cuba, and from Southeast Asia. Between September and December, 1969, USSR's Gromyko presented the draft of an "appeal to all states of the world" and a draft proposal concerning the prohibition of the development, production and storage of Chemical and Biological warfare weapons. Large supplies of both were stockpiled by the USA, the USSR. Such might be released, by the result of the destruction caused by an "accidental" nuclear attack. Richard M. Nixon had been elected USA President in November, 1968; he announced gradual withdrawal of troops from Vietnam in September, 1969; his adviser, Henry Kissinger, would be called to Peking to begin talks with the Chinese, in July, 1971. Castro was invited to Moscow and aid to Cuba was drastically cut, contributing to economic difficulties by 1971.

1969 - On August 9,
The beginning of the "Charles Manson Murders" takes place in southern California.
Charles Manson, born in Kentucky in 1934, an illegitimate child of an alcoholic father and a prostitute mother, was later charged with heading a cult of young adults. Manson had been physically and spiritually abused by his father from an early age. At the age of 36, he had spent 23 years in jail. Part of that time, 10 years in jail, had been the result of writing a $36. bad cheque. He had also been involved in car theft and numerous other small crimes. While in jail he had taught himself how to play the guitar and considered himself worthy of an opportunity in Hollywood, the mass media mecca.
On his release from prison, he found a mass of teenagers and young adults, seemingly confused in focus, involved in addictive drug use, depressed about social and political concerns, runaways, and frequently coping poorly with an experiential background. Many came from families with absentee parents (too busy working and/or socializing), hypocritical family religious beliefs-to-actions, prescription drug dependent adults, authoritarianism of the state in opposition to the teachings of equality empathized with by their immaturity, and sexual or physical abuse, or, emotional deprivation. Manson's new found freedom and reactionistic behaviour patterns encouraged his followers to take full and irresponsible control of their lives to the extent of living moment-to-moment in the greatest pleasure and sloth. In projecting the paranoia of the culture around him, he prophesied the coming of a global race war in which all whites would be killed excepting his followers. Minor crimes of theft, prostitution, fraud and other illegal activities were interspersed with open sexual experience, neuroactive and addictive drug use and violence. They took up residence at an abandoned Spahn ranch which had been used as a movie backdrop.

On August 9, at the direction of Manson, a number of his followers, including Linda Kasabian, Patricia Krenwinkle, Leslie Van Houten, Susan Atkins, Charles (Tex) Watson, and Lynnette From had cut the telephone wires to the house, stormed into it, and stabbed, strangled, bludgeoned and slashed the victims to death. They had brutally murdered a pregnant Sharon Tate, actress and wife of a Hollywood producer, Abigail Folger, a rich coffee heiress, and three other friends. Several evenings later, Leo Le Bianca and his wife were similarly murdered in their suburban home. The words "Helter Skelter" and "Pig" were written in blood at the scene. The murders were only tied to the group after Susan Atkins, while in jail on a prostitution charge, bragged of the murders. Charles Watson was found guilty of having inflicted 80% of the wounds to the victims of both incidents.
The California Supreme Court, after a highly media involved trial, found Charles Manson guilty of First Degree murder and Conspiracy. It was the first American trial in which the accused were treated with celebrity status by the media. Linda Kasabian was given a plea bargain in exchange for her testimony. Drug involved like the others, she had used LSD at least 300 times. Manson was accused of using mind control over the others through a combination of acknowledgement, drug provision, strength of will and rationalization of the then current social circumstances. He was sentenced to die by gas at San Quenton Prison, as were many of the others. The California Supreme Court declared the death penalty unconstitutional in 1972 and none were executed. Lynnette From attempted to kill President Ford in 1977, after she was first paroled. Manson first became eligible for parole in 1978, and was denied. In 1987 he still would deny his guilt. The incident and the media attention focused on the trial and the events encouraged the general American populace to be more conservative in their views.

1969 - By September,
Dr. Howard Worne starts "Enzymes, Inc." at Cherry Hill, New Jersey, U.S.A., where microorganisms are bombarded with strontium 90 (nuclear radiation) and mutated to produce enzymes which will transmute waste carbon into usable carbon simply through digestion. By 1973, Dr. Worne will be in Mexico using microorganisms to transform solid waste from garbage and stockyards into humus for the compost-hungry Western states and methane gas for the energy-hungry Eastern states.

1969 - In the September 5 issue of "Time" magazine,
Psychoanalyst Bruno Bettelheim's work and findings are reviewed in an article entitled "YOUTH: Confused Parents, Confused Kids". Long a researcher and therapist in the field of children's emotional health, he noted the following:
"In most of the small group of leaders of the radical left, intellect was developed at much too early an age, and at the expense of their emotional development. Although exceedingly bright, some have remained emotionally fixated at the age of temper tantrum. ...
The political content of student revolt is most of all a desperate wish that the parent should have been strong in the convictions that motivate his actions. ... They chant of strong fathers with strong (intolerant) convictions.

Psychoanalysis has certainly suggested that we should not suppress our inner rages but should face them. But we were only expected to face them in thought, and only in the safety structured treatment situation. This has been misapplied by large numbers of the middle classes to mean that aggression should always be expressed, and not just in thought. Accordingly, many children today do not learn to repress aggression enough."
Yet the same overpermissive parents more often than not make irrational demands for high marks in school and insist on superhygienic cleanliness so that their children reflect well on them in public. Such families ... exploit their children to fulfill their own "narcissistic needs"; they choose to follow (one method) where it suits their convenience, and are as demanding of conformity (as possible) where it does not. For the children ... the result has been a "senseless" uncertainty about their own identities that turns to self-hate and later to resentment of the world at large. The claim by radicals that they act out of high motives, and "their occasional on-target attack on real evils have misled many well-meaning people into overlooking their true motive: this is hate, not desire for a better world."

1969 - During the year,
Elihu Katz and David Foulkes in their study "The Use of the Mass Media as 'Escape'" noted that:
"It is a most intriguing fact in the intellectual history of social research that the choice was made to study mass media as agents of persuasion rather than as agents of entertainment."

1969 - In the Autumn,
The Reverend Franklin Loehr, under the auspices of his "Religious Research Foundation" in Los Angeles, completed 700 experiments on the effect of prayer on plants, conducted by 150 persons, using 27,000 seeds. The results were reported in his book The Power of Prayer on Plants and followed the directions set out by the De La Warrs earlier in the year.
Loehr showed that the growth rate of plants could be accelerated as much as 20% when individuals singly or in concert visualized the plants as thriving under ideal conditions. Though their experiments seemed to be acceptable from the evidence and the pictures presented, the results were ignored by scientists on the basis that Loehr and his assistants had no scientific training and used relatively crude methods to measure growth.

Once again the power and inflexibility and hypocracy of the authority vested in the human status quo dictated acceptance according to allegiance rather than by truth. Human culture again reinforced its historical and non-spiritual pattern of denying truth on the basis that it did not reinforce accepted authority structures. The hypocracy lay in the fact that those who originated any of the fields of science began with a striving for truth without the intolerance of the modern so-called representatives of the search for truth. Is it any wonder that a representative of an advanced intelligence based on plant biology would have died over 10 years earlier under the care of human jailors who shared such negative spirituality and intolerance. His health had been poisoned to death by the toxic influence of the iniquities shared by the humans responsible for his survival!

1969 - Between September and December
At the 24th General Assembly of the United Nations Gromyko, from the USSR, presented the draft of an "appeal to all states of the world" and a draft proposal concerning the prohibition of the development, production and storage of C- (chemical) and B- (biological) weapons. Regardless of political declarations, the USA would continue to stockpile both and German industries would assist several countries in the construction of c-weapon production plants. Since no enforceable agreement would be negotiated, the USSR would retain its supplies.

1969 - From October onwards
The word CHIMERA a medieval English word designating a mythological fire-breathing monster commonly represented with a lion's head, although the word itself meant "she-goat", would be increasingly used to designate a classification of bioengineered organism. Laboratory work by geneticists, immunologists, and other - would concentrate on creating organisms composed of 2 or more genetically distinct tissues, such as an organism which is partly male and partly female, or, an artificially produced individual having tissues of several species. There would be 3 major areas of investigation and results: the intent would not always produce the desired result.

1. Bioengineering viruses and bacteria with the hope of producing organisms which would have commercial viability. By an exchange of genetic material it was hoped that new organisms would be found which would combine the best characteristics of 2 or more natural organisms to produce a hybrid. This creation was expected to be capable of destroying other more harmful-to-humans organisms, provide a basis for inoculation against harmful virus and disease, and, to produce biological warfare products.
2. Bioengineering human and other living form genes with the hope of producing genetic combinations which would have social benefit. Possibilities would be investigated for the genetic manipulation of humans to become "replicants", hybrid humans, hybrid "livestock", or hybrid laboratory specimens for the purpose of testing drug effects and chemical exposures. More morally questionable than #1, these experiments were carried out under the tightest of security and confidentiality.

Media series and movies depicting technology implanted humans would become popular by suggesting that super-humans could be created by inserting high technology devices in them to extend human capabilities in one or more areas. These media models would be "morally justified" by supposing to be the salvation for totally crippled humans who possessed highly developed intellectual capacity. "Practical" scientists knew, or would come to know, that such high tech inserts - usually for paramilitary applications - were too costly and too unpredictable in application relative to the individual subject.
"Replicants" were a design goal of producing biological human slaves for use in industry, space settlement, or military operation. The intellectual intent was to be able to use these "expendable" humans in situations which were too risky, too boring, or too costly to use regular humans. Participating scientists in this field would tend to be rationally dominated, emotionally immature, and socially and politically naive. Their obsession with control, power, and service would be authoritarian, pseudo-religious and open to manipulation into paranoia - thereby identifying with the feelings of urgency which their supporters had.

1969 - During October,
Jose, a cousin of a friend of Maurice Masse, testified that two objects had landed in a field near Valensole, France, close to an old stone structure. After they left, the leaves of two trees yellowed rapidly. Traces, shaped somewhat like a boat and 30 feet in length, were clearly visible in the wheat. Jose could see them for a long time. His wife commented that evening on his white face that evening and he was unable to sleep that night.

1969 - A memo dated October 20,
Signed by Brigadier General C. H. Bolender, USAF deputy director of development, states:
"Reports of unidentified flying objects which could affect national security are made in accordance with JANAP 146 or Air Force Manual 55-11 and are not part of the Blue Book system ... reports of UFOs which could affect national security should continue to be handled through the standard Air Force procedure designed for this purpose."

Six weeks later, Project Blue Book was closed and with it, the government has maintained, all government interest in UFOs. This memo shows otherwise.

1969 - On October 28,
USA Presidential Executive Order #11490 was signed by Richard M. Nixon.
It was a compilation of 23 previous Executive Orders. It outlined the emergency functions to be performed by 28 Executive Departments and Agencies whenever the President of the USA declares a national emergency. There was no definition as to what might or could entail a "national emergency". Once declared the Executive Branch are authorized to:
- Take over all communications media; - Seize all sources of power; - Take charge of all food resources; - Control all highways and seaports; - Force all civilians to work under Federal supervision; - Control all health, education and welfare services; - Relocate any segment of the population; - Take possession of all farms, ranches, timberized properties; - Restrict access to and use of banks and capital.

In what circumstances would a total dictatorship of America be deemed necessary?
Some suggestions include:
a) Global nuclear war; b) Extraterrestrial invasion with/without human assistance; c) Extensive environmental disaster; d) Extreme civil unrest.

In a democratic country, would it not be practical to prepare the citizens for such catastrophes if either were believed imminent so that a spiritually strong and unified humanity could cope most constructively? What does the ASSUMPTION of power by the executive reflect about their confidence in the spiritual foundation of their citizens - and about their own?

1969 - On October 30, at 10.30 A.M.,
Clint and Jane Chapin, of French Gulch, California, U.S.A., who were in their mid-sixties at the time, witnessed a sighting. It was a sunny morning and having killed a rattlesnake, they were following their custom of cutting off the snake's head, burying it, and putting a stone on it, "so nobody will step over it." Jane was going to take a picture of the body when she noticed something behind the tall grass, among the trees. She thought it was a trailer, then realized it was oval, about the size of a VW "Beetle" car. It appeared cream-coloured to he. Clint, who saw it from a different position, thought it was gray. Both saw how the object lifted up, paused for a brief moment, then disappeared at an amazing speed.
An oval depression, smaller than the craft, was found in the ground, as if a large weight had rested there. It was when they inspected this area that they discovered a strange pile of sand and metal. They stored a quantity of this in the shed next to their trailer. Dr. Edward Zeller, director of the radiation physics laboratory at the University of Kansas Space Technology Center, examined the components of the sand in the 1970s. He concluded that it included "very pale green glass, nearly white sintered silicate, feldspar, quartz fragments with minute traces of gold, pyrite, and other sulfide ore minerals, magnetic dark minerals (magnetite), and various organic fragments. He concluded that the glass and sintered silicate were not natural products. Further analysis with an energy dispersive analyzer (X-ray EDAX) by a NASA scientist determined that the material was primarily of silicon with traces of potassium, chlorine, titanium, and iron.

A geologist offered "Perhaps it looks like sand to you, but it's not alluvial sand or stream sand or beach sand or mine-tailing sand or any kind of naturally formed sand. ... Here is volcanic material; here, sulfide-bearing rock; green crystals; feldspar or porcelain; pyrite cubes. All the components are common, but they don't belong together. This is a composite of rock fragments and manufactured materials. It's as if somebody had taken minerals from very different areas and had ground them together until it looked like sand. As for the glass, it does seem that it was produced by a sudden burst of heat, but that could occur in a variety of natural ways.
The metal sample which they had found was analyzed as poured and solidified into a mass of indefinite shape. It was very heavy and unusually contoured. The outside was a dull silver-gray, the inside a shiny gold colour. Shavings taken from it turned out to be copper, with traces of chromium and tin. The Mary Hazel mine produces gold and iron but no copper.
Some of the soil of the moon, described in an article in National Geographic, September, 1973, following the Apollo 11 mission are as follows:
"There is orange soil!
It almost glows ... studies show the bright soil to be microscopic glass beads, tinted by titanium ..."
Also found were "feldspar-rich rocks", iron compounds, potassium, and high levels of silicon.

1969 - By now,
J. Edgar Hoover, Director of the FBI, was beginning to lose some of the media adulation and respect which he had contrived over the previous 35 years. Hoover, self-styled as the patriotic bureaucrat who placed his country ahead of himself, had come to believe his image. He expected to remain in his position until he died. The perks of the position had been remarkable. He had been able to guide and restrain the political direction of one of the largest and most powerful nations on the Earth. He had been able to voyeuristically delve into the lives of movie stars (Lucille Ball, Marilyn Monroe, ...), sports celebrities (Joe Namath, Jack Anderson, ...), every President and many elected national political representatives, political activists, ... anyone to whom he was accountable as a servant of the public. In the meantime, more risky propositions, such as investigating organized crime, had been largely denied.
Hoover had early on formulated an unwritten agreement with organized crime: don't aggravate the public and he would not aggravate them. He acknowledged from the beginning, for himself, that organized crime had more money, power, resources, and freedom of action than his agency ever would. He had encountered an illness and let it grow into an epidemic. Now, those to whom he could turn for political support were aware of his propensity for betrayal. In public, he expressed boundless admiration for Richard Nixon, a protege; in private, neither trusted the other. Nixon wanted Hoover out of the FBI: out of power. Hoover countered with blackmail. The media, which Hoover had so loved to encourage in its self-obsessed pride of the thrill of exaggerated reality - now came to focus on Hoover: the investigator began to be investigated.

1969 - Early in November,
Dr. X., about a year after a UFO experience at his home in the SE of France, a contact took place while he was vacationing in the south of France. He suddenly heard a whistling noise "inside his head and had the impulse" to go back to his hotel room. When he returned, the manager told him that someone was on the phone waiting to speak to him. The voice was that of a man who assured him vociferously that they would soon "meet in (the town where Mr. X. lived) to discuss what you have seen."
Some time later, when he was back at his house, Dr.X. experienced a similar whistling sound.
He drove away and somehow felt "guided" to a spot where a stranger was waiting next to a Citroen CX, at that time the latest and most expensive French car. The man was tall, had striking blue eyes, brown hair, and was wearing ordinary business clothes.

The man astonished Dr. X. when he began the conversation by apologizing for the strange happenings around his home; in fact, since the sighting, Dr. X. and his wife had reportedly been plagued by poltergeist activity and by unexplained disturbances in the electrical circuits. In subsequent meetings the man instructed Dr. X. in various paranormal matters, causing him to experience teleportation and time travel, including a distressing episode with alternative landscapes on a road that "does not exist".
The stranger (who never gave his name, but to whom Dr. X. assigned the mnemonic Mr. Bied) often appears at a bend in a dusty path that leads north of the house to a cluster of beehives. On one occasion, Mr. Bied came into the house accompanied by a 3-foot-tall humanoid with mummified skin, who remained motionless while his eyes darted around the room. Such episodes, which bear considerable resemblance with those of American Whitley Strieber, caused some stress within the family. Dr. X's wife had remarked that she had gone through a very difficult time when he "sensed the presence of aliens around the house." Dr. X who had liked to play the piano before the mine explosion now demonstrates "unusual musical talent". (see also 1971)

1969 -
The USA "Credit Control Act" authorized the Federal Reserve to impose surcharges on bank reserves, and also to impose reserve requirements on nonbank financial companies. The Fed was responsible for controlling credit availability, which in turn would influence economic growth. By raising or lowering the discount rates, the Fed lowered or raised the margin for profit to the regular banks; by buying or selling government securities, it increased or decreased the pool of "riskless" capital available for maintaining capital reserves. By the further option of being able to adjust the reserve requirements of financial institutions, the Fed could tell you how much you were required to have on reserve prior to granting a loan; they could vary the amount that you were required to have available; they could vary the supply of the form of capital you were required to maintain your reserve with.
In this manner, the Fed could control the amount of lending which was done.
Lending was a measure of consumer indebtedness and synthetic market activity.
Products, services, and investments made through the facility of credit were actually owned by the creditor and not the borrower. They were owned not for the use of the creditor nor for his need - so it was not a direct, valid sale: it was synthetic. The more a culture builds an economic system on "synthetic" sales, illusion, and deception - the greater is the risk of its collapse.

1969 - By this year,
The information explosion was placing a great amount of information available to individuals to assist them in their decision-making, planning, projections, strategies, understanding. Much of the information would remain inaccessible, for constructive use, to most humans, for several factors.
QUANTITY:
First the volume had become too great to adequately process by any single human on the basis of intake and processing capacity of the human brain. About 30,000-35,000 scientific and technical journals were being published throughout the world - producing up to 2 million papers each year. Many of the papers, perhaps 70%, would be written for the purpose of academic approval or professional visibility rather than as well-constructed experiments or rationales of scientific findings. In addition, there would be books, conference proceedings, standards, patents, trade literature, and research reports. Literature on the computer industry had reached about 30% of the volume and was growing rapidly. In addition, for political or military reasons, a segment of the information produced would remain unavailable to selected groups.
RELEVANCY:
Secondly, there was little if any emphasis placed on the necessity for the reader-researcher to develop the capacity to quickly determine which information was largely useless (80%) and which might be constructive (20%). Such skills necessary to such a capacity would include an excellent knowledge of linguistics and semantics, and of statistics. Decision-making skills with a better than 80% success ratio would also be necessary for a constructive use of time. No such program would be offered at human institutions before 1995. The lower the degree of such a selective capacity the individual holds, the more time and attention of the individual to directed to inappropriate information with the greater likelihood of spurious conclusions, outright inaccuracies, and mental confusion.
OPPORTUNITY:
Thirdly, availability of such a volume and diversity of information to any person is limited by the individual's financial and time budgets as well as those of the resource centres used by the individual. Wastefulness in selectivity diminishes effectiveness even further. Finally, the lack of a constructive universally targeted goal by human enterprises, such as a balanced, constructive human existence, was totally absent as a motivating and unifying factor. With largely blind researchers rushing in all directions and frequently confused or unreasonably optimistic about their results, increased awareness and global enhancement from such efforts would be minimal.

1969 - On November 14,
Apollo 12 took off from Cape Canaveral, U.S.A., with Charles Conrad, Richard Gordon and Alan Bean.
Less than a minute later, they were about 3 kilometres above the Earth.
Their spacecraft was struck by a tremendous thunderbolt of unknown origin.
All the circuit breakers in their capsule tripped and all the electrical equipment went dead.
No lights, no air conditioning, no radio and no contact with Mission Control.
The astronauts reactivated the electrical generator, then reconnected all the circuits one by one.
In less than 3 minutes everything was normal, but it had been a scary alert for the astronauts.
The closest thunderstorm at the time was more than 30 kilometres away.
Several hours later, NASA began receiving reports from several observatories which had been tracking the spacecraft. They reported that the spacecraft had been followed by 2 very bright unidentified objects. Official statements released to the public made no mention of any of this.

On November 15, already 200,000 kilometres away from the Earth, the astronauts saw 2 UFOs but could not determine their exact shape or distance. Observatories on earth also observed the capsule being accompanied by 2 brilliant UFO's near the moon. Mission Control tried to keep the astronauts calm about with a story about their seeing space junk. They then heard strange noises on their radios similar to that heard by the crew of Apollo 11. The noises lasted for 45 minutes and were relayed to Mission Control.
Between November 14 to 24, Apollo 12 provided the second lunar landing with astronauts Conrad and Bean walking on the moon, and astronaut Gordon waiting their return in lunar orbit. Apollo 12 detected Moon geysers which formed into water clouds and covered an area of more than 10 square miles.

Photo # AS12-49-7319 shows a white glowing UFO hovering near an astronaut.
Apollo 12 was trailed by a UFO on three orbits around the Moon.
One was captured in photo # AS12-51-7553 and another is indicated in photo # AS12-54-8118.
Dr. James Harder, engineering professor, Columbia University of California, after scanning the communication tapes of the Apollo missions, said later that these incidents were kept quiet because of possible public panic. Lunar quakes and water vapours were detected by Apollo 12 and 14 instruments. Photo # AS12-7419, of the Humboldt Crater area, shows dark patches which resemble riverbed and vegetation frequently on Earth photos.
On November 24, back in orbit around the Earth, Apollo 12 passed above the east coast of India before landing in the Pacific Ocean. The astronauts saw, under their command module, a flying saucer whose flashing red light could clearly be seen above the surface of the Earth. They observed it for several minutes before landing.

In an interview on June 20, 1977, Gordon would comment:
"The later Apollos were a smoke-screen ... to cover up what's really going on out there ... and the bastards didn't even tell us! You think they need all that crap down in Florida just to put two guys up there on a ... on a bicycle? The hell they do! You know why they need us? So they've got a P.R. story for all that hardware they've been firing into space. We're nothing, man! Nothing!"

If the astronauts which the press reported on were nothing, what was the something? If the P.R. stories were not covering "all that hardware", what constituted all that hardware?

1969 - By December,
France had negotiated an arms sale to Libya in return for oil supplies.
In 1950, 75% of Europe's energy needs had been met by coal. By 1970, faith in permanently cheap and plentiful oil, backed up by government incentives, had produced a 60% dependence on oil - almost all of which was imported. And 25% of Europe's energy requirements were being supplied by Libya. Colonel Muammar Qaddafi had overthrown the pro-Western King Idris of Libya in September, 1969, speeding the expected rise of oil prices.
France now negotiated the sale of 100 advance jet aircraft to Libya.
France contented itself with the unenforceable Libyan promise that none of the planes go to Arab states bordering Israel. Since Libya had few pilots trained for jet aircraft, the only possible purpose that seemed obvious to the Americans was the ultimate delivery of the planes to the sates bordering Israel. Similar negotiations were conducted with the Federal Republic of Germany. At the beginning of 1970, Libya would demand larger oil revenues from foreign companies operating in Libya.

1969 - On December 17,
Project Bluebook was announced as terminated by the Secretary of the USAF.
All of the 80,000 pages of files were to be declassified covering 22 years of investigations involving 12,618 sightings of which 701 remained unsolved. Explanations of sightings included balloons, satellites, aircraft, lightning, reflections, stars, planets, the sun, the moon, weather conditions, or outright fabrications. Using the figures provided by the USAF, once every 11 days for 22 years someone in the U.S.A. sighted a flying object that no one could explain. Investigators quickly determined that the 5 person staff had done very little beyond administer the files. The information had been collected and investigated by others. Few of the cases which had been reported to private UFO research organizations were mentioned in the files lending suspicion to the suggestion that some other government agency had the "important files".

1969 -
By December, Vance Packard had his new book "The Sexual Wilderness" in the marketplace.
Packard surveyed the sex practices of 2,200 junior and senior students in colleges and universities in the U.S., England, Norway, Canada, Germany and Italy. Most significant of his findings is that in the past 20 years the percentage of 21-year-old unmarried college girls who have had sexual intercourse has risen nearly 60%. In the 1940s, Kinsey reported that about 27% of college-educated females had surrendered their virginity before marriage. ... Sixty-three percent of the English university girls questioned said that they were experienced, if not seasoned. Next came the German girls, with 60%; the Norwegians, 54%; the Canadians, 35%. Last were the Italian coeds, 90% of whom reported they were still innocent. ...
The rise in premarital relations, (Packard) feels, is due largely to an undermining of women's traditional role. Not only does the teenage girl find the rules at home increasingly relaxed, but 19% more American women attend college than did in 1940. And today's centres of higher education are geared to provide them with independence of thought, to say nothing of an opportunity and urgency to exercise that independence.

This state of affairs, Packard notes with alarm, has had a deleterious if not disastrous effect on the American male. Citing a 1967 American Medical Association journal's psychiatric report claiming that sexual roles are "being reversed", Packard says that "many young males not only feel their adequacy threatened, but are confused as to what the modern world expects of them."
... Packard ... seeks a solution to the problem ... (through) a codification of behaviour. ... The three elements should be present, he says, before society bestows its approval on premarital sex:

1) "That a deep friendship based upon substantial acquaintance exists between the man and the girl,"
2) "That both are out of high school; and if college is planned, that they have completed the first year of college if they are still teenagers," and
3) "That they hope to marry and their best friends know of the hope."

Unfortunately, in North American nations as well as many other industrialized and mass media served nations, NO national cultural uniform standard was defined as a guideline for the youth. Anarchy of mixed cultures within a nation, lack of religious direction without hypocracy, and lack of self-esteem and standards in the parent - promoted the degradation of constructive coping skills to younger generations. Human cultures continued to become erratic in adoption of practices which often contributed to the spread of diseases, a diminished reverence and aspect of spirituality for marriage and sexual experience, and, a continuing rise in the objectification of relationships and an acting out of biological needs largely held in denial by the culture. The result would include increased incidence of date-rapes, unwed mothers and absentee fathers, and, dysfunctional family units.
As too often has happened in recorded human history, representatives of the masses had chosen not to try a more spiritual approach to survival, as offered by a highly technically superior form of life, while choosing the time-honoured reaction of solace in military dependency at the sacrifice of social stability and harmony.

1969 - On December 30,
Ferdinand Marcos took his oath of office for a second term, machine guns were mounted on the grandstand, a helicopter hovered over Luneta Park, and navy gunboats patrolled Manila Bay. The campaign had been bloody. 17 out of 66 provinces had been bloodied by "terrorists" in constabulary uniforms taking over polling places; warlords in 19 provinces had used private armies to force the voting; houses and whole villages had been burned to the ground; an armed band on Batanes had taken over the whole island; special constabulary squads, known as "the Monkees" achieved terror in central Luzon; another group, the Barracudas, guarded Marcos candidates in Lanao del Norte; constabulary officers in Agusan Sur shot up a polling station; on election day, the Special Forces terrorized the provinces of Marinduque, Cagayan, Ilocos Sur, and Batanes, including 46 murders. Ballot boxes were burned, and replaced by stuffed boxes stored for the purpose in Philippine army safe houses, all handled by specially trained "fraud" teams of the air force and navy. In southern Cebu, Ferdinand won with a vote 2,000 greater than the registered voter number. The fraud was so obvious, in that the "results" showed that Ferdinand had won 7 of the 8 senatorial seats, and 86 of 124 House seats - that it was embarrassing though expected by Ferdinand.
The campaign had cost him $168 million to be re-elected, and the blood of scores.
He had printed more money and caused high inflation. The country was bankrupted.
He pressed Washington for a $100 million advance on military base rents; sought an IMF special loan to stabilize the currency; rolled over $275 million of short-term indebtedness to American and European banking groups - and was still forced to devalue the peso by 50%. Over 70% of Filipinos living on less than $200 per year had their buying power cut in half. Despite everything Ferdinand had to admit that he had lost, and it deeply shocked his ego.

Despite all the money, the killings, the manipulation - the world had changed.
Marcos and the Philippines were no longer a nation onto themselves - they were part of a global community. Marcos was no longer raping his country in private. Now, it was in public - and how the rest of the world received that determined the worth of what you had left. The first time, he had won: power, privilege, money. The second time, he had won the election and lost the prize. This time he had won a destitute country; a country in rebellion; a country that no longer respected him - in spite of the power, privilege and money he had abused to hang onto it.
Charges of corruption, fraud, and hidden wealth became the basis for impeachment hearings.
To avoid impeachment, Marcos announced that he was giving away, to the Marcos Foundation, all that he owned. He amended the statement later to exclude the possessions of Imelda and his children. But the public did not know of the secret bank accounts and international foundations. In the streets of Manila, 50,000 demonstrators denounced his victory as a joke. On January 26, 1970, the Marcoses would be jostled by 20,000 angry demonstrators when they emerged from the Legislative Building after giving his state of the nation address. Both were emotionally traumatized.

When Ferdinand refused to put in writing for a group of student demonstrators that he would not run for a third term, 4000 angry students stormed the Palace. The riot raged for 8 hours. The brutal military suppression that followed drove the student movement in favour of Communism especially because the students killed or injured had been attacked by squads specially trained by the USA government. Workmen welded the Palace gates shut and the compound became a fortress. Unaccustomed to direct and violent opposition, with no where to run to and no one to come to his rescue, he became paranoid and continually imagined that his political, underworld, or wealthy rivals had hired hitmen to assassinate him.
Ferdinand began to lose interest in his actress-mistress, Dovie Beams, and she, protected her interests by getting more evidence of his indiscretions. She learned that he had planned to return to a former mistress by whom he had children, Carmen Ortega. She taped 2 lovemaking sessions, kept articles of his clothing, exchanged swatches of pubic hair. She sent all of these back to the USA for safekeeping. The quarrels increased. Ferdinand declared that the movie she had been acting in was not good enough and would have to be recast, without her.

By September, 1970, Dovie had escalated the conflict - they had been apart much of the year - to the point where she had a direct confrontation with Ferdinand in front of several close associates. She was taken to a hotel room where she was assaulted and tortured and may have survived only because she was able to make a call to a friend in the USA from a telephone unnoticed by the others, in the bathroom. While American legislators began enquiring about her whereabouts to the Philippine government, she checked into a Manila hospital, anonymously, to have a haemorrhage stopped. Rumours swirled around Manila.
Finally, Dovie called the US Embassy and Consul Lawrence Harris and Ambassador Byroade who booked her into a hotel secured by embassy security. She then called a press conference. She carefully referred to Ferdinand as "Fred" which is how she had been introduced to him. She played one of the tapes in its entirety leaving to no one's imagination as to who was with her. Both Imelda and Ferdinand were furious and secret agents were sent by both to murder her on her way back to the USA. Confrontations with assassins occurred several times during her transfer at Hong Kong. She reached Los Angeles, made copies of, or split her evidence, secreted it away as life insurance - to be made public if she died, and published her charges publicly.
Imelda would never forgive Ferdinand for the shame and disgrace reflected on her as not only a woman deceived, but also, one no longer found attractive. Ferdinand had been involved in other affairs before; this was the limit for Imelda. His price would be a share of everything he had.

1969 - During the year,
Akira Fujishima, a Tokyo University chemist, would discover with his associates that "Titanium Dioxide" had the ability to break down water when exposed to ultraviolet radiation. The significance and importance of this photochemical reaction would not be appreciated for 25 years.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX
Memory Stimulators.
1970 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
Beneath the Planet of the Apes; Little Big Man; Love Story; Husbands; There was a Crooked Man; Tora Tora Tora!; Woodstock, Catch-22; Act of Heart; Airport; Patton; Two Mules for Sister Sara; Hornet's Nest; El Condor; M*A*S*H; Goin Down the Road; Wuthering Heights; Leo the Last; The Out-of-Towners; Burn!; Gas-s-s-s; The Computer Wore Tennis Shoes; Hi Mom!; The Beguiled; Dirty Dingus Magee.

Songs :
Raindrops Fallin' On My Head; Bridge Over Troubled Water; Close To You; Pinball Wizard; Rose Garden; Mr. Business Man; One Less Bell To Answer; War; A B C; Make It With You; American Woman; We've Only Just Begun; Cracklin Rose; Everything Is Beautiful; Sunday Morning Coming Down; My Woman, My Woman; He Loves Me All The Way; I Can't Believe That You've Stopped Loving Me; Coal Miner's Daughter; There Must Be More Love Than This; Flesh and Blood: If I Were A Carpenter.
General News :

Consumer Price Index: 116.3
Failing USA banks lose $52.826 millions of depositor's monies.

1970 - During this year,
The CIA Clandestine Services division employed 6000 personnel and had the largest budget ($440 million) of any section of the American intelligence services. Within this division, 1,800 persons were assigned to covert action and had a budget of $260 million.

1970 - On January 01,
Near Cowichan, B.C. - a large luminous craft is observed to hover outside a hospital.

1970 - During the year,
The Private Export Funding Corporation (PEFCO) is organized.
It is a trade finance corporation owned by a consortium of USA commercial banks and industrial companies that arranges fixed-rate medium-term and long-term loans to foreign buyers. It works closely with the Export-Import bank (Eximbank), which guarantees repayment of PEFCO loans. The corporation finances its activities through the sale of debt securities in the capital markets and by credit lines from member banks and the Eximbank.
The formation of this corporation indicates that special federal assistance corporations, special banking regulation considerations, special purpose regional capitalization institutions, taxation policies, and government deficit financing are proving inadequate to maintain growth in the capitalist system. As more institutions become involved in forced (subsidized, loss protected, purchased on credit) market transfer rather than free market transfer, the market system becomes more susceptible to collapse. What happens if too many borrowers default and adequate reserves to cover the loss are absent?

1970 - In January,
The USAF announced the intended use of laser designator/ranger finds in the Vietnam military environment.
Testing at Elgin AFB and elsewhere was expected to result in the use of such technology in military environment where air attack on targets met with minimal resistance, such as Vietnam. North Vietnam had no warplanes. By February, the Pentagon would be "studying a proposal to provide enough modern sensing devices so that South Vietnam could seal its entire 900 mile border against sizable enemy infiltration." A scientist would add: "we can now provide for ground troops the kind of early warning systems that we long have provided in anti-submarine warfare and air defense."
This proposed sensor seal resembled the McNamara Line - land mines, barbed wire, and electronic sensors which were placed along the 39 mile demarcation line between South and North Vietnam (and was ineffective). A number of monitoring devices were already in place by February. A two-foot long cylindrical sonobuoy, used by the Navy to track enemy submarines, was dropped into the trees and brush around Khe Sanh, and along the Ho Chi Minh trail in Laos and Cambodia. It recorded the sounds of enemy troops and trucks, stored the information until special planes flew overhead and picked up the information electronically. The recordings were then transmitted to a computer bank. This resulted in General Westmoreland stating that Firepower "can be concentrated without massing numbers of troops."

By January, the U.S. Army was developing the use of lasers for illuminating night viewing and night observation devices, and as a rangefinder for helicopter weapon delivery and artillery spotting from both the air and the ground. Technological warfare was replacing men on the field; permitting destruction in ways less visible, less costly and less hazardous to Americans.

The development of technology has always been largely capital or effort intensive for it must overcome the inertia of what is believed to be possible by attachment to an insight as to what could be possible. Even with imagination, less efficient than insight, large quantities of effort must be sacrificed in order to make the large number of tests, adjustments, prototypes and proposals necessary to reach a practical result.
As compulsive-obsessive behaviours are required to usually see such a failure ridden activity through, unresolved trauma often resides in the key persons involved with the project. These are often represented by unresolved emotions of hate (from abandonment or abuse), greed (from poverty and/or lust), or fear (from personal insecurity of identity or threats to safety). The ancient Greeks recognized the tragedy of choice between the power of technology resulting in a weak society and the power of simplicity of lifestyle resulting in a strong society. They chose the latter. All industrialized countries have chosen the former.

1970 - In February,
Professor Arthur W. Galston of Yale University, U.S.A. "proposed a new international agreement to ban 'Ecocide' - the wilful destruction of the environment." Ecocide is the premeditated assault of a nation and its resources against the individuals, culture and biological fabric of another country and its environs. By its very nature such warfare knows no simple boundaries. National demarcations, programs, military operations have no purview over the order of the natural world.

1970 - By this year,
Dr. Zaboj V. Harvalik, a professional physicist, then recently retired from his post as scientific adviser to the U.S. Army's Advanced Material Concepts Agency, had determined that dowsers react to energies yet undetectable by human technology. He became chief of the research committee of the American Society of Dowsers. At his home in Lorto, Virginia, he made meticulous tests which showed that dowsers reacted with varying degrees of sensitivity to polarized electromagnetic radiation, artificial alternating magnetic fields in a frequency range from one to one million cycles per second and to DC magnetic fields. Harvalik believed that dowsers pick up magnetic field gradients whether they are trying to find water, underground pipes, wires, tunnels, or geological anomalies.

To shield parts of the human body from the effects of the ocean of magnetic forces surrounding it, Harvalik took an eight-foot-by-ten-inch strip of highly effective magnetic shielding (made from a Co-Netic AA Perfection Annealed sheet 0.025 inches thick, produced by the "Magnetic Shield Division" of the "Perfection Mica Company)" and rolled it into a two-layered cylinder which could be lowered around the body to shield head, shoulders, torso, or pelvic area.
With the shield covering the head, Harvalik walked blindfolded across a level area known to produce dowsing signals and obtained a strong reaction over each of three dowsing zones. The same reactions were obtained with his head exposed but his shoulders shielded. Gradually lowering the shield, Harvalik found that he could pick up dowsing signals until he reached an area between the 7th and 12th rib, that is to say from sternum to naval. This suggested that "dowsing sensors" must be located in the region of the solar plexus.

1970 - On February 11,
Japan would launch its first Earth satellite.

1970 - By March,
The "Yamaguchi Gumi" and the "Inagawa Kai" and other large Yakuza underworld gangs were operating in the Philippines with the total sanction of the Marcos government, and, in partnership with Ferdinand Marcos. According to INTERPOL, more than 100,000 Yakuza were operating in Japan with interests throughout East Asia, making a profit of well over $5 billion a year running guns, drugs, sex rings, extortion rackets, and murder syndicates. All of the gangs had infiltrated travel, entertainment, and mass media companies. Korea was the primary base outside of Japan; the Philippines came a close second. Marcos was "very much in debt" to the Yakuza for their assistance as spies, breakers of civil unrest, extortion against political opponents, beatings, control of the media, and assassinations for his benefit.

Although Ferdinand and Imelda persisted in saying that their New Society had no crime, no drug problem, and no prostitution - all three were officially illegal, hence, did not exist - yet, all flourished greater than ever. Sex tours dominated the "hospitality" and travel industry. At least 100,000 women worked within the organized prostitution business; another 200,000 worked freelance, part-time or in unlicensed establishments. Under martial law, only massage parlours and saunas could stay open after midnight. There was collusion between hotels, police, pimps, and prostitutes. The Yakuza bribed their way into lucrative, long-term relationships with many Manila businessmen, bureaucrats, and palace advisers. Import-export firms and travel agencies were often used as Yakuza fronts for illegal activities. At least 30 clubs and restaurants would come to be owned and run by Yakuza, using Filipino front men.
When there were police crackdowns, bureaucrats and immigration officials would interfere to make sure that Yakuza members were neither arrested nor deported. Prostitution had been banned in Japan in 1958; 85% of tourists to the Philippines were Japanese males - more than 1 million Japanese men visited Taiwan, Korea, Thailand, and the Philippines each year exclusively for sex. In reverse, thousands of young girls were taken to Japan each year to become "entertainers" in bath houses, bars, brothels. The Yakuza alone was estimated to earn $1.5 million "per day" from child sex (aged 6 to 17). Large child brothels attended the USA military bases encouraging GI pedophiles.

1970 - A March 31st
FBI memorandum Targets Evelyn Rose Sell, a Head Start teacher.
It was captioned "Evelyn Rose Sell, SM-SWP" (Subversive Matter - Socialist Workers party).
This matter became a vendetta against Sell, a preschool teacher - whom even the FBI described as "an intelligent, excellent teacher who was well qualified in her field." An interstate, interagency conspiracy would develop between the FBI Cointelpro and the Austin Police Department to result in Sell's teaching contract not being renewed in 1970.
Sell had moved to Austin in the summer of 1969, after teaching in the Head Start program in Detroit for 4 years. She had helped organize a special unit of the Detroit Federation of Teachers encompassing the preschool program, and had been a delegate to the 1969 Michigan Federation of Teachers convention in the spring of that year.

Sell's political beliefs were no secret.
She had joined the SWP in 1948 and had been active in socialist politics since then.
She was nominated by the party several times as a candidate for public office.
In 1968, she had run for public office in Michigan as an SWP candidate.
Her son Eric, a student at Austin High School and an activist in the Student Mobilization Committee was called into the principal's office and warned not to organize any antiwar activities; the FBI had visited the school and also told them about his mother. M.K. Hag, Jr., then president of the Austin School board later justified the non-rehiring of Mrs. Sell on the basis that "the social climate was such that we would fire anyone who was a socialist." Sell applied to the Human Opportunities Corporation (HOC), the new agency set up to direct the Head Start Program. She was accepted as an educational services supervisor. By early 1971, she had been promoted to director of the Child Development Program.
FBI agents frequented the offices of HOC afterwards, repeatedly visiting at least 3 of Sell's supervisors in an attempt to convince them that, qualified or not, this socialist did not deserve a job. One reason they offered was her active participation in the women's movement. Sell had played a leading role in organizing a demonstration in support of the right to abortion.

The HOC directors were outraged by the visits.
Sell noted: "One of them told me that he was seriously considering filing a lawsuit against the FBI because of the harassing visits." The HOC resisted the FBI pressure because they considered Sell a great asset to the program. Few others were as fortunate. Many hundreds of individuals lost service positions within their communities for which they were competent and by which they were making positive contributions to society. They would have justification never to trust the government again.
Walter Elliot, a scoutmaster of Troop 339 in Orange, New Jersey, was railroaded out of his position in 1968 by FBI intervention because - he was married to a socialist. Morris Starsky, a professor of philosophy at Arizona State University, lost his job in June, 1970, following harassment of the Faculty Committee on Academic Freedom and Tenure by J. Edgar Hoover - even though 3,000 students and 250 professors signed petitions supporting Starsky's right to academic freedom. Many hundreds of others met a similar fate - all for the cause of justice and freedom.

1970 - Between April 11 to 17,
The "Apollo 13" moon probe did not attempt to land on the moon following an earlier mysterious explosion of one of the oxygen tanks. Astronauts James Lovell, John Swigger, and Fred Haise did fulfill their photographic missions.
As they were approaching the Moon, the spacecraft was suddenly crippled by the explosion of a pressurized oxygen tank in the service module. While waiting for instructions from Mission Control, the Apollo went all the way around the Moon without landing (in order to save oxygen) and then returned to Earth as per instructions received. NASA officials stated that the explosion was caused by defective insulation of electrical wires in the oxygen tank?
Many radio technicians received messages and radio signals from outer space, especially in the vicinity of the Moon during this time. UFOs were in photos # AS 13-60-8622, and NASA 13-60-8609.

1970 - On April 12,
The first publicly reported loss of a nuclear-propelled submarine was made by the Soviet Union.
One of its "November Class" submarines had sunk in the Atlantic Ocean off Cape Finisterre (Spain) during the Okean exercises. An engineering mishap had occurred and the submarine was able to surface only long enough for most of the crew to escape. The fact that it was during an observed war exercises training session and that most of the crew survived meant that the sinking could not be denied or "hidden".

1970 - On April 14,
The People's Republic of China would launch its first satellite.

1970 - On April 15,
U.S.A. Deputy Secretary of Defense, David Packard stated that the herbicide 2,4,5-T was officially banned from use in Vietnam, yet its continuance persisted. In December, 1969, The World Health Organization condemned the use of herbicides and tear gas in warfare, as well as suggesting that 2,4,5-T was a "possible cause of birth defects in children." Thomas Whiteside, in his book Defoliation published in 1970, stated:
"... in a quarter of a century since the Department of Defense first developed the biological warfare uses of this material (2,4,5-T) it has not completed a single series of formal tertological tests on pregnant animals to determine whether it has an effect on their unborn offspring."

1970 -
The Bank Secrecy Act becomes a USA federal law.
It is intended to discourage the use of currency in illegal transactions, requiring banks to microfilm all checks written for amounts above $100, and report all cash deposits, withdrawals, or transfers of $10,000 to the Internal Revenue Service. International transactions are reportable to the U.S. Customs Department. Banks are required to fill out a currency transaction report within 15 days of the transaction date to avoid having to pay stiff penalties.
The fact that a law has been passed indicates that the practice has been occurring for some period of time.
First, until the practice becomes reasonably prevalent, it will go unnoticed in mass societies. Once it is noticed, there will be a period of confusion between whether the government has the authority and the right to curtail the newly developing norm. Next, blatant and dramatic examples will incite several members of the society to take a visible position on the subject and encourage discussion and consideration of its moral appropriateness. Then, drafts of the Act will be submitted for discussion, modified and amended a number of times, further debated, and finally passed. Considering the size of American society and the inefficiency of its bureaucracy, it confirms that this practice of tax evasion has been utilized at this point for not less than 20 years - largely to "hide" illicitly obtained monies - particularly from bootleg alcoholic beverage marketing, gambling and prostitution.

1970 - On April 29,
Summarization of sexual misconceptions as defined by the work of Dr. William H. Masters and Mrs. Virginia E. Johnson contained the following:
"It is generally believed by otherwise knowing well-informed women that all a man requires is the chance and that he can perform promptly, without respect to time, place, circumstance or partner. ... When he fails in the marital bed, her first reaction is 'What is wrong with me? He doesn't love me. I'm not attractive.'
Later, resentment may set in and she blames him on the ground that if he is push-button, then he is responsible for the failure. ... If you include the failure of couples to communicate about sexual matters and their lack of understanding about sexual matters so that the relationship is not working at optimum level for them, the estimate (of at least 50% of marriages in the USA contending with some form of sexual disfunction) is probably incredibly conservative."

Listed causes for sexual incompetence included:
1. Inability to control sexual climax. 2. Too much (alcoholic beverage) drinking. 3. A childhood in which a totally dominant mother made the decisions. 4. A childhood dominated by an demanding insensitive father. 5. A background of rigid religious orthodoxy that vies sex as sin. 6. Careless advice from arrogant and ignorant marriage counsellors. 7. Debilitating illness, or physical disability. 8. Fear of ridicule and insensitivity on the part of the wife. 9. Shame that the wife may tell others about "his" problem.

Master and Johnson state a 74% cure rate after a 5-year follow-up to techniques being taught in privacy to the couple together with mediated communication between the spouses intended to build the communication skills of trust, honesty, openness, self-assertiveness, forgiveness, sensitivity, listening.

If a human culture is deserving of being termed "advanced" why would it harbour and promote in its social patterns, schools, and churches - these characteristics: rigid role patterns; manipulation; intolerance; objectification of others; insensitivity; authoritarianism; doubt; victimization; lack of self-esteem?

1970 - In May,
A radionic analysis of Venus was begun by T. Galen Hieronymus and his wife Louise.
Galen took a ten-power telescope from an ordinary navigational sextant and fixed it to his house roof in Lakemont, Georgia, such that he could direct it at any visible spot in the heavens. After focusing on Venus, he replaced the eyepiece with a metal disc penetrated by a hole, and soldered a wire to the edge of the disc to conduct what he believed was eloptic energy down into the house to the radionic device operated by Louise.
Mrs. Hieronymus began to run tests similar to those she had used earlier to measure the vitality of astronauts' body parts and systems so as to see if anything on the Venusian surface gave a similar response. Of the 35 wavelengths received from astronauts' organs and systems, half seemed to be tunable from Venus, the others not at all.

Perplexed by these findings, the Hieronymus' were suddenly struck that they might be receiving energies from parts, not of animals, but of plants. So they began running analyses on the organs of earthly plants as if they were human . Checking 3 trees and a grass and a weed, they discovered that what appeared to be the equivalent of many human organs could be found. Of the mango, willow and pine trees, the mango alone seemed to have something like a lymphatic system, but, unlike both the willow and pine, no duodenum or spleen. No sex organs could be found detected for the Bermuda grass which propagates underground, though a weed registered ovaries even when the seeds had been removed.
Clearly, some structure was indicated on Venus which the Hieronymus' assumed must be some form of plant life. The vitality of the organs indicated seemed to be more than twice that of the Earth plants he tested and he could not confirm that such beings might have anything more material than astral, that is spiritual, bodies.

According to MacLean's "Triune Brain" theory of neurophysiology, it is noteworthy that an intellectually advanced "insect" lifeform with the focus of a "reptilian" brain would be expected to display not more than half the number of biological structures of a human with a capacity for twice the vitality in a suitable environment. In reality, this describes the GRAY/RUST beings from Sirius who have populated Venus, the Moon and have been building bases on the Earth.
It should be noted here that "spirituality" relates to that sense of "oneness" with the universe which enables a being to recognize the equal right of all living beings to occupy the universe to the extent that their motives are constructive and positive towards the continued health of the universe. How would humanity appear to beings which were more spiritual, more technologically adept, and more biologically threatened. The history of humanity is one of increasing inequity: increasing hatred, pride, greed, lust, environmental destruction, famine, wars - self-destruction. The "expected" attitude of the GRAY/RUST would be to let this "diseased" germ called humanity destroy itself, hopefully as quickly as possible, and let the universe get on with living! Of course, a less than perfect spiritual being could become impatient with the "collateral damage" being done both on the Earth and threatened beyond, and take an active role in "assisting" in the expected outcome.

1970 -
Professor William A. Tiller, chairman of the Department of Material Science at Stanford University synthesized a concept uniting Hindu Yoga, the endocrine centres, acupuncture meridians, the life force and spiritual bonding. Tiller demonstrated that the more complex the structure, whether physical, emotional or otherwise - the more complex the radiated electromagnetic energy became that was radiated from the substance. He set out 7 principles acting in humanity including the physical, the etheric or bioplasmic, the astral or emotional, intuitive mind, intellectual mind, spiritual mind, and pure spirit or divine mind. Further, he pointed out that the 7 endocrine centres - the gonads, cells of Lydig, adrenals, thymus, pineal and pituitary, paralleled in Hindu philosophy the 7 chakras, linked by a current of vitality.
Tiller believed that one of our main personal goals should be to tune the various systems within ourselves such that they radiated their energies synchronously providing a degree of high power and awareness that would bring us individually into harmony with others over the spectral distribution expressed. Failing to do so would result in a more limited awareness, a more limited degree of expressiveness, a more restricted ability to identify and communicate with others easily.
"When we love, we release our thought energy and transpose it to the recipient of our love. Our primary responsibility is to love."

Perhaps an advanced intelligent plantform represents one of the highest spiritual forms of physical being. Devoid of the anti-spiritual physical centred ego and the accumulative trauma memory which plague humanity with an inclination toward iniquities, such a being would find it easy and natural by tendency to express itself spiritually.

1970 - On May 04,
4 Anti-war Demonstrator-Students were killed at Kent State University and 9 were wounded when National Guard troops opened fire on an assembly of demonstrating students. The public shock of unarmed American teenagers being killed by American troops signalled a turning point in American attitudes and foreign policy. The reality was not the public perception.
Politically, American Presidents now had to face the possibility of Civil War in their own country if they did not demonstrate a willingness to take American troops out of Vietnam. The Nixon Administration would panic at this prospect believing that to do so was to turn southeast Asia over to the Communists. Victory now became imperative at almost any cost. While statements and statistics would suggest that American involvement in Vietnam was decreasing. More correctly, the war in Southeast Asia was spreading and intensifying. In an effort to coerce victory, American military efforts pounded targets in Laos, Cambodia and North Vietnam in an effort to crush all resistance. The truth is that more southeast Asians died within a shorter period of time because of the "success" of the peace marches. The positive aspect was that politically, the duration of the remainder of the war finally had to have limits put on it.

1970 - During May,
The FBI is accused of committing Arson and other Violence against the Alabama branch of the ACLU.
The defense counsel for the ACLU argued in court that an FBI agent "committed arson and other violence that police used as a reason for declaring that university students were unlawfully assembled" - leading to the arrest of 150 students. The court ruled that the agent's role was irrelevant unless the defense could establish that the agent had been instructed to commit the violent acts. This was impossible since the FBI and police thwarted the cousels efforts to locate the agent who had admitted the acts to him.
William Frapolly, who surfaced as a government informer in the Chicago Eight conspiracy trial, an active member of student and off-campus peace groups in Chicago, "during an antiwar rally at his college ... grabbed the microphone from the college president and wrestled him off the stage" and "worked out a scheme for wrecking the toilets in the college dorms ... as an act of antiwar protest." Many such cases of entrapment and the attempted and real incitement of activists and protestors to violence enabled the policing and FBI forces to retalliate with detainment, victimization, registration, and, excessive force. The same tactic of infiltration, attempted re-orientation, betrayal, and entrapment would be used on both American and Canadian campuses by FBI financed and directed "spies" until at least 1980, and had begun as early as 1967.

1970 - During the year,
The CUSIP number was introduced to the banking industry.
It is a 9-digit identifier - 7 numbers and 2 letters - used to identify all USA securities issued in book-entry or certificate form after 1970. The CUSIP numbering system (Committee on Uniform Securities Identification Procedures) was developed by the American Bankers Association. The intent of its development is to restrict forgery and embezzlement as well as errors in the transfer of large value securities. This is particularly relevant in electronic banking in which transaction may take place by wire transfer, on an almost immediate scale internationally, and account balances may be changed before the arrival of the actual paper documents. By verifying the CUSIP number, the bank officer can be reasonably confident that the securities being processed by computer are legitimate.

1970 - On May 25,
"Nuclear War Games" an article written by Richard J. Barnett declares that "to this date some 5500 nuclear weapons are positioned in Southeast Asia. Most of these weapons are aboard carriers and can be brought to Vietnam extremely rapidly. A substantial number of weapons are also located on the mainland in South Korea with some located in Thailand. ... U.S. forces possess a wide range of small-yield nuclear weapons in the one-to-five kiloton range for battlefield use. They can be launched from a fighter bomber or can form part of the army's medium range artillery such as the Sergeant and Honest John rockets. Nuclear shells can be fired from certain types of howitzers. Used against concentrations of troops, nuclear weapons would be made to burst in the air up to a height of 1,500 feet, causing enormous casualties to those exposed to the blast. The other method, a ground burst, would affect a smaller area, but the destruction would be heavy and the radiation more deadly and longer lasting than in a mid-air burst."

1970 - By June,
Rogelio Roxas, a Philippine locksmith and amateur treasure hunter, dug up a solid gold Buddha weighing 1 ton. A former president of the Treasure Hunters Association of the Philippines, he said he had acquired a Japanese map showing a site near Baguio in abandoned Benguet mine shafts. He had spent months systematically searching for the correct part of the tunnel. After 7 months of digging, he and his party reached a cave littered with skeletons. Inside a crate they found a gold Buddha, distinctly Siamese in its features, possibly taken there by Yamashita when the General had moved his headquarters there. It was 28 inches high and was later determined to weigh 2,000 pounds. The head could be unscrewed and removed to reveal a cavity the size of a small bean pot filled with jewels. It could have been seized anywhere in Siam during the Japanese occupation. It was appraised at $5 million for its gold content (worth 26 million in 1986). After retrieving the Buddha, Roxas received many offers for it including one from Josefa Marcos, mother of Ferdinand Marcos, the Philippine President. As a long-term member of the Treasure Hunters Association he had made no efforts to conceal the find. He refused to sell it.

Ten soldiers arrived at his house late one night, armed with guns and a warrant from Josefa's brother-in-law, Judge Pio Marcos. The leader was the president's brother-in-law, Marcelino Barba, the husband of Fortuna Marcos, Ferdinand's youngest sister. The soldiers were agents of the National Bureau of Investigation and the Criminal Investigation Service of the Constabulary. They took the Buddha away in a truck, along with the jewels and 18 small gold bars, Roxas had found.
The next day, Roxas complained to Judge Pio who advised him sternly to be careful and keep quiet about the seizure. Roxas, like many Filipinos, was unaware of the deceptions behind the activities of the Marcoses. Naive, Roxa's story made the newspapers 14 days later. Another Baguio judge ordered the military to turn over the statue. The army delayed for a further 14 days while a Manila sculptor produced a non lookalike brass Buddha with non-detachable head. It would later be kept in Ferdinand's study at Malacanang, to be used to discount questions about the original. The real one, witnessed by numerous people later, was under heavy guard in the beach palace in Bataan.

In May, 1971, a committee of the Philippine Senate opened an investigation into the affair.
Ferdinand denounced the inquiry as a politically motivated attack and promised a "personal vendetta". In August, 1971, Roxas was scheduled to present his story before television cameras at the Plaza Miranda rally. Bombs and grenades thrown by palace security guards on orders to kill Roxas , missed him, but resulted in the killing of nine people and the injuring of 96 including 8 senatorial candidates. Marcos declared martial law and arrested Roxas, who spent 2 years in prison. Ferdinand threatened to go after anyone who linked he or his relatives with the seizure. The Baguio police chief, who had been part of the raid disappeared shortly afterwards as did other witnesses. With martial law in effect, Ferdinand could now conduct searches freely on any property for the so-called Yamashita's Gold.
The discovery of the gold buddha inspired Ferdinand Marcos to make renewed efforts to find more of the hidden gold. He would keep 2,000 soldiers busy for years digging out 35 miles of tunnels under MacArthur's old headquarters, at Fort Bonifacio, which the Japanese had taken over after their invasion. After two years, he reportedly had only recovered one gold bar. Between then and 5 years from beginning, they uncovered about $500 million worth of gold bullion (1975 values).

1970 - In June,
The movie "Catch-22" is released in North America.
An extension of a WWII experience by Joseph Heller, who authored the story 15 years later, it is a critique of the attitudes behind modern human warfare.
The story tells of a bombardier named Yossarian who finds himself in an irrational war.
The dominant image is the circle. For every question there is only one alternative: that which supports the aims of materialism, the self-obsessed, the state. Laughter becomes a near hysterical or despairing cry for help. The Air Force's imaginary Catch-22 becomes the answer to Yossarian's request of the flight surgeon to ground him on the basis of fear-based insanity: "Naturally, anyone who wants to get out of combat isn't really crazy. So supernaturally, anyone who says he is too crazy to keep flying is too sane to stop." His superiors encourage him with: "All you have to do is like us." Yet in so doing, serving a totalitarian military establishment, Yossarian must betray his concerns for his fellow humans.
Yossarian sees the hypocracy of war, the killing and maiming of millions of people on the prospect of "helping" humanity. In an arena where the only option presented is participation, the confused character of Yossarian can only react with desertion. He has no time to consider the possibility of other choices. Neither has he been given the spiritual skills of reverence, meditation, prayer, awareness - with which to seek a constructive option. Death is the second hero of the work: it reappears repeatedly in the image of the dying gunner lying at the feet of Yossarian in their bomber as they complete a mission over WWII France. The rising awareness of Yossarian to his total lack of control over the situation shocks him. Snowdon, the gunner, he cannot save - death, and the terror presented by the brutality of the injuries of Snowdon, impress upon him the question: "If you die today, what will your existence here on Earth have accomplished?" Mike Nichols, the director of the movie, seeks to open the mind of the viewer - to enlarge one's capacity for awareness - not to provide or suggest authoritarian answers.

1970 - On June 18,
Peter Dale Scott in "Cambodia - Why the Generals Won", summarized the war in Southeast Asia and the constantly increasing buildup of the U.S.A. military presence there.

"It must be clearly understood that since 1950, the year of the Korean War and the China Lobby, there has never been a genuine US de-escalation in Southeast Asia. Every apparent de-escalation of the fighting, such as in Vietnam in 1954 and Laos in 1961-62, has been balanced by an escalation, wither covert of structural, whose long-range result overshadowed America's previous war effort.
In 1954, for example, America's direct involvement in the First Indochina war was limited to a few dozen USAF transport planes and pilots "on loan" to Chennault's airline CAT, plus 200 USAF technicians to service them. Through Dulles, Radford and Nixon failed to implement their proposals for US air strikes and/or troop intervention, Dulles was able to substitute for the discarded plan for immediate intervention a "proposal for creating a Southeast Asia Treaty Organization." SEATO soon became a cover for US "limited war" games in Southeast Asia, which in turn grew into the first covert US military involvement in Laos in 1959 - the start of the Second Indochina War.

In early 1961, Kennedy resisted energetic pressures from the Joint Chiefs to invade Laos openly with up to 60,000 soldiers empowered, if necessary, to use tactical nuclear weapons (Nixon also conferred with Kennedy and again urged, at least, "a commitment of American air power"). Unwilling with his limited reserves to initiate major operations simultaneously in both Laos and Cuba, Kennedy settled for a political solution in Laos, beginning with a cease fire which went into effect on May 3, 1961. On May 4 and 5, 1961, Rusk and Kennedy announced the first series of measures to strengthen the U.S. military commitment in South Vietnam. ....
In 1968, finally, we know that the "de-escalation" announced by President Johnson in March and November, in the form of a cessation of the bombing of North Vietnam, was misleading. In fact the same planes were simply diverted from North Vietnam to Laos: the over-all level of bombing far from decreasing, continued to increase. ..."

1970 - On June 27,
Senhor Aristeu Machado and his 5 daughters were playing a game on the verandah of their home at 318 Avenida Niemeyer, Rio de Janeiro, overlooking the south Atlantic Ocean, when they noticed the following incident. Senhor Joao Aguiar, friend, neighbour and an official of the Brazilian Federal Police was with them. In glancing out over the sea at about 11.40 a.m., Aguiar saw what he first thought was a motorboat hitting the water, throwing up spray on all sides. Two persons appeared to be on the craft, wearing shining clothing and something on their heads and they were making hand signals.
The craft was a greyish metallic colour; it seemed to be between 15 and 20 feet in length and had a transparent cupola. At no time did the craft make a bobbing motion as that associated with a boat floating on or going through sea swell would.

Aguiar ran to the nearby hotel and telephoned the police who promised to help the occupants of the suspected distressed craft. Shortly after returning to the verandah, and about 40 minutes after Aguiar had first noticed it, the craft skimmed the water for about 300 yards and then took off, flying speedily towards the SE. Once airborne, the object appeared to be transparent rather than aluminum coloured, and the shape was now clearly disc-shaped. Machado's wife said she could see 2 beings sitting inside the craft. Non of the witnesses heard any sound from the craft. A hexagonal-shaped appendage retracted into the underside of the main body, and a number of lights on the appendage flashed, in sequence, green, yellow, red.
On the sea where the UFO had originally rested, the witnesses saw a white hoop-shaped object 'about the size of a trunk or chest'. Suddenly the hoop sank, then reappeared. A yellow oval-shaped section separated from it. This, it was estimated was some 16 inches across with about 8 inches projecting above the surface of the water. It remained stationary for about 3 minutes, then began to move towards the shore, with its longer axis directed towards the witnesses. A green flange at the rear of the object separated from the main body and followed it at a distance of about 1 yard. After 15 minutes, the yellow oval was about 130 yards from the shore, when it made a right-angled turn to its left and headed for the beach at Gavea - a movement directly opposed to the maritime current present at that time.

The Harbour Police from Fort Copacabana had arrived on the scene about 20 minutes after Aguiar made his telephone call, so it is probable that they saw the craft take off. At roughly the place where the hoop had been left the launch stopped and the police hauled on board a red cylindrical object. They made off at speed to their base. No statement was made by the police regarding what they saw or found.

1970 - On June 27,
Henry Kissinger, at a meeting of the White House 40 Committee on Chile stated:

"I don't see why we need to stand by and watch a country go Communist due to the irresponsibility of its own people."
During the Nixon presidency, National Security Council staff were largely substituted for State Department and CIA input into foreign policy by Nixon and Kissinger.

1970 - In the July 11 edition of
"New Yorker" magazine, Thomas Whiteside writes of the defoliant strategy used by U.S.A. military forces in Vietnam:
"... it can be estimated that the American military destroyed the rice supply of a million people with the aim of denying food to twenty thousand Viet Cong. Or, to put it another way, in order to deprive the Viet Cong of one ton of rice the American military has to destroy fifty tons of rice that would ordinarily support members of the civilian population."

1970 - During August,
The USSR Space Surveillance Network (SKKP) is established.
It will be capable of detecting a 5 kopeck coin at a distance of several thousand km.
An advanced warning system against nuclear missile attack and air attack provides a 30 minute warning against any USA land-based ICBM attack. Initially, satellites provide initial detection which is then confirmed with two over-the-horizon (OTH) radars directed at the USA ICBM fields. These detections are followed up by 11 large Hen House detection and tracking radars at 6 sites around the edge of the Asian Communist community. This ballistic missile ground-based radar network (SPRN) can confirm the warning from the first 2, count the number of missiles and provide an automatic attack characterization. A database of aerial satellites is maintained.
By 1987, the Soviets will be employing more than 10,000 radars of at least 15 types located at 1200 sites to warn of aircraft approaches. The "Hen House" radars were designed in the 1960s and would be replaced by more advanced "Large Phased Array Radars" (LPAR) in the 1990s.

1970 - On August 17,
"Venus 7", a USSR interplanetary satellite, is launched as an unmanned space observatory.
It will experience a soft landing on Venus on December 15 and transmit data back.

1970 - On September 04,
Occidental Petroleum, operating in Libya, agreed to the requests of Libya to pay an increase of 40 cents a barrel - or 20% - in the price of its oil. Beginning on January 29, 1970, Libya had requested the price increase, representing the largest single jump in the history of oil negotiations to date, and had imposed production cutbacks up to 45% to encourage the change. An immediate increase of 30 cents a barrel was now made, rising to 40 cents over 5 years. Other companies agreed to follow the example of Occidental.

1970 - On September 12,
"Luna 16", a Soviet lunar exploration satellite of 5727 kg and carrying an 1880 kg lander craft was first placed into lunar orbit, corrected, and lowered with a descent engine onto the Sea of Fertility. A drilling arm was employed on command from the Earth facility and penetrated 35 cm into the surface to retrieve 100 gm of material. That was lifted into the loading hatch of a spherical capsule atop the ascent rocket stage, and hermetically sealed. After 26-1/2 hours on the surface the ascent vehicle lifted off the lunar surface on a direct Earth-return trajectory. The 50 cm diameter 39 kg capsule included an instrument compartment, a chute compartment and two balloons. No course corrections were necessary. 3 hours before the 11 km/sec re-entry, the capsule was released. It was recovered in Kazakhstan on September 24.

1970 - In November,
Dr. Ray Brown, diver and lecturer of Mesa, Arizona, had the following diving experience while he and others were searching for Spanish treasure galleons.

"... a violent squall came up. We had to hang on to mangroves on the island, it was so violent. Six-to eight-foot waves broke over us and we lost most of our equipment.
In the morning we saw that our compasses were spinning and our magnetometers were not giving readings. We took off northeast from the island. It was murky but suddenly we could see outlines of buildings under the water. It seemed to be a large exposed area of an underwater city. We were 5 divers and we all jumped in and dove down, looking for anything we could find.

As we swam on, the water became clear. I was close to the bottom at 135 feet and was trying to keep up with the diver ahead of me. I turned to look toward the sun through the murky water and saw a pyramid-shape shinning like a mirror. About 35 to 40 feet from the top was an opening. I was reluctant to go inside ... but I swam in anyway. The opening was like a shaft debouching into an inner room. I saw something shinning. It was a crystal, held by 2 metallic hands. I had on my gloves and I tried to loosen it. It became loose. As soon as I grabbed it I felt this was the time to get out and not come back.
I'm not the only one who has seen these ruins - others have seen them from the air and say they are 5 miles wide and more than that in length."

Inside the round crystal, which Dr. Brown sometimes shows to lecture audiences, can be seen a series of pyramidal forms. When one holds the crystal, a throbbing sensation is felt in the hand of the holder.

1970 - During the year,
"The Late Great Planet Earth" by Hal Lindsey is published.
It is a popularization of the study of Jewish and Christian prophesy as recorded in the common texts of the Old and New Testaments. A return of a Messiah to Jerusalem is accepted as certain within the "near future." Political military clashes involving Israel are expected to occur before such an event. Following the return of the Messiah, a world order or government is to evolve.
The book becomes popular within study groups throughout North and Central America and throughout Europe. Within several years, it gains popularity throughout Israel. USA Pentagon officials hold large seminars to consider the military and foreign affaires ramifications expressed within the book: they affirm that this study of prophesy duplicates the conclusions which the National Security Agency (NSA) and the CIA (the Rand Corporation) strategic studies had already proposed: continuing political unrest in the Middle East.
Rather than attempt to diffuse the political frustrations of the Middle East, North American and European nations choose to favour Israeli or Arab nations in the region with military augmentation. They accept passivity and defeat and choose to support the expectation by taking actions which are suggestive of a self-fulfilling prophesy. EXPECTING military conflict, the major industrial nations supply ALL of the Middle East nations with increasingly sophisticated and growing quantities of weapons.

1970 - On September 29,
American interference in Chilean Politics was initiated when, at the suggestion of the Director of the CIA, John A. McCone, and under the direction of Robert Helms, William V. Broe, CIA Chief of Clandestine Services for the Western Hemisphere, met with Edward Gerrity, a senior executive of International Telephone and Telegraph (ITT). Gerrity contacted Harold S. Geneen, chairman of ITT regarding the initiation of opposition to the election of Allende to lead the Chilean government.
The ITT receives a considerable amount of business (10's of millions of dollars per year) from the CIA. Geneen replied that he was willing to contribute $1 million. Allende had received most of the September 4 vote but not enough to win a majority. A re-election was planned. Gerrity was told to accelerate economic chaos in Chile. Consider the influence on modern commercial businesses if they could not rely upon quick and convenient transfer of information and resolution of problems by the use of telephones, telegrams, and facsimile?

1970 - During this year,
Yigal Amir would be born to orthodox Jewish Yemenite parents who would move to Israel while he was very young. His mother would provide an in-home kindergarten for him and other children. The family would later be described as traditional yet tolerant. as many as 40 or more other children would attend the kindergarten. In addition, he would share her attentions with seven brothers and sisters. In the poverty dominated, survival strained and arms endemic state of Israel, he would become introverted academic with a passion for religious law and an empathy for oppression.

1970 - By October,
The "Huston Plan" for political surveillance had been personally approved by American President Richard M. Nixon.
It involved such methods as burglary, wiretapping, maintaining mail "covers", and bugging. Purportedly abandoned, the White House soon afterwards employed its own secret agents to use many of these methods: the "plumbers".

1970 - By October,
The Blight-Infested Corn Crop in America would result in a loss of 15% of the harvest and $1-billion for the farmer. The blight first noticed in the Philippines, had suddenly shown up in Florida State during a year when crop yields were expected to be record highs.
In an effort to prevent a reoccurrence, the USA National Academy of Sciences (NAS) undertook a study: "The Genetic Vulnerability of Major Crops". On page one, it would be concluded that the "impressively uniform and impressively vulnerable" seed varieties in use had enabled the severity of the disaster and that "powerful economic and legislative forces" (seed, pharmaceutical and chemical company lobbyists) were partly responsible.
Crop uniformity was creating a market for crop chemicals because of their vulnerability.
Unchallenged, their yields were high. Exposed to a pest or blight, the devastation spread like fire, unhindered by the natural barriers of plant variety. If you used the seed, you had to use the chemicals. Both cost money. The process made agriculture more capital intensive and less suitable for small operators. Government leadership would be restrained by more lobbying and efforts to accentuate crop uniformity through genetic patenting would increase.

1970 - In October,
Professor Ivan Isidorovich Gunar, head of the Department of Plant Physiology, the Laboratory for Artificial Climate at the Timiryazev Academy of Agricultural Sciences, and his chief assistant, Leonid A. Panishkin, were highlighted with the Department in the U.S.S.R. newspaper Pravda by reporter V. Chertkov. The reporter described his witness as follows:

"Before my eyes a barley sprout literally cried out when its roots were plunged into hot water. True, the plant's "voice" was registered only by a special and extremely sensitive electronic instrument which revealed a "bottomless vale of tears" on a broad paper band. As though it had gone crazy, the recording pen wriggled out on the white track the death agony of the barley sprout, although, to look at the little plant itself, one would never have guessed what it was going through. While its leaves, green as ever, stood upright, the plant's "organism" was already dying. Some kind of "brain" cells within it were telling us what was happening."

Chertkov went on to write that Gunar "talked about plants as he would about people, distinguishing their individual habits, characteristics, and proclivities. He even appears to converse with them ... only persons invested with certain power are like this. I have been told of a test pilot who talked to his misbehaving airplane, and I myself have met an old captain who talked with his ship." Already the media was infusing correlations of activities which were based on different principles and involving living and inanimate objects: the beginnings of superstition: 80% fact, 20% imagination = 100% error in concept relative to reality. This seems to be a frequent human trait of common reasoning.
Panishkin, like, John Ott, was investigating the influence of light on plants.
He had found that by using a special lamp which shone with the same intensity as the sun's rays reaching the earth, plant tired in an overextended day and needed rest at night. He hoped that it might one day be possible for plants to turn lights on or off in a greenhouse at will: "a live electric relay."
The Department studied the influence which factors such as sunlight, wind, clouds, the dark of night, tactile stimulus from flies and bees, injuries produced by chemicals and burning, and even the very proximity of a vine to a structure to which it might cling - was shown in the neurological pulses of the plant. It was desired that the health of a plant could perhaps be assessed at some future point by the characteristics of these pulses. Later findings proposed that plants receive signals and transmit them through special channels to a given centre, where they process the information and prepare answering reactions. This nervous centre could be located in root tissues which expand and contract like heart muscle in man. The experiments showed that plants have a definite life rhythm and die when they don't get regular periods of rest and quiet.

1970 - On October 20,
"Zond 8", a stripped down manned Soyuz USSR spacecraft was launched by a SL-12 Proton rocket from Tyuratam.
It completed the 4th circumlunar flight with a flyby at 1120 km on October 24.
Control problems made a ballistic re-entry the outcome and it came down over the northern hemisphere, as opposed to the usually designed southern approach for landing in the USSR. On October 27, the spacecraft was taken from the Indian Ocean. More colour photos of the Moon and Earth were taken.

1970 - By November,
"The Office of Telecommunications Policy" had been set up by USA President Richard Nixon.
It began monitoring radio and television coverage of news involving the administration.
According to one memo uncovered later by the Watergate investigation, White House aide Charles W. Colson had a meeting with the top executives of all 3 national networks. Colson reported happily to H.R. Haldeman, Mr. Nixon's chief aide, about how nervous the executives had been. They had been vastly impressed, he said, to discover how thoroughly their news programs were being monitored and analyzed. "In short, they are very much afraid of us and are trying hard to prove they are 'good guys'".

The network executives were quite aware of the fact that their income depended upon their ratings. Their ratings depended upon the public's perception and support of them. The public would not have confidence and enthusiasm about their coverage unless they could broadcast timely and important news. White House news releases were regarded by most Americans as important. If a particular network, for some reason, happened to always receive such news later than its competitors - its income, and existence, could dwindle and become unstable. Executives in a material economy centred society have one priority: raise and stabilize profits. Income obtained at great expense equals low or no profits. Did they want to keep their jobs? Could they compromise their spiritual values of truth, openness, and justice or material power and profit?

1970 - In November,
Louis Kervan an engineer and biologist, noted the following in an interview:
"powerful energies are at work in the germination process of seeds which synthesize enzymes, probably by transmuting matter within them. ... lunar forces are extremely important in germination ... We cannot deny the existence of something just because we don't know about it. The kind of energies to which the great Austrian natural scientist and clairvoyant Rudolf Steiner refers as cosmic etheric forces must exist if only from the fact that certain plants will only germinate in springtime no matter what amounts of heat and water are administered to them during other parts of the year. There are varieties of wheat said to germinate only as the days lengthen, but, when days are artificially lengthened, the wheat does not always germinate. ... We do not know what matter really is. We do not know what a proton or an electron is made of, and the words serve only to cloak our ignorance. Forces and energies may lie within the atomic nuclei of a totally unexpected nature. ... Physicists are mistaken in claiming that physical laws are the same for the living as for inanimate matter."

1970 - On November 17,
"Luna 17", a USSR unmanned lunar landing satellite, will make a publicized soft landing in a shallow crater in the northwest of Mare Imbrium. It will release "Lunochod 1", a lunar roving vehicle, which will carry out lunar experiments for 10-1/2 months.
After checks by TV cameras for boulders, 2 ramps are lowered on command from the Soviet Deep Space Communications Center and the rover rolls out onto the surface. The 756 kg rover incorporates a 2.1 metre wide instrument compartment mounted on an 8-wheel chassis. The 51 cm diameter wire-mesh wheels are in four pairs. Each is powered by a separate electric motor; if one jammed, a powder charge would snap the drive shaft. Sensors provided automatic braking, overriding Earth-originated commands if slope angles threatened overturning. There are two forward speeds and possibly two reverse.
The pressurized magnesium alloy instrument compartment is capped by a lid opened during lunar days to radiate away heat and expose a solar array on its underside. During lunar nights, the instruments, cameras, and other systems are kept warm and operational despite external temperatures of -150 degrees Centigrade by the circulation of gas heated by a radioactive polonium source. One TV system transmits a frame every 3-20 sec, enabling the operators to monitor Lunikhod's progress. A second TV system obtained panoramic pictures of the locality, the horizon, the Sun and Earth. Four identical telephoto cameras, 3 looking to the sides, are also used.

By day 60, of the lunar surface exploration, the first jammed wheel incident had occurred.
The associated powder charge had been activated and had broken the drive axle - allowing the exploration to continue. Within the following 4 hours, 2 more wheels jammed and another drive axle had to be blown. The Lunochod's mission continues without further difficulty until day 237 when the remaining 2 tied axles have to be blown in quick succession after wheels on each jam. By the end of the 10th month an independent wheel jams making further progress nearly impossible. Within hours, all of the wheels are jammed.
Following its return, the "Lunochod" is inspected for an explanation of the wheel jamming problem. In each case, the wheel gaskets protecting the lubricating mediums from the low space pressure and extreme temperatures had disintegrated. Comparison to Earth use degradation (ageing) appeared dramatic. On Earth, it was estimated that they would have been over 25 years in use before these "lifetime" mechanisms would fail. Temperature could not be used as a justification. The gaskets had lost their oxygen content and become hard and brittle and shrunk - it was as if they had deteriorated from extreme ageing. Why?

For ten years the Soviet scientists would not be able to explain this mystery.
The 1971 American movie, "The Andromeda Strain" would both alarm and preoccupy them with the possibility that an alien lifeform, unlike anything on the Earth - existed on the Moon. Further attempts at manned lunar landings and the setting up of a lunar base were placed on hold until 1982. What if a lunar organism was capable of attacking any Earth organic substance, from gaskets to humans - by combining rapidly with the oxygen in the target. Gaskets would age to a useless state in hours; humans would suffocate even faster as their blood first lost its oxygen, then its water content, .... What if all the nuclear power reactors in the world suddenly lost the integrity of their gaskets and began leaking. Permanent shutdowns, probabilities of repeated incidents of environmental contamination, and, possibilities of core meltdowns would follow. How could such a being be protected against - the scientists couldn't even find it! And, what if it was not an organism .. simply cosmic radiation, undiminished?

1970 - By the end of the year,
The use of Ferdinand Marcos diplomats as drug couriers would have become a routine practice.
In 1971, a narcotics agent, acting on a tip, followed a Filipino diplomat, Domingo S. Canieso, and attache at the Philippine Embassy in Laos, and a Bangkok merchant, Chinese-born Tsien Sin-chou, on board a Pan American flight in Vientiane, Laos, and kept them under surveillance through Vienna and London to New York. In Manhattan, Canieso and Sin-chou checked into the Lexington Hotel. There, they were arrested in their rooms with more than 34 pounds of Double U-O Globe brand heroin worth $13 million dollars. Canieso did not have diplomatic immunity during that particular trip because he was foolishly traveling on a tourist visa. He had been more careful before, and other diplomats would be more careful later.
Manila-based "chiu chao" group, headed by restaurateur Lim Seng, smuggled half a ton of No 4 heroin into the USA during the early 1970s. A loose consortium of Chiu chao businessmen with drug laboratories and warehouses in Thailand smuggled primarily through Malaysia and the Philippines. Lim Seng was part of their network.

1970 - The December issue of the
Barclay's Bank staff magazine, "Spread Eagle", contained an article which read:
"Computers have given birth to the Technological Era, have ushered in the Space Age, have begun to play such a domineering role in fields as diverse as military science, weather forecasting, medicine, industrial design and production, communications, commerce, business and banking that the question is seriously being asked whether they are beginning to dominate man himself.
Some even hold the view that in the foreseeable future we shall be stripped of our individual privacy and reduced to a string of meaningless dots stored in the magnetic bowels of some giant Government computer - a sort of Big Brother whose prying gaze will have us constantly under his attentive scrutiny."

1970 -
This is the first year for Samurai Bonds to be issued by the Asian Development Bank.
These bonds are Japanese yen-denominated bonds issued in Japan by a foreign borrower.
They are unsecured obligations of the issuer and generally have minimum maturities of 5 years or longer. They are used primarily by corporate borrowers to raise capital in the yen market at reasonable cost. 25% of primary issue securities can be purchased by foreign investors; there are no secondary market restrictions.
This becomes one form of Japanese capitalism.
Much like common shares, they permit capital agglomeration within the nation while attracting foreign capital for capitalization without loss of control. Unlike common shares these bonds have a lower likelihood of value instability and less likelihood of a dramatic negative impact on the operation of the corporation. Foreign capital is elicited for the growth of capitalism within the nation. The significant factor is that the nation is dissatisfied, at this point, with the rate at which the capitalistic growth is occurring. Rather than continue to be "colonized" economically in a more passive manner, it is taking the active role of building its capitalistic economy base to a point from which it can begin capitalistic expansion BEYOND its borders. It will then be able to economically influence the economies of other nations.

1970 - On December 18,
"Baneberry", an underground shaft atomic bomb test was detonated at Yucca Flats, Utah.
It was the 30th and final shot for the year. It was fired during a snowstorm in erratic wind conditions. It opened up a fissure 315 feet long. There was steam and "dynamic venting" for two hours and a continuous cloudlike emission for nearly 24. Three million curries of radiation had been released within the first 12 hours. The unexpected venting exposed several hundred of the workers at the test site to dangerous radiation. At least 4 died later from leukemia.
The fallout carried across Idaho, Wyoming, Montana, and North Dakota.
It also touched Death Valley Junction in California, Minnesota, Missouri, Arkansas, and Texas.
The official announcement was "Minor levels of radioactivity were detected off-site.

1970 - On December 31,
418 full or partial Currency Devaluations had been decreed by some 108 governments over the previous 17 years - since 1954. As Sedillot had predicted, countries involved in war, the purchase of armaments and political civil unrest typified this group of nations. Whether Capitalist, Communist, or dictatorship - economies which "subsidized" such spiritually negative activities continued to weaken. These "activities" are non-productive: they siphon surplus capital from the economy and return nothing of social worth to the society. They cannot be honestly rationalized as contributing to the peace required for a fruitful and successful capital-based economy, for human history demonstrates that such coercive means are never successful in that end, for the majority of humanity.
On the other hand, those countries, with open currency and economic reporting, which were NOT included in the list of devalued currency nations, were socialist by nature, self-reliant in practice, and had resisted entering an arms accumulation phase. In order to maintain the public ignorance to the reality of the spending ramifications of their government, very little publicity would be afforded to these events which destroyed trillions of asset values without any kind of compensation for their cheated owners. As government deficits and national debts rose, humanity would be distracted by the persistent marketing of materialism, conflict and competition.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1971 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
Billy Jack; Fiddler On the Roof; The Hellstrom Chronicle; THX1138; The French Connection; The Andromeda Strain; Hannie Caulder; Harold and Maud; Summer of '42; The Beguiled; The Omega Man; The Homecoming; Dirty Harry; Doc; Diamonds are Forever; The Mephisto Waltz; Claire's Knee; Play Misty for Me; Red Sun, The Rip-Off; Face-Off; The Boyfriend.

Television:
Cannon; The Persuaders; O'Hara, United States Treasury; Bearcats!; Longstreet; Owen Marshall, Counselor at Law; Sarge.
Songs:
Brown Sugar; Want Ads; If; Sweet Hitch Hiker; Sweet Mary; Country Roads; How/Mend A Broken Heart; I Am I Said; Walk Away; Maggie May; Loving Her Was Easier; Old Fashioned Love Song; Do You Know What I Mean; It's Too Late: Story In Your Eyes; Wild World; Bright Lights; You're My Man; Me & You and a Dog Named Boo; It's Four In The Morning; Man in Black; She's All I Got.
General News:

Consumer Price Index: 121.3
Failing USA banks lose S132.032 millions of depositor's monies.
The first commercial human sperm banks go into operation in the USA.

1971 - During the year,
A 6.7 Earthquake in the San Fernando Valley of southern California becomes the first local quake since the 1933 Long Beach quake. There would be 10 more moderate and strong quakes by early 1994. Earthquake possibilities provide a political motive for well-organized state emergency services.

1971 - Between January 31 to February 9,
The U.S.A. Apollo 14 reached the moon and landed safely.
Astronauts Shepard and Mitchell walked on the Moon, while Rossa piloted the ship in orbit.
Their photo, # 14-10116, shows several white domes in craters. Both Apollo 12 and 14 crews detected Moon geysers and water clouds. Photo # AS 14-9837 shows 7 glowing objects close to the lunar surface in a ring formation. NASA photo 14-80-10439 shows a well defined character "S" on the lunar surface.

1971 -
Dr. Ken Hashimoto: doctor of philosophy, successful electronics engineer, psychic phenomenon researcher.
He is chief of the "Hashimoto Electronics Research Center" and managing director for the "Fuji Electronic Industries", and author of "Mystery of the Fourth Dimensional World".
Developed a modification of a polygraph which converted plant responses into graph tracings and converted those into modulated sounds: in response to the loving responses of his wife, who loves plants, a selected plant would respond back with a sound "like the high-pitched hum of very-high-voltage wires heard from a distance, except that it was more like a song, the rhythm and tone being varied and pleasant, at times even warm and almost jolly."
Eventually, the Hashimoto's established such a rapport with the plant that they were able to have it add and count up to 20. There is no reason why a sophisticated form of plant life could not be as intellectually and technologically advanced as humans, or even considerably beyond humans.

1971 - During the year,
A renewed attraction to Science Fiction by North American readers is noticed by news reporters this year.
The writer often see themselves as demonstrating a commitment to caring about the problems of the future; of noticing the dehumanizing influence of technology; of recognizing the destructiveness of wars and military fascination to humanity; of demonstrating an awareness of what the traumas of misunderstanding, mistakes and catastrophes do to societies and individuals. Yet the same writers often use human fantasy, exaggeration, ignorance of the fundamentals of physics, chemistry, biology, mathematics, and human history to either exemplify what individual humans can do to change the potential disasters which lie ahead, or, to submerge the individual and the culture to the overbearing power of technology and those who abuse it. Frequently, far-reaching impractical concepts and social problems are dramatized with proud displays of human rationalization, wit and verbal skill, none of which are helpful in the cultivation of a crop of vegetables.
Science fiction has been seen to grow in popularity over the past 6 years, particularly among members of social groups in the so-called pot-rock generation. The interest can be seen first as a natural anxiety about the future of the planet since many have been traumatized at an early age with the imminence of nuclear war armageddon while continuing to be besieged with news tories of catastrophe and being educated to be mindless consumers in a society racing somewhere, and nowhere. The breadth of the genre ranges from the thought provoking, technically correct stories which offer suggestions for alternative futures to the fantasy stimulating, adventure stories which offer hero and technology worship as a consequence of confusion, idealism and stupidity.
In all, and in general, stories and movies grouped within the science fiction genre try to reach an audience with both spiritually broadening current real concerns for the future, and, fantasy which deadens the human spiritually behind a facade of intellectualization. That both use the same mediums and tend to look the same translates for most humans into the usual lowest spiritual denominator: confusion, denial, pride. The end result is that some which could be beneficial to humanity is lost within the superficial mass. All most human readers or viewers of the genre seem to want is the narcotic of the Big Experience in an otherwise dulled perception and participation in the reality which surrounds them.

1971 - During the year,
A Dr. X., born in France in 1930 and wounded by a mine explosion in Algeria on May 18, 1958, later related this experience to Jacques Vallee when he visited him in California in 1979. Dr. X. and his wife had been expecting friends to arrive for lunch one day. He told his wife that he was going outside to move the car out of the sun - and then was gone unusually long.
Once in the car, he felt the "impulse" to drive into town where he again met a mysterious "Mr. Bied", whom he had met in a peculiar fashion in November, 1969. The stranger told him they "had to go somewhere." Then Dr. X. found himself lying on a bed in an unknown city. When he went to the window he saw that he was in Paris, near the Ministry of the Interior. He saw Mr. Bied's car coming down the street and entering the courtyard, the guards saluting. He found a telephone in the room and called his wife: twenty minutes had elapsed and their guests had arrived. After another twenty minutes Mr Bied's car drove out and Dr. X. found himself in his hometown again - returned safely to his family, completely baffled by what had happened. From his earlier experiences, a triangular discolouration, like a burn, appears on Dr. X's abdomen on successive years and have been filmed as recently as November, 1984.

Edgar Mitchell resigned in May, 1972 to devote himself to the study of parapsychology.
Later, at his Institute for Noetic Sciences near San Francisco, he described looking at this world from the Moon:
"I went into a very deep pathos, a kind of anguish.
That incredibly beautiful planet that was the Earth ... a place no bigger than my thumb was my home ... a blue and white jewel against a velvet black sky ... was being killed off." On March 23, 1974, he would be quoted in the Daily Express as saying that society had only three ways in which to go and that the third was "the most viable but most difficult alternative."

1971 - From April,
Professor A.P. Dubrov of the Institute of Earth Physics of the USSR Academy of Sciences, in following up on Kervan's work, began experimenting with radiosensitivity in animals and the geomagnetic field. By the end of the year he would write to Kervan suggesting that the magnetic field of the earth itself might well play an important role in biological transmutation, and that elements might be affected depending on whether biological forms are oriented north-south.

1971 -
The USA Pentagon public affairs budget for the current year is formally stated as $30 million, ten times what it was in 1959. CBS, quoting the Twentieth Century Fund, said that the true expenditure may be as much as $190 million. And this money is intended to inform and motivate Americans into an approval of the Pentagon's expenditures to improve and build more destructive weaponry and to use that weaponry in other countries to kill civilian and troop "enemies". If the job is that difficult, perhaps it is adverse to the basic morality of the people, and of humanity.

1971 - During April,
American advertisers of children's products are again strongly criticized for their methods and requests are made in the USA for legislated standards to provide some context of truth to this youngest of generations. Particularly offensive to some are these factors:
A. 16 minutes of advertising in each hour of children's programming; B. Emphasis to the viewer that you cannot play without a toy; C. Cardboard material being made to appear like metal in the ads; D. Lies encouraging children to demand products of poor nourishment; E. Trick photography to exaggerate the performance of toys.

Very little change would be accomplished in the next 30 years.
Last year, in the USA, producers of toys and games spent $32 million on television ads.
Cereal makers budgeted about $54 million. Cultural leadership would prove to be the profit motive; not spiritual values of honesty, integrity, fairness, or, the desirability to contribute positively to the future of other individuals or humanity.

1971 - During the year,
Henry Harris, and his research group at Oxford University, England, altered a genetic mouse cell for the purpose of correcting a genetic defect. The cell had originally been unable to manufacture a specific enzyme which, in humans, is involved in the usually fatal Lesch-Nyhan syndrome.
The Harris group fused a mouse cell carrying this genetic deficiency with a normal chicken cell. The hybrid cell with two nuclei thrived and began dividing. As hoped, the nucleus from the mouse, by maturing faster, took charge. Soon the chromosomes from the chicken began to pulverize. They were smashed into bits of genetic material. And from these bits the mouse nuclei picked up the genetic material it needed to overcome its deficiency.

In 905,000 B.C., a then bipedal hominoid earth mammal was genetically altered by a spaceperson visiting culture.
Outcasts, calling themselves the "UP" (as close a rendition in the English alphabet) from a Pleiades culture had arrived on the Earth. They found a great wondrous diversity of physical lifeforms, relative to other locations they had visited; they wanted to stay. Their form at that time was unsuitable for Earth survival. They had hairless very light coloured skin and came from a native atmosphere of water-like fluid density. Their longevity was 900 years and development to what we would term an "adult" stage today took an average of 60 years.
For their culture to survive, they determined that they would produce a hybrid with one or more Earth species.
Two species of Earth mammals were chosen and the bio-engineering began. The UP were very much more progressed in technology than humans can yet imagine. Their progress was partly attributed to their focus on which technologies to develop. The Pleiadian society had been very spiritually advanced, beyond what we can yet perceive as possible. No consideration had been given to military aggressive technology for over a million years before that date and they had sustained a subsistence economy with great ease and contentment. Very little technology accompanied the "UP" beyond their spaceship. Committed to staying on the Earth, and, knowing that any future generation would have to be a "step-down" hybrid, they launched their 5 spacevehicles with a four-minute delayed auto-pilot command system on each, with a converging collision path in another galaxy. Three hybrid "human" species emerged from the on-board laboratory experiments before the ships were launched.

During the experiments, the nucleus of the hominid cells, by maturing faster, took charge of the cell growth.
Soon the chromosomes of the "UP" species began to pulverize. From these bits, the hominid nuclei picked up genetic material which was needed to expand the complexity of the brain to a point where memory and perception became more conscious in presence than that of other mammals. Other mammals had emotions and the capacity for basic learning and cultural habit development but not the longer-term conscious memory required for the emotions of hate, possessiveness, empathy, reverence, or passionate love. The "UP" gene for "spirituality" had mutated in the conversions into these traits.
The new "human" species would now display a range of physical characteristics which included loss of most of the obvious body hair, a slightly longer longevity and later maturing, and features suggestive of an amphibian species. Now, what would humans hybridize?

1971 - By the Spring,
"The Mary Tyler Moore Show" would begin a Saturday night tradition for some North American TV viewers.
It would become one of the few serials to survive a start that had poor ratings for several seasons.
It would run for 7 years and convey a largely positive emotional-spiritual perception to its viewers.
Unlike 90% of TVs sitcoms, MTM always would portray intelligence with a rather unique respect for its characters and its audience. The main character is Mary Richards, a single, independent, career woman, interested in men but not in an obsessive dependent manner.
A family feeling of shared emotion, interpersonal tolerance and constructive communication, with support and loyalty and truthfulness to one another would also be a unique aspect. On MTM, the characters would develop in maturity, changing, sometimes in ways disconcerting to those who were conditioned to happy endings. Innocence and the absence of malice would allow for demonstrations of anger, criticism, humour and frustration without ever falling into abuse. The other main characters include Lou Grant, the station manager; Murray Slaughter, newswriter; Sue Ann Nivens, the Happy Homemaker; Rhoda Morgenstern, friend; Phyllis, friend; Ted, news announcer; and Georgette, friend and wife of Ted.

1971 - By May,
Many of the findings of Andre Simoneton, a French engineer, were beginning to be considered more closely.
He reasoned that if human nerve cells can receive wavelengths they must also be transmitters.
For many years he had studied, experimented and used the arts of dowsing and pendulum detection.
He had developed the pendulum technique in May of 1917 as a matter of his own life and death.
He recovered from a terminal diagnosis and became so healthy that age 66 and 68 he still fathered children, and at 70 was still playing tennis.
With his background in the French Army working on the new science of radio, during WWI, he had also worked alongside such electrical luminaries as physicist Louis de Broglie, who was to establish that every particle, down to a photon of light, is associated with a specific wavelength. Simoneton became aware of the work of Andre Bovis and extended Bovis' system to measure the wavelengths emanating from foods as an indicator of their vitality and freshness. (see the separate file on "emanations")

From his research, Simoneton set out four general classes of foods with the primary classes radiating a higher wavelength than that of later classes. The amount of energy radiating from the foods varied not only by type but by their degree of exposure to the sun, their degree of ripeness, their degree of oxidation from the influence of cooking, preservation, or staleness. He found that normally healthy people give off a high level of the energy he detected; however, ill persons and persons predisposed to becoming ill emanated lower levels of energy.
From the fact that most microbes read well below the energy level of healthy humans, Simoneton deduced that they can only affect a person whose vitality has been lowered to a point where cells become lower energy producers than the microbe. What herbs, flower extracts, roots, and barks might be able to do was to vitalize the human system to a higher energy level thereby closing out the negative influence of the microbes. This meant that the components of a diet for optimum human health could be defined and that, for individuals, a diet could be devised to enhance their vitality if their system was less vital than the norm. These choices could be determined by the artful use of pendulum detection or by dowsing.

1971 - On May 14,
USA Vice Admiral H.G. Rickover testified before the Joint Committee on Atomic Energy, USA Congress:
"Soviet Russia is building a military establishment which is already ahead of ours in some respects and by 1975 will be ahead of ours in virtually all respects. She has already become the most heavily armed nation in the world and the nation most completely ready for war."

1971 - On May 30
"Mariner 9", a 1031 kg USA planetary satellite was launched by an Atlas Centaur rocket from Cape Canaveral.
It was intended to map 70% of Mars over 90 days.
It arrived November 13, 1971, at the end of a 167-day trip covering 397 million km.
A 15-minute firing of its 1334N liquid engine reduced the approach speed relative to Mars from 18,999 km/hr to 12,500 km/hr and placed it in a 12-hour orbit.
During its approach, in mid-November, it recorded a planet-wide dust storm that delayed the start of mapping operations by 6 weeks. Only the bright waning south ice cap and 4 dark peaks were visible. Volcanic activity was detected. A 4000 km long 6100 metre deep equatorial crevasse was named Valles Marineris in honour of the discoverer. Lowell's canals were apparently an illusion, yet the gigantic rift had been unexpected. It would now be believed that flowing water may have once existed. Surface temperatures ranged from 27 degrees Centigrade on the equator to -123 degrees Centigrade at the poles. Several localized dust storms were seen after the general storm cleared. Variable cloud patterns were observed, mainly in the north but also over large volcanoes. Winds were measured up to 185 km/hr.
Mariner 9 remained operational for 349 days before it was shut down.
By then it had completed 698 revolutions, mapped most of the surface at 1-2 km resolution (2% at 100-300 km) and transmitted 7329 TV images, including detailed views of its moons, Phobos and Deimos. M9 was part of a dual mission with Mariner 8; however, M8 failed to leave the Earth successfully. The cost of the dual mission was $136.4 million. Effectively, the cost yielded one useful satellite which demonstrated that humans could live on Mars with technical assistance such as carbon dioxide to oxygen conversion units. What was the practical benefit to humanity relative to the Earth- and Human life-threatening problems in existence?

1971 - On June 07,
Near Rosedale, Alberta - Esther Clappison witnessed the exploratory activities of 3 humanoids who had landed in a box-like, transparent craft a short distance from her farm house. The rectangular-shaped object was on the ground at an intersection of 2 roads and one end appeared to be open, revealing an interior illuminated by a diffused white, opaque light. The instrument panel in the craft went right across the craft and was about 15 inches straight down and there seemed to be darker shapes on the down part. The next morning, she and others found a scorched imprint at the edge of the road where the craft had been. Twenty feet long and five feet wide, the rectangular marking appeared to correspond to the estimated dimensions of the craft. Close inspection ... some form of intense heat radiation. The blackened imprint was still clearly visible 4 months later. Judging from the extensive burns that had destroyed the resilient desert weed, it became evident that no machine of earthly origin could have produced the uniform, geometrically shaped burn pattern.

1971 - During July
Henry Kissinger, Special Adviser to USA President Nixon, goes to Peking to make preparations for Nixon's visit to China.

1971 - On July 23
The Province of Quebec, Canada, was struck by a massive power blackout that was preceded by UFO sightings for 3 days. A simultaneous cut-out of service from three lines of 750,000 volts resulted in an interruption of service for Montreal, Quebec City and other locals which was never explained. It lasted longer than 3 hours. The pattern of sightings appeared to have been concentrated along the Saint Lawrence River corridor, from Manicougan and Rimouski, south through the Montreal region, and stretching toward Ottawa-Hull. The giant Manicougan hydroelectric complex consists of 5 dam sites that generate a substantial part of the province's electrical energy; it is located 240 miles NE of Quebec City.
On July 20th, at Rimouski, St. Odile, Sacre Coeur and Bic, many witnesses described a rotating, fire-red in colour with green and blue rays flashing around, circular craft. On the same evening, a woman living on a farm outside St. Hyacinthe, saw 2 dark circular craft with red rotating lights hover over her potato patch. The next morning, 2 eleven-foot wide circular patches of crushed and burned potatoes were found.

1971 - Between July 26 to August 7,
"Apollo 15" became another U.S.A. successful lunar mission, with astronauts Scott and Irwin conducting experiments on the Moon, while Worden monitored them from the mother ship. Apollo 15 was the first American space vehicle to carry a lunar vehicle to be used by the astronauts to explore the immediate vicinity.
Photo NASA # 15-12640 shows a glowing aerial UFO close to the spaceship.
It was found that the Moon has a magnetic field as well as a thin atmosphere.
A whole series of small shaped volcanic cones producing evidence of gases coming from the Moon's interior were observed in the Littrow crater. Haze cloud and color flashes were observed in and around the crater Aristarchus. The crew also conducted an experiment involving drilling into the soil; it was found that the deeper it was drilled into, the hotter it became. The February, 1972 issue of National Geographic magazine carried a description and some photos from the flight. Photo # 15-13181 shows either soil or smoke issuing out of a crater which has 2 oval objects on the crater's rim.
Part of their conversation with Mission Control went as follows:
Scott: Arrowhead really runs east to west. Mission Control: Roger, we copy. Irwin: Tracks here as we go down slope. Mission Control: Just follow the tracks, huh? Irwin: Right ... we're ... we know that's a fairly good run. We're bearing 320, hitting range for 413 ... I can't get over those lineations, that layering on Mount Hadley. Scott: I can't either. That's really spectacular. Irwin: They sure look beautiful. Scott: Talk about organization! Irwin: That's the most organized structure I've ever seen! Scott: It's ... so uniform in width ... Irwin: Nothing we've seen before this has shown such uniform thickness from the top of the tracks to the bottom.

NASA never explained those tracks.
Some have suggested since that they were made by a giant moon-rover of Russian-American design.
James Irwin, officially the 6th man to walk on the Moon - resigned to become a Baptist missionary in May, 1972.

1971 - During August
USA Suspension of the Convertibility of the dollar to Gold becomes part of a program of economic and fiscal rehabilitation for the USA to counter a growing and unfavourable balance of payments and a dollar crisis which threatens to result in the unseating of the USA dollar as the major global currency. A growing reliance upon heavy military expenditures within the military-industrial-political structure had threatened a currency collapse. This is one of the frequent patterns of national currency collapse.

1971 - In the August 16 issue of
"Time", an essay, "LOOK BACK ON ANGER", by Melvin Maddocks notes the following as regards humans and their institutions:

"The fact that we find tranquillity unnatural is the most terrible confirmation of what we have come to accept as natural.
Anger is the emotion we tend to feel when in doubt about what else we feel.
Anger, once justly listed among the seven deadly sins, today is becoming one of our most praised values. ... In art, anger is regularly mistaken for sincerity, if not inspiration. ...

In politics, anger is too easily confused with moral indignation.
... anger tends to purge itself through rhetoric. ... Not just 'righteous anger' but anger of any kind has become the accepted proof of moral conviction. It is the way we act out certainty when we do not really feel it. As other emotions become less sure, less confident, anger amalgamates with them.
... (anger today) is not only regarded as moral but as something even better, healthy and therapeutic. A fight a day keeps the doctor away, Psychiatrist Theodore Issac Rubin suggests in something called The Angry Book . With a burst of earnest lyricism, he asks: 'Have you ever experienced the good, clean feel that comes after expressing anger, as well as the increased self-esteem and the feel of real peace with one's self and others?' In The Intimate Enemy , Dr. George R. Bach, a clinical psychologist, ... 'Intimate hostilities', he guarantees, 'can be programmed ... The family that fights together stays together ....'

Anger ought to be an alarm system that warns us of our deepest concerns.
But left to itself, it can become an undiscriminating rant, equalizing the serious and the trivial, the horrors of (famine) and the poor quality of frozen dinners. ...
We are accustomed to daily anger. We cannot live without it.
Civilization and its discontents are too burdensome to bear with equanimity.
... Anger finally is the emotion of impotence - mortality up against its limits and refusing to recognize them.

Without pity or grief or laughter, anger is neither moral nor healthy but simply dehumanizing."

1971 - On August 16
At the Philippines Constitutional Convention, a bomb explodes in a men's washroom.
On August 21, two grenades are thrown into the crowd of 10,000 people gathered at a Liberal party rally in Manila's Plaza Miranda. Ten people are killed and 66 wounded. Among the wounded are all 8 of the party's senatorial candidates - Senator Sergio Osmena, Jr.; his nephew, Representative John Osmena; Senator Gerardo Roxas, son of President Roxas; Senator Genaro Magsaysay, brother of the late President; and Senator Jovito Salonga. The only member of the Liberal leadership who escaped injury, because he arrived late, was Senator Aquino. Ver's Presidential Security Command (secret service) agents had been responsible for the attack. When the murderers tried to collect their fee, they were, as usual, murdered under the direction of Ver.

1971 - On August 21
Endemic cultural fatigue was the topic of "Canada's Weary Millions", an article written by Bill Trent for a Canadian national newspaper magazine, The Toronto Telegram, Weekend magazine. While focusing on the Canadian North American population, the findings were highly indicative of Americans in the USA, which Canadians tend to lag and duplicate in cultural habit development:
"One in 10 adult Canadians suffers from fatigue.
And in the 30 to 45 age group, the ratio may be as high as one in six.

The information comes from Dr. William M. Goldberg, head of the department of medicine of St. Joseph's Hospital, and he doesn't mind admitting the situation worries him. ... "We are faced with one of the most disabling complaints in medicine. The symptom accounts for more money spent on examinations and medical investigation than any other disease process. ... The answer seldom lies with drugs. ... talk therapy ... The thing is first of all to help the patient see his problem. ... Look at life realistically. Don't expect the impossible. Realize that you have to live with and accept certain situations. Make the best of things. If 10% of your life is exciting, you are a lucky person. ... We live in such a damned unreal sex world. You go home with a book like The Sensuous Woman , or The Sensuous Man , or you take your wife to a Danish film and when you get into bed at night you feel inept, inadequate."
Many of Dr. Goldberg's patients have cited sexual relations as their main problem area. "They get upset because they can't perform the sexual acrobatics they've seen at the movie theatre. Then they get tired and feel run-down and unhappy and can't figure out why. ... all that glamour is hard on people. The movies themselves are enough to turn you off sex." ...

Tired people ... Their symptoms ... complain of feeling low, draggy, unable to muster interest in life. They feel bad most of the time. They have difficulty explaining just how it is they feel. ... "War, drugs, revolution, supergovernments, pollution, traffic - sometimes it's all just too much. I'm appalled by the helplessness of man in this supercharged world. ... Modern society is frightening. More and more people are finding themselves overwhelmed by the world. It's automation, the depersonalization of everything. People used to be out beating the world. Now the world's beating them. ... You have to remind people every now and then that they are important.
Automation is lessening the role of the individual, making him feel increasingly insignificant in the general scheme of things. ... You get all wound up with your problems, or you withdraw from them. Either way you may be in trouble. ... There are more tired women than tired men. ... There are more bored women. ... Women hold up tremendously under stress, but they don't fare too well in good times. The better things are, the less challenge there is. ... (There are fewer tension-produced problems in wartime than in peacetime.) If you know your life is threatened, you can't afford to be nervous. Man takes life-threatening stress very well. But pollution - well, that's something else. Man finds it hard to fight as an individual. It defeats him. People have to feel that what they're doing is worthwhile. ...

He was worried what the pain might mean ... I think that if you can explain what it is the patient has and assure him that nothing really terrible is going to happen to him, then he's already on the road to recovery.

The societies of the industrial world use mass media and an intellectualized approach to education plus competition in the job market together with an attraction for material wealth to information overload the human brain. The result has been desensitization of the human and a withdrawal from interpersonal interaction, or, an obsessive activism on the part of some which has little basis in reality. Boredom is the lot of the spiritually lost human, who, overloaded on physical and intellectual stimuli becomes desensitized - lacking awareness, feeling, purpose.

1971 - Beginning this year
The "Poseidon" Submarine Launched Ballistic Missile (SLBM) becomes used to replace the Polaris SLBM.
A 2-stage rocket with the same range of 2,800 miles (4500 km), it can carry up to 14 independently targetable nuclear warheads and deliver them with twice the accuracy of the Polaris. This change, effectively quadruples the arsenal of each submarine. Greater accuracy is used as a rationale for decreasing the yield of each warhead from the 200 kiloton yield of the Polaris (14 times the destructive power used to flatten Hiroshima) to 50 kilotons. The Poseiden would be used until 1979, when it would be largely replaced by the Trident SLBM on 31 nuclear submarines.

1971 - On September 4, at 8.25 A.M.,
A government mapping aircraft was flying over the northern part of Costa Rica at an altitude of 10,000 feet, three miles north of Arenal and some 25 miles from the Nicaraguan border. A camera running automatically was taking a picture of the terrain every 17 seconds. Sergio L.V., a specialist in aerial photography, a pilot, a geographer, and a topographer were on the plane. On one of the frames taken, while passing over Lago de Cote, a disk-shaped object appears. It would be several years before this picture would reach a San Jose UFO research group and it would not be examined by the Ground Saucer Watch (GSW) through computer enhancement until 1980.
It had been taken by a high-quality professional camera, it was photographed while looking down from a known, fixed altitude, it was seen against the black background of a lake, and the dimension on the negative is considerable: it was estimated originally at 220 feet in diameter; GSW scaled this down to 120 feet. The disk demonstrated regular 3-dimensional shading and appeared to be a shallow cone with an axis of symmetry and a darker point or area at the tip of the cone; it was illuminated by collimated light such as the sun. One side of the disk was in knife-sharp focus whereas the other was diffuse. Observations have been made from the ground in the area since.

1971 - In the September 13 issue of
"TIME", Otto Friedrich summarized the Population Explosion concerns of the day.
He noted that Dr. John Calhoun, a psychologist at the National Institute of Mental Health in Washington, D.C. had started a research assignment with 8 white mice in an 8-1/2 sq ft cage; within a little more than 2 years, they had multiplied to 2,200, but they were hardly alive - mere "passive blobs of protoplasm, frozen in a childlike trance."

Paul Ehrlich, Stanford University biologist, had said:
"... if we don't do something dramatic about population and environment, and do it immediately, there is just no hope that civilization will persist. ... America's pride in her growing population may be compared to a cancer patient's pride in his expanding tumor. ... the U.S. population should be 25% less than at present."

Arthur J. Dyck, Harvard Population Expert, had warned:
"Our lifestyle must change. ... If we stayed at 200 million, would air pollution decrease?
Would other problems ease off? No. We have to change our values, our behavior."

Friedrich observes that:
"This growing wealth (of America) is producing its own problems, of course.
The U.S. with less than 6% of the world's people, already devours about 40% of its resources, and some critics blame the rich nations for the worst aspect of the population problem. Americans, for example, throw away more than 1,000,000 cars every year, plus 36 billion bottles and 58 million tons of paper. Aside from polluting the land and the water, ... this vast consumption threatens to strip the Earth of its resources."

Friedrich concludes:
"In other words, the essence of the population problem - so far, at least - is not that mankind has propagated too many children but that it has failed to organize a world in which they can grow in peace and prosperity. Rich nations and poor alike have grossly misused the world's resources, both material and intellectual; neglected them, wasted them, and fought each other over how to share them. Thus the basic question is not how many people can share the earth, but whether they can devise the means of sharing it at all."

1971 - By the Fall,
Marcel Vogel, a research chemist, realized that before he could observe with precision the effects on plants of human thoughts and emotion, he would have to improve his technique of affixing electrodes to the plant leaves in such a way as to eliminate random electromagnetic frequencies. Vogel developed an agar paste to use with stainless steel electrodes. Vogel also found that individual philodendrons responded with individual sensitivities: their own personality. Leaves with a high water content proved best. Plants appeared to go through phases of activity and inactivity, full of response at certain times of the day or days of the month, "sluggish" or "morose" at other times.
Starting a new line of experiments, Vogel projected positive feelings toward a philodendron and outstretched his fingers to it while breathing deeply and staying relaxed. The plant appeared to respond by sending energy back to him until it became "exhausted". Like lovers the emotion transferred between the two appeared to remain suffused with joy and contentment after the communication. Vogel then found that his sensitivity had increased such that he could pick out a particulary sensitive plant by running his hands over a group until he felt a slight cooling sensation followed by what he describes as a series of electrical pulses, indicating a powerful field. Gradually, Vogel found that he could get responses from further and further away from the plant until he was 8 miles away.

In another experiment, Vogel wired 2 plants to the same recording device and snipped a leaf from the first plant. The second plant responded to the hurt being inflicted on its neighbour, but only when Vogel was paying attention to it! If Vogel cut off a leaf while ignoring the second plant, the response was lacking. It was as though Vogel and the plant were lovers on a park bench, oblivious of passers-by until the attention of one lover became distracted from the other. It became apparent to Vogel that a certain focused state of consciousness on his part seemed to become an integral and balancing part of the interconnections or relationships required to monitor the plants. In this way, man and plant seemed to interact, and, as a unit, pick up sensations from events, or third parties, which became recordable through the plant. The process of sensitizing both himself and the plant could take a few minutes or up to half an hour.
Asked to describe the process in detail, Vogel said that first he quiets the sensory responses of his body organs, then he becomes aware of an energetic relationship between the plant and himself. When a state of balance between the bioelectrical potential of both the plant and himself is achieved, the plant is no longer sensitive to noise, temperature, the normal electrical fields surrounding it, or other plants. It responds only to Vogel, who has effectively tuned himself to it - or perhaps simply hypnotizes it.

"It is a fact: man can and does communicate with plant life.
Plants are living objects, sensitive, rooted in space. They may be blind, deaf, and dumb in the human sense, but there is no doubt in my mind that they are extremely sensitive instruments for measuring man's emotions. They radiate energy forces that are beneficial to man. One can feel these forces! They feed into one's own force field, which in turn feeds back energy to the plant."

Vogel discovered that the reaction of sceptics or hostile observers (negative attitudes) could influence the process of plant-human communication. To counteract this force he found that by paying attention to it, he could isolate the individuals emitting the negations , and, taking a deep breath, he would then switch his mind to another mental image just as if he were turning a dial to a different setting.

"The feeling of hostility, of negativity, in an audience, is one of the main barriers to effective communication. To counteract this force is one of the most difficult tasks in public demonstrations of these plant experiments. If one cannot do this, the plant and therefore the equipment will "go dead" and there will be no response until a positive tie can be reestablished."

Vogel concluded that a "Life Force", or Cosmic Energy surrounded all living things and was accessible between plants, animals, humans, and other lifeforms. From other experiments, Vogel came to the conclusion that "we can move into individual cells in our own bodies and, depending on our state of mind, affect them in various ways. One day, this may explain the cause of disease." Vogel acknowledged that children are the most "open-minded" and noticed in awareness exercises with them that many would describe a rippling or tingling sensation when they respectfully and reverently tried to feel a force or energy emanating from the leaves of a plant. Those who felt the strongest sensations appeared wholly engrossed in what they were doing. Instructed to relax and feel the give-and-take of the energy, as they moved their hands over the leaves, they would soon see the leaves begin to oscillate. With the use of both hands, the experimenters could get a plant to sway.
Adults, with their characteristic preconceptions, less open minds, pride and fear - found the development of such abilities difficult or impossible. To some degree, those with positions of authority and more highly trained through institutionalized instruction were less likely to be successful. It would seem that human institutionalized schooling more often trains the individual to fit into the goals and systems of the culture than to develop intelligence based on higher degrees of awareness, innovativeness, and creativity. The question is whether popular institutionalized schooling is enslaving by deception or growth enhancing by guidance and challenge?

"Hundreds of laboratory workers around the world are going to be ... frustrated ... until they appreciate that the empathy between plant and human is the key , and learn how to establish it. ... Spiritual development is indispensable ...."

Even when a person can affect a plant, the result is not always a happy one.
Vogel asked one of his friends, a clinical psychologist, to project a strong emotion to a philodendron 15 feet away. The plant surged into an instantaneous and intense reaction and then, suddenly, "went dead" in communicating. When Vogel asked what had gone through the friend's mind, the man answered that he had mentally compared Vogel's plant with his own philodendron at home, and thought how inferior Vogel's was to his. The "feelings" of Vogel's plant were evidently so badly hurt that it refused to respond for the rest of the day; in fact, it sulked for almost two weeks. Vogel could not doubt that plants have a definite aversion to certain humans, or, more exactly, to what those humans are thinking. Further experiments suggested that plants could be used to "read" the minds of humans at some future point, for they could register whether a person was thinking or not, what the subject of the thought was and whether it was the same as a previously expressed one. If the tracings could be correlated with the thoughts, a kind of language might be constructed.
Some plants responded to conversations about sex.
Plants also seemed to respond to spooky stories told in darkened rooms lit only by a red-shaded candle.
At certain points in the story, where suspense was elevated, the plant seemed to pay closer attention.
Devices similar to those used with humans to measure electrical resistance in the skin (galvanic skin response - GSR) were used with plants with the terminology changed to Psycho-Galvanic Response - PGR, as plants are not perceived to have skin in the human sense.

Vogel stressed that experiments with plants could be extremely dangerous to those who do not have the ability properly to alter their states of consciousness. "Focused thought can exert a tremendous effect on the body of a person in a higher mental state, if he lets his emotions interfere." No one who is not in sound health, Vogel advises, should become involved with plants or any other kind of psychic research. Vogel feels that a special diet of vegetables, fruits, and nuts, rich in minerals and proteins, allows the body to build the kind of energy necessary for such work. "One draws energy at high levels and this requires good nutrition." Learning the art of loving leads one to realize that when they think a thought they release a tremendous power or force in space. By knowing that one is his or her thoughts, you will know how to use thinking to achieve spiritual, emotional, and intellectual growth.

"So much of the ills and suffering in life comes from our inability to release stresses and forces within us. When a person rejects us, we rebel inside and we hold on to this rejection . This builds a stress which, as Dr. Wilhelm Reich showed so long ago, becomes locked in as muscular tension, and if not unlocked, depletes the body's energy field and alters its chemistry. My research with plants indicates one pathway to deliverance."

1971 - On September 22
An article, "Human problems blamed on lack of information", was printed in Canadian newspapers.
Georges Champoux, stated that "Ignorance of the facts is a main source of discontent among the poor and in all society." The technological age has made no difference to the old saying: The rich get richer and the poor get poorer. He continued: "Money is not controlled by the government but by private interests. So private interest money prevails rather than social order. ...
The only way you can think in terms of a just society prevailing is for the government to have the power to make it possible for every person capable of work to have the right to a job. But the government doesn't want that. They're told it is unhealthy to get total employment." Society points the finger the finger at the poor citizen who is "subsidized" by unemployment insurance or welfare, but the fact is that private enterprise is subsidized also. "But the unemployed man is not subsidized except beyond the bare minimum of the necessities of life, and he has to fight to get what he is entitled to. Half of them do not get the maximum according to the law."
Catherine McLaughlin welfare-supported widow and mother of five, said in another interview "People were poor in money then (in the Depression of the 1930s) but I didn't know I was poor. Now you keep reminding me I am poor", the you referring to the society at large. "I'm better dressed now than during the Depression, but nobody pointed the finger then. Now everywhere I go people say 'Ugh, you're on welfare,' and that makes me feel much poorer than not having money and much more angry."

North American society, with its former eras of material excess and whose leaders have allowed consumer brainwashing and a lack of awareness of spiritual options, now is characterized as individuals who are proud, insolent, authoritarian, greedy, and intolerant. The choice of uses of the new technology has enslaved the people behind half-truths and fantasies, not freed them with the truth.

1971 - On October 01
"Project Jaguar" was put into effect when 750 guerrilla fighters, bands of local tribesmen trained and supported by the British Special Air Service Regiment (SAS) were flown by C-130 transport plane (CIA supplied) to the Jebel airport. The Sultan of Muscat and Oman had established several military footholds in the coastal plain facing Jebel. The British wanted to halt the continuing advance of the Communist inspired force.

1971 - On Friday October 01
The following Batch consignment memo was issued by the Chairman, Policy Committee (Alternative-3) and addressed to "National Chief Security Officers":

"Experimental processing of batch-consignment components is now producing a 96% success rate. This is considered not satisfactory.
The Policy Committee briefing calculated on September 7, 1965, explained the necessity for all components to be de-sexed: 1) To eliminate the possibility of them forming traditional mating relationships which could detract from the efficiency of their sole-function performance. 2) To ensure components do not procreate and so haphazardly perpetuate a substandard species. This second consideration is of particular importance for the products of such procreation, during their initial years of growth and development, would have no operational value and would merely be a liability on the resources of the new territory.

The permanent elimination of self-will and self-interest has presented great difficulties.
Long-term laboratory tests have revealed that an unacceptably high percentage of components eventually regress towards their pre-processing attitudes, so rendering themselves unreliable and unsuitable for the envisaged role.
Advanced work, conducted principally in America, Britain, Japan, and Russia, has now resulted in a substantial reduction of the "component personality" failure ratio. However, this branch of research is now intensified.

The Policy Committee has given careful consideration to suitable means of jettisoning rejected potential components. It has been agreed that they are not to be considered responsible for their unsuitability and that there is nothing to be gained by killing them. Such a solution, although simple enough to implement, would be unnecessarily harsh. They are therefore to have their memories destroyed - a process for so doing has now been perfected at Dnepropetrovsk (U.S.S.R.) and details are being circulated to all A-3 laboratories - and then will be permitted to resume their lives.
In future no de-sexing will be done until after the personality adjustment of the projected component, male or female, has been assessed and approved. This will ensure that those which eventually return to their homes as rejects will betray no evidence of laboratory work."

A copy of this document was first leaked to a reporter on January 10, 1978.
"Components" are humans.

ATTENTION !
The above entry is a FABRICATION by a small part the British news media.
It accurately reflects the executive attitudes of the times as represented in casual speach, closed door sessions, intellectual hypothetical brainstorming sessions, and, financed intelligence and Black projects. Part of what is mentioned was done; part was planned for, part was attempted, part was not.

1971 - On October 26
The Admission of the People's Republic of China to the UN and the simultaneous expulsion of Taiwan as the representative of China is ratified by a 2/3rds majority and against the vote of the USA. Its admission had been annually refused since 1950.

1971 - By November
"The Andromeda Strain", an American movie, would be released to the general public.
Presented as a docudrama, it portrays the importation of a very destructive virus-like form of spacelife onto the Earth by a satellite. "Project Scoop" is described as a government series of satellite launches and retrievals directed from Vandenberg AFB. Through the 1960s and early 1970s, the USA and the USSR attempted to retrieve samples of Moon rock and soil for examination on the Earth. The emergency event, in the movie, is noted as happening during a 4-day period beginning February 5, 1971.

An American satellite (SCOOP 7) falls to Earth near the town of Piedmont, New Mexico.
When the local doctor opens the central compartment, a unique crystalline lifeform is released which is fatal immediately to all nearby humans excepting a sterno drinker and a crying baby. Following an attempted and unsuccessful military retrieval, a group of biological experts are commandeered to the Wildfire Laboratory in Flatrock, Nevada: a top-secret biowar facility hidden under a Department of Agriculture research station cover. Security is so advanced that entry is controlled by a 10,000 line resolution pattern recognition system which verifies identification by fingerprint. Safety of the rest of the world from the organisms potentially present at Wildfire is provided in an automatically activated 5-minute delay thermonuclear device located at the base of the facility, a 5-storey cylindrical underground station.
The "Andromeda Strain" is found to be so lethal that it converts blood into crystalline sand-like form in a matter of seconds. The scientists immediately demand that the small town of Piedmont, with its dead, be destroyed with a nuclear weapon. By a mechanical signalling error and the procrastination of the political system the directive is delayed just long enough for the scientists to determine that energy feeds this new lifeform; a nuclear explosion would result in its dramatic growth, mutation and distribution! The scientists reverse their demands only to find that the mutated growth of the organism has introduced a form which is non-toxic to humans yet is disintegrating the laboratory protective gaskets. The automatic alarm is activated by such disintegration and the nuclear device is primed. With seconds to spare the detonation mechanism is disarmed. In the end, rainwater "kills" the lifeform.

There are a number of points to note:
a) Government deception is assumed to be a norm; b) Scientific conclusions are acknowledged as possibly incorrect; c) "Importing" a life-threatening organism from space is a possibility; d) Humans are demonstrated to be typically narrow-minded and ignorant; e) The movie is presented as fact with no suggestion of how to respond; f) Resistance to future space exploration is a logical response; g) Resistance to biological warfare development is a logical response.

The story was never a reality except in the "Biowar Strategy Planning" thinktank of the Rand Corporation, an American government national security and department of defense fantasy, analysis and intellectualization institution. In 1969, Rand scientists had been asked to investigate a problem following several Moon landings: the rapid ageing of organic components on the Moon. Temperature variations had been ruled out. The influence of an Earth-like atmospheric pressure on the inside of a component and near vacuum pressure on the outside had been tested long before and did not explain the peculiarity. A possibility was eventually hypothesized and suggested.

A Biowar Department has an obvious predisposition to the elements of its research: bacteria, viruses, fungi, altered lifeforms - and ways in which they can become or be made to become fatal to humans. The report produced suggested that a possible explanation for the rapid degradation of the spacecraft and spacesuit gaskets was the presence of a "space virus" which reproduced by absorbing the oxygen from any nearby components or beings. Somehow, introduction of the lunar alien lifeform into the Earth's atmosphere had killed it - for no one could find it. And fortunately, the lifeform had not mutated to a form suitable for replication on the Earth. What were the chances of it being able to do so in the future, if given another opportunity ? Unknown. If it did mutate into a lifeform which found the Earth's environment friendly - how could it be contained, or destroyed ? Unknown.
The story originator of "The Andromeda Strain", Michael Crichton, knew of the report and was known for his thorough research backing his novels. More than anything else, the movie revealed the intended sophistication of the American biowar research program. It also provide a real excuse, although not a publicly acknowledged rationale - for the suspension of any more missions to or study of the Moon - for the foreseeable future.

1971 - By November,
Paul Twitchell would publish the following in the first edition of his new book, "Herbs: The Magic Healers":

"It is better to have a healthy body when trying to reach God-Realization than one filled with pain, anguish, and sickness.
The world is already overpopulated and nature always has a way of taking care of this phenomenon whenever it takes place on earth. If a major war does not reduce the population of the human race so others might live, then a vast catastrophe takes place and large masses of people are suddenly taken out of their bodies. This is why the Living ECK Master is now striving so hard to arouse Souls to get out of their bodies naturally and return to the higher worlds so they will not have to be reincarnated into this world where a major cataclysm is going to take place.

However, we find a need for living in better health in the present moment.
There is a remedy through herbs, plants, diet, moderate fasting, and the phiosophy of Eckankar. ...
Rebazar Tarzs, the great ECK Master, said,
'Man has lived too long with the idea that there must be a single best way for him to do everything. He must change his traditional thinking of what is normal and average, so as to better understand the individual patterns in all aspects of his life. He must come to know himself.' ...

The world's people must find a system under which to live different from the present ones which are governing the various nations. This is not a criticism of any particular government, but of the social conditions existing throughout the world today. ...
As a nation, (the USA) has an unusually large amount of sickness.
It has been shown that at least 900 out of every 1,000 suffer from some defect or disorder. Statisitcs now show that 1/3rd of the people during their life will be subject to cancer of one variety or another. The figures for those having heart trouble is supposedly 30 million. The latter is the number one killer in this country, due to the stress and strain of modern civilization. Some 27 million people are said to be arthritis victims. Diabetes patients run into a figure of about 6 million. ...

When the appetite is stimulated by great varieties of foods, we are usually tempted to eat more than we should, because we wish to satisfy taste, rather than hunger. ...
The idealist is drawn toward the mystical and transcendental by a desire to lift the burden of suffering from humanity. He is aware of the limitations of orthodix methods, and he hopes to escape from these limitations. While he does not condemn spiritual healing, he must look very deeply into the whole subject. He cannot shut his eyes to the unsatisfactory and disastrous results that happen when spiritual healing has been ignorantly or inadequately employed. ...

Spiritual healing has its limitations ... must also consider the spiritual level of the person who approaches ... if he who requests healing has a low survival factor, he is not apt to be healed spiritually.
If he has a chronic negative attitude, it is not likely that anyone can do much for him.
However, if he has a positive, cheerful attitude, it is most likely that he can have a healing, which can often be called a miracle. ...
The greatest vices which can bring about the downfall of a family are drugs and alcohol. We have plenty of knowledge, research, and communication on the results of drug abuse, but few people pay much attention. People can play dangerous games with their health at almost any time. It comes back to the one thing which is basic in all life: we are responsible to a large degree for maintaining our health. ...

No two people can follow the same diet for many reasons.
One may be karmic conditions, another could be the environmental conditions learned at mother's knee. Physical heredity and astrological influences may also contribute to individual differences.
No two people have the same reaction to a given food intake.
Whereas one person can be a good vegetarian, another would become ill if put on such a diet for any length of time. ... Vegetarianism ... has been followed ... and remained more out of necessity (because of human population densities) ....

If we are ill, it is only meant to be a warning, an alarm signal, and not a punishment.
Too many ignore this divine alarm signal and go to the drugstore to find a pain-relieving drug on the shelf. The use of drugs or other drastic means to heal, such as patent medicines and other methods, only serves to destroy the delicate alarm signals.
There are two ways that drugs are harmful to the body - one is that drugs will only arrest the progress of the disease, but seldom cure it; second, that drugs are generally devoid of morality and spirituality, having been developed at any cost and method to destroy the synptoms of disease. Drugs often create more seriouc illness and disease in future generations by arresting a malady at its present stage of progress within the body.

... the state of the body has an influence upon the mind, and the mind, in turn, can affect the spiritual side of those not yet trained in the spiritual arts of Soul Travel. When one has reached a certain stage of spiritual unfoldment, he will have the self-discipline so that nothing can affect him. This is known as vairag , or true detachment from the material world. But at the stage of spiritual unfoldment that most people have reached at the present time, few have any discipline whatsoever. ...
The ECK (God or positive) way is to show man how to release his own innate abilities so that he might successfully achieve good judgement, good health within this world, success at Soul Travel, and spiritual perfection leading to God-Realization. ...

Most products grown in the cooler climates are ECK (positive) ....
One should add lots of seeds to his diet ... pumpkin, sesame, almond, and other types of nuts (not salted nuts, but those that are raw or have been roasted only in pure oil). One should also add to the diet brewer's yeast, lecithin, and wheat germ ... can be eaten with cottage cheese and salads or mixed in fruit juices and yoghurt ... Buttermilk ... some meat ... the best all around food product, which contains a perfect balance ... is natural, unpolished brown rice."

1971 - In November
President Marcos of the Philippines, was nearing the end of his second term and he could not run for another term unless the constitution was amended. The Constitutional Conference was the likely place for Marcos to try and manipulate such an opportunity. The Liberals were his most direct opposition; he had personally advised several of the Liberal Senators on past occasions not to run for office. Suggestions were being considered that Imelda might run for the office just to keep the power in the family. The reign of terror and intimidation, beginning before August, backfired and the Liberal received such a large sympathy vote in November that they took 6 of the 8 senatorial seats contested.
Encouraged from their victory, delegates at the Convention put forward a proposal to ban Ferdinand Marcos and all members of his family from ever holding the position of head of state, no matter what form of administration was finally chosen. Imelda arranged to bribe 18 delegates to vote against the "ban Marcos" issue; it was disclosed by the intermediary, Eduardo Quintero of Leyte, a former ambassador to Japan. In retaliation, HE was arrested by the National Bureau of Investigation (NBI) and charged with perjury, graft, and corrupt practices - for daring to link the First Lady to bribery. The Ban Marcos clause was defeated. Quintero took up voluntary exile in the USA.
To garner sympathy, Malacanang Palace announced that Imelda was pregnant and that the harsh press was placing the baby in danger of miscarriage. Then the baby was announced lost. A heavily photographed funeral for the "lost child" was held at which Imelda buried a white box under a slab marked: "To our unborn child, with whom so many of our dreams died - Ferdinand and Imelda." Both announced their intentions not to run for further political office. There never was a baby - it was all another careful manipulation of the electorate through the mass media. Two weeks later, Imelda began her campaign for the presidency by taking truckloads of rice and medicine to the poor regions.

1971 - On the night of Saturday, November 13,
Farmer Angelo Cellot was ploughing his fields near Lot-et-Garonne in SW France, 56 miles east of Bordeaux. At about 1.50 a.m. he became aware of a light which was in the air moving along the stream at the northern boundary of his property towards him. As he turned his tractor he noticed that the object had changed direction and was following him up the field preceded by a red light. The object hovered at an estimated altitude of 130 feet, had 5 bright lights underneath it and it began to descend over him. When the object was down to 50 to 70 feet above him, he jumped from the tractor in fear and ran towards his brother's neighbouring house. Looking back, he saw the object climbing and heading away to the north. It had been completely silent throughout.

1971 - During the year,
Unusual Amounts of Iridium, a radioactive element, were found in Antarctic soils and ice at depths indicating their deposition about 65 million years earlier. Iridium tends to be found with iron in some meteorites. Previous to 65 million years ago, the Earth's climate has been indicated to have been much warmer than in more recent times - suggesting that the Earth was closer to the Sun, the Sun was hotter, the Earth's core was hotter, the Earth's atmosphere retained its solar heat better, or some combination of the preceding. It would be determined that at least 6 major mass extinctions had occurred in the past 600 million years as well as a number of smaller ones. A cyclical pattern of perhaps every 26 to 33 million years is suggested by scientists.
An explanation proposed is that a meteorite measuring 6 to 7 miles in diameter struck the Earth 65 million years ago and the ensuing explosion threw so much ash and dust into the atmosphere that sunlight was sufficiently blocked to result in a fall in climactic temperatures. A result was that plants and herbivores died in massive numbers and the iridium introduced into the ash and dust settled with a soot layer caused by a global firestorm.

1971 - In December
The Smithsonian Agreement is reached by the Group of Ten (a group of major industrial countries of the IMF - Belgium, Canada, France, Italy, Japan, the Netherlands, Sweden, Britain, the USA, West Germany, Switzerland) to adopt floating exchange rates. Held at the Smithsonian Institute in Washington, D.C., the conference is prompted by the collapse of the fixed exchange rates that had existed since the Bretton Woods Agreement of 1944, and indirectly by the USA decision to abandon the gold exchange standard. If fixed relative rates of exchange were to remain, then the value of non-American currencies would be completely at the mercy of the value of American currencies. Unless all other nations completely concurred with the monetary policies of the USA, they would find themselves dragged along by the influence of those policies - as if they had implemented them themselves. The only way in which to maintain political independence in the market would be to have floating exchange rates between currencies to reflect the success or failure of the monetary policies adopted by each nation.
As great quantities of currency are exchanged between countries daily, and since the value of gold is now free ranging, the relative value of the American dollar to a foreign currency can now become dramatic. In a dramatic situation, the value of a non-American currency could dramatically fall or rise relative to the attractiveness of the American dollar, which is no longer pegged to a standard, the stabilized value of gold. The major concern is that the freeing of the price of gold will create anarchy in the currency markets unless each currency can be allowed to establish its own value according to relative demand.

1971 - By the end of the year
Herpes Infection patient consultations in the USA have reached an annual total of 125,000.
Many persons outside the military and nursing industries are unfamiliar with the symptoms of such infections. Genital herpes often goes unreported because of the destructive North American attitudes of shame, guilt, and fear - together with general ignorance about human sexuality and sexual organs.
Like modern epidemic illnesses, non life threatening symptoms result in little attention from the medical industry. As a result, no cure would be found by 1996 by which time the majority of the population would be classified as either infected or carriers. A survey of herpes sufferers in the early 1980s would record the following findings of what was considered the influence of genital herpes:
40% experienced diminished self-esteem and work effectiveness; 35% had decreased sexual drive or impotence; 25% were experiencing self-destructive feelings; 18% found that it contributed to relationship breakup.

In addition to marital or relationship breakdown, others reported rejection by a sexual partner once they were truthfully informed of their partner's infection. This was contributing to more cases of denial and secretiveness regarding the presence and spread of the disease. In a spiritually focused culture, this degree of negative influence on the physical, emotional, social and spiritual aspects of the citizens together with a high rate of spread and a lack of remedy would have stimulated a major effort to inform, prevent, remedy, control and cure. Many sexually active North American individuals in 1996 would be totally oblivious to most herpes infections and their significance.
Herpes would not be considered as destructive to health as smoking; it is not usually as disabling as the flu. They do not often result in immediate, easily definable dramatic symptoms about which it is socially acceptable to converse. Herpes is classified into five forms of human infection. There are at least 70 herpes viruses found amongst more than 30 species on the Earth. These include dogs, cats, cattle, chimpanzees, squirrels, fish, snakes, frogs, sharks, and others. A herpes virus particular to one species is not usually communicable to another species. "Herpes" as a word is derived from the Greek word for "creep"; the virus is usually evidenced as a skin eruption which has a tendency to spread.

"Herpes 1" and "Herpes 2" viruses (Herpes labialis [cold sores] and Herpes keratitis [eye infection] are the more common and can become infectious. Commonly believed to only affect the specific organs mentioned, they can actually infect any and all organs in the human. Once acquired, they have a tendency to symptomatically reoccur when the immune system is compromised by high levels of negative emotional stress, or, when taking antibiotics. Viruses are not influence negatively by antibiotics; rather, antibiotics change the level of acidity in human mucous membrane and bodily fluids leading to an environment which promotes viral and fungal mutation into health destructive varieties. Antibiotics may kill both destructive and helpful bacteria within the body, thereby leaving no control or opposition against the establishment and growth of destructive viral and fungal colonies. A reduction of negative stress levels, an increase in positive coping skill use, and a re-establishment or strengthening of positive bacterial cultures in the body are the best forms of care and symptom removal. Since either of these viruses can be transferred by skin contact, the greater the number of person contacts you have - the more likely you are to acquire the virus. Your simplest approach is to assume you have these viruses and follow those strategies mentionned here and elsewhere in the report to minimize their destructiveness and their symptoms of virulence and contagion.
"Herpes 3" (Varicella-zoster virus [VZV]), is a common infectious illness more commonly known as chickenpox and shingles. Chickenpox (Fr. = chick pea) epidemics have been common in European and European settled nations (ie North America) since the beginning of history. For many decades, shingles ("belt") was believed to be a separate illness; it is a variation of symptomology for the same virus. Much of the European and North American population has been exposed to this virus and has developed antibodies against re-infection or reoccurrence of symptoms. The only way to avoid this virus is to avoid those who have contracted it. It has commonly been spread by way of school class contact between children.
"Herpes 4" (Epstein-Barr virus) was not discovered until 1964 and is a modern mutation of Herpes 1, 2, and 3. It may result in infectious mononucleosis (the so-called "kissing disease") which can result in symptoms of persistent tiredness and exhaustion which may last for weeks, or, unusually, for years. Until the late 1980s, many North American physicians, and the medical industry - would frequently deny the devastating influence of the illness on some persons. Chronically ill persons would be frequently victimized by the medical establishment charged with protecting them - with labels such as "psychosomatic illness," "hypochondriac," "mentally ill," or symptomatic of the "Yuppie illness."
Psychological and emotional symptoms can accompany this illness as an extension of long-term debilitating symptoms which have a tendency to promote such negative emotions as helplessness, anxiety, depression, impatience, intolerance. These are often encouraged by the negative influence of doctors, relatives, and friends who humiliate, reject, abandon, and shame these truly sick persons by failing to acknowledge the feelings and capabilities of the individuals concerned - because they "look" healthy, or, because they have been active or overachievers in the past. The more positive approach to assisting such a person is to accept their activity pacing, encourage positive coping skill development and use, discourage negativity, and promote the use of energy balancing therapies.

"Herpes 5" (Cytomoegalovirus [CMV]), that is, genital herpes, will be carried asymptomatically by much of the North American population by 1990. Acquired by kissing, oral sex, mutual masturbation (petting), touching (transfer by hand contact), and sometimes, from unsantitary toilet facilities - this virus is easily transfered from the genitals to the mouth, lips, and eyes either by direct contact or by hand or other skin surface transfer. The initial symptom will usually last for at least 24 hours and consist of a pin-and-needles sensation or a burning, tingling, or itching of the genital area. Some will feel pain in the buttocks which may extend down the legs. Between 3 and 7 days after exposure, fever, malaise and other flu-like symptoms may occur. A small area of skin may redden followed by the appearance of a small elevation on the skin (a papule) which develops into a blister-like, fluid-filled elevation on the reddened skin. This or these papule often break open after several days and form infectious ulcers.
Be aware that many of these symptoms "may" occur. Depending upon the immune resistance you have developed, you may not experience ANY symptoms. Others will experience only some of the symptoms described and others may simply have one small papule, the size of a match head develop on their penis, vulva, or in the genital area. Symptoms, when present, may last and spread for weeks, or may be of short duration and quickly forgotten or rationalized into denial. Some excuses for symptoms include inadequate sexual lubrication, overly aggressive sex, coarseness of one's partner's public hair, irritation from an ointment, creme, or a type of condom. The only way to ensure that you do not get the virus is to ensure that both you and your intended sexual partner have both been recently tested for CMV, have not had any other sexual partners since the test, follow good practices of hygiene BEFORE sexual contact, and maintain an exclusive commitment to one another.

There have developed within the American culture numerous behaviours in the last 10 years
which promote the spread of this incurable viral illness. Some of these include:
1. More prevalent casual sexual encounters; 2. Increasing numbers of homosexual relationships; 3. Vastly increased overseas military service by draft; 4. Predominantly teenager and young adult military draft; 5. Relative increase in the use of prostitiution services; 6. Greatly increased use of inhibition-relaxing drugs; 7. Expanding mass media promotion of sex and drugs; 8. Adoption of oral sex as popular and preferable; 9. Rising frequency of divorce and relationship breakdown.

These and other influences would enable Genital Herpes and other viral illnesses to become epidemic.

With the general inability of the public to associate decreased sexual desire and impotence to "Herpes 5", many destructive spurious rationalizations would arise which further intensified the spread of the virus and its socially devastating effects. In the most dramatic instance, a person who has been following a frequency of sexual activity at least once daily for much of their sexually mature life becomes sexually impotent within several weeks. If there were symptoms, they were probably ignored, rationalized, minimal, and disappeared quickly. A lack of sexual interest and performance between this individual and partner will quickly raise anxiety, suspicion of another love interest, frustration, acting out, and despair.
Going to a physician will likely elicit embarrassment (on the doctor's part), pop psychology suggestions of anything from more varied sexual intercourse positions to a variation of sexual partners, to patience, confusion and denial. If the couple has less than adequate coping skills, cross-vicimization may result with each blaming the other, feeling betrayed and humiliated, and increasingly developing frustration, anger, and insecurity. With such negativity, it is not surprising that love will suffer as trust appears to be absent, - empathy, compassion and patience have all been dispensed with. Each ignorantly and proudly believe that they know what is going on. In the end, both will usually either live in misery, or, actively expand the number of infected.

Where the level of sexual desire and activity are much lower - one or two occasions per month, a further decrease in frequency will not appear as dramatic. It will be easy to rationalize it as an influence of aging or a predictable outcome of a relationship in which all has become stable, constant, reliable, comfortable, - without passion. Eventually, the person not so affected, is challenged to add some "spice" to their intimacy by resorting to an affair, a prostitute, or, a later-in-life divorce. These don't provide more than a temporary and passing remedy, yet the lack of honesty and the prevaling miscommunication in the society reinforce the myth that these options are cures. Those so involved justify their choices with fantasy, projection and lies by which they promote such options as beneficial and glorious. Much of the enthusiasm is based on pride trying to conceal further failure, or trying to maintain a denial in order to avoid feelings of shame and guilt. Is there another alternative?

If indeed one has acquired "Herpes genitalia" and that has resulted in a greatly reduced or absent sexual drive, it can be an opportunity by which a much more spiritual lifestyle can be easily engaged in. Without the lust, possessiveness, and intensity of emotion which often accompanies a more frequent sexual desire, that is, a higher libido, one is less distracted from the development of and utilization of spiritual skills - which require time, energy and focus. Some of these include meditation, prayer, patience, reflection, empathy, positive self-direction, self-sufficiency, assertiveness, ....

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1972 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
Cabaret, The Godfather, Winter Soldier, The Candidate; Frenzy; Snoopy Come Home; Deliverance; Last of the Red Hot Lovers; The Candidate; Last Tango in Paris; The Getaway; The Groundstar Conspiracy; Pete and Tillie; The New Centurions; The Wrath of God; The Life and Times of Judge Roy Bean; Chato's Land; Deadly Harvest; Fuzz; 1776; Kansas City Bomber; The Rowdyman; Shaft's Big Score; The Cowboys; Cabaret; The Horror at 37,000 Feet

General News:

Consumer Price Index: 125.3

1972 - By this year,
Titanium applications are beginning to expand beyond the military and aerospace fields where increasing utilization of it has been employed in the making of armoured tanks, bulletproof vests, supersonic aircraft, missiles, rockets, satellites, submarines, and bullets.
Increasingly, titanium dioxide is being considered as a white pigmenting ingredient in paints to replace lead which is now considered a toxic hazard, particularly to children when old or weathered paint is scaling away from the painted surface. The properties of the titanium dioxide which are found favourable to such an application include its chemical inertness, superior covering ability, opacity to damaging ultraviolet light, permanence, nonpoionous nature, ease of mixing with oil, lightness, and, self-cleaning ability. This latter aspect is not well understood at this time, nor would it be for at least another 10 years.
Examples of other applications for the whitening ability of the titanium dioxide include its use as a filler in papers, a colouring agent for rubber and leather products, a pigment in ink, enamels, glazes, linoleum, rayon, plastics, white rubber, shoe cremes, face powder, and a component of ceramics. It would find important use in porcelain enamels, giving a finish coat of great brilliance, hardness, and acid resistance.

The alloy ferrotitanium becomes very useful in the steel industry, both as a deoxidizer and in the making of alloy steels. Besides increasing the resistance of the alloy to shock, it also increases the compound's corrosion resistance. The strong reducing (combining/attracting) power of the Titanium ion makes this metal more reactive with a great many other substances, including copper and bronze, than other metals tend to be. Yet once combined with another element, the resulting compound is often more cohesive than many others. This presents the development of a wider element-based series of compounds with apparent inertness.
A number of commercial applications were and would be derived from titanium's highly reactive nature giving it a high degree of corrosion resistance. It has the ability to form, upon exposure to the Earth's atmosphere, a tight, tenacious oxide film that is resistant to chloride environments and oxidizing acids - which are highly corrosive to other metals. Application would be found in the acid-leaching processes used in the production of copper and nickel. Chemical processing equipment, dimensionally stable anodes for the production of chlorine, and, increasingly, tubing for nuclear and hydro electrical generating plant surface condensers and heat exchangers used in oil refineries, desalination plants, and pollution control devices - also were becoming applications from this time on.
As the uses for titanium to support applications relative to major war (Cold War and Vietnam) efforts (aerospace, missiles, supersonic aircraft) diminished, uses would be found in the commercial sector which would enable higher efficiencies in production and higher quality in products. Rather than strength and lightness of weight, the primary capacities of interest would now tend to be its de-oxidization properties, its ability to make strong bonds with other elements, and the inertness of some titanium compounds. Consumption would continue to increase.

1972 - During the year,
Dr. J.A. Kopp of Ebikon, Switzerland, reported that a German engineer had himself carried horizontally on a stretcher over a dowsing zone in an effort to determine if some particular area of the body responded to dowsing signals more than another. As his head passed the dowsing zone, the rod was undisturbed; when his solar plexus was above the same zone, the dowsing rod immediately reacted. Kopp had for years used dowsing techniques to locate geopathic zones that seemed to relate to high incidences of cancer and other chronic diseases. This experiment confirmed the findings of Harvalik, as noted in 1970.

It is known that plants respond to the same energy radiations or signals that a dowser detects. Certain plant formations are known to occur in various parts of the world over geopathic energy points which may indicate the presence of underground watercourses at differing depths crossing each other. Some plants respond favourably to such small regions, seeming to grow abundantly in place of the dominant surrounding vegetation. If an advanced intelligent being came to the Earth with a plant-like biology, it is likely that it would be aware of such signals and could use them as travel beacons, homing indicators, and bad or good energy stations.

1972 - During February,
A Hotel II Class Soviet Submarine caught on fire 700 nautical miles (1,300 km) northeast of Newfoundland.
Like others of the class, it was nuclear-propelled and carried 8 nuclear ballistic missiles.
A major surface force, including the helicopter carrier "Leningrad", was dispatched to assist the submarine as it was towed back to its base.

1972 - On February 10,
USA Presidential Executive Order 11647 was signed by President Nixon.
It placed into effect the regional and local mechanisms and manpower for carrying out the provisions of E.O. 11490 (October 28, 1969). To take effect on presidential declaration of a state of national emergency, ten Federal Regional Councils would take over the control of all activities within each of Ten Federal Regions. These regions were defined as:
1. Connecticut, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, Rhode Island, Vermont; 2. New York, New Jersey, Puerto Rico, Virgin Islands; 3. Delaware, Maryland, Pennsylvania, Virginia, West Virginia, D.C.; 4. Alabama, Fla, Georgia, Kentucky, Miss., N. Carolina, Tennessee; 5. Illinois, Indiana, Michigan, Minnesota, Ohio, Wisconsin; 6. Arkansas, Louisiana, New Mexico, Oklahoma, Texas; 7. Iowa, Kansas, Missouri, Nebraska; 8. Colorado, Montana, North and South Dakota, Utah, Wyoming; 9. Arizona, California, Hawaii, Nevada;
10. Alaska, Oregon, Washington, Idaho.

Each region is to be subdivided into subregions such that control is placed over every community.

1972 - On February 14,
Luna 20, a Soviet Union lunar satellite was launched from Tyuratam to the Moon, and, after a safe landing in a mountainous isthmus dotted with large craters south of the Sea of Crises and on the extreme northeast of the Sea of Fertility, a drill sample of soil is taken. Part of the sample is soil/sand and the remainder is rock.
On return to Earth, the capsule is recovered with some difficulty on an island in the River Karakingir, 40 km northwest of Dzhezkazgan in Kazakhstan after landing in a blizzard on February 25.

1972
Pierre Paul Sauvin: electronics specialist in aerospace, with A.T.&T., investigator of ESP and remote hypnotism, remote controlled aircraft models, from West Patterson, New Jersey, U.S.A. ; has written frequently under pseudonyms.
Established that a human could communicate with a plant on an emotional basis.
Best results came from plants with which a special mental rapport was made.
A cluster of cells can change polarity; that can change the electrical potential of the whole (voltage).

Plants exhibit a quality of awareness and an empathy for other organisms in their presence.
Personal emotional memories could influence plants over 80 miles away.
Plant reactions to thoughts about harming them, or pain, distress, sexual orgasms or death of cells of a significant human were sharp; to joy and pleasure they were more gradual and less able to "trigger" remote devices. These results can be tied to Sentic research. Individual plants may respond to local incidents of differing nature involving different lifeforms.

The simplest signal that could be transmitted extrasensorily and effect a sharp response was from an electric shock; remembering or re-feeling the shock would later be sufficient to activate the response. The death of living human cells provided the strongest plant reaction. Plants which receive too much stimuli have a tendency to "faint" under such excess stress, similar to animals expressing exhaustion, shock, confusion.
Plants could be/have been connected to technological switches which opened garage doors, detected anxious people, exploded a weapon. His Device 13 he desires to remain secret because he does not want the Department of Defense to develop it into a foolproof thought-controlled guided missile. The proposition remains: if he could design such a weapon, so could other persons.

The sensitivity of plants to lifeform distress at a distance may explain how highly spiritual spacebeings located as far away as Andromeda galaxy can sense massive biological shock elsewhere, as on the Earth, as an example. Thought-controlled detonation of explosives will be used in a conflict on the Earth in 1996. They will represent a human-GRAY hybrid developed technology which the BLONDs and REDs oppose.

1972 - On March 11,
"The American Business Community in the Philippines has greeted with relief the ... declaration of martial law."
This was the report of "The New York Times".
One telegram to President Marcos read: "The American Chamber of Commerce of the Philippines wishes you every success in your endeavours to restore peace and order, business confidence, economic growth, and the well-being of the Filipino people and nation." A USA State Department official commented that American corporations were "very bullish" on martial law.
The 1946 Parity Amendment would expire on July 3, 1974, by which time American owners would have to be reduced to 40%. Marcos was able to give assurances to USA President Nixon, his aide Henry Kissinger and Ambassador Byroade that "We'll pass the laws you need - just tell us what you want." Manipulation through a Supreme Court packed with Marcos appointees was easy. Marcos would not change the court decision, he would simply selectively apply it, beneficially to the Americans as long as they supported him, and, beneficially to American individuals as long as they paid him bribes, kickbacks or shared their company with him.

With 35,000 USA servicemen on the islands, American bankers managed a tenth of Manila's $2.1 billion national debt, $74 million in emergency relief, $75 million in aid, and upwards of $2 billion in USA investments. Marcoses manipulation of the media and his control over the military and the police meant he could tell half lies to the American people and they would love him for it. There wasn't any crime in the Philippines, except what he controlled.
There weren't any insurgents in the Philippines, except those he staged.
There wasn't any civil opposition; it was being tortured away by his American-trained officers in his jails.
The American leadership knew the truth, but they had to deceive their citizens themselves: they NEEDED a war to keep the economy spinning - and you couldn't have a war unless an "impartial" party near the action justified your involvement by stroking your ego.

Bankers appreciate stability and discipline - martial law was a plus.
Bankers and entrepreneurs appreciated the PROGRESS LEGEND: where autocratic, disparate class agriculturally-based society grows into a "progressive", middle-class, industry and technology-based economy with considerable individual freedom. It was the intellectual romanticism of the employer who looks out over his mechanical marvels and architectural nuances with reverence while failing to see the slaves toiling in the shadows, dependent lifelong to pay taxes, rentals, loan repayments, clothing and food expenses - while the primitive grows and harvests freely what is needed and fashions what to wear - until demand outstrips supply.
The "New Society" of the Marcos Philippines inspired the practical rationalist thinker, Robert McNamara, then head of the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund (IMF) to secretly classify the Philippines as a "country of concentration." That meant that it could receive higher amounts of aid than would be approved on the average for countries of similar size and income.

1972 - In the April 10 issue of Time
"Life Without the Tube" profiled TV addiction withdrawal symptoms.
According to the Society for Rational Psychology in Munich, Germany, reducing TV viewing suddenly can lead to moodiness, child spanking, wife beating, extramarital affairs and, at home, decreased interest in sex along with fewer orgasms. ... What drove (the addicts) back to the tube was mounting tension at work, at home and in bed. Quarrelling and physical aggression increased. ...
With the TV on again, aggression decreased and sexual habits went back to normal ... cautions Psychologist Henner Ertel .. the tube might well foster tension and dull sensuality in those who are unaccustomed to it. But among devotees, it may mask conflicts and even provide a last link between otherwise estranged couples. "With people who watch regularly, many behaviour patterns become so closely related to TV that they are negatively influenced if one takes the set away. The problem is that of addiction."

Warned of from the beginning, advertisement supported television programs and a lack of cultural leadership in the prudent and constructive use of this new technology would lead a dependent educated citizen down the lazy path of self-indulgence excluding the opportunity to develop interpersonal skills and to maintain open, honest, humble communication as a basis for relationships.
Such inefficiencies in communication prevent the individual from becoming able to cope with the individualities and needs of others by acting as a constant distraction which tends to reduce and amalgamate the sensibilities of the individuals viewing to the common denominator of TV programming. What would happen to such a culture if the principle of electricity failed or if the major sources were interrupted?

1972 - Between April 16 to 27,
Apollo 16 landed on the Moon with astronauts Young and Duke conducting the experiments on the surface, while Mattingly orbited the Moon, awaiting their return.

Their photo #67-H-1135 showing the path of some form of belted vehicle, and #16-19067 traversing over 30 miles.
Their Hasselblad photo #16-19081 shows 2 dome-like structures and a an oblong object near 2 craters.
Photo #16-19229 of the King Crater area shows a number of large domes.
Photo #16-758 shows patches of fog and clouds near the Lobachavsky crater area.
Photos AS-16-121-19438 shows a large symbol 1000 feet in size on the inner wall of a crater near the Sea of Tranquillity.
Photo #16-19265 shows 10 objects, neatly 'parked' in rows, beside a special cut crater.
Photo #16-19386 shows a large Latin cross symbol drawn on the surface.
Another large cross symbol is shown in photo #16-19228 in the King Crater area.
Photos #16-19238 and 16-18923 show a cigar-shaped aerial objects flying over the lunar surface and sitting on it.
Photo #16-19386 shows a white long object sticking out of a crater.
Photo #16-18918 shows an oval UFO entering or leaving a large crater.
Photo #16-18918 also shows some form of construction within a crater and
photo # 16-19386 also shows some form of tube or pipe which leads up from a lower crater to a smaller one above.
Photo #16-19376 similarly shows a pipe between two craters.
Photo #16-19386, two objects or constructions are shown inside a crater in the same picture.
Photo #16-18923 shows artificial platforms on the Moon's hidden side.
Photo #16-18918 shows constructions on the lunar surface which resemble large tanks or towers.

1972
The Space Shuttle becomes the new long-term American space focus following the cancellation of the Apollo program and further flights to the Moon. NASA promotes the shuttle as a reusable space vehicle intended to reduce energy and material use while making possible lower satellite launch costs. At a rate of 50 flights per year, it is rationalized as economical. NASA estimates the average unit launch cost at $14 million. This would provide a cargo-to-orbit cost of only $300/pound.
When it did become operational, 4 shuttles would be built:
Columbia, Discovery, Atlantis, and Challenger.

By mid-1994, fewer than 65 shuttle flights would have been flown and NASA's new estimate of per flight cost would increase to $500 million making the delivery cost per pound of cargo $10,000. In actual fact, the General Accounting Office would flatly deny NASA's estimate and state that the true per flight cost was closer to $900,000.
The Soviet Union would develop its own shuttle.
After several flights it would be taken out of service as impractical.
Proton and other huge Soviet rockets were simpler and more proven technologies.
Why fix something that works?

1972 - During the year,
A tunnel boring machine (TBM) was manufactured by "Lovat Tunnel Equipment Inc."
In 1994, the company and its machines would receive newspaper coverage in Canadian newspapers.
The company would be billed as the only North American company producing such machines, in competition with 1 company in England and 3 in Japan. Units in 1994 were selling for $6 to $8 million dollars (Canadian). 138 machines had been built over the 22 years; some were used for extensions of subway systems in Paris, Moscow, Caracas, Ankara and Madrid. Richard Lovat immigrated to Canada in 1952 from Belluno, Italy. Starting developing TBMs in 1970 with a staff of 12 putting together 1 or 2 machines a year, the company now has 180 people building a TBM monthly in Etobicoke, Ontario, Canada.
With computerized controls, the operator remains at the control panel and controls the tunnel boring machine (TBM) much like flying an aircraft. The shield section at the beginning of the TBM is a high-tech control centre 20 feet in diameter by 25 feet long. At about 500 tons, it weighs more than a 747 aircraft and its driving motors generate 2,500 horsepower. When the trailing equipment is attached, the length increases to 230 feet.
The face of the TBM must be pressurized but not the rest.
If repairs are necessary to the cutting face parts, there is an airlock which allows someone to go forward and do the maintenance. Tunnels are usually lined by ready-made concrete wall segments, which are fixed in place by the machine's erector arm. Operators reset thrust cylinders at the rear of the machine to exert forward pressure. A screw conveyor transports the mined material to a conveyor belt which empties into muck cars which travel out of the tunnel on tracks.

Construction of tunnels to connect secret underground facilities located beneath AEC research and manufacturing sites, military bases, Indian reservations and parklands was begun in 1966. Tunnel-boring machines were quickly developed or obtained from private sources as less labour intensive, faster, less costly and less attention raising than labour intensive methods. Some of the above noted units may have been used for such work.

1972 - On May 7,
William Goodlett from Salem, Virginia, U.S.A., experienced the following:
(113) ... I was quite old and thin, but not feeble.
About seven feet tall, I had a long beard and long gray hair, and was dressed in a heavy, belted robe.
Over this I wore a shawl or cape with long fringe, and I carried a tall staff.
With me was a young girl of about 18, with a clear complexion and long, wavy, dark hair, dressed in a long frock, embroidered with bands of colour around the neckline, hem, and edges of the long, loose sleeves. We were accompanied by a young man who was heavily built, with wide shoulders and long wavy hair, who was clad in a knee-length dress with wide borders of embroidery, a dark brown in colour, with blue and yellow accents.
We were walking down a trail of sandy gravel about 20 feet wide, through a forest of what seemed like oak trees, except that each of them was two or three times bigger around than the giant sequoias that I have seen (in western U.S.A.). They were spaced quite far apart and seemed to reach several hundred feet in the air. The trail led between two hills, and on the left one was a large barn, several outbuildings, and a large house with sagging roof and walls fallen into decay, although the barn seemed to be in good condition. There was no underbrush in the forest, just brown dried grasses, and near the house was a light on a tall post that flickered like a gaslight ... the road appeared to be paved with loose crushed slate.
Coming up the hill from the left were several huge wagons whose wheels were ten feet high and made of solid wood. They were pulled by animals as large as elephants that looked like pigs with dog's faces. There were six or eight in teams pulling the wagons, and they seemed to be enjoying the work. ... it was an overcast day, but not dark, and the area smelled like lemons. I remember feeling amazed at the size of the wagons, although the huge animals seemed familiar; ... It seemed that a catastrophe had occurred to destroy many people and places, and that the young people and I had trudged many miles through the forest just to see the wagons pass by.
He alleged that the experience took place on another planet.

1972 - By May,
The "Snake", or Currency Band of currency pricing had been adopted by the European Economic Community (France, Italy, Luxembourg, the Netherlands, West Germany, Great Britain, Ireland and Denmark). As a follow-up to the Smithsonian agreement, it was being discovered that if exchange rates were allowed to fluctuate completely freely, some currencies would risk severe devaluation and the market would generally become anarchistic. If one currency devalued relative to a second and the second devalued relative to a third - the possibility existed that the first could also devalue relative to the third currency. This ripple and echo effect could produce a rip current which would pull the value of all currencies further and further down.
To remedy the situation, the above countries decided that the currency of each would be allowed to fluctuate up and down within certain limits, called a currency band. When one nation's currency repriced relative to an external currency, the exchange rates of all currencies in the "snake" moved accordingly. Within, the snake generally follows the West German Deutschmark, the strongest currency at the time.

1972 - On May 2,
J. Edgar Hoover, director of the USA FBI, was found dead by his close and long-time associate, Clyde Tolson.
During his 48 years with the Bureau, Hoover had become the most widely feared and hated man in America: the Beria of the USA. The political system had much better benefited Hoover than the Stalinist dictatorship of the USSR had benefited Beria. Short-term elected presidents in the USA had been no match for the powerful bureaucracy which Hoover had built. Hoover had authorized the agency to spend a great amount of its investigation time and resources building files containing information of movie stars, scientists, media professionals, politicians, political activists, and, known and suspected criminals.
Hoover was adept at using information which was truly compromising of the image or integrity of a person as well as the manipulation of innocent actions and occurences into suggestive disinformation: he proved repeatedly that he had both the power and the ambition to control presidents. John F. Kennedy had proved to be one of the few whom he had the most dirt on, hated, yet could not expose without an apparent surrender of his patriotism. He had helped make Nixon powerful, and to avoid Nixon's dismissal of him in 1969, he had blackmailed Nixon. The main concern of Nixon on the death of Hoover was the location of the files which Hoover had kept against him.
Immediately, Nixon ordered the records in Hoover's office to be safeguarded and sealed until the next director was appointed. In the interim, his secretary packed many of the files into boxes and removed them. The paranoia which Hoover had instilled in the public through the media during much of his career had seeped into Hoover's soul. He died without heirs. He was quickly buried in a 1000 pound coffin intended to protect his body from nuclear war or terrorist attack. He would be remembered in a further two decades as the "longest tenured lawbreaker in the government" of the USA.

1972 - During May,
The Interim Agreement on the Limitation of Strategic Offensive Arms was signed by the USSR and the USA.
The United States believed that the Soviets had 25 operational Yankee class nuclear-propelled, ballistic missile armed submarines with at least another 17 Yankee and Delta Class submarines in various stages of construction - a force of 42 modern missile armed submarines that would be completed by the end of 1973. The USSR declared that it had 62 submarines completed and under construction, which would carry 950 missiles. The USA had 41 Polaris-Poseidon submarines carrying 656 missiles, with none under construction.
The negotiators agreed that the USA would be limited to a maximum force of 44 SSBNs (a number never reached) and the USSR to 62 submarines with 950 missiles. For the Soviets to reach their target they were going to have to dismantle 240 of their older, land-based intercontinental missiles.

1972 - During June,
A Conference on the Human Environment, sponsored by the United Nations in Stockholm, Sweden, took place.

1972 - On June 17,
The Watergate Scandal began in the U.S.A.
James McCord, a former CIA agent and director of the security for the "Committee to Reelect the President" (CREEP), and four other men were arrested for breaking into the offices of the Democratic National Committee located in the Watergate Apartment Complex in Washington, D.C. Four Cuban-Americans had been recruited by E. Howard Hunt through his contacts with the Cuban exile community In Miami. He had retired from the CIA in 1970.
Hunt had begun to work for the White House in 1971 and was one of those who started Nixon's "plumbers" unit, which conducted secret (and illegal) break-ins and political espionage operations against their own citizens. All of the participants were sent to jail in September without having implicated any leaders of the Republican party. In March, 1973, McCord notified the judge that his illegal mission had been planned in the White House.

1972 - By July,
A. Merkulov, a U.S.S.R. engineer, noted that scientists at the state university in Alma Ata, capital of the Soviet Kazakh Republic, and a major apple growing region, had found that plants repeatedly reacted to their owners' illness and to their emotional states.
Noting that plants had long ago been shown to have "short-term memory", Merkulov said that this fact had been confirmed by the Kazakh scientists. Beans, potatoes, wheat, and crowfoot after proper "instruction" seemed to have the capability of remembering the frequency of flashes from a xenon-hydrogen lamp. The plants repeated the pulsations with "exceptional accuracy", and since crowfoot was able to repeat a given frequency after a pause as long as 18 hours, it was possible to speak of "long-term" memory in plants.
The Kazakh scientists conditioned a philodendron to recognize when a piece of mineralized rock was put beside it and to differentiate between it and a barren rock. This was done with Pavlovian reward-punishment techniques. Control of the growth of plant ranging from monocellular seaweed to that of higher plants was also being worked on. Merkulov suggested that this control might be possible over great distances.
The overall goal of the scientists was to "understand" plants such that "man may create automatic contrivances which themselves will watch over fields in such a way that, at any given moment, they can satisfy the every need of crops. The day is not far away when scientists will also work out a theory on the adaptation and resistance of plants to unpleasant conditions in their environment which will encompass how they react to irritants, and to stimulators and herbicides as well."

What was typically forgotten in many of these kinds of studies and projections by the academic experimenters that proposed them is that on the earth, climate is not finely controllable by humans. As the century would progress, the ability of humanity to analyze and observe weather phenomenon would become more sophisticated; the impact of typhoons, hurricanes, droughts and floods would become more devastating. The only practical locations where such optimum regulation of environment could be hoped to happen would be in massive greenhouses and in space stations.

1972 - During the summer,
The M/V Karagatan incident was manufactured by Ferdinand Marcos with the intent of marshalling international support for increased curtailment of civil rights. He had been leading up to it with a series of explosions in Manila, Known by the CIA to have been carried out by Ver's paramilitary unit, "The Monkees".
President Marcos' new defense minister and personal lawyer Juan Ponce Enrile, blamed "subversives" and the Constabulary stated that it had a copy of a "blueprint for revolution" by the Communist Party. Now, a fishing trawler, the Karagatan ran aground off the northeast coast of Luzon. It was boarded by the military who only found some food supplies; the crew had vanished. Ferdinand proclaimed that the trawler had been running guns to the Communists and sent troops to scour the jungles and planes to strafe the hilltops. Next, according to the Palace, the trawler had on board 3,500 M-15 rifles, 30 rocket launchers, and 160,000 rounds of ammunition. Then the Palace stated that the vessel was "foreign" and had sailed on its sinister mission from Japan.

A guerilla force known as the New People's Army (NPA), modeled on Maoist doctrine and numbered previously at 100 was known to exist nearby. A few days after the Karagatan incident began, their numbers were suddenly 200 NPA regulars and 800 part-time guerillas.
Journalists confirmed that the gunrunning story was a sham.
The real owner of the trawler was the Karagatan Fishing Corporation with offices in Manila.
Before running aground, the trawler had been involved in some cigarette smuggling for an Ilocano syndicate and had docked at Fuga Island, amongst other stops, - where the Marcoses frequently vacationed. Senator Aquino disclosed that President Marcos had secretly purchased 3000 guns from Eastern Europe with the apparent intention of planting them where they could be discovered by the Constabulary as NPA "caches".
A year later, the CIA reported that the NPA presented no threat and had received no foreign assistance. Ferdinand needed a ploy to justify his declaring martial law. Good journalism and honest senators were defusing his smoke bombs.

1972 - Published in July,
Dr. Robert N. Miller, an industrial research scientist and former professor of chemical engineering at Georgia Tech, released the results of experiments he had begun in 1967 with Ambrose and Olga Worrall. Their feats of healing had become celebrated in the U.S.A..
Using an extremely accurate method of measuring plant growth rates developed by Dr. H.H. Kleuter of the United States Department of Agriculture, with accuracies up to one thousandth of an inch per hour, Miller working in Atlanta, Georgia, asked the Worralls to direct their thoughts at rye seedlings from Baltimore, some 600 miles away.
Whereas the growth rate of a new blade of rye grass had been observed by Miller to stabilize at 0.00625 inch per hour, after he asked the Worralls to think of the seedling at exactly 9 P.M., the trace on a graph indicating growth rate began immediately to deviate upward and by 8 A.M. the following morning the grass was growing at a rate 84% faster. Instead of growing the expected 1/16 inch in the interval, the seedling had sprouted more than 1/2 inch. Miller reported that the dramatic results of his experiment suggest that the sensitive experimental technique could be used to measure accurately the effect of mind over matter.

This experiment demonstrated the health enhancing, and potentially health destroying, influence of the spiritual mood emanating from lifeforms directed at other lifeforms, particularly plants. It also demonstrates that such energies or communication can occur over great distances. How might this relate to the abilities of a higher form of intelligent being whose biology is similar to that of plants?

1972
The summer ice does not melt this year at Baffin Island, northern Canada, for the first time in recorded human history.
With a 2 degree centigrade drop in temperatures over the previous 30 years, climatologists suggest that a new ice age could happen within 200 years.

1972 - By July,
The first of the Soviet "Alfa Class" Submarines went into service.
Up to 1980, the USA would commend it for having most impressive technology allowing it to travel faster (up to 40+ knots) and dive deeper (beyond the range of USA anti-submarine torpedoes) than any other submarine in the world. While relatively noisy at high speed, it was very quiet at slower speeds.

1972 - On August 10,
An Asteroid the size of a large railway locomotive is observed to pass over western North America from Utah north over western Canada and "disappear." This is airspace which the NORAD ballistic missile radar defenses should have been able to track. Why would the military conceal the landing site of a meteor?

1972 - By September,
Vladimir Soloukhin, a writer from the northern U.S.S.R., wrote several articles in four issues of the popular "Science and Life" (Nauka i Zhizn) magazine. Disappointed with the response of the public and administration to recent publication of information on the thinking-feeling capacities of plants, he wrote:
"Human observation is so precise that we begin to notice the very air we breathe only when it is insufficient for our needs. More exactly, I should say "value" rather than "notice". We do not really value air, or even think about it, so long as we breathe normally, without difficulty."

He added that, though man prides himself on his vast array of knowledge, he is like a radio technician who knows how to repair a receiver without understanding the theoretical essence of radio waves, or like our caveman ancestors who put fire to use while unaware of the process of rapid oxidation. Even today we squander heat and light yet have not the slightest clue to, or interest in, their original essence. Man is equally callous about the fact that the land around him is green.
"We trample grasses into the dirt, we strip the land with bulldozers and caterpillar treads, we cover it with concrete and hot asphalt. Disposing of wastes from our infernal industrial machines we dump upon it crude oil, rubbish, acids, alkalis, and other poisons. But is there that much grass? I, for one, can imagine man in a boundless, grassless wilderness, the product of a cosmic, or perhaps humanly non-cosmic, catastrophe."

Soloukhin is unremittingly denouncing unecologically minded industrialists in his country, who are turning the rivers and lakes into cesspools, and despoiling its forests, all in the name of increased production. Seeking to re-evoke wonder for nature in the hearts of an overurbanized Soviet youth, Solukhin tells the story of a prisoner who, incarcerated in a dank cell, finds among the pages of an old book, given him by a kindly jailer, a tiny seed smaller than a pinhead. Overcome with emotion at the first visible sign of real life he has seen for years, the prisoner imagines that the microscopic seed is all that remains from the former luxuriant and festive plant kingdom in the great world outside the prison. Planting the seed in a bit of earth in the sole corner of the cell afforded a ray of sunlight, and watering it with his tears, the prisoner waits for a wonder to unfold.
Soloukhin accepts this wonder as a true miracle ignored by man only because it is repeated thousands of billions of times daily. Even if all the world's chemical and physical laboratories with their complex reagents, precise analyzers, and electronic microscopes were placed at the prisoner's disposal, he continues, even if the prisoner studied the seed's every cell, atom, and atomic nucleus, he still would not be able to read the mysterious program lying within the seed, to lift the impenetrable veil which could cause it to transform itself into a juicy carrot, a branch of sweet-scented dill, or a radiant-coloured aster.

1972 - On September 13,
"Plan Sagittarius" was revealed by Senator Aquino of the Philippines as an intent of President Marcos to place Greater Manila and most of central Luzon under military control.
Ferdinand was meeting regularly with 12 top military advisers, the "Rolex 12" (because Ferdinand gave each a Rolex watch). Information that Senator Aquino had met secretly with NPA leader Jose Maria Sison, alias Amado Guererro, or at least with one of his top officers, gave Ferdinand the excuse to declare that Aquino was conferring with the Communists - enemies of the state. During the same period, Imelda was conferring with both Chinese and Russian government officers, without authorization of the Philippine legislature.

1972 - During the year,
Agnes Eckhardt Nixon would write "In Daytime TV, the Golden Age is Now".
It would be published in the Winter edition of "Television Quarterly". In her article she would note:
"... a certain kind of kinship is established between the fictional characters with their problems and the viewer at home with his. The viewer naturally wishes to see how these TV neighbours cope with their misfortunes, day by day, week in, week out, year after year. Audiences are bound, not by the chains of hero worship, but by the easily recognized bonds of human frailty and human valour."

Indicative of the celebration of iniquities which all human cultures have historically fallen back on, the soap opera industry provides a model for the viewer, already a dependent media addict stripped of self-esteem and unassertive in their approach to life, of the kinds of activities and the types of perceptions which are guaranteed to liven up their chosen routine lives. Deception, lies, envy, gluttony, sexual irresponsibility, lust, pride, greed, romance, anger, hatred, and other vices provide a daily diet of "coping" skills to the viewer. Conspicuously absent are the use of effective therapies, humility, forgiveness, prayer, meditation, negotiation, increased awareness, emotional contracting, assertiveness, honesty, trust - constructive coping skills.
The absence is necessary to the addiction, for should the characters or the viewer use such constructive coping skills, there would be a resolution of plot lines and the viewer would come to see this "illusion" of reality not as a mentor but as a travesty of marketing.

1972 - On September 17,
Martial law was declared in the Philippines by President Ferdinand Marcos.
The CIA and the White House were fully aware of Ferdinand's plans to declare martial law.
President Nixon, Henry Kissinger, and Ambassador Byroade all gave their explicit approval.
Kissinger and Byroade actually had copies of the full martial law declaration days before it was presented. One of the conditions for USA support of the proclamation was that opposition leaders be given a chance to leave the country first. A messenger was sent from Malacanang Palace to each of them on September 18, a day after the law was decreed. Senator Aquino stayed behind, many others left.
On September 22, bombs exploded in Quezon City Hall where the Constitutional Convention was still meeting. A police car was blown up while the officers were off having lunch. Bombs exploded in department stores, city halls, and schools - at night when the buildings were empty. There was a rash of kidnappings of the families of the wealthy Chinese; the victims were released after large ransoms were paid. All were blamed on "Communist terrorists" although none were arrested.

In pre-dawn raids, government troops seized control of all communications and public utilities, closed schools, and arrested more than 40 opposition politicians and newsmen charged with plotting to overthrow the government by violence and subversion. The military arrested more than 30,000 people and put them in concentration camps. These include members of Congress, governors, student and labor activists, and miscellaneous criminals.
The ownership of the mass media was turned over to associates of Ferdinand Marcos.
With control of the media, the myths that crime and corruption had been eliminated could be pervaded. General Marcos Soliman, the USA-trained chief of the National Intelligence Coordinating Agency had leaked the martial law plans too early to the CIA and Senator Aquino. Within a week, he died of a sudden heart attack, when Marcos agents shot him in the head!

On September 23, Senator Aquino was arrested.
A year later he was charged with murder, subversion, and illegal possession of firearms.
Before a military court, Aquino responded that Juan Ponce Enrile was responsible for the false accusations.
No public news coverage was allowed of the proceedings.
In early 1975, Aquino went on a hunger strike.
After 31 days he was rushed to hospital.
In late June, 1977, he was granted a 2-1/2 hour interview with Ferdinand.
On November 25, a military tribunal found Aquino guilty and sentenced him to death by firing squad.
USA newly elected President Carter repeatedly requested a delay in the sentence, and received it. In June, 1978, an agreement was made with Mrs. Cory Aquino that her husband would apply for amnesty and write a letter expressing his desire to leave the country, promising that after he left he would not "take any action that would affect the image and security of the country." Done, Imelda delayed his release, out of vengeance, until January, 1980, when a severe heart condition resulted in his travelling to the USA for surgery followed by settlement in Boston. In October, after unrest in Manila, Malacanang Palace issued an arrest warrant for Aquino and called for his extradition. President Carter refused; President Reagan was more sympathetic.
Martial law also served other members of the Marcos family.
Kokoy Romualdez, brother of Imelda Marcos, had been thrown out of Ted Lewin's Club "Cairo" one night for running up large tabs at the club. Kokoy ran to his sister. It would be at her insistence that Ferdinand would legalize gambling in 1975. Meanwhile, Lewin, who had underworld ties in the USA, was the biggest gambling operator in the Philippines. Like everyone else, he paid a cut of his profits to Marcos.
That wasn't enough.
As soon as martial law was declared, Kokoy picked up some officers from the NISA (the Philippine' Secret Service), went back to the "Club Cairo" and beat the club operators. A short time later Lewin was said to have died of "a sudden heart attack."

In order to continue to maintain paramilitary influence in foreign countries, the American Nixon adminstration had avoided USA Congress demand not to train foreign police forces in secret police skills by training "narcotics agents" and funding the program through the US Drug Enforcement Agency (DEA). Ferdinand had agreed to create a Constabulary Anti-Narcotics Unit (CANU), with agents trained and equipped in Washington, D.C. On their return to the Philippines, the officers were successful in arresting 2 ex-GIs boarding a commercial flight for Okinawa with 6 ounces of No. 4 heroin.
In their zeal they continued to make arrests and interrogations and quickly identified all the members of Lim Seng's organization and the location of his two labs in Manila. Manila's Fukienese leaders, who had been put out of business by Seng's enterprise, had continued to press Marcos to close Seng down. To quell local criticism of Marcos' sanction of the drug trade and distance himself from it in the eyes of the Americans, Marcos now gave permission for Lim Seng to be arrested, on September 28. CANU raided his two laboratories and impounded over 50 kilos of no. 4 heroin. Lim Seng was arrested.

At the trial, Lim Seng pleaded guilty, in an arrangement with the legal and government bureaucrats, thus keeping the trial short, the witnesses to just one, and very little of the details of the drug trade being made known to the public. The court gave Seng the light sentence of life imprisonment, which simply angered critics of the government more. Ferdinand went on television to espouse his distaste for drug smuggling.
Meanwhile, suspecting that an escape attempt would be arranged for Seng, the CANU posted extra surveillance.
Unable to risk that Seng might bring embarrassment to the hypocracy of the Marcoses, and undue attention to the underworld activities of Southeast Asia, Marcos ended his, and his associates' anxiety and paranoia by issuing an order for the immediate execution by firing squad of Lim Seng, his previous co-conspirator, on January 7. 1973.

1972 - On September 20,
Near Rougemont, Quebec, 25 miles east of Montreal, a Mr. G.P. noticed a luminous sphere, estimated to be well over 350 feet in diameter with a thin wedge-like ring encircling it moving in a pendulum fashion as it moved towards the lower slopes of Mont Rougemont. Just above the ring, a series of oval windows or portholes were emitting a brilliant white light that illuminated the entire craft.
It moved in complete silence.
He saw it drift past a Canadian National-Canadian Pacific microwave relay tower and a television transmission tower before reaching the base of a 1000 foot high butte which it started to ascend. The bottom half turned a blazing red and then changed back to the original metallic tinge in a pulsating fashion at regular intervals.
To attempt to communicate with it he flashed his car's headlights off and on.
Instantaneously, and with great speed, the massive sphere seemed to come right at the witness's car to stop overhead. The car bounced from side to side, he heard a shrill sucking sound, and then discovered that it had left. He was left dazed, his eyesight was blurred temporarily, and during portions of the sighting his car had stopped and failed to start. It was later discovered that the path of the craft coincided with a major geological fault line and nearby residents confirmed that their television reception had been disrupted during the time of the sighting.

1972
H. Pauli and V. Schmid publish the result of their study on the psychosomatic aspects of breast cancer.
They find that women with breast cancer have particularly stronger indications of depression, hypochondriasis, and paranoia than patients which had benign disorders of the reproductive organs. This is but one of many studies which call attention to coping skills and patterns of emotional expression as contributing to the formation of cancers or the designation of individuals who are prone to developing cancer.
Further research and a serious consideration of institutional utilization of these findings receives little attention and very little funding. Instead, the worship of laboratory science and impersonal technology continues to receive the support of the cultural leadership in North America: offerings of tens of millions of dollars each year are laid on the alter with little positive result.

1972 - By October,
"Project SNOWBIRD" is established by the USA government National Security Agency (NSA) to test fly a captured flying saucer.

1972 - This year,
Richard M. Nixon, would win the USA Presidential election in a triumph of advertising and marketing.
The vice-president of "Market Opinion Research" guided the $600,000 polling campaign.
Very specific questions were asked, such as "Should the President be smiling or sombre in a poster directed at youth?" Nixon's campaign was directed by the "Committee to Re-elect the President." Its office director was a former marketing man, Jeb Stuart McGruder. Nixon's name was used seldom, because marketing studies had shown that Nixon as a person was not seen by the public as particularly likable. The tactic used was to make Nixon appear as the least objectionable candidate. To this end, George McGovern, his competitor, was depicted in the mass media as unpredictable, by the Nixon Committee.
Jeb McGruder made use of "an Extensive, sophisticated, entirely computerized operation" in singling out prospects for mailings and indivualized the mailings according to the interests of the occupational or other groupings. All such messages were tailored and psychologically and sociologically coordinated. The deception suggested that form could equal substance and that one representative could be all things to most people.

1972 - Between 1972 and 1975,
A cluster of "attacks" on natives occurred near Sobral, in the area of Santana do Acarau, in Brazil.
Objects were reported as hovering near the Acarau River, emitting peculiar flickering light beams with which a sensation of cold was associated. The objects were described as boxlike, similar to a VW bus.
The objects are often referred to as "chupas" by the locals.
"Chupa" is literally a Spanish word for a waistcoat or an undercoat with sleeves.
A local rumour claims that the "chupas" are "American prototypes" that take the blood of the victims to send it to the United States! There are descriptions of small beings in connection with the chupas, and also of a larger, disk-shaped object, the size of a house. No reports of harmful effects are associated with the circular craft. A theory among local people is that the chupas are attracted by flashlights. Some describe the light which is shone down on individuals as blinding, with pulsating colours inside. It has also been compared to an electric arc and sometimes an electrical odour has been associated with it.

1972 - By November,
Henry Kissinger, USA Presidential Aide, had met with the Shah of Iran.
The Shah and Kissinger agreed that Iraq was upsetting the balance of power in the gulf region; a way to restore the balance - or to find a new balance, - was to send a signal by supporting the landless, embittered Kurds, then in revolt in northern Iraq. Iraq had given refuge to the then-exiled Ayatollah Khomeini and used anti-imperialistic rhetoric while desiring control over Iran's Arab speaking Khuzistan region.
Kissinger returned to Washington and put the suggestion to President Nixon of increasing the armamentation of Iran. Nixon authorized a covert-action budget and sent John Connally, his former treasury secretary and an oilman, to Teheran to work out the details. Others were included and arms went to Iran.
A 1976 report by the USA House of Representatives Select Committee on Intelligence Activities noted:
"Documents in the Committee's possession clearly show that the president, Dr. Kissinger and (the Shah) hoped that our clients (the Kurds) would not prevail. They preferred instead that the insurgents simply continue a level of hostilities sufficient to sap the resources of our ally's neighbouring country (Iraq). This policy was not imparted to our clients, who were encouraged to continue fighting."

1972
The Limits of Growth, was published by a group of international scientists.
Predictions from data fed into computers suggested that continued rates of economic, technological, and population growth would lead to the collapse of world society by the end of the twentieth century.

1972
The takeover of the Philippines banana industry by Ferdinand Marcos and his underworld associates began.
While Ferdinand Marcos had begun his political career as a 10% kickback and bribe "negotiator", as President he demanded from each participant in the government contracts - supplier, subcontractor, general contractor - adding up to as much as 80% of the total cost. Many businessmen who were not Marcos buddies turned over shares in their companies in return for selection privileges for contracts.
A business is worthless without business.
Other promising businesses learned the "legal" facts of life: the Marcos control of the armed forces and Constabulary could result in your business being seized for all manner of supposed infractions - if you refused to share your shares. Such takeover were gradually melded together to form agglomerate monopolies which stifled competition. This happened in all of the primary industries: sugar, bananas, coconuts, tobacco, and others.

Martial law assisted patronage in providing the power and the means to break big business and free enterprise. Until martial law, the Philippine banana industry was dominated by "Castle & Cooke" and Del Monte. Unable to win the amount of kickbacks that he wanted from these established multinationals, Ferdinand brought in "United Brands". Antonio Floirendo, who operated many of the offshore banks and corporations for the Marcoses owned many businesses in Mindanao. Ferdinand issued a decree during the year giving Floirendo a lease to develop a 12,000-acre banana plantation inside the Davao Penal Colony in Mindanao, previously an illegal venture for anyone and still not legal without express state consent.
The Penal Colony had been a Japanese POW camp in WWII; it had served as a prison for common criminals since. Floirendo paid the government $9 per acre to lease the rich delta land; the going rate to planters elsewhere was $30 to $50 per acre. The prisoners provided a guaranteed work force at less than 20 cents a day per man. The whole operation would be government subsidized: discounted land; discounted labour; discounted bureaucracy.

United Brands, a multinational Cincinnati American company which wanted to be the world's largest producer of bananas, had been unable to enter the established and highly regulated Philippines market. When Floirendo made them a joint agreement offer they were pleased to provide the financial assistance and obtain the American bank loans to pay for the development of the huge plantation. The farm's entire output, estimated at nearly 17 million boxes of fruit each year, worth $100 million, was taken by United Brands for distribution: about 10% of the company's $1.1 billion banana sales worldwide.
Ferdinand ordered construction of a 15-mile road down to Floirendo's private dock on the Davao Gulf, where United Brands freighters were loaded. The farm also bought a $1 million private jet to fly Floirendo and his executives to and from the plantation. Further, Ferdinand ordered the competitors, "Castle & Cooke" and Del Monte to pack a percentage of their fruit in boxes manufactured in the Philippines, by Floirendo. Martial law offered endless possibilities for economic control and profiteering.

1972 - In December,
V.N. Pushkin, a U.S.S.R. professor and doctor of psychological sciences published an article in the popular magazine, "Knowledge is Power" issued by the leading organization for popular science in the U.S.S.R., "the Knowledge Society". Pushkin had been aware of some earlier accomplishments in the field of plant intelligence and with two colleagues, V.M. Fetisov and Georgi Angushev, he went farther. Angushev had been working at the Lenin Pedagogical Institute in Moscow and was an excellent hypnotist. They reasoned that if plants responded to human emotions, then the communication of these to the plant should be more effective if the human subject was hypnotized, a form of focused directed attention.
A young girl by the name of Tanya, with a "lively temperament and spontaneous emotionality" was hypnotized and sequentially implanted with very positive and very threatening perceptions about herself. At each change in the girl's mood, the plant, which was attached to an encephalograph, responded with an appropriate pattern on the graph. "We were able to get an electrical reaction as many times as we worked, even to the most arbitrary commands."
Tanya was then asked to perpetrate a lie and the plant would be tested for its ability to detect truth from falsehood. Tanya was asked to choose a number between 1 and 10 and then not reveal it. She was then queried, one by one, if any one of the 10 numbers were the number she had picked. The humans could not detect any difference in her responses, but the plant gave a clear and specific reaction to the number she had chosen, yet denied. Pushkin concluded that continued research could lead to advances in human neurology.

Pushkin warned "Experience in the development of natural science, especially physics, has shown that one should not fear new discoveries, however paradoxical they might seem at first glance." He further suggested that the cells of a flower had processes somehow related to mentation and asserted that man's psyche, and the perception, thought, and memory connected to it are all just a specialization of processes existing at the level of vegetal cells.
At the same time, at the Soviet Academy of Sciences, in Akademgorodok, near Siberia's largest industrial centre, Novosibirsk, other biopsychological experiments were being carried out without public exposure. There, they clearly demonstrated the ability of plants to have long-term memories and to react through instrumentation to dramatically indicate the presence of persons who were good to them and others who were abusive. Also, it was determined that somehow, plants can share water in unknown ways. A cornstalk planted in a glass container was denied water for several weeks. Yet it did not die; it remained as healthy as the other cornstalks planted in normal conditions nearby. In some way, water was transferred from healthy plants to the "prisoner" in the jar. Yet they have no idea how this was accomplished.

The use of hypnosis and its success here can also indicate how a Black Ops "Remote Viewing" assasination could be carried out. Take a sensitive and emotionally expressive person, hypnotize them, have them believe that they are doing something of the greatest moral significance, instruct them to focus their thoughts on the target, guide them in visualizing and projecting to the target a necessity to go and meet someone, confirm as to whether the target is in complete control of the projections, direct the target to walk along a path, soothe and reassure them as they walk into the ocean and over their depth, instruct the target to breath in deeply the clear fresh air producing a hyperventilation which leads to blackout and drowning.
Only the hypnotist knows what really happened.
The subject will only remember the "help" given to the target and will not perceive the danger of the projected feelings and images and so will not be self-restrained. If the target comes out of the telepathic sleep directive activity, it will be assumed that they were sleepwalking under their own direction. If with little preparation humans can transfer feelings and attitudes to plants over 12 miles away, why wouldn't they be able to projected them to humans of like physiology?

1972 - Between December 7 to 19,
Apollo 17, the last U.S.A. Apollo landing mission, landed at the Taurus-Littrow valley site.
The crew consisted of Cernan, Schmitt, and Evans, who circled the Moon while the others were on the surface.
Extensive lunar back-side photography with the King Crater as one of the main targets was taken.
The crew, observed UFO's near the Earth, close to the moon, and in between.
Later, a copy of a tape containing dialogue between NASA Mission Control at Houston and the Lunar Command Module Pilot was found and contained the following:

Mission Control: More detail, please. Can you give more detail of what you are seeing? LEM Pilot: It's ... something flashing. Just a light going on and off by the edge of the crater. Mission Control: Can you give the co-ordinates? LEM Pilot: There's something down there ... Maybe a little further down. Mission Control: It couldn't be a Vostok, could it? LEM Pilot: I can't be sure ... it's possible.

1972
Major weapons systems deliveries from 1972 to 1981 were:
The USSR delivered 74,000 major weapons systems to its export clients; the USA delivered 44,000 systems.

Soviet deliveries included 23,250 surface-to-air missile systems, 3,705 supersonic aircraft, and 13,220 self-propelled guns and tanks. USA deliveries included 8,890 surface-to-air missile systems 1,540 supersonic aircraft, and 7,440 self-propelled guns and tanks.

This contrasted with the period 1950 to 1979 when the USA was by far the Earth's chief exporter of armaments.

France, during 1970 to 1980, learned from the economic example of the USA and expanded their arms production by 500%, so as to become the Earth's third largest armaments producing nation. France's arms sales policy would come to be considered the most permissive of any supplier with an apparent willingness to sell weapons to whomever could pay for them.
Relative to the increasing arms productions of the USA, USSR, and France, The United Kingdom decreased its exports to a level equal to 25 to 30% of its total production; a move which place it in 4th spot as an Earth global arms supplier.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1973 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
Day of the Dolphin, The Exorcist; The Glass Menagerie; Go Ask Alice; Westworld; Walking Tall; Slither; The Migrants; The Sting; High Plains Drifter; The Train Robbers; Badlands; The Last of Shiela; Papillion; White Lightning; Live and Let Die; England Made Me; Mean Streets; Paperback Hero; Dillinger; Willie Dynamite; Serpico; American Grafitti; The Hard Part Begins; The Execution of Private Slovik.

General News:

Consumer Price Index: 133.1
Failing USA banks lose $971.312 millions of depositor's monies.

1973 - By the beginning of this year,
Some 1000 spacecraft, 15 years after the USSR launched Sputnik 1, October 4, 1957, have left the earth to orbit the planet, journey to interplanetary bodies, and to carry men to the moon and back. International regulation of telecommunication frequencies to lessen signal interference was discussed at a 1971 "World Administrative Radio Conference for Space Telecommunications" and signal assignments were made, effective January 1, 1973. These are expected to remain unchanged to the end of the century.

1973 - In January,
All CIA Drug-testing Records are authorized to be destroyed by Richard Helms, CIA Director, before he retires.

1973
Eldon Byrd: operations analyst with the "Advanced Planning and Analysis Staff" of the Naval Ordnance Laboratory in Silver Spring, Maryland, U.S.A. He has also worked with "Dektor Counter Intelligence Systems". Working with a Psychological Stress Evaluator (polygraph), special amplifiers and chart recorders, he demonstrated that a plant could indicate by responding to the inaudible vibrations of the human voice played to it on tape recordings which people were telling the truth or lying. In a review of 25 segments of the television program "To Tell the Truth", the plant response was 94.7% accurate.

1973
Biogeochemistry began to be developed as a new science.
Analysis of salts in tissue samples of herbivorous animals that have been grazing on a section of land for an extended period of time can indicate possible mineral or petroleum deposits beneath the ground. The same animal tissues are used that are frequently removed in mutilation incidents.

1973
There were 103 different UFO/Bigfoot sightings reported this year from a 6 county area of Pennsylvania.

In one of those incidents, a group of farmers saw a UFO descending towards a field in the early evening.
They decided to find out what was going on.
As they walked over the crest of a hill, they saw an object estimated to be 100 feet in diameter resting on the ground. Nearby, were 2 Bigfoot beings about 8 feet tall, with arms that hung down past their knees, covered with long dark hair. Mistaking the beings for bears, one of the farmers fired a shot over their heads. The beings responded by approaching the farmers, one of whom now fired 3 shots directly into one of the beings, which made a whining sound and raised its right hand. The object abruptly disappeared and the farmers fled.
Returning 45 minutes later with a local police officer, neither object or beings could be found.
The officer did verify that there was a glowing ring on the ground about 100 feet in diameter that would have been bright enough to read by if he stepped into the circle and tried to do so.

1973
The American budget for Military Aid to South Vietnam for this year totalled over $2.3 billion.

1973 - In February,
Henry Kissinger, a Jewish refugee from Nazi Germany, was appointed secretary of state for the U.S.A.
He believed in power and compromise, rather than idealism and total victory.
He gained in popularity and power as Nixon declined in both.
Kissinger believed that justice as well as stability must be the goal of American foreign policy.
Further, he believed that
"the fundamental point of American foreign policy must be a duty to defend the security of all free peoples if it wanted to preserve its own; that to resit challenges to equilibrium in the early stages is an inherently ambiguous task. For if one waits till the challenge is clear, the cost of resisting grows exponentially; in the nuclear age it may become prohibitive."

Kissinger's intellectual and pragmatic idealism clouded the facts.
Having lived through the era of the Nazi holocaust, he was driven to believe in the maintenance of order and security at the expense of protest. Debate was the civilized approach to negotiation. What he failed to acknowledge is that a debate involves two relatively unemotional participants neither of which are intimately tied to the result. Definitions of "free peoples" varied from country to country and era to era.
The American interpretation of "freedom" was not held by most of the world' peoples.
Additionally, responding to assist a people who did neither request your support nor share your perception of freedom would, eventually, jeopardize your own freedom. To take a position of reacting to every blip in events as potentially a major catastrophe was to invoke paranoia.
Accepting American defeat in Southeast Asia, Kissinger spent most of his energy after 1973 trying to avert total war in the Near East between the Arab nations and Israel.

1973 - In February,
Debbie Sapp visited Marcel Vogel, in California, U.S.A. who noted that she had an immediate ability to enter into rapport with his philodendron. He asked her if shecould "get into the plant" and she affirmed she could. Her face took on an attitude of quiet repose, of detachment, as if she were far away in another universe. Immediately, the recording pen which detected energy differentials in the plant began to move in ways showing that the plant was receiving an unusual amount of energy. Debbie later recorded the experience:
"I made a conscious decision to let my imagination take over and found myself entering the main stem through a doorway at the base. Once inside, I saw the moving cells and water travelling upward through the stem, and let myself move with this upward flow.
Approaching the spreading leaves in my imagination, I could feel myself being drawn from an imaginary world into a realm over which I had no control. There were no mental pictures, but rather a feeling that I was becoming part of, and filling out, a broad expansive surface. This seemed to me to be describable only as pure consciousness.

I felt acceptance and positive protection by the plant.
There was no sense of time, just a feeling of unity in existence and in space.
I smiled spontaneously and let myself be one with the plant.
Then Mr. Vogel asked me to relax.
When he said this, I realized I was very tired but peaceful.
All my energy had been with the plant."

1973
Based on the compilations by physicist Dr. Jacques Vallee of 923 well-documented worldwide sightings, California physicist James M. McCampbell, in his "Ufology: New Insights from Science and Common Sense" reached the following conclusions:

The most common "close encounter" symptoms were headaches, dehydration, burns, loss of vision and nausea.
Other less frequent disorders included low lymphocyte counts, loss of consciousness, glandular aches, hair loss and even paralysis. Apparently, the same results can be obtained by sticking one's head into a microwave oven.
Exposure of the eyes to intensive forms of microwave energy can lead to temporary loss of vision.

Symptoms of heat exposure and burns may also have their origins with radiated microwave energy.
These emissions can heat the surrounding air to temperatures in excess of 400 degrees F, causing infrared and ultraviolet radiation burns.
Low lymphocyte counts, nausea, cold sweat and body swellings appear to be attributable to other forms of thermal or even nuclear radiation, possibly in the form of gamma rays or nuclear fission radiation. Soil samples taken from a UFO landing site have indicated a significant level of radiation in the form of

Radium 226.
Later, bar-like fragments of a metallic substance were found which revealed a high concentration of silver - 93 and 96% with a thin layer of uranium also being found in the fragments. The stench of a burning electric motor and sulphur seemed to linger around the contactee and seem to come from his own body.
Dehydrations are similar to burns, except that no combustion is apparent.
This indicates a milder form of thermal radiation emission and strong evidence now points to some form of microwave radiation as the possible source. Mr. McCampbell also contends that UFO's emit forms of microwave radiation that can produce luminous plasma emissions of heat in the neighbourhood of 400 degrees F. This may tie in with the reported "white glow" on the tree tops and the UFO's "orange tinge" which strongly suggests plasma effect.
Some form of high-frequency electromagnetic radiation (microwave radiation) is a likely explanation for "the E.M. effect" in which cars stall, television sets go awry, and electrical circuits and grids lose power or temporarily go dead.
Household appliances, lighting systems, radios, and other electrically operated devices may be influenced also. Look overhead if you notice these.

1973 - In March,
The crew of a DC-8 cargo plane, while on a night flight, saw a large, disc-shaped object.
Both the pilot and co-pilot saw the UFO, and in separate interrogation sessions gave the same story.
They were at 21,000 feet when the co-pilot saw the lights of what he thought was another plane.
He pointed it all out to the pilot and they watched it turn towards them, catch them, and then begin to pace them. In the bright moonlight, they could see a domed disc with two vertical fins in the back. Through the clear dome they could see figures moving.
The co-pilot reached down and turned the weather radar on.
The disc showed on the scope. For nearly 18 minutes, they watched the UFO both visually and on radar; then, it shot out in front of them, doubled back at incredible speed, and disappeared.
After landing, they made an official report, were interrogated separately at length by the USAF and they were told not to tell of their experience to anyone other than authorized persons with the suggestion that they would lose their jobs if they did. They later broke silence only because it was agreed that their names would remain anonymous.

1973 - In March,
James McCord, of the Watergate Scandal notified the judge that his illegal mission had been planned in the White House.
In April, John Dean and Jeb Magruder, two minor officials in the White House, gave testimony to the Watergate grand jury and the Senate Watergate Committee, headed by North Carolina Senator Sam Ervin, which implicated White House officials in the planning of the break-in. President Nixon then asked his two chief White House advisors, Robert Haldeman and John Erhlichman, to resign.
In July, the Senate committee discovered that all conversations in the president's White House office were recorded on tape, and they requested that the president turn over his tapes to the committee. The president refused and, in October, caused a national crisis by firing the Watergate prosecutor, Archibald Cox, who he had earlier appointed, as well as Attorney General Elliot Richardson. The crisis worsened with the resignation of Vice-President Spiro Agnew, which evidence showed that he had systematically accepted bribes from Maryland state building contractors while he was a Maryland official.
Agnew threatened a national crisis unless he was allowed to resign with the promise that he would not be prosecuted. Under the recently passed 25th Amendment, Gerald Ford, the leader of the Republicans in the House of Representatives, became the new vice-president.

1973 - During the year,
"Illiac 4", a giant central computer system linked all universities in the U.S.A. including the University of Hawaii.
About $40 million was spent on the project.
The potential academic value did not seem to justify the expense.
A similar computer network was set up in the U.S.S.R.
As time progressed, more and more personal and confidential information was entered into such "global" systems including the patterns of use of the user.

1973 - In April,
Louis Kervan writes that microorganisms are a concentration of enzymes.
Their ability to transmute elements is not a mere hooking of peripheral electrons to form bonds as in classical chemistry but involves a fundamental alteration of the nucleus of elements.
Most transmutations have been observed to take place within the first 20 elements of the periodic table.
They further always seem to involve hydrogen or oxygen.
The transmutations do not involve the displacement of electrons in the peripheral atomic layers nor the chemical bonding of molecules. It involves the alteration in structural arrangements of the atoms induced by enzyme activities in living matter. Since nature's atom smashing is performed by biotic life, microorganisms are thus nature's prime mover in maintaining balance in soils. Some transmutations are biologically beneficial; others are harmful.
Kervan questions: If yeasts and moulds for penicillin are already being produced on an industrial scale, why not factories for growing microorganisms for the transmutation of elements? "Organic" fertilizers could replace chemical ones with prospectively enhanced production and benefits.

1973 - By May,
James McConnell, a broad-ranging behaviourist and friend of B.F. Skinner addresses a group of lawyers with the intent of conveying to them that prisoners could be reshaped into model citizens by methods other than punishment:
"I believe that the day has come when we can combine sensory deprivation with drugs, hypnosis and astute manipulation of reward and punishment to gain absolute control over an individual's behaviour."

What the audience didn't realize, was that this system of brainwashing had been used in the 1930s by the KGB forerunner in the USSR, as well as by the Nazis, and was now being used in a much perfected format including surgical manipulation of hormonal levels by USA National Security Agency (NSA) medical technicians.

1973
In preparation for East-West detent, U.S.A. secretary of state Kissinger met with French President Pompidou at the Elysee Palace. Pompidou did not like nor understand Kissinger's reference to Europe as a "regional" power, although he acknowledged that Europe was a secondary (military) power. Nixon had been making overtures to the Soviet Union precipitated in the Agreement on the Prevention of Nuclear War, which was to be signed by Nixon and Brezhnev in June.
Pompidou was worried that without unrestricted cold war, the unity of economic, political and military strategies between NATO countries could prove tenuous. Moreover, in renouncing nuclear war between the superpowers, Europe and China might be left open to the pressures of communism and socialism within their borders as well as near their borders, as long as such were maintained below the threshold of all-out war. Detent might confuse tactics with strategy, rhetoric with reality.
Pompidou, like most national leaders, was not an intellectual.
He knew that legalistic interpretations were the administrative elements of diplomacy not abstract and fluctuating strategies. The American ideal of detent was never an end in itself, as Pompidou worried. It was intended as a means to an end, not defined. Again, American leaders were playing politics as if it were a game; the difficulty with such an approach is that singular winners are often assumed at the expense of team success and manipulation and deceit are often utilized at the expense of truth and openness.

1973
Horace Newcomb in his "TV: The Most Popular Art" would write:
"Almost exclusively these (soap opera) characters are the emblems of the upper-middle class.
Professionally there is an overwhelming preponderance of doctors, lawyers, and businessmen. Women are generally well educated and often follow one of these same professions. When they choose to remain home, they are cast as the stereotype of the upper-middle-class housewife, worried more about the problems of her children or about social affairs than about shopping or cleaning the house.
For the most part the people are elegantly but tastefully groomed.
The men dress conservatively even when casual.
The women are carefully trimmed in stylish fashions, coiffed in the most fitting styles.
The appearance is carried into their homes, where that softness we have mentioned complements the appearances of the persons. ...

The point here is that the audience must gauge its social responses to such clues.
Any departure from the norm of upper-middle class stability results in this sort of blatant representation in which richness is defined exclusively by material artifacts. ...
The confined world of the housewife resembles the confined world of the television screen.
People move about in rooms, in houses; they speak to one another in close contexts; there are no overhead or panoramic shots indicating a point of view other than that of the viewer. Indeed, there are no panoramas, no mountains, no prairies, no visions of skylines or shots of suburban sprawl. ...

The content ... is a technical type of reality.
Yet at the same time, it approaches the world of the viewer in a realistic sense. Soap opera content is confined almost exclusively to a consideration of vitally human problems ... focused upon and magnified to an overwhelming individual point. ...
Good men go about their business, only to have it confounded by their scheming partners, their unfaithful wives, or some combination of both. Women who gave up their children for adoption after an adolescent "mistake" begin years later to search for them, intruding into the lives of those who took them in. Faithful mothers must face their daughters' unwanted pregnancies or painful divorces. The pattern of accidental death followed by trial for murder is repeated again and again.
This pattern of continuing and overwhelming human pain is defined and controlled by one of the most important aspects in the world of technical reality that comprises the soap opera. There is no humour in that world. There is, on occasion, an interlude of peace of mind. There are quiet moments when families are assured of their ultimate love for one another; there are reunions and marriages and births; there are smiles. But there is never raucous laughter, pure delight, overwhelming joy, or even the mildest ribaldry. ...

The soap opera will grow and change. ... there is a strong degree of audience involvement which results in the possibility of writer and producer response to an audience reaction. Fan mail, rating reports, and any other available indexes of response to new characters or situations may result in changed characters or situations. ...
These shows create the illusion of change through a shifting variety of situation, but we know from the beginning of each that the main characters, the hero figures, are never to be harmed or destroyed because they can never leave the show. ... the audience sees ... problems .. more closely related to (themselves) than the continual diet of spectacular murder solved by the spectacular detective. Consequently, these are more "real" problems. ...
... the world of the soap opera is more painful, more harsh, more unrelieved, than the world of the audience, and yet the characters always survive. The values are those of overwhelming success in which right always conquers. ... The constantly developing complexity of subplots and the huge variety of personality approach more nearly a world like that of the audience (than other mass media)."

1973 - By June,
The National Power Nuclear Reactor scheme in the Philippines had begun.
President Marcos ordered National Power to negotiate to buy two 600-megawatt nuclear plants.
General Electric began negotiating with National Power; then, the Westinghouse district manager for the Philippines approached Jesus Vergara, president of "Asia Industries", which handled distribution in the islands for Westinghouse. Vergara was aware of the Marcos bureaucracy and graft system and advised Westinghouse that if it wanted to get the sale it should hire a lobbyist like Herminio Disini.

Disini was 20 years younger than Marcos, married to Imelda's first cousin Inday Escolin, who also served as one of her physicians, and was a golf partner. After martial law was declared by Marcos, Disini became president of the "Wack Wack Country Club", the preserve of Manila's hereditary wealth. Like in most other areas, Ferdinad cheated in his golf to save and build his pride and as such he had the lowest handicap of any similar executive in the world. Ferdinand always used the names and services of other people around him to front his corporations or do his illegal activities so that it would be difficult to charge him personally with any wrongdoing.
Early in the 1970s, Ferdinand used Disini to take control of the cigarette filter business in the Philippines, long dominated by a British-American company called "Filtrona Philippines, Inc." Together they forced Filtrona out of business, leaving Disini and his Philippine Tobacco Filters Corporation with a monopoly worth a $1 million per month in profits. Disini then arranged with another of Ferdinand's friends, Lucio Tan, head of Fortune Tobacco - such that Tan could sell his cigarettes cheaper than the competition by getting special pricing on the filters.
The competition left and in appreciation, Tan gave President Marcos $11 million in campaign contributions, plus $2.5 million a year. Of course, Tan was able to avoid paying some $50 million a year in taxes. Disini created Herdis Group, Inc, a conglomerate of 50 companies with $1 billion in assets. Following a capitalist principle of using other people's money for one's own profit, Disini utilized the Philippine government loan guarantees that foreign bankers assumed were risk-free compared to private corporate or individual guarantees.

As in many similar Marcos inspired projects, the motive here was personal profit not good business. Disini had no background and little interest in nuclear power plants. The power plant was built on a jungle bluff in Bataan overlooking the South China Sea - a site subject to tsunami (large) tidal waves. It is 5 miles from a dormant volcano, which have a tendency in the Philippines to reactivate. It is only 25 miles from 3 geological faults, that is, the potential for earthquakes in the area is high. Any one of these environmental factors could result in the reactor becoming inoperable permanently, or, in it seriously malfunctioning at some point.
Consider that the country has long been a military totalitarian dictatorship and that such regimes tend to promote armed rebellions and the safe and reasonable consideration of building a nuclear reactor anywhere in the Philippines becomes less positive. International nuclear industry regulatory institutions are supposed to consider these and scores of other factors and coordinate with the countries supplying the technology and the fuel for a reactor to impose dale guidelines. As happens too often in human capitalistic or communistic political decision-making, profit and prestige far outweigh environmental considerations.

Back on the golf course, in 1973, Vergara mentioned the possible "lobbying" position to Disini, noting that the commission could amount to millions of dollars. Disini arranged for Westinghouse to discuss their proposal with Ferdinand in private. Westinghouse offered to supply a single plant with two 620-megawatt reactors at a price of $500 million. Additional charges for fuel, transmission lines, training and other necessities would raise the estimated total to $650 million. After this private meeting, Marcos ordered Ramon Ravanzo, the general manager of National Power to give the business to Westinghouse. The sale was final.
Late in realizing the nature of Philippine decision-making, Alex Melchor, Executive Secretary of GE learned of the lost sale to Westinghouse. He decided to be persistent and take the rational approach of finding a more economical alternative to propose, and did so. However, Ferdinand was not interested in the results.

When Westinghouse got its first sale, USA Ambassador William Sullivan contacted USA Secretary of State Henry Kissinger and stressed that "... American prestige riding on Westinghouse performance ... being the largest and most expensive construction project ever undertaken in this country ... current cost estimates are over one billion dollars." The formal contract was signed in February, 1976.

1973 - In June,
The work of Melvin Calvin, an American Nobel prize winner, was acknowledged in the first issue of the Soviet Union magazine "Chemistry and Life". Calvin had discovered that plant chlorophyll under the influence of the sun's rays can give up electrons to a semiconductor such as zinc oxide.
Such a photoelement produced a current of about 0.1 microamperes per square centimetre.
After several minutes the plant chlorophyll became desensitized or "exhausted", but its life could be extended by the addition of hydroquinone to the semiconductor. A ten square meter chlorophyll photoelement could yield a kilowatt of power. He has theorized that in the next quarter century such photoelements could be manufactured on an industrial scale and would be a hundred times cheaper than silicone solar batteries now being experimented with.

1973 - During June,
At the "Gordon Research Conference on Nucleic Acids" concern is first voiced about the hazards posed by bioengineering research. The topic had first been raised 6 months earlier at the January "First Asilomar Conference" where it had been demonstrated that many scientists were ignorant of the current procedures being used for out-of-nature chemical transformations. The scientists had also exhibited that they were even less prepared for the hazards posed by such research.

It is a negative evolutionary pattern of humans to proudly experiment with technologies and science of which it had no understanding, which presents distinct possibilities of great destruction or sorrow, and carry out such research like robots, stripped of awareness and self-direction, as if at a point of desperation.
This pattern seeks to demonstrate the reliance of cultural authorities on addictive responses of an incessant drive for coercive and destructive power in expectation of enforced peace. Cultural promotion of iniquities (greed, pride, envy, lust for fame, anger and security) enable self-denial to replace commonsense reverence and humility, spiritual qualities.

1973 - In July,
Masaaki Kudou, a university student, witnessed an incident at a small industrial town, Tomakomai, on the southern coast of Hokkaido, the northernmost island of Japan. It was at night and Kudou was on duty as a security guard. He noticed a streak of light streak across the bay, nearby, suddenly stop, vanish, and reappear. Remaining stationary, the light expanded and contracted alternately at high speed, growing until it reached the apparent size of a baseball held at arm's length.
It darted about in all directions within a few degrees of arc, and Mr. Kudou found himself dizzily trying to follow its movements. As it began to descend spirally towards the sea, Kudou felt a surge of alarm, especially when the object stopped near a distant cement works, and began to direct a beam of intermittent pulses of green light towards the north. Next, the object continued its descent towards the sea, this time sweeping in an arc until it was in a position much closer to Kudou.
It stopped its descent at about 70 feet from the sea and a transparent tube emerged and lowered to the water. He heard a soft min-min-min-min noise as this happened, with the pitch of the sound lowering as the tube descended. When the tube touched the water, its lower edge glowed and it seemed that water was being sucked up into the object above. Moments later, the tube withdrawn, the object began moving towards Kudou who feared it was going to attack him.

The object moved into a position 160 feet above Kudou's car, producing so much light that the surroundings were visible as if in daylight. The surface of the object appeared smooth and it gave off a white glow. Around the diameter of the spherical object, Kudou could see windows. In the middle of one of these windows Kudou could see a shadowy humanoid with 2 smaller shapes showing in the window adjacent.
Kudou felt as if he had been bound hand and foot and, with difficulty, managed to look up again in time to see the arrival of 3 or 4 more glowing objects. Now, there was also a large brown object which resembled 3 large gasoline drums connected together lengthwise, and hovered without sound. The spheres then positioned themselves to enter one end of the long object, entered it, and then it moved off quickly to the north like a shooting star. Kudou was left with a severe headache after the incident which he estimated occurred over a 12 minute period.

1973 - By August,
R.A. Winett and R.C. Winkler, then of the State University of New York at Stony Brook, had reviewed all the reports the "Journal of Applied Behaviour Analysis" had published over a 3-year period on the use of behavioural engineering in the classroom. Their own report concluded that the behaviour shapers were almost totally absorbed with training students to "be still, be quiet, be docile." Among "inappropriate" behaviours that had been targets for change, were walking around, laughing, carrying on a conversation with anyone but the teacher, showing objects to another child, doing something different than what had been ordered.
NOT ONE of the investigations questioned whether silence and lack of movement were necessary for learning, or whether the behaviour shapers should be in the business of moulding passive, obedient rule followers. They questioned whether the "model" child should stay glued to his seat all day, should continually look at the teacher or work, should not laugh, and should pass silently in the halls.

1973 - By August,
Fritz Kindliman, who had worked in a photography shop in Wetzikon, Switzerland, began to receive film from Eduard Meier for developing. The former owner had sold the shop to Willy and Beatrice Bar in 1970.
Kindliman later noted that although he and Meier had talked at some length, Meier never asked about darkroom techniques; that the processing and equipment for a small colour photo lab were far too expensive to be owned or operated by a single individual; that he had seen Meier's developed photos usually before Meier did; he was certain there had never been any manipulation of the photos; he had repeatedly told Meier to take better care of his negatives, because he would bring them in scratched and smudged; Meier had never asked about macro techniques.
Finally, if Meier had an accomplice in the making of "fake" pictures, why would he have spent so much time in the photo shop trying to make the best decision as to which camera he could best use with his single arm?

1973 - By September,
Ownership of Grand Bahama and the Benguet Mine changed in structure.
Wallace Groves, Grand Bahama owner and Mafia associate, had realized by 1972 that ownership or control of a large gold mine in Southeast Asia could be an asset to concealing money transfers between buyers and sellers of narcotics as well as for distributing shares of profits taken from underworld activities. He had met with and spoken to Ferdinand Marcos sometime earlier and when Marcos finally got control of the Benguet Mine, and, narcotics trade to the USA grew, and, international transfer of large amounts of money became more scrutinized, Groves had something to talk to Marcos about.
One of the 3 principal owners of Grove's Grand Bahama Port Authority was the Wall Street house, Allen & Co., run by Charlie Allen and his brother Herbert. The Allens also owned stock in the Benguet Mine in the Philippines and Herbert was a golfing partner of President Marcos. In a complex arrangement, Groves and the Allens were able to trade part of their Grand Bahama holdings into nearly complete control of Benguet mines. President Marcos allowed the transaction to go through only after he conducted a well-publicized series of "investigations" and "legal proprieties" designed to give his associates an opportunity to make huge profits from insider trading of the stock which went up and down in wild swings prior to the completion of the transaction. Then , Marcos, the Allens and Groves all had an interest in the Mines and the Island.
During 1973, the deadline was approaching in which all foreign-owned businesses in the Philippines had to turn over 60% ownership to the Filipinos. Ferdinand used this to pressure his partners into a new arrangement in which he became majority owner of the Mines and they took back his share in Grand Bahama. Later, Ferdinand would lose ownership of the Benguet to Imelda (with the shares held in the hands of one of her brother Kokoy's front men) through a marital indiscretion.

1973 - In the middle of September,
A family from Sydney, North Carolina, reported a being with red glowing eyes, long hair, pointed ears, and a hook nose on a gray face. The limping creature was missing a hand but could leap 50 or 60 feet at a time. A radio disc jockey and a group of boys saw the same being and fired 6 pistol shots at it.

1973 - During September,
A saucer-shaped craft shot down by a missile was observed by Instructor R.K. at the Great Lakes Naval Base, USA.
At the time he was delivering a sealed envelope to the commandant in a quonset hut, and noticed the silvery-blue shimmering 30 ft diameter saucer resting on a wooden platform. It was 10 feet high, tapered like a teardrop with a flange running along its topside from one end to the other; it had no windows.
It had been shot down by a missile on its third pass over a Navy vessel.
It had crashed in 350 ft. of water between Hawaii and the mainland, had been retrieved by a Glomar Explorer undersea recovery craft, shipped to Hawaii, and then on to Chicago.

1973 - By October,
Crop Genetic Uniformity in the Soviet Union had resulted in a crop failure of between 25 and 40% of the winter wheat Bastostaja strain. Government totalitarian bureaucracy, in which theoretical scientists and academicians conferred with political rationalizers to impose the "industrial" power of uniformity over agriculture, was the major influence.
Devoid of the natural protection afforded by the presence of genetic variety, which acts to isolate pockets of uniform crops and disease and pest outbreaks, the crop had been destroyed as if a fire had spread through it. Few concepts merit uniform application in all ecologies and human organizational structures. Pride in ones achievements can blind one to the limits of those achievements. Failure to recognize ones limitations encourages their repetitive and disastrous influence.

1973 - On October 1st,
Three men reported they saw a huge creature that walked mechanically.
In the distance, they saw an egg-shaped object and an examination of the field where it had landed revealed imprints from it.

1973 - On October 4th,
Cary Chopic, a Simi Valley, California man, saw a triangular-shaped object hovering in a cloud of dust.
In a clear bubble on top of the craft, he saw a humanoid being in a silvery wet suit.
When the being saw Chopic, it leapt out of sight.
The bubble began to rotate faster, seeming to disappear into the craft as it emitted a whirring sound as a fog began to envelope the object. Seconds later, without any apparent movement, it vanished.

1973 - On October 4th,
Henry Kissinger, U.S.A. Secretary of State, spoke at a dinner for the delegations attending the UN General Assembly:
"Of the species on this planet, man alone has inflicted upon himself most of his own suffering.
In an age of potential nuclear cataclysm, in an age of instant communication amidst ideological conflict, our most urgent task is to overcome these apparently iron laws of history. The vision of a world community based on justice, not power, is the necessity of our age ..."

1973 - On the evening of October 5th,
A retired schoolteacher and her daughter were on the highway near El Centro, California, when they noticed a Greyhound bus and several cars pulled onto the road shoulder. Standing near the vehicles was a group of people watching a large, disc-shaped object surrounded by a glistening vapour. The object rose vertically to 1200 feet, turned, and vanished, leaving a vapour trail that drifted toward the ground. After a minute or two, the vapour evaporated without reaching the ground.

1973 - On October 06,
Near Saint Matthias de Chambly, Quebec - Mr.& Mrs. N. R., while walking in the early morning hours noticed an intense light, like a searchlight, seemingly scanning the area from a field 1/4 mile away. The couple thought it must be the police looking for cattle rustlers as cattle had been reported missing in the area. Later that morning, Mrs. R. noticed smoke coming from the field and called her husband who arrived in time for them both to see a round yellowish, dome-shaped object resembling a camper's tent, a short distance from the "fire". Throughout, they assumed it was a group of Boy Scouts.
Suddenly, they noticed a yellow, square-shaped object resembling a bulldozer emerge from the tent and take up a position near a spring about 200 feet away. Five child-like figures, partly obscured by the grass or crop in the field, wearing bright yellow suits seemed to scurry back and forth between the 2 objects. Twenty-five minutes later, the couple noticed that the objects and beings were gone. When the couple's daughter later investigated she found a 50 foot wide circle of burnt and crushed grass, with a 6-inch-wide track, resembling tractor marks, leading to a smaller 12-foot-wide circle by the spring.
Miss R. got a headache and felt nauseous on returning to the house; the symptoms soon abated.
It was later found that the precise location of the landing was at a synclinal axis geological formation located between a pipeline and 2 high-voltage power lines.

1973
The Federal Financing Bank (FFB) becomes an agency in the U.S. Treasury Department.
It is established by the USA Congress to centralize the borrowing of federal agencies.
Instead of selling securities directly to the financial markets, all but the largest federal agencies raised capital by borrowing from the USA Treasury, through the Federal Financing Bank. The FFB makes loans at favourable rates to agencies that do not have ready access to the credit markets; its debt is a direct obligation of the U.S. Treasury.
The USA Federal bureaucracy had become so large and required so much capitalization that regular banking channels were not equipped with sufficient reserves to do so. In addition, specialized sanctioned megasource capital was not available legally or practically to the borrowing requirements of the smaller agencies. The FFB would act as a loan consolidator which the Treasury Department would fund from capitalization pools of $1 billion and up. Government deficit financing was growing, government budgets were growing, banking reserves were not keeping pace.

1973 - On October 6,
The Middle East War (Yom Kippur War) begins between Israel and two Arab countries, Egypt and Syria.
Both had been conducting military exercises immediately beforehand and the Arabs, it was believed, had misunderstood the intentions of the Israelis and were preparing to mount a joint action. It was the Jewish Day of Atonement , Yom Kippur, their holiest day of the year. The Arab attack was premeditated even though expected to fail from the beginning.
Yom Kippur, the 10th day of Tishri (the 7th month of the Jewish Biblical calendar), is the day on which all Jews mourn for their sins. Only on this day does the High Priest enter the Most Holy of Holies (room) in the Temple. Special clothing must be worn, to show reverence, and the blood from sacrificed animals is sprinkled before the mercy seat. For 24 hours, the people are to do no work; they are to spend the full duration confessing the sins which they have been guilty of for the past year. In the Christian context, Jesus Messiah (Christ) took the place of this sacrifice.

By accepting the Way of Life which he preached and accepting the Guidance of the Holy Spirit, God's communication link with individual humans, one's conscience was expected to be purged through humility and forgiveness. At that point, one's power of choice, by continual reference to the guidance of the Holy Spirit, was to enable one to become a son of God through that day-to-day following of God's plan for the individual.
Within the Jewish tradition, every 50th anniversary of Yom Kippur is known as the Year of Jubilee.
During that year, all debts were cancelled, slaves were set free, and family lands that had been sold would be returned to their original owners. For the Jews, Yom Kippur is both their holiest day and a time for renewal.

The Arab armies attacked Israel without warning with more than 100,000 soldiers invading the Sinai against some 3,000 defenders on the Bar Lev line on the Canal. During the first day of the attack, attackers from Syria, armed with 1,200 of the latest model Soviet tanks and modern anti-tank weapons, destroyed most of the Israeli defenses in the Golan Heights region. Once they had completed their initial advance, the Arab Syrian armies paused to regroup.
To the south, Egyptian forces had been similarly successful with the use of new Soviet-made ground-to-air missiles which had downed many Israeli planes and pilots. Soviet anti-aircraft missiles enabled the Egyptians to destroy most of Israel's tank force. It was at this point, just before the big push from the north and south, which was expected to take control of the rest of the state, that all of the invading troops stopped.

They had received word from an Egyptian intelligence agent behind Israeli lines that the Israelis were preparing to detonate a group of emergency nuclear devices designed to annihilate Israel AND all invading forces in the event of an indefensible position. That pause kept Israel from being overrun and gave the Israelis enough time to mount a defense and win the war.
Egyptian leader, Anwar Sadat, achieved his fundamental objective of shaking belief in Israel's invincibility and Arab impotence and thus transformed the psychological basis of the negotiating stalemate. Sadat aimed not for territorial gain but for a crisis that would alter the attitudes into which the parties were then frozen - and thereby open the way for negotiations. The shock would enable both sides, including Egypt, to show a flexibility that was impossible while Israel considered itself militarily supreme and Egypt was paralysed by humiliation.

Sadat sought a war to restore Egypt's self-respect and thereby increase its diplomatic flexibility.
Syria fought for more conventional and literal objectives: It simply wanted to regain occupied territory and at a minimum to inflict casualties on Israel. The boldness of Sadat's strategy lay in planning for what no one could imagine; that was the principal reason the Arabs achieved surprise.
Moscow had sought to impede any possible Egyptian move by slowing down military deliveries and working against him in Syria. On the other hand, after the Egyptian Chief of Intelligence, Hafiz Ismail visited Moscow in February, 1973, Egypt apparently concluded that it was free to consult its own interests short of actions that might lead to a Soviet-U.S. war. In diplomatic language this was an invitation to limited war.
The U.S.A. National Security Agency (NSA) had intercepted thousands of Arab communications indicating war and detailing plans, but because of the sheer volume of these messages, many key intercepts were never analyzed. In addition, some of the more sensitive of the NSA's intercepts were never analyzed. In addition, some of the more sensitive of the NSA's intercepts (revealing cryptographic success or unexpected monitoring ability) were held back from analysts for security purposes.

The secret methods of Henry Kissinger and President Nixon further frustrated American intelligence efforts by preventing analysts from having access to their conversations with heads of state and high-level diplomatic connections. A CIA source, who accurately reported the Egyptian preparations for war, was disbelieved.
The Israelis won the war with largely USA-made armaments and superior tactics against the Syrian's advanced Soviet-made SAM missiles and top-of-the-line T-72 tanks.

This continuing attitude of authoritarian paternalism held by American presidents (Truman, Eisenhower, Kennedy, Nixon) effectively resulted in a political dictatorship by the President and his close advisors over global policies. The danger is that such an attitude assumes an ethnocentric superiority and right to world leadership/domination such as that held previously by Alexander the Great, Genghiz Khan, various Roman Catholic popes, Adolf Hitler.
Such intolerance and irreverence has historically resulted in the loss of millions of human lives, the reduction of the standard of living of the masses, decreased general human spirituality - eventually resulting in political anarchy, environmental degradation, cultural fall.

The Grays find this apparent inability of humans to coexist with each other and their environment disgusting. The Reds are shamed by the power of consciousness which they conveyed to the human animal which has proven to be an experimental disaster. The Blonds are hopeful in that humans represent a kindred lifeform to them and IF only humans would become more spiritual in direction, their lifestyle conflicts would disappear: the Earth could become a "heaven".

Kissinger describes a crisis as follows:
"A crisis does not always appear to a policymaker as a series of dramatic events.
Usually, it imposes itself as an exhausting agenda of petty chores demanding both concentration and endurance. One is forced to react to scraps of information in very limited spans of time; longing for full knowledge, one must chart a route through the murk of unknowing. Operationally, a crisis resolves itself into minutiae that must be attended to with painstaking care, which includes the need to ensure that all parties work from the same body of information."

Kissinger also outlined American intelligence channels as:
"There are two ways in which intelligence reaches top officials.
One is through an agreed National Intelligence Estimate of all the different agencies represented on the U.S. Intelligence Board. This usually requires several days to accomplish. Another is the individual assessment of the intelligence agency serving a particular Cabinet member - the Defense Intelligence Agency (DIA) for the Secretary of Defense; INR for the Secretary of State. The CIA is technically available to all agencies of the government; however, it usually undertakes special studies for the President. Its director is the titular head and actual coordinator of all the various departmental intelligence units."

Kissinger also warned policymakers in his statement of responsibility:
"Policymakers cannot hide behind their analysts if they miss the essence of an issue.
They can never know all the facts, but they have a duty to ask the right questions.
This was the real failure on the eve of the Mideast war.
We had become too complacent about our own assumptions.
We knew everything but understood little.
And for that the highest officials - including me - must assume responsibility."

1973 - On October 10,
U.S.A. vice-president Spiro Agnew resigned on condition that he not be prosecuted.

1973 - On October 11,
In Tanner Williams, Alabama, a three-year old boy tells his mother that he had been playing with a nice monster that had gray wrinkled skin and pointed ears. The description is confirmed by another incident a few days later.

1973 - In the late afternoon of October 11,
Terry Eversole and his sister, in Connersville, Indiana, report a disc-shaped object with a segmented compartment on the bottom. They describe it as silver with a dome on top and 3 green doors on the bottom. After several seconds, it sped off towards the horizon and disappeared.

1973 - In the early evening of October 11,
Bill Temper and 50 other people in Connersville watched an oval-shaped object with a pale yellow light on top.
They reported a segmented compartment on the bottom.
It crossed the sky until it was over a restricted area where it hovered briefly and then settled to the ground. After 30 minutes, the object rose, hovered, and disappeared.

1973 - early in the evening of October 11,
Randi Stevens, Joel Burns, and 3 others, see an object hovering near Laurel, Indiana.
They describe it as looking like 2 saucers put together with a segmented bottom.
The object hovered until a truck driver who had been watching got into his cab and blew the horn.

1973 - on October 11,
Charles E. Hickson and Calvin R. Parker, Jr., report to the sheriff's office in Pascagoula, Mississippi, that while fishing nearby they saw a strange object land, were abducted by strange beings, and subjected to a physical examination on the craft for 25 or 30 minutes.
While fishing from the pier at the Shaupeter shipyard, Hickson turned to go for more bait, heard a "zipping" noise, looked up, saw an elongated, oval, bluish-grey craft, which was had very bright flashing 'blue-looking' lights. The object was hovering some 2 feet off the ground, it seemed to open up, and 3 beings came floating towards the fishermen. They describe the beings as pale, ghost-like, about 5 feet tall, wrinkled, gray skin, with crab-like claws in place of hands. The beings had 2 small cone-shaped ears and a pointed nose.

The beings floated towards Hickson and Parker without seeming to move their legs.
A buzzing noise was heard from one of them.
Parker passed out when one of them touched him, and Hickson, the older man felt paralysed.
Hickson was picked up and floated into a bright room in the craft which had no visible light fixtures.
Parker was apparently taken into a separate room by another being.
Hickson remembers being placed in a reclining position and suspended such that no part of him touched the craft. Only his eyes were free to move.
An instrument that looked like a big eye floated freely backwards and forwards about 9 inches over his body. He was turned by the beings so that all of him could be passed over by the instrument. After some time, he was guided back outside the craft and floated back into position with Parker on the pier as they were originally. Hickson felt so weak, that he fell over. The craft was 10 feet wide and 8 feet high.

Hickson described the occupants like robots, in that they acted as if they had a specific thing to do, and they did it. They did not try to communicate; however, Hickson emphasized that they did not mean them any harm and did not intend to hurt he or Parker physically.
They reported the incident to sheriff Fred Diamond who with Captain Glen Ryder interrogated them in an unsuccessful effort to break their story. Calvin Parker was so emotionally overcome after the interrogation, that, left alone when Hickson left the room, he started to pray. The next morning they were taken to the Keesler Air Force Base at Biloxi, Mississippi, where they gave their report to the head of intelligence, who responded as if he had heard it all before.

On October 14, Dr. James Harder hypnotically regressed both men individually and remarked afterwards that the experience would have had to be a real one for it was almost impossible to fake under hypnosis the very strong feeling of terror which they felt.
By October 30, Parker was having a nervous breakdown while Hickson was undergoing a polygraph test at the Pendelton Detective Agency in New Orleans. The operator, Scott Glasgow, was forced to admit after 2-1/2 hours of exhaustive tests that Hickson was telling the truth. Thereafter, Hickson received considerable publicity and with the extended repetition of the story, his details tended to change to a degree. Many owners of television sets in the area reported interference during the time of the incident.

1973 - On October 11,
A former Methodist minister, while driving near Hartwell, Georgia, saw a UFO land on the highway in front of him and saw silver-suited white-haired occupants.

1973
Police Chief Greenhaw, of Falkville, Alabama, while on his way to investigate a reported sighting, saw a figure, seemingly dressed in aluminum foil on a side road. He took 4 Polaroid pictures before it ran off and eluded him.

1973 - on October 11
Allen Robbins and his wife, in Boulder, Colorado, reported seeing a strange object, a slowly rotating craft with a string of lights on the bottom which divided it into thirds. It maintained a steady speed as it silently approached them at a high altitude and flew past.

1973 - On the evening of October 11,
James Cline, in Berea, Tennessee, was awakened by barking dogs and saw a UFO with blinking lights in the woods and a being across the road with a glowing white head. Tracks from both the creature and the UFO were found the next day.

1973
Following the Yom Kippur War, "the Samson Complex" was said by an Israeli general to have replaced the former "Masada Complex". In a manner of cultural brainwashing, beginning with the formation of the modern state of Israel in the latter 1940's, all military officers were sworn in at an emotional ceremony at Masada.
At about 73 A.D., hundreds of Israelis had murdered their own wives and children and committed suicide rather than by taken prisoner by the Romans. As a form of cultural pride and shame combined, modern Jews had taken an oath to never let Masada fall to an enemy again. Throughout the 1950's and 1960's this had been expressed by the Jewish military in a willingness to defend and attack with the tenacity and ferocity of one who has promised to fight to the death.

In the initial stage of the Yom Kippur War, when Israeli defenses appeared to be facing a totally overwhelming enemy in terms of numbers and preparation, General Moshe Dayan, then chief of Israel's defense, told the Prime Minister Golda Meir: "The Third Temple is falling, arm the doomsday weapon." The term "the Third Temple" had become a common Jewish description of the modern state of Israel. Israel had American-supplied nuclear weapons which could have been deployed within a day. Samson, in the Old Testament story, chose death over defeat and enslavement. The form of his death destroyed his enemies as well.
Against increasingly heavily equipped Arab countries surrounding Israel and threatening to destroy it and reabsorb it, modern Israeli defenders have now taken the precaution - inline with the spiritually negative precepts of tribalism - that, if we can't have this land, nobody will! If they believe they are facing defeat, Israeli leaders will order the annihilation of their own country rather than "allow" their people to be conquered.

1973 - On October 15,
A cab driver reported that his car was stalled by a blue UFO that landed in front of him.
He heard a tapping on his windshield and saw what looked like a "crab-like" claw.
An abduction may have been involved.

1973 - On October 16,
William and Donna Hackett were travelling along an Oklahoma county road when they saw a bright light in the south.
At first they thought it was a farm security light, but it seemed to pace their truck and be getting closer.
As the object turned towards the truck and began descending, Donna begged her husband to stop for a moment.
When the truck was stopped, the object stopped also, hovering near the front of the truck.
Both could hear or feel a low-pitched hum.
There was a blinding white light from the object that Hackett thought to be the size of a Boeing 707 aircraft.
As Mr. Williams sat in the cab, Donna got out and moved to the back of the pickup 3 times, each time being called back by William. Finally, Hackett drove away and as he did so, the UFO moved off in the opposite direction, gaining altitude as it went. They later reported that they had felt that the beings in the craft knew everything they were thinking.

1973 - On October 17
In Watauga, Tennessee, a witness saw a copper-coloured object hover just above the ground while a tall being reached out, apparently to grab 2 children. The being had clawlike hands and wide blinking eyes.

1973 - On October 17,
Police Chief Jeff Greenshaw of Falkville, Alabama, photographed a tall being in a silvery suit after he was called into the area to check on a UFO sighting. Greenshaw stopped his car when he saw a being as it moved slowly towards him. After a few moments, it turned and began running and Greenshaw pursued it until his car spun off the road. Various investigators labelled it a hoax after NASA produced photos of its firefighting suit that resembled the photographed being.

1973 - Also on October 17,
Paul Brown had a cone-shaped object land in front of him, forcing him to stop.
As he got out, two small beings in silver suits and white gloves confronted him.
Brown fired several shots at them or the object from his revolver and they returned to their craft and took off.

1973 - On October 17,
In Mississippi, a UFO landed on a highway, blocking traffic.
As one car approached, its lights went out and the engine died.
Occupants of the car saw a humanoid with a wide month, flipper feet, and webbing between the legs.

1973
Clarence Patterson, described how both he and his pickup truck were sucked into a huge, cigar-shaped craft.
He was jerked out of the cab by several robot-like creatures who seemed to read his mind.
He blacked out and regained consciousness back on the highway driving at 90 mph.

1973 - On October 17,
Pat Roach (a.k.a. Pat Price) was taken from her house along with several of he children, by several tiny creatures just before midnight. The beings also took some neighbours into their craft which had landed in a secluded field near her home.
Only Roache's youngest daughter remembered anything of the incident.
The woman had called police after the incident, believing that a prowler had been in her house.
It would be 2 years before the details of the sighting were learned through hypnotic regression of the subjects.

1973 - On October 17, just before midnight,
Herchel Fueston, a patrolman for the Noblesville, Indiana, police reported a cigar-shaped object which moved to the southwest and brightened its lights when he shone his spotlight on it. It flew over the Morse Reservoir and hovered briefly. Fueston reported a row of portholes but could see nothing behind them. Finally, the object descended to treetop level and disappeared.

1973 - On October 18,
Susan Ramstead, a young businesswoman working for a major corporation, while on her way to work, saw a landed craft in a cornfield as she was on her way to a business conference. It was a disc-shaped craft with a slight dome on top. It gave off a blue glow that seemed to be reflected by the ground around it.
As she approached it, the car stalled and its lights went out.
A few minutes later, it took off, disappearing in the distance.
She had been in contact with her husband on the CB radio describing the sighting to him, but when the car stalled, the radio faded. She thought she had been out of touch for five minutes, but her husband was certain that it was more like 20 or 30 minutes.

The time discrepancy was not investigated further until 1977 when author and researcher, Captain Kevin D. Randle, USAF ret. suggested that she try hypnosis to see if there was anything more to the time loss. Under hypnosis, she described short beings with no real facial features coming to her car and standing around it.
Next she remembered being in a craft, being examined, strapped to a table.
The craft felt cold and the surroundings were bright.
There were machines with computer-like screens.
The aliens appeared to her to be cold and unfeeling.
After they gathered their information she was left to herself to get dressed.
She was escorted from the ship and next found herself sitting in the front seat of her car with the ship in the sky.
In 1983, she got back to Captain Randle inquiring about the meaning of dreams, fearful dreams that seemed to repeat and contained aliens. When he visited her, she then regarded her memories as real and was concerned about having awakened to find blood on her pillow. On further questioning, on under separate hypnosis sessions for both her and her husband, the following was revealed:

The aliens had told her that they had selected certain people as guinea pigs.
Their lives were going to be followed while the aliens stood off and patiently waited for time to pass. They couldn't maintain daily surveillance, but they could, periodically, swoop in and scoop up those selected people.
A tiny metal spherical object was placed in the subject's nose as a kind of homing device.
Between the first abduction and the last, when the device was removed, Susan had experienced a chronically stuffed-nose feeling and headaches. When it had been removed on the last visit they made to her, she awoke after to find blood on her pillow and nightdress; however, her headaches ceased to occur and her nose felt cleared from that time on.

With hypnotic regression and memory-enhancing drugs, the subjects could be interviewed, their lives reviewed and an updated biography produced.
Her husband, John, mentioned that he awakened one night to see small creatures standing at the end of the bed. They were small gray men with big, dark eyes, no facial features, and pale skin. He tried to move but found himself paralysed. He felt panic; one of the creatures moved to him and touched his shoulder, following which he relaxed. He watched as his wife was taken from the room, one alien remaining with him. A long time later, Susan was returned, put in bed, and as the creatures left, he went back to sleep. He had remembered nothing the next day.

A second time, he reported that again Susan was taken from the room, but then the creatures returned, one approached him, raised a hand, and floated John outside to the craft. He also found the craft brightly lite and cold. The aliens probed his body with needles and tissue samples were taken from cuts.
There was no communication with him.
They then returned him to his bed. A few minutes later,
Susan was back; the next morning there was blood on her pillow.
There had been a number of intervening visits and at one point, Susan reported that she was no longer interested in sex and avoided contact with her husband, but that he didn't seem to care much at that point. The aliens returned and the feelings she had been concerned about evaporated.

1973 - During the year,
Wilson Bryan Key reported the results of inquiries made to commercial research firms in the North American Cities of New York, Chicago, and Toronto. Thirteen of the firms were prepared to offer some sort of mechanically induced, subliminal message service to advertisers. There were still no rules forbidding the use of subliminal images in motion pictures or in supermarkets or taverns. And there were very few legal prohibitions against any kind of subliminal stimulation.
For the restrictions which did exist, no investigations were usually carried out unless complaints were received. Most of the public believed that they were safe under the watchful eyes of the government administration and such confidence together with general apathy led to few complaints. In addition, the sophistication of the techniques in use required the testimony of experts and the use of equally sophisticated detection equipment plus prosecutors and judges which were fully aware of the industry in order to obtain any convictions. Such a combination was demonstrated to be impossible to attain.

1973 - On October 19,
A woman near Ashburn, Georgia, reported that her car engine died and she lost her power steering and brakes.
As she was coasting to a stop at the side of the road, a small man in metallic clothes appeared.
The woman described the being as having a bubble head and rectangular eyes.
It walked around the car and then vanished.

1973 - On October 19,
A farm couple in Copeland, North Carolina, discovered an oval object hovering near their home.
There was a small humanoid in a gold metallic jumpsuit moving near it.

1973 - On October 20,
A college student on her way home, vanishes for a few days.
When she reappears she describes being taken onto an alien craft and examined through a series of long and painful tests. Years later, the significance of the event and the memory of the events would become clear.

1973 - On October 21,
A mother and her son in Ohio sight a gray humanoid near a landed UFO. A search of the field produced ground traces.

1973 - On October 22,
Debbie Carney spots 2 beings wearing silver suits on the road in front of her car, near Hartford City, Indiana. She drives on past them quickly.

1973 - On October 22,
De Wayne Donathan and his wife, in Hartford City, Indiana, while returning home, see a flash of light in the road ahead and thinking it is the reflector on a tractor in front of them, he slams on the brakes. In the field near them, they see two beings jumping around in movements Donathan describes as dancing.

1973
Gary Flatter drives by the same area as the Donathan's 2 hours after them, looking for the aliens.
He sees them standing in a ploughed field and when he turns his truck's spotlight on them, is almost blinded by the reflection from their suits. He describes them as 4 feet tall, with egg-shaped heads and gas masks with tubes running to their chests, Shortly after he turns the light on them, they leap away. Footprints are found in the field the next day.

1973 - On October 24,
A North Carolina man, sees a low-flying oval craft when his car engine stalls.
He is reported to have seen a being with blazing red eyes.

1973 - On October 28,
Israeli and Egyptian military representatives met for direct talks for the first time in 25 years, under the auspices of UN observers.

1973 - On October 28,
Mr. Dionisio Llanca is taken to a hospital near his home in Bahia Blanca, Argentina, complaining of amnesia and loss of appetite. Doctors, using hypnotic regression, learn that he had been abducted by 2 men and a woman from a UFO.

1973 - On October 28,
Dionisio Llanca, was taken to a hospital near his home in Bahia Blanca, Argentina, where he complained of amnesia and loss of appetite. Doctors, using hypnotic regression, learned that he had been picked up by 2 men and a woman from a UFO. On board the craft he was subjected to a physical examination, during which blood samples were taken. Later he was returned to his truck.

1973 - On November 2,
Lyndia Morel, while driving in New Hampshire, saw a strange yellow light in the distance as she drove to work.
As she watched it, it appeared to come closer until she could tell that it was spherical and covered with a honeycomb. There was a single, oval window and behind it was a creature with gray wrinkled skin and large slanted eyes. As she drove on, she felt drawn to the UFO and kept looking at it. She became frightened and pulled into a farm driveway and sought sanctuary in the farmer's house.

1973 - On November 3,
Mariner 10, a 503 kg, interplanetary satellite was launched by an Atlas Centaur rocket from Cape Canaveral.
During February 5, 1974, it would record 3500 images with its twin TV cameras as it passed Venus at 5760 km. One camera had UV filters and was able to reveal global atmospheric circulation. It was confirmed that an upper atmosphere rotates every 4 earth-days compared to the 243-day period of Venus. On March 16, a course alteration redirected M10 towards Mercury,
On March 29, 1974, a 271 km flyby was achieved with 2300 images being recorded from 6 days away until 10 days later. They revealed a heavily cratered surface. A 1290 km diameter Caloris Basin was discovered, the creating impact of which had scared the opposite hemisphere. The IR radiometer recorded temperatures ranging from 188 degrees Centigrade on the night side to estimated temperatures of 293-427 degrees Centigrade on the solar side, depending upon distance from the Sun in its circumsolar path.

Mariner's 176-day orbit was in phase with Mercury's 88-day period, allowing a second visit on September 21, 1974, at 48,069 km when 1000 images exhibiting resolutions down to 1 km were recorded. An iron core within the planet, occupying half the planet's volume, was indicated by mass and trajectory calculations.
A third and final encounter took place on March 16, 1975, at 319 km during which 349 images were returned with resolutions down to 140 metres. Earth-based controllers developed a solar sailing technique to extend the useful life of the craft by using the pressure of solar radiation on the moveable high-gain antenna and the solar panels to stabilize it. By the end of the 3rd encounter, 57% of the surface of Mercury had been recorded. On the 3rd encounter, it was also confirmed that Mercury is one of a few magnetized planets in the Earth's Solar system.

1973 - On November 4,
Rex Snow and his wife, living in New Hampshire, were awakened just after midnight to see 2 small beings wearing silver suits gathering samples. Snow ordered his aggressive German shepard to attack, but it stopped far short and ran back to the house.

1973
A U.S.A. Gallup opinion poll indicated that 51% of Americans believed that UFOs or flying saucers were real and not just a figment of the imagination or cases of hallucination.

1973
Gold Stock is given a set price in the USA of $42.22 a troy ounce for the purpose of American Treasury valuation of reserves.
Monetary gold reserves consist of Gold Certificates, issued by the Treasury to the Federal Reserve (for tax authority - deficit funding), and gold bullion against which certificates are not issued. The Treasury's gold stock does not include gold reserves held by the Exchange Stabilization Fund, USA contributions to the IMF, and gold held as reserves at the Federal Reserve Bank of New York for foreign and international accounts.
Gold Certificates will be used for collateral funding of Fed reserves in the future.
Such a process is as risky as taking out an indenture to pay off business losses.
Sooner or later, the indenture must be repaid in capital or labour.
You have not cleared the debt - merely changed the creditor.
In this case, the creditor does not know that it has capitalized the reserves of a central (government) bank which capitalizes the reserves of those private banks which subscribe to its authority in policy-making.

1973 - On November 30,
Near Turin, Italy - Riccardo Marano, while preparing to land his Piper Navajo was advised by the control tower that there was an object 4000 feet above the runway. It reportedly disappeared only to be reported behind Marano at 12,000 feet. He saw a bright luminous sphere, which was emitting light of all colours, pulsating from bright to dim. Following the UFO, he found that it could make "fantastic lateral deviations and sudden vast jumps to and fro". He estimated its speed at 550 mph.

1973 - In December,
F. Sherwood Rowland and Mario Molina, of the University of California, first perfected the calculations that showed the destructive power of fluorocarbons on the Earth's atmosphere.
In 1972, Rowland and others had begun to wonder about what happened to fluorocarbons in the atmosphere when their calculations indicated that the quantity of fluorocarbons in the atmosphere almost equalled the amount produced by the chemical industry. They had expected that the chemical would go through some normal disintegration process when exposed to the ultraviolet light of the upper atmosphere; however, these chemicals were not normal Earth origin organic compounds - they were human-made.
Their calculations now indicated that fluorocarbons remained stable in the lower atmosphere.
Once they reached an altitude of 50 to 80 kilometres (30 to 50 miles) above the Earth, the ultraviolet light from the Sun did break the molecules apart and knocked off the chlorine atoms. These chlorine atoms then combined with the ozone in the life protecting ozone belt with each chlorine atom destroying up to 100,000 molecules of ozone! Rowland was stunned by the results. At first he thought he had made some error in calculation but on rechecking everything they could not deny the result.

They announced their findings and called for an immediate ban on chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs).
They announced that the weakening of the ozone layer could cause a marked increase in skin cancers for humans and contribute to global climatic change. Acting as theoretical scientists working in the perceptual environment exclusive of the competitive industro-political-social world.
The CFC industry was big: $28 billion-a-year.
The industry bought its own scientific spokespersons to rationalize away Rowland and Molina's findings and suggestions in an attempt to discredit them. In August of 1977, the president of one aerosol-manufacturing firm suggested the criticism of CFCs was being "orchestrated by the Ministry of Disinformation of the KGB." A year or so later, computer simulations confirmed Rowland and Molnar's theory that CFCs could be broken down in the upper atmosphere and their theory was widely accepted.

Politically, the discussions went on with bureaucratic delays, lobbying by manufacturers and public discussion of the theories. Citizens of North American nations and Europe began boycotting the products and using demonstrations and letter-writings campaigns to influence their political representatives, and, some governments began to regulate the use of CFCs in consumer and commercial spray can products. For an industry of this size, with profits as the only motive for existence, that was not the end of the problem.
The industry expanded its promotion of the use of CFCs into areas less noticeable to the public.
It was used in coolants in commercial and car air conditioners and refrigerators; foaming agents in foam insulation, packaging, and cushioning; solvents that clean solder from electronic components - while CFC-like compounds called halons, which were 10 times more potent as ozone depleters, were developed and used in fire extinguishers. All the while, theoretical-minded scientists including manufacturer-sponsored lobbyists tried to minimize and define the extent of the possible injury to the ecosphere of the planet with calculations of the degree of ozone depletion which could occur from the use of such products.

1973 - Near the end of the year,
Comet Kohoutek is discovered by a Czech astronomer of the same name.
Dramatic expectations of brightness and uniqueness are not realized when it passes.
Several observational rockets are launched with little benefit gained:

January 05, 1974: Aerobee 200 rocket from White Sands Missile Range, N. Mexico;
January 08, 1974: Aerobee 200 rocket from White Sands Missile Range, N. Mexico.

1973 - By the end of the year,
Amniocentesis was a medical procedure which many doctors throughout the world were totally unfamiliar with.
Developed in the early 1970s, presumably to determine whether the fetus harboured any genetic illness, to allow rationalization of an abortion, the process became used almost exclusively to determine the gender of the prospective child.
A 4-inch-long hypodermic needle was used to puncture the pregnant woman's abdomen and withdraw fluid from the sac surrounding the fetus. The fluid would contain cells which had been sloughed off by the fetus during its aging and development. These "dead" cells were examined, and, could reveal some genetic illnesses and the fetus' gender by the fourth month of pregnancy. Two problems which can arise are the small potential for damage to the fetus from the needle and the potential for a decision for abortion of a half grown (in time) baby.

In 1975, a medical geneticist at the Mount Sinai School Of Medicine in New York City, found that of an estimated 4,000 pregnant American women who had underwent amniocentesis that year, 5% were found to have fetuses with serious defects. Most of these were aborted. There was no analysis as to whether some of these, because of their defects, might have normally miscarried, if allowed to do so.
Many of the mothers who opted for the abortions reported to have suffered afterward from deep remorse.
Some of them terminated sexual relations. Others were divorced.
By 1976, the number of American women undergoing amniocentesis would reach 10,000.
At a 5% rejection rate, as many as 500 abortions might occur.

1973 - During December,
The publication of "Touch for Health", by John F. Thie, D.C. with Mary Marks, would introduce a "new approach to restoring our natural energies" which enabled the empowerment of the individual to attain, maintain, and retain the life energy strengths which promote health and constructive decisionmaking.
"When the public spends $5,200,000,000 for prescription drugs and another $2,200,000,000 for non-prescription drugs a year and they don't need two-thirds of them, it is time we take stock of what is going on in the health field."

With the lifestyle change requirements necessary to take advantage of such self-empowering possibilities, the slow acceptance and rise in popularity of this form of health maintenance would confirm the degree by which the North American peoples had become enslaved to the materialistic addiction of authoritarianism. Thie and Marks presented an awareness and life participation tool which opposed the continued wealth accumulation of the North American medical establishment (pharmaceutical companies, state-sanctioned doctors, hospitals, chronic care services, drug stores, and, politics) by making available to the average individual an effective means of self-enhancement.

The Touch-for-Health system also threatened the patterned enslavement of the citizens involved.
That is, they were challenged to leave the comfort, security, simplicity, dependency, passivity, despair, self-deception, and defeatism of their current illness plagued lifestyle and move into the sensual life involvement lifestyle of someone who has positive self-expectancy, a positive self-image, a desire for positive self-control, a self-assertive sense of hope, a positive awareness of possibilities, a positive self-motivation for discovery, and, a positive self-direction to win over injury, pain, weakness, disease, and the lack of faith of others.
The process itself could now be learned, understood and practiced by most humans of age 8 or older.
There was a catch, a qualifier, a basic requirement of the spirit. Before any individual would arrange the time, spend the energy, and consider the benefits - a willingness to self-sacrifice for the benefit of oneself and others had to be present. Miracles don't just happen, most of the time. Anyone willing to strengthen the spiritual skills of which they are capable can perform miracles. But to perform miracles, you cannot be a slave.
That is, as long as you live your life by the decisions, expectations, assumptions, demands, and beliefs of other persons - you are their slave, a robot. Programmed accurately and appropriately, a robot can very efficiently, productively and repetitively perform the functions which the operator (master) desires for his or her own gain. The robot is treated as if it has no feelings, expresses no feelings, and is sensually dead.

Can a robot not know what it is?
Can a moving, reacting, participating, programmed lifeform be content NOT to be able to explore, discover, sense, change, choose, interact - have a sensual expression of "life"? Yes! Machine or human, what has never been experienced, never modelled, never spoken about, never sanctioned - can neither be missed nor chosen. There may be a chronic sense of loss, worthlessness, resignation, abandonment, and dependency - but, if that is all there has ever been - that is the status quo; that is "normal."
With a heavy emphasis on material security, social acceptance and recognition, sensual loss replacement, and pride - most individuals had been imprinted, modelled and rewarded for playing the game of authoritarian reaction addictiveness. To the extent that any civilization can respond with uniform and intense feelings to keywords which of themselves have the potential to hold many meanings for individuals with differing experiences and degrees of self- and global-awareness - it has become robotized. Like lambs led to the slaughter, the masses are led by those who choose to deceive and manipulate them.

Self-appointed leaders rationalize their selfish and immature intents behind statements of national purpose and social benefit. The addiction play out repeatedly: the leader, like a vampire, sucks the spirit of hope and performance from the follower with the promise that this same spirit will be returned renewed and strong, and fails. The spirit is returned weakened by failure, frustration, anxiety, betrayal, anger, and, a greater sense of needing to be "saved" - of dependency and enslavement. The promises are made again, and the process repeated.
Where is the intelligence?
The light is on in the house but no one is home!
Humans have the capability to be sensual spiritual participants in the direction of their life - until, the conspiracy of human-based authority makes the participant into a part.

The benefits of the Touch-for-Health approach to healthfulness have continuously been demonstrated from their introduction. Yet by 1996, the leaders of the North American societies would NOT have introduced the following changes which could have resulted in a reduction of healthcare costs by 75%:
1. Training of all General Practitioners in the art; 2. Universal high school curriculum adoption; 3. Widespread testing and verification of results; 4. A government-assisted base of applied kinesiology clinics; 5. A patient-focused health care system, not authority-based; 6. Related self-awareness opportunities to decrease disease; 7. A national attempt to raise awareness of addicitons.

The fact that NONE of these options were seriously considered or introduced is an indication of the degree of spiritual enslavement is present in North America. Consider that in most other agrarian and industrialized economies, human-based authority systems of interaction are more restrictive and the degree of robotization is more intense and extensive.
For those who would develop the abilities to effectively practice the Touch-for-Health approach, two qualities would have to be present. First, the individual had to see themselves with the reverent sensual perspective that they were part of life - rather than that life was part of them. That is, they had learned to be intimately aware of themselves: how they felt; what they could and could not do; how others thought of them; what they wanted most to be part of their life; that the present is what can be experienced and changed with certainty; that making one's own choices is more constructive than allowing others to make them and receive the praise for any successes. They had to be individuals, who at least sometimes, wanted to explore, discover, be fascinated by, become enthusiastic - and yet could also be humble in their search, inviting of change, honest about one's weaknesses, and benevolent in sharing. They knew that they had and could continue to learn from the past and from the experiences of others.
For some, this departure from robotization came at the point of acute pain, chronic tension, potential death, and extended disappointment with the inadequacies and non-performance of the conservative medical establishment. They had to be willing and ready to set aside the empty promises of servitude and rebel or react. In desperation - for survival - some would react and look to the new approach for new authorities, new leaders, new procedures to follow. Others would rebel and seek to fulfill the same old promises of better and longer-lasting health by empowering themselves. Either way, their motto might have become: "I live every moment, enjoying as much, relating as much, doing as much, giving as much - as I responsibly can."

The second factor neither often found nor institutionally sanctioned in a human-based authority society was that of self-projection. Instead of listening to and being guided by the statements of parents, friends, associates, enemies, competitors, bullies, and leaders as to what was expected of him or her, these individuals had to have the self-confidence and faith that often comes from self-expression, experience and achievement - to visualize themself as succeeding.
They couldn't wait around for someone else to encourage them, pay them, or make it easy for them.
Usually, there would be many people to tell them that trying something new wasn't going to work, that the authorities knew best, that they should grow up and just accept their misery, that their pain or illness wasn't really that bad, that any new process could only be a fraud because everything that worked had already been discovered, - there would be no end to the rationalizations for simply reamining a slave to the domination of a power-centred system.
These individuals had to learn to take responsibility for themselves.
They knew that everybody had already had their say, their chance to probe and poke, their choice of drugs and excuses. Now it was the patient's opportunity to become the doctor and to practice in a non-threatening, non-invasive, non-destructive manner. And some aspect of faith and spiritual strength within them confirmed to them that they could do it. They knew they didn't know how - and they knew they could learn; they wanted to learn.

One of the basic diagnostic methods incorporated into the Touch-for-Health approach was that of muscle-testing.
Used for many years to evaluate the function and effectiveness of an individual's muscles relative to their state of health, these tests show weaknesses which physical therapist had often seen as good or within normal limits, as opposed to complete loss of control or paralysis. But as Thie and Marks pointed out, operating at 50% strength is not good enough for robust health - especially if 100% can be attained relatively easily. In addition, Thie and Marks stipulated that there should be no more than a 15% difference in strength between the right and left sides of the body irrespective of which hand was more dominant.
"We test a muscle, and if it is strong, it's really strong.
If it isn't we try to do something about it.
Of course, we have to take into account the person being tested.
A child will not be as strong as an adult, and some of the muscles, especially the neck and abdominal muscles, are not fully developed in the early years. However, the amount of resistance a child can give a muscle test is often surprising. Find a strong muscle and compare it with a weak one on the same person.
It is the relative difference, out of balance with their general condition, which is significant.
When testing a person whose strength is very great, such as an athelete or someone who does muscle building exercises, sometimes it is difficult to find weaknesses. This is because the weakness on a very strong person is out of the range of strength which could be distinguished by the tester. The relative difference between the very strong person's normal strength and his weaknesses may be difficult to judge. When testing under these circumstances, we have to consider even the slightest give in the test as a weakness. The person may also communicate feelings about the individual tests. Consider the posture and the tensions, and use any of the methods of analysis to help determine where to work.

The testing positions are intended to isolate the muscle from the group that it normally works with.
Since the muscle is being isolated, it is at a disadvantage.
Muscles don't normally work singly, so one by itself is not going to be as strong as if it were used in the usual way. For this reason, it is important to test only the first couple of inches of the range of the muscle action, applying the pressure gradually and releasing it gradually. With a greater or sudden force, even a strong muscle could be overcome, and this is not the point of the test. The muscles will either be strong in the first part of the test, locking in place, or it will give way completely and swing easily through a larger span of the test area.
Learn to feel the difference in the first few inches of the test, either locking (relative to the person's normal strength) or mushy (giving way). Sometimes a muscle which is on the borderline will give out after its first attempt and indicate a true weakness on the second test. With normal strength, a muscle can be used repeatedly and not fade or tire quickly, If a muscle hurts during the test, stop immediately, assume it is weak and treat it. If the pain is not gone when the muscle is retested after treating, there are related muscles listed which should also be checked.

Most of the tests can be done with the person lying down, although a few must be done in a face down position. ... as long as the muscle is given an accurate test with the other muscles sufficiently immobilized, the testing position itself - lying, standing, or sitting -- is not important. A massage table is a helpful accessory to regular use of the techniques, but certainly isn't necessary. The floor is god, especially with a soft rug or pad. A bed is usually too soft, since the testing pressure will go into the mattress instead of against the muscle action, making accurate evaluation difficult. ...
Testing the muscles performs many functions.
First, it gives us an indication of an area which should be worked on.
It is also a necessary part of the treatment itself.
Unless a muscle has just been used, as in the tests, energies released in treatment have only a general effect throughout the body and do not always give enough benefit to the specific muscle in need of stimulation. Using the muscle first seems to tell the energies where to go and what to do.

It is also necessary to retest once the muscle has been treated.
This is for two reasons. irst, to check the effectiveness of the treatment.
But perhaps more important, to use this muscle which has just been given a greater potential strength.
While the weakness was present, the body had to compensate in order to maintain an internal balance or homeostasis. Now that the muscle has regained its strength, it is important to use it to help realign the body to a more normal position.
It is the muscles which are responsible for maintaining the normal structural balance, and unless they have been brought back into play, even though they may now be capabel of being used, the body does not benefit from the muscle balancing. So first we test as an indication of the need for treatment and to give treatment somewhere to go, and then after treatment we retest to help the body achieve the posture we are striving for. ...
When a muscle has been strained or overworked, the circulation and lymph systems have been overloaded.
This turns off the muscle's strength, so that minute tearing of the fibers takes place.
It is this tearing which causes the stiffness and pain following unaccustomed exercise.
In this type of injury, it has been found beneficial to put hard, heavy pressure against the attachment areas. Usually, this is at the origin, but the muscle insertions can also be treated. This tends to reestablish the contacts, like pinning up a wisp of hair that has gone astray."

A simple muscle test which most people can do with the help of an assistant is as follows.
Determine first what it is that you want to test to determine if such a substance lowers or strengthens your life energy. This may apply to vitamin or mineral supplement tablets, prescription or over-the-counter medications, specific foods, industrial chemicals, beverages, different water supplies - almost anything which you intend to introduce into your body, or, which may enter your body by its proximity - vapours, smoke, air pollution, ....
First, take a small thin glass or plastic bottle or container and put the ingredient in it.
With a straight and comfortable posture, standing, sitting, or optimally - lying down, place the thumb and middle finger of your dominant hand together and have your friend, partner, or assistant muscle test your strength of keeping your fingers together by gently trying to pull them apart.
Then, place the container on a spot central to the groin, an inch of more below the naval (belly button), and retest. There will be an indication of greater strength, stability, or weakness. The "benefit" of a vitamin or food may vary from day to day, and for some poorly balanced or highly negatively stressed individuals - from hour to hour. Generally, indications of a food hypersensitivity (also termed a "food allergy" by some persons) or a toxic substance will be consistent over a long duration. If finger dexterity is not advantageous to this particular muscle test, there are numerous other testing techniques outlined in the reference noted, or, a surrogate test may be done.

The above test may be done to determine whether a substance is categorically toxic, personally adverse for the present, adverse when combined with other drugs or foods, adverse or beneficial depending upon concentration or dosage (testing may be done with one or several tablets, or, with different combinations and strengths. In this manner, you can choose the optimum diet, supplement and medications as directed by the source which knows best - your body. Experience will indicate whether the "signals" being communicated are clear or confused. The greater the number of energy blocks which your lifesystem is carrying, the greater is the possibility that a "miscommunication" may result. This is why it is initially important to confirm your testings with a practicing adept therapist.
When you and your partner find that you are always getting accurate feedback, you are closer to independence of choice. Whenever in doubt, the advice of a physician or therapist should be sought. Physicians are generally unaware of these practices, untrained in them, taught to be intolerant of them, superstitious in regard to the effectiveness and appropriateness of the use of drugs, and, unfortunately, often authoritarian in their disregard for patient feedback. Opinions and retesting should be sought, especially initially; however, the source of such feedback should also be taken into account. Ultimately, individual requirements are indicated for individual lifesystems and lifestyles. An expection of a standard "prescription" or standard "requirement" presumes an optimum or deficient level of healthfulness for everyone.

Instruction classes often afford the opportunity to test the body types of several different individuals and a person who trains with a close friend, spouse, or associate - is fortunate in having the facility to both practice and be practiced on, and the benefit of being able to be continually strengthened while contributing to the enhancement of health of one's partner. Methods of using a surrogate tester enable incapacitated persons to be tested. Meditative techniques applied as an extension of learned muscle testing can lead to the remarkable ability of muscle testing oneself without movement and of surrogate testing without contact.
Thie and Marks are very constructive in their book in the description and pictoral representation of muscles testing procedures and the appropriate accupressure holding points which can be used to strengthen or weaken a muscle. Yes, an over-strong muscle can disturb the balance of the body's structure even as an over-weak muscle can. Frequently taught in such courses is also the ancient Chinese meridian energy system and a linkage in practice between specific muscles, organ groups, foods, and meridians. Thus, once an imbalance is found it may be rebalanced both shorter-term and longer-term by one or a selection of meridian activation movements, accupressure point massage, increased ingestion of specific foods.

Over the next 3 decades, it would be discovered that specific herbs, flower essences, and other alternatives could also be constructively utilized in rebalancing the body. A balanced body contributes to a clearer and better focused mind, more positive and less intense emotions, and, a stronger spirit.
The benefits of balancing can be remarkable, either in one or multiple treatments.
Some examples are these:
a) loss of individual allergies; b) retention of chiropractic adjustment; c) elimination of migraine headaches; d) reduction in childhood overactivity; e) elimination of obsessions and addictions; f) dissolution of tenseness, anxiety, strains; g) correction of metabolic and diabetic irregularities; h) and others.

Thie and Marks were also helpful in introducing the public to the concept of Meridian "reversals":
"A person who has become ill or is under emotional or mental stress will often experience a reversal of energy flows and require modification of the treatment methods. This, of course, is made evident by retesting the muscle after treatment. A meridian which normally will strengthen a muscle used in one direction, may have to be used in reverse. If there is any doubt, retrace the meridian in the opposite direction and retest the muscle. If the muscle is strengthened by tracing the meridian from the end to the beginning, work back and forth between strengthening and weakening using the other techniques, being sure to leave the muscle strong.
Drugs can also have this reversing effect, whether they are "over-the-counter", prescription, or an illicit concoction. Any unusual chemical can cause confusion in the communication system within the body. Tranquilizers, pep pills and exotic smokes like marijuana can make using the muscle balancing techniques confusing or downright difficult."

Meridian reversals are also possible when an individual has a number of biochemically induced hereditary energy blocks, or/and if the individual is a Walk-In or multiple Walk-In. That is, the physical neurological patterns of one's parentage or of a formerly present soul may be retained within your present body. In effect, you have your own intentions, desires, and motivations. If your personal history indicates that these personal goals constantly seem to be frustrated, thwarted, made difficult or result in failure - it may be that this outcome is mediated by the lack of energy balance in your life system. It is as if somone else is in control of your body in terms of its responses to your commands and the changing environment.
Rather, it may be that you are reacting in your daily decisions and choices instead of "responding".
If that is the case, biochemical "habits" imprinted on your neurological system while you were in the womb - by dramatic experiences, perceptions, feelings, attitudes, and behaviours of your mother - and of her mother, grandmothers, ... are driving you. Since only trauma-induced destructive patterns are so transferred, any which you have will effectively work against your overall success in life.

The same can occur when a person becomes a Walk-In.
That is, the earlier spirit within your body was too weak to address the challenges presented to it and it chose to leave; in its place, you, the present spirit within the body, chose to continue with the physical life of the former spirit. The reason for doing this are more detailed in an appendix.
The important aspect here, is that YOU must assert your individuality and that will only be possible when, and to the degree, that you release any energy blockages which you have - any destructive reactive behaviours which determine the outcome of your life experiences. Some of this you can do yourself. The rest can be done with the assistance of others. Slave to or ruler of your body, there is a choice - if you want it.

Another technique, which anyone can use to strengthen their health before an interview, test, special task or exertion, social occasion, or expected confrontation is that of "Cross-crawling":
"... After sufficient development through infancy and early childhood, the right and left sides (of the brain) being developed more or less equally or bilaterally in muscle coordination, handedness and intellectual or academic learning can proceed normally.
If the weakness in the individual person seems to be stabilized in one particular area or on one side of the body, whether it be the supraspinatus muscle related to the brain or another muscle which is used regularly, this can be an indication of the crossing effect between the right and left sides of the body and the brain not being accomplished. This can be tested using the cross-crawling technique.

First test the muscles in question and strengthen them using the conventional methods.
(This is assuming that they do not respond to treatment but become weak again when the muscle is used.) Then we test the need for cross-crawling by doing the opposite, that is, homolateral crawling. With the person lying face up, pick up his right arm and leg together and raise the arm back behind the head, the leg up with the knee bent as if to crawl. Return them back down to the side of the body and repeat by picking up the left arm and leg. The person being tested should look straight up. Repeat this about 5 times and then retest the muscle. If the muscle which was just strong is now weak, then cross-crawling would probably be helpful.
Cross-crawling is modeled after the correct crawling motions of the infant, with some therapeutic modifications. The normal crawling or creeping involves moving the right arm and left leg forward at the same time, with the head turning toward the arm. Then the left arm and the right leg are brought forward, with the head turned toward the left arm. Cross-crawling as an exercise is more efficiently done lying face up.

If the weakness is on the left, then the left leg and right arm are raised together and the head turns toward the right hand. The left leg and right arm are returned to the side and the head is turned back to center. When the right leg and left arm are then brought up, the head does not turn but remains facing straight forward. In either phase of the exercise, the arms and legs are alternated in the same way, and the head only moves to watch the movement of the hand on the side opposite the weakness. Otherwise, the eyes remain looking straight forward.
After causing a weakness to return by using the homolateral crawl, use the cross-crawl technique about 5 times or cycles. If cross-crawling would be helpful to that person, then the muscles which were made weak should now be strong without using any other type of treatment. This is a very useful technique, especially with children and people who have experienced learning problems or have coordination difficulties. For children, it is probably necessary for the second person to perform the exercise while the child is passive except for moving his own head. With an adult, the exercise can probably be done alone, having been tested to determine which direction to look. Occasionally, check to re-evaluate the need to continue doing the exercise.

Twenty-five complete sets or cycles of the arm and leg motions can be done at one time, and this repeated 3 or 4 times a day. Doing the exercise standing up, marching in place, using the appropriate arm and leg together and the eye motion as described, can also be helpful. This position is not as effective because of the dependence on gravity instead of the muscle action itself to do most of the work, but as before, any treatment is better than no treatment.
Walking with the arms swinging opposite the legs also has a cross-crawling effect on the brain and the body, as it is good for the general health for this and many other reasons. Walking is one of the few exercises which benefits all parts of the body. In walking and letting the arms swing, getting good motion in the spine, none of the muscles are locked, but are all flowing. A good, brisk walk of a mile twice a day is generally recommended. Push off with all the toes, landing on the heel. Roll down the outside of the foot and let the arms swing in opposition, the hands empty.
Observe the heels of your shoes.
They should wear evenly and not run down more than a quarter of an inch.
When standing for any length of time, the arch can get tired and will drop.
Wearing a lower heel, which makes better use of the arch, and putting some support in the arch, can prevent foot fatigue. Working in old, run-down shoes with the heels worn and the arches sagging is one of the worst things for the back. It would be better to work without shoes if they were not good shoes. Sometimes the simplest orthopedic correction can have a dramatic effect on the whole general posture and balance of the person."

As has been noted above, cross-crawling is the behaviour by which the human brain is first neurologically programmed such that each side of the brain controls the opposite side of the body. Without this "reptilian" neurological habit being developed, the human can sustain lifelong difficulties in attention focus, learning, memory, emotional development and control, and attainment of spiritual strength. All of these contribute to chronic destructive behaviour patterns which induce the health of the individual to decline or continually be in a position of negative stress.
As a simple test of your immediate level of neurological balance, stand up now, and without concentrating on the optimum way of walking on the spot, begin several cycles of high step strides. Note whether you are automatically alternating the swing of your arms with your legs, or, did you begin by moving the arm and leg on each side in the same direction. If the latter occurred, then you have a clear indication that your energy system is unbalanced.
With the directions noted above, you also know that YOU can change this unbalance and "tune" yourself to a healthier existence. It is advised that you conduct this simple self-test periodically and especially whenever you feel negatively stressed. This simple activity can save you tens of thousands of dollars worth of medical treatment during your lifetime, and, it may save you a relationship or a career as well!
In essence, failure to develop and maintain this optimum neurological patterning, for humans, is coincident with the symptoms of having the energy within one of the meridian energy pathways running through the body being blocked. When an energy pathway is blocked, it is similar to a blood vessel being blocked in that the activities normally sustained by the nerve impulses which follow the meridians or the blood which flows through the blood vessel are hampered. The light is on in the house of the body, but it is dim. The above technique, simple to do once it has been practised, is a way in which every individual can live in a manner which is optimally balanced and in which they have a greater potential for success.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX
Memory Stimulators.
1974 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies :
Airport 1975; Blazing Saddles; The Godfather, Part 2; UFO Target Earth; Chinatown; A Tree Grows in Brooklyn; Death Wish; The Parallax View; Butley; That's Entertainment; The Island at the Top of the World; Young Frankenstein; McQ; The Phantom of Liberty; The Apprenticeship of Duddy Kravitz; Daisy Miller; Herbie Rides Again; The Little Prince; The Man with a Golden Gun; Rhinoceros; The California Kid; Black Belt Jones; Death Wish; The Sugarland Express; Mame

General News:

Consumer Price Index: 147.7
Failing USA banks lose $1.571 Billion of depositor's monies.
This total is greater than the accunulated loses of all failing banks between 1967-1973.

1974 - By this year,
The GRAYS begin their Blood Replacement Therapy to recover from a dual plus one combination of lifeform threatening viruses.
Following the introduction of two viruses onto their former planetary home by means of an meteorite impact, they had become infected and noticed a decrease in population. Since the decrease was apparently resulting from a decreased lifespan and a decreased fertility of those infected, it was interpreted to be a "genetic" disease. Unable to bioengineer the required "repair" from the gene pools available on their planet, they decided to go elsewhere. Eventually they arrived at the Earth.
Initially, in 1916, they expected to find the gene they were looking for from amongst the over 6 million Earth-based insect species. Noticing quickly how destructive humans were to the environment and to each other, they determined to set into operation a long-term strategy which would result in the human species annihilating themselves before they destroyed the ecology of the planet entirely - it was hoped. The Insectoids were confident that under almost any circumstance they would be able to regenerate the vitality of the planet and return it to it a more constructive form of management - the insects, under the mentoring of the Insectoid GRAYS. They expected this process to be well advanced by the arrival of their main colony, planned for 1939.

When the main colony arrived, in 1939, and gene transfer and modification experiments could begin, the advance team had been able to skillfully introduce several changes into human history which they believed would enable humans to kill themselves off. They had increased the idolatry and materializm context within the most popular institutionalized religion: Roman Catholicism - it was already high to begin with. They had also initiated a religious war between Roman Catholics, under their deception, and, adherents of Communism, under their deception. They were hopeful that the near future war would rid them of the human menace.
As efforts continued by humans through WWII to develop weapons of greater mass destruction, the GRAY advance force eventually provided several key concepts, telepathically, to American-based researchers - which enabled the completion of the first several designs for practical atomic weapons. It was hoped that these would be produced in massive numbers which could then be used, either directly by choice by humans, or, by way of manipulation, to eradicate humanity. Insects and the GRAYS are largely unaffected by the radiation present from nuclear fallout.

By 1957, humans were still around and the GRAYS began to be thankful for that.
They had surveyed the Earth-based insect gene pool and had not found a genetic bioengineered way to recover from their dual-virus. Various factors, which they now appreciated about humans, encouraged them to investigate the possibility of a gene solution from humans. Unknown to the GRAYS, their dual-virus was passed into the systems of perhaps 3.6 million individuals, whose actions influenced negatively at least another 10 million individuals. The symptoms which most of these humans acquired signified nothing to warrant caution to the GRAYS. They simply interpreted the subtle changes of behaviour in the human subjects as a further confirmation of the destructive quality of humans on most every level of organization and inter-relationship.
Those symptoms were intensifications of human emotional expression.
That is, there was a noted increase in the proportionate expression of pride, hatred, rage, lust, intolerance, addiction, revenge, possessiveness, and despair. A description often applied to such infected people by those they are most often interrelating with is that of "intense." During the period of 1957 to 1974, there was a significant increase in North American society of the following behaviours: medical depression (chronic despair); alcoholism, nicotine addiction and drug abuse; sexual addiction, infidelity, and promiscuity; spousal assault (husband baiting and wife battering); sexual assault including rape, incest and child molestation; mass murders; serial murders; murders of passion; ....
All humans who were abducted by GRAYs for experimentation and accidentally infected would become spiritually challenged to participate in these expressions. Given the opportunity, or searching for the opportunity - those who were sufficiently spiritually weak were driven to act out such intensities. Some would have some spiritual training; many would have almost none. Perhaps 22% of such expressions could be relegated to the influence of the GRAY viruses; the remainder could be explained by already present cultural forces. Unlike the other 88%, the infected persons might experience feelings of confusion and sincere remorse over their acts with a greater likelihood of attempting or considering suicide or of taking on a Jekyl and Hyde behaviour style in which one or more of the above noted behaviours would have its opposite expressed in alternate and specific circumstances. A lust-driven man might go into the priesthood. A depressed person may have become a singer or comedien. A serial murderer may have been regarded by his family as an attentive and loving father and husband. An irritating wife may have been an emotionally smothering mother. Only the very strong-willed and those who were given or otherwise obtained spiritual training and guidance would be able to avoid acting out such biochemically stimulated behaviours. Several of these symptoms will be described in greater detail.

These include emotional depression and an increased sexual drive in addition to a marked tendency for the infected individual to be more alert and capable of clean intellectual activity during the hours of 10:00 P.M. and 6:00 A.M. than during other times of the day. Following 1957, depression would become and remain the leading patient complaint to doctors in the USA. While other factors would contribute to the presence of this symptom - addictive behaviours, hormonal medications, systemic fungal overgrowth (as a side effect of the use of antibiotics, birth control pills, and some drugs), destructive communication patterns, and gender-based role separation, the GRAY dual virus would possible account for 17% of the incidence of chronic depression symptoms. Chronic depression should not be confused with acute and dramatic expressions of depression.
In chronic depression, the individual may find it so difficult to become aware of the state and so easy to acquire a denial of it, that they may experience it for decades, or the rest of their life, without diagnosis. Possible outward symptoms of such a symptom include numerous job changes (3 or more in 10 years, following infection), numerous marriages or serious dating periods followed by divorces or breakups (1 for every 6 to 12 years, or less, following infection), periods of suicidal or paranoid, or mental confusion (nervous breakdown) with few if any repetitions of the same behaviour or apparent challenge. That is, there is behavioural evidence of an underlying sense of loss, interference, or, external control of one's identity. It is as if the individual has a life goal of breaking out of a non-physical jail which they cannot describe and may not consciously be aware of. If energy blocks associated with the trauma of the incident of infection are released, this destructive behavioural trend will reduce considerably.

Similarly, about 10% of USA teenagers would become sexually obsessive in their needs, compared to the average, and, would be greatly spiritually challenged to act out this need. As individuals become infected they begin to have an obsessive number of sexual fantasies. Those who act them out find themselves marrying mates on the basis of social decorum and personal lust - whom they scantly know. Many would later find that lust was not a good basis for marriage and that frequently the attracted partner would tire of, or become annoyed at, the ego-driven object-worship of their bodies; divorce, or serious relationship difficulties, would frequently occur within 6 years of marriage. Sometimes, the higher libido person would request a divorce on the basis that they believed that their spouse no longer loved them because the spouse did not share, and never had, the sexual addiction they acquired following infection.
Alternatively, the higher libido individual could be weak spirited and would compromise the marriage commitment with affairs, sexual assault, or incest. Divorce would then often follow by their spouse. Other situations would arise in which both parties of the couple acknowledged the presence of irreconcilable "sexual" problems and depart consensually. Regardless of the option followed, a great amount of emotional hurt, confusion, sense of betrayal and trauma would follow - which would not have happened without the virus. That is, without the virus there would not have been a marriage, an unsatisfied period of marriage nor a divorce. Other factors had contributed to the increase in and sustainment of divorce rates, yet, perhaps 20% of the divorces enacted were for such reasons. That still represents "hell" for a lot of people. For the GRAYs, it simply confirmed their perception of humans as grossly inferior and unworthy of serious respect.

Equally outstanding as a symptom, though potentially hidden, was the aparent reversal of biological clock for the infected person. Such a person would suddenly become easily able to effectively work long hours after dark. Without the opportunity or awareness to take advantage of this new character trait, one might experience insomnia. Ways in which different individuals could cope with this have included sexual addiction (orgasm encourages relaxation and sleep); becoming a "party hound" - staying out late at night; working overtime constantly; prefering to work a "midnight" shift; writing reports, books, and analyses at overnight.
Those infected individuals who intellectually opposed these trends could have found themselves more sexually coercive and demanding; tending towards expressions of anxiety and distraction during the day; tending to be argumentative. In many situations, communication problems could develop between the infected spouse and one that was not. This "clock" change complicated GRAY follow-up monitoring strategies. With most abductions and re-abductions occuring during the night, a consciously aware individual would have the opportunity to become more aware of lapses of time in their nightly activities. Usually, these would go unnoticed and they would be infrequent. But why the change?

One of the two viruses is quite susceptible to the influence of cosmic rays.
Exposed to even the minute presence of cosmic rays at the surface of the Earth, relative to that in outer space, this virus is influenced to grow!. Whenever the surface of the Earth is in the Earth's shadow relative to the Sun, the solar wind and cosmic ray presence cease to flow toward that part of the Earth's surface. In that absence, this virus hybernates and removes the energy-robbing and nerve relaxing influence which it exerts at other times. Now, in the human body, the organs and endocrine systems come alive as one would ordinarily expect during the day. Once the cycle begins, it tends to intensify to a higher than normal (uninfluenced) level.
Greater sexual, emotional, spiritual and intellectual activity becomes possible AFTER DARK, and, if utilized, will tend to result in a greater "relaxation" of all these capabilities during the day due to partial exhaustion and viral influence. Placing the infected person deep underwater (submarines, SCUBA, or deep diving), deep underground (deep mining), or within a 3/4" lead shielded room, will encourage will encourage a harmonization of constructive activities. Unfortunately, none of these environments are currently multi-gender shared by humans - so constructive relationship development is hindered.

Now, in 1974, the GRAYS had discovered that their illness was not genetic; it was the result of a dual-virus, which had now been supplemented by a third. They had tried gene transfers from Earth-based insects (1939-1957) and gene transfers from humans (1957-1974) without success. They have now, humbly, learned from human research about viruses. Remember, the GRAYS come from a planet which had no viruses except those they acquired following a meteor impact and virus-seeding incident. In the interim (1939-1974) their "genetic" experimentation has been both crude in safety precautions and sophisticated in technical procedure: gene introduction and either replacement or exchange into their own reproductive cells. This experimentation has spawned a new virus, transferred by blood (not HIV!): the result of a bioengineering accident.
Symptoms have now been extended beyond those of the original dual-virus (transmitted reproductively and through bioengineering sampling) to include an accelerated deterioration of the life system of the infected. This is subtely different from the shortened lifespan associated with the dual-virus. This progressive deterioration, once triggered, spreads rapidly, and, without an antidote, can result in the death of an infected GRAY within 10 days. No infected humans have yet died from the GRAY-Three virus (G3V). At this point, the triggering mechanism is unknown - without which the virus appears to remain dormant in the GRAYs. It is not known if there is a triggering mechanism in humans.

With almost a sense of panic, the GRAYS have resorted to dramatic, yet effective measures in coping with such an infection. They have quickly developed the technical capability to completely replace the blood (which is not identical to that of humans) from the body of an infected GRAY with that from a healthy GRAY. Necessarily, at this stage, the process effectively results in a form of eugenic cannibalism. A member of an elite becomes privy to the benefits and source individuals are chosen for "state experimentation" - with the result being their death. That is, the sick are revitalized by a total replacement of their blood with the healthy life-sustaining fluid from a healthy donor. Soon the technology will be utilized to as effectively drain blood from Earth-based mammals which have blood which is similar to that of humans (cattle).
Humans are quickly discounted from such use at this point because the finding of such corpses is expected to raise an unwanted alarm from human governments. While only a small amount of such blood is required for each antibody producing experiment, the effort in extracting small amounts from cattle at this time is considered impractical in the awareness of the technology available. If 1000 litres of blood will be required to complete the experimentaion successfully and produce the required amount of vaccine, why extend the process of gathering and risk sightings by only gathering 40 ml from each animal. Survival of the animal is not a concern. It is time which is of the essence. It is only a matter of time, to the GRAYs.

Further contact with and experimentation with human subjects will eventually lead to a greater transfer of the third virus (G3V) to humans also. After all, blood removal from humans, in small amounts, for the purpose of growing cultures - by the nature of the procedures followed - will present the danger of blood transfer of the virus. Meanwhile, the destructive cultural influence of contact with the GRAYs, though largely unintentional, is evident.

1974 - During the year,
50 Kilograms of Plutonium disappear in Argentina.
The supercritical mass for Plutonium, required to build a 20-megaton nuclear weapon, is defined as 35.2 pounds (16 kgs). This quantity can be reduced to 22 pounds (10 kg) by combining it with the more common U-235 refined uranium ore metal. If used efficiently, this stolen quantity could be used to build five 20-megaton nuclear weapons which represent at least 5 times as much explosive power as was used during all of WWII. Four similar yet not as public disappearances have occurred before this date.

1974 - Between January 22 - 28,
The U.S.A. Joint Committee on Atomic Energy held hearings into the safety of nuclear power reactors in the U.S.A.
The representative of "Westinghouse Electric Corporation", whose product is the pressurized water reactor, a descendent of the submarine reactor, testified that their nuclear plants had performed better than their fossil-fueled plants for the years 1960 - 1970. Westinghouse built 16 reactors between 1960 and 1974. At the time of the hearing, Westinghouse reported that it had orders for 115 pressurized-water plants to supply more than 100,000 megawatts of electric power.
The rules of the AEC permit a per reactor release of up to 5 curie per year.
In 33 years of operation of 8 reactors, Westinghouse reported a release average of 0.09 curies per year.
General Electric which makes the boiling water nuclear reactor, stated that it would be starting up 10 more reactors in 1974; its then 29 operating plants had an accumulated experience of 140 years.

1974 -
American military aid to South Vietnam this year will decrease to $1.1 billion.

1974 -
Monsieur Robert Galley, Minister of Defense for France, grants a broadcasted interview to M. Bourret (the Turin incident), during which M. Galley acknowledges the existence of UFO's and that in 1954 France had set up a secret section devoted to their study within the Department of Defense. Since 1970, UFO research in France has been in the jurisdiction of the Centre National d'Etudes Spatiales. The interview was not mentioned in the British media, although coverage was given almost everywhere else.

1974 -
Pickering Nuclear Energy Generating Plant, Pickering, Ontario, Canada, one of three nuclear fuelled stations operated by Ontario Hydro at that time, and one of the world's largest nuclear power stations at the time, on February 04, was the focus of a UFO flight. A half dozen spheres, described as "balls of light" varying in colour from bright red to almost white, remained in the area for almost 2 hours. They were seen hovering over nearby Lake Ontario. Two of the spheres moved inland to a position over the service centre of the plant. After remaining there motionless for about 30 minutes, they abruptly took off straight up at rocket-like speed.

1974 - On February 8,
Pickering Nuclear Energy Generating Plant, Pickering, Ontario, Canada,one of three nuclear fuelled stations operated by Ontario Hydro at that time, and one of the world's largest nuclear power stations at the time, was the focus of a UFO flight. A dozen spheres, "besieged" the plant for nearly 8 hours! They were described as red, green, yellow and pink, and their movements were described as "floating around, zipping this way and that". Five persons testified to the display.

1974 - During February,
6 NISA (Philippine National Bureau of Intelligence) agents were discovered by the USA FBI to have been sent to Los Angeles, California to watch former political prisoner, Sergio Osmena, Jr., who had run against Ferdinand Marcos in the 1969 Presidential election. The 6 were part of 19 NISA agents sent to the USA in May, 1973, as bodyguards for Imee Marcos, when she attended Princeton University. General Ver also had an NISA agent in Chicago to maintain liaison with Tony Accardo, underworld godfather in America. General Ver himself once travelled to Chicago to arrange for the hiring of a hitman to assassinate Paul Manglapus, an exiled opposition leader. The United States took a "friendly" attitude towards agents from any "white-hat" country. If you were Communist or highly socialist, you were "black-hat" and enemy; anyone else was a white-hat: that included Chile, Philippines, Iran. In the USA, some people were more free than others.

1974 - On February 13,
An Almas (Wild Man) is encountered by a shepherd named Musai in the mountains of Ulegei province in southwest Mongolia. His description matches that of other eye-witnesses:
"... half men and half beasts with reddish-black hair. No one has ever heard them speak. Almas are usually seen at dawn or dusk and are believed to live on roots, leaves, grass and other vegetation. They prefer to stay in places far away from man, in mountains, for instance."

1974 - By April,
The potential for marketing to children in America had been quoted of an adman in "Advertising Age" as follows:
"If you truly want big sales, you will use the child as your assistant salesman.
He sells, he nags, until he breaks down the sales resistance of his mother or father."
The average youngster saw more than 20,000 commercials a year.
Corporations spent nearly a half-billion dollars on those commercials.
Billions in profits were at stake. And most marketers thought they were now learning how to get their money's worth. An economist for the Federal Communications Commission said: "Children's programming is the most profitable area of television programming."

Advertisers were focusing in particular on one group: Children, from the age of three up. Children were consuming $75 billion worth of goods and services in the USA alone. In a book called The Youth Market two advertising executives reported a survey of mothers. How much more did the mothers buy in the supermarket as a result of urgings from their children to buy specific products or brands? The responses indicated that for USA mothers as a whole, the cost would come close to $4 billion a year, in addition to their grocery bills.

1974 - By May,
World consumption of Titanium was proportionately increasing for non-military applications over that of military uses.
Reductions in missile and nuclear weapons programs were minor, as were those of the space programs. Commercial applications including the use of titanium dioxide as a substitute for toxic lead as a white pigment in paints and other materials as well as an increasing use of titanium in chemical production processes and nuclear reactor components were on the rise.
Consideration of electrical and electronic positive characteristics of the metal encouraged the experimental and successful use of titanium and its alloys in transistors and integrated circuits (IC's).

1974 - By May,
"Silencers, An exact reproduction of the Frankford Arsenal Report, R-1896" had been published by Paladin Press, of Boulder, Colorado, and was freely available for any member of the public to purchase. The following was noted in the Introduction to the 207-page+ book:
"Throughout the history of firearms, gun noise has been of considerable concern to the military. Prior to firing, anticipation of the ear shattering effects tends to make the gunner flinch, resulting in a consequent deterioration of his aim. After firing, the gunner is usually in a state of temporary deafness. To the enemy, gun noise reveals the presence and, often, the location of the firer, thus inviting defensive or offensive reaction. From the above alone it becomes evident that a "silent" weapon is to be found indispensable in covert operations.
Of the various noises associated with firing a conventional small arms weapon, the most significant is the muzzle blast caused by the escape of propellent gases after the projectile exits from the barrel. Hundreds of patents, war and police records, and other literature are witness to the efforts, for nearly a century, to eliminate small arms muzzle blast. Notwithstanding time, effort, and interest, no completely satisfactory silenced weapon has yet been produced."

The remainder of the book outlines the design principles on which silencer construction is based and describes and evaluates 16 types of silencers for a range of calibers of weapons manufactured in a range of weapons exporting countries. The 1966 report concluded that the muzzle blast of all of the silencer-equipped weapons tested was 90 db or higher at 5 metres; the mechanical noise in some of the quieter weapons was in the vicinity of 90 db; "a silenced system ... quieter ... is feasible ... will likely evolve gradually." An extensive technical section of 5 appendices including sample patents to which was added a list of patents and a bibliography completed the book. All of the silencing designs were of a mechanical nature demonstrating the degree of technical awareness of humanity at this point as well as a single-mindedness of approach. Other much more effective non-mechanical methods could have been developed by 1966 and would be eventually.
The question remains: Why would a government concerned for the welfare of its citizens allow the unrestricted circulation and promotion of such a book, the purpose of which is clearly to construct a weapon for murder? In the hands of organized crime or a mentally disoriented individual who had become a psychopath, innocent members of the population could be harmed. American movies and television serials would frequently show organized crime characters using silenced guns which were inaccurate and dramatic in the nature of their construction and their effectiveness. Indeed as the book pointed out, the sounds involved were often muffled, but certainly not silenced. As was also stated regarding a "typical silenced system", the silencer volume was of the order of 20 times that of the gun barrel. This makes the construction of such a device unthinkable for the purpose of target practice or hunting, for the silencer volume greatly obstructs the accurate aim at the target.

1974 - During the year,
The Special Group, an American interagency government committee charged with advising the President was chaired by the President's Special Advisor, Dr. Henry Kissinger. His position and the existence of the group remained unknown to the American legislature until after the resignation of President Nixon and until witnesses were pressed for the specific information while testifying under oath in front of a Senate investigating committee. Other members of the Group at this point included:
Deputy Secretary of Defense, Undersecretary of State for Political Affairs, Director of the CIA, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, Assistant to the President for National Security Affairs, and others.

These persons approved most of the covert intelligence (espionage) activities undertaken by CIA, NSA, and DIA personnel. During the Eisenhower period, it had been known as the 54/12 Group. After Lyndon B. Johnson took the Presidency, the name was changed to the 303 Committee, after the number of the room in which they met at the White House. During Nixon's stay in the White House, the name again changed to the 40 Committee. They often made their decisions on the basis that the closest advisors to the President believed that they knew what the President wanted done - and, that carrying out such activities, illegal and immoral as they might be, without the knowledge of the President - would keep the President from any future legal responsibility. At the same time, members of the committee could use as their legal defense the rationale that they were carrying out what they believed were the wishes of the President. This state of deceptive and illegal activity demonstrates a total lack of confidence of the senior political and military decisionmakers of America in their own form of government. It also risks the surfacing of crucial human weaknesses.
As would be set out by Allen F. Harrison and Robert M. Bramson, Ph.D. in their "Styles of Thinking" in 1982, North American humans tend to rely upon the use of one of 5 decisionmaking and perception ways of reasoning: Analytical, Idealistic, Pragmatic, Realist, and Synthesist. While each "pattern" has relevant occasions for constructive use, and is generally destructive or ineffectual at most other times, most humans tend to rely upon the use of a single style. Since each style has its own context of motivation, predispositions, and concerns - a lack of awareness of such patterns and a lack of understanding and appreciation for them frequently results in misinterpretations and disagreements between persons. One of the most disastrous misinterpretations is that which occurs when a Synthesist thought style individual, who may flippantly say whatever comes to their awareness or whatever they are thinking at the time - states an observation or complaint in a manner understood by a dependent as a command or a wish.

A Synthesist-thinking political leader may, in a time of frustration, blurt out that he or she wishes another person were dead. The non-Synthesist thinking subordinate in a demonstration of allegiance to, reverence for and desire for acceptance from the leader may carry out the murder in complete expectation of a reward. When the Synthesist-thinking leader finds out what has happened he or she is dismayed that anyone would have believed that they sincerely meant what they uttered and horrified that someone would actually carry out the murder for any reason. The reality is that a person is dead.

The foundation of that death lies in the poor communication skills and the authority structure of the individuals and in which the individuals live out their lives. The responsibility lies with the human civilization, the purpose for which is to better prepare and equip individuals within the culture so that mistakes of this nature do not occur. In either a spiritually or a reptilian reaction-habit society such errors are NEVER made. These two are Neither opposites or the same: they are simply different from emotional need-based and rational social norm-based civilizations.

1974 - On May 11,
An article on suicides appeared in a Canadian national newspaper, "The Toronto Star".
It was written by Sidney Katz, a Star staff writer. In it the following was set out:
"... psychologist Michael Jacobs (head of the "Crisis Intervention Unit" of the Toronto East General Hospital), says confidently, 'Most suicides can be prevented.' He bases his opinion on the treatment of some 3,000 would-be suicides, most of them young, during the past 2-1/2 years. 'To my knowledge, only one of them is now dead.' ...
Self-destruction has escalated to the position of number two killer in Canada - after traffic accidents - of persons between 15 and 30. In Metro (Toronto), the suicide rate has increased by 300 per cent in 10 years. ... says Jacobs, 'The majority are young people who are temporarily defeated by life. They feel like losers. They see themselves as permanently trapped in a desperate situation. They see no solution to their personal dilemma except death.'

... She had felt a great deal of anger towards her parents and boyfriend but had never been able to say anything 'nasty' to anyone. ... About 70 percent of (reported) would-be suicides are female. 'The community is full of depressed women. Many of them are housewives, slaving away at home without a break. They grow discouraged because of their lack of independence. The feeling of entrapment grows. The doctors and therapist they seek out for help don't seem to understand their desperate plight'.
A significant number of suicide attempts are made by teenage daughters of recent immigrants to Canada. They find themselves at (an impasse) with their parents on many issues .... 'The most frequent underlying cause of suicide is family and interpersonal stresses.' Some of the family stresses which pre-date the suicide attempt (include) ... incest. ...

The warning signs ... high school drop-outs ... who leave school without good reason ... Young people committed to jail ... 'smiling depressions' - these are patients who mask their deep and chronic misery by excessive smiling, joking and laughter. ... revealing phrases used by the potential suicide are: 'I'm tired of living. What's the point of going on? I'd be better off dead, I'm always a loser, What use am I to anyone?' ...
- Pills that can kill - tranquilizers and various types of sedatives, pain killers and sleeping potions - ... 'Doctors prescribe them too freely and drug companies promote them too vigorously. In many homes there are large quantities of pills around which makes it too easy and convenient for the person who wants to poison himself.'"

The reporting of suicide varies from human culture to human culture.
In North America, reports of suicides may be disguised as "accidents" in police reports and statistics in order to safeguard the relatives from shame and embarrassment, particularly if the family is socially prominent and/or is of moderate or better income. As many as 50% of North American serious traffic accidents involve drivers who have been drinking alcohol. Knowingly drinking and driving is similar to having a death wish. The reality, however, is that the drinking driver often receives less fatal injuries than the other persons involved due to his or her drug-induced relaxed state at the time of the accident.

Difficulties in both acknowledging and coping constructively with negative emotions is also a problem in many human cultures which leads to traumatic block accumulation, addictions, abusive behaviours, guilt accumulations, depression. All of these promote the above described form of suicide. A human culture follows norms, that is, specified patterns of attitude, belief, communication, and activity as a matter of training and imprinting. Present at the habit-non-conscious state, such "norms" are inaccessible to acknowledgement and change unless confronted.
Other motivations used by humans include revenge, pride, and concern for others.
The motivation of revenge is frequently expressed as an egotistical reaction to the authoritarian decisions of others or as an egoic reinforcement of a personal obsession. Taking one's life because of rejection by the object of one's love is an expression of the individual's inability to acknowledge the individuality and choices of another person, and, the inability to acknowledge or control the obsessiveness of one's own feelings and actions. In these situations, notes are sometimes left by the suicidal persons complaining of their lack of self-worth, their dependence upon the lost object of their desire, or, victimizing the lost object of their desire as responsible for their suicidal decision. It is a spiritual sickness in those human societies which romanticize such actions as the act of passionate lovers and revere such situations while hypocritically shying away from or denying real examples of it.

Pride, as a cultural obsession, is part of the Japanese culture and numerous subcultures including naval officers and gang leaders. Suicide, in these situations becomes a way of "saving face", of proving one's honour, of demonstrating one's commitment. In Japanese culture there is an acceptance that the demands of the state, in terms of correctness and moral right, will sometimes be at odds with those of the human individual. It may be right for the state to demand that you surrender your brother for crimes he has committed against the state. Still, you may see your brother as having enacted an individual religious moral right in his refusing to follow the demands of the state to execute innocent people. The culture allows you to maintain a stand of "honour" in which you do neither turn in your brother nor refuse the demands of the state. It is ritual suicide - in which you simply extract yourself from the equation.
In a similar way, as a Captain of a sinking ship, your employer and the owner of the ship hold you personally responsible for the safety of their ship and its cargo. Loss of same will be lodged against you as shame for incompetence and guilt for loss. Your survival and its loss condemns you to this lifelong penalty by the norms of marine activities. If, however, you die with the ship, no one can contest that you did the most any person could do to save the ship and its cargo. You are excused and your "honour" is maintained.

Concern for others is also a form of suicide regularly encouraged by human societies.
Sacrifice of one's self for the survival of many is applauded in many cultures as heroism and past examples are regularly displayed as models to new entries to the society. Such "heroes" take many forms: war survivors, competition winners, game professionals, business magnates, accident victims, emergency personnel. Often these "suicide" prone persons may survive, yet they bear scars - physical, emotional, or trauma based. They have been assessed as having taken the supreme life risk in order to save the lives of many others. Whether the action was truly taken out of desperation, out of concern for others, or, out of terror and fear and the desire to escape through death - is seldom explored. Usually the political system involved is only concerned in furthering its own power by "interpreting" the actions of this individual as a demonstration of support for their leadership.
Another, and more direct and true expression of concern for others expressed through surrender of one's own life is that of the death of elderly or sick individuals in primitive structured societies living in challenging environments. It has been a practice, amongst some tribes and bands, for the sick and elderly to voluntarily withdraw themselves from the rest of the group and die at the mercy of freezing weather or lack of food and care. Those doing so have acknowledged that under the fragile relationship which the group holds with survival, the added strain of a sick or non-contributing member could endanger the lives of all. They also acknowledge that the band would never send them away nor hold them responsible for any added burden. The accepted choice, under such circumstances, like in most of the above situations, is for the person in question to do the "right thing". The only right rational alternative may be judged to be removal of one's own burden from the struggles which friends and relatives must endure. This rationale is also used in situations in which the person's self-esteem is very low. The difference is that in the latter the person is using such a rationale as an excuse for their own mental confusion; in the former, the older person is using the rationale as a constructive solution to a real challenge, made with the full awareness of the consequences.

Suicide, in ALL of its forms, is an expression of separation of the human from the spiritual aspects of life. It may be imprinted by cultural example by a materialistic and authoritarian political entity, or, by environmental conditions enhanced by long-term human inabilities to maintain harmony with the world they have been placed in. Such disharmony has led to a size and density of population which both squanders and fights over available resources, while destroying others.

1974 - During the year,
The influence of Vitamin E on health was demonstrated when Lester Packer of the University of California, Berkeley, and James R. Smith of the USA Veterans Administration Hospital in Martinez released a report of their findings. Extending the work of Hayflick on cell division, the two physiologists found that by adding Vitamin E to a culture of human embryonic cells, 120 divisions were attained. Normal divisions had stopped after about 50 doublings. Vitamin E protected the living cells against damage from chemicals known as oxidants, such as air pollution.
This research developed a focus on the study of free-radical reactions and the use of Vitamin E and other inhibitors in preserving good health and prolonging longevity. Average male mice fed a single inhibitor, experienced an increase of 40% in their average life expectancy.

1974 - On June 25,
Near St. Cyrille, Que. - a domed, disc-shaped object with a red-and-white light atop the dome and an orange rim with white lights that circle the perimeter is observed landing with the occupants attempting to communicate before leaving.

1974 - During the year,
The first "crop circles" in Canada were reported in Langenburg, Saskatchewan.
Over the next 16 years 20 more circles would be reported in Saskatchewan and Alberta. Frequently, a pattern of flattened grain would be found consisting of exact circle connected by straight pathways in the middle of a field. There would be no evidence of tracks to the sites and the circles might range in size from 70 feet in diameter to 2 feet wide. By 1991, thousands of examples would have been found in North America, Britain and Australia. No scientific explanation would have been found.

1974 -
A grasshopper plague in the Sahel region of Africa (Mali, Guinea Bissau, Burkina Faso, Chad, Gambia, Mauritania, Niger, Senegal and Cape Verde) becomes the worst ever recorded. 20 to 30% of the crops, representing millions of tons of food grains are lost. Farmers have to replant three or four times to get a crop and others give up altogether either from despair or lack of seed grain.

1974 -
The "Commodities Futures Trading Commission" (CFTC) is created by the USA Congress as an independent federal agency to regulate the commodities futures market. Traders engaged in the commodities markets are required to register with the CFTC. The CFTC has the authority to set margin requirements, regulate options contracts in commodities, and supervise registered futures commission merchants. A considerable amount of insider trading, excessive margin losses and bankruptcies and a generally inadequate capitalization of futures had led to the increased regulation. Too many people were trying to get rich quick with too little money and too much manipulation and exploitation of the market.

1974 - By August,
The largest undersea craft humanly constructed became the newly commissioned "Delta I Class" Soviet Submarine.
At 11,750 tons, the Delta I introduced intercontinental missile ranges to Soviet submariners, permitting them to operate in broad ocean areas while targeting USA cities. It carried 12 missiles with a range of 4,200 nautical miles (7,800 km). It would be the last SSBN constructed at the Komsomol'sk shipyards, as subsequent submarines were too large for launching from there. 18 would be constructed by 1977. Then, 4 still larger Delta II Class submarines, carrying 16 missiles each would be built.
The initial armament was an RSM-50 (SS-N-18 Stingray) intercontinental ballistic missile with a MIRV (multiple independently targeted re-entry vehicles) warhead. The nuclear warhead explosive force was equal to 450 kilotons, usually divided into two 200 KT+ warhead. Remember that the nuclear weapons which were dropped on Nagasaki and Hiroshima were about 18 KT. They had totally destroyed moderately sized cities. These were 10 times larger! - each. These were quickly upgraded to three "bomblets" with ever longer ranges. Now, missiles launched from submarines in both Arctic and North Pacific waters could strike Washington, D.C., and all major population centres as well as all USA ICBM silos. This provided a superior strategy against the USA for these submarines could remain in a port of in the protection of Arctic waters.

1974 - On August 8,
Richard Nixon became the first U.S.A. President to resign.
He admitted mistakes in judgement but denied any wrongdoing.
Gerald Ford became the new president, and pardoned Nixon for any illegal acts he might have committed while in office. After it was discovered in 1973 that the White House conversations had been recorded, a Senate committee had requested that the president turn over his tapes to the committee. Under continued pressure from public opinion, the Senate Watergate Committee, and the Watergate grand jury, Nixon finally released edited transcripts of his taped conversation with aides about the Watergate break-in. Although there was no direct evidence to show that the president shared in the cover-up of the involvement of Erhlichman, Haldeman, and Attorney General John Mitchell in the plan carried out by McCord and the others, the transcripts did suggest that the president was involved.
The Judiciary Committee of the House of Representatives then began to consider the impeachment of the president. And the Supreme Court ordered Nixon to release all tapes that might relate to the Watergate affair. On August 5, 1974, Nixon released tapes showing that he had participated in the cover-up in the summer of 1972. His remaining White House advisers and the Republican leaders of the House and Senate told him that he must resign. He did so on August 8.

1974 - During August,
Eduard Meier, experienced his first exposure to the landing of a Pleiadian beamship, not far from Hinwil, Switzerland.
It remained for an hour and a quarter. Almost 5 years later, Lee Elders and Tom Welch, UFO investigators, would test the site for gamma radiation from the presence of a high electromagnetic field. They would find readings in the grass of the surrounding area which measured a low .00 to .05. Each time a stronger reading appeared on the dial, they marked the spot on the ground. But before they had finished taking readings in all the areas, they noticed that the spots marked on the ground were beginning to form roughly the shape of a circle. Inside the circle the radiation level consistently measured .2, roughly 400% higher than the background measurements. And the readings inside the circle pulsated.

"It didn't go up and hang. It went up like this and then down a bit, and then back up, back down a bit. We didn't expect this." In diameter, the circle measured roughly 21 feet. The physicist who had provided the equipment was surprised when he heard of the readings. The physicist told Welch that he and others had been using the equipment for about 10 years and it had always read accurately. He noted that the readings were significant because they were more than 100% above the background. The physicist explained that "what would be required to cause such gamma radiation detection - an unnatural source strong enough to change the electromagnetic nature of every molecule where the readings were obtained". Like a paper clip that has been magnetized, articles near a strong electromagnetic field would acquire a "memory" of that force.

1974 - During the year,
"The Bermuda Triangle", a bestseller book by Charles Berlitz was published.
Both this book and a 1979 edition of The Philadelphia Experiment, by William L. Moore and Charles Berlitz, popularized the letters and story of Carlos Miguel Allende (Carl Allen) which had first been sent to author Morris K. Jessup, in 1955. They built on the sensationalistic cover story published in 1968 in New UFO Breakthrough , which had declared that "Our concept and understanding of flying saucers are totally wrong! So say the bizarre and terrifying ALLENDE LETTERS." Reference had also been made to the letters in a magazine format anthology.
What was largely unknown and unavailable at the time, was the fact that "Allen" had telephoned Jim and Carol Lorenzen, in 1969, and admitted to them that his letters were a hoax. There were valid reasons for Allende doing this in an effort to ease his troubled mind and try and leave the incident behind. The possibility of actually finally being taken seriously also expanded the feelings of paranoia which were a normal response from the degree of horror and trauma experienced at the time of the incident. He was now believing that full media disclosure could lead to his being targeted for assassination by either the US Navy or by some extraterrestrial race.
Sceptics from their detached scientific attitude and from the many hoaxes and misunderstood sightings which they knew of, together with the fact that the USAF investigators had consistently conveyed to them disinformation and an attitude of disbelief, and that the CIA had recruited members into the Lorenzen's APRO for the purpose of discreditation and sabotage of UFO reports - the Lorenzens had already made a judgement on the "Philadelphia Experiment" and expressed little interest in Allen. While Allen called the letters "false ... the craziest pack of lies I ever wrote," he would later, after seeing a rise in apparently sincere interest in the media, say that his confession was a crazy pack of lies.

1974 - By September,
Commentary advocating a military takeover of the Persian Gulf had appeared in "Harper's magazine" and other American mass media in reaction to the oil shock of 1973-74. James Atkins was USA ambassador in Jeddah, Saudi Arabia, at the time, and expressed his disapproval officially over the cynicism and immorality of the suggestion - further stating that anyone who would consider such an alternative seriously "was a madman, a criminal, or a Soviet agent." Henry Kissinger, then USA Secretary of State, thought otherwise and Atkin's career in the foreign service was shortly thereafter terminated. The potential payback for USA oil interests were enormous; Atkins wrote:
"Only the Spanish conquest of the New World was so richly rewarded."

1974 -
A popular movie for the year was "Death Wish".
The story portrays the reactions of a middle-aged businessman in New York whose family is attacked by a group of young adult males who rape his wife and daughter and kill his wife. While visiting another state, the hero, an architect named Paul Kersey, views a wild west entertainment re-enactment of an attempted robbery in which all of the perpetrators are cleanly disposed of by the guns of the righteous. Encouraged further by a local, Kersey allows his rage to turn his actions into vigilantism against the perpetrators of the crime against his family. In the process, Kersey magnifies his expression of rage to that of a killer hunting for prey in which the prey are attracted by entrapment, or may be petty criminals. At risk to his own life, Kersey seeks out and kills anyone who is foolish enough to try and commit any crime. His successes are praised in the media, the regional crime rate decreases, the police become concerned, and, on the point of being charged by the police - Kersey cools his rage.
The writer of the story originally intended for his audience to understand the rage of the hero as potentially as destructive as the original crime against his family. Entrapment may push a challenged individual over the line into the role of criminal; thus, an otherwise innocent person may be shot and killed after being given the confidence to try and commit the crime. In addition, is death a relevant sentence for attempted theft or for threatening or harassment? Spiritually, it is not. The American public voted otherwise with their attendance. Four more "Death Wish" movies would be made (1982, 1985, 1987, 1994) to promote this form of revenge killing and acting out of frustration. The result would become increased public paranoia about their personal security, an increasing dependency of the public on armed self-protection, and an increasing lack of confidence in the American justice system. The producers were only concerned with satisfying the public for a profit. The government was uninterested in regulating a billion dollar industry. Few civic leaders, educators or religious groups offered either criticism of the strategy or more spiritual means for coping with it.

1974 - By late September,
"A Book of Five Rings", by Miyamoto Musashi of Japan was published for the first time in North America.
American business was clearly losing its customers and profits to Japanese entrepreneurs and, in desperation, American business leaders were ready to consider whatever might be a rationale behind the Japanese success. Musashi had written Rings in 1645 as a Japanese business equivalent to the Chinese military strategy, "The Art of War" by Sun Tzu, written many centuries earlier.
The "Rings" are actually 5 "Ways" or strategies which are partial borrowings from Confucianism, Buddhism, and Shintoism. A renown warrior, Musashi is considered to have written the advice for any situation in which planning and tactics are desirable. In brief, these are some of its points:

In "The Water Book", methods of victory are explained in the manner of single-opponent combat.
The reader is cautioned that the words of strategy must be understood entirely for any deviation will lead one to fall into bad ways. Maintain a spiritual bearing of determination though calm ... not recklessly, ... unbiased. ... An elevated spirit is weak and a low spirit is weak. Do not let the enemy see your spirit. ... With your spirit open and unrestricted, look at things from a high point of view. You must cultivate your wisdom and spirit. Polish your wisdom: learn public justice, distinguish between good and evil, study the Ways of different arts one by one. When you cannot be deceived by men you will have realized the wisdom of strategy. The remainder of the book describes a variety of stances and sword movements. Diligent practice of each until they are automatic responses is mandated.
In "The Fire Book", strategy is portrayed as fighting as fire.

1974 - By the fall, ???
The "Glomar Explorer" had found the submerged hull of a USSR Golf II class nuclear missile submarine intact, and had tried to lift it to the surface. At about 5000 feet of depth (the submarine had been at a resting depth of 16,000 feet), the submarine broke in half, with the rear section sinking again. The forward section was recovered and taken to California. Two nuclear torpedoes were recovered and reverse engineered. The bodies of 6 crew were found in the hull, including the nuclear-weapons officer. He had kept a detailed journal of his training and assignments, and this was salvaged also. It gave defense analyst a wealth of information about Soviet naval nuclear-systems operations and procedures. The cost of the operation was $70 million.
The operation was called "Project Jennifer".
Under the direction of the CIA Directorate of Science and Technology, "Hughes Tool Company", in association with another Hughes company, Summa Corporation, was commissioned to design a recovery ship that could be operated as part of the well-established Glomar Marine Corporation's fleet. Howard Hughes took a personal interest in the commission, it has been said. His companies had been used in the past by the CIA for contract work. The design completed, a proposal was submitted for a $30 million construction of the "Glomar Explorer", a 36,000-ton, self-stabilizing, deep-sea drilling ship which would also be the mother ship for a deep-sea exploration vehicle called the "Hughes Mining Barge" 1 (HMB 1). The plans were accepted, and the ship was constructed, eventually reaching a total price of $70 million. Glomar Marine and Summa Corporation publicized the "Glomar Explorer" as a deep-sea mining/drilling/exploration ship intended to search the Pacific Ocean bed for minerals, oil, and precious metals. It completed its successful sea trials in the spring of 1974.
Just off the coast of Santa Catalina island in southern California, the HMB was taken aboard through the open-and-close hull of the ship. From there, the Glomar Explorer sailed directly to the area where the Golf II submarine had sunk. The HMB went down and its television cameras soon revealed the submarine intact. It was suspected that a hydrogen gas leak had been ignited by heat from the engine exhaust system and the resulting explosion had caused the sinking. The first press story leaked out to the public through the "Los Angeles Times" on February 7, 1975. Much of their information had come from the Los Angeles Police Department, some of whose members had been briefed following a burglary of "Summa Corporation's" Los Angeles headquarters in which documents about Project Jennifer had been stolen.

1974 - By October,
Saddam Hussein, leader of Iraq, had met with Idriss, the son of Mullah Mustafa Barzani (the Kurdish leader).
Barzani had come to ask Hussein to postpone implementation of autonomy in Iraqi Kurdistan, which had been agreed on March 11, 1970.
Hussein replied: "We are determined to fulfil our obligation.
You also have to stick to your agreement."

1974 - Between 1974 and 1979, ???
Panagiotis Takis (Taki) Veliotis and James Gilliland would receive $2.55 million in bribes from Gerald Lee, chairman of Frigitemp Corp., New York City, and George Davis, Vice-President of Frigitemp. In return, Frigitemp received subcontracts from General Dynamics Corp. (the Earth's largest contractor) for insulation and other work on 10 liquid natural gas tankers built at the General Dynamic's Quincy shipbuilding division near Boston, Massachusetts.
During 1973, Davis, who had extensive business dealings in Canada's shipbuilding industry, told Frigitemp's directors that the firm would win subcontracts worth many millions if it made "sizable, undisclosed commission payments, or kickbacks." The payments allegedly amounted to 10% of the contracts' value, more than $50 million. Frigitemp was allowed to recover the kickbacks by overcharging General Dynamics for work. General Dynamics passed the increased costs on to the American taxpayer in the manner which defense industries do - by including the costs in either "black" or confidential programs not open to audit for reasons of "national security."

Davis and Lee set up and used more than 10 companies, including 5 with Quebec Province addresses
- Fintracon International Ltd., - Brading Equipment Sales Ltd., - Crygenic Insulation Co. Ltd., - Mamoni Shipping Ltd., - Joiner Systems of Canada Ltd.

Frigitemp Corp, managed by Davis and Lee, allegedly retained these companies to provide consulting services on the contracts Veliotis awarded to Frigitemp. No such services were ever provided, yet Frigitemp sent purchase orders and paid invoices, creating a cash fund from which payments to Veliotis and Gilliland were then transferred, often via the Bank of Nova Scotia in Grand Cayman Island. The cash transactions were confirmed by credit memos sent by mail; in some instances, cash was delivered by courier.
Lee and Davis, using dummy companies, fraudulent purchase orders and invoices, Grand Cayman Island bank accounts and satchels of cash - they paid $1.35 million to Veliotis, president and general manager of Davie Shipbuilding Ltd. of Levis, Quebec, Canada, and $1.2 million to Gilliland, an associate. Most of the money was routed through Canada, using Canadian banks, Canadian companies and Canadian couriers. The cash ended up in accounts opened by Veliotis and his second wife, Paulette, and Gilliland and his wife, Betty, at the Union Bank of Switzerland in Lausanne. Davis and Lee kept Swiss accounts also. A charge of extortion of US $2.7 million from the General Dynamics subcontractor, against the self-assured Veliotis and his associate Gilliland, would be brought by a USA Federal grand jury in September, 1983.

Gerald Lee would admit in an April 1983 courtroom hearing that he and another Frigitemp executive discussed hiring "hit men" to murder other corporate officials who they feared would expose the payoffs to government authorities. Lee would admit that considered eliminating the chief financial officer and another division vice-president of Frigitemp Corp. by using a sausage machine or car compactor.
In February, 1979, a month before Frigitemp went bankrupt, Davis set up a new Fort Lauderdale, Florida-based company, IDT Corp. and arranged with Veliotis and Gilliland to have all of Frigitemp's remaining General Dynamics subcontracts transferred to the new firm. Another $1.2 million was transferred to the Swiss accounts of Gilliland and Veliotis after IDT Corp. was formed.

In 1980, General Dynamics Corp. would be under intense pressure in Washington because of cost overruns on the submarine program. After 3 years, the justice department probe would be abandoned: political ramifications from the indictment of General Dynamics, while potentially returning $1.5 billion to the American taxpayer, could see tens of thousands of jobs and the sales volume and profits of America's primary defense contractor slashed.
General Dynamics would be charged with grossly inflating invoices for the construction of more than 18 attack submarines for the USA Navy during the 1970s. Frigitemp's attorneys would also charge, in a USA district court in Wilmington, Delaware, in 1984, that the highest officials of General Dynamics were aware of the fraudulent activities and attempted to cover them up - in part by giving Veliotis a seat on the board of directors in 1980 and by promoting him in 1981 from his position as head of the Electric Boat Division of General Dynamics to executive vice-president.

David Berger, counsel to Frigitemp's bankruptcy trustee, Lawson Bernstein, would charge in court during 1984 that:
"General Dynamics was in on the conspiracy from the beginning. ... General Dynamics either acquiesced in or encouraged the Veliotis/Gilliland extortion scheme."

Few people who knew Veliotis would be surprised when he was charged with receiving bribes: they believed that bribes and kickbacks were standard procedure in the defence-contract industry.

1974 - By October 25,
Ernest Conine, a noted economist, had been quoted as saying:
"Within 10 years, according to a confidential study by the World Bank, this band of small countries (the Middle East OPEC) could have more than $1 trillion on hand - more than enough to buy all of the shares outstanding on the New York Stock Exchange."

Over the next 20 years, Opec members would purchase major shareholdings in some of the largest companies in Europe and take over ownership of North American banks, farmland, real estate and businesses. The capital they used came from the North American participation in the Vietnam War, the Space (military and communications) Race, and, the continued development and expansion of nuclear arsenals. If OPEC wanted to collapse the North American and European economies, could it? - When?

1974 - During late 1974,
In Puerto Rico, phenomena were reported including UFO sightings, animal mutilations and apparitions of the "Blessed Virgin". Statues shed tears and drops of blood, there were mysterious disappearances of people, strange noises and explosions. Large unknown birds, something which looked like a ball of fur or hair that rolled along the ground, humanoids, zombie-like, and ape-like dwarves were all reported in multiples.

1974 - During November,
The reality of the Tayfun (Typhoon) Ballistic Missile Submarine (Project 941) was revealed by Soviet Party Chairman Leonid Brezhnev to USA President Gerald Ford, at their summit meeting in Vladivostok. Brezhnev stated that the new SSBN was a response to the USA Trident submarine program. The first Trident submarine, officially the "Ohio (SSBN 726) class", was completed in late 1981. The first Typhoon would be completed in 1983. It was built at the Severodvinsk complex in the Arctic, which Admiral Rickover declared had "several times the area and facilities of all the U.S. submarine yards combined." Lead-time for both was at least 5 years.
The Typhoon would become the world's largest submarine.
Six were built out of a planned total of 7. The dimensions are 560 feet (171 m.) long, 78 ft 9 in (24 m.) wide, with a draft of 41 ft (12.5 m.). Two nuclear-powered steam turbines produce 45,000 to 80,000 horsepower directed through 2 shafts to 7-bladed propellers to produce a submerged speed of 27 knots. It is seldom intended to surface. It has a crew of 150 persons: the size of a town. Unlike other SSBNs, it has two parallel hulls encased in an outer shell. All units have Surface-to-Air (SAM) missiles for protection against air attack. All are assigned to the Northern Fleet.

The ballistic missiles are fitted between the two hulls, forward of a separate control compartment which is above the parallel hulls. Missiles have been test launched at intervals of 15 seconds. Twenty 3-stage SS-N-20 Sturgeon missiles are the armament. Each missile has 10 independently targeted 100 KT warheads - for a total of a 1,000 KT of nuclear explosive force per missile; 2 megatons per submarine. In general terms that is enough explosive power to completely incinerate 120 cities with populations of over 200,000 people: perhaps 2.5 million dead. And then there would be injured, homeless and sick. And there are 6 Typhoons.
Since each adversary has huge submarines with intercontinental ballistic missiles having multiple warheads, any pre-emptive attack will find the submarines of the adversary surviving, and ready to launch a retaliation. USA Trident submarines carry 24 missiles with 8-100 KT warheads in each: 192 warheads; almost the same degree of destruction. The American Trident Class is considerably smaller, by 1/3rd: designed to be functional rather than as support for a possible colony of human survivors.

1974 - On November 13,
The Amityville Horror began to form when Ronald DeFeo killed 6 members of his family.
It happened at a Dutch colonial style house on Ocean Avenue in Amityville, New York. DeFeo, who had used as his defense that voices within the house had ordered him to carry out the killings, was tried for the murders and convicted and sentenced to serve 6 consecutive life terms in jail.

1974 - On November 21,
Archbishop Marcel Lefebvre, of the Roman Catholic Church, publishes a manifesto castigating the Vatican Council as a "fake"; the Pauline mass as "illegal"; the teachings of the bishops as "in error". With mass media attention, he becomes an international figure. Canonical approval is withdrawn from his seminaries when discussion over a lengthy period with the Pope are unproductive in resolving the differences. Lefebvre eventually will take his mission to the USA, where he will speak widely against the teachings of Vatican II.

1974 - By December,
The site of the International Monetary Fund-World Bank Conference of October, 1976, was chosen to be Manila, Philippines.
President Marcos used the opportunity to his best interests.
He offered incentives to anyone building a hotel for the Conference: duty-free imports of equipment; tax credits on locally purchased materials; the financing services of the government: the Development Bank of the Philippines, the Government Services Insurance System; the Philippine National Bank - all directed to lend up to 75% of building costs - ultimately they had to lend 90 - 100% By early 1975, 14 hotel projects were approved by Tourism Minister Jose Aspiras, Imelda's favorite aide. The other institutions were headed by close associates of either Ferdinand or Imelda.
The loan money was cheap - a 2 year grace period on the principal and an interest rate of 12-14%. Typically, a Marcos associate would borrow $100 million, with government guarantees to build a hotel. He spend, perhaps, $40 million on building the hotel; the remaining $60 million would be put in a Swiss bank account. Of course the hotel was undercapitalized and would go bankrupt, so the government would have to, by its guarantee, assume the obligations. This process happened so often during the Marcos era that the Philippine government ended up controlling nearly 400 corporations, most of which were losing money. Losses by these companies would rise to $3 billion a year, roughly what it cost to operate the entire government.

The cost of the hotels came to half a billion dollars.
The short-term construction projects employed 50,000 workers on rotating shifts.
Imelda's International Convention Centre was ready ahead of time at an inflated cost of $150 million. Only two of the hotels were completed on time. Several of the contractors made so much money from skimming that they packed up their families and emigrated. A few left because of the distaste of the bureaucrat-centred kickback system and their intermediary position of having to persevere quietly while being blamed for slowly progressing work and high costs. When the Conference opened, the delegates were wined and dined and chauffeured around Manila in a fleet of 300 new Mercedes-Benz automobiles. Having their egos flattered with the royal treatment, only one of the bankers wondered as to just how solid the whole enterprise was. The Marcos media machine had mesmerized the others into reverent and proud docility - reverence at the apparent ability for bankers and money to buy a materially progressive society; pride that they were the backbone which allowed it to happen.
Gregorio Votaw, the World Bank's program director for East Asia, saw through Imelda's schemes. He tried to explain that the Bank's concept of urban development was development in place - renovation of existing areas, NOT new construction in new locations with the historical left to continue rotting. Imelda and Ferdinand convinced McNamara for fire him. McNamara, a statistics and theory-on-paper idealist was easily deceived. Like other decisions he had made, his inability to emotionally and spiritually connect with the reality around him made him a part, if not the facilitator, of the abuse of power which, in the reverse of constructive idealism crushed the peasant lower and exalted the master higher.

1974 - Before the end of the year,
Control of the Philippine sugar industry had fallen to the Marcoses and their associates.
Sugar amounted to 25% of all Philippine exports. In their last 10 years in power, the Marcoses diverted more than $1.15 billion from Filipino sugar producers.
Bobby Benedicto had grown up in Negros, the country's sugar center.
Teodoro Benedicto had founded the family fortune there in the late 1800s.
With a small personal army, Teodoro burned out peasant villages, bribed local officials, and amassed an enormous property of 11,200 hectares, the largest in Negros. The Spanish Lands Department ruled that the methods Don Teodoro Benedicto used were criminal and recommended that he be tried in court: he bought off the court. Bobby inherited the fortune and the authoritarian attitude. Studying law at the University of the Philippines, he became a fraternity brother of Ferdinand Marcos. During WWII, when a submarine landed secret agent Jesus Villamor on Negros to organize and intelligence net, Villamor chose Benedicto as his local commander. Villamor was impressed with Benedicto's authoritarian characteristics: emotional detachment, obsessive rationalist, intellectual and analytical, compulsively energetic - all traits of preference in a spy.
After the War, Benedicto was one of Ferdinand's earliest political supporters and his chief fund-raiser of his presidential campaign in 1965. With success, Ferdinand rewarded Benedicto by appointing him president of the Philippine National Bank. Under martial law, only one newspaper, the Daily Express and one radio station - both belonging to Benedicto, were allowed to continue in operation. As Ferdinand's regime seized the assets of rivals, Benedicto was given the Lopez media chain of print, TV, and radio. The Lopez clan was one of the old established sugar barons.

Once the entire sugar industry was under control, sugar exported from the Philippines was stored in Benedicto warehouses, shipped by his tankers, insured by a company he controlled, and financed by California Overseas Bank, a Beverley Hills bank which Ferdinand and Bobby owned jointly. Benedicto awarded the construction contracts on new sugar mills, to receive additional kickbacks estimated at $250 million, which he shared with Ferdinand.
Other friends of Marcos were given contracts to buy and sell sugar.
These commodity traders simply sold the rights to actual traders at a markup, in effect taking a commission from each transaction. This practice cost the industry an additional $205 million from 1975 to 1984 in bureaucratic fees.
Two U.S.-based refineries, Sucrest and Revere, were bought by Imelda Marcos and her family.
Revere was purchased for $11.8 million with Antonio Floirendo fronting for Imelda. Thereafter, the Marcoses could buy raw sugar from Filipino planters at whatever price they chose, have it refined by Revere and Sucrest in the USA, warehouse it until the price was good, then capture the overseas profits. Imelda made millions by underpaying for Philippine sugar. During 1975-1980, Revere refined and sold Philippine sugar paying 2 cents per pound below world market prices. When other USA refiners complained a USA Congressional investigation followed. A special arrangement between Benedicto and Revere cost the Philippine sugar industry $110 million by 1980.

Task Force Kanlaon, a Constabulary unit, was responsible for crushing wage and labour disputes in Benedicto's Negro district. Benedicto saw to it that sugar profits purchased the trucks of the Task Force and paid for their fuel and expenses. In the alter on the dashboard of each truck, there was a photo of Mr. & Mrs. Benedicto, the benefactor of the officers. The 431,000 sugar workers in the Philippines were destitute before Marcos and Benedicto took control of the sugar industry; afterwards cane workers were paid less than a dollar a day wage for a longer than 10 hour day. Planters, part of the old Catholic colonial paternalistic co-dependent hierarchy, abolished social services, cut payrolls, and forced labourers to pay old debts undertaken during periods of illness. By 1986, after 20 years of Marcos domination, most Filipino sugar workers would receive less than 80 cents a day, in pesos that had lost 50% of its buying power; that is, they earned 1/3 of what they had in 1940. While the Marcoses and their associates were living in gaudy luxury with millions of dollars - individually - in tax-free havens, 750,000 children were suffering from malnutrition, existing on meagre rations of sweet potato and cassava, with hundreds of them going blind and tens of thousands more becoming brain damaged.
Wealthy Eduardo Cojuangco, a civilian member of the Rolex-12, also managed to increase his sugarcane holdings with 2,000 more hectares in Negros and 5,000 in Mindaneo. As a condition of purchase, he required the eviction of all workers living on the land. Not about to leave such actions to a slow government bureaucracy, or enter into a circus of bribes, Cojuangco built a private army of 5,000 mercenaries armed with M-16 assault rifles, Uzis machine guns, and Galil assault rifles, which can only be purchased in bulk with Israeli government approval. Cojuangco's army was trained on Palawan by Israeli commandos, also with the approval of Israel. The American White House and CIA had negotiated a barter: in return for training Cojuangco's army, the Israelis would receive the newest military technology. With new (military) employment opportunities and a new military attitude in-group, Cojuangco built a behind-the-scenes association with Filipino military officers, providing them discretely with financial favours.

While all this was happening, the American public, who were responsible for the Marcos regime through their interference, model of political deception, and lack of self-responsibility - were enjoying an economic boom contributed to by massive military investment in Southeast Asia assisted by the sanction of a brutal and greedy dictatorship which American politicians and businessmen were in turn willing to sanction. The American public, and humans in most industrialized countries - were doing what they had been imprinted and taught to do: do as your told; respect your self-appointed human authorities; resolve your anxieties in self-obsession; resolve your conflicts in denial; worship material wealth and social acceptance. What would you think-feel-expect of humans, if you were a visiting spaceperson from a highly spiritual culture in which there was total peace; lack of physical need; stimulating self-actualization; trusting and empathic "mental" communication; a reverence for God, the universe, all life?

1974 - During the year,
"Ground Saucer Watch" (GSW), of Phoenix, Arizona, began analyzing photographs of alleged UFO sightings.
Over the next 5 years they would receive about 500 photographs from around the world for analysis.
GSW performed none of the alleged computer work involved in their analysis.
They sent all photographs to a company in California. There, technicians entered them into a computer by taking another picture with an inexpensive video camera, and applied basic software programs to enhance the photographs with bright colours. Then they took another picture, off the computer video display and sent these pictures back to GSW to be studied with the naked eye. By then the information in the original photograph had been, potentially, greatly distorted. There had been no structured approach. There could have been dirt on any of the camera lenses. The angle of light on the photo might have provided surface reflection from the gloss on the picture. Such an unprofessional approach resulted in haphazard conclusions, usually and predictedly, in the negative.
In just one case, involving 2 photos from a Calgary, Alberta observer, taken on the same roll of film, sent separately - one by himself and one through an intermediary - GSW declared one photo "genuine" publicly, and, concluded that the second "depicts the crudest attempt at a hoax that we have ever seen." GSW effectively deceived the public for this 5 year period resulting in the defamation of accurate sightings and the likely support of some frauds. Until 1979, no one, with any degree of photographic knowledge, took the time to determine the degree of expertise and professionalism behind the claims of GSW. Unfortunately, this has often been true of many UFO interest group activities.

Those with expertise have usually been dissuaded by the opinions of their peers from approaching the subject with an open mind for fear of ridicule and demotion. Because of rising concerns in the community, frustrated by government policies of secrecy and disinformation, poorly prepared groups of concerned citizens have mounted what has been little more than lynch mobs, cults and vigilante style emotional approaches to coping with feelings of fear, abuse, betrayal. Truth denied has become truth twisted and confused. In such a society, those who take the power of leadership are fully responsible whether in the field of politics, religions, education or science
.

1974 - During December,
Olaf Jonsson, a Swedish psychic living in Chicago, Illinois, USA, was invited to visit the Marcoses at Malacanang Palace in the Philippines.
Several books had been written about Jonsson and his feats and the Marcoses had a fascination with psychics, even believing they had such skills on occasion. For his part, and like most genuine psychics - and an attribute associated with their talent - Olaf was a modest man whose talents often earned his clients much more than he benefited.
Ferdinand was frustrated at the length of time and degree of effort that retrieving each cache of Yamashita's Gold was taking. A large value of gold bullion could occupy a very small space. Digging in a general location could continue for months, even years, without success - partly because the Japanese had both hidden the gold deep and had left bombs primed to explode for those who dug straight down. For the Marcoses, Olaf could resolve some frustrations.

Olaf was invited to the Malacanang Palace to read for the Marcoses and while there discussions led into the potential problems associated with the disposal of thousands of tons of bullion. If it were placed on the market too rapidly, the market price would plummet. If it were placed on the market without a verification of its origin, international legal challenges would be invited. During his visit to the Palace, the Marcoses showed him some of the tons of gold bullion in the basement, retrieved from Yamashita's hiding places. Large numbers of the ingots had Chinese markings; others displayed Japanese markings. They were in a variety of shapes and sizes characteristic of both countries.
The Japanese gold had been jewelry and coins, confiscated from all over Southeast Asia and melted down in Manila in preparation for transfer to Japan before and during WWII. Unknown to Olaf, the gold bars stacked in one of the rooms was worth, at that time, more than $60 million; there were multiple rooms; this only represented PART of the bullion recovered from ONE site. Other bullion was stored nearby. Obviously, the Marcoses would need the assistance of someone who knew international capital markets, was an entrepreneur, and was a salesman by trade. Jonsson introduced the Marcoses to Norman Kirst, of Wisconsin, USA.

1974 - During December,
Seymour Hersh, a New York Times reporter, makes public that the CIA had been investigating American citizens inside the USA and that it had opened first-class mail: the former unauthorized; the latter illegal. President Gerald Ford appoints a commission headed by Vice-President Nelson Rockefeller to investigate. Intending to whitewash the issue, the Commission has copious documents forwarded to it. Hoping to end scandal, James Schlesinger, then Director of the CIA, ordered all CIA employees to tell the Agency's inspector general about any illegal or "improper" activities that had been undertaken.

1974 -
Pickering Nuclear Energy Generating Plant, Pickering, Ontario, one of three nuclear fuelled stations operated by Ontario Hydro at that time, and one of the world's largest nuclear power stations at the time, on December 31, was the focus of a UFO flight. A cluster of brilliant red spheres, which seemed to pulsate, were seen hovering over nearby Lake Ontario. One of the spheres moved inland to position itself over Number 3 and 4 reactor buildings. Its size was estimated at 30 feet in diameter. It remained there for 6 or 7 minutes and then with an explosion-like flash, took off. Reactor 3, at that time, had been shut down for 5 months following the discovery of heavy water leaks in 19 of the 390 pressure tubes in the reactor.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX

Memory Stimulators.
1975 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
The Eiger Sanction; White Line Fever; Death Race 2000; The Last Day; Day of the Locust; The Four Musketeers; Dog Day Afternoon, Love and Death; Farewell My Lovely; It Seemed Like A Good Idea at the Time; The Killer Elite; The Prisoner of Second Avenue; Return to Macon County; Rooster Cogburn; Jaws; The Magic Flute; The Apple Dumpling Gang; The Legend of Lizzie Borden; Monty Python and the Holy Grail; Forever Young, Forever Free; The Hindenberg; The Killer Inside Me; The Man in the Glass Booth

General News:

Consumer Price Index: 161.2

1975 - By January,
Eduard (Billy) Meier meets his next spaceperson mentor, a Pleiadian woman named Semjase.
She would telepathically guide him to a meadow where her spacecraft would appear. It would have nearly translucent, golden-silver skin which glinted in the sun and except for the portholes around the dome, the smooth, contoured surface would be devoid of projections or seams and unmarked by symbols. He could only approach the craft a certain distance before encountering some form of force field which prevented his progress.
Semjase walked out from behind the craft to meet him.
She appeared to be human in form, clothed in a tight, thin, one-piece suit, dull gray in colour and rough - almost like the hide of an elephant, Meier thought. The suit covered her up to the neck where there was a hard ring collar; below, the suit ended in ankle-high darker boots. She had pale blue eyes and her amber hair was parted in the middle and fell to her waist, framing her small nose, delicate mouth, and exceedingly high cheekbones. Her ears appeared smaller than those of a human; they joined her head in a straight line rather than in a curve. Her white skin was so pale and so perfect that it approached luminescence. She walked over to him, touched him on the arm and walked with him to a tree near where Meier had left his motorbike. There, in the grass, for 75 minutes, they talked, with Semjase speaking German so that Meier could understand.

Meier wrote in his notes that for a long time the Pleiadians had desired contact with an earth human who was sincere in assisting them with their mission. They had nurtured and observed him since he was 5 years old, and since he responded adequately to each of several levels of communication he had continued to be contacted.
Semjase explained that the Pleiadian civilization had originated thousands of years before, not in the Pleiades, a star system much younger than our own, but in the Constellation Lyra. When war ensued, before the planet was destroyed, much of the population migrated to other star systems, in the Pleiades, the Hyades, and to a planet orbiting a nearby star known as "Vega". On one interstellar journey, the new Pleiadians discovered the Earth and its early life evolving in an atmosphere hospitable to their own. Since that time, according to Semjase, Earth had been destroyed twice by its own inhabitants: first by a civilization evolved from early Pleiadians who remained behind and mated with primitive earth humans; and second when a later generation of Pleiadians colonized Earth and produced advanced technology until war again destroyed the planet. Semjase and the Pleiadians who had chosen to return again to Earth were descendants of a peaceful Lyrian faction that now felt responsible for guiding Earth in its spiritual evolution, so the earth humans could avoid the setbacks long ago experienced by their Pleiadian ancestors.

To help them in their mission, the Pleiadians contacted many earth humans telepathically, but the chosen ones eventually proved to lack knowledge, willingness, or loyalty. The few who possessed these qualities feared exposure, and so remained silent about the contacts.
"In the past we have witnessed those who were unable to determine the truth and were frightened by it. They claimed they would be accused of insanity, and that others would plan conspiracies to prove they were lying. This serves no purpose for the earth human or ourselves. If such humans had been sincere, we would have offered them the chance to take clear photo proofs of our beamships. We have allowed you this already, and in the future will come even greater opportunities.
The earth human calls us extraterrestrials or star people, or however he wants.
He attributes to us supernatural abilities, yet knows nothing about us. In truth, we are human beings like the earth human being, but our knowledge and our wisdom and our technical abilities are much superior to his.

One of our concerns is aimed at your religions and the detrimental effect they have had on the development of the human spirit. One thing above all has power over the life and death of each creature. This is the Creation, laws which are irrefutable and eternally valid. The human being will recognize them in nature, if he troubles himself to look, for they show him the way to spiritual greatness. While the earth human indulges in religion, the real spirit dwindles.
On Earth, charlatans have spread the lie that we come by order of the Creation as angels, to bring to earth humans the long-hoped-for peace, the truth, the protection, and the order of your God. This is a lie, for we never have received such orders and never will. The Creation never gives commands. It is a law unto itself, and every form of life must conform to it and become a part of it. Bring this truth to the light of the world."

Semjase promised Meier that many contacts would follow, and that she would transmit thoughts to him telepathically:
"Do not worry that I will do this at an unsuitable time. I know to regard your character and your will for independence; thus I will always take my directions from you. The time will come when we will meet together in my beamship, and you will be able to fly to space with me. I will inform you later about this."

Semjase returned to her beamship and once inside, waves emanated from the craft which distorted the shapes and colours of everything around it. A blue-red corona radiated outward. Meier took several more pictures as the beamship rose slowly above the pine trees and drifted to the north. An instant later the beamship shot straight up into the clouds and disappeared from Meier's view.
At different parts of the Earth, many times simultaneously, many times a thousand years apart, human histories and mythologies mention the Pleiades and their importance. They're noted as being the source of knowledge in the rice culture of Asia (China, Japan), and in the potato culture in Europe (Greece) and South America (Inca). These societies attributed their knowledge to a series of events in mythological form involving messengers from the Pleiades. They're revered, they're looked at as the centre of heaven, and they're looked at as a source of ancestry and wisdom and guidance. Though other star systems are mentioned in history, the closest rival, Orion, is mentioned 1/10th as often.

The Jewish-Christian Bible:
Job 9:9 Which maketh Arcturus, Orion and Pleiades, and the chambers of the south.
Job 39:31-33 Canst thou bind the sweet influences of Pleiades, or loose the bands of Orion? Canst thou bring forth Mazzaroth in his season? or canst thou guide Arcturus with his sons? Knowest thou the ordinances of heaven? canst thou set the dominion thereof in the earth?

A tight cluster of several thousand stars, the Pleiades lie in the constellation Taurus, nearly 500 light years from Earth. The principal stars shine bluish-white and radiate intensely, illuminating surrounding clouds of gas. From an astronomical point of view, these stars are young. Early civilizations recorded that the 7 brightest stars were once visible to the naked eye, though today only 6 can be seen. The Pleiades are often mistaken for the Little Dipper, but their configuration is far more compact. Tennyson described them as "like a swarm of fire-flies tangled in a silver braid."

1975 -
American budgeted military aid to South Vietnam for the year is $1.0 billion.

1975 - By January 21,
The Rockefeller Commission had been created by President Ford to investigate the CIA and determine whether it had become an expendable and negative bureaucracy. Ford had succeeded Nixon's Vice-President, Spiro Agnew, who resigned on October 10, 1973, after he was implicated in income-tax evasion and payoffs from construction companies while governor of Maryland state. Nixon had chosen Ford, the minority House leader, because he "was the first choice among members of Congress, and they were the ones who would have to approve the man I nominated." Gerald Ford had replaced Richard Nixon as President on August 9, 1974, when Congressional pressure and public support had supported Nixon's possible impeachment. Ford was more representative of the average American and desired a cleanup of government corruption. On January 3, 1975, Ford learned of the "Skeletons" of the CIA, including the assassination plots of the early 1960s, a period during which he had been a congressional overseer.
On January 21, a "Select Committee to Study Governmental Operations with Respect to Intelligence Activities" was voted to be created by the U.S.A. Senate; a month later, the House of Representatives would establish the Committee. President Ford's Vice President, Nelson Rockefeller, would be appointed head of the 2 year Rockefeller Commission. It was a case of revealing some of the bad news and clearing house, or, having the evils revealed without the benefit of control of interpretation. As a Pragmatist thinker, Rockefeller was not surprised by the lengths to which the intelligence agency had gone - in support of economic, trade and political principles which he had been a major contributor to. His concern was more heightened by the possible Communist infiltration of America which his report outlined. The first report was that given by the Rockefeller Commission on June 6, 1975.

1975 - In January,
The U.S.A. AEC is split into two agencies: the "Nuclear Regulatory Commission" (NRC), headed by astronaut William A. Anders, to oversee safeguards for the nuclear industry, and the Energy Research and Development Agency (ERDA) which inherited the remaining duties of the AEC.

1975 - On January 28,
Eduard "Billy" Meier, an out-of-work nightwatchman was contacted by a spaceperson near the village of Hinwil, Switzerland, 30 miles southeast of Zurich. Meier lived in a farmhouse a short distance from the village centre, along the street Wihaldenstrasse, with his Greek wife, Kaliope, nicknamed Popi, and their 3 children. He had met his wife in Greece, they were married in 1966, and then, for 4 years, travelled from Switzerland to India and back, working and living in Pakistan, on the Isle of Crete, in the mountains of the Middle East, and in India. They had lived at Hinwal since December, 1973.
Meier was in his late 30s, of 5' 7" tall, thick chested, strong, had greenish-hazel eyes, and a sixth-grade education. He had a permit to carry a gun because of his security profession when he worked as night security at a factory. When out of work, he received a disability pension for the loss of one of his forearms (a 1965 bus accident) and the family raised chickens in the attic and sold the eggs to the neighbours. He was known to speak of Moses a great deal and some believed that he had a terrific fantasy while others said that he had his own ideas and way of life and did not adapt to those of others. On many occasions, Meier would later demonstrate a low level of knowledge about subjects which was at odds with the notes in his journal. Although all of the photographs he took were excellent, he summed up his knowledge: "I push the button ... and it works."

On this afternoon, he received the thought that he should leave the house and take with him a device for recording pictures. He left the farmhouse with his moped, towing a tiny wagon with him, and rode out to one of the islands of forest around the town. After several days he repeated his journey; within weeks he was traveling regularly into the forest. Each trip seemed to take him along a different path to a new destination and would last an hour or several, occurring at different times of the day. If during the night, he would tell his wife that he was going to work. Sometimes he would look up at the sky in the evening with binoculars for hours. After some weeks, Meier showed his wife and then a good friend some pictures he had taken. His friend, Jakobus Bertschinger, lent him some money to run an add in the German publication Esotera, to attract others interested in things "metaphysical". Then people increasingly began to come to the Meier's residence in groups to hear him speak for hours at a time. The people in the village did not like the disturbance he brought to the order of the village with his erratic travels and his idiosyncratic behaviour and would all be critical and disbelieving of him for some time. Gossip spread widely both before and after the arrival of his visitors and resulted in ostracism of his wife and children by some of the village folk, including teachers, neighbours, city officials, and students.
Meier described how he had been contacted telepathically by spacepersons from the Pleiadians and frequently directed to remote locations near Hinwil, where they landed a 7-meter silvery beamship, disembarked, and met with him. Most of these contacts were with a female named "Semjase", for the Pleiadians had found that humans were less intimidated by females. She allowed him to photograph her beamship as it approached and as it ascended away. He now showed scores of clear colour photographs and he had kept a detailed diary of his meetings including detailed conversations. He took some of the interested persons to a site where he had recently spoken to Semjase; they found 3 six-foot diameter perfectly round swirls in the grass. Always the swirls would be counter-clockwise, precisely pressed into the grass in such a way that the blades were not broken nor crushed; yet it remained flattened for weeks, continuing to grow and remaining healthy in colour. Those who read excerpts from his journal found them to be much more complex and sophisticated than would be expected of a man of his education and station in life.
He referred to the telepathic signals he received as "happens like a shot", "On the one hand it is like pictures which appear, and on the other hand, it is like a voice. There are no words for it ... it is as if you heard a voice in the symbols." Meier could be in a room full of people and suddenly his eyes would close, his skin would go pale, and he would begin to perspire faintly. Within 5 minutes he would dress for the weather and be off on his moped for an half an hour or half a day.

One afternoon, Meier invited his family and two other persons, one was Hans Schutzbach, a sceptic, to accompany them. At the site in question they saw what appeared to be a spaceship a thousand meters away, big and circular, rise, and speed away. Later, Schutzbach accompanied Meier one other afternoon when the latter tape recorded the sound of the spaceship: a cross between a jet engine and a chain saw: a high-pitched grating sound. Schutzbach, sceptical of the sounds, searched the surroundings for hidden speakers or wires only to find nothing. He returned days later and tried to recreate the sounds by replaying the tape through loudspeakers placed in various locations but such an attempt sounded obviously fake. Schutzbach also helped Billy measure and photograph the beamship landing tracks only to remark later that the ones which Billy took him to were always perfect while those made by people who declared him a fake, were always obviously a bad copy.
On the night of June 13, 1976, Guido Moosbrugger, an interested principal from a small school in Austria, accompanied Billy and Hans to a remote site where Semjase had agreed to demonstrate the existence of the Pleiadians by having the beamships take on colour and fly in erratic patterns. While waiting, the two men saw a fire-red disk rise high above the tree line 2 miles away "as big as the headlights from a distance of 100 meters", move back and forth and then disappear. After a few seconds a rotating silver ball spun into view, then two smaller silver-coloured spheres appeared below the first, also spinning. At the base of the central and largest of the spinning spheres, a large drop formed and hung lower and lower until it broke free and fell. Suddenly, all of the lights disappeared. After pause, the very same disk appeared again, became bigger and bigger, they thought it flew toward them; it shrank and disappeared. When Billy returned to the spot where he had left the two to wait for him, he repeated back to Moosbrugger what he had been thinking in Meier's absence: Semjase had read Moosbrugger's mind and relayed it to Billy.

Three weeks later, Moosbrugger returned to Hinwil, and, with Schutzbach and several of his friends, all armed with cameras, they followed Billy out to his 55th contact to witness and photograph more astounding displays of light in the night sky. Individuals would stay with him for days, scrutinizing every movement and taking advantage of the freedom he gave them to search everywhere for scientific journals or papers, or objects and materials from which something had or could be made: all without success. Repeatedly, witnesses who accompanied him to a contact location would find him returning warm and dry after hours while they were cold and damp throughout. Always he returned happy and peaceful; at other times, like an average person he would display a full variety of emotions.

Some of the information imparted by Semjase included:
"Order exists in the universe with more advanced civilizations teaching the less advanced, and spiritual evolution necessarily paralleling technological progress."

She explained that the Pleiadians were "not missionaries or teachers, but we endeavour to keep order throughout all areas of space. Now and again we begin contacts with inhabitants of different worlds by searching out individuals whom we feel can accept our existence. We then impart information to these contacts, but only when their race has developed and begins to think. Then slowly, we and others prepare them for the truth, that they are not the only thinking beings in the universe."

She informed Meier that the Pleiadians lived to be 1,000 years old, her home planet was Erra, slightly smaller than the Earth; populated by many fewer persons: 500 million. Upon discovering Erra's hospitable but young environment, the Pleiadians had engineered the planet to support life and today, it looked much like the Earth. They located their production and processing facilities in remote areas, away from population, and utilized nearby uninhabited planets for mining. The vehicles had no wheels, they hover.
Similar species to horses, cows, rabbits, and fish were there.
Robots and androids looked and acted so human that the only way to distinguish them from humans was by their attire. Each wore a uniform, the colour of which related to the job it was assigned to perform. The skin of such androids was made of living protoplasm and their brain, also, was capable of natural response and conversation.

Semjase revealed that families existed on Erra and were close and caring.
Individuals were educated from an age of 4 years until they reached 70 and marriage was delayed until they finished that stage even though sexual maturity occurred in their early teens. It was average to learn 15 or 16 disciplines; Semjase knew over 30; she was still young, at an age of 330. Each family is not more than 5 persons, the parents and a maximum of 3 children. About 3000 ships from other star systems visit the Earth each year.
There are 8 different human races that have stations on earth.
They are here exploring, they are studying, they are watching.
None have come to destroy humanity whereas the whole life of a human is based on fighting.
If they so desired, the Pleiadians could destroy the Earth in a matter of minutes and they could have enslaved humanity thousands of years ago. Some of the visiting spaceships had picked up humans against their will, comparable to scientists and anthropologists who, upon discovering a primitive people still on earth, dispatch teams to study them and return them to the lab. Occasionally a mistake might be made and an abducted human would die, much as earth doctors made mistakes causing people to die. Human life was never taken purposely.

Government on Erra was by spiritual leaders, the highest form of which she called the "Horralft", a form of life midway between the physical human form and the total spiritual ethereal form. The Horralft emanated suggestions which the other beings on Erra, by their own wisdom in evolution, tried to do their best to follow.
The Pleiadians are not allowed to interfere with the development of the Earth.
World War III was prophesied 2000 years ago, yet no one listened and now it is too late.
Such a holocaust could be prevented only by change and change could b e effected in only two ways:
One was by teaching, by showing earth humans how to advance spiritually from within; the other was to use force, which the Pleiadians forbid. They would not step in to prevent an earth war unless such a war threatened civilizations elsewhere. The Pleiadians attempted only to effect small changes in people of clear head and heart, by teaching and allowing the person to grow from inside.
Meier is believed by some to be the man referred to by the pseudonym Edward Albert in the September 30, 1964 "New Delhi Statesman" article "The Flying Saucer Man leaves Delhi - Swiss Claims He Has Visited Three Planets." Meier believes that his photographs are only to encourage humans to think, to study the teachings, and to come to know.

1975 - On February 4,
A 7.3 Magnitude Earthquake struck the Chinese City of Haicheng.
In memory of the 1920 Kansu Province earthquake, a Chinese Seismological Bureau had been set up and intensive research had been conducted into this area of study. This quake was correctly predicted and a mass evacuation of 3,000,000 people to the surrounding fields and parks resulted in a death toll of 1,300. 90% of the buildings were destroyed. This prediction was possible largely because of a number of pre-shocks in this geological area. Pre-shock earthquakes which can enable prediction occur at least 22% of the time; however, relatively little in resources has been devoted to such research, planning and warnings relative to that spent on armaments development and covert political operations by the major human governments.

1975 - On February 4,
A 4.8 Magnitude Earthquake struck the area of Liaoning province in Manchuria.
The area had not had a major quake for 100 years.
Shortly before the earthquake, animals in the region began to behave strangely.
Snakes awoke from hibernation prematurely and lay frozen in the snow; rats appeared in groups and were so agitated that they did not fear human beings; small pigs chewed off their tails and ate them.
When the earthquake struck, sheets of light flashed across the sky, jets of water and sand shot into the air, bridges buckled, and the majority of the buildings in the main towns of the province were wrecked. Only 300 people died because the populace received plenty of warning and took action.

1975 - On February 20,
Luis Mihares issued a statement declaring his severance of relationship with the Malacanang Palace, morally and as an employee. Ferdinand first tried to discredit Mijares by circulating many rumours implying that Mijares had been incompetent, a thief, a traitor, and that he had left his wife and son in the Philippines for a woman in the USA.
Late in 1974, Mijares had rashly accused Kokoy Romualdez of cheating the Lopez family in a business arrangement involving the Manila Electric Company. Kokoy was considered to be wildly irrational, vengeful, and unstable - but Imelda protected him. When Mijares wrote about Romualdez, the latter warned him childishly, "You will see what will happen to you. I will tell this to my sister."

The U.S. Congress was pressuring Ferdinand to release some of his celebrity political prisoners; some were. Mijares and other propagandists were sent to the USA to invite Filipino exiles to return home with "full amnesty". Imelda was to follow and make a personal appeal. Mijares planned Imelda's press campaign. To raise her image of acceptability, a full-page newspaper advertisement was placed in Honolulu newspapers headlined "Imelda, We Love You," with her picture. Below were the names of 83 apparent individuals and organizations which had sponsored the ad. Instead, the Philippine government had paid for it. Mijares began to fear that Kokoy might prove persuasive against his Imelda and that intolerant and vengeful Imelda would have him hunted down. In San Francisco, Mijares secretly contacted "Philippine News" editor Alex Esclamado and implied that he was preparing to defect. The news was relayed to Steve Psinakis and the defection was planned.
For awhile, Mijares catered to both sides, feeding information to both about the other.
In May, 1975, a colonel in the Presidential Guard who was one of Imelda's personal favourites, Romeo Ochoco, found Mijares in San Francisco and tried to persuade him to go home where Ferdinand would work out their differences. Next, Trinidad Alconcel, Philippine Consul General in San Francisco tried to persuade Mijares from testifying before the USA House "International Relations Subcommittee" hearings on USA-Philippine problems. The USA had almost cut off aid in December 1974; it recanted only because 1200 political detainees were set free. Mijares knew that there were 6000 more still in prisons. Under close surveillance by Fabian Ver's agents, Mijares received a phone call on June 16, 1975, at a motel in Washington D.C., from Ferdinand. He was offered a bribe of $50,000 not to testify. It would be war if he refused.

Mijares testified and requested political asylum.
Ferdinand then offered Mijares $100,000 to recant his testimony and retire to Australia.
Mijares had a California lawyer listen in to overhear the bribes while he asked if Marcos would go as high as $250,000. This was enough to justify an official U.S. Justice Department investigation that President Marcos had tried to bribe a congressional witness. Before anything further could come from it, Guillermo de Vega, the intermediary at the Malacanang Palace, was murdered, by Paulino Arceo, apparently on the orders of Kokoy. Arceo was arrested, tried, sentenced to death by a firing squad - and nothing more happened.

1975 - On March 3,
Eduard Meier, of Switzerland, takes a sequence of photographs of a beamship and an accompanying remote-controlled craft; one of the photos in this series appeared on the cover of Europe's newsweekly "Der Spiegel", November 17, 1978 edition.

1975 -
A strange piece of metal was found near the Varta River, in Siberia.
It was analyzed 10 years later and found to be composed of 67% cesium with 10% lanthanum and some neodymium. It was shaped like a tube or collar. The magnetic field on one side of the object was different in strength from that on the opposite side by a factor of 14 to 1.

1975 - On March 19,
The FBI conspiracy to destroy the Socialist Workers party reached most of the public with the morning broadcast of the "Today" television show. Peter Camejo and Syd Stapleton revealed their findings about Cointelpro, the FBI plot against its own citizens. Readers of the "New York Times" had been exposed to some details of the conspiracy in the evening edition of the day previous. A Washington news conference followed at which copies of the Cointelpro papers and individual FBI files on several SWP members were released by the PRDF.

1975 - On Mar 18,
Near Waterdown, Ont. - a series of photographs show a sombrero-shaped object.

1975 - In March and July
Robert Curtis, a mining engineer and metallurgist from Nevada state, USA made trips to the Philippines to meet with Ferdinand Marcos and his associates. In March, he, Olaf Jonsson and Norman Kirst arrived together and were met by members of the Leber Group, which was headed by Amelito Mutuc, who had become a conspirator of Marcos.
Curtis had developed two metallurgical processes of interest to Marcos.
One enabled him to extract a slightly higher percentage of gold from any given ore.
The other process enabled him to melt down gold bars and alter the composition so the bars could be recast with any metallurgical fingerprint desired. Yamashita's Gold, like other caches of gold, had a distinctive minor combination of mineral impurities which would allow it to be identified on the open market. Marcos and his associates were stuck holding tons of bullion, which was essentially originally stolen, and, selling it on the open market as is, would implicate them as holders of part of that loot. By international law whatever gold of Yamashita's "fingerprint" that found itself to the market - could be confiscated - without payment to the holder. It was thought that with the assistance of Curtis, Yamashita's Gold could be poured into new bars recast with a new fingerprint, thus legitimizing it to look as if it had come from the Benguet Consolidated or other mines in the Philippines. Benguet was extracting about 100,000 ounces of gold per year, but the figure could be increased to cover the gradual introduction of a lot of Japanese war gold into the market. The Marcoses had been buying into Benguet for years and by now they had gained a majority ownership of the company through front men - whose names were on the stock ownership, but whose decisions came from Marcos.

Norman Kirst, a deceptive marketing and sales promoter from Wisconsin, USA, presented himself to Marcos as a financier. Marcos confided to Kirst and Jonsson that one of his friends, Jose Figueroa, president of Costa Rica, had told him about Curtis and his skills. Kirst volunteered to get in touch with Curtis and did so immediately and followed up with several trips to Reno, Nevada. Curtis was presented with the prospect of covering the expenses of Kirst and Jonsson (several thousand dollars per month) in return for a share of the profits from the sale of the remanufactured gold. Marcos, in the Hollywood fashion he loved, had designated the front company, The Leber Group ("rebel" spelled backwards). He would be "Charlie" and General Ver would be "Jimmy". The General would coordinate the operations. Kirst would keep Imelda and Kokoy informed, presumably on the belief that he was protecting himself by doing so, believing that they were not involved.
Curtis was sceptical of the hundreds of millions of dollars worth of bullion which Marcos had allegedly retrieved. He was also morally concerned about the origin of the gold, the brutal circumstances under which it had been seized by the Japanese and the horrors involved in its burial. His challenge was that his company, "U.S. Platinum", was deeply in debt because of the cost of the equipment it had purchased to utilize his concepts. Curtis had borrowed $250,000 from wealthy members of the John Birch Society and was having difficulty repaying them. Curtis was sincere in his efforts and hard working and practical in his work. He was also naive about politics and business. Since Ferdinand was president of the Philippines, a right-wing ally of the USA, he made an ethical compromise, encouraged by his immense debt and the pride involved in actually seeing his process become successful. Curtis was also a perfectionist for detail and he kept accurate records and tape recorded every conversation and face-to-face meeting - having learned earlier about the inaccuracies of human memory from associates who had convenient forgotten or changed details involving responsibilities or money.

Curtis and Jonsson were taken to more than 24 sites identified on the Yamashita maps which had come into the hands of the Marcoses. These included Fort Santiago and Fort Bonifacio in Manila, the Teresa barrio 30 miles away from Manila, the San Augustin Church in Intramuros; at a property belonging to the wealthy Don Paco Ortigas; at San Sebastian Church, Christ the King Church, a railroad site, and others. Frequently they met with General Ver, a half-brother of Ferdinand, and a Colonel Lachica, a member of Ver's constabulary staff who was in charge of Imelda Marcos' protection. They also met Paul Jiga and Ben Balmores who had each witnessed the burial of parts of Yamashita's Gold. They had also supplied the maps which detailed 138 land locations and 34 water locations - 172 sites.
For their own safety, Jiga and Balmores, who had actually been Japanese naval commanders working for Rear Admiral Iwabuchi Sanji, under the direction of Rear Admiral Kodama Yoshio. The latter had been responsible for the collection of the gold and the former had been responsible for its concealment during 1943 and 1944. Jiga and Balmores had assisted Admiral Iwabuchi Sanji who had been given full authority for the concealment operations including unlimited POW labour, all the marines he needed for brute force and security. It was he, with the assistance of Jiga and Balmores, who had been responsible for many of the thousands of POWs who had been worked to death, hacked to death, tortured to death and buried alive. Kodama was safely back in Japan when MacArthur's forces landed; Balmores and Jiga were not. At the end of the war, Jiga and Balmores had taken the maps, new identities, and passed themselves off as Filipinos who had gone to work for the Japanese when the Japanese arrived, and, were now willing to share their secret with Marcos and his associates - to avoid torture and death. They never confided the real story to anyone except Robert Curtis.
In addition to the maps, there were Japanese engineering drawings of each site indicating how the treasure had been buried. Curtis talked at length to Ferdinand in private. Ferdinand spoke at length about getting the correct papers for the gold and marketing it to the gold pools in London and Zurich. Curtis agreed to have 2 small furnaces dismantled from his plant in Reno and shipped to Manila, along with other equipment. He would have to look after the expense himself and the transaction would appear that he had sold them to the Benguet mines. A location would be made available for them.

They decided to target first the site of the wreck of the Japanese carrier, "Nachi" and two land sites, the property of Don Paco Ortigas and "Teresa II". Ferdinand had been careful to promise that navy PT boats and divers would assist Jonsson, once he pinpointed the exact location of the wreck; then issued a presidential decree that resulted in his personal approval being required for any future salvage operations in Philippine waters. After Ver's divers spent hours searching fruitlessly in the location indicated by the maps, Jonsson insisted that they drop anchor several hundred yards away; they did, and the exact location was discovered and buoyed for future use. When they returned the next day, the buoys were gone. On the third day, Jonsson again found the cruiser and new buoys were attached. These also went missing, aggravating Curtis because Ver had been in charge of security. Ver denied any conspiracy, saying that his officers had been withdrawn to escort the presidential yacht on a cruise. It was obvious that Marcos and his men were doing something suspicious but there was no proof, time was advancing, and expenses were mounting. Attention was changed to a land site designated "Teresa II".
"Teresa II" was described as containing 777 billion yen (1944 value) in treasure and Ferdinand believed that the number 777 was his lucky number. It was to be excavated by the "Age Construction Company", headed by Dr. Eduardo Escobar, Ver's personal choice for the job. Security on the site would be provide by Ver's officers. Curtis and Jonsson located the exact site and digging began in mid-May. Curtis returned to the USA.
Twenty men worked round the clock clearing 3 feet of fill per day.
As the digging progressed, arm and hand bones were uncovered in strange patterns at different levels, as had been the custom in the design of the site. These had obviously been hacked off of POWs either while alive or from their corpses. On June 8th, the workmen reached the top of a concrete tunnel. When the concrete was pierced, the workers experienced headaches and nausea so severe that some were hospitalized. It was the gas from the decomposed bodies of the POWs buried alive in the tunnel and it would have supplanted the oxygen in the hole. As indicated on the maps, they found a level of burned charcoal, a layer of bamboo, then a layer of crisscrossed wooden boards. Then more human bones, the fender of a truck, and another piece of metal. Then the chief security officer, who had quietly disappeared, returned with a truck full of heavily armed soldiers loyal to Imelda Marcos. Word reached Ver and his troops moved in and took possession of the site. Digging resumed.

1975 - On March 26,
A Convention on the Prohibition of the Development, Production and Stockpiling of Bacteriological (Biological) and Toxic Weapons is signed by the USA, the USSR, and over 100 other countries. Before 1977, the USSR and the USA would argue that "genetic weapons are new and outside the scope of the bacteriological treaty." The USA Army reported more than 88 institutions conducted research into biological warfare under more than 300 defense contracts during 1942-1971. Why would countries argue about the interpretation of "toxic weapons" unless they were actively in the process of developing them?

1975 - On March 28,
USA Senator Barry Goldwater, wrote in a letter that "Ten or 12 years ago I tried to get access to the building at Wright-Patterson where UFO artifacts were stored and I was understandably denied access. It is still classified ABOVE TOP SECRET. I've heard they plan to release some of the information in the near future and hope not to have to wait too much longer."

1975 - During April,
The "OSS Special Weapons, Devices and Equipment" catalogue enters its first private printing through "Normount Technical Publications" in Wickenburg, Arizona. The only practical use of such a catalogue is to educate others of the types of tools and a simple representation of the methods used to exert a disabling influence on the economy of a country.
In a balanced and happy society, there is no public market for such a publication.
Only if a society encourages violence as a mediator of conflict, encourages distrust and fear of other nations, and preparation for lethal self-defense, do such publications have a market. In a truly free and democratic society in which the leaders are honest with and respectful of its citizens will you find uniform public support of the government. As the government allows and encourages itself to become alienated from its people - by deceit, lies, manipulation, secrecy, unexplained restrictions on personal freedoms, ineffective legal systems, unproductive bureaucracies ... the allowance of the weapons and knowledge for violent dissent encourages the destruction of the nation.

In other words, humans are not by original nature predisposed to respond with behaviour which intends to kill or maim others vindictively, UNLESS, their society provides them with sanctioned examples of such force for coping with conflict (as opposed to other avenues) and/or encourages feelings and attitude of distrust and anger through lack of respect for the citizen. Ultimately, ANY state only has legitimacy for its existence for as long as it provides a safe and positive environment. Safety includes safety from foreign oppression, from preventable ecological and economic disasters, and an awareness of what the individual can do to assist the government and others in fulfilling these goals. A positive environment includes adequate organization and control of economic factors so as to provide a standard of acceptable and minimal resources for the individual as well as the encouragement of a set of cultural values which have demonstrated spiritual benefits.
Few human nations appear to be capable of sustaining these factors for more than 20 years.
When a nation fails to maintain the respect of its citizens, and, if it is perceived to further fail to listen and respond to their concerns, and, if it further appears that those persons in authority have conspired against the will of the people - the people will feel encouraged to revolt. If the means have been placed in the hands of a significant minority of the citizens to allow them to devise and carry out activities which further weaken the government, it is now that they will begin to use those means of "protest." Beware the state which provides such freedoms to the individual, encourages the individual to respond to challenge with action and violence, and allows itself to lose the confidence of the people.

The information required to facilitate the formation, training and equipping of a civilian guerrilla reactionary force, if made available for use by any human government for the overthrow of another and presumed adversarial government - may also be used against one's own government. As William Shakespeare wrote in one of his plays, the initiator of discord may be "hoist by one's own petard (bomb)". Entries in the "OSS Special Weapons, Devices and Equipment" manual include methods for silencing the barrel blast sound of a submachine gun (to make it more user friendly); use of heavy fighting knives for fatal wounding; internal delayed destruction of vehicle engines; placement of thermite incendiaries; use of delayed-action chemical incendiaries; location of explosive charges to destroy vehicles or small boats; maximum damage methods for trains; placement of pressure activation, odometer activation and trip activation detonators; methods of attaching explosives to targets; a description and visual representation of a wide range of "devices". Anyone so inclined could fashion and utilize a number of the methods described, with easily available materials, to result in destruction of property and endangerment of lives. In 1975, this information became readily available to any individual with no registration of ownership or qualification of need.

1975 - April 17:
Cambodia falls to the Khmer Rouge.

1975 - April 30:
The Vietnam War ends.
Troops of the National Liberation Front (NLF) and the Democratic Republic of Vietnam (DRV) capture Saigon.
One half of the population of Vietnam is homeless; over 92,000 American troops dead; more than 2 million Vietnamese dead; more than 3 million Vietnamese wounded; 18 billion gallons of herbicides were sprayed across South Vietnam; more than 200 million acres of forest and farmland destroyed. Economic commitment of the U.S.A. has been almost $170 billion.
As they abandon Vietnam, American forces took with them 100,000 South Vietnamese who eventually settle in the U.S.A.

1975 - On May 1,
Fixed brokerage commissions are abolished in the USA.
This led to discount brokerage trading firms that executed orders but gave no investment advice.
This accelerated the diversification by securities firms into financial services, in which they began competing directly with banks and Savings and Loan institutions. Demonstrating concern for the tightening economy, investors are attempting to make their investments with less overhead costs. More investors are believing themselves capable of making good market decisions based on increasingly widespread and thorough economic reporting. Confidence in stockbrokers has continued to dwindle over the past 30 years as an increasing number of investors have experienced losses after following the advice of brokers.

1975 - During May,
The Kurdish rebels in Iraq receive a secret supply of arms from the USA CIA.
Help for the Kurdish rebels from the CIA dated from 1972,when the Shah of Iran secured President Nixon's agreement to joint USA-Iranian support for the Kurds in their struggle to secure independence. Iran had a long-standing dispute with Iraq over the border between them and saw the Kurds in their struggle to secure independence from Iraq as a useful ally, keeping Iraq occupied. Weapons, food and medical supplies were channelled to the Kurds through Iran. In March, 1975, the shah decided to withdraw his support from the rebels because the Kurds were losing their fight with the Iraqi army and he thought it wiser to settle his differences with Iraq. Richard Helms, a former US Navy man and Director of the CIA between June 30, 1966 and February 2, 1973, had since served as ambassador in Teheran, Iran.

1975 - During the year,
Atmospheric meteorite explosions the size of the Hiroshima nuclear explosion of 15 kilotons were found by secret USA military satellites designed to ascertain nuclear attacks. Almost every month, on a continuing basis, somewhere above the Earth, meteorites would be found exploding as they entered the atmosphere and proceeded towards burnup. In most cases, the explosions would occur at an altitude of about 32 kilometers. The first few were suspected of being atmospheric nuclear tests carried out by the Soviet Union. As the number of recorded events increased, and the locations were increasingly believed not to be accessible to the USSR, secondary causes had to be considered. Since more than 70% of the Earth is covered by ocean, many of the explosions occur in remote areas. Even so, the potential for the destruction of an orbiting satellite, a space vehicle or a space station is real. The public would not be told of these regular occurrences. Was the reason to prevent panic and paranoia in an unprepared population with few coping skills, or, was it believed that such a revelation could result in the termination of the manned space program ?

1975 - In May,
Herbert F. York, who had participated in "Operation Greenhouse", was the first director of the Lawrence Livermore Laboratory (1952-1958), the first scientist of the Advanced Research Projects Agency (1958), first director of the Defense Research and Engineering (1958-1961), had acted on many disarmament committees and had several times served on the USA President's Science Advisory Committee, wrote:
"In some cases, to be sure (the USSR) started development work ahead of us and arrived first at the stage where they were able to commence deployment. But we usually reacted so strongly that our deployments and capabilities soon ran far ahead of theirs, and we, in effect, even here, determined the final size of the operation. ... It seems clear that if humanity is to survive, those who seek first to slow and stop the arms race and then to reverse it must succeed before there is too much more technological "progress" ... ."

1975 - On June 6,
"The Rockefeller Commission" gave its first report on the activities of the CIA.
The report gave emphasis to the dangers the U.S.A. faced from an estimated 500,000 or more communist-bloc intelligence officers, nearly 2,000 communist-bloc diplomats in the United States, and the technical intelligence of the Soviet Union and its allies.
"We believe that these countries can monitor and record thousands of private telephone conversations .... This raises the real spectre that selected American users of telephones are potentially subject to blackmail that can seriously affect their actions, or even lead in some cases to recruitment as espionage agents. ... A detailed analysis of the facts has convinced the Commission that the great majority of the CIA's domestic activities comply with its statutory authority."

Acknowledgement that "plainly unlawful and constituted improper invasions upon the rights of Americans" actions had taken place was made and excused on the basis that "The agency's own recent actions ... have gone far to terminate the activities upon which the investigation has focused." The Commission cover up was further excused by the statement that "time did not permit a full investigation before this report was due ... the materials ... which bear on these allegations (had been turned over to the President)". The extent of the CIA archives as of October 31, 1980, amounted to 470 million pages of documents. One result of the Commission was that the regulations not in place to allow the CIA to legally carry out some of its past activities, were put in place for the future!
Members of the Commission included:
Vice-President Nelson Rockefeller, long-term proponent of U.S.A. global rule. John T. Connor, CEO of Allied Chemical Corporation, a major defence contractor. C. Douglas Dillon, managing director of an investment banking firm and close advisor to Presidents Eisenhower, Kennedy and Johnson. Erwin N. Giswold, former dean of Harvard Law School; solicitor general under Presidents Johnson and Nixon. Lane Kirkland, secretary-treasurer of the AFL-CIO unions. Lyman L. Lemnitzer, former chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff. Ronald Reagan, former governor of California; future President of the U.S.A. Edgar F. Shannon Jr., former president of the University of Virginia - a defence contractor.

All of these persons represented the forces which engineered the assassination of President John F. Kennedy, and others, or, who would benefit greatly by their silence, in the future. Why would they wish to see the true history of the CIA revealed?

Those select individuals who had been privy to informal and formal meetings of Majority 12, the 5410 Committee, the Tri-Galaxy Government and the Trilateral Commission would be safeguarded by either non-documentation, destruction of documentation or ex-nation documentation. Documentation supporting unpopular-to-civilian attitudes programs was destroyed on a "latest-on-file" procedure in which earlier documentation was destroyed as more recent instructions, agreements and procedures evolved. For both security, limitation of bureaucracy and imposition of trust - documents were destroyed. Historical referencing would only be beneficial to those who wanted to be able to distance themselves from the decisions made, to manipulate or lobby for a promotion, or to justify a current position of question on the basis of long-term achievements.

The spaceperson-human meetings were treated in a similar fashion for the spacepersons could see no benefit in allowing the recording of any particulars. For some spacepersons who could communicate by thought transfer - mind reading: justification to others by such a primitive form of communication as writing or recording was inefficient, cumbersome and suggested a lack of trust among the participants or between the attendees and those represented by them. If the attendees needed documentation or recordings, it meant that the "leader" supposedly representing others were not trusted by those they represented. If they were not, they were not "leaders". Further, it was believed by many of the spacepersons attending that any photographic, recording device or written record of the proceedings would only lend itself to the negative human tendency to manipulate the masses which leaders represented, through patriotic, ethnocentric, or other inequitous disinformation which would frustrate all of the diverse aims of the various spaceperson cultures. Thus, none of the participants, for widely different rationales provided for historical reference.

1975 - Between June 22 - 26,
The strongest bombardment of Meteorites ever recorded by human to strike the Moon occurred.

1975 - By July,
Robert Curtis had returned to the Philippines.
He determined that the metal at the bottom of the pit at the Teresa II site was a piece of a 1000 lb bomb.
On July 6, work was halted by order of Ferdinand. Primitivo Mijares, a palace insider, had witnessed the change in Imelda from innocent to corrupt co-conspirator, the orders for assassinations given by the Marcoses, the communication between Ferdinand and USA President Nixon, the growing ambition of Imelda and its attendant physical conflict between her and Ferdinand. He knew of the assassination attempt against Imelda 5 weeks later, and had received bribes from Ferdinand.
On July 6, he had just testified before the U.S. Congress and several Washington columnists had repeated his allegations that Marcos was searching for Yamashita's Gold. Ferdinand panicked. Members of the Leber Group had been forewarned that any "leaks" of information would be fatal. That night Olof Jonsson told Curtis he was leaving Manila immediately and advised him to do so also, having sensed that they were all in great danger. The next morning, Jonsson took the first flight out. Curtis made arrangements for his equipment to be returned to the USA, declared that he had urgent business in Reno, and boarded a flight home on July 10. He had the treasure maps of Jiga and Balmores with him. Norman Kirst stayed a further 10 days in the hope of manipulating Ferdinand only to end up saving his own life by concocting letters and documents which made Curtis appear incompetent should Curtis ever decide to speak.

Marcos attempted to reassure Curtis, after finding out that the maps were gone, and prevented Curtis' equipment from leaving the Philippines. Now Curtis, who had carried everyone's expenses for the project and still owed all the money for the equipment, owed multi-millionaire, Jay Agnew, a member of the national council of the John Birch Society, $375,000. Agnew and other members of the John Birch Society volunteered to launder his future share of the gold, which they expected to be $2 billion. Involved besides the Agnews, were Georgia Congressman Larry P. McDonald; former California Congressman and presidential nominee, John Schmitz; head of the Great American Silver Corporation, Jerry Adams; Robert Welch, the millionaire candy manufacture and founder of the Birch Society; Floyd Paxton, who had run for Congress three times and his son Jerry, millionaire owner of Kwik Lok Corporation.
The money transfer was to be done through a Bahamian firm, "Commonwealth Packaging Ltd." The money would be deposited in a branch of the Royal Bank of Canada, in Nassau, Bahamas. Then, using various numbered accounts controlled by senior members of the Birch Society, the money would be transferred, in parts, to the Royal Bank of Canada branch in Kelowna, British Columbia, Canada. There, it would be credited to an account controlled by Floyd Paxton, one of the key financial consultants of the John Birch Society, who would retrieve it and carry it over the border to the USA. The Birchers had apparently done this often. In addition, they offered, through General Ver, to launder the first $20 billion in gold recovered from the sites, for President Marcos. It would be secretly offered to Arab oil states in exchange for oil; Ferdinand could sell the oil to Japan, for "clean" money.

The spiritual depravity of ALL of the individuals connected with the gold at his point, save Jonsson, is demonstrated thus: the gold had originally been stolen from the Incas and Mexicans, who had considered it ornamental, by the Spaniards for their churches, kings, and individual greed; it had been dispersed throughout Southeast Asia to purchase luxuries and permit sloth; the tax profits of Imperial China and Japan had been added, resulting in the starvation of millions; thievery and extortion by the Mongol-Tartars had increased mass human misery; the profits of the underworld Southeast Asian black marketeers, drug organizations and pirates - responsible for the drug addiction of millions and the abuse of many more, had been added; it had then been stolen from banks, governments, religious institutions, and private individuals; POWs had been used as forced labour, until they died of malnutrition, torture or burial alive, to conceal it; tax monies were being swindled away from the USA and Philippines governments; and Filipinos had been either beaten, tortured, or assassinated.
When Curtis faced a USA Federal indictment for being unable to pay monies borrowed from the Birch Society, he turned his evidence over to Nevada Senator Paul Laxalt, then head of the "Senate Intelligence Committee". The Committee reviewed it and passed word back that nothing could be done. Copies were quietly passed to right-wing activists. In desperation, Curtis went to Las Vegas "Sun" editor, Brian Greenspun, columnist Jack Anderson, and writers for the San Franciscan "Philippine News". The story was published in detail in 1978. Ferdinand responded to all publicity by ridiculing the legend of Yamashita's Gold as a hoax, while sending Fabian Ver to the USA to set up murder contracts on Curtis through the Chicago underworld. Norman Kirst learned of the plot from Filipino friends, warned Olof Jonsson, who in turn alerted Robert Curtis. Curtis immediately adopted a new identity, new career, new location, and remained in secret until he died.
By 1981, the Marcoses and their associates had cleared the Teresa II site.
Standard sized gold bars marked AAA filled a tunnel at the Bataan beach palace in Mariveles, an area 80 feet wide by 240 feet long and stacked at least 8 feet high. It had been recovered, remanufactured with the equipment of Robert Curtis, and a market was being sought for it.

1975 -
J. Grissom, B. Weiner, and E. Weiner publish their "Psychological correlates of cancer" in the Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology. They find that in comparing patients with bronchial cancer with health patients, the former score significantly lower "Personal Integration" scores. Individuals with this coping style frequently direct their frustration, anger and failure inward, and are vulnerable to the loss of an important relationship (co-dependent). Typical of the wastefulness of North American research, which is obsessed with the simplistic, mechanistic and authoritarian qualities of laboratory research and impersonal technology, very little is changed in institutional treatment of carcinomas - and the annual number of deaths continue to rise. There are options; no one seems able to control or release their cultural obsessions long enough to see the obvious and try effective, though not expensive nor authority-dependent methods of therapy.

1975 - On July 6,
William A. Sullivan, former assistant director of the FBI, endorsed the Cointelpro conspiracy on the CBS-TV's "Face the Nation". Sullivan admitted that "We have no evidence to this date that I know of that (the SWP) ever been involved in any violent activities." He went on to justify the anti-public activities on the basis that "This group advocates the overthrow of the United States government by force and violence." This allegation was never confirmed or verified by any evidence, from FBI sources or others. Sullivan went on to endorse the FBI actions of sending letters to employers of SWP members for the purpose of instigating their dismissal as: "The only mistake that I think we make in an instance like that was sending anonymous letter and not signing J. Edgar Hoover's name to it. I think we owe the American people this type of information."
In an earlier interview with the campus UCLA newspaper, Sullivan had admitted that there was no law allowing the FBI to expose Communists, nor, none that said that they should not. Sullivan went on to say that Communists were not entiltled to equal protection under the law and not entitled under the First Amendment to have private political associations.

1975 - During July,
A major covert-action program is launched in Angola by the USA CIA.
"CZX Productions", a civilian front operation for CIA black operation, uses a C130 aircraft to fly weapons into Angola.
Under a program which appeared to aid the "USA Fire Service" to put out forest fires, at least 20 C130 transport aircraft were taken out of military service and turned over to the Fire Service: a package worth over $80 million dollars. In turn, the Forestry Fire Service did not require more than about 5 of the aircraft, so they leased, gave or sold the aircraft to private companies. In arrangements where the planes were given to the private concerns, there was supposed to be an exchange of the C130 for an "antique" aircraft which might be reconditioned for inclusion in a national aircraft museum. The aircraft exchanged were actually inoperable "junk" aircraft of non-antique vintage which were never retrieved. One private company whose owner mentioned the scheme to his senator and applied for an aircraft, received three, and no further feedback until 1994 - when more senators and a TV-newsmagazine were investigating the story.
Other C130s in the lot were used to exchange weapons for narcotics (opium base) in Laos and Cambodia, for the CIA.

1975 - On July 21,
Near Solnechnogorsk - a disk, 40 feet in diameter, 3 antennae ....

1975 - During July,
The first publicized International Space Transfer between the U.S.A. and the U.S.S.R. took place.
Television cameras showed the docking of a Soyuz spacecraft with an Apollo - and the crews jubilantly exchanging food and symbolic halves of metals. Leonid Brezhnev stated:
"Your successful docking confirms the correctness of technical solutions that were worked out and realised in co-operation by Soviet and American scientists, designers and cosmonauts. One can say that Soyuz-Apollo is a prototype of future international orbital stations."

American President Gerald Ford replied:
"This tremendous demonstration of co-operation (would set a pattern) for what we have to do in the future to make it a better world".

1975 - During the summer, ???
Plans are drawn up for a new British computerized, centralized intelligence databanks.
On September 9, 1977, National Security files on British citizens became a topic in British media.
"The Times" published a story by reporter Stewart Tendler:
"The names and personal details of tens of thousands of people scrutinized by the Special Branch for reasons of national security are to be fed into a new criminal intelligence computer bought by Scotland Yard and shrouded in mystery. When plans for the computer were drawn up two years ago (1975) it is understood that the Special Branch was allocated space on it for up to 600,000 names out of the system's total capacity of 1,300,000 names by 1985 ..."

1975 -
The Basel Concordat Agreement is reached by a committee of central bankers, representing the Group 10 countries (Belgium, Canada, France, Italy, Japan, Netherlands, Sweden, Britain, USA, West Germany) affiliated with the Bank for International Settlements, that set guidelines for international bank supervision. The guidelines, initiated by the Committee on Banking and Regulation, also known as the Cooke Committee called on central banks to support branches, agencies, and bank subsidiaries in foreign countries as a morale obligation. The Concordat would be revised and published in 1983 after the failure of the Banco Ambrosiano, a major Italian bank, shook up the international financial markets.
At this point, the following considerations are mandating a change of perception as to the future norm of banking:
1. Bank assets are falling as depositors withdraw their monies; 2. Competition between banks for profits is resulting in overlending; 3. Overlending increases risk of failure from inadequate reserve levels; 4. Regional banks in the USA and elsewhere continue to go bankrupt; 5. If major banks enter a crisis publicly, the whole industry will suffer; 6. The banking community must work together to prevent crisis; 7. Central banks must encourage the banks they regulate to operate better; 8. Stability must replace growth as the major concern; 9. Continued capitalistic expansion expectations will destroy banking.

1975 - On August 10 through 13, In the evening,
There was a series of sightings and abductions in an area extending from Gilroy to the San Jose foothills in California, U.S.A. There were a total of 20 known witnesses to these sightings.
Shortly after 11.00 P.M. on Sunday August 10, Mrs. Smith was driving 12-year-old Imelda Victor to her home.
They saw a lighted object quite a distance up which descended rapidly, close to their panel truck. Reaching home, they pulled into the driveway and ran into the house. Imelda's mother, Frances Victor, was alerted by their cries. "I was in bed but not asleep when I heard them screaming. They were shaking. I had never seen such fright in my life. I ran outside in my nightgown thinking maybe there were hoodlums after them."
Mrs. Smith stated "The thing I saw was round, had four large landing gear-like arms coming out of it, evenly spaced all around. The round centre section was larger than a car but smaller than a house. Between the four arms were four small antennae-like protrusions from the centre circle and each of these protrusions had a beacon mount on it, like a beacon on top of a police car except the lights were green and red and they rotated.

Mrs. Victor's description varied such: "I ran to the street and saw this gigantic round flying machine with four large antennae-like landing gear coming out of it and all those white and red flashing lights ... It was gray metal looking and it was huge. It just sat there in the sky ... It was much bigger than the trees."
The family underwent deep crisis for a period of three years after the sighting as a result of questioning by amateur but so-called investigators and the media. Cults gathered to hold prayer meetings on their lawn; several designated ufologists pestered them; one man, with a strong and peculiar "stink" took the children out alone to see if the UFO would come again; an amateur hypnotist placed Mrs. Victor into a trance and when she reached a point where her experience was endangering her health, they didn't know how to bring her out of the trance. When she did leave the trance, the investigators quickly departed leaving her in a crisis! Mrs. Victor and her husband separated for a time after that. They had been hysterical at the time of the experience because they feared that all of them would be abducted. See September 15, 1975.

1975 - On August 13,
Staff Sgt. Charles L. Moody, USAF drove to the outskirts of Alamogordo, New Mexico to watch for meteors.BR> As a disc-shaped UFO descended towards him, he tried to start his car to get away but it wouldn't start.
He heard a high pitched whining sound from the UFO and saw shadowy figures in it, then felt numbness, after which the UFO departed.
After driving home he found that he could not account for 1.5 hours.
The next day he found his back was inflamed and he discovered a small puncture wound over his spine.
A few days later he developed a body rash. As months passed, he regained memory of the missing 1.5 hours.
He remembered that he had been in the UFO and in telepathic communication with small 4'8" humanoids.
They had whitish-gray skin, large heads, large eyes, small slit-like mouths and mask-like features.
He had been in a drug-like state on a table and they had poked a rod-like device into his back.
Afterwards they escorted him about the ship and later dropped hum off at his car.

1975 - On August 21,
Sheriff Graves, of Logan County, Colorado, and his deputies, answered a report of an unidentified helicopter entering the County. The area had been plagued by mutilation incidents in which unmarked helicopters where witnessed nearby. During the search, involving 17 ground units and a private plane rented by the sheriff, messages from individuals claiming to be Air Force officers relaying radar information from Warren Air Base, were later found to be fraudulent. At about 4.30 a.m., in southwestern Nebraska, the occupants of the sheriff's plane saw the lights of the unidentified helicopter beneath them clearly, then the lights went out. When the pilot brought the plane down to an altitude of slightly over 100 feet for a closer look, the only thing visible was a missile silo.
Since many mutilations have occurred near air bases and sensitive military installations thoroughly covered by long-range radar, where an intruding civilian helicopter would be immediately challenged by jet fighters, it is difficult to believe that the military does not what is going on. It is also well known that the mutilations occur in waves, that is, grouped frequencies, when detection would be even easier by the military.

1975 -
Malichev near Solnechnogorsk, USSR, alleges he was taken to a planet with 3 moons by aliens; he was shown

1975 -
David Stephens, near West Poland, Maine, suddenly found himself in an object with 5 beings which had hands and feet, a mushroom-shaped head with large slanted, white eyes, a small nose, no visible mouth, 3 webbed fingers and a thumb on each hand, wearing flowing black sheet-like garments and communicating by "brain-waves". Two syringes of blood were taken from him, he was stripped and fully examined and returned to his car. His friend was unaware that he had been away.

1975 - By September,
Support for the Angolan Civil War by the 40 Committee had been approved to $24.7 million.
This was for a CIA covert operation to support the FNLA (National Front for the Liberation of Angola) and the UNITA (National Union for the Independence of Angola) against the Soviet-backed MPLA (Popular Movement for the Liberation of Angola) in the civil war between the groups following Portugal's agreement to Angola's independence. The decision was made on the basis of satellite surveillance and intelligence reports which had confirmed that the Soviet Union was secretly arming the MPLA. By 1976, 83 CIA officers were in the Angolan Task Force in the field attached to stations in Pretoria (South Africa), Luanda (Angola), Lusaka (Zambia) and Kinshasa (Congo).
Close cooperation was effected with the South African Security services.
The Portuguese left Angola in November, 1975, and the war intensified.
The Soviets organized the dispatch of 12 to 15,000 Cuban soldiers with tanks and aircraft to support the MPLA. The Vietnam war had ended shortly before this, William Colby, Director of the CIA from September, 1973 to January 30, 1976 - was testifying before Congress about the secrets of the CIA, and, the USA public press seized on the opportunity to sensationalize, as usual, the involvement risks of the USA in Angola. The press discouraged continued involvement in Angola on the basis that it could lead to another Vietnam, which had cost American lives and had been lost. Congress refused to provide more funds and the MPLA won the war.

Of note should be the fact that outside nations (the USSR, the USA, and South Africa, plus Cuba) interfered in the politics of another nation (Angola) largely AFTER the internal politics of the country had fallen into anarchy, and, largely for the purpose of prestige, influence, and domination in the global arena. There was little support, from anyone, for the constructive, pro-active preparation of the Angolans to consider their political options and negotiate a structure of confidence to them BEFORE they received independence. These actions are typical of the aggressive, deceptive, manipulative, power-greedy contributions usually offered by powerful human organizations to weaker ones and demonstrate a total avoidance of a spiritually guided approach. In the end, much enmity is aroused between the participants, many people are disabled, wounded or killed, and the prospects for a positive political process after peace is minimized.

1975 - By September,
"Coral reef Exploration Rights" were issued to a South Korean syndicate owned by Japanese Yakuza underworld leader Machii Hisayuki who controlled the ferry line between Pusan, South Korea, and Shimonaseki, Japan - the shortest route between the two countries. Machii was a close friend of South Korean President Park Chung Lee. Machii enjoyed government protection in both South Korea and the Philippines. The Nachi was completely unloaded of its gold bullion by the Yakuza company, Machii became a billionaire, and no-one expressed any more interest in the Nachi.
Marcos had made an exception to his earlier presidential decree preventing anyone salvage rights in the Philippines. Machii looked after the salvage of the Nachi gold, its dispersal through the Japanese banking system, and, in return, shared Yakuza profits with Ferdinand and lavishly contributed millions to Imelda Marcos' projects. The capital infusion from the Nachi to the Yakuza stabilized and strengthened its control over and pervasiveness of the Far East prostitution, heroin, opium, child slavery, gambling and money-laundering businesses.

1975 - By September,
The Shah of Iran and Saddam Hussein (then the Iraqi Baathist's Number 2 leader) had met and signed a treaty to end their border dispute. Saddam had been informed by the USA that its aid to the Kurds would continue until balance could be restored to the region by peace being declared between Iran and Iraq. On the same day that Hussein signed the treaty, ALL USA aid to the Kurds was terminated. On the following day Hussein initiated a search-and-destroy operation in Kurdistan with the continued sanction of the USA.

1975 - On September 15,
Mrs. Smith (see August 10, 1975), was staying with a distant relative near Industrial City, California.
She was sleeping in the front room after watching television when she suddenly woke up to find two beings standing near her. They were wearing silvery suits; they had slits for eyes, nose, mouth. The suit covered the entire body as if it were made of form-fitting painted latex. The surface was very smooth, free from wrinkles.
She felt calm when she saw them.
They communicated with her "telepathically", asking her to "go up with them."
They were "seeking information". The beings lifted her by her elbows and together they went out the front door. She felt that she was flying. She distinctly saw the flat top of the house, the garage. She saw the stars above her, and a hovering UFO. It was identical to the one she had seen in Gilroy a month earlier.

They floated inside the object through its "core" and followed a ramp that ascended through at least three levels. One of the beings stayed with her, leading her to a circular room with emerald-green floor, illuminated with a milky white light. The walls were soft silver, with large round instruments. She had a sensation of intense beauty.
To her left was a door. Something traumatic happened suddenly: she was blinded by a white light and she remembered nothing more up to 1990. She woke up in her bed and saw that it was daylight. When she spoke with her friend, who had been in an adjoining room, her friend had slept peacefully through the night to her considerable surprise, as the friend is an insomniac. They found the front door unlocked and open. (see May 15, 1978)

1975 - In October,
Venera 9 and 10, USSR interplanetary satellites, transmit the first acknowledged pictures from Venus.
Venera designations were allocated to craft only when they were safely on course; failures received a Cosmos designation. The Soviets preferred to operate planetary probes in pairs for redundancy. Following V4-6, the capsule was redesigned to withstand up to 180 atmospheres of pressure and 530 degrees Centigrade of heat. Protection against the expected 2000 degree Centigrade entry temperature was provided by encapsulation in a jettisonable sphere, with the interior chilled to -10 degrees Centigrade. A combination of aerodynamic disc form, parachutes, and a crushable base assisted the possibility of a safe landing.
Venera 1 - Feb 12, 1961 launch, lost at 23 million km., 99800 km from Venus. Venera 2 - Nov 12, 1965 launch, passed 24,000 km from Venus; no transmission. Venera 3 - Nov 16, 1965, impacted Venus March, 1966, after losing contact. Venera 4 - Jun 12, 1967, highest temperature recorded was 320 degrees Cent. Venera 5 - Jan 05, 1969, crushed by 27 atm pressure at 24 km altitude. Venera 6 - Jan 10, 1969, crushed by 27 atm pressure at 12 km altitude. Venera 7 - Aug 17, 1970, survived to surface 90 atm and 475 degrees C. Venera 8 - Mar 27, 1972, after 117 days and 300 million Km, as Venera 7.

Venera 9 is recorded as the 1st orbiter from the Earth.
After 20 days of surface imaging, it began descent and landed safely.
The single image transmitted, showed that the V9 was surrounded by 30-40 cm sharp stones with soil between on a hillside. Gamma-ray analysis indicated a basaltic terrain. It ceased operations on March 22, 1976; it landed October 22, 1975.
Venera 10 landed 2200 km from V9 and showed an older landscape with a weathered plateau with flat slabs of rock. Temperature of 465 degrees C., pressure of 92 atm, and a wind speed of 3.5 metres/sec.

By early 1986, the Soviets would publicly announce that Mars would be their future focus rather than Venus.
Venera 11 and 12 recorded lightning in the atmosphere and light levels at the surface as comparable to an overcast day on the Earth. Venera 13 also distinguished a cloud structure in the atmosphere. A field of orange-brown rocks and loose soil and an orange sky were also recorded. Soil sampling indicated a leucitic basalt with high potassium content, occurring on the Earth only in volcanic areas. Venera 14, landed 1000 km from V-13 and revealed a light brown sandstone, with some potholes. Seismic activity indications were also recorded. From other data, scientists concluded that the planet had held a volume of water 1/3rd that of the Earth and that it had been lost in the first 500 million years because of the influence of the Sun. Venera 15 & 16 carried out mapping of the surface between 30 degrees north to the North Pole and produced 20 maps.

1975 - During October,
Imelda Marcos, First Lady of the Philippines, succeeded in having her husband President Ferdinand Marcos, legalize gambling.
A floating casino, fronted for Imelda, valued at $4 million, had been launched, shortly before by the Peninsula Tourist and Shipping Company, of which brothers Alfredo and Benjamin Romualdez were part owners. Ferdinand could either accept his wife's determination to build her own income and business skill, or, arrest her. He legalized the activity.
Stanley Ho, a British citizen, resident of Hong Kong and acknowledged master of gambling operations in the Far East was on hand. When gambling was legalized in the Philippines, Ho got the franchise. Imelda's gambling ship was crewed by Roberto Benedicto's company, Northern Lines, but Ho's men ran the tables. The Marcoses were guaranteed, 2/3rds of the net profit: Ferdinand took 2/3rds of that and Imelda and the brothers one third. Ho received a large fee for operating costs. Ho and his mother had been abandoned by his father just before WWII and socially outcast and poor, yet with a good heritage in business facilitation, he and his mother went to Macao to sit out the war with other Hong Kong citizens who were wealthy. There, Stanley Ho had become a junior secretary in a company set up to barter business between the Macao government and the Japanese. He learned Japanese. By the end of the War he was almost a millionaire from his part in the black market arrangements. He put his profits into Hong Kong real estate, and by the late 1950s was one of the wealthiest men in the colony. One of his close associates, Yip Hon, was known to be a member of the Luen Kung Lok Triad . Ho later won the gambling concession for Macao, completely commercialized the island and became one of the Orient's wealthiest men.

1975 - On October 25,
Stan Gayer and Steve Harris, two lumber mill electricians, were in their truck in the area of Shivar Saddle, near Happy Camp, a small lumber town at the northern border of California, about 40 miles from Oregon, U.S.A. They were testing their CB radios when they saw two starlike objects of unusual brightness. One of the objects suddenly moved over the ridge and oscillated in a surging motion "as if fighting the wind". It came down towards them "like the lit end of a cigar", glowing red. They drove away and later saw a large, red, glowing object on the ground on the side of Cade Mountain.

1975 - On October 27,
Stan Gayer and Steve Harris, two lumber mill electricians, and a third man who considered himself an interested sceptic, returned to the site of the October 25th sightings, in the area of Shivar Saddle, near Happy Camp. They brought a metal detector and a spotlight. In exploring the area, they found a pile of strange mica-like material at the site of the first sighting, which they found later to be nothing more than isinglass of the type used in old woodstoves.
What they did not expect was a set of glowing eyes in the bushes and a sirenlike sound.
Turning the spotlight on the area they could see nothing at all, only darkness where trees and bushes should have been. At that point, they felt it best to get back into their pickup truck and return to town, where they told their story to Helen White, who was sixty-two, and to a 17-year-old student.
The group of five now drove back to the site in the mountains.
Steve Harris became somewhat agitated and began firing into the underbrush at random.
Two silhouettes appeared wearing helmets like a welder and surrounded by a peculiar light.
The sirenlike sound was heard again. Helen White who had brought her camera was stunned and unable to take a picture. The luminescent beings approached within 50 feet of the group, which then felt a strange warmth in the air. Steve recalls choking as if the air were too heavy to breathe, "like in a sauna or steam bath where the air is heated up, only much worse." Helen White compared the experience to having pressure on the chest. Steve thought they had been gassed. The group got back in the truck and were "chased" down the mountain by a glowing red object.

1975 - By November,
The U.S.A. revised "Freedom of Information Act" was acted upon by UFO interest organization "Ground Saucer Watch" to request one copy of the 1953 "Robertson Panel Report". The CIA responded that its only involvement with UFOs had been the Robertson Panel. Almost 4 years later, after extended litigation to release the documents, the CIA would release another 900 pages of information on UFO sightings and internal policy on UFOs. Another request was filed with the National Security Agency. They replied that they did not have any interest in UFOs in any manner, yet during its suit against the CIA, GSW learned that some of the CIA documents had originated with the NSA. After more years, the NSA finally released 2 of its admitted 239 documents relating to UFOs.

1975 - By November,
The "Waste Isolation Pilot Plant" (WIPP), located near Carlsbad, New Mexico, would have the first of many holes dug in preparation for a consolidation of plutonium waste currently scattered in 10 holding sites across the USA. The government had decided that this location was suitable for the burial of 480,000 45-gallon Barrels of nuclear waste within newly constructed salt mines. Located in the middle of an oil field and subject to tectonic earth movements, 2 rooms would collapse after more than 15 years: they had no roof supports. 56 rooms would have been excavated after 10 years - each with a capacity for 6500 drums, and measuring 33 feet wide, 300 feet long and 10 feet high. Everything was to be located 2000 feet underground, accessible by 10 miles of tunnels. Operated by "Southwest Research", it would employ a staff of 700.
Over the next 20 years, 100 public demonstrations against the project, 200 days of public hearings, 3 massive legal suits, and technical complications - would result in NONE of the 240,000-year harmful substances being buried. At that point, the Department of Energy would be spending over $495,000 per day (180 million per year) to maintain the project.

1975 - On November 2,
Stan Gayer and Steve Harris, two lumber mill electricians, Helen White, and two other people drove down the dirt trail into the canyon at the base of Cade Mountain near Happy Camp, northern California. They were following up on previous sightings made by them beginning on October 25th.
Exploring the area systematically, to try and explain the occurrences, they found a heavy fog in the canyon which forced them back, and they became confused about subsequent events. They remember heavy boulders falling off the cliffs and bouncing around the truck. They remember the door locks being opened and a strange being telling Steve "you won't need that" when he reached for his gun. They believe they saw a hovering object. Helen recalls being lifted inside a room, but she is confused about the time sequence. One occupant of the craft had a conversation with her, in the course of which he described a transparent object as being made of gold. Helen answered the being that she knew what gold was like, and it surely was not transparent. The being answered simply, "There is such a thing as gold that you can look through. It's in your Bible." Steve thinks he was in a craft with a transparent window on top and bottom, through which he was able to see China Mountain.

Helen stressed that "everything seemed to happen in slow motion."
Also, she spoke to a man wearing a long, flowing coat. An avalanche of rocks was falling.
"Watch out for those boulders!" she cautioned him, only to be told, "Don't worry, they won't hurt me."
She felt herself bathed in light as she rose into the object. She wanted to take something away as proof and was given permission; yet later the beings forbade her to keep anything, and she cried in frustration: "You lied to me." The craft also appeared to be much larger inside than outside.
Their next conscious memory is driving down the mountain singing a chorus of an old church song titled "There is Power in the Blood of the Lamb." After this major incident, sightings were reported by various witnesses; some included other episodes of strange fog with a humanoid shape inside, high-pitched sounds, and various kinds of spherical or oblong flying objects, sometimes with a U.S.A.F. interceptor in pursuit.

GOLD: The Christian Bible - The Acts:17:24-31
God that made the world and all things therein, ... dwelleth not in temples made with hands; ... giveth to all life, and breath and all things; ... That they should seek the Lord, if haply they might feel after him, and find him, though he be not far from every one of us: For in him we live, and move, and have our being; ... Forasmuch as we are the offspring of God, we ought not to think that the Godhead is like unto gold, or silver, or stone, graven by art and man's device. And the times of this ignorance God winked at; but now commandeth all men every where to repent: Because he hath appointed a day, in the which he will judge the world in righteousness ...
Revelations:21:1-18
And I saw anew heaven and a new earth: for the first heaven and the first earth had passed away ... saw the holy city ... coming down from God out of heaven, ... Behold the tabernacle of God is with men ... He that overcometh shall inherit all things; and I will be his God, and he shall be my son. But the fearful, and unbelieving, and the abominable, and murderers, and ... shall have their part in the lake which burneth with fire and brimstone: which is the second death. ... showed me the great city, ... descended out of heaven from God, Having the glory of God: and her light was like unto a stone most precious, even like a jasper stone, clear as crystal; ... And the building of the wall of it was of jasper: and the city was pure gold, like unto clear glass.
BLOOD OF THE LAMB: The Book of Mormon: another Testament of Jesus Christ.
Esther: 13:8-10
... until the end come when the earth shall pass away. And there shall be a new heaven and a new earth; and they shall be like unto the old save the old have passed away, and all things become new. And then cometh the new Jerusalem; and blessed are they who dwell therein, for it is they whose garments are white through the blood of the Lamb; ....

The Christian Bible. Revelation 7:14-17 ... These are they which came out of great tribulation, and have washed their robes, and made them white in the blood of the Lamb. Therefore are they before the throne of God, and serve him day and night in his temple: and he that sitteth on the throne shall dwell among them. They shall hunger no more, neither thirst any more; neither shall the sun light on them, nor any heat. For the Lamb which is in the midst of the throne shall feed them, ....
1975 - During the year,
The New York Times describes Iraq as "pragmatic, co-operative" and credits the shift to Saddam Hussein's "personal strength".
1975 - During November,
George and Kathy Lutz were shown a Dutch colonial style house on Ocean Avenue in Amityville, New York, by a realtor.
They were informed that the previous owner, Ronald DeFeo had been found guilty of murdering 6 family members in the house and that was why the price was set at only $80,000. George's business was not doing well, yet the Lutzes were able to arrange financing and they moved in on December 18. The Lutzes would soon realize that with closing and maintenance costs and a business which was doing worse by the day, they could not afford the house.
About the same time, William Weber, the lawyer for murderer Ronald DeFeo, was trying to have his client cleared of murder charges by reason of insanity. When that was unsuccessful, he suggested that DeFeo declare that "The devil made me do it."

Together, the Lutzes, Weber, and writer Paul Hoffman decided to concoct a story of horror about the house for their mutual gain. Weber would win the freedom of his client, the Lutzes would be excused to leave the house by their creditors and Hoffman would have a story, or, a part in it. The Lutzes remembered that they had retained the services of a priest when they moved in to bless the house. The priest was said to have heard a loud voice say, "get out!" Less than one month after moving into the house, the Lutzes moved out, leaving their possessions behind.
The Lutzes complained that they had been tormented during their brief stay by numerous supernatural events: an infestation by hundreds of flies in the middle of winter; moving statues; green slime oozing from the ceiling; a telephone that didn't work correctly; a constant chill; ghostly images; mysterious music. They recounted their story onto tape recordings and professed to be too disturbed by the experience to allow interviews. This also would provide a consistency to the story of what happened with no chance for conflicts to arise between interviews provided by different family members or by the same person on different days.

Jay Anson, a writer who had worked on the screenplay of the American movie, "the Exorcist", was brought in to write the story about the Amityville incident. He was not allowed to visit the house; he never interviewed the Lutzes; he used a series of tape recordings as an outline of the account of their horrifying experience on Ocean Avenue. Anson borrowed heavily from the screenplay of "The Exorcist" and used a great deal of imagination to compose the horror of the century.
Lutz would later admit, under oath in a trial (Lutz vs. Hoffman) that almost everything in the book written by Jay Anson was a lie. In fact, whenever the Lutzes, Anson, and Weber had to swear under oath about the so-called facts in the Anson book, no one could confirm any of the strange happenings as they would be portrayed in the movie, "The Amityville Horror". Specifically, no one in the family ever saw a face of a pig; no marching band ever paraded through the house; no heavy door was torn off its hinges; no levitation occurred while Lutz' was awake - although he might have dreamt of it; the house was not built on any graveyard, Indian or otherwise; no windstorm or heavy snowstorm occurred on the nights that the book says they did; no policeman was ever called to witness the cloven-tracks in the snow; there was no snow. In addition, the floor plan of the house changed several times in later printings of the Anson book.

The Cromartys moved into the house after the Lutzes abandoned it.
They never experienced anything out of the ordinary with the house save one frustration.
They were plagued by an onslaught of sightseers who stopped to check out the infamous address.
The Cromartys sued the Lutzes for the nuisance. The Lutzes settled out of court.
In spite of the trials, the testimonies, and the obvious massive distortion of fact, North American newspapers particularly printed the dramatic and sensationalistic story of the horrors. The media editors, almost uniformly, decided that the truth of the fraud was not "catchy enough" to sell their newspapers. Fraud was just an everyday event; supernatural horror was special. The book became a bestseller. Movie producers followed the same line of reasoning as the media editors and a popular movie was produced. Few people to this day realize that they have been manipulated into believing that "The Amityville Horror" was real and that it was simply constructed to take the monies from their pocket which paid for their copy of the book or their admission to the theatre. The only haunting on Ocean Avenue was the financial woe of the Lutzes on which a desperate lawyer played and a greedy author wrote.

1975 - During November,
The Probability of a Nuclear War occurring before the year 2000 was affirmed by nuclear and political scientists from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) and Harvard University whom had met to discuss the question. Several resulting strategies would be developed with this end expected. Some of these were:

Progression towards a world government with global autonomy;
A continued race in technological development towards an unbeatable weapon;
Covert construction of huge bomb shelters for the protection of government and military officials.

Plan for war and you will war to happen; plan for peace and you will peace to happen.
Be careful what you plan for, you may get what you have faith in.

1975 - Late in November 1974 and through to 1976,
Mutilated Animals, began to be associated with sightings of UFO's.
These included thousands (up to 10,000) of cattle, sheep, dogs, cats, buffalo and horses.
After long and thorough investigation by many people, all of the incidents could be explained by one of several findings:

Burned circles on a hillside were actually silage piles where the heat from the decaying vegetable matter had created the circles in the snow, not heat-producing engines.
Cattle and other animals missing lips, tongue, ears, udders and reproductive organs exhibited attacks by small scavenging animals on those areas easiest to tear away from the carcass of an animal dead from disease, malnutrition, or age.
A group of Satanists would approach the animal at night, walking on large sheets of pasteboard, shoot it with a tranquillizer dart, inject it with a heart stimulant, puncture a neck artery and collect the blood in a bag, then remove various organs with a minimum of bleeding. Both the blood and the organs were used in ceremonies later. They were apprehended.
Farmers mutilated their own sick cattle to collect on insurance.
The media dramatized the findings and encouraged suggested associations between mutilation findings and UFO sightings. Autopsies sometimes revealed that the animals had died 3 or more months before the UFO sighting.
Cattle killed by a spore disease, blackleg, were originally written of as having been killed by a gas grenade ...
Several butchers mutilated some already dead cows as a joke.
Ten years before when a cow died, no one cared. Now, with the ominous secrecy and sensationalist media dramatization of UFO sightings and incidents, public distrust of government agencies was growing and world events were encouraging fear and paranoia at home.

Other FACTORS include these:

A. The animals frequently have 2 puncture wounds in the throat and are drained of blood without their vascular systems collapsing. No one knows how this could be done.
B. Only reproductive or digestive organs and, sometimes, an eye or tongue are removed.
Coyotes and other wild animals will neither eat the carcass or go within 10 feet of it.
Reproductive and mucous tissues would determine the amount of plutonium leakage into the environment locally.
(AEC & CIA ?)
C. Tissue samples revealed the presence of Chlorpromazine, a tranquillizer, in some corpses.
D. Cuts made on the animals may include 4 inch round circles, which when inspected under a microscope show that the incision was made between the cells, cell by cell. These cuts show no signs of bleeding nor decay or decomposition over long periods.

1975 - By the end of the year,
Pornography had become a commodity in the USA.
After an increasing discussion of what pornography was over the past years in the newspapers, magazines and legislatures of the USA, the definition and restrictions applied have become more and more narrow. Zones within major cities carry books, magazines, movies, articles, and entertainment which is X-rated. Some 780 theatres, including many elegant first-run houses routinely show X-rated movies 52 weeks of the year. The profit motive supports much of the risk taken in making it available with mark-ups running between 100% and 600%. Pornography seems to have a new social acceptability; for some, a fascination.
For some, it is a reaction to the old narrow Puritanism which buried sexuality in the dark, under the covers and behind ignorance and intolerance. An increasing desire for personal freedom of standards in a society that harbours many hypocritical social standards is like a teenager acting out on some level of idealism and rebellion. Changes in sexual attitudes, encouraged by low standards of popular music lyrics and sexual materialism and manipulation through advertising, is assisted by an increasing dependence on alcohol, cigarettes, prescription drugs and illegal substances. American society has increasingly become disoriented by a lack of fundamental standards being set by authoritarian leaders who, embarrassed by past weaknesses, have opted out of their role.

The increasing popularity of pornography signals the increasing weakness growing in inter-gender relationships.
Confused and often confining gender roles produce both intolerance, abuse and misunderstandings between the genders. Increasing emphasis on sexuality as a marketing tool, from the earliest age, stimulates children into developing and expressing such needs at an earlier age. Promotion of the ecstasy of the moment, conquest and presumed demonstration of maturity which supposedly attends the experience of intercourse have only served to advance the cause of physical sexual experience, a quite immature human response. Parental controls are largely absent because the parents recognize their own ignorance of the subject and feel incapable of setting standards. Those who do set standards do so authoritarian-style, without informing, preparing, or empathy.
The culture itself and those responsible for leading it, avoid including basic constructive interpersonal communication skills in the educational curriculum, such as empathy, listening, trust, tolerance, and honesty - because they themselves have little awareness of such skills. Basic ignorance of sexuality, lack of awareness of one's own sexuality, lack of interpersonal skills, an increasingly drab urban reality, and a growing need for a feeling of acceptance and sensuality have led to an increasing distrust of old standards and a juvenile try-everything-before-you-buy approach which defines this human society as starting at a point before hunting and gathering bands in its approach to cultural norms. Pornography followed compulsively does neither relieve the despair of low self-esteem nor the frustration of wanting to be cared for, and about, in a society of alienated persons.

1975 - on November 5th,
Travis Walton, was abducted near Heber, in the mountain forests of eastern Arizona, just north of the Fort Apache Indian Reservation, was missing for a full 5 days.
Returning home along an old logging road, a 7-man timber cutting crew encountered a saucer-shaped yellowish glow less than 100 feet from them. Travis Walton, 22 at the time, jumped out of the truck they were in and ran up to the object. A blue-green light beam shot out of the object and on striking Walton he was knocked into the air and backwards 10 feet. In terror, Mike Rogers, the crew foreman and driver of the truck, quickly accelerated the truck away from the scene. About 20 minutes later, the crew returned but could not find Walton.
When Rogers and the crew reported the incident to the county sheriff's office, they found themselves suspected of murder. The sheriff had each of them examined by a polygraph expert flown in from Phoenix who concluded with certainty that 5 of the 6 were telling the truth. The 6th had a prison record and was considered later to have demonstrated added anxiety in his answers due to fear of arrest and, this time, detention for an extended period if he did confer with the others.

Five days after the disappearance, Walton reappeared collapsed in a telephone booth at a small town filling station. He said he remembered crouching behind a log to get a look at the glowing object, and that when he stood up he was hit by a "physical blow" that knocked him unconscious. He regained consciousness on a table within the spacecraft, surrounded by humanoids dressed in brownish-orange from whom he pulled away, escaping to the interior of the craft. There, an entity appearing to be human found him and escorted him to a room in a much larger spacecraft in which there were two other humans, a man and a woman. They laid him on a table and placed a mask over his face after which he lost consciousness again. When he regained consciousness, he was lying on the pavement at the side of the road, watching the lighted bottom of the craft rise back into the sky. Walton flunked one polygraph test and passed another. Gradually, he later appeared to regain a more complete memory of his presence on board the craft.
Many suspicions of a hoax seemed to be present in this "abduction".

First, the crew foreman, Mike Rogers, was behind in the completion of a government contract which was in danger of his forfeiture of monies due him as a penalty for non-completion. His defence of the complications arising out of the incident allowed him to be let out of the contract without penalty. Poor management, low incomes and high unemployment were indicative of the region.
Secondly, members of the crew had demonstrated an earlier interest in UFOs and abductions at regional conferences concerning the topic.
Thirdly, in most abduction reports, the subjects involved are rarely abducted in the full awareness of bystanders: either the bystanders are placed into a form of suspended animation or they are co-abducted.
Fourthly, Walton was found harshly discarded after an extended absence of 5 days, naked and in a state of true or suggestive trauma; most abduction reports cover periods of hours and the subject is returned to their car, bed or other protected environment with a minimum of obvious trauma.

If the incident was a hoax intended to raise the popularity of the group, get Rogers out of a financial bind and, through publicity, raise the incomes of each - the intent backfired. The community largely ostracised them, an expert detective brought in disbelieved them from the beginning, family life for some of the participants was placed under extreme stress. These outcomes do also happen with the subjects of real abductions and statistical factors regarding "most" such experiences do not apply to all.

1975 - During the mid-1970s,
Transcendental Meditation was introduced to the world on a large scale by Maharishi Mahesh Yogi, of India.
By trimming away some of the more mystical aspects of Oriental meditation, he introduced an activity to North Americans which was simple enough and exotic enough to attract their attention. By the late 1970s, some 8,000 teachers would be charging a fee to share their skills.
Scientific tests with groups of well-trained Transcendental Meditators would soon show that significant physical changes do occur through the practice of TM. The heart beat slows, hypertension decreases, body temperature may decrease slightly, oxygen consumption may fall by 15% or more, alpha brain waves are significantly increased in density, constructive coping skills increase: ALL of these increase longevity.

1975 - On December 24, at 10.00 A.M.
The Forced Disappearance of a number of young women and men in Argentina was carried out.
One was a 24-year-old female student of mathematics and a literacy worker in the slums of Plaza del Mayo.
An entire block of the shanty town was aerial bombed by the government forces.
The woman mentioned above and numerous other women were never heard from again.
Much later, it would be revealed that many people had been detained, tortured, drugged, and murdered.

1975 - By the end of this year,
"E Systems", a private American company, was set up in Greenville, Texas, 50 miles NE of Dallas.
Initially it would become a front for CIA secret programs (special operations) which were usually financed from unvouchered non-traceable government funds. During the period 1975 to 1981, special missions to southeast Asia and the Philippines, would be conducted under the auspices of "Air Asia", a subsidiary of "Air America", another CIA front. "Air-Sea Forwarders", an American freight forwarding company would be retained for the transport of military supplies to southeast Asia and hard drugs back to the USA. Air-Sea was usually unaware of the true nature of its cargo for the shipping documents would be incorrect and the crates carried a government seal.
Throughout the 1970s, American CIA agents induced southeast Asian mountain tribes to become arms carrying guerilla fighters by purchasing unlimited quantities of heroin from the semi-agricultural tribes. The tribes became dependent on the cropping and sale of their poppy harvest and, in servitude and material greed, took up weapons to fight against southeast Asians believed to be Communists. Too often the brutal and ruthless killing methods they were taught were used against rival tribes and any non-local group which fell out of favour with these mercenary armies. At least 40,000 men were known to have been "trained" in this fashion. They contributed to the outright slaughter of 2 million Laotian and Cambodian civilians. Their drugs entered the civilian American streets and financed the continuance of the shipments of arms and other supplies back to southeast Asia. Gradually, American civil drug dependency rose, along with drug-related crime.

1975 - From 1975 to 1979,
International Arms Sales would bring $66.7 Billion to the international balance of payments of the USA, the USSR, France, the United Kingdom, and West Germany; clients around the world would receive the weapons they would be encouraged to stockpile in hopes of allaying fears of political unrest. Force is easier than understanding, communication and mutual respect, for humans, as demonstrated.

BACK to PEAR
INDEX
Memory Stimulators.
1976 - HIGHLIGHTS:
Movies:
Rocky, Taxi Driver; All the President's Men; Bad News Bears; Network; Bound for Glory; Marathon Man; Two Minute Warning; The Last Tycoon; Lipstick; The Shaggy D.A.; Revenge for a Rape; The Savage Bees; Helter Skelter; The Seven-Per-Cent Solution; Mother, Jugs and Speed; The Slipper and the Rose; W.C. Fields and Me; Bugsy Malone; Nickelodeon; The Outlaw Josey Wales; Breakheart Pass; The Story of Cinderella; Sherlock Holmes in New York; The Haunting of Julia

Television:
Mary Hartman, Mary Hartman; Charlie's Angels; Wonder Woman; The Bionic Woman; Serpico; Gemini Man; Spencer's Pilots.

NEWS:

Consumer Price Index: 170.5

1976 -
This year will become recognized as the reality threshold of the mass media.
Headed by television, live performances have almost become redundant, replaced by pre-planned, prepared, pre-recorded, acted out images. The North American public have come to associate television coverage with "live" coverage - the real thing. The movie "Network" will endeavour to utilize this shift in perceived reality to suggest emotionally to the viewer that they are watching an event as if it were real. The audience will be encouraged to feel and act out their feelings in response to manipulated circumstances.
In a data overloaded society in which the emotions of individuals have been dulled by overstimulation, the mass media will from now on provide entertainment which is often confused with reality. The commoner, first in North America, secondly in Japan, thirdly in Europe, and fourthly in the Soviet Union and the so-called 3rd world countries - humans will become dependent upon television, movies, and radio to provide them with an emotional life stimulated and calmed by the mass media.
It will become the Mother of the Masses: it will be turned on, to stimulate individual; it will be turned on, to turn aggravation and frustration into denial and laughter; it will be turned on to soothe away loneliness; it will be turned on, to motivate and encourage the individual. Humanity will suckle at the electronic breast. But what would happen to a generation so dependent, if the plug was pulled?

What coping capabilities does a civilization possess when it allows itself to believe, be manipulated by, and to obsess over an illusion. If a human cannot distinguish between a truth, lie, and half-lie (illusion), what will be the basis of life-influencing decisions, and what will be their accuracy?

1976 - Early in January
David Lilienthal, a pioneer in the regulation of the nuclear industry, national and international , spoke at the U.S.A. Senate Government Operations Committee hearing:
"... impending disaster of the rapid international spread of nuclear bombs requires that the United States immediately and unilaterally end shipment of nuclear equipment to all foreign countries. ... If a great number of countries come to have an arsenal of nuclear weapons, then I'm glad I'm not a young man and I'm sorry for my grandchildren. ... The tragic fact is that the atomic arms race is today proceeding at a more furious and insane pace than ever. Proliferation of capabilities to produce nuclear weapons of mass destruction is reaching terrifying proportions."

1976 - In January, one evening just after 11.00 p.m.
Three women reported being abducted.
They had been out to a restaurant for the evening and were on their way home.
After having driven for about 15 minutes, Ms. B. saw a bright red object high in the sky and called the attention of her companions to it. Suddenly, as they watched, it dropped towards the ground. At first, it looked as though it were a plane crashing. As it came closer to the ground, it swelled into a huge ball of fiery red colour. It ceased its descent at treetop level about 300 feet from the car. It then took the form of an oval-shaped dome of metallic grey colour; the outer edge had two red and two white lights. Mrs. A. noticed a bluish light glowing on the top of the dome.
After hovering over the treetops, the craft, now as large as a football field, moved over the car.
It remained motionless for a few seconds and then "angled around to the back of the car ... there was a huge light from the bottom that covered the whole highway ... it flooded the car ... it was white with a blue tint ... we were so frightened because, everywhere we looked, it was there ... the car was swaying back and forth ... Mrs. A., who was driving, attempted to get out from under the thing."

The speedometer registered 85 mph, but the car did not move and "wasn't going anywhere." The car began to go backwards, in spite of Mrs. A's attempts to drive it forward. The craft pulled it through the entrance to a farm protected by a cattle gate made from several rows of iron pipes laid across the driveway. Mrs. A's eyes began to burn; she could hardly see and "kind of went unconscious but struggled to stay awake."
At this point, Mrs. A felt a "piercing pain at the top of my head.
I could not hold my eyes open any longer, and I don't remember anything else until we were in H, a neighbouring town which is approximately 8 miles away." After becoming aware of the surroundings, she looked at her watch and realized one and a half hours had passed since the time they had crossed the cattle gate, but "it seemed that they had just snapped their fingers and they were there."

The women felt strange when they awakened at 12.45 a.m.
Each of the abductees wondered privately whether the others had experienced the same sighting equally. After returning home, Mrs. A. and the two women, as they told her later, had a "dreadful fear" that they had been sexually attacked. Mrs. A. felt "so very dirty ... and I was so weak ... my mind was just all confused ... We all three wondered ... each of us experienced a different examination or whatever they were going to do to us ... but it is hard to remember every detail." Feeling dirty, she took a shower. The water made her hands feel "burning as if they had been on fire."
The burning sensation continued for more than a day.
All three women discovered red marks on their necks that were three inches long and about one inch wide; it took two or three days for the marks to fade. Mrs. A. and her companions suffered piercing headaches that lasted for a week. The pain and the strain of their unexplainable experiences left them exhausted. But even more frightening were the strange encounters that continued during the following months. These had not entirely ceased 18 months after the original abduction.

After having gone to sleep for a short time, Mrs. A. woke up at 3.00 a.m..
Something told me to get into my car and go back to the place of the abduction ... I was so frightened, but I drove all the way back, and, totally alone, at three o'clock in the morning ... I got out of my car ... and I started to walk across the cattle gate." In walking across the iron pipes, Mrs. A. felt an icy wind and she fell flat on her face. (light snow had fallen earlier and a thin layer of ice was on some of the ground) After she had fallen, she ran back to her car, fearing that the action had been evoked by the beings in the earlier craft.
Shaking with fright, she became even more frightened when she saw that 3 rings were missing from her fingers. One morning 6 or 7 weeks later, she discovered one of the rings on the doorstep of her trailer as she went to the mailbox. "I was so frightened, and I screamed, and shut the door and didn't know what to do, and I was scared ... no one knew it yet, how the ring would show up 20 miles away" from where it disappeared. She was too frightened to keep the ring, fearing that the space beings had followed her to return it, so "she threw it as far as she could."

Other exceptional events happened.
Mrs. A. noticed that the hands of her wristwatch speeded up and no longer told the correct time; many things she touched crumbled. Her parakeet, a long-time pet, "shivered with fright" when she passed his cage; stopped eating and died after 3 weeks. Ever since the initial episode, Mrs. A. had felt that invisible forces were watching her. She reported that she saw orange disks in the sky on about 15 different occasions, and she strongly suspected that her abductors occupied them. The discs became visible only at night and they moved at rapid speeds, "straight up and down, coming to a complete stop." At times they seemed to follow her car. One night at home alone, she experienced an unbearable feeling of someone staring at her, and she yelled out, "Look, leave me alone ... I just couldn't tolerate it any longer ... I feel the fight is just about over."
Mrs. A. suffered from unexplainable illnesses for several months after the encounter.
On one occasion, she developed severe chest pains and nausea. Her heart tested as normal. Her left arm became paralysed, incapacitating her for 6 or 7 weeks. She felt she had become more attuned to happenings around her, and she prepared herself for unusual experiences in the future.

At one point, she had felt uneasy all day during which she felt restless and worried without known reason, something unusual for her. Later in the day, her son-in-law phoned to inform her that his father had suddenly died that morning. She found this and other experiences to be frightening and disturbing to her peace of mind.
Ms. B. was one of Mrs. A.'s companions on the night of the abduction.
She was a 35-year-old divorcee who seems to have been made more distraught by her experiences than the other two women were. Her mother had died of cancer a year after their abduction and she felt that her own health had weakened. She told a sceptical interviewer that she was terrified about what had happened to her; she could not leave the house for days following the abduction and remained fearful for months. Since the episode, Ms. B. had become very dependent on her friend Mrs. A. and was amazed that they had become so attuned to each other's feelings. She added that they both "react to the same thing at the same time in the same ways, even though we are miles apart."

For many months after the abduction, Ms. B. felt very depressed and fearful; she became convinced that she would never see another birthday, as her "life is going to be destroyed." Ms. B. was judged by an interviewer to be a very dependent individual who had been very attached to her mother, and who was healthy until the time of the encounter. A few weeks afterwards, Ms. B's mother developed a rapidly spreading cancer, "out of the clear blue ... and within a month it had gone all the way from her lungs to the brain ... she had a stroke; she was paralysed." After her mother became seriously ill, Ms. B. felt alone and turned to her friend, Mrs. A., whom she submitted for her mother and actually began to call "mother".
Following the abduction, Ms. B. began to have strange experiences.
One night, just before falling asleep, she saw an eye that seemed to watch her; it later became two eyes. A few months later, she had a strange encounter after the local television station had gone off the air. She was lying on the couch in her living room and a sensation she believed to come from the spirit world made her turn around. When she did, she saw a man walk through the wall. He was standing in front of her snack bar, "six feet in front of me, and he had this golden hair ... it was curly and this beard." He could not be human; he wore a "robe like those of Biblical times, but was clad also in blue jeans rolled up to his knees." He was about five feet tall and had a "look of authority". He did not express himself verbally, but "talked to (her) mind." His whole demeanour instilled a feeling of security, and she was no longer frightened as she had been during the previous 6 months.

Ms. B., who believed that her experiences with the flying saucer were of a spiritual nature, knew that the man must have been an angel sent by God, as "God sent Christ here to die for us because He loved us, but He says He is coming back. But the next time, it's going to be terrible." She compared her experiences with those of Ezekial; she had suffered as the prophet had suffered, and her suffering was for the good of the people. It had become her duty, now, to "speak where people can hear me." She felt she must be willing to sacrifice her life to deliver the "Message" to the people. However, up to 18 months after the encounter she had not delivered her message.
The three women contacted doctors and the police after their experience, and local newspapers carried the story. UFO organizations became involved and after 6 months, a psychologist hypnotized them in an effort to reconstruct a major part of their abduction which, until then, was largely absent by amnesia.

While under hypnosis, Mrs. A. recalled that her car had been sucked into the spacecraft.
She was separated from the other women, and she found herself lying on a very narrow bed with her arms pinned down to prevent her from getting up. Her face was covered most of the time, adding to her intense fear. She begged
"so hard to be permitted to get up and for someone to talk to ... I would reach out, and I couldn't feel anything, as if there were nothing there."
At one point, her abductors removed the covering from her eyes, and she saw "beings ... they were dark, hooded beings, approximately four feet tall ... but it was dark in the room, and the only things I could see were the eye and just a hand ... it wasn't fingers ... it looked as if a wing had been stretched between the fingers ... it was jagged on the edges and kind of came to a point ... it was the size of a small hand.
They put the things back over my eyes.
One other time it was removed. I saw this instrument thing up in front of me, and I was thinking that it was keeping me alive, because I was so hot and dry. I don't know what. It was a panel thing, approximately 2 feet in diameter. It was completely round and pulsating ... and from the centre, it looked like a clear, transparent coil going all the way around ... it would be between pink and red. It would be pulsating. I don't know why, but I got the impression that it was keeping me alive. I fought so hard to stay awake...
It was so hot, I couldn't swallow ... At one point, I could not breathe ... It felt as if something liquid was pouring over me, but it wasn't water ... and at that point, I was trying to gasp for breathe and I couldn't catch it ... and then it was like a bandaid being pulled off my skin ... The first thing I thought of was that they were making something that looks like me (like a mould of her body) ... it was an unpleasant feeling ... I would just come and go, and I remember desperately begging and crying to anyone to speak to me ..."

Frightened, she felt under the complete control of the "space people"; her will was subjugated to their command that was established by "eye contact". She was told a subject of great importance to people on Earth: "I feel that I may be holding a great secret, and I promised that I would not tell it if they just let me go home." At these words, Mrs. A. became tearful; it was the only occasion during the interview when she showed any indication of being emotionally disturbed. She seemed to be burdened by having to keep the secret that she was not to share with anyone.
The third woman, Mrs. C., was in her late 40s; she was the only currently married woman in the group. She expected that her husband did not believe the story of the women's encounter; therefore, she attempted to conceal what had happened by not talking about the events. She had discussed her perceptions of the experience many times with her companions but refused to be interviewed. According to the reports of the others, she was confined in a device that was like an "iron lung" ... When she would try to yell for us, this thing would tighten around her throat. ... she felt that there was a bullet-shaped object, only larger, being put on her chest and pressed real hard, and she cried softly at times, seeing that it was hurting and she was being choked. The bullet-shaped object on her chest chocked her throat, making a red imprint that remained visible for several days.

Ms. B. was most disturbed by the painful events of her abduction.
Under hypnosis, she revealed that she had been placed on a table and
"four of the (humanoids) were sitting around ...
They were dressed in white doctor's uniforms ... their faces were completely covered except for their eyes." She could see "stars and things" when she looked up. At the beginning of the "examination", the space beings pulled her feet underneath her body, which was extremely painful to her. They ignored her pleas to loosen the agonizing grip on her feet; they proceeded to take her eyebrows off, and they pulled her eyes out of the sockets until "at one point her eyes were almost lying on her cheek ... they left them connected to the sockets and placed them back after they had examined the eyes."

During the interview, this one 18 months after the abduction, the significance of the events became more understandable to Ms. B.
"well I know I was down in this volcano, and I was looking through rocks, real smooth, and I was looking up, and it was jagged ... a volcano was the way, as I could explain it, and I could see the sky ... I looked back, and there were rooms back there, and the ship had three floors, and the top floor was where the dome was ... I remember sitting there, and I was watching myself leave the other ship ... and I knew that (Mrs. A. and Mrs. C.) were back there in that one, and I thought that I would never see them again or the earth again ... They were testing me to know what I Could take ... whether I could go fast, to go their speed, without killing me ... It was the speed of lightning ... my feet were stuck on a stool like they were glued."

As she moved through the sky, her feet were twisted underneath her body by a power coming from instruments under the table.
"There was a big stone, clear-like, and there was lightning coming out of it ... It would shoot out from all angles."

She described the stone as a large crystal, about 4 feet high and almost 10 feet in diameter.

The three responded differently in their relationships after the abduction.
Mrs. A. and Ms. B. were drawn closer together by the experience; they spent much time together and shared many activities. They travelled together and supported each other against the townspeople, who ridiculed them. But they spent much of their time exchanging ideas about the many inexplicable mysteries which seemed to surround their experience.
After what happened, Ms. B. went out and started buying every book she could find, looking for something to explain to her what had happened. Then she looked to the Bible to provide her with the answers and in the Books of Ezekiel, Job, and Revelations she believed she had found some of the answers: she now thought that the flying saucers had been on Earth for some time; that she must accept her assigned role without question; that she was being tested to prove her devotion and her willingness to bring God's warnings to people to better their ways. She was somewhat resigned to the possibility that, as at other times in religious history, the people would not listen or change their ways and terrible days would come.

Mrs A. disputed the position held by Ms. B. at that stage (18 months after) and she felt sufficient time had elapsed for her to be released from her pledge of silence. She responded that she had been told that "they journeyed to earth to test their chances of survival on this planet and in its atmosphere ... that their solar system is dying ... and they are searching for another planet ....
The abductees passed polygraph tests.
Otto Billig, one researcher and interviewer, made light of the testimonies putting the experiences down to "highway hypnosis", "hallucination", "hypnagogic states" - described in the literature from as early as 1936. The latter are theoretically connected to "misconceptions, primitive imagery and symbols that emerge to conscious levels... and occur when the ego function is impaired during altered states of consciousness due to a variety of conditions as in half-wakened states prior to falling asleep or while under emotional and physical stress in individuals who may have become susceptible to external pressure.

1976
Charlotte King of Sacramento, California, a Walk-In recounts that ...
(p79) ... sighted her first UFO ... in 1950 ... the foghornlike noises that she began hearing in 1976 "caused so much trouble in my marriage, because no one else could hear them, that after 3 months I filed for divorce." To determine whether the noises were psychic, she enroled in a parapsychology class and ... discovered that she "knew things about the pyramids and their energies that were simply not in the books."
... she said that on ... she was feeling such emotional and physical stress that (she tried to commit suicide) ... just wanted out, to end emotional and physical pain ... reached the hospital too late ... after 16 hours in intensive care she suddenly roused and "became aware ... that I had a job to do ... the old Charlotte,... departed ... and the "new" replacement came from Sirius to alert earthlings on the radical changes that were going to occur on planet earth. The Walk-in Charlotte did put her marriage back together for awhile ... the "new"
Charlotte determined to search in earnest for the causes and sources of the sound and the pain ... she could hear sounds in the 7 to 10 dB range. ... her predictions reveal 85% accuracy on earthquakes and 100% accuracy on volcanic activity worldwide. She explains that there are a series of seven tones varying in pitch, frequency and rhythm that she has learned to associate with seismic activity in specific geographical areas. ... A great deal of pain is associated with the phenomenon ...

(the walk-in) from Sirius came into the body when she found that the occupant of a particularly sensitive body wanted to leave, and that this body would work well for her in her mission to warn earthlings .... Hers is not a karmic indebtedness, but a divinely given ability to help others, through her alerts. ... convinced that it's an actual ability to respond to geomagnetic effects, ... after experiencing pain for some hours or days beforehand, a common denominator (with 13 sensitives) is that shortly before the actual quake, the pain leaves and there's a euphoric feeling.

1976 - On January 14 during the night
Jane Chapin of French Gulch, near Redding, California, U.S.A., saw a being near her bed.
She did not see any feet and when she later drew a silhouette of the being, the head was flat, with large eyes and a big nose, an extended arm.
Jane was born in 1903.
Due to their age, the inaccuracies in reports published by some researchers and media, and their victimization by some individuals and lack of awareness of professional investigation procedures, the Chapins became defensive and uncooperative over the following years. Health difficulties which could have been lessened and which arose after the experiences they had, consequently may never have received adequate treatment.
(see also October 30, 1969 and December 27, 1977)

1976 - During January,
George Bush, new director of the USA CIA did nothing to restrict the Iraqi search-and-destroy campaign against the Kurds and he restricted the House of Representatives Select Committee on Intelligence Activities report which would have indicated the early USA support for the Kurds.

1976 - A January report by
A.G. Wedum reviewing the safety precautions undertaken at Fort Detrick in the 1950s and 1960s , the then USA Army's center for research into the potentials of biological warfare, concluded:
"... there will be some laboratory infections, usually due to breaks in rubber gloves (attached to the safety cabinets), human exposure during entrance and exit of materials, leaks in the system, and human error."

1976 - On January 23,
17-year-old Shelley McLenaghan, saw a "weird" red and green light in the sky near Bolton, in the north of England.
It was 5.15 P.M.. She described the object as the size of a small house, flat on top, with slopping sides and three legs. She felt
"a terrible pressure on my head and shoulders, an off taste in my mouth.
My teeth seemed to vibrate. When I tried to run it was like being in a nightmare.
My arms and legs moved, but in slow motion. I tried to scream; nothing came out."

That weekend, Shelley became ill: a purple rash covered her neck, chest, shoulders, and upper back. Her eyes and joints ached. In her mouth her top fillings had come out, and the bottom ones had crumbled.

1976 - Early in the year,
A stranger who had never been seen before, strolled into Lois's Cafe, in Happy Camp, northern California, U.S.A.
Two women were in the cafe at the time who had experienced UFO sightings previously.
They were quietly having dinner at separate tables. All conversation stopped in the cafe when the man entered. He ordered a steak dinner but seemed unable to use a knife and fork, and eventually left without paying. He had pale skin, oriental looking eyes, wore a bizarre sort of shirt and no coat although it was the middle of winter. He smiled constantly at people in a strange, forced grimace. Among the peculiar things he did was a brave attempt to drink Jello out of a dish.

1976 - On February 8,
Two ufologists were in Happy Camp, northern California, U.S.A. taking testimony from witnesses of area sightings when they heard someone on a CB radio reporting an orange light over Slater Butte. They observed the light over the ridge, going up and down twice. It was described as brilliant, deep orange and its glow reminded them of "a forest fire behind a hill."

1976 - In February,
The National Power Nuclear Reactor Project final contract was signed.
It would become the largest construction project (in cost) ever completed (to date) in the Philippines.
Located in an environmentally and politically unstable country, the power plant would have one 626-megawatt reactor (two were originally considered) and the price would be $722 million ($500 million for two reactors was originally proposed), plus, it would cost an additional $387 million for interest and escalation costs, bringing the total to $1.1 billion. Financing of the reactor was arranged with the USA Export-Import Bank.

The usual Marcos & bureaucracy kickbacks had kicked in.
Disini received at least $50 million personally, of which he gave $30 million to Marcos, and split the rest with Vergara and Disini's business partner, Rodolfo Jacob. A new Disini company, "Power Contractor, Inc.", became the chief subcontractor of civil works on the project. Another Disini company, "Technosphere Consultants Group", provided engineering and construction management.
A further Disini company, "Summa Insurance Corporation", was paid a $10 million premium to write a $668 million policy on the project - the largest single policy ever written in the Philippines. Disini took over "Asia Industries", becoming the Westinghouse Philippine distributor. When under investigation by the USA Securities and Exchange Commission, a district manager for "Westinghouse" in the Philippines destroyed 6 volumes of documents relating to the project and then retired. The investigators were looking for inappropriate disbursement of monies, such as bribes.

The question of location was answered not with safety and environmental or economic consideration but only in accord to how Ferdinand Marcos and his associates could make money from the sale: the two were in opposition. The Romualdez families had taken over a large part of Bataan, opposite Corregidor, some of which was used to build a presidential seaside retreat, the rest turned into a tax-free industrial development zone. Ferdinand made it a condition of the sale that Westinghouse had to build the reactor on Bataan.
National Power , with the help of the "UN International Atomic Energy Agency" (IAEA), picked a seaside location there, and hired "Ebasco Services", a subsidiary of "Ensearch Corporation" of Dallas, to test the safety of the site and monitor construction. Ebasco concluded that the site was vulnerable to tidal waves. National Power compromised on a nearby bluff. "Westinghouse" began clearing the site in March, 1976, BEFORE permits were released OR seismic tests completed. The IAEA recommended that construction be stopped; already, Westinghouse had spent $200 million.
With much behind-the-scenes encouragement, Librado Ibe, head of the Philippine Atomic Energy Commission, issued the construction permit in April 1979, a week after the Three Mile Island nuclear accident in the USA. He then took his wife and children to live in the USA, fearing that the same or worse would happen in the Philippines. Bankers who had delayed the contracts and business arrangements of President Marcos associate had been subjected to assault and threat to their family.

1976 - On February 17,
President Ford, in a statement to the press, reasserted the special privileges which had been accorded to the CIA in the past:
"It is essential that the irresponsible and dangerous exposure of our nation's intelligence secrets be stopped. Openness is a hallmark of our democratic society but the American people have never believed that it was necessary to reveal secret war plans of the Department of Defense, and I do not think they wish to have true intelligence secrets revealed either."

1976 - On February 18,
President Ford signed "Executive Order 11905" declaring that:
"No employee of the United States Government shall engage in,
or conspire to engage in, political assassination."

The executive order removed covert operations from the Director of the CIA's direct responsibility and placed it with an Operations Advisory Group (OAG), which also replaced the 40 Committee. The OAG consisted of the Secretaries of State and Defense, the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, the DCI, and the President's national security adviser. The Attorney General and the Director of the Office of Management and Budget were to attend the group's meetings as observers. Such a group could not be expected to run covert operations. It had no effective staff. For the bureaucracy, it meant that the DCI (Director of Central Intelligence) would have to consult far more widely BEFORE any operation was started.
Intelligence coordination was made the province of a 3-man "Committee on Foreign Intelligence" (CFI) chaired by the DCI and reporting to the National Security Council (NSC). The committee would "control budget preparation and resource allocation for the "National Foreign Intelligence Program" (NFIP) now shared by the DCI with a deputy assistant to the President for national security affairs and a deputy secretary for defense for intelligence (a new post created for this purpose).

A new director, George Bush, appointed 4 weeks earlier, was to oversee this change and to run the CIA during the election year. Bush had been seen as a political opportunist, by some, and the congressional leadership insisted that Ford give them a commitment that Bush would not be his vice-presidential running mate or else they would block his confirmation as Director. Ford had also removed Henry Kissinger from the post of National Security Adviser thereby making the National Security Council more accessible and influential to the president.
Bush was regarded as "A quasi-aristocrat on the one hand and a self-made Texas businessman on the other."
Self-conscious rectitude was his hallmark. Bush concentrated on improving morale at the Agency during his tenure. Bush would arrange with British Intelligence to have the USA intelligence community provide them with important elements of satellite surveillance not only of the Soviet Union but of other parts of the world. This sharing made it easier to convey the information to the Federation of Peoples' offices in Switzerland.

Bush felt keenly that the CIA still had a role in protecting the USA from surprises, either by intelligence gathering, or, disinformation. His father, Prescott Bush, had been a U.S. Senator and a wealthy Republican. George Bush had proven himself as a Navy flyer during WWII, graduated from Yale University with a degree in economics in 1948, and had been a successful entrepreneur in the oil-equipment business in Texas.
Bush had learned the practicalities of the American capitalist system: find ANY need, politically or economically induced, which you can acquire a monopoly over and a sanction for, provide results (product and delivery) at a cost-effective advantage, keep your strategy and procedures discrete, and, when the market is established - take your profits and get out. Profits can take the form of political favours from obligations owing to you, interim excess monies from an exclusive controlled market, inclusion into a political/military/industrial elite. Importing large amounts of hard addictive drugs into the USA by way of oil drilling platforms off the coast of Texas had been his key.

Bush was committed to the people in the CIA, for, as a contracted agent, they had been loyal to him.
He knew the inner purposes of the Agency and agreed with those purposes. Bush listened more than most of the other directors who had preceded him or would follow him. He knew that listening would garner him more information and respect from the professionals at the CIA than if he tried to tell everyone else their job. He used his position to become completely conversant with intelligence collection and analysis. Bush was an insider. Bush was for secrecy. When Jimmy Carter won the presidency in the fall, Bush's 10 month tenure would finish. Carter was an outsider; he respected the image of John F. Kennedy and patterned himself after it; he wanted the CIA laid bare, and, possibly discontinued.
The prohibition order appears to have been a political rationalization, in reality for it does NOT discourage assassinations for reasons other than political - perhaps the "target" is simply disliked by those in authority. It is highly suspect when Jimmy Carter is moved to pass a similar Executive Order, 12036 on January 24, 1978, and Ronald Reagan follows up with another one, Executive Order 12333, on December 4, 1982.

In 1975 or 1976,
On a rainy night, 2 students, who were walking on the campus of the University of Bogota , heard a strange sound overhead. On looking up, they saw a disc swinging in the air as if in difficulty. They estimated its diameter at four meters and its altitude at 1,000 meters. While this first object seemed out of control, they observed four other disks flying close to it of the same size and shape.
As the students took refuge from the rain under a tree, they saw spouts of a bright liquid ejected from the central disk, some of which fell into the puddles on the street, producing a vapour. All five objects then rose and disappeared into the low rain clouds. The witnesses recovered two metal chunks, about 4 inches by one-fourth inches in size, after letting it cool for ten minutes.

The first analysis was that the metal was aluminum with traces of magnesium and unidentifiable metals. Further testing indicated 93.7% aluminum, 4.8% phosphorus, 0.9% iron, and the rest in trace elements. The sample had been "melted through and through". Further testing showed a surface layer of carbon, oxygen, and nitrogen. Beyond this unexplained layer was found aluminum, magnesium, potassium, sulphur, sodium, and silicium. Phosphorus and iron showed in trace amounts. The sample did not contain any fluoride, a normal by-product of the aluminum refining process, was absent of heavy metals and water.

It should be noted that such "ejected" materials may be of no more significance than the contents of a car ashtray relative to the composition of the car or the nature of the persons who have been in it.

1976 - In the February 28 issue of "Science",
"Man-animal hybrids" were of high interest to the scientific community.
An article entitled "A Computer Under Your Hat", in this journal of the "American Association for the Advancement of Science", contained a quote by Joshua Lederberg that "there is enormous scientific interest in organisms augmented by fragments of the human chromosome set."
A hybrid of human and other animal species is often called a CHIMERA.
In Greek mythology, a chimera was a being with the head of a lion, the body of a goat, and the tail of a serpent. It spat fire. In biology now, a chimera was the name applied to any living structure in which chromosomes of different species are combined. Often there is a human component.

Human intellectualism, scientific emotional immaturity, denial, greed and paranoia about survival made the malleability of humanity a perceived necessity. Perhaps we could be more "perfect" physically, if we took the advantages which other species carried into our own genetic future. The emphasis was on improving organ function and longevity.
Humans still had not learned that changing organ function can change hormone availability which can change emotional expression and immune function which can change disease frequency which can influence longevity. The equation is highly complex; the result can be a benefit or a liability and that may depend upon whether your assessment is long-term or short-term.

1976
On March 8, the largest recorded Meteor to have fallen is observed and retrieved in China. It weighs almost 2 tons.

1976 - On March 24,
The Argentine Armed Forces were given the authority to "control" the population, which under the new military junta, were lobbying for democracy. By February, 1984, democracy would return.
Meanwhile, 30,000 teenagers and young adults would be detained on suspicion of working against the government. All would be murdered. None would be legally charged or tried in court. Under torture or the influence of drugs, the names of other suspects would be acquired. To conceal the illegal and immoral activities, corpses were dismembered and parts of different bodies would by interchanged to frustrate any later identification.

Periodically, some of those questioned and drugged would be loaded unconscious aboard an armed forces plane, flown out over the ocean, stripped, and dumped out of the cargo hatch - to die of trauma when they struck the water, or, from drowning. The local Roman Catholic priests were informed of these events by the relatives of the victims. The Vatican was also notified. No formal acknowledgement of, denunciation of, or penalties for such crimes would be forthcoming from the Roman Catholic Church, the presumed state religion. International publicity of the atrocities would first become widespread in 1995.
A military general would first testify in 1987 that he had personally dropped over 30 people from planes over the ocean. For suspected collaboration with the terrorists, 6 people, including a pregnant woman, were burned to death near a small village. In the process of its mother burning, the foetus inside of at least one pregnant woman was propelled at least 10 or more feet out of the body - a common process caused by the pressures bloating up the woman's body as she burned to death. Military forces frequently broke into the homes of suspects, or their parents, pointing machine guns and brutalizing the men. Some were tortured in front of their families before being taken away. Some were threatened because they were Jews, or were believed to be.

1976 - On March 29,
Eduard Meier, near Hasenbol, Switzerland, photographed a sequence of 9 positions he had captured the flight of a Pleiadian beamship in. The ship flew in from the west and passed behind a tree next to a steep drop in a mountain area beset by changeable weather. The 9th photo, termed "the sunlight scene" impressed many investigators.

1976 - By April,
"Seafront Petroleum and Mineral Resources" was manipulated by President Ferdinand Marcos, and his associates, Jose Campos and Rolando Gapud - to produce a stock market profit of $9.5 million.
Reports that major oil reserves lay off Palawan Island drove Ferdinand Marcos to demand that the owners of Seafront turn over to him all their oil options, or else. Like that of more than 140 other Philippine companies during the period of martial law, the ownership was changed several times to end up in the hands of Marcos and his front men.

Seafront's first drilling came in dry.
Anyone familiar with oil drilling would not be alarmed at this:
one good producing well out of 10 drilled was once considered to be a good average.
Ferdinand and his associates knew little of the industry and were only interested in profits.
Ferdinand refused to take defeat against his pride. He announced on national television that (the dry hole) had been a major oil strike. This resulted in the usual confirmed result .. a rush on the Manila stock market and the price of the stock rose quickly.
Marcos, Campos and Gapud, dumped their stock and a few days later the stock crashed 65% in the selloff and as Ferdinand announced that he was "launching an investigation" to discover if there had been inside trading. As the former Seafront owner, Alfonso Yuchengco, declared, it "was the biggest hypocrisy of all time." A once building company with a potentially good future had been stolen, manipulated, and, destroyed. More would follow.
It was one more instance of humans blandly believing whatever mass media authoritatively reported, and, believing that their civil and government authorities had any better ability to make choices for them than they themselves could.

1976 - On April 14,
Eduard Meier, near Schmarduel, Switzerland, records a picture of a Pleiadian beamship showing a Swiss Air Force jet fighter on manoeuvres in the background.

1976 - On April 23,
The following occurred to Mrs. Jean Kirk (not her real name) in northern California.

The location was a small house with a large yard in Project City, north of Redding.
About 8.15 or 8.30 P.M., Mrs Kirk found she was unable to watch her television as the set had "blacked out" leaving only static and a series of random dots. The radio was only providing static as the time so Mr. Kirk went to bed. Mrs. Kirk thought there might be something outside that could be the problem.

Mrs. Kirk went outside where she observed a small but well-defined "cloud" 300 feet away, coming towards her at ground level. It was "solid white with sharp edges". It hovered behind a tree and was illuminated by a streetlight. As it started moving towards her, she first thought she should run inside the house; then she thought that "a cloud could not hurt her," and her fear went away. What seemed odd at the time was that the sky was cloudless with many stars.
The cloud moved directly over her and Mrs. Kirk could see under and behind the cloud, but she observed no stars above it. She had a short spell of dizziness. All the dogs in the neighbourhood were barking furiously. There was a brief episode of rain; trees, particulary a 40 foot tree nearby, bent wildly in the vicinity, although Mrs. Kirk could feel no wind. The cloud disappeared and she now saw two big lights in the sky; a steady green and a steady red light, slowly moving north without any sound.

Soon she could only see the red light; it was large and hovered.
"It was bright red like the light of an ambulance, but bigger for that distance."
It moved to the top of the hill, in a direction in which the cloud had first appeared and was still hovering there when Mrs. Kirk, feeling cold, decided to return inside the house.
In the following months, the weeds in the area where the cloud had been observed grew to a size double or triple that of identical plants in other areas. They continued to exhibit this pattern of exceptional growth for two years. In April 1977, the weeds actually measured 8 feet tall, while typical weeds of that family only grow to 3-1/2 feet. The grass had grown densely to about 5 feet. Mrs. Kirk cut the weeds but they were high again by May 1978.

1976 - On April 23,
Luis Fernandes Barros, a wealthy businessman and rancher in Quixada, Brazil, was found dazed at 7.00 A.M..
Luis reported that 2 hours before daybreak he saw a large luminous object that projected a beam in his direction. His health deteriorated rapidly: he suffered from nausea, diarrhea, and headaches. He was given medicine by a local doctor which was ineffective. He was further diagnosed as having a brain lesion and sent home.
In the following months, Barro's health continued to worsen.
He no longer told his story because no one believed him except the doctor and his wife.
The doctor, Doctor Moreira Megalhes, himself was ridiculed for taking the report seriously.
In three months the victim's speech deteriorated, and his hair turned white; six months later he had regressed to the level of a one- or two-year old child. In 1986, he was apparently starring ahead, seeing nothing. The doctor, even then, could show that Barros had control of his arms and legs and had not suffered a stroke.

1976 - On April 27,
"Conjugal Dictatorship" by Luis Mijares was published, noting the political and personal embarrassments of the Philippine Marcos regime: Dovie Beams affair, torture by Ver's agents, and the faking of Marcos war record. The book was removed from every bookstore and even the Library of Congress by Ver's agents.
By February, 1977, Mijares himself had disappeared.
Mijares phoned his wife, Manila Judge Priscilla Mijares, saying he was taking a Pan American flight to Guam. He left in the company of Querube Makalintal, a Marcos intelligence officer posing as a revenue attache at the Philippine Consulate in San Francisco. Fabian Ver also boarded the same flight. They changed to a Philippines Air Lines flight to Manila in Guam. NISA agents met the trio at the airport in Manila and took Mijares to Ver's headquarters at Fort Bonifacio, where he was put in a dungeon.

1976 - By May,
The Argentina Military Junta had implemented ruthless measures to suppress civilian subversives who were planting bombs with apparent indiscrimination.
During the next 7 years, approximately 27,000 suspected subversives would be murdered.
Teenagers and adults, males and females were involved. Often, after beatings and torturous interrogations, detained persons would be killed and their bodies incinerated and buried in mass graves. At least 2,000 persons were drugged and thrown alive from airplanes high over the ocean.
These activities were authorized by the highest levels of military and political authority and representatives of the church in this primarily Roman Catholic country, approved the flight executions as "a Christian form of death." The officers involved typically justified their actions as part of a routine of following the orders of a superior authority; in protection of the Fatherland; retribution for the chaos and destruction caused by the civil unrest. While much was suspected, little was acknowledged until the mid-1990's.

The Argentine Navy School of Mechanics (ESMA) in Buenos Aires was used as a front for the kidnapping, torture and disappearance of most of the thousands of civilians involved. "Cleanup flights" were conducted every Wednesday for a period of more than 3 years. Up to 20 prisoners would be dropped into the ocean on each flight. NONE were guerrilla leaders. Adolfo Francisco Scilingo, a lieutenant-commander in the Argentine Navy would later describe the 2 flights which he supervised as typical and including the following details.
Male and female prisoners were selected for the flight and told that they were going to be transferred to a prison in the south (or to a concentration camp) and that they had to be vaccinated. The "vaccine" injected was a sedative which made them groggy, barely able to walk. They were helped up the stairs from the detention cells at the motor pool of the Navy Mechanics School into a truck. It took them to the restricted military zone of Aeroparque, Buenos Aires' in-town airport.

A Navy physician on board would then inject the prisoners with a second sedative, which put them to sleep. The prisoners were then undressed. Over the ocean, at a predesignated spot chosen according to known currents which were expected to carry them further out to sea, the sedated naked males and females were dumped out. Other persons not personally involved with the flights expected that the prisoners had gone to a prison or concentration camp. But their were no large camps or prisons.
Numerous bodies were recovered from the South Atlantic and examined by forensic experts. They found indications of "polytraumatism" that indicated the bone-breaking impact of hitting the water from (a fall) a considerable height, at about 160 k/ph. At the time, there was some discussion as to whether the victims could have been abducted by extraterrestrials, experimented on and then dumped from a UFO.

Rationally and visually, injecting fellow humans with sedatives and throwing them into the night sky made it emotionally easier for the executioners to murder.
"No one was aware he was going to die. ...
Because they put the prisoners to sleep, they didn't have to face them as people.
... It is almost an act of magic. They evaporate."

The ESMA officers never discussed the flights among themselves though most were involved such that anyone who wished to maintain a good performance record for advancement would take part in one or more flights. All would be protected from prosecution by a series of government decisions and pardons from the mid-1980's and many of the officers involved in the extermination flights would still be on active duty in the 1990s.

1976 - On June 22,
A UFO in the vicinity of the Canary Islands, Spain, was observed by many people.
The Spanish Air Ministry later released documentation on 12 of those sightings.
It also impounded photographs taken by a private citizen and instructed the local doctor, Don Francisco-Julio Padron Leon not to speak about his experience. That information was released some months later.
A light, part yellowish and part blue, was seen moving across the sea towards the Spanish Navy corvette Atrevida at 9.27 p.m., slowly gaining in altitude. The light stopped suddenly, went out, and was replaced by a rotating beam of light shinning downwards. Two minutes later, the light took the form of a great halo that continued for 40 minutes, lighting up both sea and land.
The original yellowish-blue light reappeared, splitting into two parts with the bluish part remaining within the halo while the upper part began to climb in an irregular spiral before vanishing in the direction of the neighbouring island of Gran Canaria. It took only 3 minutes to reach there, reaching the astonishing speed of 1900 mph over a distance of 85 nautical miles. Don Padron

Leon and his taxi driver, Francisco Estevez, while travelling between Galdar and Agaete in the NW corner of Gran Canaria, at that time, were suddenly confronted by a giant sphere which seemed to hang a few yards above the ground. The sphere was outlined in pale greyish-blue; the radio in the taxi lost effectiveness almost immediately. Both the doctor, the driver, and Santiago del Pino, the young man who had requested the doctor to visit his mother, felt a wave of cold.
They watched what appeared to be 2 enormous beings inside the sphere, which was transparent and the size of a 2-storey house, working on either side of a central bank of instruments, manipulating levers and switches with hands clad in black cones. They appeared to be wearing tight-fitting clothes in a deep shade of red and had black helmets. The shape of the backs of their heads was disproportionately large.

The taxi driver switched on a spotlight, following which the sphere began to rise, until the observers could see a transparent tube inside it emitting a blue gas or liquid. This gradually filled the sphere, which expanded until it was as big as a 30-storey building, although the beings and their console panels remained the original size. Greatly alarmed, the trio left the area.
A circular area, 33 yards in diameter, was found destroyed in an onion field where the object had been seen to hover by other observers. More than 100 people in Puerto de la Cruz saw it as it passed over the island of Tenerife. Many other observers in the nearby outlying islands also called in reports.

1976 - By June,
George Bush, USA CIA Director, assembled TEAM B, a group of aggressive non-CIA persons, who declare that the CIA (Team A) has underestimated the dangers of a possible nuclear attack. Their report advised the development of an elaborate plan for "civil defense" and a post-nuclear government which would suspend individual rights and convey possession of all property to the state.
The contents of the report were criticized by Ray Cline, the CIA's former Deputy Director, retired CIA intelligence analyst Arthur Macy Cox, and the former head of the U.S. Arms Control and Disarmament Agency as blatantly manipulating CIA intelligence to forward the profit and power aims of those members of the "team" who were part of the military-industrial capitalist expansionist power structure.
On June 11, in follow-up to the report, President Gerald Ford signed "Executive Order # 11921", Emergency preparedness Functions, authorizing plans to establish government control of the means of production, distribution, energy, wages and salaries, credit and the flow of money.

1976 - During June,
Pope Paul VI publicly censures Archbishop Marcel Lefebvre for preaching against the Vatican II Council pronouncements.
The Vatican Secretary of State suspends the archbishop from office.
Lefebvre responds by preaching a sermon about the Vatican creating "confusion through bastardization." There was "a bastard rite (the Pauline Mass), bastard sacraments, bastard priests .... If the pope is in error, he ceases to be pope!"
Can any human be perfect? If separate humans seek humbly for the answer to or guidance about a matter, in a spiritual manner, The Holy Spirit, as the divine communicator for God, will provide both with the same wisdom and answer. Which one was in God's favour? Were either in God's favour?

1976 - On June 28,
Mayor Alfred Vellucci, of Cambridge, Massachusetts, convened a conference to discuss the safety of allowing biotechnology-bioengineering to be continued at nearby Harvard University.
There was concern that the gene splicing of human genes and bacteria, chimera, or other similar combinations, could result in the creation of a killer lifeform potentially capable of annihilating human and/or other life on the Earth. Concern also existed about the same results happening from an accident such as a spill of genetic material into a sink and its influence upon microbes or insects in the drain such that a mutation might be produced.

The recent introduction of "The Andromeda Strain" movie added to these concerns.
It was decided that continued experimentation with gene splicing would be banned for 6 months.
This marked the first major instance of a formal questioning of the right of the scientist, according to their level of status quo credentials, to act as the authority in making decisions which were capable of altering human history, constructively or destructively. No longer would academic and technical credentials automatically be assumed to be sufficient for social and capital support.
Some biotechnology scientists, obsessive by the nature of the scientific field and its competition for capital support left the USA immediately to work in other countries which had not imposed such restrictions. The attraction of the power, recognition and field dependency of some scientists placed ethical and safety concerns as distant considerations.

1976 - On July 6,
Mr. Yu G., a storekeeper in a cotton factory in the town of Nzara, near the edge of the central African rainforest in the southern Sudan, died. He became the first recorded casualty in the modern occurrence of a viral disease which would be named "Ebola Sudan".
Plantations of teak, fruit trees and cotton surrounded the town, which seemed to be on the threshold dividing rainforest from savanna grass. Most of the local people were of the Zande tribe. Rats and bats lived in the factory where Mr. G. worked and insects would have been carried in with the bales of cotton fibers. Beyond his family, few knew Mr. G.. The account of his death was simple: he went into shock; blood ran from every body orifice; he died.

Within several days, two co-workers, who had worked at desks near to his, began bleeding, went into shock and died with massive blood loss. One, a Mr. P.G., was a popular individual with a wide circle of friends and several mistresses. It would be found later that he had spread the disease to many of these contacts. This was a prolific virus: it passed through as many as 16 generations within each host and travelled from one host to the next by contact with the body fluids of an infected person - making any form of touching a potential pathway. Case fatality rates were 50%
Beginning with Mr. Yu G., the incidence of the disease progressed to co-workers, their family members and social contacts, to persons in nearby towns - to which some of the infected had innocently travelled. At least one infected person reached the Maridi hospital where the medical system seemed to contribute to the spread of this highly contageous and fatal virus. The symptoms began to be recorded.

Some of the dying stripped off their clothes and ran through the streets of the town, naked, and bleeding from every body opening. The infected became mentally disoriented, psychotic and withdrawn. Transportation routes through the area were few and infrequently travelled. There was a minimum of contact with more populous and distant locales. Most of the world would never know of the outbreak nor of its significance. Had an infected person reached a major city or a traffic terminis such as an airport, the disease could have been spread to millions of persons around the world in ever country within 6 weeks!
The other factor which helped to contain the epidemic was its effectiveness.
Because it resulted in the death of the human host so quickly, and the source region was so sparsely populated, there was insufficient opportunity for the disease to be more widely communicated: the hosts died too quickly. Also, the virus had to be communicated by contact; an airborne strain or mutation would have been unstopable. Several hundred individuals died - no exact numbers here - many of the witnesses were buried by others who became infected and died. It was enough to turn several villages into cemetaries.

1976 - During July,
Eduard Albert Meier confided to Louise Zinsstag, a European UFOlogist, how he had watched the recent Soyuz-Apollo space vehicle coupling from a flying saucer at a distance of 3 meters. He had photographs showing the back of a Russian cosmonaut, his helmet, and the three letters "COI" on his suit.
In another, the coupling maneuver was shown in action, much better than on TV.
Louise found Meier's educational level less than that of Adamski, of whom she had earlier written, and disliked his attack on the Roman Catholic church for their ignoring "witches"; she found him "the most intriguing man I have ever met. ... he is so modest and sincere ... his time in jail ... one look at his photos reassures me every time."

1976 - Also during July,
Herbert Runkel and a friend, Harold, went to a site where Eduard Meier had said he had shot 2 trees with a laser gun the Pleiadians had demonstrated to him. When the two looked at the trees they could not figure out how Meier had created these marks that ate through the thick tree bark unless maybe he had used some kind of laser gun.
That day, while Herbert and Harold were studying the two trees, Meier had gone off nearby to look for mushrooms. At the edge of the clearing rambled a thicket of waist-high bushes. As he stepped all the way back to the meadow to eye one of the trees, Harold spotted from the corner of his eye a twig on a small bush. Something had snapped it in two. Something had also charred both of the broken tips. When Harold bent to examine the twig, he saw another one broken a few inches from the first. It, too, was charred.
He called Herbert over and they discovered a perfectly straight line of broken twigs, each of them charred, that went through the tangle of thin branches, bush after bush after bush. It looked as though a narrow beam of intense heat had shot through the thicket. Herbert took pictures of the scene. The straight line ran through the bushes for perhaps a hundred feet. When later questioned, Harold commented: "You could recognize the line of fire by the cracked branches and the blackened tips. It was so thin you could not do it with a welder."

How could such an event have been a hoax?
If Meier had fired a bullet through the bushes the cracked branches would not have blackened tips. The painstaking use of matches to effect the evidence would have been impossible to carry out in a straight line. Even more, why would Meier go to such difficulty, with one arm, to fabricate evidence which few persons would ever see?
In usual fashion, most of the humans who visited Meier and investigated him did so with the expectation that because they had not personally lived the events, they could not be true, and, that somehow, if they were smart enough, they would determine how such a calculating set of hoaxes was devised. Humanity has grown so weak in its inflexibility to expand its awareness and its ability to be humble and open to the awe of the universe that it will surely dissipate into the dust of time, NOT by some foreign force but by the inflexibility which its leaders have conditioned throughout its cultures toward coping with reality.

1976 - On July 28,
A Magnitude 7.8 Earthquake struck a densely populated area of Tangshan, China, without warning.
Violent earth movements thrust persons 6 feet (2 m.) into the air and 20 sq mi (50 sq km) of the city of Tangshan were flattened. Four intense aftershocks added to the destruction and fatality numbers. Serious damage occurred in Peking, 100 miles (160 km) from the epicentre. More than 500,000 persons were killed.
Relative to the loss of 1,300 lives at Haicheng in 1975, when the quake was predicted by "scientific" instruments recording pre-shocks, this level of devastation humbled the Chinese pride and confidence in their ability to predict such occurrences. What was still largely ignored in this age of space travel and nuclear submarines was the fact that several types of geological formation have differing earthquake characteristics.
This was one of perhaps 88% of quakes which cannot be predicted by obvious pre-shocks.
Extrasensory and spiritual techniques did warn of the quake, yet they were ignored because they challenged the credibility of the new approach to material-biased science or were regarded as the ravings of insane or deluded persons. Pride killed 250,000 people - who could have been forewarned in enough time to be proactive, a common human experience.

1976 - During the summer,
Martin Sorge, having read about Eduard Meier and been encouraged by friends, travelled to Hinwil, Switzerland.
Sorge had a degree in chemistry and would publish a book on hypnosis.
Sorge was sceptical. He went to Hinwil with a girlfriend.
Sorge discovered that at the Meier house on Waldenstrasse the family was never alone.
Always there was one, two, or three of the curious, often many more, squeezed into the modest living space. "They stayed the whole night or they left in the middle of the night, or they came in the middle of the night. And the whole atmosphere there was overshadowed by Billy's mission.
He was like a dictator, he said what had to be done and that would have to be done.
Even the needs of the family were overruled by his ever readiness to be at Semjase's call. ... The man appeared to be at one with his story." Sorge sometimes saw Meier so lost in his thoughts he could not communicate for days; he seemed filled with a power that originated from without, and this power so possessed him he was able to put people under a spell.

Sorge remembered that there was always great excitement in the house.
People hurried about, bring Meier his gun, his hat, his boots, his walkie-talkie, his leather coat, preparing him to venture into the forest. Others brewed strong coffee, or warmed the engine of their cars. The ones to accompany Meier wondered if this might be the night they would see the beamship descend or glimpse the ethereal figure of Semjase.
The only nights that compared with these were the nights before publication of the pamphlet Meier called "Wassermannzeit, The Age of the Waterman", who was Meier himself. On those nights Meier would be up all night, sweating in the lighted room on the third floor, feeding and pumping the printing machine furiously with one arm, not resting or slackening his pace until the job was finished. "It was unbelievable to see him running around this machine working it with one hand. Real fast, real hard, like an obsessed person." As Meier in a frenzy cranked out the pages of the pamphlet, music boomed from 2 speakers, the same pounding beat, over and over, causing the walls to quiver, a tempo that matched his own slamming of the press.

Many inflated and dramatized stories were later expressed of how Sorge had obtained some charred colour slides from a fire whereas in reality, Sorge personally conveyed later that he had cultivated a relationship of friendship with Popi (Mrs. Meier) and in a moment of distress she had brought them to him. Sorge saw immediately that the pictures had been taken of models and quickly assumed that Meier was a fraud and that all his pictures and evidence were contrived. Sorge went on to contact various interest groups who conveyed his beliefs contacted other groups and so spread and expanded considerable disinformation.
At no time did Sorge approach Meier and ask him directly about the slides nor try to determine in a more scientific manner if what Meier had to offer was of value. He had gone to Meier's family, who welcomed him openly and honestly, with the intention to prove Meier a fraud. Having confirmed his belief, and in revenge for having to question his own beliefs, Sorge, with only disregard for Meier, he and others proceeded to spread what could only be honestly represented as gossip.

The true context of the events and the reality of the events was entirely different, and unknown for years after the damage was done.
Before Sorge entered the picture, Hans Schutzbach, the man who had driven Meier to many contacts and who had been with him the day the first sounds were recorded, had been shown the pictures in question by Meier. According to Schutzbach, he had been in Meier's study one day in the early fall of 1976 when Meier presented the slides and explained to him that he had carved a model of one of the beamships and then tried to photograph it.

In the pictures the model sat on 3 blocks of wood and lacked the lustre and refined appearance of the glistening beamships in Meier's other photos. Meier said he thought the photographs should be destroyed to avoid confusion, but Schutzbach had persuaded him to keep them. Schutzbach explained later: "I told him, these are an important document. You can't throw them away." Meier agreed and gave the slides to Schutzbach, who kept them safely in his apartment.
Then one day, Popi (Mrs. Meier) went to Schutzbach and asked that she be allowed to have the slides. A few weeks later, after fighting with her husband, she snatched up various documents, photographs, and slides, including those of the model, and threw them into the fireplace. Schutzbach said he had arrived at the house in time to see Meier himself stamp down the flames and then reach into the fire to save the slides.

The next time Popi fought with her husband, Sorge had been visiting Hinwil with his girlfriend, and in a rage, instead of setting fire to the surviving slides, Popi had given them all to Sorge. This had caused problems, said Schutzbach, because Sorge had later written to Meier and threatened to expose him as a fraud. When Popi denied knowing anything about how the slides had gotten into Sorge's hands, Meier had threatened her, she pulled out his gun, and he took it away from her. Then Popi had tried to kill herself with pills.
Sorge later admitted that "Billy's intellect and his spiritual level are much below the message he preaches, therefore it is not possible that he could have invented this. So this indicates he must have gotten it from some other source. I am certain that these are messages from a spiritual being unseen by us but seen by him, coming from another world, and he's capable of hearing these messages."

The damage had been done, thanks to intellectual revenge of the childish sceptic, the dramatization of the mass media, and the emotional gullibility (present in the absence of spiritual strength) of many humans and their educated obedience to mediums of authority such as the mass media and intense speakers and writers - who, are often reacting to some past traumatic memory.
In this and other similar spiritual contacts - whether between a more highly spiritual being such as Semjase represented or through prayer and meditation with the Godforce of the universe - the recipient receives communication which is totally correct. Often the human recipient must be sincere and honest in interest, open in mind and attitude to learning and new concepts, and possessing a strength of intuition. The latter, until melded with Spiritual Guidance and freed from the emotional reactions of hereditary and learned traumatic experience patterns - is often likely to make many errors if they follow their "feelings".

This is because their intuition is twisted by their response patterns to present information which is 180 degrees turned from the truth. In the worst of cases, a potentially gifted person learns from these experiences never to trust their feelings and is thrown into the position of obsessively rationalizing every decision in an attempt to avoid the errors of twisted intuition which result in errors and difficulties in everything they do. Fortunately, this hurdle, of having first to clear the signals coming to the person's consciousness from their intuition does not seem to have been a problem with Meier.
If one's intuition is strong, and clear, and one either solicits the spiritual knowledge by prayer/meditation, or, is approached by a more highly spiritual being - the next potential problem in human societies is coping with information which often seems contrary to intellectualized options and contrary to widely held social norms. There are frequently no mentors to guide the individual. The usual response is for the person to doubt their sanity, to fear the import of their response (rejection by others, depression over humanity's stupidity, elation and awe which can seldom be shared with others) and to abandon this direction and continue their lives at mediocre levels often accompanied by addictive response patterns.

If the self-esteem of the individual and their power of will is strong enough, or is built up by their experience of success in the accomplishment of many activities, the individual will be capable - more than many others - of coping with the ostracism, scepticism, personal ego challenge, and, popularity which an expression of their faith and experience brings forth.
The Pleiadians have tried to rectify the "original error" which one or more of their species made with humanity, by approaching humans with the offer to provide them with spiritual guidance and truth for the purpose of conveying this to other humans in the hope that this new information enable humanity on earth to reach a position of balance with the universe again. This balance was lost when humans lost the capability to synthesize vitamin C in their bodies and largely unable to supplement it in their systems adequately by diet.

This "Error" raised the average human sex drive which raised capacity which raised population density and expansion. Along with these developments came strain on material sufficiency and a requirement for order and authority to counter anarchy. Out of these all of humanity's inequities were strengthened, taught, and encouraged: anger from frustration; hatred from obsessive anger; greed from traumatic want; lust from traumatic loneliness; pride from material or power success; weakness of spirit from addiction spawned by traumatic abuse.
The Pleiadians are NOT perfect even as they are greatly more advanced spiritually; they admit this openly. They are not the only intergalactic species to have committed this sin of interbreeding with humans either.

Earlier, the Pleiadians met with humans, gave them new skills or knowledge to reduce the material insufficiency of the community and tried to impart spiritual values. This approach seemed appropriate at the time. Yet throughout the millenniums, the Pleiadians have never understood the deceptive basic biological transmutation which has resulted in humanity being one of the few species in the universe to be grossly destructive to itself and everything around it. Other intergalactic species have also tried to "redirect" humanity from its evil ways with other methods.
What the Pleiadians appear to be incapable of dealing with, perhaps because it must be the responsibility and choice of humans themselves, are the inequities of humanity. Encouraging people to deny a part of themselves, rather than to void it by bioengineering, has only resulted in the denied aspect becoming stronger and redirected into more negative responses. The Pleiadians expected humans to "recognize the truth of harmony, learn it, and, practice it". Yet with the biodegeneracy which humanity carries in its genes, it suffers to learn the principle and fails to practice it - driven instead by basic needs and the problems which acting on those needs present.

Meier was one of the humans chosen in this century to continue the experiment.
The Pleiadians feel spiritually saddened by humanity's failure to "get its act together" for they know that once AGAIN most of humanity will die in one or more catastrophes, some of which are the making of humanity. Meier was approached as a bright, open-minded boy and offered guidance. He had a choice: continue or walk away in fear. He considered this decision numerous times, and continued. He learned that if he followed the advice he was given, that whatever the outcome, it would be more positive than he could have ever imagined.
He also learned through his experiences that when he chose to ignore, fail to request advice, or, act against what was advised - the outcome was either a disaster or less than least desired. Such direct experience and consistency will eventually imbue the person with a great faith in the counsel or information which they are receiving. The direction of the process, with a goal unknown to the participant, becomes almost compulsive.

As one person phrased it: "If you are chosen by God to complete a task, whatever it is, would you say 'No'? You know it is a superior spiritual force because it is ALWAYS right. You know that it IS a spiritual force because anything asked of you to do cannot ultimately do wrong to anyone. You know it is important AND urgent because the more you know, the more you are aware that what you are doing may save the souls and/or lives of thousands or millions of people.
With those as givens, you place your own ego wants second with the affirmation that 'For me to be completely happy and content someday I must do what God wants me to do - NOT what I think I should do, or what someone else tells me I should do - that seems logical for me to receive happiness. Only the God which made me KNOWS and can guide me to that bliss.'" Without other unnatural skills, the human in such a situation can get into other problems with relationships.

Meier, who had been a loner for most of his life, now had hoards of people swarming into his home. Most frequently, they came unannounced, came for self-serving reasons, and came to disrupt the family life of the Meier's. Eduard felt obligated by his acknowledged purpose and the spiritual reflection of Semjase to welcome all and treat them as straightforwardly and innocently as possible.
Kaliope (Popi), his wife was an average human woman with 3 small children and a home to look after.
She loved her husband yet since Semjase had entered his life, everything else was secondary to Eduard. They saw less and less of him, in private, until, they never saw him in private. There were always these hoards of people invading HER home and treating HER like a servant - even less. She was baking not only for HER family but also for untold guests which seldom volunteered help or assistance.
Popi had not been approached from early childhood and guided to develop the spiritual skills and awareness that Eduard had, or, she had not felt strong enough within to follow that path. She was not interested in what the future had to bring or what the possibilities were for extraterrestrial life, or .... She was interested in her husband and her family and this new entry into Eduard's life seemed to leave her separated from the joys she and Eduard had experienced before Semjase and the beamships arrived.

Popi did not conceal her disappointment and frustration; few people in such a situation could. Through this period, she wanted the whole thing to end and for she and Eduard to go back to how they had been: together, close and happy. Of course, in anger, she would try to sabotage Eduard's activities. She must have felt desperate trying to regain contact with him. Conversely, Eduard had not developed identity and social management skills and until the household became a place of anarchy he did not set out rules, requests and policies for his visiting guests.
Eduard's focus was on getting his part done.
No doubt, at an earlier time, he had wanted a special woman in his life - when God provided her. Popi was that gift to him. Now it would be going back on his word if he didn't fulfill his end of the contract. As the effort continued and the personal problems arose, it was likely that he drove himself harder - to get the job done, to finish whatever was his duty - so he could return to a life of his own.

Humans cannot simply be beacons to others lighting the path to greater awareness.
It is one thing to learn to cope with the influx of spiritual awareness and advanced knowledge; it is another to know how to cope with the human responses of modern day society to that beacon. Gossip is the most common form of human communication. Gossip often communicates 80% fact and 20% lie.
Too often, the "lie" is based on fear, pride, exaggeration, anger, vengeance, misinterpretation, misinformation, greed or lust; it changes the context of the information. Changing the context can reverse the value of the information. Truth dies in the service of security by suggestion. Newspapers, journals, history books and religions constantly supplement and provide more examples of "gossip" for those who practice it. Humans are quick to talk, slow to think, and seldom listen. Biochemically, a vitamin C imbalanced system is the key.

1976 - On August 9,
"Luna 24" is launched from Tyuratam and will be successful in taking a third sample of lunar soil.
Taken from the southeast section of the "Sea of Crises", the sample proves to be very different from previous ones. The most common rock type at this site is a low-titanium, high basalt. It is described as silvery in colour with a brown tint.

1976 - On August 20,
The Viking 1 space probe was launched under the direction of the Pasadina, California Space Mission Control Centre.
Viking 1 is scheduled to land on Mars in 10 months and be joined by Viking 2 six months later.
Soil samples recovered suggested the presence of living organisms and a very active soil chemistry.
In a made-for-television series, "In Search Of", episode titled, "Martians", the suggestion was made that with the use of Planetary Engineering, a phrase meaning "manipulation by humans", the ice at the poles on Mars could be melted to form lakes. This was expected to make Mars more habitable for occupation by humans.

1976
"How Real is Real? - Confusion, Disinformation, Communication", a book by Paul Watzlawick, is published.
"This book is about the way in which communication creates what we call reality. ... the most dangerous delusion of all is that there is only one reality. ... It becomes still more dangerous if it is coupled with a missionary zeal to enlighten the rest of the world, whether the rest of the world wishes to be enlightened or not. To refuse to embrace wholeheartedly a particular definition of reality (e.g., an ideology), to dare to see the world differently, can become a 'think-crime' ....
... when one of the messages is garbled, leaving the recipient in a state of uncertainty, the result is confusion, which produces emotions ranging all the way from mild bewilderment to acute anxiety, ....
... the confusion caused by the different meanings of identical or similar words, "Burro", for example, means 'butter' in Italian and 'ass' in Spanish, and this is responsible for a number of weird misunderstandings - at least in the punch lines of Hispano-Italian jokes. Chiavari (with the accent on the first a) is a beautiful resort on the Italian riviera; chiavare (accented on the second a) is Italian vernacular for love-making. Needless to say, this provides the pointe for a number of somwhat raunchy jokes, all involving tourists who cannot pronounce Italian. ...

Considerably more serious is the frequent mistake committed by translators with the number word "billion", which in the United States and France means a thousand millions (10 to the 9th power) but in England and most continental European countries it means a million millions (10 to the 12th poer). There the U.S. billion is called miliardo, Milliarde , etc. ...
In a written language we stress words by underlining them or printing them in italics, but these are much clumsier devices than the rich nuances of spoken language - tonal stress, pauses, gestures. Written language is therefore often more ambiguous, especially if the words are not embedded in a sufficiently self-explanatory context. ...

All these mistakes could easily (and would be) made by a computer designed to translate from one language into another. ...
Throughout this book we have repeatedly seen that a state of disinformation, of uncertainty produced by events that do not fit into our definition of reality, has a powerful effect, compelling us to seek an order to account for the disturbing phenomena. ...

In the afternoon of your last day God calls you into His office and tells you what it was all about . ...
If the entire life of our planet, from its origin to the present moment, were represented by a 24-hour day, intelligent (human) life appeared within the last few seconds (of the 24 hours). ...

When faced with the everyday necessity of making a choice, any choice, how do I choose? If I really believe that my choice, like any other event, is determined by (is the inescapable effect of) all the causes in the past, then the idea of free will or free choice is an illusion. It does not matter how I choose, for whatever I choose is the only thing I can choose.
There are no alternatives, and even if I think there are, this thought itself is nothing but the effect of some cause in my personal past. Whatever happens to me and whatever I myself do is predetermined by something that, depending on my preference (oops - I mean, of course, depending on some inescapable cause of the past) I may call causality, the Being, the divine experimenter or fate.

If I really believe that my will is free, then I live in a totally different reality.
I am the master of my fate, and what I do here and now creates my reality.

[Spiritually, a person has the additional reality of being aware of the reality of the past and open to guidance as to the most constructive reality of the future. Such a "spiritual freedom" means that the reality of each individual is partially dependent upon the framework of a universe-wide orderliness and complexity, and, partially dependent upon the nature of one's awareness of alternatives and freedom from obsessional and compulsive patterns to effect a free choice.]

But every once in a while we are brutally reminded that our common sense is based not on wisdom but on that old recipe: If you don't look, it will go away. It may go away, especially not if 'it' is the painful, guilt-provoking consequence of a wrong decision. To be able to foresee the future is one of mankind's oldest, fondest dreams - ...
As we move with time, we constantly find ourselves at the line dividing future from past. Our most immediate experience of reality, the present, is merely that infinitesimally short moment at which the future becomes the past. It is also the instant when the properties of reality are somehow turned upside down: the future is changeable but not known; the past is known but not changeable.

[Spiritually, there is an additional reality provided by Guidance received from the Holy Spirit. That Guidance, the accuracy and relevance of which can only be confirmed by personal experience, provides the reverent individual with the best alternative available for the most constructive future experience. This process is not often chosen by humans, although always available, for it involves a high initial perception of risk.
That is, the Guidance given does not provide the individual with the satisfaction of knowing the material outcome of the choice recommended. To do so, would remove any need for risk, trust, and faith - and, induce the individual to become co-dependent and enslaved to the Holy Spirit. Initially, the inexperienced human faces the potential of making a "wrong" choice through deferrence to a mentor who does not reveal the end result of the action-inaction taken.
Within a human-based political system promoting materialism, the possibility of shame from such an unrationalised (not sanctioned by deferrence to human authority based knowledge) is frequently abuse, penalty, ostracism, judgement, blaming, humiliation, abandonment, criticism, rejection, intolerance, anger, and impatience. In the face of such a high suggestion for identity death within the dominant culture for simply "testing" a spiritual approach, is it any wonder that so few have the courage to do so?]

(The present) is both our most immediate and our most intangible experience of reality. NOW has no length, yet it is the only point in time at which what happens, happens and what changes, changes. It is past before we can even become aware of it and yet, since every moment is immediately followed by a new moment, NOW is our only direct experience of reality ....
But the perennial NOW is hardly ever perceived without the distortions and contaminations introduced into it by the (rational) mind from past experience and future expectations. ... Thus, to empty himself, to free himself from the involvement with (the "educated" superstitions, spurious reasonings, deceptions, misinformations of history sourced by self-biased institutions, of the) past and (all the former plus fantasy of the) future, is the goal of the mystic."

While the mystic seeks to experience reality without the perceptual garbage which clouds the view of most humans in all non-band organized and independent social structures, a Spiritual reality may still not be acquired. Such demands an openness to and a willingness to discover an unexpected and wondrous unknown.

1976 - On the evening of August 26,
The Allagash River Abduction occurred in the USA.
While fishing from a small boat on the river, after having left a large fire burning at their nearby campsite, 4 men noticed the approach of an aerial object which looked like a huge ball of yellow-white light.
It moved silently out of the trees from an initial distance of 150-200 yards.
When one of the men used a flashlight to signal at the object it began to approach and shown a beam of light down towards the water. Brothers Jim and Jack Weiner, Charlie Folt and Chuck Rack became alarmed and paddled as quickly as possible towards the shore. The object caught up to them, positioned itself directly overhead and moved the directed beam to shine on them.

The men next remembered walking on the beach with their campfire almost burned out and a lapse of perhaps 4 or more hours of time. Confused, the men spoke little further about the incident. Almost immediately some dramatic changes seemed to take place with the brothers who were the only ones to remain in contact with each other. While both had persistent nightmares, neither mentioned it to the other for almost 12 YEARS.
Jack thought he had acquired a brain disorder and Jim began to feel that he was hallucinating.
Jack, who had been a mediocre landscape painter became compulsively interested in mathematics, science and physics and he began to work these concepts into his drawings. Jim, who had been a clayworker-potter who made simple plates and saucers, began to mold lifeform and other objects, some of which resembled bipedal insect-like beings with large eyes.

1976 - By September,
Transfers of organized crime monies were being made worldwide by the use of gambling casinos.
Payments for narcotic drugs and illegal cigarettes being offloaded into the USA had to make it back to the Asian sources without raising suspicions in the Revenue Department.
Asian "gamblers" would visit the American cities of Las Vegas, Reno, Lake Tahoe - where they would spend a few nights at the gambling tables running up huge "losses". Their IOU's would be sold to West Coast banks, at a discount, who would in turn redeem them through banks in Hong Kong for service fees. The money was used by the newest, fastest, safest, cleanest and least cumbersome transfer method - electronic computer transfer with the use of key-tested telex transfers. Everyone in the loop made money. So much money, that separate bids were made to acquire the franchise in every casino for this sort of "currency exchange".
USA Federal Internal Revenue, the FBI, the CIA, and the Federal Reserve Board all became very familiar with the nature of these transactions from their investigations.

1976 - Early in September,
The Ebola Zaire Virus was first recorded.
It emerged in the Bumba Zone of northern Zaire, an tropical rainforest area drained by the Ebola River.
Villages were scattered through the district. Bumba is 500 miles southwest of Nzara, the site of a similar, though not as fatal recent virus outbreak. The loose band and tribe social structures of the people together with primitive communication patterns would prohibit the later determination of who first acquired the illness.
No possible analysis of the source of the virus could ever be determined beyond the possibility that it was first communicated to humans through the bodily fluids of some other living being whether recently dead or alive and infected. People in the region eat monkey meat; they are frequently exposed to many kinds of biting and stinging insects; abraisions, scratches and cuts are not rare occurrences.

The first recorded incidence arrived at the Yambuku Mission Hospital, a clinic run by Belgian nuns located north of Bumba, closer to the Ebola River. Yambuku was a small village composed mainly of the hospital, a church, a school, and a number of residences. Late in August, one of the teachers had borrowed a Land Rover vehicle and taken some friends on an exploratory adventure vacation to the north. They had crossed the Ebola River and near the Obangui River, they had stopped and bought some fresh antelope and monkey meat.
Later, the group bounced over the pathway back to Yambuku and feasted on the cooked antelope.
In the morning, the schoolteacher felt ill and went to the hospital for an injection.
Malaria is endemic in the region; medical supplies are difficult to obtain in sufficient quantities to meet the demand. Frequently, hypodermic needles had been used for injections to multiple patients with no sterilization between and few changes during each day. The schoolteacher received an injection. The next day he became the first known case of Ebola Zaire.

Ebola Zaire attacks every organ and tissue in the human body except skeletal muscle and bone. Seven proteins make up the Ebola-virus particle; their combination replicate throughout the human system of cells, eventually forming small blood clots in the bloodstream. These slow the circulation of blood allowing the clot masses of virus to coat the walls of the blood vessels and concentrate in each organ. These in turn replicate more and smaller clots which collect in the smaller capillary regions, effectively shutting off both blood circulation and oxygen from parts of the brain, liver, kidneys, lungs, intestines, testicles, breast tissue and the skin. Red spots develop on the latter, called "petechiae", which are subcutaneous hemorrhages.
Ebola Zaire seems particularly suited for combining with collagen, the main ingredient of the connective tissue which holds organs together. Organ cells begin to separate as if the organ were liquifying or dissolving into individual cells. Tissues coating the tongue, the back of the throat and the windpipe all die, loosen and tend to peel off with the slightest touch or in response to coughing. The skin becomes a blanket of white virus filled blisters and red hemorrhaging spots. Bruise patches form and begin to grow larger. As the various tissues begin to tear apart and the walls of organs and vessels begin to separate, blood flows out of the body through every opening and into the interorgan cavities.

With the reduced blood flow and the increasing density of dead and separated cells, organs, including the brain, become starved for oxygen and begin to fail. Even the lining of the eyeball falls apart such that the eye may be bled into and the victim becomes blind. Salivary glands, tear ducts, seminal vessicles, mucous membranes and nipples may all begin to drip blood, devoid of clotting factors and populated with small clots of virus. The red cells are invariably dead. A great deal of cellular damage is able to occur while the host is still alive because the disease is acting everywhere at once rather than resulting in a more acute stage of death brought on by the total failure of one organ.
Internal organs are each affected and rendered useless by the invasion of the virus.
Each begins to fill with clots of virus which may bloat it up while the connective tissues begin to separate, cracks may form in the organ, and the blood may both flow into the newly formed inner cavities as well as out of the organ. Each organ begins to fail, the nature of the effect being upon the dependency of the organ upon the supply of blood. Often the infected individual will go into generalized epileptic convulsions in the latter stage, as the brain dies. With the kidneys and liver failing, the blood itself becomes toxic with the normally excreted wastes of metabolism: this is one of the causes of the headaches in the earlier stages.

The threadlike Ebola virus is so ideally suited to the composition of the primate body that its replication within it leads partially to its downfall. While the fast replication quickly results in any contained cellular structure quickly becoming congested and bloated, it begins to coalesce into crystal-like formations in the centre of the cell which disintegrate on making contact with the cellular wall. With the feeding frenzy changing its focus from the inner cell components to the wall, the wall quickly disintegrates releasing the virus particles into the blood and into contact with new cells. Eventually, a droplet of the host's blood will contain a hundred million individual virus particles.
Death finds the body of the host already in a partial state of decay from the earlier cell deaths.
Very quickly, the corpse is transformed into a pile of bones and rotting mush. It is as if a "normal" death progression of the body has been accelerated by a factor of 100. To most observers, the totality and visual shock of the symptoms is adequate to inspire fear, paranoia, imagination, panic and horror. These defenses may each prove beneficial if effective in forcing the observer to withdraw away from the victim and raise caution in others. Without the presence of new hosts, the virus cannot spread and continue to replicate.

Ebola Zaire would be found to have different, though short, incubation periods in its human hosts before symptoms occur. In this incident, the environmental, social, and political factors all contributed to mask the origin of the virus. It might have been transfered in the meat of the monkey or antelope; from an insect bite during the trip; from contact before, during or after the trip; from the blood of an earlier patient who had received an injection but who would experience a longer incubation period; .... Whatever the origin, the injection procedure would be suspect in the rapidity of the human incidents.
Virus symptoms became manifest in 55 villages surrounding the hospital, almost simultaneously.
Those who had received injections died first; then their family members. Women, who are largely charged with preparing the dead for burial in the region, were disproportionately infected. Most of the nurses died followed by many of the nuns - beginning with a midwife who had delivered a stillborn from an Ebola-infected mother.

By late September, one infected nun, Sister M.E., was taken by a priest and another nun to Bumba, then by plane to Kinshasa, then to Ngaliema Hospital. Sister M.E. was placed in a private room. Within days, the Sister was dead. Shortly before her death, doctors inserted a needle into her upper abdomen and removed a quantity of her liver for use in a biopsy - a procedure denied by her religious order. After her removal from the room, the floor, chair, walls, and bed in the room were splattered and stained with her blood. No one would go into it for days after to clean it so it was locked shut. Rumours coming out of the jungle presented the untrue observation that whole villages were being wiped out. In reality, families were being targetted selectively.
Sister M.E.'s blood/liver sample was flown to a national laboratory in Belgium and to the English national laboratory at Porton Down, in Wiltshire. Karl M. Johnson, head of the American C.D.C. (Centers for Disease Control) Special Pathogens Branch in Atlanta, Georgia State requested "any little dregs to spare" of the nun's blood be sent from the English lab.

1976 - On September 7, at 4.30 a.m.,
A deputy sheriff in Huntsville, Alabama, U.S.A., while driving alone in his patrol car, two miles outside the town, a strange object in the sky "caught my eye".
He stopped the car to get a closer look.
It was two to three feet wide; red, blue, and green lights seemed to be on its periphery, and a bright white light occupied the centre. He could not count the number of lights because they blinked on and off rapidly. They shifted quickly from red to blue to green, while the centre white light stayed constant. The object did not move during the time he saw it.
Fearing ridicule, the officer did not immediately report the sighting.
When he heard that two other officers had reported a sighting 30 minutes before his occurred, he came forward with his report. The other officers had spotted a flying saucer 12 miles west southwest of his location.
These sightings occurred several days after the landing of the "Viking 1" and "Viking ll" space probes on Mars. The Redstone Arsenal at Huntsville, Alabama was the site of the development of space vehicles in North America, with the assistance of German rocket scientists and the Viking probes were developed there and monitored from there.

1976 - On September 9, at 4.00 a.m.,
The same deputy sheriff from Huntsville, Alabama, who had reported a sighting on the 7th observed a second incident. A reporter from the local radio station was at the police station when the report was called in. He went outside to see for himself and observed
"a very bright, pulsating star ... along its perimeter were multicolour, very minuscule, but equally discernable dots ... and these dots would flash on and off ... they were very small, but they were of clearly different colours ... orange, green, blue, and, most prominently, red."

The object seemed to move side to side.
It was at least twice as big as any star he had ever seen before.
The Space Centre and other authorities suggested that what had been seen was the planet Jupiter.

1976 - During September,
The first recorded outbreak of the Ebola Virus occured in Zaire, Africa.
Simultaneously, 55 villages near the headwaters of the Ebola River, in the northern rainforest, became infected. Nine out of every ten infected, died. In brief, the internal organs were destroyed, and the corpse deteriorated rapidly following death. It softened, and the tissues turned to jelly - even if you put it in a refrigerator. Any autopsy or dissection had to be done shortly after death, if it were to be useful.
The Ebola virus particle contains only 7 different proteins of which 7 are large molecules.
One of the proteins would become understood. Two of the proteins would still remain poorly understood in the early 1990s; the other four would be complete unknowns! Understanding the structure and function of most of the proteins would still be a mystery. Ebola proteins target the primate immune system in an explosive manner. The transmission of Ebola is also poorly understood, although it seems to travel by any bodily fluid escaping from the infected source. The incubation period appears to be from 3 to 14 days.

Ebola is like a predator against any primate.
It kills just as efficiently against monkeys as other primates - and it seems capable of easily travelling between the two. Ebola is distantly related to measles - it triggers a rash all over the body; also to rabies - it produces psychosis and disorientation; to the para-influenza virus - which produces colds in human children; to the respiratory syncytial virus - which can stimulate fatal pneumonia in a compromised body; and, to mumps.
The virus destroys organ tissue, connective tissue, muscle and skin.
The eyes of the dead may be found half open, glassy, bright red, with dilated pupils.
Parts of the brain which control facial expression fail, and, together with the loss of connective facial tissue, the expression left behind on the face is emotionless, staring.

Samples of Ebola Virus would find their way to the "United States Army Medical Research Institute of Infectious Diseases (USAMRIID)" at Fort Detrick, in the city of Frederick at the foot of Catoctin Mountain in Maryland State. That was the sanitized name of the facility, changed after President Nixon had signed an executive order in 1969 outlawing the development of offensive biological weapons in the USA.
Research would build on the paranoia, and reality, that an airborne mutation of the original Ebola could circle the Earth in 6 weeks or less, killing large numbers of people, or, simply emerging constantly, yet erratically, in small groups.

1976 - On September 19,
Reports were received from witnesses around Teheran, Iran.
At about 12.30 am, a strange light, like a helicopter hovering with a massive searchlight was reported. B.G. Yousefit, the Iranian Air Force officer who took the calls, ignored the first few, believing people were mistaking a star for something. On looking out himself, he saw a huge glowing light of immense brightness. He contacted Shahrokhi Air Base to launch a Phantom interceptor.
A Phantom took off at 1.30 am and headed north on an intercept course.
The object was estimated to be 70 miles from the plane, but was so bright that it was easily visible.
Lt. Jafari was the 23 year old pilot. He broke through the sound barrier on his way and as he neared he described the object as "half the size of the moon ... radiating violet, orange and white light". It shot away as he approached, reacting as if aware of his presence and pursuit. Jafari tried to catch up to it without success. Ground control suggested he abandon the chase and return to base.

Almost the second he agreed to return, Jafari radioed "Something is coming at me from behind.
It is 15 miles away ... now 10 miles away ... now 5 miles away ... It is level now. I think it's going to crash into me. It has just passed by, missing me narrowly." Shaken, Jafari asked to be guided back to Shahrokhi. He had apparently lost all instrumentation and communication for a while, regaining them only after he broke off the intercept.
Meanwhile, at 1.40 am, a second Phantom had been launched.
At a range of 27 miles from the object its in-flight radar locked onto the UFO and recorded a closing speed of 150 mph (although the jet was going much faster than that). Moments after the lock-on, the blip accelerated away. The Phantom went into afterburner to reach maximum speed but still was unable to close on the accelerating object.

Suddenly an object was "ejected" from the UFO and propelled straight at them.
It was like a ball of light, estimated 12 feet in diameter, and seemed too much like an air-to-air missile for the radar operator and pilot to be comfortable. Following instructions drilled into them during their training, they moved to launch a counter-strike: firing an AIM-9 Sidewinder infra-red homing missile at the UFO. At that precise moment, all power on the instrument panel was lost. Communications (internally and with ground control) vanished.
In absolute panic, the pilot made a "negative G" dive and tried to evade the "attacking missile".
It was no use, the ball of fire kept coming at them, changing course and closing within seconds to a 4 mile range. Then, in a perfect manoeuvre, the object cut inside the twisting jet, and, making a "U" turn, flew back into its parent craft.

Communications and power returned to the Phantom.
The pilot and radar man watched as a second object emerged from the UFO and travelled vertically down to the ground where it oozed light over the ground rather than landing. Meanwhile the larger UFO accelerated to several times the speed of sound and vanished within seconds.
The pilot took his Phantom down from 25,000 feet to 15,000 feet, keeping a focus on the glowing light near the ground. Eventually, the light extinguished, plunging the desolate terrain below into darkness. There was no point in remaining, but the object had been so bright that the pilot suffered considerable impairment of his night vision. It lasted long enough for him to circle Shahrokhi base several times until his eyes adapted. When the jet passed through 150 degrees magnetic on these circuits, it lost all communications. A civilian plane in the Teheran area at this time also reported the exact same problem.

1976 - By October,
The contact notes of Eduard Albert Meier had grown to over 800 pages and curiosity seekers, witnesses and serious knowledge seekers frequently lined up to his door in Hinwil, Switzerland. Describing what would happen when he was picked up for his talks with Semjase, the Pleiadian spacewoman, he noted several methods.
First, the silver beamship would appear and wait for him silently, hovering a hundred or two hundred feet off the ground. Then with the magnetic force field temporarily reduced, Meier would walk beneath the ship, and in a moment, untouched by any visible force, his body would begin rising. During the 5-second transfer from ground to sky, Meier could observe the landscape. Though Semjase sometimes landed the ship and met with Meier in the meadow, she now utilized the "anti-gravity" system more frequently.
A third, even faster, method was potentially dangerous: Meier could be dematerialized.
Meier called the method "teleportic" which worked only "if I am clear in my head and my heart."
Using it, the Pleiadians could break down Meier's molecular structure as he sat in his office, rematerialize him on board the ship, converse with him for an hour or two, then break him down a second time and reassemble him in an instant inside his office against, or at the edge of a road to be picked up by Herbert, Jakobus, or one of the others who might have driven him to the contact.

When he was "upped" by this method, Meier could feel nothing; the danger lay in the return, for Meier would again have to be clear in mind and heart. According to Meier, if the ship hovered high in the atmosphere ready to place him back on the Earth, and he jumped into the teleportic shaft without his head and heart being clear, he would "die for sure". "You see, they take me up in this way only when they have checked me over and over. And if there is only a very, very small point which isn't clear, they can't go to it. Then I have to go out on my bicycle or tractor or by car, and they take me up the other way.
The opening in the ship through which Meier entered with the anti-gravity method was round and located at the bottom. Meier had either seen it open or closed and did not know how it worked. The interior of the craft was like a central security observation room, to Meier, a former security guard. It had many television screens. The windows around the perimeter appeared to be glass and metal at the same time. As the ship entered different atmospheres they changed colour; in methane they would turn yellow; in other atmospheres, a shade of green, blue, or red. As the ship travelled through interstellar space, a scanning device had to be used for navigation, for in space nothing could be seen through the windows.

Near the ship's controls were three chairs, "like normal chairs, but you can use them as very comfortable seats, or two of them as beds." The beds were not like those on Earth, (they) .. wrapped around you. The extensive control panel was dominated by an array of "metallic blots" accommodating 1 to 4 fingers or the entire hand. The blots were in rows of different colours - silver, gold, red, blue, yellow - and were never touched; the hand or fingers were only placed lightly over them. Small wheels, switches, and rows of levers complicated the instrument panels. "The driving of the ships is very, very easy. There is a red knob, with a small leg, and with it you can do every maneuvering thing you like."
With the Pleiades nearly 500 light years from Earth, conventional Earth physics dictated that travelling at the greatest speed conceivable, a trip from the Pleiades and back would take 1,000 years. The Pleiadian propulsion system was capable of speeds many hundreds of times faster than light. Travelling between Erra and the Earth only took Semjase 7 hours.

When Meier asked the Pleiadians why they did not appear en mass to the public and contact the governments, they explained that
"The masses would merely revere us as gods, as in the ages past, or go off in hysteria.
That is why we regard it as prudent to make contact with individual persons only for a time being, to disseminate, through them, the knowledge concerning our existence and our coming to this planet. Furthermore, all earth governments are made up of human beings for whom power hunger and a thirst for profits are characteristic. They only want, under cover of peace and friendship, to occupy our rayships, to exercise absolute rule over the Earth. But they would not stop there. They would try to capture the cosmos, because they do not know any limits.
They, on the other hand, are not even able to create peace and friendship among the nations of the Earth, not even in their own countries. How then could they be capable of holding such might in their hands as our rayships? We have no interest in revealing ourselves to the general public. It is for the present advisable to maintain contact only with single Earth humans, and by them slowly to allow the knowledge of our existence and mission to become known, and to prepare others for our coming.

A further warning: It lies in the frame of evolution that Earth man must develop himself spiritually before he will solve certain scientific secrets. Even then, the danger exists, that the barbarous earth man, exercising his technical knowledge, might use it for evil-minded and power-hungry motives. He must remember that when he attains the necessary techniques, he cannot fly to other planets in the hope of that he would always be the victor. Other cosmic inhabitants are not helplessly exposed to attack from another race. There could follow deadly defeat for Earth humankind and complete slavery, which would equal a falling back to primeval times.
When earth man tries to carry his barbarous greed for power into the cosmos, he must consider his own complete destruction. This all must be told to the Earth beings, for their spiritual reason is still poorly developed. This was the unfortunate experience of a second race of humans in your own solar system. Their planet was lost in a vast explosion and nothing remained but the desolate asteroids whirling around your sun."

By Christmas of 1976, Meier had found a more secluded residence to move his family to: a 50 acre farm that straddled both Kanton Zurich and Kanton Thurgau, near the village of Schmidruti, 30 minutes from Hinwil, Switzerland. Above the farm, at the top of a hill undercut by the road, sat a single military building, used as a barracks, and an underground rocket silo, which occasionally opened its doors and pushed into view a huge conventionally armed missile. 75 people lived in and around the small village; most of them were farmers. Visitors impressed by Meier and his teachings were impressed enough to raise enough money to fund a mortgage on a farm worth about $250,000. Any land in Switzerland is very costly with good farmland worth even more. In April, 1977, Meier and his family moved from Hinwil to Schmidruti.

1976 - By October,
Louise Zinsstag, wrote a concluding letter about Eduard Meier to several friends and associates , revealing her earlier prejudices and her conclusions about this man of mystery for her:
"I had heard about this extraordinary man long before I met him.
In the sixties, I refused to believe the rumours that Eduard Meier was a true contactee.
I rather looked at him for one of those numerous transmediums pretending to be in contact with space beings and spaceships, getting messages through trance. But at last, in 1976, I met him ... because he had sent me some extraordinarily good ufo photos. I now had a feeling that ... I had wronged the man.
Instead of meeting a sickly, soft-spoken invalid, as expected, we found him to be a person full of vigour and strength, very self-assured with a fantastic story to tell. ... to hear Eduard Meier talk was a real shock. (took us to) a set of fresh (ground circles), ... listened to his story ... heard him explain his approximately 300 photographs ... some funny instinct was giving me a kind of negative pulse, ...

I saw that his features were worn out and hard, and that he had cold and tired eyes ... but his voice was good and strong and healthy, and so were his movements. He was very adept in using his right arm (he had lost his left in a bus accident some years previous). His smile was sometimes disconcertingly friendly and pure, ...
... he told me about his girlfriend Semjase from the Pleiades.
At first I felt much sympathy with her for having contacted a poor handicapped man like Meier.
She seemed to be giving him some extremely interesting information on space and astronomy and to take him for a ride occasionally. (Later, I saw) part of his writings, 15 conversations with Semjase. They proved to be rather disappointing to me ... sounded faulty ... rather frightening ....

In 1976, Meier started to attack ... every religion in the world ... refuting the need for worship or belief in God ... sounded so superficial ... I liked him less and less, and stopped writing to him. ... He always liked meeting new people and was always polite ... I never talked to him about my objections ... His story and his films never failed to impress me. ... I found out that ... he was haunted by bad childhood memories, by his experiences at school, in a children's home, in the Foreign Legion, in jail, in hospitals ...
Due to his lack of diplomacy, prudence, and understanding, he lost some very good friends.
As he said, they were replaced immediately by newcomers, but there were some among his former friends who betrayed him and did a lot of damage to his image without his being aware of it. A lot of them even faked ufo photos, doing pictures on a windowpane, showing them around and telling everybody how easy this was. ... I, for one, am sure that Meier's photos are no fakes. ... To fake such extraordinary films anybody would need a lot of money, but obviously, (he) is a very poor man ....
... in due time Eduard Meier's pictures would come under heavy attack, because it has been the fashion for the last 2 years to declare all close-up shots, showing clear details, as fakes, by those researchers who pretend to know the most and to do their research in a purely scientific manner ... helpful in a conspiracy of defamation."

Louise Zinsstag's opinions and concerns mirror those of many who have gone before. Despite the truth which she believed was present in Meier's witness, she felt uncomfortable with him because he did not support the status quo: the same status quo that hypocritically pays lip service to truth and individuality and honesty - and then castigates people who unabashedly express the truth of their experiences and dares to expose the dark truth that hides behind many of humanity's figures of power and authority.
It is an equal hypocracy that declares that intelligence and cultural sophistication are the apex of human civilization while at the same time revealing prejudices against others because they have a physical handicap or refuse to play the psychological games of manipulation, passive-aggressive communication, deception, and surrender for the purpose of acceptance and power.

It is the same status quo, imprinted (brainwashed) from the earliest age to revere and subjugate themselves as individuals to human-centred institutions which eventually are revealed for the reality of the abuse, neglect and misdirection they have provided.
In Canada, in the 1980's, the reality about the "Little Immigrants", the children used help colonize Canada, yet who were worse treated than farm animals was acknowledged. Beginning in the early 1980's, also in Canada, incident after incident of Roman Catholic priests and nuns having sexually and physically abused scores of children left in their charge for education would be brought to light.
The abuses had continued for many decades, supported by the status quo which refused to question the human given god-like status afforded to a human institution whose leaders had to be sent to alcoholic dry-out sanatoriums like the one that existed in Georgina Township in southern Ontario. The reasons for rejection of Meier also rose from this ability to criticize the authorities on the basis of their reality to those who were addicted to follow their authority without question, never learning from the history such institutions held regarding the downfall of spiritual teachings, the desecration of rights and freedoms, the perpetuation of strife and conflict.

The fact that Meier had disheartening experiences which he remembered, did not justify reference to him as someone traumatized by such experiences. Indeed his sensitivity suggested his degree of awareness; his concern, his spirituality; his lack of desire for power, riches and acceptance - his honesty. Meier was one amongst many sacrificed past or present as evidence of human iniquities.

1976 - By October 8,
The C.D.C. Special Pathogens Branch had received a sample of Sister M.E.'s blood from the "Porton Down British National Microbiological Research Establishment".
It had arrived in cracked glass tubes packed in dry ice in a box and been received by C.D.C. virologist Patricia Webb. The virus infested blood had flowed out of the tubes to dry in a gooey black mass into the box.
Ms. Webb, then married to Johnson, retrieved some of the blood and tested it against monkey cells. Signs of cellular destruction were almost immediate. Viruses don't normally die: they just hibernate until the next host becomes available.

1976 - During the year,
St. Augustine Volcano, Alaska, produces a major eruption.

1976 - By October 11,
Sister E.R., from the Yambuku Mission Hospital in northern Zaire, fell ill.
She began to display the same symptoms as Sister M.E., whom she had accompanied from Yambuku to the Ngaliema Hospital in Kinshasa. She also was put into a private room and began to die.

On October 11, Mayinga N., a nurse who had been caring for Sister M.E. at the Ngaliema Hospital began to have headache and fatigue symptoms.
Coming from a poor and ambitious family, and having recently won a scholarship to a college in Europe, she rationalized that the symptoms were unimportant. Worried that if she became sick, she might not be able to travel abroad, she took off a few days to rest - and prepare her travel documentation. She spent most of October 12 waiting in the lineups at the Zairean foreign ministry, coping with the government bureaucracy.

1976 - On October 13 during the day,
Clint and Jane Chapin of French Gulch, near Redding, California, U.S.A., were working at their mine, the Mary Hazel mine where they had worked for over 40 years, an open pit mine with 5 gold veins and some iron. This was the third of at least 3 incidents.
After the incidents, Jane had dizzy spells and Clint became more lethargic than in the past and began putting on some weight.
(see also October 30, 1969 and December 27, 1977)
They suddenly felt something like a heat wave.
Both became ill, vomiting violently. The sky was overcast.
They neither heard nor smelled nor saw anything peculiar. A nuclear fallout cloud from an atomic test in Nevada might have been linked.

1976 - On October 13,
Mayinga N., a nurse at the Ngaliema Hospital, continued to feel ill.
She took a taxi to "Mama Yemo Hospital", the largest hospital in Kinshasa.
Now her headache had become severe and a slight stomach pain had increased considerably.
Mama Yemo was the hospital of last choice for the city's poor; it would often be overloaded with admissions, most of which would be concerned with the endemic malaria or with diseases of malnutrition or with cuts and minor fractures. With her basic symptoms of unease - a headache, stomach ache and tearful eyes - she may have simply been eventually given an injection for malaria and cautioned about being quarantined. There would not have been any space at the Mama Yemo.
Whether treated in this manner here or later, Mayinga next took a taxi to University Hospital. There, the doctor's fail to diagnose anything different. In desperation and increasing intensity of pain, she returns to her own Ngaliema Hospital to be admitted as a patient. She is put into a private room. A South African doctor, Margaretha Isacson, cares for her while wearing a military gas mask. In the tropical heat, the mask becomes unbearable and she eventually removes it. Isacson provided ice cubes to ease the sore throat, Valium to lessen the anxiety, and several blood transfusions to replace the blood which dripped away.
Near the end, Mayinga's heart began to beat fast as it attempted to both maintain adequate blood pressure and stay together. She had become withdrawn, tired and blank of expression. She died of heart failure.

News of the virus and what it was doing to people had travelled through the city streets into the bureaucracy and across diplomatic lines into Europe by one vector alone: gossip. When the news reached the offices of the "World Health Organization (WHO)" in Geneva, panic had already set in for the people of Kinshasa. Fears of the spread of a worldwide plague with such gruesome killing potential encouraged European governments to consider quarantining Zaire.
In response, President Mobutu Sese Seko, the leader of Zaire, quarantined the Ngaliema Hospital and the Bumba Zone with soldiers and roadblocks and orders to shoot any who tried to escape. Riverboat captains refused to stop within the Bumba area. Soon, there was no communication coming out of the region.

1976 - On October 13,
Frederick A. Murphy, a C.D.C. virologist and a leading electro microscope photographer, placed a droplet of Sister M.E.'s blood on a small viewing plate , let it dry, and placed it in the microscope. Startled, he found the sample packed with virus particles that looked like string.
Murphy had helped identify the "Marburg filovirus" earlier and immediately suspected this to be it.
He immediately considered that the lab was necessarily "hot" (highly contaminated) with the virus.
He left the room just long enough to get a container of Clorox bleach and returned to scrub the laboratory thoroughly with it.

Murphy then informed Patricia Webb who contacted her husband and head of the C.D.C. lab, Karl M. Johnson. She summoned him urgently and when he arrived the three proceded to try and classify the shapes of the virus. At 112,000 times magnification, examples of the virus exhibited shapes that looked like snakes, pigtails, bends, loops at the end of a long curve, and others.
On October 14, Patricia Webb ran more tests on the Ebola Zaire virus and found that it was unlike the Marburg virus, or any other known virus. Having isolated it as a new disease agent, Johnson named it Ebola, folowing the convention of naming viruses after the first locale in which they are found.

1976 - On October 16,
Karl M. Johnson, virologist and head of the C.D.C., and his colleagues, left Atlanta, Georgia for the World Health Organization in Geneva, Switzerland on their way to Zaire and Sudan. One of the doctors panicked in Geneva and refused to go further. Years later, Johnson would acknowledge that he was "shit scared" of the virus. When he had reached Kinshasa, there was no news of the progress of the outbreak so anxiety mounted as to whether the virus might be or might have mutated into an airborne strain. Such a strain would be capable of "thinning" the human population by up to 90%.
Joel Breman, the other C.D.C. doctor travelling with Johnson, set out from Kishasa aboard the President's C-130 Buffalo troop transport, which had been outfitted like a palace - with a field exploration team bound for Bumba. The crew terrified, they urged the team out of the plane on landing and then immediately took off. With some financial incentive provided to the Bumba District local politician by the Belgian doctor on the team, several Land Rovers were made available and the team set off toward the Ebola River.

Historically experienced with smallpox epidemics, the village leaders had taken the precaution of isolating their villages with roadblocks until the epidemic was over. This made advancement through the area difficult for the medical team.
Reaching the Yambuku Hospital, the team discovered 3 surviving nuns and one priest together with several native nurses. All the hospital rooms had been cleaned up except for the worst: the obstetric ward. Infected mothers had given birth to infected stillborns there.

Surveilling the nearby villages, Breman came to the conclusion that the hospital had been a centre from which the epidemic had spread. Following a tradition learned from past smallpox epidemics, some of the villages had employed the strategy of a quarantine hut for the ill. A few were still dying; Breman believed that the worst had passed: most of those likely to die had already died. Electronic communications were not working so no word of the regional status could be broadcast out. About 10 days later, Breman and his team caught a passing plane out of Bumba.
During the first several weeks in Kinshasa, Johnson heard nothing from the field exploration team that had been sent out. Fearing the worst, he arranged for a floating hospital ship and had it moored in the Congo River. It was an isolation ship for doctors. The USA Army Airborne was alerted in the USA for the possibility of an airlift of the approximately 1,000 Americans living in or near Kinshasa at the time. The crisis never came. The virus seemed to mutate into a form no longer harmful to humans.

1976 - During this year,
Ronald Reagan, a former actor, TV pitchman, and California State Governor, became a serious candidate for USA president. It was the first time that such skills would be required to win in an election that now emphasized TV appearances and the new technological media.
The firm of "Spencer, Roberts and Associates", of California, was in the forefront of candidate packaging. Stewart Spencer worked for hard-pressed President Gerald Ford in the nomination race, against Reagan. On the Democratic side, Jimmy Carter had six advisors plus his wife directing his campaign. His ad manager spent more than $2,000,000 on TV spots placed in reruns of such well-stereotyped shows as those of Andy Griffith and Lawrence Welk.

1976 - By November,
UFO interest organizations were defeating their goal through pride, envy, greed.
The Aerial Phenomena Research Organization (APRO) of Tucson, Arizona, and the Mutual UFO Network (MUFON) of Sequin, Texas became the largest organizations in the wake of NICAP's closure. Both organizations had scientists and experts in their membership which lent prestige and credibility to their activities, yet most of the work was done by untrained interviewers and armchair educated researchers who poorly collected information on sightings.
Since the viability of each of many organizations at this time relied entirely on the dues brought in, ... stories, photos and reports gathered by one organization were often jealously concealed from others. Discoveries were concealed as long as possible within the membership and newsletters and forums became an avenue for attacking other groups or their representatives. Emotions ran high and accusations were sometimes vicious. Many ufologists, so-called, automatically dismissed contact cases, especially claims of repeated contact.

1976 - By November,
Har Gobind Khorana, and Indian-born biologist working at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT), and his group of researchers had put together a gene out of shelf chemical that actually did its work as a gene when implanted in a bacterial cell.
In 1970, Khorana had synthesized the first complete gene, a yeast gene involving a stretch of DNA 77 base pairs long. The new gene had the crucial "start" and "stop" signals that, in a living cell, make a gene function. The gene was a linear sequence of 199 components - all involving a combination of the 4 ingredients of the genetic code (AGTC).

This would open the field of biotechnology.
Now, new possibilities would exist: Viruses could be made more lethal, or, harmless; human genetic diseases might be eliminated; modified lifeforms might clean the Earth's environment of pests and toxins, or, magnify current problems; new lifeforms might assist in the survival of humanity, or, destroy it. Cell fusion of human and mouse cells had been pioneered in 1967.

1976 - On November 5, at 8.08 P.M.,
Near Grenoble, France, Miss M., who was watching television at her home in the town of Rives, near Grenoble, saw a bright light outside and called her father. Both went outside on the balcony and observed an intense white source crossing the sky at high speed from northwest to southeast, disappearing behind the mountains in the direction of Montane. The father stated that the light appeared to be spinning.
A French physicist was driving seven miles away, at the same time, near Voreppe on the road that goes from Rives to Grenoble. Looking up, he saw a luminous disk moving in the sky. Stopping the car to look, the disk, was brighter than the full moon, slightly flattened and had an angular diameter about 12 arc minutes (the full moon has an angular diameter of about 30 minutes).

The object was white in the centre and bluish-white at the periphery.
It was surrounded by an intense green halo about 2 or 3 arc minutes thick.
He observed it flying at a constant speed for about eight seconds after which it stopped, hovered for 3 to 10 seconds, then started again in a different direction, 30 degrees away from the previous course, at much greater speed. The whole sighting had lasted 20 to 25 seconds during which time there was no noise from it. The sky was clear, with no wind at ground level.
At about the same time, a witness near Vienna saw a slightly flattened sphere, whose light was similar to that of a very bright neon tube, with a fiery red-orange area underneath. It was flying at an altitude of 1,500 to 2,500 feet, at a speed of 3,600 mph, and had a diameter of between 6 and 20 feet. The halo reminding him, on further questioning, of the color produced by the combustion of copper salts. The doctor, a director of a nuclear physics laboratory, did not mention the sighting to his colleagues and it was only when the observation by Miss M. and her father was mentioned in the newspapers that he volunteered his own experience.
A bright disk was seen 2 hours later by the civilian air traffic control positioned in the tower of the military airport at Aulnat.

1976 - By December,
Ground Saucer Watch (GSW) of Phoenix, had analyzed 10 of Eduard Meier's photos for authenticity, sent to them by a West German researcher.
They reported:
"All of the pictures are hoaxes and they should not be considered evidence of an extraordinary flying craft." Nearly every method of photo fakery possible had allegedly been employed by one-armed Meier - a suspended model, the double exposure technique, the double print method. The West German UFO group immediately ceased their investigation of the Meier case and relayed this disinformation to many other interested individuals.

No one investigated the analysis techniques of GSW until 1978 when Jim Dilettoso discovered that this supposed scientific group using sophisticated computer techniques "were playing with toys", had no structured approach in their analysis, and were deceiving the public with grossly inaccurate conclusions. The public had bought the GSW disinformation for more than 4 years by then based on their educated reverence for anything "computerized".
Just as the reputation and validity of Meier's work was destroyed in the perceptions of many, so also was that of many others, needlessly - due to human pride, weakness for the dramatic, expectation of the negative, envy and greed. No spiritual approach here to investigation, let alone scientific.

1976 - By December,
Pope Paul VI had increased the number of cardinals in the Roman Catholic Church from 101 to 136.
He had increased the number from 70 to 101 in 1965.
Until that time the number had remained 70 according to an interpretation of the Bible.

1976 - On December 27 at 11.00 A.M.,
Clint and Jane Chapin of French Gulch, near Redding, California, U.S.A., were driving up the road with a dead parakeet they were taking to a site where they bury dead animals. There was ice on the highway, so Clint stopped the truck and walked ahead. Suddenly he yelled "Jane! Bring the gun!"
She jumped out and started running only to seem to hit an invisible wall.
She fell to the ground while Clint was thrown back against the side of the road, one arm pinned behind him. Both lost consciousness for about 15 minutes. When they came to they found they both had urinated. Clint remembers an object shaped like a half-egg standing up, which took off rapidly. They drove home immediately, feeling very sick and cold.
Clint suffered a dislocated shoulder and for a time afterwards he walked with his left arm noticeably out of place. He frequently held the arm later with his right hand. He and Jane had worked the Mary Hazel mine for 46 years, an open pit mine with 5 gold veins and some iron. This was the second of at least 3 incidents. After the incidents, Jane had dizzy spells and Clint became more lethargic than in the past and began putting on some weight.
(see also October 30, 1969 and October 13, 1977)

1976 - 1987
(+/-) Soviet Navy underwater studies - bright sphere (Arctic Ocean)

1976 - 1987
(+/-) Soviet Navy U/W studies - vertical cylinder (Pacific Ocean)

to NEXT file (28-1974-75.htm)
Return to PEAR Home Page (a-P-index.html)
Did you detect the deception? (Z30-ALT3-CON.htm)

The Reality of Human Space Travel (../spacemyth.htm)